Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2025-095 - 5/6/2025 - Approved (28)
FIE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 PROJECT No. 23180 0 Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 361.994.8900 November 11, 2024 CONFORMED PBG-946 SPECIFICATIONS 0001 01 SEALS PAGE A,' G' N 4f . i :1C MARTINEZ ARCHITECTSe '-- CfY 900 Rockmead Dr., Suite 250 Houston, TX 77339 •. 46A ,•* OF -------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------- v OF w �' fi * ,r REM ENGINEERING GROUP R09ER1 ENRI4UE r�aRTINEJ 2218 Basse Road $ San Antonio, Tx 78213 ` -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 'f 111 J 2�04 �1 u i 112024 OF X4 .. NRG ENGINEERING —.._..._.._.._..._.:_. ...:...........�._.— � iOSEAN M. RDDRIGUEZZ �J(-HNA 5 RI R III 5656 S. Staples, Suite 31290273 �. $ w- •»� • Corpus Christi, Rx 78411 # YORK ENGINEERING INC 9708 S. Padre Island Dr, MICHAEL-C YORK Suite A200 92�938 Corpus Christi, Tx 78418 Geis 11 MOVEMKR 2024m -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DataCom Design Group 9111 Jollyville Road, Suite 290 Austin, Tx 78759 END OF SECTION SEALS PAGE 1 of 1 00 01 01 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 000101 Cover Sheet 000107 Seals Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 30 01 Bid Form 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev4-2022) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) Part T Technical Specifications Division 01 General Requirements 01 41 00 Testing Laboratory Services (REM) 01 45 23 Testing Requirements(York) 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention (York) 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management & Disposal Division 02 Existing Conditions Not Applicable Table of Contents 00 01 10- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 03 Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 11 13.11 Concrete Forms (York) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 21 11 Reinforcing Steel (York) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete (REM) 033100 Epoxy Related Work 03 31 11 Concrete Structures (York) 03 35 11 Concrete Finishing (York) 03 39 11 Concrete Curing (York) 03 66 00 Concrete Polishing Division 04 Masonry Not Applicable Division 05 Metals 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06 Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 40 10 Interior Architectural Millwork Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 18 20 Penetrating Floor Sealer 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barrier 07 26 00 Under Slab Vapor Barrier 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 23 Manufactured Gutter and Downspouts 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Table of Contents 00 01 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 14 Conveying Equipment Not Applicable Division 21 Fire Suppression Not Applicable Division 22 Plumbing 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 22 07 00 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 08 00 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 14 00 Hangers and Supports 22 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 22 41 00 Plumbing Piping and Valves 22 41 10 Natural Gas Piping 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 23 05 10 Start of Systems 23 07 19 DX Piping System Insulation 23 14 00 Supports and Anchors 23 17 00 Motors and Motor Controllers 23 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 23 53 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 58 54 DX Fan Coil Unit 23 72 00 Air to Air Energy Recovery Ventilator Table of Contents 00 01 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section 23 86 00 Power Ventilators 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 23 88 85 Air Filters 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork 239100 Ductwork Accessories 23 99 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Division 26 Electrical 260100 General 26 03 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 23 06 00 Grounding 26 07 50 Identification 26 12 30 Wire and Cable 26 13 60 Raceways 26 14 00 Wire Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 32 13 Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator Sets 26 33 00 Automatic Transfer Switch 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices 26 44 10 Disconnects 265100 Lighting 26 74 00 T&D Rough-in 26 75 00 TV Rough-in Division 27 Communications 27 00 00 Communications 27 05 26 Grounding& Bonding 27 05 28 Pathways for Communication Systems 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways 271100 Communications Room Fittings 27 13 00 Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling 27 41 16 Audio Visual Systems Table of Contents 00 01 10-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 28 00 00 Electronic Security 28 02 01 Coordination Drawings 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 283100 Fire Alarm Division 31 Earthwork 311100 Clearing and Grubbing (York) 31 22 13.10 Site Grading (York) 31 22 16.13 Roadway Subgrade Shaping(York) 31 22 16.23 Channel Shaping (York) 31 23 16.13 Trenching(York) 31 24 13.10 Embankment(York) Division 32 Exterior Improvements 321100 Subgrade and Base Course (York) 32 11 13.13 Lime Treated Subgrade (York) 32 11 13.26 Cement Treated Subgrade (York) 32 11 23 Flexible Base Course (York) 32 12 13.19 Prime Coat (York) 32 12 16.13 Plant-Mix Asphalt Paving (York) 32 13 13 Concrete Paving (York) 32 16 13.13 Curb& Gutter(York) 32 16 23 Sidewalks (York) 32 16 33 Driveways (York) 32 17 23.13 Painted Pavement Markings (York) 32 92 19 Seeding (York) Division 33 Utilities 33 05 07 Trenchless Utility Installation (York) 33 05 10 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities (York) 33 05 76 Fiberglass Manholes (York) 33 14 13 Water Utility Distribution Piping (York) Table of Contents 00 01 10-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section 33 14 19 Tapping Sleeves, Valves, and Hydrants for Water Utility (York) 33 31 13 Wastewater Utility Piping (York) 33 42 11 Stormwater Gravity Piping (York) 33 42 30 Stormwater Structures (York) Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 Geotechnical Report: UES Report No. G124240, dated July 30, 2024; 28 pages END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 01 10-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACOR" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE gs 05/14/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT. If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Kelly Whittington NAME: RSC Insurance Brokerage,Inc. PHONE (972)645-5705 F X A/C No Ext: A/C,No: 160 Federal St. EMAIL kwhittington@risk-strategies.com ADDRESS: 4th Floor INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Boston MA 02110 INSURERA: Gemini Insurance Company 10833 INSURED INSURER B: Canopius US Insurance,Inc. 12961 Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction,LLC INSURER C: Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 16775 Addison Road INSURER D: Ironshore Specialty Insurance 25445 Ste 350 INSURER E: Addison TX 75001 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: CL2551458316 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ILTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS TYPE OF INSURANCE (MM/DD/YYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE F OCCUR PREMISES(Ea occurDAMAGE TO rence $ 100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $ 5,000 A Y Y VCGP033435 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'LAGGREGATE LIMITAPPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 X PRO ❑ 2,000,000 POLICY ElJECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ OTHER, $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ Ea accident ANYAUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ A OWNED SCHEDULED Y Y VCGPD33435 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED �/ NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY /� AUTOS ONLY Per accident X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 B EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE Y Y CUSXU23000105-00 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DED I I RETENTION $ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X1 PER STATUTE EORH AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N 1,000,000 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ C OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? NIA Y 0002090981 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ Pollution Liability Each Occurrence $1,000,000 D Y Y ICELLUW00163589 05/13/2025 04/01/2026 Policy Aggregate $2,000,000 Deductible Per Occ $5,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Certificate holder is included as additional insured as required by written agreement. Refer to the attached endorsements for Blanket Additional Insured, Waiver of Subrogation and Primary and Non-Contributory for specific policies. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Corpus Christi-Procurement ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. PO Box 9277 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78469-9277 ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ADDITIONAL COVERAGES Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date WC&Employer's liability WCEL Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium 1,000,000 1,000,000 1'000,000 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Blanket Waiver of Subrogation Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Increased employer's liability INEL Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Schedule Credit/Debit CRDBT Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$6.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Premium discount Sched XAssigned Risk PRMX Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$1.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Healthcare Network Option Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$8.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium [EEV Copyright 2001,AMS Services,Inc. Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 24 04 12 19 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 39 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part Schedule Name Of Person(s) Or Organization(s): Any person or organization you have agreed in a written and executed contract, prior to an "occurrence", that you would provide such person or organization a waiver of transfer of rights of recovery against others to us on your policy. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV—Conditions: We waive any right of recovery against the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make under this Coverage Part. Such waiver by us applies only to the extent that the insured has waived its right of recovery against such person(s) or organization(s) prior to loss. This endorsement applies only to the person(s) or organization(s)shown in the Schedule above. All other terms and conditions of this Policy remain unchanged. CG 24 04 12 19 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 1 of 1 Policy Number: VCGP033435 VE 09 73 04 20 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 45 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part The following is added to the Other Insurance Condition and supersedes any provision to the contrary: Primary And Noncontributory Insurance This insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other Commercial General Liability insurance available to an additional insured under your policy, but only if: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other Commercial General Liability insurance; and (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and would not seek contribution from any other Commercial General Liability insurance available to the additional insured. Coverage granted to an additional insured remains subject to all terms, conditions, limitations, and exclusions set forth in the endorsement form that conferred the additional insured status. In the event of conflict between this endorsement and an endorsement conferring additional insured status, then the endorsement conferring additional insured status shall govern the scope of coverage available to the additional insured. All other terms and conditions of this Policy remain unchanged. VE 09 73 04 20 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 1 of 1 with its permission Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 20 10 07 04 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 36 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSORS OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s): Location(s) Of Covered Operations Any person or organization when you have agreed All locations for which you have agreed in a written in a written and executed contract, prior to an and executed contract prior to an "occurrence "occurrence", that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II —Who Is An Insured is amended B. With respect to the insurance afforded to to include as an additional insured the these additional insureds, the following person(s) or organization(s) shown in the additional exclusions apply: Schedule, but only with respect to liability for This insurance does not apply to "bodily "bodily injury", "property damage" or injury" or"property damage" occurring after: "personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with 1. Your acts or omissions; or such work, on the project (other than 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on service, maintenance or repairs) to be your behalf; performed by or on behalf of the in the performance of your ongoing additional insured(s) at the location of the operations for the additional insured(s) at the covered operations has been completed; location(s) designated above. or 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. CG 20 10 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 20 18 12 19 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 37 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - MORTGAGEE, ASSIGNEE OR RECEIVER This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part Schedule Name(s) Of Person(s) Or Organization(s) Designation Of Premises Any person or organization you have agreed in a All premises for which you have agreed in a written and executed contract, prior to an written and executed contract prior to an "occurrence", that such person or organization be "occurrence." added as an additional insured on your policy. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended C. With respect to the insurance afforded to to include as an additional insured the these additional insureds, the following is person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to their liability added to Section III— Limits Of Insurance: as mortgagee, assignee or receiver and arising If coverage provided to the additional insured is out of the ownership, maintenance or use of the required by a contract or agreement, the most premises by you and shown in the Schedule. we will pay on behalf of the additional insured However: is the amount of insurance: 1. The insurance afforded to such additional 1. Required by the contract or agreement; or insured only applies to the extent permitted 2• Available under the applicable limits of by law; and insurance; 2. If coverage provided to the additional whichever is less. insured is required by a contract or This endorsement shall not increase the agreement, the insurance afforded to such applicable limits of insurance. additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. B. This insurance does not apply to structural alterations, new construction and demolition operations performed by or for that person or organization. All other terms and conditions of this Policy remain unchanged. CG 20 18 12 19 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 1 of 2 POLICY NUMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 18 12 19 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CG 20 18 12 19 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 2 of 2 Policy Number: VCGP033435 VE 05 86 01 16 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 30 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - LESSOR OF LEASED EQUIPMENT- AUTOMATIC STATUS WHEN REQUIRED IN LEASE AGREEMENT WITH YOU This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part APPLICATION OF ENDORSEMENT: (Enter below any limitations on the application of this endorsement.) Schedule Limitations on application of this endorsement: Automatic additional insured status does not apply to any person(s) or organization(s)from whom you lease crane or scaffolding equipment. A. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured any person(s) or organization(s)from whom you lease equipment when you and such person(s) or organization(s) have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person(s) or organization(s) be added as an additional insured on your policy. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an insured only with respect to liability for"bodily injury" or "property damage" caused in whole or in part, by your maintenance, operation or use of equipment leased to you by such person(s)or organization(s). However the insurance afforded to such additional insured: 1. Does not apply to the additional insured's sole negligence; 2. Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and 3. Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. A person's or organization's status as an additional insured under this endorsement ends when their contract or agreement with you for such leased equipment ends. B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, this insurance does not apply to any "occurrence"which takes place after the equipment lease expires. C. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following is added to Section III— Limits Of Insurance: The most we will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: 1. Required by the contract or agreement you have entered into with the additional insured; or 2. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations; whichever is less. This endorsement shall not increase the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission VE 05 86 01 16 Page 1 of 1 Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 20 37 07 04 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 38 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Location And Description Of Completed Or Organization(s): Operations Any person or organization when you have agreed in All locations and completed operations for which a written and executed contract, prior to an you have agreed in a written and executed contract "occurrence", that such person or organization be prior to an "occurrence." added as an additional insured on your policy. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" at the location designated and described in the schedule of this endorsement performed for that additional insured and included in the "products-completed operations hazard". CG 20 37 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc.,2004 Page 1 of 1 COMMERCIAL EXCESS CUS 9018 07 24 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies Insurance provided under the following form: COMMERCIAL EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART This policy is amended as follows: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, Section III. CONDITIONS, is amended to include the following: In the event of any payment under this Policy for a loss for which you have waived the right of recovery in a written contract entered into prior to the loss, the Company herby agrees to also waive its right of recovery. This waiver shall only apply with respect to a loss occurring due to operations undertaken as per the specific contract in which you waived the right of recovery This endorsement does not change any other provision of the policy. Includes material © ISO Properties, Inc., used with its permission. Page 1 of 1 COMMERCIAL EXCESS CUS90020724 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. AMENDMENT OF OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION - PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY FOR ADDITIONAL INSURED This endorsement modifies Insurance provided under the following form: COMMERCIAL EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART Section III —CONDITIONS, 8. Other Insurance is deleted and replaced with the following: a) This insurance is excess over and will not contribute with any "other insurance" whether primary, excess, contingent or any other basis. However, "other insurance" does not include: 1) Insurance specifically written as excess over this policy; or 2) Insurance held by an additional insured defined by "controlling underlying insurer" for which they are listed as a named insured, but only under a written contract between you and the additional insured: a. Requiring a specific limit of insurance that is an excess of the "controlling underlying insurance"; b. Requesting that your insurance be primary insurance and not contribute with that of the additional insured; and c. Executed prior to the loss In such case as described in sub-paragraph (2) above, we shall not seek contribution from the additional insured's primary or excess insurance for which they are a named insured for amounts payable under this insurance. Section IV— DEFINITIONS is amended to include the following definition: 7. "Other Insurance" means insurance, or any type of self-insurance, or any type of self- insurance or other mechanism by which an insured arranges for the funding of legal liabilities, which is available to any insured and covers injury or damage to which this insurance applies, other than: a) "Controlling Underlying Insurance" b) Insurance which is specifically purchased by you to be excess of the insurance afforded by this insurance. This endorsement does not change any other provision of the policy. Includes copyrighted material of ISO, Inc. with its permission Page 1 of 1 SIRONSHORE A Liberty Mutual Company IRONSHORE SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY 175 Berkeley Street Boston, MA 02116 Toll Free: (877) IRON411 Endorsement#6 Policy Number: ICELLUW00163589 Effective Date of Endorsement: May 13,2025 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction, LLC, DBA CHC Construction THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - DESIGNATED ENTITY PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CONTRACTORS ENVIRONMENTAL LEGAL LIABILITY(CELL) It is hereby agreed that the policy to which this Endorsement is attached is amended as follows: SCHEDULE: Designated Person(s)or Organization(s) City of Corpus Christi—Procurement 1201 Leopard St—City Hall, First Floor Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 A. SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to specify the person or organization designated in the Schedule of this Endorsement above as a person or organization you agree to include as an insured in a written contract, written agreement or permit, but only with respect to bodily injury, property damage or environmental damage arising out of your work. B. SECTION IV—CONDITIONS,Condition 16.Other Insurance, Paragraph a. is amended to include the following: With respect to other insurance issued to the person(s) or organization(s) designated in the Schedule of this Endorsement,this insurance will be primary and we will not seek contributions from any such other insurance. ALL OTHER TERMS,CONDITIONS AND EXCLUSIONS OF THIS POLICY REMAIN UNCHANGED. IE.END.CELL.007(0618) Page 1 of 1 " IRONSHORE . A Liberty Mutual Company IRONSHORE SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY 175 Berkeley Street Boston, MA 02116 Toll Free: (877) IRON411 Endorsement#7 Policy Number: ICELLUW00163589 Effective Date of Endorsement: May 13,2025 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction, LLC, DBA CHC Construction THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. SPECIFIED PROJECT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CONTRACTORS ENVIRONMENTAL LEGAL LIABILITY(CELL) It is hereby agreed that the policy to which this Endorsement is attached is amended as follows: This insurance applies solely as respects bodily injury, property damage, environmental damage, image restoration event, disinfection event or pre-claim event associated with or in connection with the following specified project: Specified Project: Project Name: Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Project Contract Designation: 6310 Project Location: 6226 Ayers Street, Corpus Christi,TX 78415 Project Owner: City of Corpus Christi Type of Project: Construction of 7,700-squarefoot pre-engineered metal building-addition of two apparatus bays,and a multipurpose space for Fire Department personnel training and storage SECTION V—DEFINITIONS, Definition 44.Your work, is deleted and replaced with the following: 44. Your work: a. Means: (1) Work or operations performed by you or on your behalf;and (2) Materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work or operations. b. Includes: (1) Warranties or representations made at any time with respect to the fitness, quality, durability, performance or use of your work;and (2) The providing of or failure to provide warnings or instructions. ALL OTHER TERMS,CONDITIONS AND EXCLUSIONS OF THIS POLICY REMAIN UNCHANGED. IE.END.CELL.008(0618) Page 1 of 1 SIRONSHORE A Liberty Mutual Company IRONSHORE SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY 175 Berkeley Street Boston, MA 02116 Toll Free: (877) IRON411 Endorsement#8 Policy Number: ICELLUW00163589 Effective Date of Endorsement: May 13,2025 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction, LLC, DBA CHC Construction THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED ENTITY - WAIVER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CONTRACTORS ENVIRONMENTAL LEGAL LIABILITY(CELL) It is hereby agreed that the policy to which this Endorsement is attached is amended as follows: SCHEDULE: Designated Person(s)Or Organization(s) City of Corpus Christi—Procurement 1201 Leopard St—City Hall, First Floor Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 SECTION IV—CONDITIONS,Condition 21.Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others To Us, is amended to include the following as respects the designated person(s)or organization(s) indicated in the schedule above: In the event of any payment under this policy, we waive our right of recovery against the person(s) or organization(s) indicated in the Schedule of this Endorsement and with whom the insured has waived its right of recovery prior to a loss. ALL OTHER TERMS,CONDITIONS AND EXCLUSIONS OF THIS POLICY REMAIN UNCHANGED. IE.END.CELL.009 (0618) Page 1 of 1 SIRONSHORE A Liberty Mutual Company IRONSHORE SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY 175 Berkeley Street Boston, MA 02116 Toll Free: (877) IRON411 Endorsement#9 Policy Number: ICELLUW00163589 Effective Date of Endorsement: May 13,2025 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction, LLC, DBA CHC Construction THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION - DESIGNATED ENTITY This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CONTRACTORS ENVIRONMENTAL LEGAL LIABILITY(CELL) It is hereby agreed that the policy to which this Endorsement is attached is amended as follows: SCHEDULE Name of Designated Person(s)or Organization(s) City of Corpus Christi—Procurement 1201 Leopard St—City Hall, First Floor Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 SECTION IV—CONDITIONS,Condition 3.Cancellation is amended to include the following: If this policy is cancelled by us for any reason other than nonpayment of premium or at the request of the first Named Insured, we will mail or deliver written notice of cancellation at least thirty 30 days before the effective date of the cancellation to the designated person(s)or organization(s)shown in the schedule above. ALL OTHER TERMS,CONDITIONS AND EXCLUSIONS OF THIS POLICY REMAIN UNCHANGED. IE.END.CELL.027(0618) Page 1 of 1 ,acoRO° EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE FDAT 05/E(14// 0252025 Y) THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW.THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. AGENCY PHONE (972)645-5705 COMPANY A/C No Ext: RSC Insurance Brokerage,Inc. 160 Federal St. Swiss Re Corporate Solutions America Insurance Corporation 4th Floor 160 Federal Street Boston MA 02110 4th Floor FAX E-MAIL kwhittington@risk-strategies.com Boston MA 02110 A/C,No): ADDRESS: CODE: SUB CODE: AGENCY 00307869 CUSTOMER ID#: INSURED LOAN NUMBER POLICY NUMBER Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction,LLC,DBA:CHC DIN2016209-00 16775 Addison Road EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE CONTINUED UNTIL Suite 350 05/13/2025 03/08/2026 TERMINATED IF CHECKED Addison TX 75001 THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: PROPERTY INFORMATION LOCATION/DESCRIPTION 6226 Ayers Street Corpus Christi,TX 78415 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. COVERAGE INFORMATION PERILS INSURED I I BASIC BROAD I I SPECIAL I X COVERAGE/PERILS/FORMS AMOUNT OF INSURANCE DEDUCTIBLE Limit of Insurance Per Occurrence $3,100,000 $10,000** **All Other Perils Deductible$10,000 per Occurrence/Windstorm 5%Deductible Per Claim Minimum of$50,000 Flood-Limit of Insurance $1,000,000 $25,000 per occ Earthquake-Limit of Insurance $1,000,000 $25,000 per occ REMARKS(including Special Conditions Project:Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Contract No.6310 Waiver of Subrogation is built in the policy form Additional Insured Endorsement BR00007 0522 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAME AND ADDRESS I ADDITIONAL INSURED LENDER'S LOSS PAYABLE LOSS PAYEE MORTGAGEE LOAN# City of Corpus Christi-Procurement PO Box 9277 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78469-9277 ACORD 27(2016/03) @ 1993-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Additional Named Insureds Other Named Insureds CHC Doing Business As OFAPPINF(02/2007) COPYRIGHT 2007,AMS SERVICES INC i I I 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. Contractor as Principal Surety Name:Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction LLC Name: The Gray Casualty&Surety Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 16775 Addison Rd P.O. Box 6202, Suite 350 Metairie, LA 70009 Addison,TX 75001 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1625 West Causeway Approach, Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mandeville, LA 70471 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: LA Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 (504) 888-7790 Telephone(for notice of claim): (504) 754-6711 Local Agent for Surety Name:David Grillo Award Date of the Contract: May 6, 2025 Address: Contract Price: $3,041,742.00 © P.O. Box 6202, Metairie, LA 70009 Bond Telephone: (201)463-4644 p Email Address: dgrillo@graysurety.com Date of Bond: May 15, 2025 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13- 1 Rev 5/2024 RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code,as amended,and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. If Contractor does not faithfully construct and complete said Work through the Warranty Period under its contract with Owner,and Owner invokes its contractual rights and declares Contractor in default,Surety shall promptly remedy the default, and at Owner's sole option,Surety shall: 1. Within a reasonable time(but not later than 30 days after Surety receives written notice of Contractor's default), with written notice to Owner,step into and assume the role, all rights and all obligations of the defaulting Contractor under the Contract Documents. Upon assumption of this role, Surety directly shall contract with a Completion Contractor hired/engaged by Surety to complete the Work. The selection of the Completion Contractor must be approved in writing by Owner. Surety shall be responsible for any and all costs incurred,up to the Bond Sum, to complete the Work;or 2. In the event Surety fails to contract with a Completion Contractor within 90 days of receipt of Owner's written notice of Default, Owner may,at Owner's sole discretion,select a Completion Contractor in accordance with Texas law to complete the Work. In this event,Surety shall pay Owner any and all costs,up to the Bond Sum,for Owner's selected Completion Contractor to complete the Work;or 3. At Owner's sole discretion,Surety shall pay Owner the estimated amount for Owner to execute a Project Completion Contract with a Completion Contractor,selected by Owner in accordance with Texas Law,solely to complete the Work. Surety shall pay Owner any and all costs,up to the Bond Sum,for Owner-selected Completion Contractor to complete the Work. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents incorporated by reference in this Bond. Performance Bond 00 61 13-2 Rev 5/2024 RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: �"(�• lJwvL.tlQ, Name: Keuit^\ JAetirA'c_kSy„,,, Name: Lauren K. Burkhart Title: MqV\4g; ,"(4 /►'e-M, )er-- Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: Email Address: bonds@risk-strategies.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13-3 RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Rev 5/2024 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO.GSA01700026 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction LLC Name: The Gray Casualty&Surety Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 16775 Addison Rd P.O. Box 6202, Suite 350 Metairie, LA 70009 Addison,TX 75001 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1625 West Causeway Approach, Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mandeville, LA 70471 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: LA Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 (504) 888-7790 Telephone(for notice of claim): (504)754-6711 Local Agent for Surety Name: David Grillo Award Date of the Contract: May 6, 2025 Address: Contract Price:$3,041,742.00 P.O. Box 6202, Metairie, LA 70009 Bond Telephone:(201)463-4644 Email Address: dgrillo@graysurety.com Date of Bond: May 15, 2025 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 5/2024 RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Princes I Surety Signature: ' Signature: dlakk&o(, Name: Keva- , Name: Lauren K. Burkhart Title: i`1 q1 KqG„ 4 m e-wk{ dr- Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: Email Address: bonds@risk-strategies.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 5/2024 RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 RSC Insurance Brokerage,Inc.dba Risk Strategies Company 05/15/202514:02 364899604763 THE GRAY INSURANCE COMPANY THE GRAY CASUALTY&SURETY COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY Bond Number:GSA01700026 Principal: Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction LLC Project: Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS,THAT The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty&Surety Company,corporations duly organized and existing under the laws of Louisiana,and having their principal offices in Metairie,Louisiana,do hereby make,constitute,and appoint:Laura Scholze,Courtney W.Judge,Lauren K.Burkhart,Melody Gist,Justin Silva,Brian Whipple,Rebecca Pena,Zachary Dixon,and Douglas Dixon of Hunt Valley,Maryland jointly and severally on behalf of each of the Companies named above its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact,to make,execute,seal and deliver,for and on its behalf and as its deed,bonds,or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,as surety,contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law,regulation,contract or otherwise,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of $25,000,000.00. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty& Surety Company at meetings duly called and held on the 261 day of June,2003. "RESOLVED,that the President,Executive Vice President,any Vice President,or the Secretary be and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings,and all contracts of surety,and that each or any of them is hereby authorized to attest to the execution of such Power of Attorney,and to attach the seal of the Company;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company now and in the future when so affixed with regard to any bond,undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty&Surety Company have caused their official seals to be hereinto affixed,and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 41h day of November,2022. SU RA,y C� / r//�JI�_� yJP�TY 6•SU� Q 1 S E A L j� By: Michael T.Gray Cullen S.Piske �e SEAL President President s�•. The Gray Insurance Company The Gray Casualty&Surety Company �y�•. � ..... ...... State of Louisiana ss: Parish of Jefferson On this 41h day of November,2022,before me,a Notary Public,personally appeared Michael T.Gray,President of The Gray Insurance Company,and Cullen S.Piske,President of The Gray Casualty&Surety Company,personally known to me,being duly sworn,acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney and affixed the seals of the companies as officers of,and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed,of their companies. rl L^.i (t l�.n; e 'r�er,iC L�I� 011orleans �iNotary PublicLeigh Anne Henican Notary ID No.92653 Notary Public,Parish of Orleans State of Louisiana Parish,Louisiana My Commission is for Life I,Mark S.Manguno,Secretary of The Gray Insurance Company,do hereby certify that the above and forgoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by the companies,which is still in full force and effect.IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Company this 15 day of May 2025 !" "44as--/`04-06 1,Leigh Anne Henican,/Secretary of The Gray Casualty&Surety Company,do hereby certify that the above and forgoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by the companies,which is still in full force and effect.IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Company this 1//5 day of May 2025 \�SURA,ypP �JP�,tY,d SURF SEALSEAL is .a ..... ..*. .bus c� o H U �NCaRPOP P�E� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction, LLC(Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 Project No. 23180 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Contact:Jodi Smith Schade I iodi@trarch.com PROJECT ARCHITECT Martinez Architects 900 Rockmead,Suite 250 Houston,Texas 77339 Contact:Justin Justin Myers�ustinm@martinez-architects.com@martinez-architects.com Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2-23180 Rev 12/2021 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson—Assistant Director, Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Building 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Josephi2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 300 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 330 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2-23180 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 3,041,742.00 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2-23180 Rev 12/2021 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5,the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on monies not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site;and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2-23180 Rev 12/2021 I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractorthat without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability:The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings,receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee.The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OFCONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2-23180 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Hue rta(May 29,202516:03 CDT) Jeff IEdmondspnay2, ss COT Rebecca Huerta 05/29/2025 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E 05/29/2025 City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2025-052 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 5/6/2025 Janet Whitehead(May 29,202513:05 CDT) RH/SB Assistant City Attorney 05/29/2025 ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR NaIh-'ii B,.—ih ten.z�14.25 CDT. (Seal Below) By: Nathan Brown Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Director person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 1677r; Addison Rd -R iita 35n Financial Officer Address Addison TX 75001 City State Zip 214-247-6632 P one Fax nbrown@chc-gc.com EMai END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2-23180 Rev 12/2021 CIVCAS, RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total PART A GENERAL $449,500.00 PART B CONCRETE $450,683.00 PART C METALS $14,150.00 PART D WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES $28,850.00 PART E THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION $26,672.00 PART F OPENINGS $144,835.00 PART G FINISHES $164,136.00 PART H SPECIALTIES $71,250.00 PART I EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS $8,450.00 PART J SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION $285,000.00 PART K MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,AND PLUMBING(MEP) $635,680.00 PART L COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY $51,000.00 PART M SITEWORK&EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS $452,805.00 PART N UTI LITI ES $85,588.00 PART O ALLOWANCES $110,968.00 Total $2,979,567.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total PART P ADD ALTERNATES $62,175.00 Total $62,175.00 PART A GENERAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al MOBILIZATION LS 1 $76,000.00 $76,000.00 A2 STORM WATER POLUTION PREVENTION LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 A3 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS LS 1 $325,000.00 $325,000.00 A4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LS 1 $45,000.00 $45,000.00 Subtotal: $449,500.00 CIVCAST RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM PART B CONCRETE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 131 CONCRETE FORMS AND LS 1 $322,905.00 $322,905.00 REINFORCEMENTS B2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 $113,178.00 $113,178.00 B3 CONCRETE FINISHING AND CURING LS 1 $6,800.00 $6,800.00 B4 EPDXY RELATED WORK LS 1 $7,800.00 $7,800.00 Subtotal: $450,683.00 PART C METALS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 METAL FABRICATIONS LS 1 $14,150.00 $14,150.00 Subtotal: $14,150.00 PART D WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 ROUGH CARPENTRY LS 1 $5,800.00 $5,800.00 D2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK LS 1 $23,050.00 $23,050.00 Subtotal: $28,850.00 PART E THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 WATERPROOFING,SEALERS,& LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 COATINGS E2 INSULATION LS 1 $19,672.00 $19,672.00 E3 METAL ROOF&WALL PANELS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 E4 SHEET METAL FLASHING &TRIM LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 E5 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 E6 SEALANTS LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 Subtotal: $26,672.00 PART F OPENINGS CIVCAST RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS LS 1 $32,024.00 $32,024.00 F2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD LS 1 $4,583.00 $4,583.00 DOORS F3 ACCESS DOORS LS 1 $1,500.00 $1,500.00 F4 OVERHEAD DOORS LS 1 $67,000.00 $67,000.00 F5 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRANCES LS 1 $25,463.00 $25,463.00 AND GLAZING F6 DOOR HARDWARE LS 1 $14,265.00 $14,265.00 Subtotal: $144,835.00 PART G FINISHES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 GYPSUM BOARD LS 1 $93,500.00 $93,500.00 G2 CERAMIC TILING LS 1 $21,000.00 $21,000.00 G3 ACCOUSTICAL CEILINGS LS 1 $21,600.00 $21,600.00 G4 PAINTING LS 1 $28,036.00 $28,036.00 Subtotal: $164,136.00 PART H SPECIALTIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 MARKER BOARDS LS 1 $350.00 $350.00 H2 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS LS 1 $21,000.00 $21,000.00 H3 TOILET PARTITIONS LS 1 $7,200.00 $7,200.00 H4 OPERABLE WALL SYSTEM LS 1 $36,500,00 $36,500.00 H5 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION LS 1 $300.00 $300.00 H6 TOILET ACCESSORIES LS 1 $5,150.00 $5,150.00 H7 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS LS 1 $750.00 $750.00 Subtotal: $71,250.00 PART I EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price CIVCAST RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM 11 RESIDENTIAL APPLIACES LS 1 $5,150.00 $5,150.00 12 HORIZONTAL POLYMER BLINDS LS 1 $1,650.00 $1,650.00 13 MANUALLY-OPERATED ROLLER SHADES LS 1 $1,650.00 $1,650.00 Subtotal:$8,450.00 PART J SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING LS 1 $285,000.00 $285,000.00 Subtotal: $285,000.00 PART K MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,AND PLUMBING(MEP) No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LS 1 $179,000.00 $179,000.00 K2 DUCTWORK LS 1 $45,680.00 $45,680.00 K3 CONTROLS LS 1 $28,000.00 $28,000.00 K4 ELECTRICAL PANELS LS 1 $65,000.00 $65,000.00 K5 LIGHT PICTURES LS 1 $98,000.00 $98,000.00 K6 GENERAL GROUNDING/BONDING LS 1 $45,000.00 $45,000.00 K7 SITE/UTILITY DUCTS AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $15,000.00 $15,000.00 K8 BUILDING RACEWAYS/CIRCUITRY LS 1 $61,000.00 $61,000.00 K9 NATURAL GAS PIPING LS 1 $15,000.00 $15,000.00 K10 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES LS 1 $2,000.00 $2,000.00 K11 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES LS 1 $35,000.00 $35,000.00 K12 DWV/WATER PIPING LS 1 $45,000.00 $45,000.00 K13 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING LS 1 $2,000.00 $2,000.00 Subtotal: $635,680.00 PART L COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price L1 GROUNDING AND BONDING LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 L2 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND LS 1 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 RACEWAYS CIVCAST RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM L3 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTING LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 L4 BACKBONE&HORIZONTAL CABLING LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 L5 ELECTRIC SECURITY,ACCESS CONTROL LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 &INTRUSION DETECTION L6 AUDIOVISUAL INFRAESTRUCTURE LS 1 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 L7 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE LS 1 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 L8 FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Subtotal: $51,000.00 PART M SITEWORK&EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK LS 1 $28,400.00 $28,400.00 M2 ROUGH AND SITE GRADING LS 1 $45,000.00 $45,000.00 M3 CLEARING, GRUBBING,AND STRIPPING LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 M4 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE LS 1 $48,000.00 $48,000.00 M5 CONCRETE PAVEMENT,ASPHALT LS 1 $322,905.00 $322,905.00 PAVING, CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAY,AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS M6 SEEDING LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 Subtotal: $452,805.00 PART N UTILITIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LS 1 $9,867.00 $9,867.00 N2 WATERLINES, PVC PIPES, PIPE AND LS 1 $43,500.00 $43,500.00 FITTINGS N3 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES LS 1 $25,642.00 $25,642.00 N4 TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES&HYDRANTS LS 1 $6,579.00 $6,579.00 Subtotal: $85,588.00 PART O ALLOWANCES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 01 BONDS AND INSURANCE LS 1 $79,468.00 $79,468.00 RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM 02 ALLOWANCE FOR UNFORSEEN LS 1 $31,500.00 $31,500.00 CONDITIONS Subtotal: $110,968.00 PART P ADD ALTERNATES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price P1 ADDITIONAL DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT LS 1 $25,397.00 $25,397.00 AREA PER SHEET C-201A,C202A, C203A, C204A,AND AS-100 P2 ADD ELECTRICAL ILLUMINATION TO LS 1 $9,768.00 $9,768.00 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE PER NOTES ON SHEET A-201 P3 ADD TO SCOPE OF RESTROOM TILE PER LS 1 $8,500.00 $8,500.00 SHEET 223A P4 FINISH APPARATUS BAY INTERIOR LS 1 $18,510.00 $18,510.00 WALLS WITH METAL LINER PANELS OVER BASE BID FINISH OF EXPOSED VINYL FACING OF PEMB INSULATION.REFERENCE SHEETA-301A Subtotal: $62,175.00 CIVCAST RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 03/05/2025 16:01:16 PM CIVCAS, RFB 6310 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 23180 Report Created On:3/5/2025 8:45:59 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans Drawings/Plan 2/17/2025 3:42:46 PM Invitation To Bid Invitation to Bid: RFB 6310 2/17/2025 3:41:15 PM Addenda Addendum No. 1 2/27/2025 5:48:34 PM 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: City of Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 Project Number: 23180 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: JOSEPH JOHNSON -Assistant Director, Construction Management Designer: Turner Ramirez Architects (AoR)/Martinez Architects(PA) By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Crawford Henri n& ford Construction, LLC (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Nat n (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Director (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 88-221-0391 Address for Notices: 16775 Addison Rd. Suite 350 Addison,TX 75001 Phone: 214.247.6632 Email: nbrown@chc-gc.com Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 5 Fire Department Resource Center-Phase 2-23180 Rev 8/2019 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 PROJECT No. 23180 Eta { pORpj 12 Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 361.994.8900 November 11, 2024 CONFORMED PBG-946 SPECIFICATIONS 0001 01 SEALS PAGE A,' G' N 4f . i :1C MARTINEZ ARCHITECTSe '-- CfY 900 Rockmead Dr., Suite 250 Houston, TX 77339 •. 46A ,•* OF -------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------- v OF w �' fi * ,r REM ENGINEERING GROUP R09ER1 ENRI4UE r�aRTINEJ 2218 Basse Road $ San Antonio, Tx 78213 ` -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 'f 111 J 2�04 �1 u i 112024 OF X4 .. NRG ENGINEERING —.._..._.._.._..._.:_. ...:...........�._.— � iOSEAN M. RDDRIGUEZZ �J(-HNA 5 RI R III 5656 S. Staples, Suite 31290273 �. $ w- •»� • Corpus Christi, Rx 78411 # YORK ENGINEERING INC 9708 S. Padre Island Dr, MICHAEL-C YORK Suite A200 92�938 Corpus Christi, Tx 78418 Geis 11 MOVEMKR 2024m -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DataCom Design Group 9111 Jollyville Road, Suite 290 Austin, Tx 78759 END OF SECTION SEALS PAGE 1 of 1 00 01 01 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 000101 Cover Sheet 000107 Seals Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 30 01 Bid Form 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev4-2022) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) Part T Technical Specifications Division 01 General Requirements 01 41 00 Testing Laboratory Services (REM) 01 45 23 Testing Requirements(York) 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention (York) 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management & Disposal Division 02 Existing Conditions Not Applicable Table of Contents 00 01 10- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 03 Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 11 13.11 Concrete Forms (York) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 21 11 Reinforcing Steel (York) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete (REM) 033100 Epoxy Related Work 03 31 11 Concrete Structures (York) 03 35 11 Concrete Finishing (York) 03 39 11 Concrete Curing (York) 03 66 00 Concrete Polishing Division 04 Masonry Not Applicable Division 05 Metals 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06 Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 40 10 Interior Architectural Millwork Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 18 20 Penetrating Floor Sealer 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barrier 07 26 00 Under Slab Vapor Barrier 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 23 Manufactured Gutter and Downspouts 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Table of Contents 00 01 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 08 Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 23 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors 08 31 13 Access Doors 08 36 00 Sectional Overhead Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087100 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazed Systems Division 09 Finishes 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceiling 099100 Painting Division 10 Specialties 101100 Marker Boards 10 14 00 Signage & Graphics 10 15 50 Toilet Partitions 10 22 39 Operable Wall System 10 26 00 Wall & Door Protection 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers& Cabinets Division 11 Equipment 11 30 00 Residential Appliances Division 12 Furnishing 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Polymer Blinds 12 49 20 Manually-Operated Roller Shades Division 13 Specialty Construction 13 12 00 Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings Table of Contents 00 01 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 14 Conveying Equipment Not Applicable Division 21 Fire Suppression Not Applicable Division 22 Plumbing 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 22 07 00 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 08 00 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 14 00 Hangers and Supports 22 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 22 41 00 Plumbing Piping and Valves 22 41 10 Natural Gas Piping 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 23 05 10 Start of Systems 23 07 19 DX Piping System Insulation 23 14 00 Supports and Anchors 23 17 00 Motors and Motor Controllers 23 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 23 53 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 58 54 DX Fan Coil Unit 23 72 00 Air to Air Energy Recovery Ventilator Table of Contents 00 01 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section 23 86 00 Power Ventilators 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 23 88 85 Air Filters 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork 239100 Ductwork Accessories 23 99 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Division 26 Electrical 260100 General 26 03 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 23 06 00 Grounding 26 07 50 Identification 26 12 30 Wire and Cable 26 13 60 Raceways 26 14 00 Wire Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 32 13 Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator Sets 26 33 00 Automatic Transfer Switch 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices 26 44 10 Disconnects 265100 Lighting 26 74 00 T&D Rough-in 26 75 00 TV Rough-in Division 27 Communications 27 00 00 Communications 27 05 26 Grounding& Bonding 27 05 28 Pathways for Communication Systems 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways 271100 Communications Room Fittings 27 13 00 Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling 27 41 16 Audio Visual Systems Table of Contents 00 01 10-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 28 00 00 Electronic Security 28 02 01 Coordination Drawings 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 283100 Fire Alarm Division 31 Earthwork 311100 Clearing and Grubbing (York) 31 22 13.10 Site Grading (York) 31 22 16.13 Roadway Subgrade Shaping(York) 31 22 16.23 Channel Shaping (York) 31 23 16.13 Trenching(York) 31 24 13.10 Embankment(York) Division 32 Exterior Improvements 321100 Subgrade and Base Course (York) 32 11 13.13 Lime Treated Subgrade (York) 32 11 13.26 Cement Treated Subgrade (York) 32 11 23 Flexible Base Course (York) 32 12 13.19 Prime Coat (York) 32 12 16.13 Plant-Mix Asphalt Paving (York) 32 13 13 Concrete Paving (York) 32 16 13.13 Curb& Gutter(York) 32 16 23 Sidewalks (York) 32 16 33 Driveways (York) 32 17 23.13 Painted Pavement Markings (York) 32 92 19 Seeding (York) Division 33 Utilities 33 05 07 Trenchless Utility Installation (York) 33 05 10 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities (York) 33 05 76 Fiberglass Manholes (York) 33 14 13 Water Utility Distribution Piping (York) Table of Contents 00 01 10-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 Division/ Title Section 33 14 19 Tapping Sleeves, Valves, and Hydrants for Water Utility (York) 33 31 13 Wastewater Utility Piping (York) 33 42 11 Stormwater Gravity Piping (York) 33 42 30 Stormwater Structures (York) Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 Geotechnical Report: UES Report No. G124240, dated July 30, 2024; 28 pages END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 01 10-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 Rev 0/2024 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: City of Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 Project Number: 23180 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: JOSEPH JOHNSON -Assistant Director, Construction Management Designer: Turner Ramirez Architects (AoR)/Martinez Architects(PA) By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Federal Tx ID No. Address for Notices: Phone: Email: Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 5 Fire Department Resource Center-Phase 2-23180 Rev 8/2019 00 30 01 BID FORM Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED QUANTITY AMOUNT Base Bid Part A-General(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Al MOBILIZATION LS 1 A2 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION LS 1 A3 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS LS 1 A4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A4) Part B-CONCRETE(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) 131 CONCRETE FORMS AND REINFORCEMENT LS 1 B2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 B3 CONCRETE FINISHING AND CURING LS 1 B4 EPDXY RELATED WORK LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART B-CONCRETE(Items B1 thru 134) Part C-METALS(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) C1 I METAL FABRICATIONS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART C-METALS(Item Cl) Part D-WOOD,PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) D1 ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING LS 1 D2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART D-WOOD,PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES(D1 THRU D2) Part E-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) E1 WATERPROOFING,SEALERS, &COATINGS LS 1 E2 INSULATION LS 1 E3 METAL ROOF&WALL PANELS LS 1 E4 SHEET METAL FLASHING &TRIM LS 1 E5 IGUTTERAND DOWNSPOUTS I LS 1 1 E6 ISEALANTS I LS 1 1 SUBTOTAL PART E-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION(Items El thru E6) Part F-OPENINGS(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) F1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES LS 1 F2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS LS 1 F3 ACCESS DOORS LS 1 F4 OVERHEAD DOORS LS 1 F5 IALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRANCES AND GLAZING LS 1 F6 I DOOR HARDWARE LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART F-OPENINGS(Items F1 thru F6) Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 2 of 5 Fire Department Resource Center-Phase 2-23180 Rev 8/2019 00 30 01 BID FORM Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED QUANTITY AMOUNT Part G-FINISHES(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) G1 GYPSUM BOARD LS 1 G2 CERAMICTILING LS 1 G3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS LS 1 G4 PAINTING LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART G-FINISHES(Items G1 thru G4) Part H-SPECIALTIES(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) H1 MARKER BOARDS LS 1 H2 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS LS 1 H3 TOILET PARTITIONS LS 1 H4 OPERABALE WALL SYSTEM LS 1 H5 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION LS 1 H6 TOILET ACCESSORIES LS 1 H7 FIRE EXINGUISHERS AND CABINETS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART H-SPECIALTIES(Items H1 thru H7) Part I-EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) 11 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES LS 1 12 HORIZONTAL POLYMER BLINDS LS 1 13 MANUALLY-OPERATED ROLLER SHADES LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART I-EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS(Items 11 thru 13) Part J-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) J1 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART J-PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING(Item J1) Part K-MECHANICAL,ELECTRICAL,AND PLUMBING(MEP) (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) K1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LS 1 K2 DUCTWORK LS 1 K3 CONTROLS LS 1 K4 ELECTRICAL PANELS LS 1 K5 LIGHT FIXTURES LS 1 K6 GENERAL GROUNDING/BONDING LS 1 K7 SITE/UTILTIY DUCTS AND RACEWAYS LS 1 K8 BUILDING RACEWAYS/CIRCUITRY LS 1 K9 NATURAL GAS PIPING LS 1 K10 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES LS 1 K11 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES LS 1 K12 DWV/WATER PIPING LS 1 K13 1ADJUSTING AND BALANCING LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART K-MEP(Items K1 thru K13) Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 3 of 5 Fire Department Resource Center-Phase 2-23180 Rev 8/2019 00 30 01 BID FORM Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED QUANTITY AMOUNT Part L-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) L1 GROUNDING AND BONDING LS 1 L2 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS LS 1 L3 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTING LS 1 L4 BACKBONE& HORIZONTAL CABLING LS 1 ELECTRONIC SECURITY,ACCESS CONTROL& INTRUSION L5 LS 1 DETECTION L6 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE LS 1 L7 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE LS 1 L8 FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART L-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY(Items L1 thru 1-8) Part M-SITEWORK&EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) M1 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK LS 1 M2 ROUGH AND SITE GRADING LS 1 M3 CLEARING, GRUBBING,AND STRIPPING LS 1 M4 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE LS 1 CONCRETE PAVEMENT,ASPHALT PAVING, CURBS, M5 GUTTERS,SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS,AND PAVEMENT LS 1 MARKINGS M6 ISEEDING LS 1 1 SUBTOTAL PART M-SITEWORK&EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS(Items M1 thru M6) Part N-UTILITIES(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) N1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LS 1 N2 WATERLINES, PVC PIPES, PIPE AND FITTINGS LS 1 N3 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES LS 1 N4 TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES, & HYDRANTS LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART N-UTILITIES(Items N1 thru N4) Part O-ALLOWANCES(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) 01 BOND AND INSURANCE AL 1 ALLOWANCE FOR UNFORESEEN BUILDING CONDITIONS 02 DURING CONSTRUCTION AL 1 SUBTOTAL PART 0-ALLOWANCES(Item 03 thru 02) Part P-BID ADD ALTERNATES(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) ADDITIONAL DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT AREA PER SHEETS C. P1 201A, C-202A, C-203A, C-204A, and AS-100. LS 1 ADD ELECTRICAL ILLUMINATION TO EXTERIOR SIGNAGE P2 PER NOTES ON SHEET A-201. LS 1 P3 ADD TO SCOPE OF RESTROOM TILE PER SHEET A-223A LS 1 FINISH APPARATUS BAY INTERIOR WALLS WITH METAL LINER PANELS OVER BASE BID FINISH OF EXPOSED P4 VINYL FACING OF PEMB INSULATION. REFERENCE LS 1 SHEET A-301A [SUBTOTAL PART P-BID ALTERNATES(Items Pl thru P4) Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 4 of 5 Fire Department Resource Center-Phase 2-23180 Rev 8/2019 00 30 01 BID FORM Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED QUANTITY AMOUNT BID SUMMARY SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A4) SUBTOTAL PART B-CONCRETE (Items Bl thru 64) SUBTOTAL PART C- METALS (Item Cl) SUBTOTAL PART D-WOOD, PLASTIC, AND COMPOSITES (Items D1 thru D2) SUBTOTAL PART E-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (Items El thru E6) SUBTOTAL PART F-OPENINGS(Items F1 thru F6) SUBTOTAL PART G-FINISHES(Items G1 thru G4) SUBTOTAL PART H -SPECIALTIES(Items H1 thru H7) SUBTOTAL PART I -EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS (Items 11 thru 13) SUBTOTAL PART J -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Item Jl) SUBTOTAL PART K-MECHANCIAL, ELECTRICAL,AND PLUMBING (Items K1 thru K13) SUBTOTAL PART L-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY(Items L1-L8) SUBTOTAL PART M -SITEWORK& EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS(Items M1 thru M6) SUBTOTAL PART N -UTILITIES(Items Nl thru N4) TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID(PARTS A THRU N) SUBTOTAL PART 0-ALLOWANCES (Items 01 thru 02) TOTAL PROJECT ALLOWANCES(PART O) SUBTOTAL PART P-BID ALTERNATES(Items P1 thru P4) TOTAL PROJECT BID ALTERNATES(PART P) Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 5 of 5 Fire Department Resource Center-Phase 2-23180 Rev 8/2019 .bus c� o H U �NCa HPOP P�E� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 Project No. 23180 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Contact:Jodi Smith Schade IContact:Jodi Smith Schade I jodiPtrarch.com PROJECT ARCHITECT Martinez Architects 900 Rockmead,Suite 250 Houston,Texas 77339 Contact:Justin Myers I iustinm@martinez-architects.com Agreement 00 52 23-1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 -23180 Rev 12/2021 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson—Assistant Director,Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Building 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Josephi2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 300 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 330 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 -23180 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 -23180 Rev 12/2021 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5,the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on monies not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site;and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.13 and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor;and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 -23180 Rev 12/2021 I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability:The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence,instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee.The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OFCONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 -23180 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2 -23180 Rev 12/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.1) are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of[37] rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after [37] rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Geotechnical Engineering Report, Prepared by UES,July 30,2024 SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: NONE ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises—Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 5. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $500,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- Required owned property ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 "General Decision Number:TX20240288 01/05/2024 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20230288 State:Texas Construction Type: Building Counties:Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). If the contract is entered . Executive Order 14026 into on or after January 30, generally applies to the 2022, or the contract is contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an . The contractor must pay option is exercised) on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least$17.20 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2024. I_ I If the contract was awarded on 1. Executive Order 13658 or between January 1, 2015 and generally applies to the JJanuary 29, 2022, and the contract. contract is not renewed or . The contractor must pay all extended on or after January covered workers at least 130, 2022: $12.90 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on that contract in 2024. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination,the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/05/2024 BOI L0074-003 07/01/2023 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 37.00 24.64 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 08/27/2023 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 29.50 8.94 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1)Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- I RO N 0084-011 06/01/2023 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 27.51 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 INSULATOR- MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER(Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METALWORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.20) or 13658 ($12.90). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO,the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers""that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification,which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate,which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA)governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based.The next number,007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100%of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state.The next number,0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year,to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory,then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes,then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.)that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.)All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Martinez Architects 281-800-1023 Turner Ramirez Architects 361-300-2316 Jodi Smith Schade, Project Manager Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AE P 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryl-i n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: As required by each technical specification section (Divisions 02-33). SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: As required by each technical specification section (Divisions 02-33). SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. A master plan has been proposed for the addition of two (2) apparatus bays and multi- purpose space for ongoing use of fire department personnel. The existing apparatus bay is to be modified to provide additional openings for drive-thru purposes. The new adjacent building will be Pre-Engineered Metal Building(PEMB) structure with overall height of 21'-3" and will have additional parking for engine storage and emergency vehicle use. The adjoining Resource Center will also be PEMB structure and will have total height be 17'-3",that will have space for additional multipurpose space, office spaces and restrooms with limited showers for training and emergency personnel. An additional drive path will be provided with parallel parking for individual (non- emergency)vehicles. A covered roof and concrete pad will be added between the existing apparatus bay and new resource center apparatus bays for ease of access. Existing Hydrant to be relocated based on new building access placement. Existing sewage line will be relocated to avoid new building being located above for ease of future access. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. N/A B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. Summary of Work 01 1100-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. Refer to drawings for Owner-Furnished Items B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 1100-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Lump Sum Bid Items described as "Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES 1. Bid Alternate No. 1: Alternate price to ADD the scope of vehicular concrete paving shown beyond the Base Bid scope of paving. Reference sheets C-201A, C-202A, C-203A, C-204A, and AS-100. 2. Bid Alternate No.2:Alternate price to ADD electrical illumination to the exterior signage detailed by D1 & D2 on Sheet A-201. See notes included with those details. Base Bid shall provide non-illuminated signs. 3. Bid Alternate No. 3:Alternate price to ADD to the scope of restroom wall tile from Base Bid (Sheet A-223)to the expanded tile scope shown on Sheet A-223A. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 4. Bid Alternate No.4:Alternate price to provide metal liner panels to deck as the interior finish of walls in Apparatus Bay, in addition to base bid finish, which shall be exposed vinyl facing of PEMB insulation system. Refer to sheets A-301 (base bid) and A-301A (alternate scope). 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance A—Bonds and Insurance 1. A maximum of 2%of the bid price to be used for the purchase of bonds and insurance required for the Project. B. Allowance B—Allowance for Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction 1. The sum of$170,000.00. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 September 16,2024 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum S%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A2—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. C. Bid Item A3—General Site Conditions 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. D. Bid Item A4—Temporary Facilities 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. E. Bid Item 131—Concrete Forms and Reinforcement 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. F. Bid Item B2—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. G. Bid Item B3—Concrete Finishing and Curing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 H. Bid Item B4—Epoxy Related Work 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. I. Bid Item C 1—Metal Fabrications 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. J. Bid Item D1—Rough Carpentry and Sheathing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. K. Bid Item D2—Interior Architectural Millwork 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. L. Bid Item E1—Waterproofing, Sealers, and Coatings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. M. Bid Item E2— Insulation 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. N. Bid Item E3—Metal Roof and Metal Wall Panels 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. O. Bid Item E4—Sheet Metal Flashing&Trim 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. P. Bid Item E5—Gutter and Downspouts 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Q. Bid Item E6—Sealants 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. R. Bid Item F1—Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. S. Bid Item F2—Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. T. Bid Item F3—Access Doors 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. U. Bid Item F4—Overhead Doors 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. V. Bid Item F5—Aluminum Storefront Entrances and Glazing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. W. Bid Item F6—Door Hardware Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. X. Bid Item G1—Gypsum Board 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Y. Bid Item G2—Ceramic Tiling 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Z. Bid Item G3—Acoustical Ceilings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. AA. Bid Item G4—Painting 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. BB. Bid Item H1—Marker Boards 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. CC. Bid Item H2—Signage and Graphics 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. DD. Bid Item H3—Toilet Partitions 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. EE. Bid Item H4—Operable Wall System 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. FF. Bid Item H5—Wall and Door Protection 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. GG. Bid Item H6—Toilet Accessories 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. HH. Bid Item H7— Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. 11. Bid Item 11—Residential Appliances 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. JJ. Bid Item 12—Horizontal Polymer Blinds 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. KK. Bid Item 13—Manually-Operated Roller Shades 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. ILL. Bid Item J1—Pre-Engineered Metal Building Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. MM.Bid Item K1—Mechanical Equipment 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. NN. Bid Item K2—Ductwork 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. 00. Bid Item K3—Controls 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. PP. Bid Item K4—Electrical Panels 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. QQ. Bid Item K5—Light Fixtures 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. RR. Bid Item K6—General Grounding/Bonding 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. SS. Bid Item K7—Site/Utility Ducts and Raceways 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. TT. Bid Item K8—Building Raceways/Circuitry 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. UU. Bid Item K9—Natural Gas Piping 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. VV. Bid Item K10—Surge Protection Devices 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. WW. Bid Item K11—Plumbing Equipment/Fixtures 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. XX. Bid Item K12—DWV/Water Piping 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. YY. Bid Item K13—Adjusting and Balancing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. ZZ. Bid Item L1—Grounding and Bonding 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. AAA. Bid Item L2—Underground Ducts and Raceways Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. BBB.Bid Item L3—Communications Room Fittings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. CCC.Bid Item L4—Backbone and Horizontal Cabling 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. DDD. Bid Item L5—Electronic Security, Access Control, and Intrusion Detection 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. EEE. Bid Item L6—Audio Visual Infrastructure 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. FFF. Bid Item L7—Video Surveillance 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. GGG. Bid Item L8—Fire Detection and Alarm System 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. HHH. Bid Item M1—Soils for Earthwork 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. III. Bid Item M2—Rough and Site Grading 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. JJJ. Bid Item M3—Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. KKK.Bid Item M4—Lime Treated Subgrade 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. LLL. Bid Item M5—Concrete Pavement,Asphalt Paving, Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, Driveways, and Pavement Markings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. MMM. Bid Item M6—Seeding 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. NNN. Bid Item N1— Reinforced Concrete Pipe 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. 000. Bid Item N2—Waterlines, PVC Pipes, Pipe and Fittings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 PPP.Bid Item N3— Fiberglass Manholes 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. QQQ. Bid Item N4—Tapping Sleeves,Valves, and Hydrants 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. RRR.Bid Item 01—Bonds and Insurance Maximum Allowance of 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. SSS. Bid Item 02—Allowance for Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. TTT. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 014119 Windstorm Construction Requirements 1.5 Record Data 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 1.4 Shop Drawing 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 03 31 00 Epoxy Related Work Record Data 03 35 11 Concrete Finishing Record Data Sample O&M Manual 03 35 11 Concrete Finishing Shop Drawing 03 21 11 Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.3 Record Data O&M Manual 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.3 Shop Drawing 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 1.2 Record Data 06 16 00 Sheathing Record Data O&M Manual 06 16 00 Sheathing Shop Drawing 06 40 10 Interior Architectural Millwork Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 07 1820 Penetrating Floor Sealer Record Data O&M Manual 07 1820 Penetrating Floor Sealer Shop Drawing 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Record Data O&M Manual 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Shop Drawing 07 25 00 Weather Barrier Record Data O&M Manual 07 25 00 Weather Barrier Shop Drawing 07 26 00 Under Slab Vapor Barrier Record Data O&M Manual 07 26 00 Under Slab Vapor Barrier Shop Drawing 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels Record Data Sample O&M Manual 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels Shop Drawing 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels Record Data Sample O&M Manual 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels Shop Drawing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Record Data Sample O&M Manual 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Shop Drawing 07 71 23 Manufactured Gutter and Downspouts Record Data Sample O&M Manual 07 71 23 Manufactured Gutter and Downspouts Shop Drawing 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Record Data Sample O&M Manual 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Record Data 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Shop Drawing 08 14 23 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors Record Data Sample 08 14 23 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors Shop Drawing 08 31 13 Access Doors Shop Drawing 08 36 00 Sectional Overhead Doors Record Data Sample O&M Manual 08 36 00 Sectional Overhead Doors Shop Drawing 08 41 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances&Storefronts Record Data Sample O&M Manual 08 41 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances&Storefronts Shop Drawing 08 71 00 Door Hardware Shop Drawing 08 80 00 Glazed Systems Record Data Sample O&M Manual 08 80 00 Glazed Systems Shop Drawing 09 29 00 GVpsum Board Record Data Sample 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile Record Data Sample O&M Manual 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile Shop Drawing Mockup 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceiling Record Data Sample O&M Manual 09 91 00 Painting Record Data Sample 10 11 00 Marker Boards Record Data Sample O&M Manual 10 11 00 Marker Boards Shop Drawing 10 1400 Si na e and Graphics Record Data Sample 10 14 00 Si na a and Graphics Shop Drawing 10 1550 Toilet Partitions Record Data Sample 10 1550 Toilet Partitions Shop Drawing 10 22 39 Operable Wall System Shop Drawing 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection Shop Drawing 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories Record Data Sample O&M Manual 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories Shop Drawing Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 10/2018 Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets Record Data O&M Manual 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets Shop Drawing 11 30 00 Residential Appliances Record Data O&M Manual 11 30 00 Residential Appliances Shop Drawing 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Polymer Blinds Record Data Sample O&M Manual 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Polymer Blinds Shop Drawing 12 49 20 Manually-Operated Roller Shades Record Data Sample O&M Manual 12 49 20 Manually-Operated Roller Shades Shop Drawing 13 12 00 Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings Shop Drawing O&M Manual DIVISION 22 Plumbing Record Data O&M Manual Plumbing Shop Drawing DIVISION 23 HVAC Record Data O&M Manual HVAC Shop Drawing DIVISION 26 Electrical Record Data O&M Manual Electrical Shop Drawing DIVISION 27 Communications Record Data O&M Manual Communications Shop Drawing DIVISION 28 Electronic Safety and Security Record Data O&M Manual Electronic Safety and Security Shop Drawing DIVISION 31 Earthwork Shop Drawing DIVISION 32 Exterior Improvements Record Data O&M Manual Exterior Improvements Shop Drawing DIVISION 33 Utilitites Record Data O&M Manual Utilitites Shop Drawing SECTION 014100-TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 PROCEDURE A. Testing Laboratory: An independent testing laboratory will be selected and furnished by the Owner to inspect and test the materials and methods of construction as hereinafter specified for compliance with the specification requirements of the Contract Documents and to perform such other specialized technical services as required by the Owner or his representative. All testing lab services shall be paid for by the owner. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING LABORATORY A. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329 "Standard of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction", and shall submit to the Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer, a copy of the report of inspection of their facilities made by the Materials Reference Laboratory of the National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of such inspections, and shall submit a memorandum stating steps taken to remedy all deficiencies reported by this inspection. B. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition, as published by the American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. The Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the local Building Official to perform inspection and certification services as an approved inspector of prefabricated construction. D. Testing machines shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. The Testing Laboratory shall submit a copy of certificate of calibration made by an accredited calibration agency. E. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 1.4 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE LABORATORY A. Attending Preconstruction Conferences: The Testing Laboratory shall obtain and review the project plans and specifications with the Architect and Engineer as soon as possible prior to the start of construction. The Laboratory shall attend preconstruction conferences with the Architect, Engineer, Project Manager, General Contractor, and Material Suppliers as required to coordinate materials inspection and testing requirements with the planned construction schedule. The Laboratory will participate in such conferences throughout the course of the project. B. Outline Testing Program: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for outlining a written detailed testing program conforming to the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents and in consultation with the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. The testing program shall contain an outline of inspections and tests to be performed with reference to applicable sections of the specifications or drawings and a list of personnel assigned to each portion of the work. Such testing program shall be submitted to the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer five weeks in advance of the start of construction so as not to delay the start of construction. It shall be the Testing Laboratory's responsibility that such program conforms to the requirements of the Specifications and drawings and falls within the budget for testing laboratory services. If the allocated budget is not sufficient to cover the services as outlined in the Specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Laboratory to notify the Contractor, Architect, Engineer, and Owner so that the Laboratory services can be modified accordingly prior to the start of construction. Furthermore, the Testing Laboratory shall monitor its expenditures throughout the course of the job and notify immediately the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer, of any significant deviation from the planned testing program and budget. C. Cost Proposal: The Testing Laboratory's proposal to the Owner shall contain the outlined testing program based on a unit price basis for tests and inspections and on an hourly basis for personnel. A total estimated price shall also be submitted. D. Cooperation with Design Team: The Laboratory shall cooperate with the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. E. The Laboratory shall perform the required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials as specified under each section and observe methods of construction for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 F. Inspections Required by Government Agencies: The Testing Laboratory shall perform all inspections and submit all reports and certifications as required by all government agencies. G. Notification of Deficiencies in the Work: The Laboratory shall notify the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor first by telephone and then in writing of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the work and other conditions not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. Reports: 1. Information on Reports: The Laboratory shall submit copies of all reports of inspections and tests promptly and directly to the parties named below. All reports shall contain at least the following information: a. Project Name b. Date report issued C. Testing Laboratory name and address d. Name and signature of inspector e. Date of inspection and sampling f. Date of test g. Identification of product and Specification section h. Location in the project i. Identification of inspection or test j. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable) k. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Copies: The Laboratory shall send certified copies of test and inspection reports to the following parties: a. 2 copies to the Owner or his representative b. 2 copies to the General Contractor C. 1 copy to the Architect d. 1 copy to the Engineer of responsibility e. 1 copy to the Supplier of the material tested 3. Certification by Notary Public: Upon completion of the job, the Testing Laboratory shall furnish to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer of responsibility, a statement certified by a Notary Public that all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 I. Accounting: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for separating and billing costs attributed to the Owner and cost attributed to the Contractor. J. Obtaining Product and Material Certifications: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for obtaining all product and material certifications from manufacturers and suppliers as specified in the Specifications. K. Limitations of Authority: The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the General Contractor and his Subcontractors. 1.5 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY A. Cooperation with Design Team: The owner shall pay for all testing lab services. The Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to the work, and to manufacturers operations. B. Furnishing Samples: The Contractor shall provide to the laboratory representative, samples of materials proposed for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified. C. Furnishing Casual Labor, Equipment and Facilities: The Contractor shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the Laboratory and otherwise facilitate all required inspections and tests. D. Advance Notice: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. E. Payment for Substitution Testing: The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory and pay for any additional samples and tests above those required by the Contract Documents as requested by the Contractor for his convenience in performing the work. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 F. Payment for Retesting: The Contractor shall pay for any additional inspections, sampling, testing, and retesting as required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Payment by Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish and pay for the following items: 1. Soil survey of the locations of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials, and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 2. Samples of concrete aggregates and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 3. Concrete mix designs as prepared by his concrete supplier or by his Testing Laboratory. 4. Concrete coring, tests of below strength concrete, and load tests, if ordered by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer. 5. Certification of reinforcing steel mill order. 6. Certification of structural steel mill order. 7. Certification of Portland cement, lime, and flyash. 8. Certification of welders. 9. Tests, samples and mock-ups of substitute material where the substitution is requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Owner,Architect, or Engineer to establish equality with specified items. 10. Any other tests when such cost are required by the Contract Documents to be paid by the Contractor. H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made. I. Tests for Suspected Deficient Work: If in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer any of the work of the Contractor is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall make all tests that the Owner, Architect, or Engineer deem advisable to determine its proper construction. The owner shall pay all costs if the tests prove the questioned work to be satisfactory. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-5 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 1.6 PAYMENT OF TESTING LABORATORY The Owner will pay for all Laboratory services for testing of materials for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will pay for testing and retesting of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and all other items as specified in these Specifications. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be performed by the Testing Laboratory shall be as specified in this Section of the Specification and the contract drawings, and as determined in meetings with the Contractor, Owner,Architect, and Engineer. 3.2 Foundation: 1. Field Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection of all piers for the project. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Visual Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall inspect the rebar to determine the following: 1. The bars shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman-like finish. 2. Deformations shall be of the proper sizes, shapes, and spacing as detailed in ASTM A-615. 3. The bars shall not have excessive rust and/or pelting. 4. The bars shall not have any unusual twists or bends. B. Identified Stock: Where job material is taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, is properly identified as to heat number and is accompanied by mill and analysis test reports, provided an affidavit is given from the Supplier to the Testing Laboratory that the materials conform with the requirements of the ASTM specification as listed on the structural drawings. In case of controversy, the procedure as stipulated below for unidentified stock shall be followed. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-6 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 C. Unidentified Stock: For all unidentified stock, the Testing Laboratory shall secure samples of the reinforcing steel bars at the time of inspection.The samples shall confirm to the following: 1. The sample shall include 2 bars for each ten tons or fraction thereof, of each bar size, heat number, and manufacturer being shipped. 2. The sample bars shall be a minimum of 24 inches in length and should be identical to the material being shipped. The Testing Laboratory shall tag each of the steel bundles with the Laboratory identification tag and appropriately mark the samples corresponding to the steel being inspected and shipped. The fabricator will supply shipping lists showing the weight of each bar size in the shipment. 3.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND POURED IN PLACE CONCRETE A. Tests of Portland Cement: Portland Cement shall be tested by the Testing Laboratory for compliance with the requirements of ASTM C150. 1. Mill Certificates: Mill certificates certifying that the cement has been tested and meets the requirements of the Specifications will be acceptable as test results, provided the cement proposed for use can be identified with test lots. Mill certificates shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to use of any such material. 2. Retesting: Retesting of cement will be required if: a. In the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, the cement has been damaged in storage or transit or is any way defective. b. The cement has been in storage at the mixing site for over 30 days. B. Test of Aggregates: 1. The Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall verify that concrete aggregates proposed for use conform to the following specification: a. ASTM C33 "Specification for Concrete Aggregates" Suppliers record of tests run on the proposed materials will be adequate provided a written affidavit is furnished as a shop drawing submittal. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-7 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 C. Concrete Mix Designs: The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer and Testing Laboratory at least 15 days prior to the start of construction, concrete mix designs for each class of concrete indicated on the structural drawings and in the Specifications. The Contractor shall not begin work until the applicable mix design has been approved. 1. The Contractor acting in conjunction with his Concrete Supplier and the Testing Laboratory shall submit in writing with his mix designs, whether the concrete is to be proportioned by either of the following methods as outlined in ACI 318: a. Field Experience Method b. Laboratory Trial Batch Method When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301 and ACI 211. When Laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, the procedure as outlined in ACI 318 shall be followed. Prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39. 2. Required types of concrete and compressive strengths shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings and as specified in the various sections of the Specifications. 3. All mix designs shall state the following information: a. Mix design number or code designation by which the Contractor shall order the concrete from the Supplier b. Structural member for which the concrete is designed (i.e. columns, piers, etc.) C. Type of concrete (normal weight). d. 28 day compressive strength e. Aggregate type, source, size, gradation,fineness modulus f. Cement type and brand g. Fly ash type and brand (if any) h. Admixtures including air entrainment, water reducers, accelerators, and retarders i. Slump j. Proportions of each material used k. Water cement ratio and maximum allowable water content I. Method by which the concrete is intended to be placed (bucket, chute, or pump) 4. Concrete Suppliers Record of Quality Control: The concrete supplier's past record of quality control shall be used in the design of the concrete mixes to determine the amount by which the average concrete strength fcr should exceed the specified strength f'c as outlined in ACI 318. If a TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-8 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 suitable record of test results is not available, the average strength must exceed the design strength by 1200 PSI as specified in ACI 318. After sufficient data becomes available from the job, the statistical methods of ACI 214 may be used to reduce the amount by which the average strength must exceed f'c as outlined in ACI 318. 5. Admixtures: a. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and Testing Laboratory. b. Quantities of admixtures to be used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. C. Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments. d. Air entraining admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete" ASTM C260. e. Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water reducing and retarding admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" ASTM C494. f. Fly ash or other pozzolons, used as admixtures, shall conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolons for use in Portland Cement Concrete" ASTM C618. Obtain mill test reports for approval. Maximum flyash content shall be 20%. g. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 6. Slump Limits: Unless shown otherwise on the structural drawings, proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: a. Ramps and Sloping surfaces- 3" ± 1" b. Foundation concrete -4-1/2" ± 1-1/2" C. All other concrete -4" ± 1" When increased workability, pumpability, lower water-cement ratio, shrinkage reduction, or permeability reduction is required, then a superplasticizer admixture shall be considered for use. The maximum slump with the use of superplasticizers shall be 8 inches unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 014100-9 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 Any deviation from these values (such as concrete design to be pumped) shall be submitted to the Engineer and Testing Laboratory for approval. 7. Adjustments of Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Such mix design adjustments shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Any adjustments in approved mix designs including changes in admixtures shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer and Testing Laboratory for approval prior to field use. 8. Shrinkage: All concrete shall be proportioned for a maximum allowable unit shrinkage of 0.03%at 28 days as determined by ASTM C 157. 9. Chloride Ion Content: A written submittal shall be made with each mix design proposed for use on the project that the chloride ion content from all ingredients including admixtures will not exceed the limits specified in the Cast-In-Place section of the Specifications. D. Concrete Test Cylinders by the Testing Laboratory: 1. Molding and Testing: Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and Laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C31 "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Cylinders in the Field" and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 "Method of Testing for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens". 2. Field Samples: Field samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172 "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete". 3. Frequency of Testing: Each set of test cylinders shall consist of a minimum of four standard test cylinders. A set of test cylinders shall be made according to the following frequency guidelines: a. One set for each class of concrete taken not less than once a day. b. Mat Foundation: One set for each 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof. C. All Other Concrete: A minimum of one set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-10 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 d. No more than one set of cylinders at a time shall be made from any single truck. e. If the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing as specified above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used. f. Frequencies assume one batch plant will be used for each pour. If more than one batch plant is used, the frequencies cited above shall apply for each plant used. The cylinders shall be numbered, dated, and the point of concrete placement in the building recorded. Of the four cylinders per set break one at seven days, two at 28 days, and one automatically at 56 days only if either 28 day cylinder break is below required strength. 4. Cylinder Storage Box: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a protected concrete cylinder storage box at a point on the jobsite mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory. 5. Transporting Cylinders: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for transporting the cylinders to the Laboratory in a protected environment such that no damage or ill effect will occur to the concrete cylinders. 6. Information on Concrete Test Reports: The Testing Laboratory shall make and distribute concrete test reports after each job cylinder is broken. Such reports shall contain the following information: a. Truck number and ticket number b. Concrete Batch Plant C. Mix design number d. Accurate location of pour in the structure e. Strength requirement f. Date cylinders made and broken g. Technician making cylinders h. Concrete temperature at placing i. Air temperature at point of placement in the structure j. Amount of water added to the truck at the batch plant and at the site and whether it exceeds the amount allowed by the mix design k. Slump I. Unit weight M. Air content TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-11 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 n. Cylinder compressive strengths with type of failure if concrete does not meet Specification requirements. Seven day breaks are to be flagged if they are less than 60% of the required 28 day strength. 28 day breaks are to be flagged if either cylinder fails to meet Specification requirements. E. Other Required Tests of Concrete by the Testing Laboratory(unless noted otherwise): 1. Slump Tests: Slump Tests (ASTM C143) shall be made at the beginning of concrete placement for each batch plant and for each set of test cylinders made. 2. Air Entrainment: Air entrainment (ASTM C233) tests shall be made at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. 3. Concrete Temperature: Concrete temperature at placement shall be measured at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. 4. Chloride Ions: The Contractor shall have the laboratory verify in a written submittal with the mix designs that the chloride ion concentration will not exceed the limits specified. Tests shall be run for each class of concrete according to AASHTO Designation T 260-82 Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials to determine that the maximum chloride ion content does not exceed the limits stated in the concrete section of the specifications. One test shall be run for each set of cylinders specified to be taken for each class of concrete. F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete: 1. Strength Test: A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two 28 day cylinder breaks from each set of cylinders. 2. Quality Control Charts and Logs: The Testing Laboratory shall keep the following quality control logs and charts for each class of concrete containing more than 2,000 cubic yards. The records shall be kept for each batch plant and submitted on a weekly basis with cylinder test reports: a. Number of 28 day strength tests made to date. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-12 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 b. 28 day strength test results containing the average of all strength tests to date, the high test result, the low test result, the standard deviation, and the coefficient of variation. C. Number of tests under specified 28 day strength. d. A histogram plotting the number of 28 day cylinders versus compressive strength. e. Quality control chart plotting compressive strength test results for each test. f. Quality control chart plotting moving average for strength where each point plotted is the average strength of three previous test results. g. Quality control chart plotting moving average for range where each point plotted is the average of 10 previous ranges. 3. Acceptance Criteria: The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: a. The average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required f'c. b. No individual strength test (average of two 28 day cylinder breaks) falls below the required f'c by more than 500 PSI. If either of the above requirements is not met, the Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Engineer by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests. G. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results: 1. Contractor Responsibility for Low Strength Concrete: If any strength test of Laboratory cured cylinders falls below the required f'c by more than 500 psi, the Contractor shall take steps immediately to assure that the load carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. 2. Nondestructive Field Tests: The Testing Laboratory shall under the direction of the Engineer perform nondestructive field tests of the concrete in question using Swiss Hammer, Windsor Probe, or other appropriate methods as approved by the Engineer and report the results in the same manner as for cylinder test reports. 3. Core Tests: If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that the load carrying capacity of the structure has been significantly TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-13 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 reduced, tests of cores by the Testing Laboratory, drilled from the area in question under the direction of the Engineer, will be required in accordance with ASTM C42 "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete". In such case, three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 PSI below required f'c. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperature 60' to 80°F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. The Contractor shall fill all holes made by drilling cores with an approved drypack concrete. 4. Acceptance Criteria for Core Tests: Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85% of f'c and if no single core is less than 75% of f'c. If approved by the Engineer, locations of erratic core strengths may be retested to check testing accuracy. 5. Load Test: If the above criteria are not met and the structural adequacy remains in doubt, the Engineer may order a load test as specified in ACI 318 for the questionable portion of the structure. 6. Strengthening of the Structure or Demolition: If the structural adequacy of the affected portion of the structure remains in doubt, the Engineer may order the structure to be strengthened by an appropriate means or demolished and rebuilt. 7. Cost of Investigations for Low Strength Concrete: The costs of all investigations of low strength concrete shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Jobsite Inspection: The scope of the work to be performed by the inspector on the jobsite shall be as follows: 1. Verify that air temperatures at the point of placement in the structure are within acceptable limits defined above prior to ordering of concrete by the Contractor. 2. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number, type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at the proper location. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-14 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper batching. Observe mix consistency and adding of water as required to achieve target slumps in mix designs. Record the amount of water added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The responsibility for adding water to trucks at the jobsite shall rest only with the Contractor's designated representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. 4. Obtain concrete test cylinders. 5. Perform slump tests and air entrainment tests. 6. Record information for concrete test reports. 7. Verify that all concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report concrete not meeting the specified requirements and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Contractor,Architect, Engineer, and Owner. 8. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day. 9. Check concrete placing techniques to determine that concrete deposited is uniform and that vertical drop does not exceed six feet. 10. The jobsite inspector shall report any irregularities that occur in the concrete at the jobsite or test results to the Contractor, Architect, Owner, and Engineer. I. Causes for Rejection of Concrete: The Contractor shall reject all concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons: 1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number). 2. Air temperature: Air temperature limits shall be as follows: a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 40°F and rising b. Hot Weather: Air temperature must be cooler than 100°. Concrete may be placed at other air temperature ranges only with approval of the job inspector for the Testing Laboratory or other duly appointed representative. 3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95°F may not be placed in the structure. 4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Slumps outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 6. Excessive Age: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-15 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure or before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Laboratory job inspector or other duly appointed representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. J. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C 94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will not exceed the specified water cement ratio for the design mix. The Contractor and Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer and each other of tickets not meeting the criteria specified. 3.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Contract Obligations: 1. Owner Responsibility: The Owner shall pay for all initial field inspections and tests as required during the fabrication and erection of the structural steel. 2. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory for the certification of all shop and field welders. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the inspector can refer back to the person or crew performing the work. The costs of all retesting of material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor. The Fabricator and Erector shall provide the Laboratory inspector with access to all places where work is being done. A minimum of 24 hours notification shall be given prior to commencement of work. The Contractor shall provide the Testing Laboratory with the following: a. A complete set of Architect/Engineer reviewed shop and erection drawings including all revisions and addenda. b. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills, and mill test reports. C. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops. d. Representative sample pieces requested for testing. e. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material. f. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting facilities, etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-16 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3. Testing Laboratory Responsibility: Inspection of field work shall be completed promptly so that corrections can be made without delaying the progress of the work. Inspections shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of two years experience in structural steel testing and inspection. All inspection personnel shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC-1. The Testing Laboratory shall provide test reports of all shop and field inspections. Shop test reports shall include shop welders certifications. All test reports shall indicate types and locations of all defects found during inspection, the measures required and performed to correct such defects, statements of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop and field connections, and other fabrication and erection data pertinent to the safe and proper welding and bolting of shop and field connections. In addition to the parties listed in this Specification the Fabricator and Erector shall receive copies of all test reports. 4. Rejection of Material or Workmanship: The Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory reserve the right to reject any material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents at any time during the progress of the work. However, this provision does not allow waiving the obligation for timely, in sequence inspections. B. Mill Tests of Structural Steel: 1. Mill Order Steel: The Fabricator shall furnish certified mill test reports and an affidavit stating that the structural steel furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified on the structural drawings for all mill order steel. In case of controversy, test of the material according to ASTM A6 or A568 as applicable made by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory with certified test reports paid for by the Contractor shall be made to verify conformity with ASTM standards. Tests shall be made for each 10 tons of material used unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 2. Local Stock Steel: Materials taken from stock by a Fabricator for use for structural purposes must be of a quality at least equal to that required by the ASTM specifications applicable to the classification covering the intended use. Certified mill test reports shall be accepted as sufficient record of the quality of materials carried in stock by the fabricator provided the stock steel can be identified by heat or melt numbers. In case of controversy, tests by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory with certified reports as specified for mill order steel shall be required. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-17 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3. If tests are required,test specimens shall be taken by the Contractor under the direction of the Testing Laboratory and shall be machined by the Testing Laboratory to dimensions as required by the applicable ASTM standards. C. Field Inspections and Tests: The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection in the field for a period of time as determined in consultation with the Architect, Owner, and Engineer prior to the start of erection in a timely manner so as to not delay the start of erection. The following tests and inspections shall be made: 1. Obtain the planned erection procedure, and review with the Erectors supervisory personnel. 2. Verify field welding procedures and obtain welder certificates. (Including welding of cold formed framing.) 3. Check steel as received in the field for possible shipping damage, workmanship, and piece marking. 4. Check plumbness and frame alignment as erection progresses. 5. Check joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and runout plates for welded moment connections and column splices. 6. Check preheating to assure proper temperature, uniformity, and thoroughness through the full material thickness. 7. Review welding sequence. 8. Visually inspect all field welding for size, length, and quality. 9. Perform nondestructive examination services for various weldments of field erection determined in consultation with the Structural Engineer prior to the start of erection. The Laboratory shall furnish a qualified technician with the necessary equipment to perform radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant inspection as required for the item being tested and other duties as outlined for shop inspection in the previous Section. Unless specified otherwise, check all partial and complete penetration welds in connections of beams, girders, columns, and braces. Check 10% of connections with fillet welds. Visual inspection is required for all welds. 10. Check calibration of impact wrenches used in field bolted connections. 11. Visually inspect the welding of metal deck to the structure. 12. Perform field tests on 10% of completed shear connectors in each beam according to inspection procedures outlined in AWS D1.1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-18 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 The costs of repairing all defective welds and the costs of retesting by the Testing Laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor. If removal of a backing strip is required by the Testing Laboratory to investigate a suspected weld defect, such cost shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 014100 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00-19 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 SECTION 01 41 19-WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division I specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. All components and cladding must meet or exceed the wind load requirements as specified in this section. B. Exterior wall, exterior wall openings and roof openings shall be protected with impact-resistant covers or designed to meet impact resistance requirements. C. Exterior mechanical and electrical equipment shall be secured against indicated wind loads. D. Owner shall pay for Texas Department of Insurance Inspection Windstorm Certification for the Building Structure which includes certification of any accessory structures. The contractor is responsible for all other costs related to Windstorm Certification which includes the required inspection. E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling the site inspections of the Owner's Engineer responsible for Windstorm Certification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Components and Cladding: Elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations,and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system.Examples: Curtain walls, exterior glass windows and panels,roof sheathing, studs, soffits, etc. B. Exterior Wall, Exterior Wall Openings, and Roof Openings: Openings that are likely to be breached during high winds. Examples: skylights, smoke vents, HVAC equipment, windows, doors,roof hatches, louvers, etc. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 158 mph ultimate wind velocity (LRFD) (3-second gust), Exposure C, Risk Category IV, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." B. Impact resistance shall be as determined by the Texas Windstorm Code. 1. Impact Cyclic Wind Pressure Criteria. Impact protective systems and exterior opening products must be tested for windborne debris resistance under ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996 or other windborne debris standards or procedures that are recognized by the Texas Department of Insurance. The missile criteria must be as follows: Windstorm Construction Requirements 01 41 19- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. Products located within 30 feet of grade must be tested to resist large,and if required small missile. If ASTM E 1996 is the test standard used, then missile level D from Table 2,Applicable Missiles,must be used. b. Products located above 30 feet of grade must be tested to resist a small missile. if ASTM E 1996 is the test standard used, then missile level D from Table 2, Applicable Missiles, must be used. 2. Impact Protective Systems. Impact protective systems must be installed under the manufacturer's installation instructions and in the manner in which they were tested for uniform static wind pressure resistance and for windborne debris resistance. 3. Exterior Opening Products. a. If the exterior opening products are not protected from windborne debris by an impact protective system,then they must be manufactured to resist windborne debris under Section 1.4.13.1. b. Exterior opening products must be installed under the manufacturer's installation instructions and under the manner in which they were tested for uniform static wind pressure resistance and for windborne debris resistance. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Inspections Approved Building Products shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. B. Components and cladding not listed will require certification or third party testing indicating that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this section by the manufacturer. C. Installation instructions indicating fasteners, minimum attachment requirements, and other necessary pertinent information for installation shall be submitted. D. Forms: The following forms are available for completion on the Texas Department of Insurance website: 1. TWIA Insurability Requirements. 2. WPI-1 Application for Certificate of Compliance. 3. WPI-2-BC-7 Inspection Verification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify the Architect not less than 72 hours in advance of a requested windstorm inspection. The Contractor shall provide, and have available at the job site, all necessary installation instructions during construction. It is incumbent upon the Contractor to have the project superintendent and knowledgeable representatives of the trades/craftwork being inspected in attendance with documentation to illustrate compliance of installation to TDI requirements. B. Prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors, the contractor shall notify the architect/engineer in time to allow visual structural inspections by the Architect/Engineer for the multiple inspections required for Windstorm Certification by the Architect/Engineer. DO NOT COVER UP FASTENERS WITHOUT HAVING THEM REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE WINDSTORM ENGINEER. C. Contractor shall furnish,upon completion,written confirmation that the installation and materials used for all components and cladding is in conformance with requirements of this section to the Windstorm Engineer. Windstorm Construction Requirements 01 41 19-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 D. Re-inspection: The Windstorm Engineer will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the inspection list items from earlier inspections have been completed. I. Upon completion of windstorm re-inspection, the Windstorm Engineer will notify the Contractor that the work being inspected complies with windstorm requirements. If the Work is incomplete, the Windstorm Engineer will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated one time for a total of three (3) inspections of the work in question. Additional re-inspections required due to Contractor's failure to complete the list of incomplete windstorm items will be billed to the Contractor at the Windstorm Engineer's customary billing rates for the personnel involved. PART 2-Products (Not Applicable) PART 3-Execution (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 014119 Windstorm Construction Requirements 01 41 19-3 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 0145 23 TESTING REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. This specification shall govern the testing requirements for civil site work associated with the project In the event the governing authority's testing requirements are more stringent than the requirements set forth herein the governing authority's requirements shall be followed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Supplier Mix Data&Certifications A. Mix Designs,furnished by supplier,shall be presented to Engineer 1. Surface Course Mix Designs a. 1 per mix design B. Mill Certificates,furnished by supplier,shall be presented to Engineer 1. Lime Stabilized Subgrade a. 1 per load 2. Flexible Base a. 1 per load PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 Testing Requirements A. Concrete Strength Test(@ 28 days unless noted otherwise on plans) 1. Concrete Pavement a. 1 set of 3 per 75 Cubic Yards for each pavement type(Light Duty,Heavy Duty,Dumpster Pad, etc.) 2. Concrete Sidewalk a. 1 set of 3 per 4,000 Square Feet 3. Curb or Curb&Gutter a. 1 set of 3 per 500 Linear Feet 4. Concrete Inlets a. 1 set of 3 per every 3 inlets B. Field Sieve Analysis after final mixing 1. Lime stabilized Subgrade a. 1 per day C. Eades&Grim Test 1. Lime stabilized Subgrade a. 1 for each soil type D. Atterberg Limits&Gradation Test 1. Caliche a. 1 per 5,000 Cubic Yards E. Los Angeles Abrasion Loss Test 1. Flexible Base a. 1 per 5,000 Cubic Yards F. Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Tests 1. Lab site sampling,Molding,Lab Density,Stability,Maximum Theoretical Specific Gravity(Rice Gravity),Extraction a. 1 per project or 1 per 500 tons 2. Cored In-Place Density,Air Voids,Thickness of Compacted Mix a. 1 per 2,500 Square Yards TESTING REQUIREMENTS 0145 23-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 NOT APPLICABLE 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 0157 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 0157 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 0157 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 0157 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 NOT APPLICABLE 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, [Owner] shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm Temporary Controls 0157 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 0157 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 01 S7 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for temporary Storm Water Pollution Prevention. B. The work described in this section is applicable to all sections of the contract documents.All work that would disturb the existing site conditions or present the potential for site runoff shall adhere fully to this specification section. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced items) below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. The TCEQ TPDES Construction General Permit(CGP)No.TXR150000 effective March 5,2018(or most current version).This specification requires compliance with all provisions of the TCEQ TPDES permit. B. The project SWPPP provided with the construction plans. C. City of Corpus Christi ordinance 022941,Storm Water Quality Management Program. D. Any applicable local ordinance or regulation pertaining to storm water pollution control or prevention. 1.03 Submittals A. Submittals of products used in structural and non-structural controls shall be made through established procedures prior to installation on the site.The Contractor shall make available physical samples and product literature on any material used in structural or non-structural controls during the course of the project prior to its implementation in the field. B. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from local, state, and federal standards and regulations or special designs shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer of the State of Texas and retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. BMP-Best Management Practices B. CSN-Construction Site Notice (Large CSN for large sites; Small CSN for small sites) C. EHS-Environmental Health and Safety D. NOI and NOT-Notice of Intent and Notice of Termination for TPDES permits E. ODR-Owner Designated Representative F. Land Disturbance-Any activity which affects the ground surface and/or vegetation G. SWPPP-Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan H. TCEQ-Texas Commission on Environmental Quality I. TPDES-Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System J. Large Construction Activities-Construction activities including clearing,grading and excavating that result in land disturbance equal to or greater than 5 acres of land. K. Small Construction Activities - Construction activities including clearing,grading and excavating that result in land disturbance equal to or greater than 1 acre and less than 5 acres of land. L. Under 1 Acre Construction Activities- Construction activities including clearing,grading, excavating, or any activity which affects the ground surface and/or vegetation that results in land disturbance under 1 acre of land 1.OS Quality Assurance A. In order to minimize the discharge of pollutants to storm water, the Contractor shall implement all permanent and temporary site controls according to TPDES Guidelines,as set forth by the TCEQ. B. Implementation of site controls shall be performed by a qualified contractor experienced in the proper installation of such devices in accordance with manufacturers'specifications,and in keeping with both recognized Best Management Practices (BMPs),and TPDES regulations. C. The Contractor shall inspect all BMPs at regular intervals as specified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan for this project.Use standard Owner Inspection forms for each inspection.Record all deficiencies of site controls and take immediate action to correct any deficiencies recorded. Keep records of inspections current and on file,available for review by EPA,TCEQ,MS4 Operator and Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.01 Materials Specific site control devices are identified in the SWPPP provided with the construction plans. Where such devices are indicated, their material composition shall comply with this section.Refer to the construction plans for details of listed materials.Projects may propose alternative BMPs, as long as they are effective at performing the desired functions. A. Temporary Sediment Control Fence(Silt Fence) B. Inlet Protection C. Rock Filter Dam(Rock Check Dam) D. Stabilized Construction Entrance/Exit E. Tracking Control Mat F. Mulch Sock G. Triangular Filter Dikes: for use on surfaces or in locations where standard silt fence cannot be implemented H. Concrete, Paint and Stucco Washout: shall be used for containment of fluids from concrete truck washout wastes. 1. Temporary Storage Tanks:shall be used for temporary storage of fuels on the construction project site. 1. Diversion Dike K. Interceptor Swale L. Erosion Control Matting: shall be used on steep slopes, in drainage swales, and in high traffic pedestrian areas of barren soil.It shall include one or more of the following: 1. lute Mat-a plain fabric made of jute yarn,woven in a loose and simple manner,with a minimum unit weight of 2.7 pounds per square yard. Width shall be as required for the dimensions of the area to be covered. 2. Wood Fiber Mat-a mat composed of wood fibers,which are encased in nylon,cotton or other type of netting 3. Synthetic Webbing Mat - a mat manufactured from polyvinyl chloride or polypropylene monofilaments, which are bonded together into a three-dimensional web to facilitate erosion control and/or re-vegetation. 4. Organic Mulches:shall be used for covering bare soil,retaining moisture under existing vegetation being preserved, and for absorbing the energy of compaction caused by foot or vehicular traffic. Refer to Exhibit M. M. Any other materials indicated in the SWPPP. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. The Contractor shall provide a complete installation of all site control devices and measures (BMPs) indicated in the SWPPP,and as specified herein.These BMPs must be confirmed as fully operational with the Owner before any work that disturbs the site can begin. B. As an alternative to the BMPs indicated in the SWPPP,and as specified herein,the Contractor may propose alternate BMPs that perform the same function as the indicated BMP but may be of a different configuration,materials,or type for review and approval by Engineer.Installation of alternate BMPs shall not proceed until reviewed and approved by Engineer. C. The Contractor shall provide inspection and monitoring of controls in place and shall perform all revisions and updating of SWPPP. An accurate, chronological record of all Contractor inspections, revisions and additional controls shall be kept on file at the project site,for review,with a copy of the SWPPP. D. The Contractor shall submit the NOT to the Owner after all disturbed areas are re-established(stabilized) with vegetative cover following completion of construction.Following acceptance of stabilized areas,all site controls that are no longer necessary shall be removed. 3.02 Contractor Responsibilities A. This project requires implementation of storm water Best Management Practices for control devices and monitoring by the Contractor to comply with all provisions of the SWPPPdeveloped for the project by the Engineer.The Contractor must fulfill all TPDES regulatory requirements, including the filing of the NOI and NOT or signing and posting of the CSN. B. The Contractor shall provide signatures of a Corporate Officer for the NOI,Large CSN,Small CSN, NOT and any other forms or applications as required by the TPDES Construction General Permit STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 TXR150000.The Contractor shall also provide delegated authorization to sign reports per 30 TAC 305.128.Individuals conducting site inspections shall be qualified to thesatisfaction of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall insert a copy of the signed NOI,and Large or Small CSN into the SWPPP book to be kept at the jobsite. D. The SWPPP book kept at the jobsite shall also contain the following: 1. A letter delegating signature authority to the field personnel for the Contractor 2. A copy of the TPDES permit when received 3. A copy of the Large or Small CSN 4. A copy of the SWPPP provided with the construction plans E. The Contractor shall review the SWPPP and verify existing conditions at the site before determining scope of implementation of site controls.Site survey and site plan drawings shall be used for additional reference.The Contractor shall notify the Owner,in advance,of this site review to allow for Owner participation. F. The Contractor shall construct a Project SWPPP sign and place it at the main entrance to the project site.This sign shall include the NOI and TPDES permit along with the TCEQ TPDES Large or Small CSN,depending on the size of the construction project. G. The Contractor shall complete the SWPPP Project Start-up form and shared SWPPP Acceptance Form as required before commencing soil disturbing activities. H. The Contractor shall provide all material,labor,equipment and services required to implement, maintain and monitor all erosion and sedimentation controls in compliance with the SWPPP.All controls implemented by the Contractor shall comply with the TPDES regulations as issued by the TCEQ with most current version.These controls shall remain in operation until project completion and re-establishment of the site to pre-existing conditions (or improved) or longer as directed by the ODR.The work shall include,but not be limited to,the following: 1. All earthwork as required to implement swales, dikes, basins and other excavations for temporary routing of utilities,to protect against erosion or sediment-laden (polluted) storm water runoff. 2. All structural controls as shown or specified, including silt fences, sediment traps, stabilized construction entrance,subsurface drains,pipe slope drains,inlet/outlet protection,reinforced soil retention,gabions,rock berms,etc. 3. All non-structural controls as shown or specified, including temporary or permanent vegetation, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, preservation of vegetative buffer strips, preservation/protection of existing trees and other mature vegetation. 4. All modifications and revisions to SWPPP necessary to meet changing site conditions and to address new sources of storm water discharges,as the work progresses. S. All maintenance and repair of structural and non-structural controls in place shall continue until final stabilization is achieved or as directed by the ODR. 6. Weekly site inspections,as required by the SWPPP,of pollutant sources,including hazardous sources, structural and non-structural controls, and all monitoring of SWPPP revisions and maintenance of inspection records. 7. Removal of all structural and non-structural controls as necessary upon completion,and only after final stabilization is achieved. 8. Filing of NOT within 30 days of final stabilization being achieved and being approved by the Owner,or of another Operator assuming control of the un-stabilized portions of the site. 9. Refer to the SWPPP for additional requirements to ensure compliance with TPDES regulations. 3.03 Inspection A. Inspection and maintenance is required for all areas disturbed by construction activity and for all erosion and sediment controls that are used. Inspection shall be performed at least once a week,and within 24 hours of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater for as long as a portion of the site is disturbed. B. The Contractor should select one individual who will be responsible for the inspection and maintenance of the system. The inspector will look at the control measures and determine if they are performing correctly and effectively. C. Reports shall be prepared and stored in accordance with the CGP. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Additional information may be found on the SWPPP provided with the Construction plans. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 03 10 00-CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes all labor, materials and equipment required to form all cast-in- place concrete shown on the drawings including but not limited to all slabs,joists, beams, walls, stairs, and equipment pads. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: A. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" B. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice" D. ACI SP-4 "Formwork for Concrete" In addition, all formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained as a minimum according to ACI Standard 347 "Guide to Formwork". 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY The design, construction and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, backshores, and other bracing may be safely removed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified, formwork for exposed concrete surfaces shall consist of plywood, metal, metal framed plywood, or other acceptable surface. Formwork shall provide a continuous straight and smooth surface conforming to the joint system as specified on the Architect's drawings. Form material shall have sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100%Pre-NOA) November 11,2024 concrete without bow or deflection. Plywood shall be overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class I, or plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. 2.2 FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified,formwork for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.3 FORMWORK COATINGS Formwork coatings shall be a commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede curing with water or curing compounds. Provide a product that has a maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) of 350 mg/I but not greater than permitted by the local government agency having jurisdiction in the area where the project is located. 2.4 NAILS AND FASTENERS Use only galvanized nails and fasteners for securing formwork in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces such as garages, canopies and porte-cocheres. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in- place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100%Pre-NOA) November 11,2024 D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like,to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and patch forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is 1 112" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. Provide only galvanized form ties in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces. H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3.2 CLEANING AND TIGHTENING Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and all other debris just prior to concrete placement. Retighten forms and bracing prior to concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 CLEANING AND RE-USE OF FORMS Forms reused in the work shall be repaired and cleaned. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Forms intended for successive concrete placement shall have surfaces cleaned, fins and laitance removed, and joints tightened to avoid surface offsets. New form coating compound shall be applied to reused forms. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100%Pre-NOA) November 11,2024 3.4 TOLERANCES Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances for concrete formwork shall conform to ACI Standard 117, "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". Before concrete placement the Contractor shall check lines and levels of erected formwork and make any corrections and adjustments as required to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. During concrete placement the Contractor shall check formwork and supports to ensure that forms have not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances. 3.5 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Definitions 1. Shores: Vertical or inclined support members designed to carry the weight of formwork, concrete, and construction loads above. 2. Reshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original forms and shores have been removed from the member, thus requiring the member to carry its own weight and superimposed construction loads at the time of installation. Reshores are assumed to carry no load at the time of installation. After the installation of reshores, superimposed construction loads are assumed to be distributed among all members connected by reshores. 3. Backshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original formwork and shores have been removed from a small area without allowing the structural member to deflect or support its own weight or superimposed construction loads. It is assumed that backshores carry the same load as that carried by the original shores they replace. Comply with ACI 347 for shoring, reshoring and backshoring in concrete construction and as herein specified where more stringent: B. Structures with Three Supported Levels or Less: Extend shoring from soil supported slab or suitable subgrade to uppermost level for structures with three structurally supported levels or less. 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Curing and Stripping Concrete Cylinders: The General Contractor shall be responsible for making and curing stripping concrete cylinders, cured under field conditions, for the purpose of determining concrete strength at time of form and shore removal. Such cylinders shall be made by the Contractor and tested by his testing laboratory. CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100%Pre-NOA) November 11,2024 B. Formwork Not Supporting Concrete: Formwork not supporting concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the structure, may be removed after cumulatively (not necessarily consecutively) curing at not less than 50°F for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided the concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. If ambient air temperatures remain below 50°F or if retarding agents are used, then this specified minimum period should be increased as required to safely remove the forms without damage to the concrete. Where such forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits,the removal times of the latter shall govern. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-5 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100%Pre-NOA) November 11,2024 SECTION 031113.11 CONCRETE FORMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation and removal of Concrete Forms as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 420,Concrete Structures 1.03 Submittals A. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Forms may be of either wood or metal,except where otherwise specified or directed by the Owner. B. Forms shall be straight,free from warp,and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. 2.02 Form Design and Form Plans A. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. 1. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. B. For job-fabricated forms,an additional live load of fifty pounds per square foot(50 psf)shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. C. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment,shear or end reaction. D. The maximum working load shall include a live load of thirty-five pounds per square foot (35 psf) of horizontal form surface and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. E. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Owner for approval when specified. 2.03 Wood Forms A. Lumber 1. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned,of good quality,and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. 2. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one(1)side and two(2)edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. B. Plywood 1. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch(1/2")in thickness,with no form lining required. 2. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. 3. Plywood used for forming surfaces which remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class 11. C. Reuse of Lumber or Plywood Forms 1. Forms or form lumbers to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. 2. Any lumber or plywood which is split, warped, bulged, marred or has defects that will produce inferior work shall not be used and,if condemned,shall be promptly removed from the work. D. Liner 1. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces,except for the inside of culvert barrels,inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and,any surface formed by a single finished board. 2. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. 4. Thin membrane sheeting,such as polyethylene sheets,shall not be used for form lining. 2.04 Metal Forms A. The foregoing requirements for timber forms as regard to design, mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining,unless specifically noted on the plans. B. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. C. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. D. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. E. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. F. Metal shall be kept free from rust,grease or other foreign materials. 2.05 Molding A. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. B. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. C. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-fourths inch(3/4") on the sides. 2.06 Metal Form Ties A. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. B. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. 2.07 Form Removal Coating A. Shall be oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface,which is approved by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Supports A. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. B. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. 3.03 Form Walls A. Walls shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least four-feet(4') on each side of joints to provide continuity. B. A row of walls shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. C. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. D. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. E. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical,i.e.,long dimensions set in the same direction. F. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel,except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Owner. G. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. H. All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. 1. The forms maybe given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. I. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch(1/16"). 1. Forms shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 K. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. L. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such formwork is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. M. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement 3.04 Spreaders A. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. 3.05 Metal Appliances A. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch(1/2")from the concrete surface. B. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. C. Burning off of rods,bolts or ties will not be permitted. D. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. 3.06 Railing and Ornamental Work A. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. B. All moldings,panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true,sharp and clean cut. 3.07 Form Removal Coating A. Prior to placing concrete reinforcement,the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. 3.08 Removal of Forms A. Except as herein provided,forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one (1) day when Type I and Type Il cement is used, and not less than one-half(1/2) day when Type III cement is used,provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. B. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three(3)hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. C. Weight-supporting forms shall be removed once the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,500 psi or as directed by the Owner. CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 03 20 00-CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes labor, materials, hardware, equipment, transportation and services required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete including bars, welded wire fabric,ties and supports shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 315, "ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice". 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Placing Reinforcing Bars." 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings and samples for all reinforcing steel and related accessories shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings shall show layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION Perform all tests and inspections specified in Laboratory Testing Section of these specifications. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing Steel: All reinforcing steel shall conform to the " Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM A615 Grade 60 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. All reinforcing steel required to be welded shall conform to ASTM A 706 "Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". 2. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16 gauge. Provide only plastic coated or stainless steel tie wire in exposed concrete structures and all architectural concrete. B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. 2.2 SPLICES A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required splice type and lap lengths are defined on the drawings. Lap splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the drawings shall be 40 bar diameters minimum. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND DELIVERY A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required, by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled will be rejected. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 B. Marking and Shipping: Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease, or other coating. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Before placing and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Exercise particular care to maintain proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Provide metal spreaders and spacers to hold steel in position. Support steel at proper height upon approved chairs. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Coordinate with other trades and expedite materials and labor to avoid omissions and delay. F. Install waterproof membrane or moisture barrier as specified prior to placing steel for concrete slabs-on-grade. G. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression strength of the bar as applicable. H. Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to the Owners. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING AND COVERAGE A. Reinforcing Steel Coverage Reinforcing steel coverage should conform to the requirements specified in the General Notes. Cover specified shall be considered minimums that may require increasing where reinforcing steel intersects for different member types. Cover in structural members not specified in the General Notes shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318-08 Section 7.7 unless specified otherwise on the drawings. B. Reinforcing Steel Spacing: The clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than the bar diameter nor 1". Where parallel reinforcement is placed in 2 or more layers, bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less than 1". 3.4 SPLICING REINFORCING STEEL A. All lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. B. Maintain proper cover between reinforcing bars at splices. C. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 40 bar diameters at splices. Lap welded wire fabric a minimum of one full wire mesh plus two inches. 3.5 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all structural slabs unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. See drawings for sizes and spacings. 3.6 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Refer to Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings for formed concrete requiring reinforcing steel. Such reinforcement shall be furnished as part of the work of this section. 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these specifications for concrete reinforcement inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 SECTION 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placement of Reinforcing Steel as required to complete the project 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute(ACI)318,Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. ASTM A36/A36M-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel C. ASTM A82/A82M-Standard Specification for Steel Wire,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement D. ASTM A123/A123M-Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coating on Iron and Steel Products E. ASTM A185/A185M-Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,Plain,for Concrete F. ASTM A496/A496M-Standard Specification for Steel Wire,Deformed,for Concrete Reinforcement G. ASTM A615/A615M-Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement H. ASTM A675/A675M-Standard Specification for Steel Bars,Carbon,Hot-Wrought,Special Quality,Mechanical Properties I. ASTM A706/A706M-Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement J. ASTM A77S/A775M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars K ASTM A884/A884M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement L. ASTM A934/A934M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars M. ASTM A996/A996M-Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement N. ASTM D3963-Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars 0. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 440,Reinforcing Steel P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-7320, "Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Mills" Q. Texas Department of Transportation [TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-7330, "Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators" R. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-4510,"Mechanical Couplers" S. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) T. American Welding Society AWS D1.4/D1.4M,"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel" 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). B. Mill approval letter certified by mill. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. The requirements of the Drawings,Owner,ASTM Designation,and/or ACI requirements shall govern all products. B. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation and/or ACI requirements to which reference is made,the provisions of this specification shall govern. C. All bars shall be marked in accordance with ASTM A615 or ASTM A706. D. Furnish copies of a written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section. 2.02 Approved Mills REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Reinforcement shall be produced by mills that are approved by the Texas Department of Transportation(TXDOT)in accordance with TxDOT DMS-7320. B. Mill certification shall be submitted with each delivery prior to incorporation of the material into the Project. 2.03 Deformed Bar A. Unless otherwise designated on the Drawings,all bar reinforcement shall be deformed. B. Reinforcing Steel must conform to one of the following: 1. ASTM A615,Grades 40 or 60, 2. ASTM A996,Type A,Grades 40 or 60, 3. ASTM A996,Type R,Grade 60,permitted in concrete pavement only(Furnish ASTM A996,Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them.Bend tests are not required), 4. ASTM A706 S. ACI 318 C. Large diameter new billet steel(Nos.14 and 18),Grade 75,and will be permitted for straight bars only. D. The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification is shown in Table 1: Table 1 Size,Area,and Weight of Reinforcing Steel Bars Bar Size Nominal Diameter Nominal Area Weight Per Number (inch) (square inch) Linear Foot 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.600 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 2.04 Smooth Round Bars and Dowels A. Reinforcing Steel must conform to one of the following: 1. ASTM A615,Grades 40 or 60, 2. ASTM A996,Type A,Grades 40 or 60, 3. ASTM A996,Type R,Grade 60,permitted in concrete pavement only(Furnish ASTM A996,Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them.Bend tests are not required), 4. ASTM A706 S. ACI 318 B. Large diameter new billet steel(Nos.14 and 18),Grade 75,and will be permitted for straight bars only. C. Smooth bars larger than No.3,provide steel conforming to ASTM A615 or meet the physical requirements of ASTM A36 and ACI 318. D. Concrete pavement 1. Smooth bars and Dowels must have a minimum yield strength of 60 ksi and meet ASTM A615 and ACI 318. 2.05 Spiral Reinforcement A. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth(not deformed)bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the Drawings. B. Bars 1. Bars must comply with ASTM A615,Grade 40;ASTM A996,Type A,Grade 40;or ASTM A675,Grade 80,meeting the dimensional tolerances of ASTM A615,and ACI 318. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Wire 1. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM A185 and ACI 318. 2. Smooth wire must comply with ASTM A82. 3. Deformed wire must comply with ASTM A496. 2.06 Weldable Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A706 or have a carbon equivalent(C.E.)of at most 0.55%. B. Furnish copies of the chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon,manganese,phosphorus and sulfur and written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section. 2.07 Welded Wire Fabric A. Provide in rolls or sheets complying with ASTM A185. 2.08 Epoxy Coating 1. Required when and as shown on the Drawings,or as directed by the Owner. 2. The epoxy shall be applied by an approved applicator in accordance with TxDOT DMS-7330,"Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators". 3. Reinforcement is to be coated in accordance with Table 2. Table 2 Epoxy Coating Requirements for Reinforcing Steel Material Specification Bar ASTM A775 or A934 Wire or Fabric ASTM A884 Class A or B Mechanical Couplers As shown on Drawings Hardware As shown on Drawings 4. Epoxy coating material and coating repair material shall comply with TxDOT DMS-8130,"Epoxy Powder Coating for Reinforcing Steel". S. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement will be sampled and tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-739-I. 6. Maintain identification of all reinforcing throughout the coating and fabrication and until delivery to the project. 7. Furnish copies of a written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section and copies of the manufacturers control tests. 2.09 Mechanical Couplers A. When mechanical splices are shown in the Drawings and allowed by the Owner,the following types shall be used: 1. Sleeve-filler, 2. Sleeve-threaded, 3. Sleeve-swaged,or 4. Sleeve-wedge(not permitted on coated reinforcement). B. Furnish only couplers that have been produced by a manufacturer that is approved in accordance with TxDOT DMS-4510, "Mechanical Couplers". C. Couplers must be sampled and tested in accordance with DMS-4510. D. Furnish copies of a written certification that the mechanical couplers meets the requirements of this Section. 2.10 Ties A. Uncoated Reinforcement 1. Ties shall be a minimum of 16 gauge of like material of the reinforcement 2. Be in accordance with the Drawings and ACI 318. B. Coated Reinforcement 1. Ties shall be a minimum of 16 gauge 7 mil PVC coated 2. Be in accordance with the Drawings and ACI 318 3. Be approved by the Owner. 2.11 Spacers and Blocking A. Galvanized Metal Spacers 1. Be galvanized in conformance with ASTM A123. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Are to be approved for use by Owner. 3. Not allowed with epoxy-coated reinforcement B. Metal Spacers with Plastic Coated Tips 1. Are to be approved for use by Owner. C. Stainless Steel Spacers 1. Shall be type 316 or as directed by Owner. 2. Are to be approved for use by Owner. D. Plastic Spacers 1. For approval of plastic spacers on project,representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a five percent(5%)solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. 2. Must be used with epoxy-coated reinforcement. E. Pre-cast Mortar or Concrete Blocks 1. Pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Owner and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. 2. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. 3. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block,to be used for anchoring to the steel. 4. Except in unusual cases,and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Owner,the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches(21/2")square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. S. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required,and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. 6. Not allowed with epoxy-coated reinforcement PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Bending A. The reinforcement shall be bent cold,true to the shapes indicated on the Drawings. B. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. 1. Field bending and method of,will need to be approved by the Owner. C. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection at no cost to the Owner. D. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,the inside diameter of bar bends,in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d),shall be as shown in Table 3: Table 3 Minimum Inside Diameter of Bends Bend Bar Size Number(inch) Grade 40 Grade 60 Grade 75 Bends of 90 degree and greater in #3,#4,#5 3d 4d stirrups,ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend. #6,#7,#8 4d 6d REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 #3,#4,#5,#6,#7,#8 5d 6d All bends in main bars and in secondary #9,#10 5d 8d bars not covered above. #11 5d 8d 8d #14,#18 10d 10d E. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grades 40 and 60 is required,bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. 1. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of ten(10)times the nominal diameter of the bar. 3.03 Tolerances A. Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be as specified on the Drawings or as shown in Figure 1: Figure 1 Fabrication Tolerances for Bars *1.. +1/20 ±2" From end of bar to any bend Spiral or Circular Tie ±1/2" ±1/2" +0, -1/4" if 6" or less +0, -1/2" if over 6" {V +1 Stirrup or Tie 3.04 Storage A. All materials shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms,skids,or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. B. Materials shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. C. Rust,surface seams,surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection,provided the minimum dimensions,cross-sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 3.05 Splices A. Bars 1. No splicing of bars,except when provided on the Drawings or specified herein,will be permitted without written approval of the Owner. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Splices not provided for on the Drawings will be permitted,but not included for measurement,in Grade 40 bars only,sizes No.8 and smaller,subject to the following: a. For bars exceeding forty-feet(40')in drawing length,the distance center to center of splices shall not be less than forty-feet (40')and no individual bar length shall be less than ten-feet(10'). b. Splices will not be permitted in bars less than forty-feet(40')in drawing length. C. Splices which are not shown on the Drawings,but permitted hereby,shall be made in accordance with Table 4,or as directed by Owner: Table 4 Minimum Lap Requirements Bar Size Number(inches) Uncoated Lap Length Coated Lap Length 3 1'-6" 2'-6" 4 2'-0" T-0" 5 2'-6" T-6" 6 T-0" 4'-0" 7 T-6" T-6" 8 4'-6" T-0" 9 6'-0" 8'-6" 10 T-6" 11'-01, 11 9'-01, 13'-6" d. Do not lap No.14 or No.18 bars e. The specified concrete cover shall be maintained at such splices and the bars placed in contact and securely tied together. 3. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. a. When permitted in main bars,splices in adjacent bars will be staggered a minimum of two(2)splice lengths. B. Welded Wire 1. Lap length shall be at least two(2)cross wires plus two inches(2")on each sheet or roll. 2. All intersections of wire shall be securely tied together. C. Box Culvert Extensions 1. For box culvert extensions with less than one-foot(1')of fill,the existing longitudinal bars shall have a twenty(20)diameter lap with the new bars. 2. For extensions with more than one-foot(1')of fill,a minimum of one-foot(1')lap will be required. D. Welding 1. Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the Drawings and by a method approved by the Owner. 2. All welding operations,processes,equipment,materials,workmanship,and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the Drawings and AWS D1.4/D1.4M,"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel"of the American Welding Society. 3. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced 4. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars,shall be done in the field. S. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. 6. Welding of coated bars is not allowed unless the Owner approves of the method and location. E. Mechanical Couplings 1. Install mechanical coupling in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations only where shown on the Drawings. 2. Do not repair damaged threads. 3. Mechanical coupling of coated bars is not allowed unless the Owner approves of the method and location. 3.06 Dowel Bars 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,dowel bars transferring tensile stresses,shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 4. 2. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of twelve-inches(12"). REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Bars shall be greased or sleeved on one(1)end. 3.07 Uncoated Reinforcement Placement 1. Handling a. Provide systems for handling the reinforcement to prevent damage. b. Bundles shall be lifted with a strong back,spreader bar,multiple supports,platform bridge,or other means to prevent damage. C. Do not drag or drop reinforcement. d. Do not drag or drop other materials onto reinforcement. 2. Cutting a. Cutting of rods,bolt,and ties shall be done by saw or shear-cut only. b. Burning off of rods,bolts or ties will not be permitted. 3. Reinforcement a. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the Drawings. 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. 2) In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-twelfth(1/12)of the spacing between bars. 3) In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-quarter inch(1/4"). 4) Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch (1")or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. c. When placed in the work,reinforcement shall be free from dirt,paint,grease,oil,or other foreign materials. 4. Support a. Reinforcement is to be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. b. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel,overturning of truss bars,or movement in any direction during concrete placement,permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. C. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with this specification and the Drawings. d. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2")from the concrete surface. 1) They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. S. Tying a. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections,except that where spacing is less than one foot(1')in each direction, alternate intersections only,need be tied. b. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. 6. Spacers and Blocking a. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers,metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers,plastic spacers,or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. b. Metal supports are not allowed to come into contact with the soil,subgrade,water,or other material which is corrosive to metal,unless approved by the Owner. 3.08 Coated Reinforcement Placement 1. Handling a. Provide systems for handling the reinforcement with padded contact areas to prevent damage to the coating. b. Bundles shall be lifted with a strong back,spreader bar,multiple supports,platform bridge,or other means to prevent damage to the coating. C. Do not drag or drop reinforcement. d. Do not drag or drop other materials onto reinforcement. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Cutting a. Cutting of rods,bolt,and ties shall be done by saw or shear-cut only when approved. 1) The cut shall be coated in accordance with ASTM D3963 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Reinforcement a. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the Drawings. 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. 2) In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-twelfth(1/12)of the spacing between bars. 3) In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-quarter inch(1/4"). 4) Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one-inch (1")or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. C. When placed in the work,reinforcement shall be free from dirt,paint,grease,oil,or other foreign materials. 4. Support a. Reinforcement is to be supported and tied in such a manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. b. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel,overturning of truss bars,or movement in any direction during concrete placement,permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. C. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with this specification and the Drawings. d. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2")from the concrete surface. 1) They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. 5. Tying a. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections,except that where spacing is less than one-foot(1')in each direction, alternate intersections only,need be tied. b. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. 6. Spacers and Blocking a. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved metal spacers with plastic coated tips,stainless steel spacers,or approved plastic spacers. b. Metal supports are not allowed to come into contact with the soil,subgrade,water,or other material which is corrosive to metal,unless approved by the Owner. 7. Coating Repair a. The coating repair shall be in accordance with ASTM D3963 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.09 Concrete Placement 1. No concrete shall be deposited until the Owner has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 2. Before any concrete is placed,all debris shall be cleaned from the reinforcement REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 03 30 00-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of concrete work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and hardware required in conjunction with or related to the forming, delivery and pouring of all poured-in-place concrete work. B. Architectural Concrete is specified in other Division-3 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 302 - "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction". 3. ACI 304 - "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 4. ACI 305 - "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 5. ACI 306- "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 318- "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". B. Document Precedence: In case of conflict among documents, including architectural and structural drawings and specifications, notify the Architect prior to submitting proposal. In case of conflict between the structural drawings and specifications, the strictest interpretation shall govern. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. See Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer. B. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified if requested by Architect/ Engineer, including names, sources and descriptions. C. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. D. Material and Mill Certificates: Provide material and mill certificates as specified herein and in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Material and mill certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. E. Construction Joints: There shall be no construction joints for slab on grade, structural floors or columns where they are not indicated on the drawings. 1.5 PROVISION FOR OTHER WORK Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchors, bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, grounds and other fastening devices required for attachment of work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is poured. Do not install sleeves in any concrete slabs, beams or columns except where shown on the drawings or upon written approval of the Architect/Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS Refer to the drawings for classes and strengths of concrete required. A. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer. Use one brand of cement, for each class of concrete, throughout the project, unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and the Testing Laboratory. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. C. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable, free of oils, acids or organic matter. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 260. Provide air entrainment in all concrete used for vehicular traffic and parking or concrete permanently exposed to the weather as specified in Table 4.5.1 of ACI 318. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 494, Type A. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. F. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. G. Water-Reducing, Accelerator Admixture (Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride): ASTM C 494, Type C or E. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Specification for Pozzolan Admixtures: Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures may be used provided they conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and/or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete", ASTM C 618 Class C or F. Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 20% (one part fly ash max. to four parts cement) by weight. Fly ash may not be used in architecturally exposed concrete. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Admixtures containing Chloride Ions: Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments, concrete containing high early strength cement(Type III), or concrete exposed to sulfate containing solutions such as soils with a water soluble sulfate content more than 0.20 percent by weight and all water with a sulfate content more than 1500 parts per million. Admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions shall not be permitted. The maximum chloride ion content in concrete for corrosion protection shall be as follows: Max. Water Soluble Chloride Ion in Concrete Type of Member of Cement at 28 Days, % by weight Reinforced Concrete and other structures,which may be exposed to chloride in service 0.15 Reinforced Concrete in buildings and other structures that will be dry or protected from CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 moisture in service 1.00 All other reinforced concrete construction 0.30 The Contractor shall have the Concrete Supplier verify in a written submittal to the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory that the chloride ion content in all concrete mix designs used on the project will not exceed limits stated above. K. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05%chloride ions are not permitted. L. Certification: Written conformance to the above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Engineer. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Provide waterstops at all construction joints and other joints in all foundation walls below grade and where shown on the drawings. Size to suit joints. 1. Rubber waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 2. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 3. Preformed Plastic Waterstops: Federal Specifications SS-S-210A "Sealing Compound for Expansion Joints". B. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where indicated. Use only materials, which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 154. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Complying with ANSI/ASTM C 171: E. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory- graded, packaged, rust-proof and non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. F. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged, dry, combination of materials, consisting of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments (if required) and plasticizing admixtures. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, non-fading mineral oxides, interground with cement. Color, as selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ANSI/ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Chemical Curing/Floor Hardener Compound: A clear liquid chemically acting compound of sodium silicate that performs as a curing agent with a penetrating compound that changes the free lime in the concrete to calcium silicate, resulting in a surface having a maximum abrasion coefficient of 0.25 cm3/cm2 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 118. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lb. of fluosilicates per gal. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type for use in cosmetic nonstructural repairs. K. Epoxy Products: Two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface, complying with ASTM C 881,for use in all structural concrete repairs. L. Self-Leveling Mortars for Slab Fill Repair: M. Expansion Bolts in Concrete: 1. ICBO Approval: Only concrete anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for use. 2. Type: All expansion bolts in concrete shall be only wedge type expansion bolts. 3. Interior Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in interior conditioned environments free of potential moisture shall be manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z- 325C,Type II, Class 3. 4. Exterior or Exposed Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in exposed or potentially wet environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials shall be galvanized or stainless steel. Galvanized bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A 153. Stainless steel bolts shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel and nuts and washers from 300 series or Type 18-8 stainless steel. 5. Nuts and Washers: Nuts and washers shall be furnished from the manufacturer and used with the bolts. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 N. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Type: Grout for base plates and bearing plates shall be a non-metallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing Portland cement, silica sands, shrinkage compensating agents and fluidity improving compounds. 2. Specifications: Non-shrink grout shall conform to Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout, CRD-C621-83. 3. Compressive Strength: Twenty-eight day compressive strength as determined by grout cube tests, shall be: a. 6,000 PSI for supporting concrete 3000 psi and less. b. 8,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 3000 psi and less than or equal to 4000 psi. C. 10,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 4000 psi. 2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Refer to Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, "Ready Mixed Concrete" and Testing Laboratory section of the specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS IN CONCRETE A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the drawings or if not shown on drawings, located so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 1. Place construction joints in the center one third of spans unless specified otherwise. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. Submit construction joint locations not shown on the drawings for Engineer's approval. 2. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.3 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. C. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. C. Comply with ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete, and as herein specified. 1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. 2. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309 recommended practices. 4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 5. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 6. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 7. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use highway straightedges, bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 8. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3.5 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces exposed- to-view or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerance specified below. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. After screeding, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power- driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance as specified below. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation,free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 with a level surface to a tolerance as specified below. Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin- set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified above, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to ramps less than 6% exterior concrete platforms, steps and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. Rake Finish: Provide a rake finish to all ramps exceeding a 6% slope. Finish shall be applied perpendicular to direction of traffic. G. Chemical-Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors where indicated. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water (parts of hardener/water as follows), and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3-strength; second coat, 1/2-strength; third coat, 2/3-strength. Evenly apply each coat and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. H. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Apply non-slip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps and elsewhere as indicated on the Architect's or Structural Drawings. After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lb. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose non-slip aggregate. I. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Provide colored wear-resistant finish to monolithic slab surface indicated. Apply dry shake materials for colored wear-resistant finish at rate of not less than 60 lbs. per 100 sq.ft., unless greater amount is recommended by material manufacturer. Immediately following first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of required weight of dry shake material over concrete surface, and embed by means of power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake application, uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material at right angles to first application, and embed by power floating. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-10 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound recommended by dry shake hardener manufacturer, waiting up to time period as required by the manufacturer (depending on humidity and drying) before application. Do not use moisture-cover or moisture curing methods. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISH MEASUREMENT AND TOLERANCES A. Definitions: 1. Flatness -A measure of a concrete surfaces curvature or deviation from a planar surface. Concrete surfaces that are not flat are wavy or bumpy. 2. Levelness -A measure of a concrete surfaces tilt or inclination from a horizontal plane. Concrete surfaces that are not level are sloped or tilted. B. Construction Requirements to Achieve Specified Floor Finish Tolerances: 1. Forms shall be properly leveled, in good condition and securely anchored including special attention to ends and transitions. 2. Bearing surfaces for straightedges such as form edges or previously poured slabs shall be kept clean of laitance, sand,gravel, or other foreign elements. 3. Screeds shall be maintained in good condition with true round rolling wheels and level cutting edges. The use of optical sighting equipment such as lasers is recommended for checking levelness and straightness. The Contractor shall promptly adjust or replace equipment when test results indicate substandard work. C. Concrete Floor Finish Tolerance for Slab-on-Grade Construction: 1. Concrete Placement: Concrete shall be placed and screeded to predetermined marks set to elevations prescribed on the drawings. 2. Tolerance: Finished floor elevation shall not vary more than % inch in 10 feet, non cumulative. D. Remedial Measures for Slab Finish Construction Not Meeting Specified Tolerances: 1. Modification of Existing Surface: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work can be repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately undertake the approved repair method. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-11 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 b. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval a detailed work plan of the proposed repair showing areas to be repaired, method of repair and time to effect the repair. C. Repair method(s), at the sole discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, may include grinding (floor stoning), planing, retopping with self leveling grout or polymer concrete, or any combination of the above. d. The Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative maintains the right to require a test repair section using the approved method of repair for review and approval to demonstrate a satisfactory end product. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, the repair is not satisfactory an alternate method of repair shall be submitted or the defective area shall be replaced. e. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the appropriateness of a repair method and its ability to achieve the desired end product shall be final. f. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 2. Removal and Replacement: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work cannot be satisfactorily repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately commence to remove and replace the defective work. b. Replacement section boundaries shall be made to coincide with the test section boundaries as previously defined. C. Sections requiring replacement shall be removed by sawcutting along the section boundary lines to provide a neat clean joint between new replacement floor and existing floor. d. The new section shall be reinforced the same as the removed section and doweled into the existing floor as required by the Engineer. No existing removed reinforcing steel may be used. All reinforcing steel shall be new steel. e. Replacement sections may be retested for compliance at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative. f. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the need for replacement shall be final. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-12 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 g. All replacement work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. 2. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. The curing period shall be 7 days for all concrete except high early strength concrete, which shall be cured for 3 days minimum, unless test cylinders, made and kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, are tested with the average compressive strength equal to 70% of the specified 28 day strength. Curing may also be terminated when the temperature of the concrete is maintained at least 50°F for the same length of time that laboratory cured cylinders, representative of the concrete in place, require to achieve 85% of the 28 day compressive strength. 3. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of all concrete horizontal and vertical surfaces (including columns, shear walls and basement walls) by one of the methods specified or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. The Contractor shall choose a curing method that is compatible with the requirements for subsequent material usage on the concrete surface. Parking garages shall be cured using only methods 1 or 2 below. 1. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-13 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3. Provide curing/hardener or liquid membrane forming curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks and curbs, as follows: Apply specified compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Do not allow to puddle. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue down carpet), painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Use only clear curing compounds for exposed interior slabs and all exterior concrete. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.9 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Conditions warranting hot weather concreting practices are defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise result in abnormal properties. 2. The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 957. B. Specification: Hot weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperature at the truck discharge point to 957 or lower shall be followed according to ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting." C. Records: Under hot weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature at truck discharge and general weather conditions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-14 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 D. Hot Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to limit the concrete temperature to 957 or lower: 1. Design the concrete mixes specifically for hot weather conditions replacing some cement with fly ash or other pozzolan and using a water reducing retarding admixture (ASTM C 494 Type D). 2. Use the largest size and amount of coarse aggregate compatible with the job. 3. Use sunshades and/or windbreaks. 4. Delay construction of indoor slabs-on-grade until the walls and roof are constructed. 5. Cool and shade aggregate stockpiles. 6. Use ice as part of the mixing water or cool the water with liquid nitrogen. 7. Limit the number of revolutions at mixing speed to 125 maximum. 8. Paint mixers and storage bins or silos white to minimize heat absorption. 9. Reduce time between mixing and placing as much as possible. 10. Do not add water to ready-mixed concrete at the job site unless it is part of the amount required initially for the specified water-cement ratio and the specified slump. 11. Schedule concrete placement for early morning, late afternoon, or night. 12. Have all forms, equipment and workers ready to receive and handle concrete. 13. Maintain one standby vibrator for every three vibrators used. 14. Keep all equipment cool by spraying with water including chutes, conveyors, pump lines,tremies, reinforcement and buggies. 15. Dampen the subgrade and side forms with cool water. 16. Protect slab concrete at all stages against undue evaporation by applying a fog spray or mist above the surface or applying a monomolecular film. Where high temperatures and/or placing conditions dictate, use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) in lieu of the water-reducing admixture (Type A) as directed by the Owner's Testing Laboratory. 17. Provide continuous curing, preferably with water, during the first 24 hours using wet burlap, cotton mats, continuous spray mist, or by applying a curing compound meeting ASTM C 309. Continue curing for 3 days minimum. 18. Spray exteriors of forms to keep them cool. 19. As soon as possible, loosen forms and run water down the inside. When forms are removed, provide a wet cover to newly exposed surfaces. 3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Concrete shall not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 407 or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed as specified below. 2. Cold weather concreting practices should be followed whenever the mean daily temperature drops below 40°F for more than three successive days. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-15 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 3. The temperature of concrete mixed and delivered to the job site shall conform to the following requirements: Air Temperature Min. Concrete Temperature Above 30°F 60°F 0°F to 30°F 65°F Below 0°F 70°F 4. The minimum temperature of concrete during placement and curing shall be 55°F. The maximum concrete temperature heated by artificial means at point of placement shall not exceed 90°F. B. Specification: Cold weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperatures as specified above shall be followed according to ACI 306R-78 "Cold Weather Concreting". C. Records: Under cold weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature as placed and general weather conditions. D. Cold Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to assure acceptable concrete in cold weather conditions: 1. Design the concrete mix suitable for cold weather. Use air entrainment and obtain high early strength by using a higher cement content, a high early strength cement (Type III), or an accelerator(ASTM C 494 Type C and Q. 2. Protect the concrete during curing period using insulating blankets, insulated forms, enclosures and/or heaters. 3. Concrete cured in heated enclosures shall have heaters vented to prevent exposure of concrete and workmen to noxious gases. 4. Frozen subgrade shall be thawed prior to concrete placement and snow and ice shall be removed from forms. 5. Concrete shall be protected and cured at 55°F for three days minimum if normal concrete (Type I cement) is used and for two days minimum if high early strength concrete (concrete with Type III cement, 100 pounds cement added per cubic yard concrete, or an accelerator added). 6. Concrete not loaded during construction shall be protected a minimum of 3 days for normal concrete and 2 days for high early strength concrete to obtain safe form stripping strength. Concrete fully loaded during construction shall be protected for whatever time period is required to obtain the required strength as determined by nondestructive strength tests (Windsor probe, Swiss Hammer Test) on the in-place concrete. 7. Heat the mixing water and then blend hot and cold water to obtain concrete no more than 10°F above the required temperature. 8. Heat the aggregates by circulating steam in pipes placed in the storage bins for air temperatures consistently below 32°F. When either water or aggregate is heated to over 140°F combine them in the mixer first to obtain a maximum temperature of the mixture not to exceed 140°F in order to prevent flash set of the concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-16 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 9. Uniformly thaw aggregates far in advance of batching to prevent moisture variations in the stockpile. 10. Cover warmed stockpiles with tarps to retain heat. 11. Place air entraining admixture in the batch after the water temperature has been reduced by mixing with cooler solid materials. 12. Use wind screens to protect concrete from rapid cooling. 13. Place vertical pump lines inside the building, if possible, for concrete being pumped. 14. Maintain artificial heat as low as possible to reduce temperature stresses during cooling. 15. Avoid water curing of concrete. Apply the required curing compound to unformed surfaces as soon as possible to prevent drying of concrete from heated enclosures. 16. Delay form stripping as long as possible to help prevent drying from heated enclosures and to reduce damage to formed surfaces caused by premature stripping. 17. Provide triple thickness of insulating materials at corners and edges vulnerable to freezing. 18. Wrap protruding reinforcing bars with insulation to avoid heat drain from the warm concrete. 19. Gradually reduce the heat at the end of the heating period to reduce likelihood of thermal shock. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Definition - Defective Areas: 1. Formed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repairs shall include all honeycombs, rock pockets and voids exceeding 1/4" in any dimension, holes left by tie rods or bolts, cracks in excess of 0.01" and any other defects that affect the durability or structural integrity of the concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-17 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 2. Unformed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repair shall include all surface defects such as crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or cracks which penetrate to reinforcement or through the member, popouts, spalling and honeycombs. B. Classification: 1. Structural Concrete Repair: Major defective areas in concrete members that are load carrying (such as shear walls, beams, joists and slabs), are highly stressed, and are vital to the structural integrity of the structure shall require structural repairs. Structural concrete repairs shall be made using a two part epoxy bonder and/or epoxy mortar. Location of structural concrete repairs shall be determined by the Engineer. 2. Cosmetic Concrete Repair: Defective areas in concrete members that are non- load carrying and minor defective areas in load carrying concrete members shall require cosmetic concrete repair. Cosmetic concrete repairs may be made using a non-epoxy non-shrink patching mortar and bonding agent. The location of cosmetic concrete repair required shall be determined by the Engineer. Cosmetic concrete repair in exposed-to-view surfaces will require Architect's approval prior to patching operation. 3. Slab Repairs: High areas in concrete slabs shall be repaired by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Low areas shall be filled using self-leveling mortars. Repair of slab spalls and other surface defects shall be made using epoxy products as specified above and as determined by the Engineer. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these Specifications for concrete materials and cast- in-place concrete inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-18 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 SECTION 03 3100- EPDXY RELATED WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Installation of epoxy grouted dowels or reinforcing steel, and bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. Such work shall be done by the Contractor in strict conformance to these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 503 R Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete ACI 503.1 Standard Specification for Bonding, Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood, Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete by the Use of Multi-Component Epoxy System ACI 503.4 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars B. Manufacturer's Qualifications Companies furnishing the epoxy materials shall have a proven track record of at least five years. Furthermore, they shall have in existence a program of training, certifying and supporting a nationally organized program of approved contractors. Evidence of this shall be made available to the Engineer/Architect upon request. EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-1 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 C. Contractor's Qualifications: Contractor performing the work shall be an approved contractor by the manufacturer furnishing the epoxy materials, and shall have no less than five years experience in the various types of epoxy related work required in this project. A notarized certification from the manufacturer attesting to the training shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect along with the proposal to do the work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MATERIALS: A. All epoxy material shall be new and manufactured within the shelf life limitations set forth by the manufacturer. B. Epoxy shall be a two-part epoxy adhesive material, and shall be of epichlorohydrin/amine type. Polysulphide epoxies are not acceptable. C. Epoxy used shall be insensitive to the presence of water and moisture, and shall be capable of application and of strength development even when applied to damp surfaces having a temperature of 40' or above. D. Epoxy used shall develop a minimum strength of 6310 psi in tension and 12000 psi in compression at the end of seven days. E. Epoxies used shall not deteriorate under approximately 200 freeze thaw cycles. F. Epoxies used shall be 100%solids without solvents. G. Bonding and strength characteristics of epoxies shall be stable when exposed to ultraviolet rays. 2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MORTARS A. Epoxy mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing, shall have the following additional properties: 1. Epoxy mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite and furnished in bags. 3. The epoxy mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-2 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTARS: A. Mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing in exposed or exterior environmental conditions with large cyclic temperature changes shall have the following properties: 1. Mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Coefficient of thermal expansion shall be comparable with that of concrete (5.5 x 10- 6 in/in/'F). 3. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite furnished in bags. 4. The mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EPDXY MORTAR: A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy mortar repair work shall only be performed by contractors who have successfully used this process on at least three similar structural repairs of equal scope which have performed successfully for a minimum period of five years. 2. Only adequately trained and experienced personnel shall be used on the job. B. Surface Preparation 1. Concrete surface to which the epoxy mortar is to be applied shall be exposed parent concrete free of loose and unsound materials. Surface preparation shall be done by abrasive blasting,waterblasting or as otherwise required by the manufacturer. 2. Necessary approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor from authorizing governmental or other agencies prior to abrasive blasting. Abrasive blasting operations shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) Standard PB-246-697. 3. Surfaces shall be free of any deleterious materials such as laitance, dust, dirt, and oil. 4. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall also be cleaned and be free of rust and other contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Use powered wire brushes in locations where reinforcing steel cannot be cleaned by abrasive- EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-3 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 blasting or water-blasting. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be coated with a corrosion inhibiting product specified elsewhere in this specification prior to mortar application. 5. Prime the cleaned surface with primer as required by the manufacturer. C. Concrete Surface Inspection 1. Ensure that the surface temperature is at least 40°F to permit wetting of concrete surface by epoxy coating. 2. The Contractor shall evaluate the moisture content of concrete surface receiving epoxy mortar. This shall be done by determining if moisture will collect at bond lines between concrete and epoxy mortar before epoxy has cured. Evaluate this by taping a piece of polyethylene sheet to the concrete. If moisture collects on underside of the polyethylene sheet before epoxy would cure, then allow concrete to dry sufficiently to prevent the possibility of moisture between old concrete and new epoxy. D. Mortar Application 1. Condition epoxy compound components to a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Stir each of the two parts of epoxy separately before mixing. Then mix in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components and sand with Jiffy mixers (made by The Jiffy Mixer Co., Irvine, California)to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Small batches of one quart or less may be mixed by spatulas, palette knives or similar devices. 4. Mixing should be accomplished well within the pot life of epoxy (three minutes when using Jiffy mixer or five minutes when mixed by hand) after allowing for time required for application. 5. Apply mortar by trowel or other means suitable for the consistency of the epoxy-sand mortar mix. 6. Build up the repair area in layers with mortar thicknesses within those specified by the manufacturer (1/4" maximum per layer). 7. Consolidate the mortar thoroughly to remove entrapped air. 8. Finish surface of mortar to match the texture and contours of existing concrete. 9. Allow mortar to cure in accordance to manufacturers recommendations. EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-4 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work areas against spillage. 2. Epoxy and epoxy mortar spillages shall be cleaned before they set. 3. Cleanup all portions of the existing structure that are soiled or stained in the process of epoxy mortar repair work. 3.2 EPDXY GROUTED BOLTS, DOWELS OR REINFORCING STEEL: A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy grouting of bolts, dowels or reinforcing steel shall only be performed by contractors who have had successful experience on a minimum of three projects of similar scope. 2. Only adequately trained epoxy applicators shall be used on the job. Furnish current certificate of training on request. B. Surface Preparation 1. All bolts, dowels and reinforcing bars shall be abrasive blasted no more than eight hours before the grouting. If evidence of oxidation exists on the surface, the bolts, reinforcing bars and dowels shall be recleaned. Blast-clean surfaces using Steel Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation No. 6, to give a surface condition corresponding to ASa2, BSa2, CSa2 of SSPC Vis 1, depending on the initial surface condition of the steel surface. Prior to blast-cleaning, clean surfaces to conform to SSPC SP1, SP2, and SP3, as required. 2. All holes shall be clean of dust, debris, and contaminants. Use compressed air from an oil-and-water-free compressed air source prior to epoxy application. C. Drilling Holes for Embedment 1. Use only rotary-percussion type drills for drilling holes. 2. Drills shall be fitted with bits having single tooth that produce large cuttings, and hollow stem drill rods that permit simultaneous blowing of compressed air providing immediate expulsion of the cuttings from the hole. 3. Do not cut through any reinforcing steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Use small diameter exploratory holes to detect presence of reinforcing steel prior to drilling holes for grouting. 4. Core drilling equipment, and electric impact hammers or other tools which do not provide for immediate expulsion of the drill cuttings shall not be used. EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-5 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 5. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, depth of hole used for embedding the bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least fifteen times their diameter. 6. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the center to center distance between the embedded bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least twelve times their diameter. 7. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the edge distance shall be at least six times the diameter of the bolt, bar or dowel. 8. Hole diameter shall normally be 1/4" larger than the outside diameter of the embedded item. In no case shall the hole diameter be 3/8" larger than the diameter of the embedded item. D. Epoxy Application 1. Condition epoxy compound materials at a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Mix epoxy materials in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components with mechanical mixers to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Mix small batches (up to 1 quart) by use of spatulas, palette knives, or similar devices. Take care to use proper proportions of the epoxy components when using small batches. 4. Mixing shall be accomplished well within the pot life of the epoxy after allowing for time required for application. 5. Partially fill the hole with epoxy. Then insert the bolt, dowel or reinforcing bar into the hole such that the resin material oozes out around the embedded item, ensuring complete contact. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 6. As an alternative to inserting the embedded item after the epoxy is poured in the hole,the bolt, dowel, or bar may be positioned in the hole and filled up with epoxy by hand caulking guns or injected with an in-head mixing equipment. In either case, the nozzle shall be provided with a hose or tube of sufficient length to reach the bottom of the hole being filled. 7. Where the holes are horizontal or overhead, the opening shall be covered by a masking or a duct tape. Make a split in the tape and insert the epoxy injection tube through the split. Fill hole completely with epoxy and then insert the embedded item through the split tape. Amount of epoxy should be such that a small amount of material oozes through the split. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-6 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 8. Do not apply epoxy in the rain or in the presence of standing water. E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work area against spillage. 2. Epoxy oozed out from the holes and spillages shall be cleaned before they become difficult to remove. 3. Cleanup whatever portions of the existing structure are soiled or stained in the process of grouting the bolts, dowels or reinforcing bars. END OF SECTION 03 3100 EPXOY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-7 Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center, Phase 2—23180 (100% Pre-NOA) November 11, 2024 SECTION 03 3111 CONCRETESTRUCTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the construction of structures involving the use of structural concrete as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 1113.11 CONCRETE FORMS B. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL C. 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING D. 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ACI 211,"Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,Heavyweight,and Mass Concrete" B. ACI 302,`Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" C. ACI 304,`Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete" D. ACI 305,`Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting' E. ACI 306,`Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" F. ACI 309,"Consolidation of Concrete" G. ACI 315,'Recommended Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Systems" H. ACI 318,'Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete" 1. ACI 614,'Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete" J. ASTM C 150-Specification for Portland Cement IC ASTM C 595-Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements L. ASTM C 845-Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement M. ASTM C 1157-Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement N. ASTM D 994-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete(Bituminous Type) 0. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 420,Concrete Structures Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 421,Hydraulic Cement Concrete R. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-4610,Fly Ash S. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4640, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete T. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6310,Joint Sealants and Fillers U. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6160, Waterstops, Nylon Reinforced Neoprene Sheet,and Elastomeric Pads V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650, Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants W. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-100-E X. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-203-17 Y. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-401-A Z. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-410-A AA. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-411-A BB. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-413-A CC. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-472-A DD. CRSI,"Reinforced Concrete-A Manual of Standard Practice" EE. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). B. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. C. All test results shall be sent to the Owner upon completion of test. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.05 Definitions A. Retarding admixture-a material which,when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity,will retard the initial set of the concrete. B. Water-reducing admixture-a material which,when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity,will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Any testing required for approval of use of a product is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2.02 Hydraulic Cement A. Cement shall be in conformance with TxDOT DMS-4600. 1. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. For cement strength requirements,either the tensile or the compressive test may be used. C. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the Drawings. 1. Except when Type II is specified on the Drawings, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding twelve(12)hours will not exceed 60'F. 2. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. 3. Only one (1)brand of each type will be permitted on the entire project,unless otherwise authorized by the Owner. D. Cement Delivery 1. Bulk a. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. b. Information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. 2. Bag a. Shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. b. Information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. c. Bags shall contain ninety-four(94)pounds net. d. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. 3. No caked cement will be accepted. E. Storage 1. All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins,which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. 2. Storage facilities shall be ample,and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. 3. The Owner may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of forty-eight (48)hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering during periods of no precipitation. 4. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 2.03Aggregate A. Supply aggregates that meet the definitions in TxDOT Tex-100-E. B. Coarse Aggregate 1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof,free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt,alkali,vegetable matter,or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. 2. It shall not contain more than quarter-percent(0.25%)by weight of clay lumps,nor more than one-percent (1%)by weight of shale,nor more than five-percent(5%)of weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-413-A. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. It shall have a wear of not more than forty-percent(40%)when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-410-A. 4. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings,coarse aggregate will be subjected to a five(5)cycle magnesium sulfate soundness of not more than eighteen-percent(18%)when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-411- A. a. Crushed recycled hydraulic cement concrete is not subject to the five(5)cycle soundness test 5. When tested by approved methods,the coarse aggregate,including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. Table 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Percent Passing on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 21/2 2 11/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 No. No. Grade No. Size 4 8 80 50 20 0 1 2" 100 to to to to 100 85 40 5 2 95 35 10 0 (467)* 11/2" 100 to to to to 100 70 30 5 95 60 25 0 3 11/2" 100 to to to to 100 90 60 5 4 95 25 0 0 (57)* 1" 100 to to to to 100 60 10 5 5 90 20 0 0 (67) 3/4" 100 to to to to 100 55 10 5 6 90 40 0 0 (7) 1/2" 100 to to to to 100 70 15 5 70 0 7 3/8" 100 to to 95 25 95 20 0 8 3/8" 100 to to to 100 65 10 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. 6. The Loss by Decantation as tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-406-A and the allowable weight of clay lumps shall not exceed one-percent(1%),or the value shown on the Drawings,whichever is smaller. a. In the case of aggregates made primarily from crushing stone,if the material finer than the No.200 sieve is established to be the dust of fracture and essentially free from clay or shale as established by TxDOT Tex-406-A,Part III,the limit may be increased to one and one-half percent(1.5%). b. When crushed limestone coarse aggregate is used in concrete pavements,the decant may not exceed one- percent (1%) but not more than three-percent (3%) if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is determined to be at least sixty-seven percent(67%) calcium carbonate in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 406-A,Part III. C. Fine Aggregate 1. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean,hard,durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof,with or without a mineral filler. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt,alkali,vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than half-percent(0.5%)by weight of clay lumps in accordance with TxDOT Tex-413-A. 3. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities in accordance with TxDOT Tex-408-A,it shall not show a color darker than standard. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than sixty-percent(60%)by weightwhen tested in accordance with TxDOT standard laboratory test procedure Tex- 612-J and as noted in TxDOT Item 421 for all concrete subject to direct traffic. 5. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-401-A,the fine aggregate or combinations of aggregates,including mineral filler,shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. Table 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate No. No. Grade No. 3/8" No.4 No.8 No.16 No.30 No.50 100 200 0 0 15 35 65 90 97 1 0 to to to to to to to 5 20 50 1 75 1 90 1 100 1 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand,the percent retained on the No.200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85,the retainage on the No.50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. 6. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test(TxDOT Tex-203-F). a. The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the Drawings,whichever is greater. 7. For all classes of concrete except K,the fineness modulus for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10 as determined by TxDOT Tex-402-A. 8. For all class K concrete,the fineness modulus for fine aggregates shall be between 2.60 and 2.80 as determined by TxDOT Tex-402-A. D. Mineral Filler 1. Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material with 100% passing the No.30 sieve and 65%to 100%passing the No.200 sieve when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-401-A. E. Storage 1. The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. 2. If the aggregates are stored on the ground,the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. a. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 3. When conditions require the use of two (2) or more sizes of aggregates,they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. a. Where space is limited,stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. 4. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. a. If segregation is apparent,the stockpile shall be remixed and tested. 5. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner,all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least twenty-four(24)hours to reduce the free moisture content. F. Supplementary Cementing Materials(SCM) 1. Fly Ash a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4610 1) Do not use class C Fly Ash in sulfate-resistant concrete 2. Ultra-Fine Fly Ash(UFFA) a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4610 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag(GGBFS) CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4620,Grade 100 or 120 4. Silica Fume a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4630 5. Metakaolin a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4635 2.04Mixing Water 1. Water for use in concrete shall be free from oils,acids,organic matter or other deleterious substances. 2. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing,but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. 3. Water shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421. a. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. The water source shall be able to supply the required amounts of water and shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. S. The water source shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately. 2.05Admixtures 1. Admixtures must be in conformance with TxDOT DMS-4640 and ASTM C 494 or ASTM C 1017 (for flowing concrete only). a. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Dosage rates of admixtures shall be determined prior to use by means of trial mixes made with materials to be used and under anticipated construction conditions. 3. Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. 4. Storage shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 2.06Mortar and Grout 1. Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of one(1)part hydraulic cement,two(2)parts finely graded sand, and sufficient water to make the mixture plastic and can be easily handled and spread by trowel. 2. When required to prevent color difference,white cement shall be added to produce the color required. 3. When required by the Owner,latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. 2.07Epoxy 1. Epoxy materials shall conform to TxDOT DMS-6100. 2. Epoxy Bonding Compound for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete or other structural material a. Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be a two component,100%solids,moisture insensitive system. 3. Epoxy Grout for Epoxy patch on non-horizontal surfaces to concrete a. Epoxy Compound shall be a low-modulus,high viscosity,moisture insensitive system. 2.08 Expansion Joint Material 1. Preformed Fiber Material a. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. b. At the Contractor's option,the material shall be one of the following types,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings: 1) Asphalt Board a) Asphalt Board shall consist of two (2) liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. b) Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. c) When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-524-C,the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch(1")in three and one-half inches(3 1/2"). d) Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751 2) Wood a) Shall be Filler board of selected stock. b) Use wood of density and type as follows: CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (1) Clear,all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. (2) Clear,all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 3) Rebonded Neoprene Filler a) Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed-cell neoprene particles,rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness of the dimensions shown on Drawings. b) Filler material shall have the physical properties in Table 3 and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1752,Type 1 where applicable: Table 3 Filler Material Properties Property Method Requirement Color ASTM D1752 Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752 Type 1 40 PCF Min Recovery ASTM D1752 Type 1 90%Min. Compression ASTM D1752 Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752 Type 1 0.25 In.Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752 Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75%Min c) The manufacturers shall furnish the Owner with certified test results as to the compliance with the above requirements and a twelve-inch (12") x twelve-inch (12") x one-inch (1") sample from the shipment for approval. 2. Joint Sealing Materials a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements: 1) The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressible. 2) The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 3) The material shall be one of the following: a) Class 1-a (1) Two component,Synthetic Polymer,Cold Extruded Type. (2) Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. (3) This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. (4) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature leveling. (5) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77'F,+ 3°F maximum for twenty- four(24)hours. b) Class 1-b (1) Two component,Synthetic Polymer,Cold Pourable,Self Leveling Type. (2) Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. (3) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77'F+ 3°F maximum for three (3) hours. c) For Sidewalks and Driveways (1) Shall be Greenstreak#610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 4) Performance Requirements a) Class 1-a and 1-b, when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and requirements as follows: (1) It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured,or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60'F. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (2) Penetration at 77'F. (a) 150 gm.cone,5 sec.,max.cm..................0.90 (3) Bond and Extension 75%,0°F,5 cycles (a) Dry Concrete Blocks............................Pass (b) Wet Concrete Blocks............................Pass (c) Steel Blocks(Primed if specified by Manuf.)...Pass (d) Flow at 200'F.................................None (e) Water Content%by weight,max.................5.0 (4) Resilience (a) Original sample min.%(cured).................50 (b) Oven aged at 158°F min.%....................50 (5) For Class 1-a Material Only (a) Cold Flow(10 min.)............................None b) Greenstreak#610 (1) Provide flexible,modified PVC(polyvinyl chloride)"G-SEAL"as manufactured by Greenstreak,profile style number 610. (2) The modified PVC paving cap seal shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of which the basic resins are prime virgin materials. The compound shall not contain any scrapped or reclaimed material whatsoever. (3) Performance Requirements as noted in Table 4: Table 4 Performance Requirements Property Test Method Requirements Tensile Strength ASTM D412-92 2350 psi min. Elongation ASTM D412-92 375%min. Hardness ASTM D2240-95 81+/-3 Shore A Oil Swell (ASTM Oil#3,70 hrs @ ASTM D471 95 +/- 15%by vol. 2120 F change in +/- 15%by wt. volume/weight) Ozone Resistance (20%strain,300 pphm,70 ASTM D518-91 No Cracking hrs @ 1040 F) UV Resistance ASTM G53 2200 psi minimum (2000hrs @ 701,F) 200%minimum Abrasion Resistance (10,500 cycles,1000 g ASTM D 3884 Material Loss: 0.35 grams max. load) Adhesive Bond Strength ASTM D412-92 1000 psi min. Tensile Strength retained: 90% Results after Heat Aging ASTM D573 Elongation retained: (24 hrs @ 70°F) 90% Hardness change: +/-3 Shore A CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract,Specifications, Drawings,Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another,the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Forms A. General 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 1113.11 CONCRETE FORMS 2. Opening in forms shall be provided,if needed,for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. 3. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. 4. If,at any stage of the work,the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately,if necessary,and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.03 Reinforcing Steel A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL 3.04 Equipment A. Concrete Plant 1. Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. a. If the Plant is moved,it must be recertified. b. Plants with a licensed engineer's inspection are required to be reinspected every two(2)years. c. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner's representative. d. When equipment fail to meet requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. 2. The batching Plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. B. Mixing Equipment 1. General a. All equipment,tools,and machinery used for mixing materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. b. When equipment fail to meet specification requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. c. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the required specifications. 1) The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. d. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements of this specification,adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed,and moved to the placement site,in non-agitating equipment. 2. Mixers and Agitators a. General 1) Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type. b. Volumetric Mixers 1) Capable of combining the materials into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. 2) Shall have rating plates defining the capacity and the performance of the mixers in accordance with the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau or equivalent. 3) Mixers shall comply with ASTM C685. 4) Provide information showing the mixers meet the uniformity test requirements of TxDOT Tex-472- A. c. Stationary Mixers CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1) Capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified and capable of discharging concrete which satisfies five (5)of the six(6)requirements of TxDOT Tex-472-A. 2) Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection,cleaning and repair of blades. 3) Mixer shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades. a) Any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. b) Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's design when any part or section is worn as much as ten percent (10%) below the original height of the manufacturer's design. 4) If deemed not adequate or suitable for the work,it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Owner and a suitable mixer shall be provided by the Contractor. 5) Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered a stationary mixer. d. Truck Mixer 1) Capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified and capable of discharging concrete which satisfies five (5)of the six(6)requirements of TxDOT Tex-472-A. 2) Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. 3) Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection,cleaning and repair of blades. 4) Mixer shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades. a) Any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. b) Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's design when any part or section is worn as much as ten percent (10%) below the original height of the manufacturer's design. 5) If deemed not adequate or suitable for the work,it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Owner and a suitable mixer shall be provided by the Contractor. 6) An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately going the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. 7) Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified rpm will not require a separate engine. 8) All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum as specified may be readily verified. a) Counters (1) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters that will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revisions. (2) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the Plant not less than fifty(50)nor more than seventy(70) revolutions at mixing speed,transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. b) The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. 9) Shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. e. Agitators 1) Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type,capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. 2) Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Hauling Equipment 1. All equipment,tools,and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 2. Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C-94. a. Equipment with a licensed engineer's inspection is required to be reinspected every two(2)years. b. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner's representative. c. When equipment fail to meet requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. 3. Provide equipment capable of maintaining the mixed concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. 4. When using non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete,provide equipment with smooth,mortar tight metal containers equipped with gates that prevent accidental discharge. D. Placing Equipment 1. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Owner. a. Concrete may be transported by buckets,chutes,buggies,belt conveyors,pumps or other acceptable methods. b. Chutes,troughs,conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. c. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. 1) Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clean of the concrete. d. Belt Conveyors and Pumps 1) When belt conveyors or pumps are used,sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. 2) Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. e. Pipes 1) Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. 2) Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes,tubes or other aluminum equipment. f. Troughs and Chutes 1) When steep slopes are necessary,the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. 2) Open troughs and chutes shall extend,if necessary,down inside the forms or through holes left in them. E. Scales 1. Check prior to use,after each move,or whenever the accuracy or adequacy is questioned,and at least once every six(6)months. 2. Immediately correct deficiencies and recalibrate. 3. Provide a record of calibration showing the scales are in compliance with ASTM C94. 4. Check batching accuracy of volumetric water hatching devices and admixture dispensing devices at least every ninety(90)days. S. Perform daily checks as needed to confirm accuracy. F. Testing Equipment 1. Shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the tests and in working condition to provide accurate information. 3.05Classification and Mix Design A. General a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, for the class(es) of concrete specified. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with ACI 211. C. The Contractor shall perform,at his own expense,the work required to substantiate the design. d. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the Drawings. e. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility,the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Owner; however,this will not relieve him of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. B. Aggregate a. Coarse Aggregate Factor 1) The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed forty-eight percent(48%)of the total dry loose volume,the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. 2) The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1,2 and 3 aggregate. b. Recycled Aggregate 1) Limit recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete as a coarse or fine aggregate to Class A,B,D,E,and P concrete. 2) Limit recycled crushed concrete fine aggregate to a maximum of twenty percent (20%) of the fine aggregate. C. Strength 1. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 5,the Contractor may use an approved water reducing or retarding admixture,or the Contractor shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics that will produce the required results. Table 5 Classes of Concrete Design Maximum Strength' Water to Coarse Class of Concrete Aggregate Concrete (psi) Ration Grades3,4 General Usages Inlets,Manholes,Curb,Gutter,Curb& A 3,000 0.60 1-4,8 gutter,Concrete retards,Sidewalks, Driveways,Backup walls,Anchors B 2,000 0.60 2-7 Riprap,Small roadside signs,and Anchors Drilled shafts,Bridge Substructure,Bridge railing,Culverts(except top slab of direct C 3,600 0.45 1-6 traffic culverts),Headwalls,Wing walls, Approach slabs,Concrete traffic barrier (cast-in-place) D 1,500 0.60 2-7 Riprap E 3,000 0.50 2-5 Seal Concrete CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4,000 min 6 Railroad structures;occasionally for bridge F Or as Noted on 0.45 2 5 piers,columns,or bents Drawings 4,000 min 6 Prestressed concrete beams,Boxes,Piling, H Or as Noted on 0.45 3 6 Concrete traffic barrier(precast) Drawings 4,000 min 6 Bridge slabs,Top slabs of direct traffic S Or as Noted on 0.45 2 5 culverts Drawings 4,000 min P Or as Noted on 0.45 2-3 Concrete pavement Drawings 5,500 min DC6 Or as Noted on 0.40 6 Dense concrete overlay Drawings 4,600 min CO6 Or as Noted on 0.40 6 Latex-modified concrete overlay Drawings 4,000 min 6 Slurry displacement shafts,Underwater LMC Or as Noted on 0.40 6 8 drilled shafts Drawings 1-minimum twenty-eight(28)day f c for all types of cement Z-Maximum water-cement or water-cementations ratio by weight 3-Do not use Grade 1 coarse aggregate except as approved by Owner,may not be used in Drilled shafts "-Unless otherwise approved,use Grade 8 coarse aggregate in extruded curbs. 5-For information only,see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 6-Structural Concrete Classes 2. A higher class of concrete with equal or lower water to cementations material ratio may be substituted for the specified class of concrete. 3. To account for production variability and to ensure minimum compressive strength requirements are satisfied, the mix shall be over-designed in accordance with Table 6. Table 6 Over Design Compressive Strength Requirements CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Standard Deviation(psi) No.of Tests 300 400 500 600 700 15 470 620 850 1,120 1,390 20 430 580 760 1,010 1,260 30+ 400 530 670 900 1,130 Note: When designing the mix the values above shall be added to the minimum design strength in Table 5 Number of tests of a concrete mixture used to estimate D. Cementations Material 1. Unless otherwise specified or approved,limit cementations material content to no more than 700 lb per cubic yard. 2. Use only Type III cement only in precast concrete or when specified or permitted. E. Admixtures 1. Water Reducing or Retarding Agents a. Water reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. b. When water reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor,reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. 2. Entrained Air Agents a. Entrained air will be required in all concrete,except Class B,in accordance with Table 7 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Table 7 Air Entrainment %Air Aggregate Grade No. Moderate Exposure Severe Exposure 1 4 5 2 41/2 51/2 3 41/2 51/2 4 41/2 6 5 5 6 6 51/2 7 7 6 71/2 8 6 71/2 1. For specified concrete strengths above 5,000 psi a reduction of one(1)percentage point is permitted. b. Tolerances 1) Shall contain the proper amount as required in Table 7 with a tolerance of plus or minus one and one- half percentage(1 1/2%)points. 2) If the amount is beyond the above tolerance then the load of concrete will be rejected. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. Consistency 1. General a. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. b. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. c. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. d. Modifications 1) In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water,the Contractor may use,or the Owner may require,an approved water reducing or retarding agent or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates,or aggregates with different characteristics,which will produce the required results. 2) Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. 2. Slump a. Slump shall be in accordance with Table 8 using the lowest slump possible that can be placed and finished efficiently without segregation or honeycombing. Table 8 Slump Requirements Recommended Design Maximum And Design and Placement Slump 1 Placement Class of Slump 2 Concrete Concrete Use (inch) (inch) A Inlets,Manholes,Curb,Gutter,Curb&gutter, 4 or Concrete retards,Sidewalks,Driveways, 2.5 or B Backup walls,Anchors,Riprap,Small road Owner Owner Approved A roved D signs,Slip-formed,Extruded PP Thin Walled Section(9 inch or less) 4 5 Approach slabs,Concrete overlays,Caps, 3 4 Columns,Piers,Wall sections(over 9 inch) C Bridge railing,Concrete traffic barrier(cast-in- 4 61/2 F place) Drilled shafts(dry) 61/2 71/2 Drilled shafts(underwater,under slurry) 5 6 H Prestressed concrete beams,Boxes,Piling, 4 61/2 Concrete traffic barrier(precast) / CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 S Bridge slabs,Top slabs of direct traffic culverts 4 5 1/2 Concrete pavement(slip-formed) 1 1/2 3 P Concrete pavement(formed) 4 61/2 DC Dense concrete overlay 3/4 2 CO Latex-modified concrete overlay 3 71/2 LMC Slurry displacement shafts,Underwater drilled 6 81/2 shafts 1-Recommended design and placement slump shall be as shown or as approved by Owner 2-Maximum design and placement slump shall be as shown or as approved by Owner b. Concrete that exceeds the maximum acceptable slump at time of delivery will be rejected. c. When approved, the slump may be increased above the values shown in Table 8 using chemical admixtures, provided that the admixture-treated concrete has the same or lower water-cement or water-cementations material ratio and does not exhibit segregation or excessive bleeding. 1) Mix design must be approved by the Owner. G. Mix Design Options 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421. H. Sulfate-Resistant Concrete 1. When sulfate-resistant concrete is required,use mix design options 1,2,3,or 4 given in below using Type I/II, II,V,IP,or IS cement in accordance with ACI 318. a. Option 1 1) Replace twenty percent(20%)to thirty-five percent(35%)of the cement with Class F fly ash. b. Option 2 1) Replace thirty-five percent(35%)to fifty percent(50%)of the cement with Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag c. Option 3 1) Replace thirty-five percent(35%)to fifty percent(50%)of the cement with a combination of Class F fly ash,Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag,or silica fume. d. Option 4 1) Use Type IP or Type IS cement. (Up to ten percent(10%) of a Type IP or Type IS cement may be replaced with Class F fly ash,Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag,or silica fume.) 2. Do not use Class C Fly Ash in sulfate-resistant concrete I. Trial Batches 1. Trial batches will be made and tested using all the proposed ingredients prior to the placing of concrete,and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture are changed. 2. Trail batches shall be in accordance with TxDOT 421. 3. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. 4. When Transit Mix concrete is to be used,the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. a. Batch size shall not be less than fifty percent(50%)of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. S. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. 3.06Mixing A. Mixing Conditions 1. General a. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Weather a. In threatening weather,which may result in conditions that will adversely affect quality of the concrete to be placed,the Owner may order postponement of the work. b. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall,or from freezing temperatures. c. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall,the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. d. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. B. Mixing 1. General a. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. b. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum,the mixing shall continue not less than one(1)minute for mixers of one(1)cubic yard or less capacity plus fifteen(15)seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. c. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. d. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. e. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. f. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand,cement,and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. g. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time,the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. 2. Mixing Water a. A portion of the mixing water,required by the batch design to produce the desired slump,may be withheld and added at the job site,but only with permission of the Owner and under his supervision. b. When water is added under the above conditions,it shall be thoroughly mixed in accordance with this specification delivery provision for water added at the job site. 3. Ready-Mix Plants a. General 1) It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirements of the governing specifications. b. Mixing 1) Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. 2) Mixers a) Stationary Mixed (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non- agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. b) Truck Mixed (1) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed(Transit-Mix Concrete),subject to the requirements of Mixing Equipment within this specification. 3.07Quality of Concrete A. General 1. The concrete shall be uniform and workable. 2. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. The cement content, maximum allowable water cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements herein. 4. Sampling and Testing a. During the process of the work,the Owner or Inspector will require the Contractor to test the concrete actually placed. b. Testing Requirements 1) Testing Rate shall be in accordance with Table 9: Table 9 Testing Schedule Class of Concrete Testing Rate 1,2 General Usage 3 1 Set Curb,Gutter,Curb&gutter Per 500 Linear Feet or less 1 Set Sidewalks,Driveways Per 4,000 Square Feet or less 1 Set A Inlets,Manholes Per 6 or less 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less Concrete retards,Backup walls, Or Anchors As required by Drawings and/or Owner 1 Set Riprap,Small roadside signs Per 50 cubic yards or less 1 Set B Per 30 cubic yards or less Anchors Or As required by Drawings and/or Owner 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less Culverts(except top slab of direct or traffic culverts),Headwalls,Wing C As required by Drawings and/or walls Owner Drilled shafts,Bridge Substructure, As required by Drawings and/or Owner Bridge railing,Culverts(except top slab of direct traffic culverts), CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Headwalls,Wing walls,Approach slabs,Concrete traffic barrier(cast- in-place) 1 Set D Riprap Per 50 cubic yards or less E As required by Drawings and/or Owner Seal Concrete F As required by Drawings and/or Owner Railroad structures;occasionally for bridge piers,columns,or bents Prestressed concrete beams,Boxes, H As required by Drawings and/or Owner Piling,Concrete traffic barrier (precast) S As required by Drawings and/or Owner Bridge slabs,Top slabs of direct traffic culverts 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less P Concrete pavement or As required by Drawings and/or Owner DC As required by Drawings and/or Owner Dense concrete overly CO As required by Drawings and/or Owner Latex-modified concrete overly LMC As required by Drawings and/or Owner Slurry displacement shafts, Underwater drilled shafts 1-For information only,see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class z-Test rates are per day of work unless Owner approves otherwise 3-For information only,see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 2) Testing of Fresh Concrete a) Air Content (1) In accordance with TEX-414-A or TEX-416-A b) Slump (1) In accordance with TEX-415-A c) Temperature (1) In accordance with TEX-422-A d) Making and Curing Strength Specimens (1) In accordance with TEX-447-A 3) Testing of Hardened Concrete a) Compressive Strength (1) In accordance with TEX-418-A b) Flexural Strength (1) In accordance with TEX-448-A c) Maturity (1) In accordance with TEX-426-A CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in the appropriate test procedure for the purpose of curing test specimens. 1) It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the test cylinders are handled in a manner to ensure that the test results are accurate. d. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight(28) day compressive tests,job control will be by seven(7)day compressive tests that are shown to provide the required twenty-eight(28)day strength, based on results from trial batches. e. If the required seven(7)day strength is not secured with the cement specified in the mix design,changes in the batch design shall be made f. All test results shall be sent to the Owner upon completion of test. 3.08 Expansion Joints A. Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the Drawings. B. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material,shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. C. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete,these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. D. Prior to placing the sealing material,the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. E. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. F. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. G. Where preformed fiber joint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails,to prevent the material from falling out. H. The top one-inch(1")of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. I. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. J. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 3.09 Construction Joints A. The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. B. The term monolithic placement shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. C. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the Drawings. D. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Owner,and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the Drawings for joints in similar locations. E. Unless otherwise provided,construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. F. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints,except when horizontal. G. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the Drawings. H. The material will be specified on the Drawings without referenced to joint type. I. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. J. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. K. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material,laitance,dirt or foreign material and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. L. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 3.10Delivery of Concrete A. General 1. Delivery of concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Owner for continuous placement. 2. In all cases,the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. 3. The Contractor shall satisfy the Owner that adequate standby equipment are available. B. Delivery Tickets 1. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching,mixing and delivery date. 2. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. C. Mixers 1. General a. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one (1) sack cement, three (3) parts sand and sufficient water)shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix Plants. 2. Stationary Mixer a. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation,the mixing time for one(1)cubic yard of concrete shall be one(1)minute plus fifteen(15)seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. b. This mixing time shall start when all cement,aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. c. The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. d. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-fourth(1/4)of the specified mixing time. e. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. f. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this specification,shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. g. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. D. Truck Mixers 1. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed sixty-three percent(63%)of the total volume of the drum. 2. When used as an agitator only,the loading shall not exceed eighty percent(80%)of the drum volume. 3. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. E. Mixing Speed and Revolutions 1. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer,and each complete batch(containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than seventy (70) nor more than one-hundred (100) revolutions of the drum at mixing speed a. Except that when water is added at the job site,twenty-five(25)revolutions(minimum)at mixing speed, will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix 2. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. 3. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. 4. The agitating speed shall be not less than one(1)nor more than five(5)rpm. 3.11 Placing Concrete A. General a. Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Owner fully of the construction methods he proposes to use,the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. b. The Contractor shall give the Owner sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms,reinforcing steel placement,and other preparations. C. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. d. Concrete mixing,placing and finishing shall be done in daylight hours,unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. e. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finish work. 1) If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started, the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. 2) In case of drop in temperature,the provisions set forth in the"Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 f. Concrete not meeting the slump,workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification, shall not be placed in the structure or pavement g. Any concrete that is not in place within the limits outlined in shall not be used. h. The placing shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. i. The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement,and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. j. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than five feet(T),except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. 1) Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. k. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Owner. 1. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. 1) The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. 2) Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. M. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than thirty-six inches (36")in thickness,unless otherwise directed by the Owner. n. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. B. Temperature and Time Allowances 1. The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 500 F. 2. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface unless in accordance with section 03 35 29.13 CONCRETE FINISHING. 3. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch,and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the time in Table 10: Table 10 Maximum Time Interval between Addition of Cement to Placing Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete Up to 80'F 30 minutes Over 80'F 15 minutes Agitated Concrete 90'F or above 45 minutes 750 F to 890 F 60 minutes 35'F to 74'F 90 minutes 4. The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the temperature-time maximums shown in Table 10: a. Thirty(30)minutes for direct traffic culverts, b. One(1)hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed thirty(30)minutes for non-agitated concrete. 5. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. a. Not more than one(1)hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placement of concrete. b. Authorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one(1)continuous operation. 6. Consolidation CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-21 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. b. Vibrators that operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted,except on steel forms. c. At least one(1)stand-by vibrator shall be provided for emergency use in addition to the ones required for placement. d. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. e. Prior to the beginning of work,a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and through working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures,and into the corners and angles of the forms. f. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at point eighteen inches (18) to thirty inches (30)apart,and slowly withdrawn. g. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. h. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated,allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. i. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. j. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation,and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced,but not long enough to cause segregation. k. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary, to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. 7. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a Plant located off the structure. a. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four full curing days. b. If carts are used,timber Planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. c. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. d. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. 8. After concrete has taken its initial set, at least one (1) curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. C. Placing Concrete in Cold Weather 1. General a. Concrete shall be placed as recommended in ACI 306. b. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. c. Permission given by the Owner for placing during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. d. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete a. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40'F and rising. b. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32'F. c. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature, the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly,in accordance with the following: 1) The water temperature shall not exceed 180' F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150'F. 2) The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. 3) The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50'F and 85'F before introduction of the cement. d. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: 1) Slab Concrete a) The temperature of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50°F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40'F for an additional 72 hours. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-22 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2) Piers, Culverts walls, Retaining walls,Parapets,Wing walls,Bottoms of Slabs,and Other Similar Formed Concrete a) The temperature at the surface of all concrete shall be maintained at 40' F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. b) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground,shall be maintained above 50'F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. 3) Protection shall consist of providing additional covering,insulated forms or other means,and if necessary,supplementing such covering with artificial heating. 4) Curing as specified in Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. 5) When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before placement. 6) Sufficient extra test specimen will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed prior to form removal and acceptance. 3. Precast Concrete a. A fabricating Plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering,which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities, may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: 1) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one(1)hour after the concrete is placed. 2) This shall not be construed to be one(1)hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one(1)hour. 3) For fabricating Plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products, the requirements of Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING will apply. D. Placing Concrete in Hot Weather 1. Extra care shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the concrete being placed and to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. 2. When the outdoor ambient temperature is more than 907,the temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 907. 3. When high temperatures,low humidity and dry winds create conditions suitable for plastic cracking,an evaporation retarder may be required to be applied by spray one or more times during the finishing operation. 4. A fog spray shall be used during finishing operations. S. Curing shall be started as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit it without damage. E. Placing Concrete in Water 1. Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the Drawings or with written permission by the Owner. a. Its surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. 2. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. 3. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing,nor until it has set for at least thirty-six (36) hours. 4. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method,and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. a. Tremie 1) The tremie shall consist of a watertight tube fourteen inches(14")or less in diameter. 2) It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. 3) It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-23 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4) The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. b. Bottom-dump Buckets 1) Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard(1/2 cubic yard). 2) It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel;the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. 3) The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. F. Placing Concrete in Box Culverts 1. In general,construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings. 2. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than four-feet(4')in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1)nor more than two(2)hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. 3. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. 4. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Section 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING. 5. Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonable smooth float finish. G. Placing Concrete in Foundations and Substructures 1. Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Owner and permission has been given to proceed. 2. Placing of concrete footings upon seal courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal course cleaned. 3. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. 4. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 5. When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons,forms may be omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing. a. Note: Measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions as shown on the Drawings. 3.12 Epoxy A. General Precaution 1. The Contractor is advised to become familiar with type of epoxy, method of application, and its basic limitations prior to using the epoxy. B. Bond New Concrete to Existing Concrete 1. Surface Preparation a. The existing concrete or structural surface to which the new concrete is to be bonded shall be roughened and cleaned. b. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds,waxes and all foreign material. c. Cleaning shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 1) Washing will not be allowed,unless authorized by Owner. d. During application of bonding compound,surface may be dry,moist,or wet,but surface shall be free of standing water. 2. Proportioning and Mixing a. The epoxy shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. b. The epoxy shall be used in a neat condition(without aggregate filler). 3. Application of Epoxy a. The epoxy-bonding compound shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. b. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. C. Concrete Overlay 1. The concrete overlay shall be in accordance with the Drawings and this section. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-24 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. The concrete overlay shall be applied over the epoxy within a period of time that shall not exceed sixty percent (60%)of the tack free time of the epoxy. a. It is important for the Contractor to note that these times vary with the temperature and pot time. b. The allowable times must be determined from the tack free times that are provided by the manufacturer. 3. If the allowable period of time is allowed to elapse before concrete overlay can be placed,another layer of epoxy shall be applied prior to placement of the concrete. D. Epoxy Grout for patch to non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: 1. Surface Preparation a. The existing concrete or structural surface to be bonded to shall be cleaned. b. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds,waxes and all foreign material. c. Cleaning shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 1) Washing will not be allowed,unless authorized by Owner. d. During application of bonding compound,surface may be dry,moist,or wet,but surface shall be free of standing water,unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer 2. Proportioning and Mixing a. The epoxy shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer instruction. b. The epoxy may be mixed with dry masonry sand. c. Sand shall conform to ASTM C-144 with 100%passing a No. 8 sieve and not more than 15%to 35% passing a No.50 mesh sieve. d. The amount of sand filler shall not exceed 3/4 to 1(loose sand to epoxy by volume). 3. Application a. Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. b. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-25 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the finishing of concrete as required to complete the project 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 427,Surface Finishes for Concrete B. American Concrete Institute 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All equipment,tools,and machinery used and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 2.02 Screed A. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. B. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. C. The screed shall be provided with a metal edge. 2.03 Hand Operated Fogging Equipment A. Shall be capable of producing a fine mist,not a spray. B. Equipment shall pump water or water and air under high pressure through a suitable atomizing nozzle. C. Shall be portable enough to use in the direction of any prevailing wind and adaptable for intermittent use to prevent excessive wetting of the concrete. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. 3.02 Treatment and Finishing of Horizontal Surfaces Except Roadway Slabs A. All uniformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. B. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. C. After the concrete has been struck off,the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. D. Sidewalks 1. Shall be given a broom finish or may be stripped with a brush, as indicated on the Drawings or specified by the Owner. 2. Finish shall be perpendicular to the centerline providing a slip resistant surface. E. Other surfaces 1. Shall be float finished and stripped with a fine brush leaving a fine-grained texture. 3.03 Finish of Roadway Slabs A. As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working, the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screed, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 11-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Screed 1. The surface of the concrete shall be screed a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface,true to grade and free of voids. 2. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. 3. If necessary, the screed surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size,or hand floated from bridges over the slab. C. When required by the Owner,the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled ten- foot (10') straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. 1. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. 2. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. 3. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straight-edge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated, making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. 4. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch(3/16")will be acceptable,if in the opinion of the Owner it will not affect the riding qualities. S. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions,high spots,voids or rough spots. D. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. E. Finish 1. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen,the surface shall be given a finish as indicated within the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. F. In all roadway slab finishing operations,camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 3.04 Finishing Exposed Surfaces A. Concrete shall be finished as required for the respective items or as otherwise specified on the Drawings. B. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. C. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: 1. After form removal, all porous or honeycombed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. 2. Featheredges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. 3. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. 4. If judged repairable by the Owner,large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Owner. S. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. 6. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing,shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch(1/2")and the surface repaired. 7. All fines,runs,drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces that remain exposed. 8. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. 9. Grease,oil,dirt,curing compound,etc.,shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. 10. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. 11. Repairs shall be dense,well bonded and properly cured,and when made on surfaces that remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 11-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the curing of concrete as required to complete the project 1.02 elated Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318,Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. Texas Department of Transportation Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants" C. AASHTO Method T-26,"Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in Concrete" 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Membrane Curing A. Membrane curing materials shall comply with Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650. B. It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 400 Fahrenheit. C. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. D. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than four(4)hours nor more than seven (7) days after application. E. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. F. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface, at the rate of coverage specified herein, dry to touch in not more than four (4) hours and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. G. It shall not disintegrate,check,peel or crack during the required curing period. H. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. I. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers,which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name,the trade name of the material,and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. J. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. K. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the following: 1. 24 hours after application......................2 percent(2%) 2. 72 hours after application......................4 percent(4%) L. Type 1 (Resin Base Only) curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. 2.02 Mat Curing A. Wet Mat 1. Shall be one (1) of the following: a. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. b. Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.03 Water A. Water for use in curing shall be free from oils,acids,organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor than 1000 parts million of sulfates as SO4. B. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use. C. Tests shall be made in accordance with AASHTO Method T-26,except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. D. Seawater will not be permitted. E. Water that stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall inform the Owner fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing;shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts,and shall have the proposed method, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. C. Inadequate curing and/or facilities therefore shall be cause for the Owner to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. 3.02 Curing Period A. All concrete shall be cured fora period of seven 7 curing days except as noted below: Table 1 Curing Days of Selected Concrete Description Required Curing Top slabs of Direct Traffic Fourteen (14) curing days (Type I or III cement) Culverts Ten(10) curing days (Type 1I cement) Concrete Piling(non-prestressed) Ten(10) curing days B. When the air temperature is expected to drop below thirty-five (35) degrees Fahrenheit, the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. C. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature,taken in the shade away from artificial heat,is above fifty(50)degrees Fahrenheit for at least nineteen(19)hours, (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature at all surfaces of the concrete above forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit for the entire twenty-four(24)hours). D. The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. 3.03 Curing Methods A. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 2 and the following requirements for each method of curing: 1. Form Curing a. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. 2. Water Curing a. General 1) All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. b. Wet Mat 1) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 2 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Owner. 2) They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3) The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. 4) The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. 5) Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats, anchored positively to the forms,or to the ground,so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. 6) Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. c. Water Spray a) This method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keeps all unformed surfaces continuously wet. d. Ponding 1) This method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two-inches(2") of approved clean granular sand material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch depth of water. 2) Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated sand. 3. Membrane Curing a. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs,gutters,retards, sidewalk, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the Drawings by impervious membrane method. b. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the Drawings, either Type 1 or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1 (Resin Base Only)will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top of direct traffic culverts. c. Membrane curing shall be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. d. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. e. When membrane is used for complete curing,the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. f. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. g. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. h. Only one(1)type of curing compound will be permitted on any one(1) structure. i. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. j. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Owner,but not less than one(1)gallon per 180 square feet of area. k. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of applications of the compound. 1. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. m. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement(base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. n. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. o. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. p. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. q. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. r. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface and if the surface of the concrete has become dry,it shall be thoroughly moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. s. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 t. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes,or other defects;or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. u. To insure proper coverage,the Owner shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. 1) Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected,an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. v. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing,curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. w. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental to the work,the Contractor,when notified,shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. B. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 2 and the folio win requirements for each method of curing: Table 2 Curing Method REQUIRED PERMITTED Water Membrane Water Membrane Structure Unit Description for for Interim for for Interim Curing Curing Curing Curing Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval(Stub walls,risers,etc.)Other X superstructure concrete(wing walls,parapet walls,etc.) Concrete pavement,curbs,gutters,retards, sidewalks,driveways,medians,islands, X* X* concrete structures,concrete riprap,etc. All substructure concrete,culverts,box X* X* sewers,inlets,manholes,retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting,burlap polyethylene mats,or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing. CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 03 66 00—SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: This section specifies Polished Concrete to 400 grit Level 2 Finish. 1. Repair of holes, cracks & spalls. 2. Grinding, Applying Sealer and Hardener RetroPlate99, and Polished Concrete to Specified Finish Level. 3.Process/Application. 4.Applying TRCPS-SVTIPS (Solvent Protective Penetrating Sealer). 5. Applying VersaFlex Floor Joint Filers. B.Related Work: 1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.America Society for Testing and Materials: 1.ASTM C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 2. ASTM G23-81,Ultraviolet Light& and Water Spray. 3.ASTM C805,Impact Strength. 4.ASTM C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for curing Concrete. 5.ASTM C171, Stand Specification for Sheet Materials for curing Concrete. B.American Concrete Institute 1. ACI 302. IR-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C.National Floor Safety Institute(NFSI) 1.NFSI Test Method 101-A Standard for Evaluating High-Traction Flooring Materials, Coatings, and Finishes. 2.ANSI Standards D. Reunion Internationale des Laboratoires D'Essais et de Recherches sur les Materiaux et les Construction(RILEM). 1. RILEM Test Method 101-A Standard Measurement of Reduction of Moisture Penetration Through Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Concrete Polishing 03 66 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 A.Performance Requirements: Provide polished flooring that has been selected,manufactured and installed to achieve the following: 1.Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779, Method A, high resistance, no more than 0.008 inch (0.20 mm)wear in 30 minutes. 2. Reflectivity: Increase of 35% as determined by standard gloss meter. 3.Waterproof Properties: RILEM Test Method 11.4, 70% or greater reduction in absorption. 4. High Traction Rating:NFSI 101-A, non-slip properties. B.Design Requirements: 1. Hardened Concrete Properties: a. Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24 MPa). b. Normal Weight Concrete: No lightweight aggregate. c. Non-air entrained. 2.Placement Properties: a. Natural concrete slump of 4 '/z inches— 5 inches (114— 127 min). Admixtures may be used. b. Flatness Requirements: 1)Overall FF 50. 3. Curing Options: (Curing Compounds Can Be Used) a. Membrane forming curing compounds (ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, all resin, dissipating cure). 1)Acrylic curing and sealing compounds not recommended. b. Sheet membrane ASTM C171);polyethylene film not recommended. c. Damp Curing: Seven-day cure. C.Drain Clean-Outs: If possible move drain clean-outs from the middle of the rooms to be into storage or closets areas. D.Trench Drains/Floor Drains: If trench drains/floor drains are being installed on this project,prior to concrete placement remove drain covers and install wood panels to fit flush with the top of the drain. This should allow the concrete placement company to machine trowel over the top of the drains to achieve a flat and smooth finish. This process should eliminate the need of the finisher from walking on the slab and finishing this area by hand trowel. Removal of the wood after polishing is completed should be achieved by cutting down the middle of the wood to eliminate chipping the edges of the concrete. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Provide Contractors Qualifications Form for pre-qualifications to bid. Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2--423180 Rev 0/2024 B. General: Submit listed action submittals in accordance with Contract Documents and Section— Submittal Procedures. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows: 1. Typical layout including dimensions and floor grinding schedule. 2.Plan view of floor and joint pattern layout. 3.Areas to receive colored surface treatment. 4. Hardener, sealer, densifier in notes. D.Product Data: Submit product data,including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA®product sheet,for specified products. 1.Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 2.Preparation and concrete grinding procedures. 3. Colored Concrete Surface,Dye Selection Guides. 4. Color Chart for Polyurea Joint Material. 1.05 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties as cited in 1.03 Performance Requirements. 2. Certificate: a. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. b. Letter of certification from the National Floor Safety Institute conforming the system has been tested and passed phase Two Level of certification when tested by Method 101-A. c. Current contractor's certificate signed by manufacturer declaring contractor as an approval installer of Total Refinement Concrete Polishing System. 3.Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4.Provide Contractors Qualifications Form. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified. B.Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Section 01 78 00—Closeout Submittals. 1. Include: a. Manufacturer's instructions in maintenance renewal of applied treatments. Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 b. Protocols and product specifications for joint filling, crack repair and/or surface repair. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600—Product Requirements. 1.Provide submittal information within 35 calendar days after the contractor has receiving the owner's notice to proceed. B.Product data: 1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's specifications and test data. 2. Submit special concrete finishes describing product to be provided, giving manufacturer's name and product name for the specified material proposed to be provided under this section. 3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's recommended installation procedures; which when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data, curing time, and application requirements. 5. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other safety requirements. 6.Follow all special concrete finishes published manufacturer's installation instructions. 7. Execution/Application. C. Test Reports: 1.Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming compliance with specified performance criteria. 2.Provide certified test reports,prepared by an independent firm for the flatness FF50 for the slab. This test should be taken after placement of the concrete. D. Product Variations: TRCPS Disclaimer 1. TOTALLY REFINEMENT CONCRETE POLISHING SYSTEM will be applied to the concrete on this job.All concrete slabs are unique to each concrete placement and depending on the weather and the temperature of the day the chemical composition, mix design, porosity, age, texture, and color of the concrete substate, mottling and wide variations in color and intensity will produce its own individual Polished Concrete Character and Look. The owner also understands that the concrete will have variegated colors, unforeseen repairs, holes and pits in the slab and shrinkage cracks. The initial grinding process should remove most of the paste from the surface of the concrete. The variegated colors produced are unique to each concrete surface and depend upon the chemical composition,mix design, porosity, age, texture, and color of the concrete substrate. Concrete from different loads or pours, and in patched areas,may appear significantly different in color than adjacent areas, when treated with TRCPS-25LH & TRCPS-SVTIPS. Do NOT allow the finisher or his Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 helpers to walk in the new placed concrete, foot prints and depressed areas may appear in the polished concrete. The owner understands that the placement of the concrete is the most critical part of the polishing process. However, after the initial grind the architect and owner/rep will want to walk the floor with the polisher to best determine if any repairs need to be made to the concrete. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS & QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: 1. Applicator MUST be a certified member of CPAA, Concrete Polishing Association of America, and or certified by Totally Refinement Concrete Polishing System. 2. Certified Installer MUST have a minimum of 1 senior crew leader with at least 5 years of hands on experience and no less than 2 Skilled Workmen who have at least 2 years and are thoroughly trained and experienced in the concrete polishing industry. 3. The special concrete finish manufacturer MUST be TRCPS certify applicator. 4.Applicator MUST have a minimum of SEVEN years in the Concrete Polishing Industry and crew leader MUST have a minimum of 5 years in the concrete polishing industry. 5.Applicator MUST have successfully performed a minimum if 20 projects of at least 20,000 square feet each in size and provide references on each project. 6.Applicator MUST be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. 7.Applicator MUST own his equipment to perform work within scope of this project on a timely basis. 8. Reference Contractor Qualification Form to be submitted with product approval submission. B.Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Applicator MUST provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is certified applicator of TRCPS special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer. C.Mock-ups: 1.Apply mock-ups of each type finish, to demonstrate typical joints surface finish, color variation(if any), and standard of workmanship. 2.Mock-Up will be used to judge workmanship, concrete substrate preparation, operation of equipment,material application, color selection(if required) and shine. a. Build mock-ups approximately 30 square feet in the location indicated or if not indicated, as directed by the Architect or Owner's Representative. Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2--423180 Rev 0/2024 b. Notify Architect or Owner's Representative seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will be constructed when practical. c. Obtain from the Architect or Owner's Representative approval of mock-ups before starting construction. d. If the Architect or Owner's Representative determines that mock-ups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove them from the site and cast others until mock- ups are approved. e. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. f. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion. g. A repair must be included in the mock-up and approved by the Architect or the Owner's Representative. h. A sample of Edge Grinding & Polishing must be demonstrated and approved by Architect and Owner's Representative. D. Protection 1.Floor to be covered with Skudo paper. ALWAYS tape the paper to the paper and NEVER apply tape directly to the floor.Then cover with 1/8' masonite/hard wood and tape the wood to wood to prevent from sliding. After floor completion, the floor will be covered again using the same masonite/hard wood and new paper. 2.No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains from the concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential. (see Skudo) a. All hydraulic powered equipment MUST be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete. b. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab.If necessary to complete their scope of work, drop cloths will be places under vehicles at all times. c. No pipe cutting machines will be used on the inside floor slab. d. Steel will not be placed of interior slab to avoid rust staining. e. All equipment must be equipped with WHITE non-marking tires. f. All equipment must be checked daily for screws and other materials struck in the tires and removed. g. NO RED CHALK to be used on the floor. h. NO Spray/lacquer to be used on the floor as this floor is scheduled to be dyed/acid stained. These products can prevent dyes/stains from either adhering or reacting or reacting. i. NO SHARPIES to be used on the floor. Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2--423180 Rev 0/2024 j. DO NOT store materials on slab to be polished and dyed/stained.These materials can leave a ghost shadow imprint on the floor. E.Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination". a. Architect, Project Manager, Job Superintendent, Owner/Owner's Representative, Form Erection Contractor, Concrete Placement Contractor & Finisher, Concrete Placement Management Team&Job Foreman 1)Environmental requirements. 2) Scheduling and phasing of work. 3)Coordinating with other trades. 4)Reminder to all trades that they are working on a surface that is to become a finished surface. 5)Protection of adjacent surfaces. 6) Surface preparation. 7)Repair of defects and defective work prior to installation. 8)Cleaning prior to polishing. 9)Installation of polished floor finishes. 10)Protection of finished surface after installation. 11)Do not place any materials on the concrete surface that may cause staining, etching or scratching. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage. B.Dispense special concrete finish material form factory numbered and sealed containers.Maintain record of container numbers. C.Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Separate waste materials for Reuse and Recycling with concrete slurry in accordance with Section 0174 19—Construction Waste Management and Disposal. Concrete slurry must be removed off site to a facility that will recycle the waste. Owner is responsible to provide a location adjacent to the building for polished to dispose of concrete slurry and for disposal of this material. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental limitations: Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping performance. a. Concrete must have a Floor Flatness rating of at least FF50. b. Floor flatness will be measured by a third parry immediately after placement. c. Concrete must have a Floor Levelness rating of at least FL40. d. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 28 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application of TRPCS can begin. e. Application of RetroPlate99 shall take place prior to installation of equipment, trim work, cabinets and substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhabited concrete slab for application. B.Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application,for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. C. Owner will be responsible for providing adequate power, disposal of slurry products in compliance will all applicable codes. D. Owner will provide security for equipment if facility is not secure. E. Owner will be responsible for having the Flatness Test after placement. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS A. HARDENING/SEALING AGENT 1. TRPCS-25: a. Performance Criteria: 1)Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779—Up to 400%increase in abrasion resistance. 2)Impact Strength: ASTM C805—Up to 2 1%increase impact strength. 3)Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 —No adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray. 4)Reflectivity: Up to 30%increase in reflectivity. b. Manufacturer Representative: See Paragraph G, "Certified Applicators" B.PROTECTIVE IMPREGNATOR/SEALER 1. TRPCS-SVTIPS (Solvent Protective Penetrating Sealer) 2.Manufacturer Representative: See Paragraph G, "Certified Applicators" C. FLOOR JOINT MATERIAL 1. SL-65 CONTACT: VersaFlex Incorporated Concrete Polishing 03 66 00- 8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 386 South Adams Street Kansas City,Ks 66105 Manufactures Representative Roy Harvey (o) 800-561-6191 (c) 913-948-1006 D. HOLE REPAIR MATERIAL I. STONCLAD CONTACT: Stonhard Inc. Warren Miner (o) 800-854-0330 (c)281-658-1947 2. Silica sand to best match aggregate in the slab. 3. Color pigment if needed to best match concrete. E. FLOOR PROTECTION MATERIAL SKUDO CONTACT: SKUDO USA Inc. Brendon Smith (o)972-993-0777 (m) 650-704-2037 F. SURFACE FLOOR PROTECTION (3MTM ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protection) CONTACT: 3M Center Taylor Morrison (c)214-947-2909 G. CERTIFIED APPLICATORS 1. All The Marbles, Inc., 7700 Renwick, Ste 4A, Houston, TX 77081, 713-528-7787, info(a polishmyconcrete.net, Jerry S. Maltz 2. Johnson& Sons, 1501 Summit Ave., Suite#10,Plano TX 75074, 972-881-0391 3. Other Qualified as Approved by Architect. 2.02 RELATED MATERIALS A.Neutralizing Agent: 1. Tri-sodium Phosphate or Baking Soda. B. Water: 1. Potable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS Concrete Polishing 03 66 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 A.Examine substrate,with installer present,for conditions affecting perfonnance of finish.Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B.Verify that base slab meets finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section"Cast- In-Place Concrete", and Project Conditions above. C.Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents. 3.02 APPLICATION: Apparatus Bay 400 Grit Finish / Salt & Pepper — AFTER WALLS — NO COLOR A.Floor to be prepared for TRCPS application with specified (WET ONLY) diamond grinding steps, followed by the application of RetroPlate99 and final polishing will be DRY. (Note: The exact number of grinding and polishing steps required will be determined by the flatness achieved by the concrete finisher, along with the desired look that is specified by the Owner.) To achieve Totally Refined Polished Concrete each grit will require multiple grinding passes. In most case the initial 4-2 grinding process will require grinding passes north and south and passes east and west to properly prepare the concrete to achieve a Totally Refine Polished Concrete floor. 1. Level 2 Finish: 400 Grit NEW CONCRETE After WALLS: -NO COLOR a. Install control joint material as specified(SL-65). b. WET GRINDING ONLY starting with 50 grit hybrid/metal chip bonded diamond (since the floors will be tilted to the drains DO NOT use metal bonded abrasives). The initial grind, 50 grit, should require as many as 4—6 grinding pass over the floor to achieve a clean and refined concrete slab. Grinding passes should include North/South & East/West & and Crisscross to achieve Totally Refined Polished Concrete. c. After completion of initial grind, or some large portion of the floor, the owner/rep and architect will walk the floor with the polishing contractor to survey the cleaned and prepped slab to best view any unforeseen blemishes and determine the path to repair. d. Make needed repairs based on site visit.Repairs should be filled with Stonclad epoxy & sand/stuff/dye to best match the final polished concrete. Repair(s) must be flush with the slab. Repairs must have the same shine as the polished concrete. e. Continue WET grinding using the 100 grit hybrid/metal chip bonded. The second grind, 100 grit,this grind should required as many as 2-4 grinding pass over the floor to achieve a clean and refined concrete slab. Thoroughly clean the floor for the application of TRCPS-25LH will be applied to the point of rejection,spiff coated and allowed to dry overnight prior to beginning the final polishing steps. f. EDGE GRINDING/POLISHING: This process includes WET grinding ALL (needed)Edge &Drains being polished using water-feed hand-held grinders starting with 50/60 grit rigid profile either stone abrasive or resin. The process will be performed at the same grit 100&200. Each edge grinding process will be performed at the same grit as the field to have the edges best match the field. Because this job is Concrete Polishing 03 66 00- 10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 scoped to polish after the interior walls are installed,this means that ALL of the edges will be polished to best match the field. g. Continue WET polishing using 200 grit resin bonded diamonds followed with 400 grit resin bonded diamonds. h. Thoroughly clean the floor allowing the concrete to dry. i. Final steps to be Dry Polishing using 400 grit resin bonded diamonds. 2. a. Once the building has been closed-in and the building has been acclimated: 1)Fill control joints (FILL PRIOR TO STARTING POLISHING). 2)Application of TRCPS-SVTIPS. THIS project is an OILY ENVIRONMENT. b. Application of TRPC-SVTIPS is required for this project If project is an OILY ENVIRONMENT. C. Prior to Grand Opening Burnish using 400 grit diamond polish pad. (If within 50 miles of our office we will burnish at NO CHARGE.) B. GRINDING& SEALING,HARDENING and POLISHING of CONCRETE SURFACE 1. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 28 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application can begin. 2.Application is to take place at the end of the project. 3. Only a certified applicator shall apply Acid Stain and TRCPS-25LH & TRCPS-SVTIPS. Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample. 4.Grinding and Polishing Equipment must be a multiple head walk behind machine of various size and weight, with diamond tooling affixed to the heads for the purpose of grinding concrete. 5. Edge Grinding & Polishing Equipment must be Wet grinders wither hand held or walk behind. 6. This is a Wet& Dry process, contractor will need proper slurry extraction equipment and proper dust collection for final polishing steps. 7.Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen. 8.Finish edges to within '/4" of vertical surfaces where practical. Contractor must have wet edge grinding machines. 9.Polish to pre-determined level 400 grit based on test sample. C.REPAIR WORK Concrete Polishing 03 66 00- 11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-423180 Rev 0/2024 1. Repair hole(s) if needed. Drill out all holes creating a key-way hard edge at the top of the hole. Holes to be filled using StoneClad from StonHard, sand, and necessary dyes to best match color and particle of sand of the existing slab at a final polish. All repairs must be ground flat using stone abrasive. 2. Cracks/Pin hole(s) if need. Fill cracks using Quick Mender Lo from VersaFlex. Use dry concrete slurry/dust to best match the existing concrete for color. 3.Repair Spall(s)if needed. (Cut or Drill out all spalled edges,if possible cut a key-way hard edge at the top of the spall. Spall to be filled using StoneClad from StonHard, gravel, sand, and necessary dyes to best match color and particle of sand of the existing slab at a final polish. Spalled joint line should be over filled ground flat and joint re-cut. All repairs must be ground flat using rigid diamond or stone abrasives. D. EDGE WORK/TRENCH DRAINS 1. Option 1: This specification is written for AFTER THE WALLS that means that ALL the edges & trench drains will require edge grinding and polishing. Edge grinding to be accomplished using WET grinding process starting with stone abrasives or rigid grinding disk starting at 50/60 grit, 100 grit, 200 grit and 400 grit stone abrasive to match the body of the floor. Dry Polish using 400 resin after TRPC-25 has dried overnight. 2. Option 2: Border/Trim: Epoxy Paint 6"/ 8" from walls. All painted edges must have the initial edge grinding to remove the cream from surface of the concert to aid in the adhesion of the paint. E.FLOOR JOINTS/CONTROL JOINTS: If this is a new slab,joint material is not recommended for installation for 90-120 after concrete placement to allow for the concrete time to shrink. 1. Re-cut all control joints prior to installation of joint material. 2. If needed,tape off each line to eliminate any chance of staining from joint material. 3.Install full depth(unless otherwise told) and over fill. 4. Shave/cut off extra using new razor blades to cut as clean as possible. F.PROTECTIVE IMPREGNATOR/SEALER: If project is an OILY ENVIRONMENT. 1.If required, Seal Entire floor (oily situations) using TRPC-SVTIPS (Solvent Protective Penetrating Sealer)will allow oil to float on top of the surface. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING A. The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times. B.Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces, as necessary. C.Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations. D. Remove debris from jobsite: 1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers as provided by the owner, and in accordance with local regulations. Concrete Polishing 03 66 00- 12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-423180 Rev 0/2024 3.04 SPECIFIC QUALIFICATIONS/EXCLUSIONS: (NOTE: This section,though not mandatory, will greatly improve the understanding and necessary procedures for performing this work properly.) A.Any unforeseen or hidden conditions requiring repair will be billed at time and materials basis. B.Assumption that there is adequate access for electrical and water, and that adequate lighting is provided. 3 Phase 220 volt/ 80 amps service required. C. It is the responsibility of the owner to provide adequate waste slurry disposal. D. That the floor has not been exposed to the elements. If weather damage has occurred,additional grinding will be at time and materials. E.Removal of contamination of the slab by soil,foot prints, drag marks,welding marks,hydraulic fluids, or any other outside contaminant will be at time and materials, and will be performed to the best of ability,but without guarantee of removal. F.Assumption that the TRPCS will be applied prior to the installation of any floor covering. G.No other trades will be allowed in the area being worked on due to possible safety and floor contamination issues. H.The areas to receive the TRPCS will be delivered to the applicator in clean and swept condition. All equipment and supplies will be removed prior to turning the space over to the applicator. If the applicator is required to clean the space, and/or move other's supplies, staging and equipment, it will be done at time and materials. I.If a curing agent other than Ashford Formula is utilized that establishes a bond barrier and required removal prior to the application of the TRPCS, this will be done at time and material. J.PROTECTION OF THE FLOOR FOLLOWING THE APPLICATION OF THE TRPCS AND POLISHING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER. 3.05 PROTECTION A.Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B.Protection after the floor has been polished. 3.06 WARRANTY A. This process carries a 20-year warranty. END OF SECTION 03 66 00 Concrete Polishing 03 66 00- 13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2--423180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 05 50 00—METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide miscellaneous metal items fabricated from heavy gage ferrous metals and not provided with structural steel system. 1. Loose Lintels. 2. Pipe Bollard. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Other Sections in Division 5. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review shop drawings,product data, and, if requested,test reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.Use experienced installers. Use only AWS-certified welders. Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with relevant portions of the latest editions of applicable ASTM, ANSI, and AWS standards. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. In fabricating items which will be exposed to view,limit materials to those which are free from surface blemishes,pitting,rolled trade names, and roughness. B. Comply with following standards, as applicable: 1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36. 2. Steel plates, bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283 grade C. 3. Steel tubing,hot-formed,welded, seamless: ASTM A501. 4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306, grade 65, or ASTM A36. 5. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108. 6. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336. 7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525. Metal Fabrications 05 50 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 8. Stainless steel sheets: AISI type 302 or 304,24 gage,no. 4 finish. 9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10. 10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47. 11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40,black finish unless otherwise noted. 12. Concrete inserts: a. Threaded or wedge-type galvanize ferrous castings of malleable iron complying with ASTM A27. b. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot-dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A153. 13. Welded wire mesh: ASTM A185. 2.02 FASTENERS A. General: 1. For exterior use, and in wet areas,provide zinc-coated fasteners. 2. Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for the particular use. B. Comply with following standards as applicable: 1. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head regular type complying with ASTM A307, grade A. 2. Lag bolts: Square-head type,Fed Spec FF-B-561 3. Machine screws: Cadmium-plated steel type,Fed Spec FF-S-111. 4. Washers: a. Plain washers: Fed Spec FF-W-92,round, carbon steel. b. Lock washers: Fed Spec FF-W-84,helical spring type carbon steel. 5. Toggle bolts:Provide type,class,and style needed but complying with Fed Spec FF-B-588. 6. Anchorage devices: Provide expansion shield complying with Fed Spec FF-S-325. 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor subject to review by Architect. 2.04 A. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal items at exterior and where otherwise exposed to weather. 1. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525. 2. Galvanizing repair paint, zinc rich primer; Tnemec,PPG,ZRC Chemical Products or equal acceptable to the Architect. Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2.05 SHOP PAINT A. Rust-inhibitive primer for ungalvanized items: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer" or "Rustoleum Number 5769 Primer". B. Shop-prime all ungalvanized items except items to be embedded in concrete. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the reviewed Shop Drawings, use materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable strength and durability in the work of this Section. B.Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces, true to the required lines and levels, grinding exposed welds smooth and flush, forming exposed connections with hair-line joints, and using concealed fasteners wherever possible. C.Pipe Bollards: 6" diameter schedule 40 hot dip galvanized pipe bollards shall be installed 42" a.f.f. embedded 42" in concrete foundation. Welded'/z" diameter bat rods to be set in concrete foundation. Bollard to be filled with concrete. Provide PVC bollard cover. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job; allow for on-site cutting and fitting if field measurement not practical. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Set work accurately into position,plumb, level, and free from rack. 2. Another firmly into position. 3. Where field welding is required, comply with AWS-recommended procedures of manual- shielded metal-arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and methods to be used in correcting welding work. 4. Grind exposed welds smooth and touch up prime coats. 5. Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Immediately after erection, clean field welds,bolted connections, and abraded areas of priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming. C. Fabrications: Provide custom fabricated metal work including the following: 1. Structural support and bracing for operable partitions. 2. Other miscellaneous fabrications such as supports, brackets, railings, signposts, etc., as indicated on drawings. 3. Imbedded weld plates, inserts, studs and anchors. 4. Clip angles,brackets and corner and edge angles. 5. Miscellaneous framing and supports. D. Touch-up damaged coatings with shop primer and galvanizing repair paint. E. Clean work damaged or soiled by work of this Section. F. Finish painting is specified in Section 09 91 00 Painting. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 06 10 00—ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide miscellaneous wood blocking, bracing, nailers, furring and other concealed wood wherever shown or required, and sheathing for installation over metal framing. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.Use experienced workers. Deliver,handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.03 REFERENCE A. Factory Mutual Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing lumber: No. 2 Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, surfaced 4 sides, 15%maximum moisture content. B. Plywood, APA C-D exterior grade: For roof decking for metal roofing areas, and for other substrates,blocking and wall-mounted panels where required;`/4"thick. C. Fasteners for Borate treated or Fire Treated lumber and plywood: Hot-dip galvanize nails and spikes, cadmium-plated screws and similar corrosion-resistance fasteners. D. Pressure treated fire retarder materials: UL labeled and complying with UL FR-S Fire Hazard Classification, with a flame spread rating of 25 or less, where indicated on the drawings and where otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Pressure preservative treat all wood in contact with concrete, masonry, roofing, flashing, the ground, or that is subject to exposure to moisture. 1. Pressure treat in accordance with AWPI Standard P-5, NWMA Standards, and Fed. Spec. TTW-571 with a minimum of 0.25 lb. of preservative per cubic foot; provide 0.4 lb. minimum for members in contact with the ground. F. Sheathing: Denglass Gold water-resistant sheathing panels.Provide self-adhesive waterproofing joint tape manufactured for the purpose (not duct tape) and other necessary fasteners and accessories. G. Fasteners for preservative treated wood: 1. Nails: Type 316 stainless steel,ring shank. 2. Bolts, Nuts, Washers: Under '/z inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel, % inch and larger hot dip galvanized. No cold galvanized or electrogalvanized material shall be used. PART 3-EXECUTION Rough Carpentry 06 10 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide studs, joists, braces, furring, hailers, blocking, grounds and plywood substate where required. Set work plumb, level, straight and true; accurately cut and aligned. B. Secure all roof edge blocking in accordance with FMC 1-49 requirements.Install 50%additional fasteners at all corners. C. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relation to adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. D. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting,handling, fastening and working treated materials. E. Screw-apply sheathing to studs in running bond with inverted V joints to shed water. Apply self- adhesive waterproofing joint tape over all joints. F. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 0616 00—SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring. 4. Underlayment. 5. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data:For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3.For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevate temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM D5516. 4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Installer trained by a qualified trainer. B. Product Certificates: From weather barrier manufacturer, and accessory material manufacturer, certifying compatibility of sheathing accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the sheathing. C. Evaluation Reports: For the following,from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood. Sheathing 06 16 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer of glass-mat gypsum sheathing. B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and for preconstruction testing. 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly 150 sq. ft. incorporating backup wall construction, window, storefront, door frame and sill, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate crack and joint treatment and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of weather-barrier and sheathing assembly. a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection and testing of sheathing before external insulation and cladding are installed. b. Include junction with roofing membrane building corner condition, adjacent material intersection, and foundation wall intersection. C. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups until mockups are approved. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1.For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: A qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on field mockups. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery materials in original, unopened packaging and store in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. 1. Store within temperature limits required by manufacturer. 2. Store sheathing board supported on risers on a flat platform. Sheathing 06 16 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for safety and handling. B. Discard liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. C. Store accessory materials in a location with constant ambient temperatures of 40 to 80 deg F. D. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,securely anchored.Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Conditions: 1. Site Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Joint Flashing: Comply with manufacturer's cold weather application written instructions when atmospheric temperatures or substrate surface temperatures are less than 50 deg F. 2.Accessories and Sealants: Comply with manufacturer's cold weather application instructions when atmospheric temperatures or substrate surface temperatures are less than 40 deg F. B. Exposure: Comply with manufacturer's limitations on exposure of applied product. 1. Do not apply air-barrier joint flashing to sheathing surface that is frozen or has frost. C. Protect adjacent substrates from environmental conditions that affect air barrier performance. D. Coordinate installation of member air barrier with completion of roofing, below-grade, factory fluid-applied membrane portion to site fluid-applied membrane portion and other work requiring interface with sheathing. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Sheathing Products: See manufacturer's published limited warranty: 1. Do not apply air-barrier joint flashing to sheathing surface that is frozen or has frost. B. Protect adjacent substrates from environmental conditions that affect air barrier performance. C.Manufacturer warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of sheathing from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or stresses on the air barrier exceeding manufacturer's written instructions for elongation. 2. Mechanical damage caused by outside agents. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested in accordance with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Sheathing 06 16 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.02 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A.Emissions:Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.03 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A.Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process:AWPA U1;Use Category UC2,Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground,and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1.Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated plywood materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fore-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicating by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerate weathering in accordance with ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D3201/D3201 M at 92 percent relative humidity.Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated in accordance Sheathing 06 16 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#231 80 Rev 0/2024 with ASTM D6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F shall be not less than span ratings specified. C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicating. 2.05 WALL SHEATHING A.Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2.Nominal Thickness: Not less '/z inch B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2 Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2.Nominal Thickness: Not less than '/z inch. C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GP Gypsum; DensGlass® Sheathing or comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Continental Building Products, LLC. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, %inch; Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. D. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C1325, Type A—installed at all wet areas. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. C-Cure. b. Custom Building Products. C. FinPan,Inc. d. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch as indicated. Sheathing 06 16 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 E.Extruded-Polystryne-Foam Sheathing:ASTM C578,Type IV,in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue-and-groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company(The). c. Kingspan Insulation Limited. d. Owens Corning. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 3. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 2.06 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2.Nominal Thickness: Not less than ''/z inch. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2,Exposure 1, Structural 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2.Nominal Thickness: Not less than '/z inch. C. Fiberglass-Mat-Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide GP Gypsum: DensDeck®Prime Roof Board or comparable product by one of the following: 2. Thickness: '/z inch thick. 3. Size: 4 by 8 feet. 4. Metal-Deck Flute Span: 5 inches. 5.Fire-Resistance Rating: Class A in accordance with UL 790 and ASTM E108. 6. Combustibility:Noncombustible in accordance with ASTM E136. 7. Flame Spread and Smoke Development: Zero and zero in accordance with ASTM E84. 8. R-value: 0.56 in accordance with ASTM C518. 9. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 23 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Water Method,Procedure B. 10. Water Absorption (Percent of Weight): 5 percent or less in accordance with ASTM C473. 11. Surface Water Absorption: Nominal 0.035 oz. in accordance with ASTM C473. Sheathing 06 16 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 12. Compressive Strength: 900 lbf/sq. in. in accordance with ASTM C473. 13. Mold Resistance: 10 in accordance with ASTM D3273. D. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C1325, Type A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. C-Cure. b. Custom Building Products. c. FinPan,Inc. d. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2.07 COMPOSITE NAIL BASE INSULATED ROOF SHEATHING A. Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C1289, Type V with DOC PS 2,Exposure I oriented strand board on one face. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas EPS; a Division of Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Cornell Corporation. c. Dow Chemical Company(The). d. Hunter Panels. e. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. £ Rmax, Inc. 2. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Oriented-Strand-Board Nominal Thickness: 5/8 inch B. Vented, Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C1289, Type 11, Class 1, with DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 oriented strand board adhered to spacers on one face. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas EPS; a Division of Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Cornell Corporation. c. Dow Chemical Company(The). d. Hunter Panels. Sheathing 06 16 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 e. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. £ Rmax, Inc. 2. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Oriented-Strand-Board Nominal Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Spacers: Wood furring strips or blocks not less than 3/a-inch-thick and spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. 2.08 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M of Type 304 stainless steel. B.Nails,Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fasteners systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Screws for Fasteners Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C1002. E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Screws for fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329-inch-thick,use screws that comply with ASTM C1002. 2.For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.1 12-inch-thick,use screws that comply with ASTM C954. G. Screws for Fastening Composite Nail Base Insulated Roof Sheathing to Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 2.09 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200"Joint Sealants". B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. Sheathing 06 16 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#231 80 Rev 0/2024 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 Or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. C. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule",in the iCC's International Building Code. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.02 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide",for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Subflooring: Sheathing 06 16 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 4. Underlayment: a. Nail to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch apart at edges and ends. C. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring immediately before installing flooring. 3.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instruction. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install panels with a '/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends over centers of studs,and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlaying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. Sheathing 06 16 00- 10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlaying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints in accordance with sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. F. Fiberglass-Mat-Faced Gypsum Roof Board Installation: 1. Adhesive Installation over Thermal Insulation, under Single-Ply Roofing Systems: a. Stagger roof-board end- and edge joints a minimum of 12 inches over installed insulation. b. Adhere roof boards over installed insulation using adhesive in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Apply overall pressure to ensure full adhesion. Do not slide into place. 2. Hot-Mopped Installation over Thermal Insulation, under Modified Bitumen Roofing Systems: a. Stagger roof-board end- and edge joints a minimum of 6 inches over installed insulation. b. Prior to hot-mopping roof boards to substrates, ensure that roof boards are dry with free-moisture content less than 1 percent by weight using moisture meter set to gypsum scale. c. Apply asphalt only at temperatures between 425 and 450 deg F. d. Flood Mopping: Flood mop roof boards to substrate followed by flood mopped membrane application as follows: 1)Verify that roof boards and substrate are dry. 2)Allow applied roof-board asphalt to cool prior to mopping membrane base sheet. 3)Allow base ply to cool before mopping additional plies or cap sheet to limit amount of direct heat applied to boards. 3. Installation Directly on Metal Decking: a. Install roof boards with long edges bearing-on and parallel-to top flutes to support edges. b. Stagger roof-board end- and edge-joints a minimum of 6 inches. Sheathing 06 16 00- 11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Adhesive Installation:Adhere roof boards to metal deck using adhesive in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Apply overall pressure to ensure full adhesion. Do not slide into place. d. Hot-Mopped Installation: 1)Prior to hot-mopping roof boards to substrates, ensure that roof boards are dry with free-moisture content less than 1 percent by weight using moisture meter set to gypsum scale. 2)Apply asphalt only at temperatures between 425 or 450 deg F. 3)Flood Mopping: Flood mop roof boards to substrate followed by flood mopped membrane application as follows. i. Verify that roof boards and substrate are dry. ii. Allow applied roof-board asphalt to cool prior to mopping membrane base sheet. iii. Allow base ply to cool before mopping additional plies or cap sheet to limit amount of direct heat applied to boards. 3.04 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.05 FIBERBOARD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C846 and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fasten fiberboard sheathing panels to intermediate supports and then at edges and ends. Use galvanized roofing nails; comply with manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced fastening schedule.Drive fasteners flush with surface of sheathing and locate perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inch from edges and ends. C.Install sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to,and centered over,studs.Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing.Allow 1/8-inch open space between edges and ends of adjacent units. Stagger horizontal joints if any. D. Cover sheathing as soon as practical after installation to prevent deterioration from wetting. 3.06 FOAM-PLASTIC SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foam-Plastic Wall Sheathing: Install vapor-relief strips or equivalent for permitting escape of moisture vapor that otherwise would be trapped in stud cavity behind sheathing. C. Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam-plastic sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. 3.07 PARTICLEBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION Sheathing 06 16 00- 12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Comply with CPA's recommendations for type of subfloor indicated.Fill and sand gouges,gaps, and chipped edges. Sand uneven joints flush. 1. Fastening Method: Glue and nail underlayment to subflooring. 3.08 HARDBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with CPA's recommendations and hardboard manufacturer's written instructions for preparing and applying hardboard underlayment. 1.Fastening Method: Nail underlayment to subflooring. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 16 00- 13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 06 40 10—INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE MILLWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood cabinets. B. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be provided by the Interior Contractor and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. C. Submittals: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment, devices, and other components. 3. Samples of specified wood, cut and finish. Samples shall be a minimum of 12" x 12" and full thickness.Finish face and edge shall be provided with sample. 4. A minimum of three different flitches of any and all veneers specified shall be submitted for approval.Flitches shall indicate the color,grain,texture,and finish range to be expected in the Project. 5. Where variations in wood and finish may occur, a minimum of three variations showing extremes which may be expected of any and all wood finishes as specified shall be submitted for approval. A minimum of 12"x 12". 6. Where requested, a full size mock-up of panel or millwork assembly. 7. Samples of all mouldings shall be provided a minimum of 24" long. Sample shall indicate color, grain, and profile for approval. D. AWI Quality Standards: Comply with "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architecture Woodwork Institute. Premium Grade for all materials, fabrications and workmanship for all work in this section. E. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet- work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All woodwork shall be new and shall conform to the Premium Grade requirements of the AWI Quality Standards,latest edition. B. All lumber shall be kiln-dried to the average moisture content as recommended by the AWI Quality Standards, latest edition appropriate for the regional climatic conditions of the project site. C. All solid wood elements shall be clear, straight-grain lumber of the best grade of specified species as listed by the NHLA. Lumber shall be free of any defects which might impair Interior Architectural Millwork 06 40 10- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 serviceability, aesthetics, and/or finish. Solid wood elements shall also be according to the following,unless indicated otherwise on drawings and/or specifications: 1. Specie of Face Woods receiving transparent finishes shall be as specified on the drawings and shall be selected for specified grain with uniform color and grain suitable for use with the finished plywood with which it is used. 2. Face Woods receiving opaque finishes shall be Birch, Poplar, or Custom Grade but otherwise shall have same specifications as solid stock for Face Woods above. 3. Unexposed woods shall be Custom Grade Poplar, kiln dried unexposed woods come into contact with drawers,they shall be Birch or Maple,unselect. D. All veneer core elements shall be clear straight-grain lumber of the best grade of the specified species as listed by the N.H.L.A. Lumber shall be free of any defects which might impair serviceability, aesthetics, and/or finish. Where veneer differs on two sides, veneers shall be of similar thickness, density, and characteristics to prevent any warpage. Veneer core elements shall also be according to the following,unless indicated on drawings or specifications: 1.Adhesives shall be water-resistant resin or approved equal;process shall be hot plate method using the following number of plys to achieve specified thickness: a. 1/4" (6 mm) overall thickness shall be of 3-ply veneer core construction. b. 3/8"(9 mm) overall thickness shall be of 5-ply veneer core construction. c. /z" (12 mm) overall thickness shall be of 5-ply veneer core construction. d. '/4" (20 mm) overall thickness shall be of 7-ply veneer core construction. e. 1" (25 mm) overall thickness shall be of 9-ply veneer core construction. 2.Where burl panels are specified core must be crossbanded with Poplar prior to applying burl veneer. 3. Provide Douglas or Poplar Fir V-type solid edge trim on all exposed edges of plywood not designated to be surfaced by plastic laminate. 4. For Face Woods receiving transparent finishes, Species shall be as specified on drawings; faces shall be selected and approved in respect to cutting lengths,uniformity of color,figure, and grain character. Face veneers shall not contain open joints, face depressions, glue stain or other manufacturing irregularities. 5. Face Woods receiving opaque finishes shall have custom grade (face veneer) Birch or Poplar, selected,but otherwise shall have same specification as Plywood for Face Woods. 6. Unexpected woods shall be Birch, Poplar or Douglas Fir, rotary cut, Unselect, good one side, interior type plywood, one side Grade A and one side Grade B; Grade A faces shall not contain plugs,knots, pitch pockets, splits,rough grain or other open defects. 7. Wood for plastic lamination shall be minimum 3/4" (20 mm)Mahogany face core plywood, good one side. Interior Architectural Millwork 06 40 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 E. All particle board be resin impregnated wood flakes of high density construction as manufactured by U.S.Plywood Corporation, Shasta Division,Redding,California, or approved equal and shall be'/4"(20 mm)minimum thickness,unless otherwise specified. 1. For Unexpected Woods: High density particle board may not be substituted for plywood panels. F. All masonite shall be 1/8" (3 mm) thick tempered, as manufactured by Masonite Corporation, Chicago, Illinois, or an approved equal. G. All panelwork materials shall be as indicated on drawings and specifications constructed of 3/4" (20 mm) plywood with finish veneer front side, and veneer of similar thickness, density and characteristics back side, and hardwood edges. Finish veneer and hardwood edges shall be of species indicate on drawings and specifications using the type of veneer cut and type of match between individual veneer pieces as indicated. H. All Millwork shall be finished as indicated on drawings and specifications. Transparent and Opaque Finishes shall match approved samples submitted.All plastic laminate finishes shall be of the quality, color and finish as indicated on the drawings and specifications. 1. Cabinet Hardware: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware". J. Clear Float Glass for Doors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. K.Furring,Blocking,Shins,and Hanging Strips:Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber,kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 2.02 FINISHES A. All millwork shall be finished in accordance with the drawings, specifications and the quality levels indicated in this section. B. All finishes shall be in compliance with all Code and Regulatory Agency requirements for the Project and location within the Project. C. All finish materials shall be treated with flame-retardant process where required by local code. Should flame-retardant process cause change in color and effect on finish materials, Contractor shall notify the Architect prior. D.Prior to finishing woods shall be filled,sanded primed,and cleaned.When necessary for an even final finish color beach woods prior to filling and sanding. E. Transparent finishes on wood shall be full filled, stained to match the color required, and have a water, alcohol, and burn resistant finish, the degree of sheen to match the sample provided/approved. F. All paint and other finish material shall be pure, unadulterated and best quality from specified manufacturer as indicated on the drawings and specifications. 2.03 FABRICATION Interior Architectural Millwork 0640 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. General: Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,trimming, and fitting. 1. Assemble casing in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. 2. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating. 3. Install glass to comply with FGMA "Glazing Manual". For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 4. Fabricate all items with one inch long 45 degree corners. B. Stained Wood cabinets: As follows: 1. AWI Grade: Custom. 2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. 3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: a. Provide Architect's selections from stain manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. 4. Colors,Patterns, and Finishes: Provide stain colors complying with the following: a. Provide Architect's selections from stain manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. 5. Provide dust panels of/4-inch (6.4 mm)plywood above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops. C. Countertops: As indicated on drawings. D. Shelving: 1. Fabricate shelves spanning more than 30 inches between supports of full 1 inch thick stock. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas, and examine and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing,before installing. B.Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified above for type of woodwork involved. 1.Install woodwork plumb,level,true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). 2. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damage finish at cuts. Interior Architectural Millwork 06 40 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Tops: Anchor securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall. D. Cabinet Hardware: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. 1. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Provide satin stainless steel or aluminum finish. 2. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of BHMA A156.9. 3. Provide soft-close hinges for 180 degree opening. 4.Drawer glides: Provide full extension side mount,ball bearing soft-close slide units with 75 pound loading capacity. 5. Door and Drawer Pulls: 4-1/2 inch long aluminum square bar pulls. 6. Locks: Five pin tumbler dead bolt. END OF SECTION 06 40 10 Interior Architectural Millwork 0640 10-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 18 20—PENETRATION FLOOR SEALER PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Application of penetrating concrete sealer to floors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B.Product data: 1. Submit manufacturer's instructions for methods and application procedures. 2. Certification by sealer manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Samples 1. Apply sealer to sample test area to illustrate lack of color change and lack of surface sheen. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Scotch-Clad Brand 6000H, as manufactured by 3M. 2. BSM 40 VOC, as manufactured by Chem-trete. 3. Klere-Seal940-S, as manufactured by Pecora Corporation. 4. Exi-Guard CS20, as manufactured by Aegis Coating Technologies. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Silane/Siloxane based, penetrating, non-surface forming concrete sealer. Tint color as selected by Owner/architect. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify surfaces to receive penetrating sealer are clean, free of efflorescence, oil, grease, topical film forming curing agents, or other foreign matter detrimental to application. B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove grease or oil with a solvent, affective alkaline cleaner, or detergent as instructed by sealer manufacturer. Scrub surfaces with water. Penetrating Floor Sealer 07 18 20- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Allow surfaces to dry before application. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply in 2 continuous,uniform applications. C.Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive sealer. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately,by manufacturer approved method. END OF SECTION 07 18 20 Penetrating Floor Sealer 07 18 20-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 2100—THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermal/acoustical insulation where shown on drawings or required. B. Batt insulation used for thermal and sound insulation in stud walls, above lay-in ceiling panels, and where shown on drawings or required. C. Refer to Section 13 34 19 for Metal Building Insulation System 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 07 11 13,Bituminous Dampproofing. B. Section 09 51 00, Acoustical Ceilings: Insulation of acoustical insulation above lay-in ceiling panels as specified. C. Division 23 —Mechanical: Duct insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature on each insulation type specified. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions for each insulation type specified. B. Samples: Six(6)inch x six (6)inch piece of rigid insulation for the Architect's approval. C. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's certification of compatibility of rigid insulation with dampproofing mastic. 2. Manufacturer's affidavit that materials used in Project contains no asbestos. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Furnish acoustical insulation to acoustical lay-in ceiling contractor for laying insulation above lay-in ceiling panel system specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS A. Specifications are based on any of the manufacturers listed below, with their product in parenthesis for the particular insulation application. Other manufacturers not listed must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Rigid Wall Insulation: a. Extruded Polystyrene Foam Board: 1)Dow Chemical Co. (Styrofoam Cavitymate Plus) Thermal Insulation 0721 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2) Owens-Corning(Foamular CW25) 3)Pactiv Building Products (GreenGuard-SB) 2. Batt Thermal Insulation: a. Walls: For use in partition thermal applications. 1) Silvercoat(Energy Saver FP) 2) CertainTeed Corp. (AcoustaTherm) 3) Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. (Thermal& Sound Control Batts) 4)Johns-Manville (Thermal-SHEILD Thermal Insulation) 5)Knauf Insulation (QuietTherm Insulation) 6) Owens-Corning (Thermal Batt Insulation) 3. Batt Acoustical Insulation(Sound Attenuation): a. Walls: For use in partition acoustical applications. 1) CertainTeed Corp. (CertaPro AcoustaTherm) 2) Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. (Thermal& Sound Control Batts) 3)Johns-Manville (Sound-SHEILD Sound Control Batts) 4)Knauf Insulations (QuietTherm Insulation) 5) Owens-Corning (Sound Batt) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Rigid Wall Insulation 1. Extruded polystyrene foam board a. Type: ASTM C 518. b. Thickness/R-Value(minimum): 1) 1-inch/R-5 where shown on drawings. C. Surface burning characteristics: 1)Flame Spread: 10 or less 2) Smoke developed: 175 or less B. Batt Insulation: 1. Thermal Insulation: a. Type: ASTM C665, Type 1,unfaced b. Thickness/R-Values (minimum): Thermal Insulation 0721 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1) 6-inches/R-19 where shown on drawings. 2) 10-inches/R-30 where shown on drawings. C. Surface Burning characteristics: 1)Flame Spread: 25 or less 2) Smoke developed: 50 or less 2. Acoustical(Sound Attenuation)Insulation: a. Type: ASTM C665, Type 1, unfaced b. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1)Flame Spread: 25 or less 2) Smoke Developed: 50 or less c. Thickness/R-Values (minimum): 1) 3/2-inches/R-13 where shown on drawings. 2) 6-inches/R-19 where shown on drawings. C. Fiberglass Board 1.Fiberglass board shall be 1"—4"thick and have a density of 2.25 to 6.0 lbs/3 ft.The thickness and density will vary depending on the application, and will be called out in the drawings.It shall be unfaced and supplied in rigid, continuous boards. Flame spread and smoke- developed index not to exceed 25, per ASTM E-84. Material shall be non-combustible per ASTM E136. 2. The following are acceptable, subject to the above: a. Industrial Insulation Type 705 unfaced,from Owens Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH 419-248-8000 b. Insulation Board from Knauf Insulation, Shelbyville, IN 317-398-4434 c. Industrial Insulation Board IB 600 from CertainTeed,Valley Forge,PA 215-341-7000 d. Type Insul-Sheild I/S 600 from Johns Manville Mechanical Insulation Division, Denver, CO 800-654-3103 D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1.Mechanical Fasteners:Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips,to be adhered or mechanically fastened to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. 2. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Thermal Insulation 0721 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Rigid Board Insulation: 1. Install board insulation in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Cut insulation to fit snugly around obstruction such as vents,pipe or conduit. 3. Install board insulation with joints tight and provide full coverage. B. Batt Insulation(Thermal and Sound): 1. Walls: a. Insulation shall be friction fit between studs and provide full coverage where indicated on drawings. b. Insulation shall be tight within spaces in partitions, around cut opening, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. c. For metal framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. d. Maintain 3 inch(76 mm)clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. e. Wall areas above ceiling: At sidewall insulation in ceiling cavity, install adhesive- mounted impaling devices with metal caps at 2 feet-0 inches vertically and at four(4) inches from each side of blankets horizontally. Install blankets with four (4) foot dimension running vertically on spikes, keeping blankets tight to the exterior wall without crashing into each other. END OF SECTION 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 0721 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 25 00—WEATHER BARRIER PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Weather Barrier Membrane 2. Seam Tape 3. Flashing 4. Fasteners 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7.ASTM E1677;Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E2178;Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 9. ASTM E2357; Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies B. AATCC—American Associate of Textile Chemists and Colorists 1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI 1. Test Method T-40; Grams of Paper and Paperboard(Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance(Gurley Hill Method) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. C. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane,minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch. D. Quality Assurance Submittals Weather Barrier 07 25 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.Design Data,Test Reports:Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [insert section number and title]. 2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer's executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. B. Mock-up 1.Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners,flashing,tape and related accessories per manufacturer's current printed instructions and recommendations. a. Mock-up size: 10 feet by 10 feet. b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening. c. Mock-up may not remain as part of the work. 2. Contact manufacturer's designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty. C.Pre-installation Meeting 1. Refer to Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings. 2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Consultant, Installer, Owner's Representative, and Weather Barrier Manufacturer's Designated Representatives. 3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer's training requirements, equipment,facilities Weather Barrier 07 25 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section [01 60 00 Product Requirements] [insert section number and title]. B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Install weather barrier only when site weather conditions are acceptable per manufacturer's recommendations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: Spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPontTm Tyvek®CommercialWrap® and related assembly components. B.Perfonnance Characteristics: 1.Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.Type I per ASTM E1677. <0.04 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357. 2.Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms,when tested in accordance with ASTM E96,Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: Minimum 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs.,when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 10. Smoke Developed: 10. 2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: As recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Weather Barrier 07 25 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-'/4"or 2"metal gasketed washer. C. Sealants: 1. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. 2. Products: Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Adhesives: 1. Provide adhesives recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 2. Products: Adhesives recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primer: 1.Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. 2. Products: Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer. F. Flashing: 1.Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations recommended by manufacturer. 2. Thru-Wall flashing membrane materials for flashing at changes in direction or elevation (shelf angle, foundations, etc.) and at transitions between different assembly materials. 3.Preformed Inside and Outside Corners and End Dams:Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction with Thm-Wall Flashings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND INSTALLATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. B. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. C. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. D. Start weather barrier installation at a building confer, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. E. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers.Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. F. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. Weather Barrier 07 25 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 G. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. H. Overlap weather barrier: 1. Exterior corners: Minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: Minimum 6 inches. I. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12-18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center,maximum horizontally. J. Apply flashing to weather barrier membrane prior to installing cladding anchors. 3.02 SEAMING A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.03 FLASHING A. Cut flexible flashing a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning flexible flashing edge with inside edge of sill.Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan flexible flashings at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of flashing at jambs. Align flashings with interior edge of jamb framing. Start flashing at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install flexible flashing at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window installation. H. On exterior,install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing.Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. I.Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing.Adhere using flashing over the 45-degree seams. J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal.Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. Weather Barrier 07 25 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 L. At thru-wall flashing at Base of Wall: 1. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6-inches. 2. Mechanically fasten bottom of weather barrier through top of thru-wall flashing. 3. Seal vertical and horizontal seams with tape or sealing membrane. M. At thru-wall flashing at Window Head 1. Cut flap in weather barrier at window head. 2. Prime exposed sheathing. 3. Install lintel as required. Verify end dams extend 4 inches minimum beyond opening. 4. Install end dams bedded in sealant. 5. Adhere 2 inches minimum thru-wall flashing to wall sheathing. Overlap lintel with thru- wall flashing and extent 1/4 inch minimum beyond outside edge of lintel to form drip edge. 6. Apply sealant along thru-wall flashing edges. 7. Fold weather barrier flap back into place and tape bottom edge to thru-wall flashing. 8. Tape diagonal cuts of weather barrier. 9. Secure weather barrier flap with fasteners. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Manufacturer's design repetitive shall be notified as required for observations of weather barrier assembly installation. 3.05 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A.Testing Agency:General Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency with direct oversight by an engineer licensed in the State of Texas to perform a forensic inspection of the product, assembly and performance. Testing and documentation of weather barrier installation shall be performed prior to concealment. 1. Inspection: Weather barrier system materials, accessories and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with specified requirements, including: a. Continuous structural support of weather barrier system has been provided. b. Compatibility of materials within weather barrier system and with adjacent materials. c. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities,protrusions and mortar droppings. Moisture level of surfaces are within limits set by Manufacturer for optimal installation. d. Exterior sheathing exposed surfaces are smooth, clean dry and intact with no visible damage with all joints sealed and/or taped. Weather Barrier 07 25 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 e. All required penetrations through weather barrier system, including those required under different scope of work, are in place in exterior wall surface and ready for membrane application. f. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained for time period set by Manufacturer for optimal installation. g. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. h. Continuity of weather barrier system has been achieved throughout the opaque wall area with no gaps or holes. i. Wet and dry film thickness of fluid-applied membrane complies with Manufacturer's recommended minimum thickness. j. Connections between assemblies (metal flashing at openings,roof membrane, waterproofing, and weather seals with weather barrier system) are in compliance with approved shop drawings requirements and that continuity of seal has been maintained. k. Laps in self-adhered transition membrane strips and through-wall flashing membranes have complied with minimum requirements set by Manufacturer and have been shingled in the correct direction,with no fishmouths. 1. All self-adhered membranes have been firmly adhered to substrate and all exposed cut edges have been encapsulated with Manufacturer approved sealant. Sealant to be tooled to membrane surfaces to ensure adhesion. m. Transition at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided and all anticipated movements accommodated. n. All penetrations have been sealed in accordance with approved shop drawings and Manufacturer's recommendations. o. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. Those materials which exceed maximum exposure time will have to be replaced or recovered in accordance with Manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Field Testing of weather barrier assembly to be conducted just to prior installation of exterior wall covering and include exterior sheathing joints, transitions, penetrations, openings, and exterior wall covering anchorage devices that penetrate weather barrier if possible. If openings are included completed fixed fenestration frames and weather seals are to be installed prior to test for water tight assembly. No interior finishes or insulation should be installed for full visibility of inboard side of support substrate. Test chamber to span from slab to slab vertically and at least 10 feet(3 meters)wide.Field testing to include: a. Weather Leakage: Tested in accordance with ASTM E783, latest edition. Maximum allowable leakage for the weather barrier assembly to be 0.04 cfm/ft2 (0.2 L/(s m2)) at a static pressure differential of 1.57 psf(75 Pa). b. Water Penetration: Tested in accordance with ASTM E1105—Procedure A, latest edition at a uniform static pressure differential of 1 Opsf(479 Pa).No water visible Weather Barrier 07 25 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 on any interior surfaces allowed including structure, support studs or inboard surface of exterior sheathing. B. Written reports documenting observations made during inspections and results of field testing to be submitted to Owner,Architect, and Contractor within five working days of the inspection and performance of field testing. C.A minimum of three inspections and field tests are to be conducted during the installation of the weather barrier assembly. Out of sequence work is to be scheduled in test areas so as not to delay field testing schedule. Field testing to be conducted at 10%, 50%, and 80%completion of the installation. Depending upon results of initial inspections and field tests Owner reserves the right to require increased frequency of inspection visits and field testing. D. Correct deficient applications not passing tests and inspections, make necessary repairs, and retest as required to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements at no additional cost to Owner. 3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Take measures required to protect completed installation. END OF SECTION 07 25 00 Weather Barrier 07 25 00- 8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 26 00—UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products supplied under this section: 1. Vapor barrier and installation accessories for installation under concrete slabs. B. Related sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1.ASTM E1745-17 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2.ASTM E1643-18a Selection,Design,Installation,and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. Technical Reference—American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 2. ACI 302.IR-15: Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Quality control/assurance: 1. Summary of test results per paragraph 9.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer's samples and literature. 3.Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming,penetration prevention and repair, and perimeter seal per ASTM E1643. 4. All mandatory ASTM E1745 testing must be performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1. 5.Contract vapor barrier manufacturer for pre-construction meeting and to coordinate a review of the vapor barrier installation either by digital review or in person. 6. Vapor barrier manufacturer must warrant in writing (a) compliance with the designated ASTM E1745 classification, and (b) no manufacturing defects in the product for, at least, the Life of the Building. 7. Manufacturer verify in writing 20 years in the industry with no reported product failures. PART2-PRODUCTS Under Slab Vapor Barrier 07 26 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vapor barrier shall have all of the following qualities: 1.Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 • hr• inHg)] as tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5). 2. Other performance criteria: a. Strength: ASTM E1745 Class A. b. Thickness: 15 mils minimum. 3.Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1. 4. Warranty: (a) compliance with the designated ASTM E1745 classification, and (b) no manufacturing defects in the product for, at least,the Life of the Building. B. Vapor barrier products: 1. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier(15-mil)by Stego Industries LLC., (877) 464- 7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Approved Alternate: Vaporguard by Reef Industries, 713-507-4250 www.reefindustries.com. 3. Approved Alternate: PMPC by W.R. Meadows, 800-342-5976 http://www.wrmeadows.com/pmpc . 4.No substitutions. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Seams: 1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. B.Penetrations of Vapor barrier: 1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. C. Perimeter/terminated edge seal. 1. Stego Crete Claw (texture tape) by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.ste goindustries.c om. 2. Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 3. StegoTack Tape (double-sided sealant tape) by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 4. One-sided seaming tape is not a recommended method of sealing at the terminated edge. D. Penetration Prevention: Under Slab Vapor Barrier 07 26 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. Beast Foot by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Beast Form Stake by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. E. Vapor Barrier-Safe Screed System 1. Beast Screed by Stego Industries, LLC, (877)464-7834 www.steizoindustries.com. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Level and compact base material. B. Contact vapor barrier manufacturer to schedule a pre-construction meeting and to coordinate a review,in-person or digital, of the vapor barrier installation. 3.02 UNSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643. 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement wherever possible. 2. Extent vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab.if practicable, terminate it at the top of the slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or (b) where obstructed by impediments, such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site condition requiring early termination of the vapor barrier. At the point of termination, seal vapor barrier to the slab itself using Stego Crete Claw Tape, per manufacturer's instructions. [Specifier note: The perimeter seal can be handled several ways. When sealing to the slab, Stego Crete Claw Tape is the best option. When sealing to a stem wall or wall, the best option is to use StegoTack Tape or both StegoTack Tape and a Stego Term Bar.] a. Seal Vapor barrier to the entire slab perimeter using Stego Crete Claw Tape with a surface that creates a mechanical seal to freshly-placed concrete,per manufacturer's instructions. OR b. Seal vapor barrier to the entire perimeter wall or footing/grade beam with StegoTack Tape, or both Stego Term Bar and StegoTack Tape per manufacturer's instructions. Ensure the concrete is clean and dry prior to adhering tape. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's seam tape. 4. Apply seam tape/Stego Crete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier. 5. Seal all penetrations (including pipes)per manufacturer's instructions. 6. For interior forming applications, avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through vapor barrier. Use Beast Form Stake and Beast Foot as a vapor barrier-safe forming system. Ensure Beast Foot's peel-and-stick adhesive base is fully adhered to the vapor barrier. Under Slab Vapor Barrier 07 26 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 7. Repair damage areas with vapor barrier material of similar(or better)permeance,puncture and tensile. 8. For vapor barrier-safe concrete screeding applications, install Beast Screed(vapor barrier- safe screed system)per manufacturer's instructions prior to placing concrete. 9. General Contractor to notify Architect to perform an onsite inspection with a Stego Wrap representative as part of the Stego Installation Support Program to ensure compliance with ASTM E 1643. END OF SECTION 07 26 00 Under Slab Vapor Barrier 07 26 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 4113—METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install standing seam roof. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings. Show sections and details of roof with substrate and structure, eave flashing and roof edge. B. Submit samples of specified color for verification. C. Submit a small scale roof plan identifying corner and perimeter areas and the increased fastening pattern as per manufacturer's instructions at these locations. D. Submit wind uplift pressure criteria utilizing ASCE 7. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials. B. Factory Mutual Global. C.National Roofing Contractors Association. D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Association. E. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI). F. Manufacturer's Printed Instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer(basis of design): 1. Berridge"Zee Lock Double Lock Seamed"24 GA or approved equal. 2. Other Approved Manufacturers: a. MBCI"SuperLok" b. Alliance c. PAC-CLAD 3. All materials of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer. 4. All prefinished sheet metal materials exposed to view concurrently shall be from the same prefinished coil stock finish run,batch or lot. 5. All trim and accessories shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS Metal Roof Panels 0741 13 - 1 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Integral Standing Seam Roof System: Meet Code Wind Load for UL Class and secure using FM LPS 1-31 requirements. Design for wind uplift pressure criteria utilizing ASCE 7. 1. Material: Galvalume, 24 gauge unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finishes: a. Finished Metal shall be Coil-coated 20-year warranty fluoropolymer finish containing at least 70%Kynar 500 of at least 1 mil total dry film thickness. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of available colors and textures. b. Unfinished Metal shall be Grade C Galvalume ASTM A792-86, AZ 55, "Satin Finish". 3.Panels:Factory-formed; striated,width of 16 inches,with minimum 2-inch high continuous interlocking seam mechanically roll formed in field. 4. Fabricate panels' full length from ridge to eave. 2.03 METAL ROOF ACCESSORIES A. Provide additional and accessory products by the same manufacturer, where possible. Provide only products acceptable to the manufacturer of the roof panels. B. Panel Clip Screw for Fastening to Purlins: Manufacturer's standard. C. Roof Panel Clips: Underwriters Laboratory Class 105 and Factory Mutual I-105; Underwriters Laboratories Classified and bearing UL Label; as recommended and supplied by panel manufacturer. D. Primer: Asphalt Type,ASTM D41. E. Underlayment Fastener: Stainless steel nails,ring shank with plastic caps. F. Metal Closures and Trim: Prefinished aluminum sheet; match roof panels. G.Accessory Screws: Stainless steel Size and type as provided by panel manufacturer for each use. H. Pop-Rivets: Stainless steel, series 42 or 44, as required for the application. 1. Sealant: Color-coordinate primer-less urethane, or high-grade, non-drying butyl, as supplied by panel manufacturer. J. Sealant Tape: 1/8 inch x 3/4 inch butyl tape as supplied by panel manufacturer. K.Waterproofing Membrane Underlay: Tamko—Metal and Tile Underlayment; Grace—Vycor 40. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 METAL ROOF FLASHING A. Install eave flashing before panel installation. Secure all drip and rake edges at 6"o.c. with two staggered rows. B. Install manufacturer-approved flashing materials at eaves. Do not use "J-clips". 3.02 ROOF PANELS Metal Roof Panels 0741 13 -2 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A.Follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to produce a weathertight installation. B. Install panels in continuous lengths without end-to-end seams. C. Seam clips: Install at 16 inches o.c., or as otherwise recommended by the system manufacturer, whichever is more stringent. D. Provide for '/z-inch movement at upslope terminations and at least 1-inch clearance around penetrations. Hem bottom panel edges 1-inch and hook onto metal edge. Do not use "J-clip" flashing details. E.Trim:Install in complete assemblies along with the light metal coping cap at brick walls;include flashings. F. Carefully apply concealed sealant beads and sealant tape at all penetrations, intersections and other locations(but not at standing seams)necessary for waterproof installation. 3.03 WARRANTY A. Provide 20-year weather-tightness warranty from Manufacturer. 1. Coordinate with manufacturer for all onsite inspections that may be required per the terms of the warranty. B.Provide 2-year installation workmanship warranty. 1. Coordinate with manufacturer for all onsite inspections that may be required per the terms of the warranty. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation. B.Use methods and materials for cleaning recommended by manufacturer. Follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations so methods and materials do not void finish warranty. C. Protect work so roofing will be undamaged at Final Completion. D. Replace damage materials. END OF SECTION 07 4113 Metal Roof Panels 0741 13 -3 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 42 13-METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exposed fastener metal wall panels,with related metal trim and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for structural steel framing supporting metal panels. B. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing supporting metal panels. C. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulation installed under metal panels. D. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for air barriers within wall assembly and adjacent to wall assembly. E. Division 07 Section "Metal Soffit Panels" for factory-formed metal roof panels. F. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing items in addition to items specified in this Section. G. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for steel framing supporting metal panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association(AAMA): www.aamanet.orP: 1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. AAMA 809.2 -Voluntary Specification Non-Drying Sealants. B. American Society of Civil Engineers(ASCE): www.asce.or�z/codes-standards: 1. ASCE 7 -Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. ASTM International(ASTM): www.astm.org: 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 645 - Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 5. ASTM C 754-Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM D 1003 - Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 9. ASTM D 4214 -Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 10. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 11. ASTM E 331 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference D. International Accreditation Service(IAS): 1. IAS AC 472 - Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems,Part B. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing, conduct preinstallation meeting at site attended by Owner, Architect, manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed-base roll forming, and accredited under IAS AC 472 Part B. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications. I. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements,within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. C. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of five installations not less than five years old, with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. IAS AC 472 certificate. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division O1 General Requirements. 3. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article. Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with minimum of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic, able to communicate with Owner, Architect, and installers, supervising work on site whenever work is underway. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for specified products. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles,and attachment to building.Provide details at a minimum scale ]-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions,joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Samples for Verification: Provide 12-inch long section of each metal panel profile.Provide color chip verifying color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements. B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer's field supervisor. C. IAS Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under provisions of IAS AC 472. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping,handling,and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. I. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: On manufacturer's standard form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer's standard form,in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within the warranty period, as follows: 1. Fluoropolymer Two- Coat System: a. Basis of Design System: MBCI, Signature 300. b. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244. C. Chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D4214. d. Failure of adhesion,peeling, checking, or cracking. e. Warranty Period: 40 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems,Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Houston TX. Tel: (877)713-6224; Email: infokmbci.com; Web: www.mbci.com. 1. Provide basis of design product,or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bid: a. Berridge b. Alliance C. PAC-CLAD d. Other as Approved by Architect. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal wall panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. a. Wind Negative Pressure: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of proposed assembly. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of 1/120 the span with no evidence of failure. Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 -4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Air Infiltration,ASTM E 1680: 1. Maximum 0.006 cfm/sq. ft. (0.030 Us per sq. m) at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) static-air- pressure difference. D. Water Penetration,ASTM E 1646: 1. No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa). E. Thermal Movements: 1. Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. 2.3 METAL WALL PANELS A. Large Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed Fastener Metal Panels: Structural metal panel consisting of formed metal sheet with trapezoidal major ribs with intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically placed between major ribs, installed by lapping edges of adjacent panels. 1. Basis of Design: MBCl,PBR Panel,www.mbci.com/pbr.html. 2. Coverage Width: 36 inches. 3. Major Rib Spacing: 12 inches on center. 4. Rib Height: 1-1/4 inch. 5. Nominal Coated Thickness: 24 gage. 6. Panel Surface: Smooth. 7. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system. 8. Color: Per Drawings or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.4 METAL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete metal panel assembly incorporating base, corner, and opening trims and miscellaneous flashings,in manufacturer's standard profiles and custom profiles as indicated. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, support plates, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim: Match material,thickness, and finish of metal panel face sheet. C. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Long life fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets, with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating. D. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and tapes, and as follows: 1. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape, AAMA 809.2. Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 -5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 E. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements. B. Panel Lengths: Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs, except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish. 2.6 FINISHES A. General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. B. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 — 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat,AAMA 621,meeting solar reflectance index requirements. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel installation. 1. Inspect metal panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than the following: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 foot(6.1 m)in any direction. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with metal panel system installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing,girts,furring,and other miscellaneous panel support members according to ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover exposed underlayment per Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 -6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Exposed Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Install weathertight metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings,and project drawings. Install metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Panel Sealants: Install manufacturer's recommended tape sealant at panel side laps and end laps. C. Panel Fastening: Attach panels to supports using screws, fasteners, and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports at each location indicated on approved shop drawings,with spacing and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels of types recommended by manufacturer. 3. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel trim, flashing, and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers, with positive anchorage to building, and with weather tight mounting. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal panel assemblies, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. l. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports, as needed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 -7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 END OF SECTION 07 4113 Metal Wall Panels 0742 13 - 8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 62 00—SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal roof-edge trim and flashing not covered in pre-engineered metal building Section. B. Submittals: Product Data, Show Drawings, and Samples for each item specified. PART2-PRODUCTS A.Aluminum-Coated(Galvalume)Steel Sheet:ASTM A 792 Grade 50(A 792M-AZ50);structural quality, satin finish,milloils, chemicals and residue removed. B. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: As follows: 1.Fasteners:Noncorrosive metal.Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. 2. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, asbestos free, solvent type. 3. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 4. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. 5. Elastomeric Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants". 6. Clips, Straps,Anchoring Devices,and Similar Accessories: Compatible with material being installed. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. D. Coil-Coated Galvalume Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer Hylar 5000 or Kynar 500. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation: comply with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible. 1.Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. B. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansions of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner of intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form expansion joints Sheet Metal Flashing&Trim 07 62 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joints with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. D. Seams:Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams.Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Separations: Separate noncompatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. F. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant,lead wedges and sealant,interlocking folded seam, or bind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing&Trim 07 62 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23]80 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 7123—MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes pie-finished sheet metal gutters and downspouts. B. Related Section: 1. Section 07 62 00—Sheet Metal Flashing and Tinn. 2. Section 07 90 00—Joint Protection. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association: 1. AAMA 611 —Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 2603 — Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. AAMA 2604 — Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 4. AAMA 2605 —Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A653/A653M — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-L on Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A666—Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Surp.Plate,and Flat Ba. 3. ASTM B 32—Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 4.ASTM B 209—Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. ASTM B 370 — Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Std ip for Building Construction. 6. Federal Specification Unit: a. FS TT-C-94—Coating Compound,Bituminous, Solvent Type,Acid Resistant C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Conti actors: 1. SMACNA—Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Manufactured Gutters&Downspouts 07 71 23 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings (Submittals for Record): Provide drawings to indicated profiles, quantities, and details. C. Samples (Submittals for Review): Provide samples for confirmation of color and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Per for in Worm in accordance with SMACNA Manual. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00—Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to prevent contact with materials during storage capable of causing discoloration, staining, or damage. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00—Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with downspouts discharge pipe inlet. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 — Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product want an ties and product bonds. B. Furnish 5-year manufacture warranty for gutted and downspout finishes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Manufactures: 1. Bet get Building Products Corp. 2. Klauer Manufacturing Co. 3. Oboyke, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00—Product Requirements. B. Product Description: 1. Gutters: Sheet metal; Rectangular style profile. 2. Downspout Boots and Shoes: Cast Iron. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Pie-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 zinc coating; 0.02-inch 24 gauge core steel, shop pie-coated with acrylic coating; color as selected ft om manufacturer's standards. Manufactured Gutters&Downspouts 07 71 23 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: Type recommended by fabrication. 2. Gutted Supports: Straps 3. Downspouts Supports: Straps B. Fastened: Same material and finish as gutters and downspouts,with soft neoprene washers. C.Primer: Galvanized ii on type. D. Protective Backing Paint: FS TT-C-494,bituminous. 2.04 FABRICATION A. For in gutters and downspouts of profiles and sizes indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C.For in sections to shape indicated on Drawings, square, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. E. Fabricate gutted and downspout accessories; solder water tight. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. Acrylic polyester coating: Baked enamel system conforming to AAMA 2603. B.Pt inner Coat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with pi inner compatible with finish system, as recommended by finish system manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00—Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive gutters and downspouts. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective basking paint to a minimum drying film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum. B. Sodder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. Manufactured Gutters&Downspouts 07 71 23 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Connect downspouts to downspout boots and shoes at 8 inches above grade. Seal connection water tight. END OF SECTION 07 7123 Manufactured Gutters&Downspouts 07 71 23 -4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 07 92 00—JOINT SEALERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide sealants at intersection of building components. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review samples,product data, and installation instructions. B. Submit certification that materials are compatible with other materials in the joint system, or,of not compatible,recommendation and certification of other products that can be so certified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.Use experienced installers. Deliver,handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Joints designed for expansion and movement conditions at site: 1. Exterior joints on vertical surfaces: Non-sag two-part polyurethane, modified; Tremco Dymeric or equal acceptable to the Architect. 2. Horizontal paving joints: Self-leveling polyurethane; Tremco THC 900 or equal acceptable to the Architect. 3. Interior joints: Acrylic latex; Sherwin Williams 950A. 4. Seam sealant for small metal-to metal joints: Tremco Seam Sealer or equal acceptable to the Architect. 5.Pre-compressed expanding sealant tape;Emseal PC-SA or equal acceptable to the Architect. 6. Acoustical Sealant: U.S. Gypsum Acoustical Sealant or equal acceptable by the Architect. 7.Pavement joint filler: Cork joint filler,resilient and non-extruding,ASTM D1752,TYPE 2, or AASHTO M153, TYPE 2. 8. Primers, bond breakers, and backer rods compatible with sealant and adjacent surfaces. Backer rods: closed-cell extruded polymer foam. 9. Fire-retardant sealant: Non-shrinking, non-migrating polyisobutylene/ polybutene sealant, 3M Barrier Caulk, CP-25 or equal acceptable to the Architect. 10. Acrylic Glazing Sealant: Tremco Mono or equal acceptable to the Architect. 11.Bearing pads: Continuous Neoprene bearing pads of width and thickness to match existing at steel-framed concrete lift-out panels over transformer vault; with associated compatible cements and sealants, if any,required for watertight installation. Joint Sealants 07 92 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 12.Neoprene tubing and gaskets: Where shown, provide continuous neoprene extrusions of shape or diameter and wall thickness appropriate for the application. 13. Compressible fire-retardant joint filter: USG"Thermafiber"mineral fiber blanket fire safe material. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrates. B.Provide sealants in colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Provide multiple masonry veneer control joint sealant colors matching adjacent masonry. Do not match mortar color. Change sealant color as adjacent masonry color changes. Coordinate with Architect where multi-masonry colors exist. D. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and reviewed submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform smooth appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Clean and prime joints, and install bond breakers,backer rods and sealant as recommended by manufacturers. E. Depth shall equal width up to 1/2" wide; depth shall equal 1/2 width for joints over 1/2" wide, except fill joints completely with fire-retardant products. F. Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged sealants. Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage and smears. G. Clean other work damaged or soiled by work of this Section. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 92 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 1113—HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide items shown on the drawings and specified,including,but not limited to the following: 1. Standard steel doors. 2. Steel frames for doors, sidelites,transoms, and windows. 3. Louvers and vision lites in steel doors,if shown or required. 4. Sound rated steel doors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 04 20 00,Unit Masonry B. Section 05 40 00, Cold-Formed Metal Framing C. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications D. Section 08 14 23.16,Plastic Laminate Faced Wood Doors E. Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware F. Section 08 80 00, Glazed Systems: Glazing in doors, sidelites,transoms, and windows. G. Section 09 91 00,Painting 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 1. Al 15.IG, Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 2. A224.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors &Frames. 3. A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. (Formerly SDI-100) 4. A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (Formerly SDI-105). B. ASTM International(ASTM) 1.A653,Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process 2. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel, Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 3. A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 4. A1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability 5. C1363 — Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus 6. E413—Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 7. E2074, Standard Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies(Formely Al52) C. Federal Specification (Fed Spec) 1. Fed Spec C578 Bead Fusion Test D. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association(HMMA) 1. HMMA 802—Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. HMMA 810—Hollow Metal Doors. 3. HMMA 830—Hardware Preparation and Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4. HMMA 840—Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors &Frames. 5. HMMA 850—Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors &Frames. 6. HMMA 890—Technical Summary of Hollow Metal by HMMA. E.National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 1. 80,Fire Doors and Fire Windows 2. 252,Fire Tests of Door Assemblies F. Steel Door Institute 1. Technical Data Series G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. Building Materials Directory 2. Listing and Labeling 3. 1 OB and 1 OC,Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 4. 1784,Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies H. Intertek Testing, Services (Warnock Hersey,Inc. (WHI)) 1. Listing and Labeling 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance with specifications and referenced standards. Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate complete schedule in detail for each steel door and frame using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings. If any door is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening number should be shown along with the type of door(wood,plastic laminate faced, etc.). 2. Show details of construction, installation, connections, anchors, hardware reinforcement, hardware preparation, louvers, and floor and threshold clearances. C. Samples: 1. 12-inch x 12-inch sample of a fire-rated and non-rated door, cut from corner of door, showing door construction. 2. 12-inch x 12-inch sample of each type of door louver specified or required, showing louver construction. 3. 6-inch long sample of a fire-rated,non-rated frame, and each type of glass stop specified or required, showing corner and construction. D. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer's certification that oversized openings are in compliance with specifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications:If other than a manufacturer listed under Paragraph 2.1 is proposed for use on the Project, it shall be a company specialized in the manufacture of steel doors and frames of the type specified for this Project with a minimum of five (5)year experience. B. All steel doors and frames shall be by a single manufacturer. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 01 31 00,Projection Management and Coordination. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordination the Work of this Section with work in which hollow metal work is installed. B. Coordinate hardware installation with opening construction. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08 7100,Finish Hardware. C. Coordinate doors, frames, and windows with glazing specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazed Systems. D. Coordinate doors and frames with painting specified in Section 09 91 00,Painting. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as follows: 1. In manufacturer's original, clearly labeled, undamaged containers or wrappers. Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Containers or wrappers shall list the name of the manufacturer and product. B.Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site.Coordinate delivery with the schedule time of installation. C.Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage. 1. Store under cover in a clean, dry place,protected from weather and abuse. 2. Store in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. 3. Store doors in a vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation. 4. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters. 5. Should containers or wrappers become wet, remove immediately. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Warranty the work specified herein for one(1)year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include,but not be limited to: 1. Use of incorrect materials in opening. 2. Incorrect labeled components installed within opening. 3.Noisy,rough or difficult operation. 4. Failure to meet specified quality assurance requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers listed below whose products meet or exceed the specifications are approved for use in the Project. Other manufacturers must comply with Paragraph 1.5, A, Manufacturer Qualifications, must manufacturer equivalent products to those specified and comply with requirements of Division 1 regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Amweld building Products, Inc., Garrettsville, OH; (330) 527-5122 2. American Door Products, Houston, TX; (713) 681-9047 (Pearland Industries,Inc.) 3. CECO Door Products,Brentwood, TN; (615) 661-5030 4. Curries Company,Mason City,IA; (515)423-1334 5. Deansteel Mfg. Co., San Antonio, TX; (615)210-226-8271 6. Door Pro Systems,Inc., Houston, TX; (713)462-0860 7. P-W Metal Product,Inc., Garland, TX; (214)487-0454 8. Republic Builders Products Company,McKinzie, TN; (800) 733-3667 Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 9. Rocky Mountain Metals,Inc., Ranton,NM; (505)445-2756 10. Steelcraft Mfg. Co., Cincinnati, OH; (513)745-6400 2.02 GENERAL MATERIALS A. Steel requirements, all frames to be manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher leveled flatness, cold rolled steel per ASTM-A1008 general requirements. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A1011. B.Exterior doors/frames and interior frames where shown on drawings or required in damp,moist, humid, and wet areas, i.e., toilets, locker rooms, showers, etc., to be manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher leveled flatness, cold rolled steel and galvannealed to `A-60' minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-A653 and A924, with coating weight of not less than 0.60 ounce per square foot(0.30 ounce per square foot per side). 2.03 FRAME FABRICATION A. Minimum Gauges: 1. Interior Openings: a. 4-feet 0-inches or Less in Width: 16 gauge b. Over 4-feet 0-inches in Width: 14 gauge 2. Exterior Openings: 14 gauge B. Design and Construction 1. Frames shall be custom made,welded units with integral trim of sizes and shapes shown on approved shop drawings. Hinge jambs that butt adjacent 90 degrees walls shall have at least 4-inch wide frame face to assure the door trim will not strike the wall prior to that door opening at least 90 degrees. Frames profile shall match wall thickness where practical, i.e., 4-3/4 inch at 4-inch CMU, 6 3/4-inch at 6-inch CMU, 8 3/4-inch at 8-inch CMU. At masonry wall openings,fabricate frames to suit masonry opening with 2-inch head member. 2. Frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their length. 3. Jamb depths,trim,profile and backbends shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Corner joints, including face and inside corners, shall have contact edges closed tight,with trim faces mitered and continuously welded, and stops butted. The use of gussets shall bot be permitted. Face of frame shall be ground smooth. Knockdown (KD) frames are not permitted. 5. Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8 inch, except at fire windows where minimum depth of stops shall be 3/4 inch. 6.Frames for multiple openings shall have mullion and rail members which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. Joints between faces of abutting members shall be Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 securely welded and finished smooth. Mullions shall be key locked removable type. Keys shall be master keyed to Owner's keying system. 7. Hardware Reinforcements: a. Frames shall be mortised,reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully template mortised hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by Section 08 7100,Finish Hardware.Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only. b. Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows. 1)Hinge and Pivot Reinforcements (1-1/4 inch x 10 inch minimum size): 7 gauge 2) Strike Reinforcements: 12 gauge 3)Flush Bolt Reinforcements: 12 gauge 4) Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge 5)Reinforcements for Surface-Mounted Hardware, Hold-Open Arms, Surface Panic Devices: 12 gauge 8. Floor Anchors: Minimum 14 gauge, securely welded inside each jamb, with holes for floor anchorage. 9. Jamb Anchors: a. Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the T-Strap type. Anchors shall be not less than 16 gauge steel. The number of anchors provided at each jamb shall be as follows: 1)Frames up to 7 feet-6 inch height—Three (3) anchors 2)Frames 7 feet-6 inch to 8 feet-0 inch height—Four(4) anchors 3)Frames over 8 feet-0 inch height—One(1) anchor for each 2-feet or fraction thereof in height. b. Frames for installation in wood or metal stud partitions shall be provided with steel anchors of suitable approved design, not less than 16 gauge thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows: 1)Frames up to 7-feet 6-inch height—Four(4) anchors 2)Frames 7-feet 6-inch to 8-feet 0-inch height—Five (5) anchors 3)Frames over 8-feet 0-inch height—Four(4) anchors plus one (1) additional for each 2-feet or fraction thereof over 8-feet 0-inches. c. Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete,masonry or structural steel shall be provided with anchors of suitable design as shown on approved shop drawings. Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 10. Dust Cover Boxes: Shall be of not less than 26 gauge steel and shall be provided at all mortised hardware items. 8-inch CMU walls with face brick shall have duel offset jamb anchors. 11. Steel Spreader: Shall be provided on all frames, temporarily attached to bottoms of both Jambs for bracing during shipping and handling. 12. Loose Glazing Stops: Shall be of cold rolled steel,not less than 20 gauge,butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screw.Loose stops at exterior frames shall be placed on the exterior side of the frames,unless otherwise shown. 13. At sound rated door openings and at masonry openings, coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. C.Frame Color: Field painted under Section 09 91 00,Painting,to match face of door. 2.04 DOOR FABRICATION A. Minimum Gauges: 1. Interior Doors: 0.047 inch or 18 gauge 2. Exterior Doors: 0.059 inch or 16 gauge B. Design and Construction: 1. Type: Doors shall be custom fabricated, of types and sizes shown on approved shop drawings, and shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. 2. Thickness: Shall be 1 3/4-inch, unless specifically noted or shown otherwise. 3. Fabrication: a. Doors shall be strong,rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage and buckle. b. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for gage of metal used. c. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners spaced a maximum 6-inches on center and extending full height of door. d. Fill interior with noncombustible fiberglass insulation. Use mineral board filler as required for labeled doors. e. Faces shall be joined at vertical edges of door by a continuous weld extending full height of door. Welds shall be ground,filled and dressed smooth to provide a smooth surface. f. Top and bottom edges shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 gauge,extending full width of door and spot weld to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush closing. g. Doors within wet of humid areas shall have a top cap and solid foam interior core to prevent internal moisture accumulation. Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 h. Edge profile shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows: 1) Single-Acting Swing Doors: Beveled 1/8-inch in 2-inches. i. Hardware Reinforcements: 1)Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully template hardware,in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by Section 08 71 00, Painting. Where surfaced-mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates shall be as follows: 2)Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: i. Hinge &Pivot Reinforcements: 7 gauge ii. Reinforcements for Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Concealed Holders, Concealed or Surface-Mounted Closers: 12 gauge 4.Glass Moldings and Stops:Loose stops shall be not less than 20 gauge steel,with butt corner joints, secured to frame opening by counterattack screws. Snap-on attachments will not be acceptable. 5. Louvers: Shall be inverted"V"blade, lightproof type,unless noted otherwise. 6. Edge Clearances: a. Between Door and Frame at Head and Jambs: 1/8-inch b. At Door Sills with No Threshold: 5/8-inch to 3/4-inch above finished floor c. At Door Sills with Threshold: As required to suit threshold d. Between Meeting Edges of Double Doors: 1/8-inch C. Finish: 1. Shop Paint Steel(whether galvanized or ungalvanized) Stops and Accessories as follows: a. Clean surfaces free of mill scale,rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. b. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of an approved baked-on rust- inhibitive primer paint to provide a minimum 0.5 mil dry film thickness. 2. Field painted under Section 09 91 00,Painting. D. Sound Rated Door: STC of 32,measured in accordance with ASTM E413. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Separate dissimilar metals. Protect against galvanic action. B. Frames: Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 - 8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.Anchorage and Connections: Secure to adjacent construction.Where practical,interior door frames shall be flush with the pull side wall to minimize or eliminate the reveal and allow full 180 degree door swing. 2. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and install labeled frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 3. Frame Spreader Bars: Leave intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securely attached. 4. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag box, and reinstall after finish paint work is completed. Do not remove or paint over labels on labeled frames. C. Doors: 1. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 2. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and install labeled doors in accordance with NFPA 80. 3. Adjust operable parts for correct function. 4. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag, box, and reinstall after finish paint work is completed. Do not remove or paint over labels on labeled doors. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects. B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. C. Remove packaging, scraps and debris, and leave site in clean condition. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors&Frames 08 11 13 -9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 14 23—PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. Section 08 11 13,Hollow Metal Doors and Frame, for door frames. B. Section 08 71 00,Finish Hardware C. Section 08 80 00, Glazed Systems: Vision glazing types for factory glazing. D. Section 09 9100,Painting, for painting of glass stops to match door frames. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Architectural Woodwork Institute(AWI) B.National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 1. 80,Fire Doors and Fire Windows 2. 252,Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. Building Materials Directory 2. Listing and Labeling 3. 10 (c),Fire Tests of Door Assemblies—Positive Pressure D. Intertek Testing, Services (Warnock Hersey, Inc. (WHI)) 1. Certification Listings for Fire Doors 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show or schedule location, size, thickness, elevation, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire rating, and other pertinent data for each door required. 2. Include schedule of hardware preparation required for each door. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. C. Samples: Plastic laminate in colors and patterns for Architect's selection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Custom Grade A. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors 08 14 23 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Refer to Section 01 31 00,Project Management and Coordination. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery to site, store,protect, and handle doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and manufacturer's instructions.Accept doors on site in manufacturer's standard packaging.HVAC systems shall be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25 percent nor greater than 55 percent. B. Storage: 1. Store doors in a clean and dry location protected from weather and abuse. 2. Stabilize moisture content prior to installation. C. Mark each door on the top or in the top hinge with opening numbers corresponding to approved shop drawings. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide for lifetime replacing, including cost of rehanging and refinishing, at no cost to Owner, wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including, but not limited to the following: 1. Warp in excess of 1/4 inch as defined by AWI. 2. Warp or twist to a degree that door will not operate properly. 3. Delamination of face. 4. Telegraphing or show through of stiles, rails, or core greater than 0.01 inch in any 3-inch area. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed or named in the specifications who produce equivalent products to those specified are approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturer must have a minimum of 5- years experience manufacturing equivalent products to those specified and comply with requirements of Division 1 regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Doors: a. American Door Products (VT Industries) b. Eggers Industries C. Ideal Architectural Door&Plywood d. Marshfield Doors Systems, Inc. e. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company 2. Plastic Laminate: Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors 08 14 23 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. Formica Corp. b. Nevamar,International Paper, Decorative Products Division c. Wilsonart International 2.02 MATERIALS A. Flush Interior Non-Rated Wood Doors: 1. General: 3-ply AWI PC-HPDL-3 High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL), Bonded Particle Core, stile and rails abrasively planed as an assembly prior to laminating, factory machine and fit. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch. 3. Core: 32 lbs per cubic foot particleboard, 1LD2 in accordance with ANSI A208.1 4. Stile: LSL, 1-3/8 inch,bonded to core 5. Rail: LSL, bonded to core, 1-1/8 inch minimum, 5 inch lead head rail for closer reinforcement. B. Mineral Core: 1. Meet applicable requirements of Paragraph A above. 2. Core: Asbestos-free, incombustible mineral sections — 45, 60, or 90-minute fire-rated, positive pressure Category A. 3. Stiles and Rails: Manufacturers thickness to achieve rating. C. Accessories: 1. Glazing: Factory glaze with glass as indicated. Verify compatibility of glazing system with positive pressure requirements where applicable. 2.Glass Stops:Glass stops,if any,shall be wood to match door. Stops prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. Size for 6-inch by 36-inch vision glass,unless noted otherwise. Color will be approved by Architect. 3. Adhesives: Type 1,hot pressed 4. Hardware Blocking: Providing structural composite lumber or solid lumber as required. Coordinate with hardware as scheduled. 5.Plastic Laminate: 0.050-inch thick, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 6. Seal top,bottom and cut surface of openings at factory with two (2) coats varnish. 7. Vertical door edges shall be factory painted to match door face. Factory shall supply matching paint and edges shall be touched-up in field. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors 08 14 23 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Doors and hardware installed under Section 06 10 00,Rough Carpentry.Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. Coordinate work with door opening construction, and door and frame hardware installation. B. Clearances: 1. Head and Jambs: 1/8-inch maximum. 2. Sill: %-inch typically, except provide 1/4-inch clearance from top surface of carpeting. C. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location and swing characteristics and that the frames are installed plumb, level and parallel. Reject doors with defects that are not repairable. D. Coordinate hardware installation for proper door operation. Adjust locks and latches to engage snugly without forcing. Align hardware to function without squeaking, binding, or racking. Mortise as required for automatic door bottoms. E.Protect doors from damage and replace doors that are damaged. Verify that tops and bottoms of doors have been sealed prior to installation, as required for warranty. 3.02 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair or replace damage doors at no expense to Owner. END OF SECTION 08 14 23 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors 08 14 23 -4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 3113—ACCESS DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Access doors in gypsum board, masonry partitions, and plaster/stucco soffits, where shown or required. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature, including schedules, charts, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication,procedures,product variations, and accessories. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed whose products meet or exceed the specifications are approved for use the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five(5)years experience manufacturing access doors meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Divisions 1 requirements regarding substitutions in order to be considered. 1. Acudor products, Inc., Cedar Grove,NJ 2. Babcock-Davis (Cierra Products),Brooklyn Park, MN 3. Bar-co,Alfab, Inc. Enterprise,AL 4. J.L. Industries, Incorporated, Bloomington,MN 5. Karp associates,Inc. Maspeth,NY 6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN 7. Milcor LP,Holland, OH 8. Nystrom Building Products Co.,Inc., Minneapolis,MN 9. The Williams Brothers Corporation of American,Front Royal, VA B. Specification are based on products of the Babcock-Davis,Brooklyn Park,MN;(888)412-3726. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. General: The following access panel types are for selection as required whether or not indicated on drawings, unless indicated elsewhere in Divisions 22-26. The contractor shall evaluate the specific requirements and provide the appropriate system based on the condition, as all types may not be required on the project. The inclusion of any of the listed access panel types does not necessarily imply that the condition exists in the scope of the work. B. Standard type flush steel door for exterior masonry construction: Access Doors 0831 13 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. Size: 2-feet 0-inches x 3-feet 0-inches unless otherwise noted in drawings or specifications. 2. Hinges: Stainless steel concealed continuous piano type hinges. 3. Frames: 6063-T5 extruded aluminum frame. Mill finish. 4. Doors: 20 gauge galvanized steel.Phosphate dipped and prime coated for filed painting per Section 09 9100. 5. Latch and Lock: Two (2) dual acting handles with exterior lock. 6. Gasketing: Extruded santoprene. 7. Insulation: 2-inch thick fiberglass. 8. Approved Product: Model"B-XT", or architect approved equal. C. Standard type flush steel door for wallboard and masonry construction: 1. Size: 2-feet 0-inches x 3-feet 0-inches unless otherwise noted on drawings or specifications. a. Provide 12-inch x 12-inch access panels at all motorized overhead coiling doors, grilles, and coiling counter doors that are located within non-removable ceilings for access to motors for repairs and maintenance of electric operators. 2. Hinges: Concealed continuous piano type hinges. 3. Finish: Phosphate dipped and prime coated for field painting per Section 09 91 00. 4. Frames: 16 gauge galvanized steel with 22 gauge galvanized wallboard corner bead. 5. Doors: 14 gauge galvanized steel. 6. Lock: Flush screw driver operated cam. 7. Approved Product: Model"B-NW", or Architect approved equal. D. Standard type flush steel door for plaster/stucco soffit construction: 1. Size: As shown on drawings. 2. Hinges: Concealed continuous piano type hinges. 3. Finish: Phosphate dipped and prime coated for field painting per Section 09 91 00. 4. Frames: 16 gauge galvanized steel with 22 gauge galvanized plater casing bead. 5. Doors: 14 gauge galvanized steel. 6. Lock: Flush screw driver operated cam. 7. Approved Product: Model `B-NP", or Architect approved equal. E. Fire rated flush steel door for wallboard construction: 1. Listing: UL listed `B' label up to 1 1/2-hours in walls and Warnock-Hershey listed up to 3 hours in ceilings. Access Doors 0831 13 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Size: As shown on the drawings. 3. Hinges: Concealed pin hinge. 4. Finish: Phosphate dipped and prime coated for field painting per Section 09 9100. 5. Frames: 16 gauge galvanized steel with 22 gauge galvanized wallboard corner bead. 6. Doors: 20 gauge galvanized steel. 7. Lock: Knurled knob/key operated latch bolt. 8. Approved Product: Model"B-IW", or Architect approved equal. F. Insulated access panel for valve box in exterior masonry wall: 1. Size: 12-inches x 12-inches, or as required for application. 2. Door: 0.060 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 3. Frame: 0.060 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 4. Hinge: Stainless steel concealed piano hinge. 5. Latch: Hex head cam latch operable with standard alien wrench. 6. Flange: 0.080 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 7. Finish: Paint grip. 8. Insulation: Two (2) inch thick fiberglass. 9. Gasket: Extruded Sanoprene. 10. Approved Product: Model `B-XT", or Architect approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Located and provide panels to the trade that is constructing the material being penetrated. 3.02 LOCATIONS A. Provide where required by code and where needed to service and maintain equipment. B. If not shown on the drawings, consult the Architect before locating the finished spaces. END OF SECTION 08 3113 Access Doors 0831 13 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 36 00—SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sectional overhead doors of the following types: 1. Ribbed steel doors,thermally-broken,polyurethane insulated. (Model 3724) 2. Electric door operators 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500—Metal Fabrications: Steel channel opening frame. B. Section 06100—Rough Carpentry:Rough wood framing and blocking for door opening. C. Section 08710—Door Hardware: Lock cylinders. D. Section 11150—Parking Control Equipment: Remote door control. E. Division 16 Sections: Electrical service and connections for powered operators. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M— Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM A 924/A 924M — Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. C. ASTM B 209/209M—Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. D. ASTM B 221/221M—Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods, Wires,Profiles, and Tubes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Operation and maintenance data. 5.Nameplate data and ratings for motors. C. Shop Drawings: Include opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing,hardware locations, and installation details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Sectional Overhead Door 08 36 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 E. Verification Samples: For each finish specified,two samples,minimum size 6 inches(150 mm) square,representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.05 WIND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design doors to withstand positive and negative wind loads as calculated in accordance with applicable building code. 1. Design Wind Load: As calculated by Design Requirements in Specification Section 01 41 19, 2. Safety Factor: 1.5 times design wind load 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of doors specified in this section,with not less than ten years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum of five years of documented experience, and approved by the door manufacturer. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard finish warranty against rust through. 1. Warranty period: 10 years B. Delamination Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against delamination. 1. Warranty period: 10 years PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Door Manufacturer: Clopay Building Products Company,which is located at: 8585 Duke Blvd. ASD; Mason, OH 45040-3101; Toll Free Tel: 800-526-4301 prompt#3; Fax: 888- 434-3139; Email: CIAC&clopay.com Web: www.clopaycommercial.com B. Acceptable Door Operator Manufacturer: LiftMaster, which is located at 300 Windsor Drive, Oak Brook,IL 60523; Toll Free Tel: 800-282-6225; Email: Specs CkLiftMaster.com C. Substitutions: Submit qualifications of equal performance prior to bid date for substitutions. 2.02 LIGHT RIBBED STEEL DOORS, THERMALLY-BROKEN, POLYURETHANE INSULATED A. Door Construction: 1.Panels: Foamed in place Polyurethane core construction between exterior and interior steel skins. 2. Steel Skins: Formed from roll formed commercial or drawing quality steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 924/A 924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M,pre-painted with primer Sectional Overhead Door 08 36 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 and baked-on polyester topcoat; sections formed to create weather tight tongue-in-groove meeting joint. 3.Reinforcing: Galvanizing and primed steel reinforcement located under each hinge location, pre-punched for hinge attachment. 4. Handle: High impact polymer step plate/lift handle on bottom panel section. B.Premium Duty 2-inches (51 mm)Door: Clopay Model 3724. 1. Maximum Door Size: 32ft, 2 inches (9.8 m)wide by 26 ft(7.9 m)high. 2. Reference drawings for door dimensions. 3. Overall Panel Thickness: 2-inches (51 mm). 4. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 24 gauge 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) exterior; minimum 28 gauge 0.015 inch(0.38 mm)interior. 5. End Stiles: Galvanized steek end stiles, engineered for easy hardware attachment through pre-punched holes. Minimum 18 gauge, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick for single end hinge style and 16 gauge .056 inch(1.42 mm)minimum for double end hinge style. 6. Astragal: U-shaped flexible PVC in retainer of full-length 0.055-inch(1.4 mm)rigid PVC. 7. Thermal Resistance (R-Value): 18.4 deg F hr sq ft/Btu (3.0 (K sq m)/W); calculated door section R-value in accordance with DASMA TDS-163. 8. Windows: a. Not Applicable. 9.Finish: Interior stucco embossed texture with shallow U ribbed pattern,white interior color. Exterior color to be selected by architect using "RAL" standard to match Architectural Drawings. 10. Locking: Inside spring loaded slide bolt lock on end stile that engages slot in track. a. Provide two inside slide lock. 11. Weatherstripping: Provide complete perimeter seals. Provide flexible top seal, flexible jamb seal and U shaped bottom seal. 12. Tracks: Vertical tracks minimum 0.061-inch (1.55 mm) galvanized steel tapered and mounted for wedge type closing. Horizontal tracks minimum 0.075-inch (1.91 mm) galvanized steel,reinforced with minimum 0.0897-inch (2.28 mm) galvanized steel angles as required: a. Provide standard lift tracks with 15-inches (381 mm)radius track as indicated. 13. Spring Counterbalance: Torsion spring counterbalance mechanism sized to weight of the door, with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of die cast aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable with minimum 7 to 1 safety factor. Sectional Overhead Door 08 36 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. High Cycle Spring: 100,000 cycles. 2.03 ELECTRICAL DOOR OPERATORS A. General:Provide electric door operator provided by door manufacturer for door with operational life specified complete with electronic motor and factory pre-wired motor controls,starter,gear- reduction unit, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Solenoid-operated brake B. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator, so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator in engaged. C. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. D. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit,maximum 24-V,AC or DC. E. Electric Motors: LiftMaster Model J Industrial Duty Hoist Operator: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motor, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s), and not more 1 fps (03 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 1. Type: Jackshaft. 2. HP: a. 3/4 hp. 3. Power Characteristics: a. 208/230/460 V Dual Voltage. b. 3-phase. 4. Service Factor: a. NEMA 4 waterproof. 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system. F.Remote Control Station:Provide momentary contact,3-button control station with push—button controls labeled"Open","Close"and"Stop"adjacent to each door and at local gang of switches. G. Provide interior units, fully guarded, surface mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6 enclosure in one of the following types: 1. Enclosure Type: Type 4. Sectional Overhead Door 08 36 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 H. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Sensor Edge: LiftMaster NEMA 6 Monitored Optical Edge System (OES): Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensing edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cord. Sensing edge shall be operated by: a. Electric Fail safe. 2. Photo-electric control: LiftMaster NEMA 4X CPS-OPEN4 Monitored Photo Eyes: Provide each motorized door with(2)photo-electric devices that will stop and reverse the downward door travel if the light beam is broken or blocked. Coordinate with Owner for mounting heights. Device shall be: a. NEMA Type 4X. 3. Light Curtains: LigtMaster LC-36A light curtains to provide 36 inches of cross-beam infrared detection.Powered by the operator's A/C accessory power supply or via an optional 100MAPS External DC Power Supply as applicable. I. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. J. Radio Controls: Provide 3 button radio transmitter to provide remote open, close, stop functionality. 1. Provide external antenna and coaxial wiring to receiver to enhance radio control reception. 2. Provide 2 controls per motor. K. Provide auxiliary chain hoist: for emergency, manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of Work in this Section. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Sectional Overhead Door 08 36 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead doors and track in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08 36 00 Sectional Overhead Door 08 36 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 4113-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems,including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors,perimeter sealing of storefront units, and doors. 1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront Systems include: a. IR 501UT Framing — 2-3/4" x 5" (69.8 mm x 127 mm) nominal dimension; Thermal; Center Plane, Screw Spline Fabrication. b. IR 501UT Framing—Impact Glazing c. 500 Heavy Wall Swing Door: 1) Wide stile 2) Vertical face dimension: 5" (127.0 mm) 3) Depth: 2" (50.8 mm) 4) Wall thickness: 3/16" (4.8 min) for high traffic applications B. Related Sections: 1. 079200"Joint Sealants" 2. 088000"Glazing" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA)—AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures consistent with Spec Section 0141 19. 2. Air Leakage: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air Leakage rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 Us • m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.2 psf (300 Pa) with interior seal, or, rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 1/s - m2) at a static air pressure differential of 1.6 psf(75 Pa)without interior seal. 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 15 psf(720 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 30 psf(1436 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load,no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2%of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Energy Efficiency: Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 0841 13 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor):When tested to AAMA specification 507 or NFRC100 the thermal transmittance(U-Factor) shall not be more than: IR 501T: 1) (With 2-Piece Mullion) Provide aluminum windows simulated for thermal performance according to AAMA 507 and NFRC 100 with a thermal transmittance(U- Factor) of 0.27 to 0.57 BTU/hr/sf/°F. (Based on center of glass U-Factor range 0.10 to 0.48). 2) (With 3-Piece Mullion) Provide aluminum windows simulated for thermal performance according to AAMA 507 and NFRC 100 with a thermal transmittance(U- Factor) of 0.24 to 0.55 BTU/hr/sf/°F. (Based on center of glass U-Factor range 0.10 to 0.48). b. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, AAMA Specification 507 or NFRC 100 the thermal transmittance (U-Factor) shall not be more than; IR 501UT: a. 1" insulating glass: 1) U-Factor not more than .33 BTU/hr/ft2/°F per AAMA 1503 with exterior 1/4" clear with e=0.035 low-e coating on surface #2, 1/2" air space with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas fill, and interior 1/4" clear glass. or 6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503,the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: IR 501UT: a. 68 frame and 70glass (low-e). 7. Condensation Resistance (I): When tested to CSA A-440, the condensation index shall not be less than: IR 501UT: a. 59 frame and 650ass (low-e). 8. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): When tested to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E 1425 and ASTM E90,the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: IR 501UT: a. 38 (STC) and 33 (OITC). 9. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance Performance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886,information in ASTM E 1996 and TAS 201/203. a. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. 10. Material Ingredient Reporting: Shall have a complete list of chemical ingredients to at least 100ppm (0.01%)that covers 100%of the product, acceptable documentation includes: a. Manufacturer's inventory with Chemical Abstract Service Registration Number (CASRN or CAS#). 1) Kawneer's Material Transparency Summary(MTS). b. Cradle to Cradle certification: Either document below is acceptable for this option. 1) Cradle to Cradle Certified®with Material Health section Silver or above. 2) Silver level or above Material Health Certificate. c. Red List Free DECLARE label. B. Material Ingredient Reporting: Shall have a complete list of chemical ingredients to at least 100ppm (0.01%)that covers 100% of the product, acceptable documentation includes: Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 08 41 13-2 Corpus Christi Fire Dept. Resource&Wellness Center Rev 0/2024 1. Manufacturer's inventory with Chemical Abstract Service Registration Number(CASRN or CAS#). a. Kawneer's Material Transparency Summary (MTS). 2. Cradle to Cradle certification: Either document below is acceptable for this option. a. Cradle to Cradle Certified TM with Material Health section Silver or above. b. Silver Level or above Material Health Certificate. 3. Red List Free DECLARE label. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details,material descriptions,fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum-framed storefront system and doors indicated. 1. Recycled Content: a. Provide documentation that aluminum has a minimum of 50% mixed pre- and post- consumer recycled content with a sample document illustrating project specific information that will be provided after product shipment. b. Once product has shipped, provide project specific recycled content information, including: 1) Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre- and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. 2) Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project. 3) Indicate location recovery of recycled content. 4) Indicate location of manufacturing facility. 2. Environmental Product Declaration(EPD): a. Include a Type III Product-Specific EPD created from a Product Category Rule. 3. Material Ingredient Reporting: a. Include documentation for material reporting that has a complete list of chemical ingredients to at least 100ppm(0.01%)that covers 100% of the product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum-framed storefront system and components required. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type, of aluminum-framed storefront and doors. F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems and door corner/stile/rail, made from 12" (304.8 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. G. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 0841 13 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum-framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum-framed storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum- framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section"Product Requirements". Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects,as judged solely by Architect,except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup for type(s) of storefront elevation(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings. F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination". 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum-framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2)years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Kawneer Company Inc. 1. Storefront&Frames a. IR 501T/IR 501UT Framing b. lR 501T/IR 501 UT Framing—Impact Glazing c. System Dimensions: 2-3/4" x 5" (69.8 mm x 127 mm) 2. Doors a. 500 Heavy Wall Swing Door b. Vertical face dimension: 5" (127.0 mm) C. Top Rail: 5" (127.0 mm) Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 08 41 13-4 Corpus Christi Fire Dept. Resource&Wellness Center Rev 0/2024 d. Bottom Rail: 6-1/2" (165.1 mm) e. Optional Bottom Rail: 10" (254.0 mm) B. Substitutions of Equal Performance and Criteria: 1. Pre-Contract(Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests prior to bid date. 2. Post-Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit written request in order to avoid storefront installation and construction delays. 3. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requirements and job conditions. 4. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer(1) attesting to adherence to specification requirements for storefront system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design,manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum storefront for a period of not less than ten(10) years. (Company Name) 5. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project. 6. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's standard sizes. C. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form, either as an addendum or modification. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members,trim hardware, anchors, and other components. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. F. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Thermal Barrier: 1. IR 501UT-Kawneer DUAL IsoLock®Thermal Break with two (2) 1/4" (6.4 mm)separations consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA T1R-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 0841 13 -5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel. C. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. D. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened,undamaged containers with identification labels intact. E. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements,construction activities,and other hazards before,during and after storefront installation. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing". B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types;replaceable,extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: 1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black 2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. 3. Color: Matching structural sealant. 2.5 HARDWARE A. General Hardware Requirements: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard hardware. 2. Hardware shall be fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material that is compatible with aluminum. 3. Hardware shall be designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum-framed entrance doors. B. Standard Hardware(350/500 Heavy WallTM IR): 1. Weather-Stripping: a. Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal using wool pile with polymeric fin. b. The door weathering on a single-acting offset pivot or butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 08 41 13-6 Corpus Christi Fire Dept. Resource&Wellness Center Rev 0/2024 a. EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (necessary to meet specified performance tests) 3. Threshold: a. Extruded aluminum b. One piece per door opening C. Ribbed surface 4. Continuous Hinge 5. Push/Pull 6. Exit Device: Refer to Door Hardware specification. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush,hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. C. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer's standard installation instructions. D. Doors: 1. Aluminum-framed glass doors shall be reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing. 2. Door corner construction: a. Mechanical clip fastening b. SIGMA deep-penetration plug welds C. 1-1/8" (28.6 mm)long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners d. Hook-in type glazing stops with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non- stretchable cord 3. Joint construction: a. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. b. Make joints hairline in appearance. 4. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 5. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 6. Weather-stripping: a. Provide weather-stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufacturer's drawings and details. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 0841 13 -7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permanodic© AA-M10C21A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating(Color#14 Clear). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support,anchorage,and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated,weather tight sliding door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound,well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt,rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum-framed storefront system and entrance doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement,anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Install aluminum-framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within aluminum-framed storefront system to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests:Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed,glazed,perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency.Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 503, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 08 41 13-8 Corpus Christi Fire Dept. Resource&Wellness Center Rev 0/2024 a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ftz,whichever is greater. b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105.No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.2 psf(300 Pa). B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer's field service representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING& PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum-framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 0841 13 -9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 7100-DOOR HARDWARE(Phase II) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: l. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 2. Division 08 Section"Flush Wood Doors". 3. Division 08 Section"Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts". D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC-International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 -Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes,Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards-A156 Series. 2. UL10C-Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing, fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style,function, size,label,hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings,both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. C. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Hurricane Resistant Openings: Exterior hurricane opening assemblies to be tested according to ASTM E330,ASTM E1886,ASTM E1996, TAS 201, TAS 202, TAS 203 standards, and certified by a qualified independent third party agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, with labeling indicating compliance with the design pressure and debris impact resistance level requirements specified for the Project. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Provide record documentation of as-built door hardware sets in digital format(.pdf, .docx, .xlsx, .csv) and as required in Division 01,Project Record Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA)Certified Products Directory(CPD). C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. l. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. F. Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings (State of Texas): Provide exterior hollow metal and door hardware assemblies approved by the Texas Department of insurance (TDI), including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures calculated for this project by a registered architect or engineer and are part of the construction documents per the Texas Department of Insurance, authorities having jurisdiction, and the International Building Code Design Loads Section 1609. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. Each unit to bear third party permanent label in accordance with the Texas Department of Insurance requirements applicable to project. 2. Hurricane Resistance Test Performance: Provide hollow metal and door hardware approved assemblies that pass large missile-impact tests, as required by Texas Department of Insurance systems location above grade and cyclic-pressure tests according to testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. a. Impact Resistance: Hollow metal with approved door hardware assemblies must satisfy the Texas Department of Insurance's criteria for protection from windborne debris complying with the International Building Code (IBC). Assemblies must pass the large missile impact test(which equates to Missile Level D or Missile Level E as specified in ASTM E 1996-02). Assemblies may be installed at any height on the structure as long as the design pressure rating for the assemblies is not exceeded. G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label indicating compliance with the referenced testing standards. H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building,purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s)to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting,testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.7 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: l. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of Substantial Completion. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 BUTT HINGES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. C. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches,provide 4 hinges,plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2"standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3'1"to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. McKinney(MK)- TA/T4A Series, 5-knuckle. 2.2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Manufacturers:. a. Pemko(PE). Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: Provide products conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. 2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8" in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 5. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 door pushes and pull units of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pulls, where applicable, shall be provided with a 10" clearance from the finished floor on the push side to accommodate wheelchair accessibility. 5. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. When through-bolt fasteners are in the same location as a push plate, countersink the fasteners flush with the door face allowing the push plate to sit flat against the door. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10)years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types: l. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks. 4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 6. Keyway: Match Facility Restricted Keyway. C. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented key. Cylinders are to be protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by manufacturer's United States patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with owner having the ability for on- site original key cutting. 1. Patented key systems shall not be established with products that have an expired patent. Expired systems shall only be specified and supplied to support existing systems. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent(SA)-Degree DG1. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five(5). 3. Construction Keys(where required): Ten(10). F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. G. Key Registration List(Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. 2.5 KEY CONTROL A. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self- locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment(LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Telkee(TK). 2.6 MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Provide ANSIBHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed mortise locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)- 8200 Series. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Exit devices shall have a five-year warranty. 2. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 4. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 5. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings,provide as less bottom rod(LBR)unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets,provide devices designed for maximum 2"wide stiles. 9. Dummy Push Bar:Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. 12. Hurricane and Storm Shelter Compliance: Devices to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or storm shelter products that have been independently third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSUBHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed exit devices. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)- 80 Series. 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-IOC for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act,provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSUBHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Heavy duty surface mounted door closers shall have a 30-year warranty. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)- 351 Series. C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSIBHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves.Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)- 1431 Series. 2.10 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates(kick, armor, or mop)not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1" LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16" above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). 2.11 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Rixson(RF). b. Sargent Manufacturing(SA). 2.12 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds,weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL-IOC. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko(PE). 2.13 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.14 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI Al 15 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI Al15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. DHl TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Push Plates and Door Pulls: When through-bolt fasteners are in the same location as a push plate, countersink the fasteners flush with the door face allowing the push plate to sit flat against the door. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." F. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections "Closeout Procedures". Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected. 1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. I. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. MK-McKinney 2. PE-Pemko 3. RO-Rockwood 4. SA- SARGENT 5. RF- Rixson Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 103A 1 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD 1 PE 1 Rim Exit,NL DG1 AD8504 US32D SA 1 Pull RM3131-24 US32D RO 1 Drop Plats&Mounting Hardware as required EN SA 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Perimeter Seal by door/frame mfg 1 Sweep 315CN x Width PE 1 Threshold 2005AT x Width PE Notes: The specified hardware is for design intent only for TDI. Verify and supply all products in compliance with the door manufacturer's assembly in compliance with TDI. Set: 2.0 Doors: 114A, 114D 4 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2314 US32D MK 1 Rim Exit, ST DG1 HC 8804 ETL US32D SA 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head&Jambs) PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Width PE 1 Sweep 3452AV x Width PE 1 Threshold 2005AT x Width PE Notes: The specified hardware is for design intent only for TDL Verify and supply all products in compliance with the door manufacturer's assembly in compliance with TDI. Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 Set: 3.0 Doors: 104A 6 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 2 Flush Bolt 555 /557 (As req'd) - 12"/72"AFF US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 8204 LNL US26D SA 2 Surf Overhead Stop 9-X36 689 RF 2 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 4.0 Doors: 103B 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD 1 PE 1 Rim Exit,PA 8815 ETL US32D SA 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head&Jambs) PE 1 Sweep 315CN x Width PE 1 Threshold 171A x Width PE Set: 5.0 Doors: 108A, 109A 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Office Lock DG1 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 6.0 Doors: 113A, 113B 3 Hinge(heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 1 Rim Exit,CL DG1 8813 ETL US32D SA 1 Surface Closer 1431 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"High x LDW CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 7.0 Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 Doors: 120A 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock DG1 8237 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 1431 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 8.0 Doors: 117A, 118A 3 Hinge(heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 1 Pull Plate BF 110 x 70C US32D RO 1 Push Plate 70E US32D RO 1 Surface Closer 1431 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Mop Plate K1050 4" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 9.0 Doors: 114B, 114C, 114E, 114F, 114G, 114H, 114J 1 Note All hardware By door mfr Notes: Coordinate cylinder requirements. Set: 10.0 Doors: 113C 1 Note All hardware By door mfr Notes: Coordinate cylinder requirements. END OF SECTION 08 71 00 Door Hardware(Phase 11) 08 71 00- 18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 08 80 00—GLAZED SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior and interior glass. B. Glazing Sealant. C. Aluminum framing systems. D. Aluminum and glass entry doors. E. Glazing of hollow metal doors. F. Glazing of wood doors. G. Glazing of plastic laminate faced wood doors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08 11 13,Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Section 08 14 23.16,Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors C. Section 08 71 00,Finish Hardware D. Section 07 92 00,Building Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA CW-10, Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site 2. AAMA/NWWDA 1011S.2, Voluntary Specification for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. 3. AAMA 611,Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 1. Z97.1, Safety Performance Specification 2. Z97.1, Safety Glass Code C. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickle Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip 2. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 3. B210, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes 4. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,Profiles, and Tubes Glazed Systems 08 80 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 5. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles 6. C509, Standard Specification for Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material 7. C1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass 8. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen 9. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 10. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differential 11. E547, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential D. American Welding Society(AWS) E. Federal Specification(FS) 1. DD-G-001403 B 2. T-G-410, Sash putty 3. TT-C-494,Bituminous Paint 4. TT-S-00230, Sealing Compound: Synthetic Rubber Base and TT-S-00203C 5. TT-S-001657, Sealing Compound: Butyl Rubber Base 6. SS-C-153,Mastic Bulk Compound F. Flat Glass Marketing Association(FGMA) 1. Glazing Sealing Systems Manual 2. Glazing Manual 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Complete shop drawings by manufacturer indicating elevations, sections, substrates, fasteners,finishes,hardware and installation details. B. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements, and manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Engineer's calculations of performance requirements. D. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and test reports from an AAMA-accredited laboratory. E. Samples: Showing color Glazed Systems 08 80 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. Samples of each type of glass (12 inches x 12 inches minimum) 2. In place sample of sealant at frame perimeter for Architect's approval. Architect will select colors from manufacturer's full available colors. 3. Samples of framing finish and fastener types for Architect's approval. Architect will select finishes and colors from those available from manufacturer. F. Certification of Installation: 1. Provide written certification stating that materials providing meet the specified requirements. 2. Include the following specific information indicating their compliance with referenced standards. a. Thermal movement. b. Structural properties. c. Water penetration. d. Air leakage. e. Finishes on aluminum surfaces. G. Coordination: 1. Copy Owner's hardware consultant on shop drawings for coordination. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B.In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the above referenced Flat Glass Marketing Association publications. C.Furnish a valid AAMA "Notice of Product Certification" indicating that the windows for the project conform to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Refer to Section 01 31 00,Project Management and Coordination. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Handle and protect windows and accessories in accordance with AAMA CW-10-97 until project completion. 1.08 WARRANTY Glazed Systems 08 80 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Warrant the work specified herein for (2) years, against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include,but not be limited to,the following: 1. Faulty, improper or inadequate attachment or installation. 2. Chipped edges,broken, or scratched glass. 3. Defective finish of molding. 4. Distortion or waves. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed whose product meet or exceed the specifications are approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Glass: a. AGC Flat Glass North America,Kingsport Tenn. (423)229-7200 b. Guardian Industries Corp., Corsicana TX; (800) 527-2511 C. Oldcastle Glass Houston, Houston, TX; (866) 653-2278 d. Pilkington,Toledo, OH; (419) 247-2721 e. PPG Industries,Inc.,Pittsburgh,PA; (412)434-2858 f. Viracon, Owatonna, MN; (800) 533-2080 2. Aluminum Framing System, and Doors: a. EFCO Corp.,Monett, MO; (800) 221-4169 b. Kawneer Co., Inc., Jonesboro, GA; (770)478-8841 (Basis of Specification) C. Tajima Corp USA, Los Angeles, CA; (818) 547-4595 d. TRACO Windows, Cranberry Township,PA(888-887-5945) e. Tubelite Storefronts &Entrances, Reed City,Ml; (800) 866-2227 f. United States Aluminum,Waxhachie, TX; (800) 627-6440 g. Vistawall Architectural Products (Oldcastle Glass), Terrel, TX; (972) 551-6100 h. Wikk Industries, Inc., Greendale, WI; (414)421-9490 i. YKK AP America, Inc., Grand Prairie, TX; (972) 206-2555 3. Aluminum Window Manufacturers: Glazed Systems 08 80 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. EFCA Corp.,Monett, MO; (800) 221-4196 b. Kawneer Co.,Inc., Jonesboro, GA; (770)478-8841 c. TRACO Windows, Cranberry Township,PA; (888) 887-5945 d. Vistawall Architectural Products (Oldcastle Glass), Terrel, TX; (972) 551-6100 e. Any of the above manufacturers accepted for Aluminum Storefronts who produce aluminum windows as specified. 2.02 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Requirements apply simultaneously through the most adverse conditions of each exterior application. 1.Windloads:Design system to withstand positive and negative windloads normal to the place of the wall in excess of 20 psf. 2. Thermal Movement: Provide for noiseless expansion and contraction of all materials and assemblies due to temperature changes in a range between 10 degrees F and 180 degrees F without detriment to appearance or performance. 3.Water Infiltration:Drain water entering at joints and condensation occurring within the wall construction to the exterior face of the wall. Allow no uncontrolled water other than condensation on the interior face of the wall. 4. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage to maximum 0.06 cfm per square foot of wall projected area. (Storefront at 8 lb./sq.ft.)_ B. Aluminum Window Requirements Conformance to specifications in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 when tests are performed on the prescribed 8'0" x 5'0" minimum test size with the following test results: 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum .07 cfm/square foot when tested per ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 1.57 psf. 2.Water Penetration:No uncontrolled ware leakage when tested per ASTM E 547 and ASTM E 331 at a static air pressure difference of 10 psf. 3.Uniform Structural:Window to be operable,and maximum.4%permanent deformation per member when tested per ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of 67.5 psf. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum Alloys: Comply with the standards and designations of the Aluminum Association and the following ASTM Standards: a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 b. Extruded Bars,Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221 c. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B211 Glazed Systems 08 80 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 d. Standard Structural Shapes: ASTM B308 e. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B210 f. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429 g. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS Code 2. Aluminum Finish: Anodized. a. Quality Standard: Conforming to AAMA 2604 for applied finishes or AAMA 661 for anodized finishes. b. Pretreatment: Five-stage; zinc chromate conversion coating. c. Application: Electrostatic spray and oven bake by approved applicator. d. Coating Quantity: Minimum one primer coat and one-color coat. e. Dry Film Thickness: Minimum 1.2 mils on exposed surfaces, except inside corners and channels. B. Steel: 1. Carbon Steel: Refer to the Structural Steel Section. Provide structural reinforcement as required. 2. Stainless Steel Fasteners: ASTM A167, type 302/304 No. 4 satin finish where exposed. 3. Metals used for shims shall be galvanized steel(ASTM A36 or ASTM A238) where noted as steel and stainless steel(300 series) where noted as stainless steel. Do not use aluminum or plastic shims unless approved by the Architect. 4. Exposed Cladding, Trim, and Panels: Provide cladding elements with formed edge flanges and backside stiffener members as required to maintain such flatness that when measured at room temperature the maximum slope of the surface at any point, measured from the nominal plane of the surface in its final installed position shall not exceed 1.25 degrees. 5. Metal Protection: Materials used as permanent or temporary protection for metals shall conform with the following standards: a. Bituminous Paint: FS TT-C-494 or MIL-P-6883A. b. Mastic Bulk Compound: FS SS-C-153, Type I or Type 11. c. Preformed Mastic Tape: NAAMM Specifications for Non-Shrinking Non-Resilient Preformed Sealing Compound. d. Zinc Rich Paint: MIL-P-38 336. C. Glazing Materials at Hollow Metal Frames: 1. General: Use glazing compounds and preformed glazing sealants approved for the application and, except as otherwise specified, conforming to Glazing Materials portion of FGMA Glazing Manual. Glazed Systems 08 80 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Sealant: a. One (1) part acrylic polymer sealant conforming to FS TT-S-00230 or silicone, FS TT-S-0023-C. Use for glazing of all fixed glass. Include primer as recommended by manufacturer. b. Color: To match frame. c. All sealants shall be compatible with adjacent material per manufacturer's instruction. 3. Setting Blocks: Hard rubber or clean grain softwood. 4. Back-up Material: Foamed polyethylene or polystyrene rodstock, sizes as required by joint condition, and compatible with sealant. 5. Glazing Tape: DAP#1202 or as approved. 6. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded neoprene, free of porosity, surface defects, dimensional irregularities and conforming to physical properties of ASTM C509. 7. Use of metal sash putty will not be permitted, but compound conforming to FS TG- 410 will be permitted. The use of non-skinning compounds, non-resilient type preformed sealers, and preformed impregnated type gasket will not be permitted. D. Glazing Materials at Aluminum Framing: 1. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded neoprene(Color: Black) sized to fit the frame. 2. Sealant: Comply with Federal Spec. TT-S-00230 E. Concealed Reinforced Materials: 1. Steel: a. Carbon Steel: Refer to the structural steel section. Provide structural reinforcement as required. b. Metal Protection: Materials used as permanent or temporary protection for metals shall conform with the following standards: 1)Bituminous Paint: FS TT-C-494 or MIL-P-6883A. 2)Mastic Bulk Compound: FS SS-C-153, Type I or Type II. 3)Preformed Mastic Tape: NAAMM Specifications for Non-Shrinking,Non-Resilient Preformed Sealing Compound. 4)Zinc Rich Paint: MIL-P-38 336. F. Glass: 1. General: a. Glass shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1036. Glazed Systems 08 80 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 b. Float Glass: Care shall be taken to minimize the tong marks and, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings,the tong marks shall occur at the bottom of the glass(after installation). c. All glass shall be heat strengthened unless noted otherwise. d. Color of tinted glass shall be as selected by Architect. e. Safety Glazing: Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked on each individual glass lite with certification label of manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Safety glazing shall conform to ANSI Z97.1, Safety Performance Specification, and ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glass Code, and IBC 2406.1 as applicable. 2. Glass Types: (As shown or required) a. Refer to Drawings: Door&Window Schedule Sheet. G. Aluminum and Glass Entrance Doors: Kawneer Co., Inc., "Wide Stile" Standard Entrance or equivalent product from list of approved manufacturers. 1. Doors: Shall be 1-23/32 inch thick, consisting of 6 inch vertical stile, 6 inch mid rail, 6"top rail and 12 inch bottom rail aluminum tubular sections with 0.125 inch thick nominal wall thickness. 2. Connections: a. Provide bolted and welded connections,fit to a hairline joint. b. Provide reinforcing at bolted attachments. Tapped aluminum is not permitted. c. Provide concealed screws, nuts, bolts, and anchors, except hardware screws on butt of door, of non-corrosive metal. 3. Glass in Door: Refer to Door and Window Schedule. Deliver doors to job pre-glazed. 4.Glazing Gaskets:Use manufacturers recommended gaskets for flush glazing(Color:Black). 5. Mullion Stabilizer: Provide as required at double acting doors with removable mullion. 6. Hardware: Refer to Section 08 7100,Finish Hardware. H. Aluminum Storefront/Entrance Framing System: Refer to Section 08 41 13. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Obtain hardware templates from finish hardware supplier. 3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be preformed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Glazed Systems 08 80 00- 8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. 1. Remove protective coatings which fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants. 2. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched, abraded, or damaged in any other manner. 2. Do not remove labels from glass until so directed by the Architect. 3. Install glass so distortion waves, if present,run in the horizontal direction. B. Locate setting blocks at sills one quarter of the width of the glass in from each end of the glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. 1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.Provide spacers for all glass sizer larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from stops; except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided. a. Locate spacers no more than 24 inches apart,and no closer than 12 inches to a corner. b. Place spacers opposite on another. C. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4 inch or more. C. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. D. Do not use two (2) different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the joint use is approved in advance by the Architect. E. Mask, or otherwise protect, surfaces adjacent to installation or sealants. F. Install all glass, gasket, and aluminum framing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Installed windows units shall conform to AAMA 502 minimum requirements for air and water infiltration. G. Caulk joints where indicated to meet performance specifications using materials specified in Sealants section. Follow sealant manufacturer's printed instructions for the installation of his product. H. Erection Tolerances: 1. Maximum Deviation from Vertical: 1/8 inch in any story and 1/4 inch in any 45 foot run. Glazed Systems 08 80 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Maximum Deviation from Horizontal: 1/8 inch in any 30 foot run. 3. Maximum Deviation from True Alignment: 1/32 inch for any two (2) abutting units. Allow no edge projections. 4. Maximum Joint Gap: 1/32 inch. 5. Maximum Openings Between Movable Glazing Stop and Adjacent Member: 1/32 inch. 3.04 PROTECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons suitably attached to the framing and held free from glass. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons, or other items directly to the glass except as specifically directed by the Architect. B. Adjust windows as necessary for smooth and weather tight operation and leave windows clean and free of construction debris. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 Glazed Systems 08 80 00- 10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 09 29 00—GYPSUM BOARD PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicating for Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies:For STC-rated assemblies,provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.03 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2.National Gypsum Company. 3. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 518 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: %inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Abuse-Resistance Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board,tested according to ASTM C 1629/C 1329M. 1. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X. Gypsum Board 09 29 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M,meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 3. Indentation: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M,meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 4. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M,meets or exceeds Level I requirements. 5. Long Edges: Tapered. 6. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.04 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistance Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet,rolled zinc, or paper-faced. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. L-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion(control)joint. 2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel edges, and damaged surfaces areas, use setting- type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges,use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. Gypsum Board 09 29 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3. Fill Coat: For second coat,use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish,use setting-type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1.Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. C. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90, 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may by incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric, LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Specified Technologies,Inc.: Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. c. USG Corporation: SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. B. Comply with ASTM C 840. C.Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide '/4-to ''/Z-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners,attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Prefill open joints,beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. Gypsum Board 09 29 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damaged from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 29 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23]80 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 09 30 13—CERAMIC TILE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install ceramic tile work. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable partitions of ASTM and ANSI Standards and the Tile Installation Handbook, latest edition,published by the Tile Council of America. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Division 1, submit for review samples,product data, mock-ups. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.Use experienced installers. Deliver,handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Standard grade tile complying with ANSI 137.1-1980; impervious unglazed porcelain ceramic tile except as otherwise noted. Provide at least two percent extra tile in each color and pattern. B. Floor tile: Unlazed porcelain ceramic tile. 1. As indicated on finish schedule. C. Wall tile: Unglazed porcelain ceramic tile. 1. As indicated on finish schedule. D. Accent Tile: 1. As indicated on finish schedule. E. Tile and grout colors: 1. As indicated on finish schedule. F.Mortar setting leveling/sloping beds,setting beds,bond coats etc.: Comply with applicable ANSI and TCA standards. G. Grout: 1. Epoxy grout a. Custom Building Products b. Laticrete International,Inc. c. Mapei Corporation Ceramic Tile 0930 13 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 d. Merkrete by Sika-Parex 2. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. H. Trim: Matching field tile composition, color, size, texture; shapes as required. I. Base: 1. As indicated on finish schedule. J. Shower Shelf—Schluter System, Kerdi-Board-SN Shower Niche 12"xl2". K. Thresholds: Schluter—Reno-V edge protection with adjustable transition aim. L. Transitions: Metal Schluter trim @ the following: 1. Inside and Outside Corner Transitions. 2. Transitions from wall tile to another wall finish surface. 3. Transitions from wall tile to counter top where there is not a backsplash matching the counter material. 2.02 SETTING METHODS A. Floors: Set in epoxy mortar bond coat and in setting bed. B. Walls: Set in epoxy mortar bond coat and in setting bed. C. Grout Joints,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Joints in each type of tile shall appear straight and uniform,without noticeable variations in width. Do not cover or bridge any expansion joints with epoxy. 2. Ceramic tile: 3/32". PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable Tile Council of America and ANSI Standard Specifications for Installation. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Lay tile in grid pattern as provided by Architect with alignment of floor, base, walls and trim grids. Layout to provide uniform joint widths and to minimize cutting; do not use less than '/z tile units. C. Provide sealant joints where recommended by TCA and approved by Architect. D. Grout and cure, clean and protect. E. Before allowing foot traffic or other construction activities over finished tile surfaces, cover the work with a layer of heavy polyethylene film and building paper. END OF SECTION 09 30 00 Ceramic Tile 0930 13 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 09 5100—ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1- SECTION INCLUDES 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspension system(Grid) and accessories required to complete work. B.Acoustical lay-in panels,with hold down clips,spacing clips,moldings,and accessories required to complete work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wallboard used as fire protection over light fixtures. B. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC): Air diffusers and mechanical items penetrating ceiling. C. Division 26, Electrical: Lighting and electrical items penetrating ceiling. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Samples: 1. 12-inch x 12-inch sample of each ceiling panel. 2. 12-inch long sample of each type grid and actual accessories. 1.04 INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Refer to Section 01 31 00,Project Management and Coordination. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM International(ASTM) 1. A641, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire 2. C423, Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method 3. C635, Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 4. C363, Installation of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 5. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. E413, Standard Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class Acoustical Ceilings 0951 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 7. E1264, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. B. Federal Specification(FS) 1. SS-S-I 18B, Sound Controlling(Acoustical) Tiles and Panels C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. Assembly as specified of noted on drawings 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with work under Division 23, Mechanical for location of dampers in diffusers and other mechanical items penetrating ceiling and Division 26,Electrical for location of light fixtures and other electrical items penetrating ceiling. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Specification are based on products of named manufacturers. Manufacturers listed whose product meets or exceeds the specifications may be used on the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five(5)year experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division I requirements regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Suspension System(Grid): a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc., (Basis of Specification) b. BPB Celotex C. Chicago Metallic d. USG Interiors,Inc. (Donn) 2. Acoustical Lay-in Panels: a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc. (Basis of Specification) b. BPB Celotex/Capaul C. Conwed Designscpace d. USG Interiors,Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Suspension System(Grid): Typical. 1. Type: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. 2. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 3. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. 4. Fire Resistance Rating: One (1) or two(2)hour fire rated,where scheduled on drawings. Acoustical Ceilings 0951 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 5. Grid Finish: White. Unless noted otherwise. 6. Accessories: a. Perimeter moldings. b. Approved Product/Manufacturer: "Prelude XL 15/16" or "Prelude XL Fire Guard 15/16" at rated areas as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or Architect approved equal. B. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A641, soft temper, pre- stretched,with a yield stress load of at least three (3) times the design load, but not less than 12 gauge in diameter. C. Lay-in Panels (Re: Room Finish Schedule for Locations): 1. Lay-in acoustical Panels (Ultima 1911): a. Material: Wet-formed mineral fiber. b. Size: 24-inches x 24-inches x 3/4-inch thick. C. Edge Detail: Beveled Tegular. d. NRC: 0.60 minimum in accordance with ASTM E1264. e. CAC: 35 minimum in accordance with ASTM E1264. f. Surface Finish:Factory applied white vinyl latex paint,white unless noted otherwise. g. Fire Resistance: Class A. h. Pattern: Smooth texture. i. Approved Product / Manufacturer: "Ultima Lay-In" conforming to No. 1911 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or Architect approved equal by approved manufacturers. 2. Lay-in Acoustical Panels (Antimicrobial): a. Material: Wet-felted. b. Size: 24-inches x 24-inches x 15/16-inch. C. Edge Detail: Beveled Tegular. d. NRC: 0.85 minimum in accordance with ASTM E1264. e. CAC: 35 minimum in accordance with ASTM E1264. f. Surface Finish: Scrubbable factory applied white vinyl plastic paint. g. Fire Resistance: Class A. h. Pattern: Smooth. Acoustical Ceilings 0951 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 i. Approved Product/Manufacturer: "Calla"conforming to No.2822 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or Architect approved equal by approved manufacturers. D. Accessories: 1. At all locations (whether detailed or not)where an acoustical lay-in ceiling abuts a gypsum board ceiling in the same plane,provide a"W" shaped reveal or"shadow"molding similar to USG#MS 174. 2.03 EXTRA STOCK A. At completion of work, deliver and store at site as directed not less than three (3) unopened cartons of each acoustical ceiling material used on the Project. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Insure that walls are flat and wall corners square. Commencing work shall be constructed as acceptance of preceding work preformed by others as suitable to receive Work of this Section. B. Insure that wall control joints are flat and will not cause wall mould to misalign at those locations. C. Coordinate all locations of cut panel with Architect in field prior to commencing work. D. Do not install any ceiling panel until all above plumbing work, ceiling inspections and corrections have been completed. 3.02 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS A. Install ceiling systems by skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, the approved shop drawings and reflected ceiling plans. Exposed surfaces of acoustical units shall be level and flush, with all joints straight and true. Cutting and fitting around all items protruding through acoustical ceiling shall be done neatly. Edge moldings and runners shall have flush hairline joints, with all corners mitered. B.Install main beam and cross tees in accordance with reflected ceiling plans. Suspend main beams from structure(but not bridging)above by means of 12 gauge galvanized wire,spaced at 4 feet-0 inches o.c. both directions, wrapped tightly at least three (3) full turns. Do not hang wire supports from metal deck unless directed to do so by Architect and/or Structural Engineer. Powder actuated devices in metal deck are not permitted. Join cross tees to main beam with a positive interlock.Pop rivets will not be permitted for field splices. C. Align beams or tees with angle molding at corners unless authorized by Architect. D. At perimeter areas, secure angle molding to vertical surfaces, ends of tees to rest on bottom flange of molding. Attachment of cross "T's' to wall angles with pop rivets will not be permitted. Hanger wire at 45 degree approximately 10-inches long may be used to tie the grid to the wall above the ceiling to prevent eventual disengagement of the two (2) components. E. Install lay-in panels with accessories and hold down clips as shown or required. Acoustical Ceilings 0951 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 END OF SECTION 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings 0951 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 09 9100—PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, expect where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces,operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Submittals: For each paint system specified,provide the following: 1. Material List:Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Providing manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. F. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. After color selection,the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. F. Samples for Verification:Of each color and material to be applied,with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors then preparing Samples for review.Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2.Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. G. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Painting 0991 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 H. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface as specified. 2. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. I. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. J. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste surfaces. K. Project Conditions: Do not apply paint in snow,rain, fog,or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. L. Extra Materials: Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity:Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A.Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers,primers,undercoats,and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B.Material Quality:Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1.Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the Architect's samples. 1. Verify sheen of all products with Architect. PART 3-EXECUTION Painting 0991 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. C.Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. 1. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing,use mechanical methods of surface preparation.Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2.Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt,oil,and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer.After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. Seal tops,bottoms,and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPQ recommendations. Painting 0991 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants.Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. F. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,remove surface film and strain material before using. 2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. G. Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term"exposed surfaces"includes areas visible when permanent or built-in items are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.Before the final installation of equipment,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint back sides of access panels and removeable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 7. Finish exterior doors on tops,bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vanish coat. 9. Label fire rated partitions as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction but at a minimum 15 feet from end of wall section and spaced 30 feet in Red Paint(SW 6871 "Positive Red"). Lettering to be stenciled not less than 3 inches and minimum 3/8" stroke. a. Stencil to read — "1 HOUR FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY — PROTECT ALL OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS". H. Scheduling Painting:Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,pretreated,or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Painting 0991 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. K. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture, and coverage. Remove,refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. N. Field Quality Control: The Owner reserves the right to engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 1. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests as required by the Owner. 2. If tests show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint,the 2 coatings are incompatible. O. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1.After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces.Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Painting 0991 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 P. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. Q. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced paint surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. R.Paint Schedules: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated: 3.02 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B50Z Kem-Bond HS Universal Primer. 2) Glidden Professional 4160 DevGuard. 3)Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams A100A82 Exterior Latex. 2) Glidden Professional 2416V Ultra-Hide 150 Semi Gloss. 3)Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096. B.Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated(galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B66W1 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish. 2) Glidden Professional 4020 Devflex DTM Primer/Finish. 3)Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). Painting 0991 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1) Sherwin-Williams A100A82 Exterior Latex. 2) Glidden Professional 2416V Ultra-Hide 150 Semi Gloss. 3)Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096. C. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive, acrylic- or alkyd-based, metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for use over aluminum, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mils (0.25 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B71Y1 DTM Wash Primer. 2) Glidden Professional 4020 Devflex DTM Primer/Finish. 3)Moore: Primer not required. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-William A100A82 Exterior Latex. 2) Glidden Professional 2416V Ultra Hide 150 Semi Gloss 3)Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096. 3.03 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Semi gloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B25W25 PrepRite Masonry Primer. 2) Glidden Professional 3010 Concrete coatings Block Filler. 3)Moore: Moorcraft Interior&Exterior Block Filler#173. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss,acrylic-latex,interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B31 ProClassic Waterbourne. 2) Glidden Professional 1406N Ultra Hide 250 Semi Gloss. 3)Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel #333. Painting 0991 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils(0.028 m). 1) Sherwin-Williams B28W200 PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer. 2) Glidden Professional 1000 High Hide Primer. 3)Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody#216. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss,acrylic-latex,interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B30W200 ProMar 200 Interior Flat Latex. 2) Glidden Professional 1210V Ultra-Hide 150. 3)Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215. 2. Semi gloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B28W200 Prepite 200 Interior Latex Primer. 2) Glidden Professional 100 High Hide Primer. 3)Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody#216. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss,acrylic-latex,interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B31 ProClassic Waterbourne Semi-Gloss. 2) Glidden Professional 1406N Ultra Hide 250. 3)Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel#333. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer. a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B66W 1 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish. Painting 0991 00- 8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2) Glidden Professional 4020 Devflex DTM Primer/Finish. 3)Moore: 1ronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate,applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B31 ProClassic Waterbourne Semi-Gloss. 2) Glidden Professional 1406N Ultra Hide 250. 3)Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217. C. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Sherwin-Williams B31 ProClassic Waterborne Semi-Gloss. 2) Glidden Professional 1406N Ultra-Hide 250. 3)Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel#333. D. Cotton or Canvas Covering over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation covering: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildewproof. a. First and Second Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied atspreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Sherwin-Williams B30W200 ProMar 200 Flat Latex. 2) Glidden Professional 1210V Ultra-Hide 150. 3)Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215. END OF SECTION 09 91 00 Painting 0991 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 1100—MARKERBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the most commonly used types of prefabricated markerboards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned elevations. Show location of joints between individual panels where unit dimensions exceed maximum panel length. Include sections of typical trim members. Show anchors, grounds,reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. B. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, showing color and texture or finish selected. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Visual Display Boards: Sample panels not less than 8-1/2 by I 1 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on the substrate indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide vinyl-fabric-faced tackboards with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this Section per ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify vinyl-fabric-faced tackboards with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 10 or less. 1.04 SUMMARY A. General Warranty: The special porcelain enamel markerboards warranty specified shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace markerboards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within the specified warranty period, provided the manufacturer's written instructions for handling, installation, protection, and maintenance have been followed. 1. Warranty Period: Life of the building. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Markerboards 10 11 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following, or equal as approved by Architect: 1. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co. b. Claridge Products and Equipment,Inc. c. Greensteel,Inc. d. Lemco, Inc. e. Marsh Chalkboard Company. f. Nelson Adams Company. 2. Tackboards: a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. C. Greensteel, Inc. d_ Lemco, Inc. e. Marsh Chalkboard Company. f. Nelson Adams Company. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure-laminated, porcelain enamel markerboards of 3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing. Install markerboard with aluminum trim as indicated on plans. a. Face Sheet: 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) enameling grade steel. Coat exposed face and edges with a 3-coat process consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with a 2-coat process consisting of primer and ground coat.Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F (649 deg Q. 1)Cover Coat: White colored, special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use with erasable dry markers. b. Core: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-)thick,tempered hardboard core material. c. Backing Sheet: 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-)thick, aluminum sheet. d. Laminating Adhesive: Moisture-resistant,thermoplastic-type adhesive. B.Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Fabrication: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure with flexible,waterproof adhesive. C.Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architecture and Metal Products". Markerboards 10 11 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 D. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Class 11, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M 12C22A3 1. E. Accessories: Aluminum Marker Tray. PART 3-EXECUTION intended for use with erasable dry markers. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units,prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment. B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. C. Coordinate Project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat,precision fit. END OF SECTION 10 1100 Markerboards 10 11 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 14 00—SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Signage included, as indicated on drawings and as directed by Architect. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Division 1, submit for review samples,product data, sign schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.Use experienced installers. Deliver,handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. ASI, Signmart B. South Texas Graphics C. Texas Marking Products D. Sign International E. Equal as Approved by Architect 2.02 MATERIALS A. Interior signage: Engraved laminated plastic identification, instruction and/or warning signs with contrasting core; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 1. Mounting: Surface mount on walls adjacent to doors except as otherwise directed by Architect or indicated on drawings. B. Exterior Signage: Owner/Architect to choose from full range of colors/finishes. 1. Building identification signage: Refer to drawings. 2. Other exterior signs: Refer to drawings. C. Plaque: Cast aluminum; 18" x 24". Typeface(s), edge detail, background texture, finish and layout as directed by Architect; include Facility name, date, names and titles of Owner, Architect and Contractor. Refer to drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Submit proof of all signage to Owner and Architect prior to fabrication and installation for approval. Signage&Graphics 10 14 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Use concealed mounting methods. Install materials and systems in proper relation to adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 10 14 00 Signage&Graphics 10 14 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 15 50—TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes overhead-braced-and-floor-anchored toilet compartments and wall-hung screens. B. Submittals: Include the following: 1. Product Data: For each type of toilet compartment and screen specified. 2. Show Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. 3. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or screen indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. All American Metal Corp. 3. Ampco Products,Inc. 4. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal. 5. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 6. Global Steel Products Corp. 7. Lambaton/Universal. 8. MASCO; Flush-Metal Partition Corp. 9. Metpar Corp. 10. Weis/Robart Partitions,Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Phenolic: Doors,panels,pilasters and urinal screens shall be fabricated from phenolic material comprised of multiple layers of melamine resin impregnated kraft paper, and a decorative surface sheet on both faces. All layers shall be fused together under high temperature and pressure. B.Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel,not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm)thick and 3 inches (75 mm)high. Toilet Partitions 10 15 50-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C.Wall Mounting and Panel Assembly Brackets:Provide 14 gage minimum thickness nonmagnetic stainless-steel channel, F-or double T-shaped brackets, continuous for height of panel for attaching panels and screens to walls. D.Hardware and Accessories:Manufacturer's standard design,heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of chrome-plated,nonferrous, cast zinc alloy(zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum. E. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish. F.Anchorages and Fasteners:Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel,finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant- type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective- coated steel. G. Fabrication: As follows: 1. Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 2. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 3. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels,unless otherwise indicated. 4.Doors:Unless otherwise indicated,provide 24-inch-(610-mm-)wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. a. Hinges: Heavy-duty non-magnetic stainless-steel surface mounted continuous hinges. Length of hinge to be equal to height of door, Secure with stainless steel or chrome plated brass sex bolts. Self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. b. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicap accessible. c. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. d. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors. Toilet Partitions 10 15 50-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 e. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instruction. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than'/z inch(13 mm)between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or file joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hand doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Wall-Hung Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. D. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10 15 50 Toilet Partitions 10 15 50-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 22 39—OPERABLE WALL SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Operable wall system shall be furnished, installed and serviced by wall manufacturer's authorized distributor, in compliance with the architectural drawings and specifications contained herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Structural Support: Structural support system required for suspending the operable wall shall be designed, installed and pre-punched by others, in accordance with ASTM E 557 and manufacturer's shop drawings. B. Insulation: Sound insulation and baffles for the plenum area above the track system, under the permanent floor, inside air ducts passing over or around the operable wall, and in pennanent walls adjoining the operable wall system shall be by others, in accordance with ASTM E 557. C.Opening Preparation:Proper and complete preparation of the operable wall system opening shall be by others in accordance with ASTM E 557, and shall include floor leveling; plumbness of adjoining permanent walls; substrate and/or ceiling tile enclosures for the track system; and the painting and finishing of trim and other materials adjoining the head and jamb areas of the operable wall. Any permanent wall(s) receiving an adjustable or fixed wall jamb will require internal structural blocking in order to secure the jamb to the permanent wall. Refer to a copy of the shop drawings for additional details. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The operable wall system shall consist of Hinged Pairs operation, featuring panels hinged together in evenly matched pairs (groups of two (2)), unless otherwise specified. B. The operable wall system shall consist of acoustically rated panels tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E413 test procedures,and shall have achieved a STC rating as specified herein(see "Acoustical Performance" article listed under Part 2—Products). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The operable wall shall have been tested in an independent acoustical testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413 test procedures. B. The operable wall panel construction and finish material shall consist of Class A rated materials in accordance with ASTM E 84, C. The operable wall shall by installed by the manufacturer's authorized distributor in accordance with ASTM E 557. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 90: Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. B. ASTM E 413: Determining of Sound Transmission Class (STC). Operable Wall System 10 22 39-1 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 C. ASTM E 577: Architecture Application and Installation of Operable Partitions. D. ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM A 53: Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Alloy-Coated (Galvanneal)by the Hot Dip Process. F. ASTM C 423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. G. CCC-W-408A-D: Federal Specification which applies to Vinyl Coated Wall Coverings. H. CFFA-W-101-B: Chemical Fabrics and Film Association Quality Standard for Vinyl Coated Fabric Wall Coverings. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall provide written technical information and related detail drawings, which demonstrate that the products comply with contract documents for each type of operable partition specified. B. Manufacturer shall provide detailed engineering drawings featuring track plan,panel elevation, horizontal and vertical details and beam punching template as required. C. Manufacturer shall provide written test report of the independent acoustical testing laboratory certifying the attainment of the specified STC rating,upon request. D.Manufacturer shall provide written instructions specifying the proper operation and maintenance of the operable wall system. E. Manufacturer shall provide a color selector demonstrating the manufacturer's selections of the specified finish material. Samples shall consist of actual swatches of the specified finish material. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Panels shall be individually wrapped in a protective plastic covering to keep panels clean during delivery, storage and handling. B.Panels shall be stored on edge and above the floor on cushioned blocking in a dry and ventilated area,protected from humidity and temperature extremes. 1.08 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Beam Punching: Manufacturer shall provide beam punching template drawing detailing the anchor locations for the suspended track system (as required for Drop Rod Mounting), as required for the fabrication and installation of structural overhead support by others. B. Track Installation: Scheduling of operable wall track installation shall occur after structural overhead support has been properly and completely fabricated and installed by others. C.Panel Installation: Operable wall panel installation shall occur after fixed wall substrate construction is properly and completely installed by others, as required to protect panels from ongoing adjacent construction. Operable Wall System 10 22 39-2 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant each partition and its component parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of five(5)years from the date of delivery to the original purchaser, when installed by an authorized KWIK-WALL distributor. (Contact your local KWIK-WALL distributor or KWIK-WALL Company for complete warranty information). PART 2-PRODUCT SPECIFICATION 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUAFACTURER A. Operable walls shall be Series 2000, Model 2030 Hinged Pairs as manufactured by KWIK- WALL Company. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Moderco, Model Signature 842 Paired Panels 2. TRW,Modernfold 2.02 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Panel Dimensions: Standard panel dimension shall be a nominal 3" [76] thick. B.Panel Frame: Steel reinforced frame shall be constructed of structural aluminum alloy with steel corner supports. Panel frame shall be Class A rated in accordance with ASTM E 84. C.Panel Skins: Panel skins shall be Class A rated in accordance with ASTM E 84. Panel skin material shall consist of(select): 1. Standard Acoustical Substrate: Consisting of structural acoustical substrate pressure laminated to both sides of the steel reinforced frame to form a rigid,unitized and structural panel. D. Panel Hinges: Panel hinges shall be architectural grade, full leaf butt hinges. E. Panel Weight: maximum panel weight shall be 6.5— 12.0 lb./ft.2 (32— 59 kg/m2) depending on STC rating, size and options selected. 2.03 OPERATION A. Operation shall be Hinged Pairs, consisting of panels hinged together on groups of two (2), unless otherwise specified. Panels shall be top-supported by one (1) carrier in each panel. 2.04 STACK ARRANGEMENTS A. Stack Type: Panel storage configuration shall be Center Stack, consisting of panels stacked on center to the wall's installed position. B. Stack Quantity: Panels shall be stored at(select): 1. Standard One End: On one end of the wall run. 2.05 FINISHES Operable Wall System 10 22 39-3 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Finish Material Type: Panel finish material shall be Class A rated in accordance with ASTM E 84, consisting of(select): 1. Vinyl: consisting of Type 11, reinforced vinyl weighing 20 oz./lin. Yd. (620 g/lin. m). Upgrade Vinyl shall meet or exceed CCC-W-408A-D and CFFa-W-101-B quality standards. B.Finish Material Supplier: Finish material shall be (select): 1. Factory Supplied: From manufacturer's standard selection of finish materials, as specified. C. Finish Material Application: Finish material shall be(select): 1. Standard Factory Applied: By operable wall manufacturer. Customer supplied finish material samples must be submitted to manufacturer for testing and approval prior to acceptance and application. 2.06 PERIMETER TRIM AND SEALS A. Vertical Trim and Seals: Panels shall have vertical astragals containing flexible vinyl seals and incorporate reversible tongue-and-groove-type configurations for positive interlocking with adjacent panels. Vertical astragal type shall be: 1. Standard Trimless Astragal: Consisting of an aluminum extrusion with tongue-and-groove- type vertical astragals. Vertical trim shall not be permitted on the panel faces,resulting in a minimal groove appearance between adjacent panels. B.Horizontal Top Trim and Seals: Top seals shall consist of flexible vinyl sweep seals installed on both sides of the panel. The seals shall consist of a compressed bulb between two (2) fingers of vinyl. Top seal type shall be: 1. Standard Fixed Top Seals: Consisting of continuous-contact flexible vinyl, sealing against the bottom flange of the overhead track. C. Horizontal Bottom Trim and Seals: Bottom seals shall consist of multiple fingers of flexible vinyl for positive contact and sealing with various floor surfaces. Bottom seal type shall be: 1. Standard Operable Bottom Seals: Consisting of an edge-activated seal using a removable wrench as supplied by manufacturer.Bottom seals shall provide 1 ''/2"[38]of nominal travel. D.Horizontal and Vertical Panel Trim:All exposed panel trim and hinges shall be of one(1)similar color(select): 1. Grey. 2.07 CLOSURE SYSTEMS A. Initial Closure System: The lead panel (the first panel exiting the stack) shall form a seal vertically against a rigid wall surface, as accomplished by a: 1. Standard Bulb Seal: Consisting of continuous-contact, flexible vinyl bulb seals installed along the vertical edge of the lead panel for positive compression against a rigid wall surface. Operable Wall System 10 22 39-4 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Final Closure System: The final closure panel(the last panel exiting the stack) shall form a seal vertically against a rigid wall surface. The type of final closure panel shall be(select): 1. Standard Expander Panel Closure: Consisting of an expander mechanism with a nominal 5" [127] of travel, activated from the face of the panel using a removable wrench as supplied by manufacturer. The Expander Panel shall be equipped with an adjustable bottom seal (standard) or(optional) operable bottom seal, and a flush pull handle. 2.08 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE A. Certification: The operable wall shall have been tested in an independent acoustical testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413 test procedures. B. STC Rating: The operable wall acoustical performance rating shall be based on: 1. Standard Acoustical Substrate: With a standard rating of 49 STC, or optional ratings of 42 STC, 45 STC or 50 STC. 2.09 PANEL ACCESSORIES A. Accessories including Pass Doors; Single or Double, Keyed Cylinder Locks, Concealed Door Closures, Room Viewers, Exit Signs, Dry Marker Writing Surfaces, Recessed Eraser Trays, Vision Lites, Tack Surfaces and Pocket Doors shall be compatible with other accessories and options, furnished and installed by the operable wall manufacturer as noted on submitted shop drawings. 2.10 TRACK SYSTEMS A. Track Type: The operable wall track system shall be(select): 1. Hinged Pairs Steel track: Consisting of roll-formed, low carbon steel, .215" [5] thick. The steel track shall have a durable powder-coated, off-white finish, which resists color fading and flaking. The steel track shall be reinforced overhead by heavy duty steel backets made of hot-rolled, 3/8" [10] thick plate steel, as required for attaching threaded all-rod to the overhead structural support and for aligning track sections at each splice joint. B. Track Size: The track size shall be: 1. Type 850 Hinged Pairs Steel Track: Certified to be capable of supporting up to 850 lb. (386 kg) of total live load weight per panel. 2.11 CARRIER SYSTEMS A. Carrier Type: Each Hinged Pair panel shall be top supported by one (1) carrier utilize a 5/8" [16] diameter pendant bolt. The carrier type shall be (select): 1. Type 850 Steel Wheel Carrier: Consisting of four (4) permanently-lubricated, precision ground ball bearing polished steel wheels, as required for ease of panel movement. B. Carrier Size: The carrier size shall be: 1. Type 850 Hinged Pairs Steel Wheel Carrier: Certified to be capable of supporting up to 850 lb. (386 kg) of total live load weight per panel. Operable Wall System 10 22 39-5 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2.12 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Mounting Systems: The track shall be supported by (select): 1. Optional Drop Rod Bracket Mount: Consisting of 3/8" [10] thick steel brackets mounted to top flange of track and supported with adjustable rods of grade 2, 3/8" [10] diameter threaded steel all-rod provided with 3/8" [10] serrated steel nuts. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Proper and complete preparation of the operable wall system opening shall be by others in accordance with the architectural drawings, manufacturer's shop drawings and ASTM E 557. Any deviation of the actual opening from these specifications shall be called to the attention of the architect prior to the installation of the operable wall. B. Deficiencies in the operable wall opening shall be corrected by others prior to installation of the operable wall. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The operable wall system shall be installed by manufacturer's authorized distributor. B.The operable wall shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,shop drawings and ASTM E 557 installation guidelines. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. The operable wall panels and track system shall be adjusted and cleaned in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION A. The operable wall panels shall be stored in the stacked (retracted)position prior to acceptance by the owner's representative. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. The operable wall manufacturer's authorized distributor shall demonstrate proper operation and explain proper and necessary maintenance requirements of the operable wall system to the owner's representative. END OF SECTION 10 22 39 Operable Wall System 10 22 39-6 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 26 00—WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. 3 inch(76 mm)wing with 90' Corner Guard. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittals. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data. C. Shop Drawing: Submit shop drawings showing components, dimensions, anchorage details. D. Samples: Submit for approval 12 inch (304.8 mm) long sample for each model and color specified,including end caps and corner units. E. Test Reports: Submit manufacture's test reports and certification indicating compliance with applicable ADA and building code requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 101 for interior finish materials. Smoke developed less than 450 degree F and flame spread of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Storage: Store materials indoors in a clean, dry area protected from damage and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Inprocorp.com, 580 W18766 Apollo Drive, Muskego, WI, 53150. PH: 800.222.5556 www.inprocorp.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Corner Guard, Vinyl, 3 inch, 1. Inprocorp 150 High Impact corner guard mounted on continuous aluminum retainer. Exposed surfaces shall be free of wrinkling, chipping discoloration, or other imperfections. a. Dimensions: 1)Wing Size: 3 inch (76 mm) 2) Corner angle type: 90 degree standard '/a inch radius. Wall&Door Protection 10 26 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 b. Profile: High impact vinyl acrylic extrusion locked into place,nominal 0.080 inch(2 mm)thick. Class A fire rating,tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. c. Extrusion: Contains EPA registered Micro-Chek antimicrobial agent. d. Retainer: Continuous 6063-T5 aluminum base pre-attached to aluminum retainer. e. Base: 4 inch (101.3 mm) high 6063-T5 aluminum base pre-attached to aluminum retainer. f. Color: To be selected from manufacture's standard colors. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify by examination that wall surface is acceptable to receive the specified bumper guard. Notify the Architect in writing of wall surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin installation until acceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install corner guards to wall securely in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install corner guards accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. C.Provide horizontal steel stud back up in drywall stud cavity to accept fasteners. END OF SECTION 10 26 00 Wall&Door Protection 10 26 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2- 423180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 28 13—TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories; shower accessories; and utility room accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 20 00,Unit Masonry B. Section 05 40 00, Cold-Formed Metal Framing C. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies D. Section 09 30 13, Ceramic Tile E. Section 10 21 13.13, Toilet Partitions F. Division 26—Electrical 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions of units specified. 4. Provide schedule of materials and installation locations. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, material and finish. Show locations, installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, fasteners, clearances, and mounting heights. 1.04 MINIMUM COMPLIANCE STANDARDS A. Comply with ANSI A117.1 and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and with referenced standards specified with each product or material. 1.05 QUALITY STANDARDS A. Design, finish and keying of items shall be the same. B. Furnish items from one (1) manufacturer only unless otherwise specified or directed by Architect. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Refer to Section 01 31 00,Project Management and Coordination. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. Toilet Accessories 1028 13 - 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty the work specified herein for three (3) years, or provide manufacturer's standard warranty for specified products, against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include,but not be limited to: 1. Delamination or deterioration of finish. 2.Noisy, rough or difficult operation. 3. Failure to meet specified quality assurance requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed whose products meet or exceeds the specifications are approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. American Specialties,Inc. (ASI) 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corp. B. Specifications are based on products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., (281) 362-7515. 2.02 COMPONENTS A.Accessories—General: Shop assembled,free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets,with flat surfaces. B. Stainless Steel: 1. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 Type 302 or 304. 2. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. 3. Finish: No. 4 satin,unless otherwise specified. 4. Thickness: 22 US Stainless gauge minimum. C. Chromium Plating: 1. Method: Over nickel. 2. Standard: ASTM C456, Type SC 2. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof. Toilet Accessories 1028 13 -2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. F.Backing: Concealed backing to comply with local codes and as required for substrate conditions; or manufacturers' standard mounting kits. 2.03 FINISHING A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed,typical on all accessories, unless otherwise noted. B. Baked Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats vitreous enamel. C. Chrome/ Nickel Plating: Satin finish. D. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 MOUNTING LOCATIONS A. Comply with ADA and TAS requirements. Refer to drawings. When not shown, submit supplier's recommended for locations and mounting height before proceeding. B. Contractor shall be responsible for supplying all opening, blocking, and other components necessary for installation of all toilet accessories. C. Use approved theft-resistant type fasteners. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. As a quality standard, Model Numbers shown which are not Owner furnished are products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. and Bradley Corporation. RESTROOM ACCESSORIES: 1. Grab Bars: (At Typical Accessible Toilet Stalls) a. Size/Finish: 1-1/2 inch diameter Satin Finish Stainless Steel. b. Clearance: 1-1/2 inch between rail and wall. C. Model No.: B-6806. d. Mounting: Attach with concealed mounting. Mount parallel to floor. e. Location: One(1) 36 inch behind toilet, and one(1)42 inch long bar at side of toilet, at each accessible stall. Refer to drawings. 2. Toilet Paper Dispenser: a. Mounting: Surface. b. Model No.: Bobrick Model No. B-6637 C. Locations: One (1) at each water closet. Refer to drawings. Toilet Accessories 1028 13 -3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3. Paper Towel Dispenser&Trash Receptacle: a. Mounting: Recessed. b. Model No.: Bobrick Model No. B-6637 c. Locations: One (1) at each water closet. Refer to drawings. 4. Mirrors: a. Mounting: Surface. b. Model No.: B-2908-2448 c. Size/Locations: 24 inches x 48 inches, unless shown otherwise. One (1) at each lavatory. Refer to drawings. 5. Mop and Broom Holder: a. Mounting: surface. b. Model No.: B-239 x 34 C. Capacity: Four(4)hooks,three(3)mop holders. d. Location: One (1) above mop sink. Refer to drawings. 6. Robe Hook with Bumper: a. Mounting: Surface. b. Model No.: B-6827 c. Fabrication: Solid aluminum casting with satin finish with hard rubber bumper. 7. Soap Dispenser: a. Mounting:Surface b. Model No.: B-818615 C. Location: One (1) 8. Sanitary Napkin Disposal a. Mounting: Surface b. Model No.: B-35139 C. Location: One (1) at each water closet in Women's Restroom. Refer to drawings. 9. L-Shaped Stainless Steel Grab Bar: a. Mounting: Surface. b. Model B-68137 c. One (1) at each accessible shower. Toilet Accessories 1028 13 -4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 10. Heavy Duty White Vinyl Shower Curtain, Rod, and Hooks: a. Mounting: Surface. b. Model: B-204-2,B-201-1, B-6827,B-204-2,B-207 c. One (1) assembly at each shower. Refer to Drawings. 11. ADA Shower Threshold: a. Supplier: Trademark Hardware. b. Mounting: Surface. c. Install(1) at each accessible shower. Reference drawings and field measure for size requirements. 12. Shower Shelf: a. Supplier: Schluter Systems. b. Mounting: Recessed. C. Install (1) at each shower. Field measure for size requirements and coordinate with surrounding tile pattern. END OF SECTION 10 2813 Toilet Accessories 1028 13 -5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 10 44 00—FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Portable fire extinguishers and cabinets. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing compliance with contract documents. B. Samples: Finishes of cabinets, on actual or similar material. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Instruction manual complying with NFPA 10 requirements. D. Certification: Installation shall submit written certification that the fire extinguishers installed comply with the contract documents and are fully and correctly charged. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide only fire extinguishers which comply with NFPA 10. B. Labels: Provide only fire extinguishers which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or Factory Mutual System. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install extinguishers until just before substantial completion. B. Do not use permanent fire extinguishers for construction period fire protection. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide a maintenance contract to Owner for a period of 1 year after substantial completion. 1. Include monthly and annual inspections in accordance with NFPA 10 and OSHA regulations. 2. Submit reports of inspections to Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents,will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Fire extinguishers: a. Ansel Fire Protection/A Grinnell Company. b. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. c. Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co. B. Fire Extinguishers: Fire Extinguishers&Cabinets 10 44 00-1 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 1. Rating: 2A:IOB:C, 5 pounds capacity. 2. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical (ammonium phosphate), stored pressure type. `K' Type in kitchen. 3. Cabinet mounted unless noted otherwise. 4. Aluminum cylinder. 2.02 CABINETS AND CABINET ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents,will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Cabinets and accessories: a. J.L.Industries. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter-Roemer Division/Smith Industries,Inc. B. Cabinets: 1. To house one extinguisher. 2. Style: Fully recessed mounted, with trim concealed by door. 3. Single flat door. a. Narrow vertical glazing panel. 1)Acrylic sheet glazing. 2) Clear. b. Door material: Stainless Steel. c. Lever handle, cam action latch. 4. Manufacturer's standard horizontal lettering identifying contents of cabinet. a. Letters silk screen painted,red. 5. Box: Steel sheet, factory painted. 6. Provide wall bracket for extinguisher inside cabinet. C. Hinges: Provide hinges for each door; concealed or continuous type; allow full 180 degree opening of door. Finish exposed hinges to match door. D. Bracket Mounted: Provide bracket mounted extinguishers at apparatus bays. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare openings for recessed cabinets. Fire Extinguishers&Cabinets 10 44 00-2 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified,and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Locate extinguishers as directed by Architect. C. Locate cabinets as directed by Architect. D. Install cabinets at heights indicated. E. Install extinguishers. 3.03 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A. Instruct designated personnel of Owner in: 1. Operation of extinguishers. 2. Frequency of inspection and maintenance. 3. Procedures for inspection and maintenance. 4. Designation of inspection and maintenance entity. END OF SECTION 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers&Cabinets 10 44 00-3 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 1130 00—RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install the following appliances: 1. 36"Range and Hood. 2. Refrigerator. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. B. Samples or color charts showing manufacturer's full range of colors. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLIANCE AND MANUFACTURERS A. 36"Electric Range: 1. Color: Stainless Steel. 2. Quantity: 1. 3. Approved Manufacturer: Thor or equal. 4. Model: HRE3601 or equivalent. B. 36"Range Hood: 1. Color: Stainless Steel. 2. Quantity: 1. 3. Approved Manufacturer: KitchenAid or equal. 4. Model: KVWB40ODSS or equivalent. C. 36"Refrigerator: 1. Color: Stainless Steel. 2. Quantity: 1. 3. Approved Manufacturer: Whirlpool or equal. 4. Model: WRF555SDFZ or equivalent. Residential Appliances 1130 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where appliances are to be installed to ensure proper opening sizes and that areas are ready to receive appliance installation. B. Ensure that proper utilities are in place. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all appliances and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTABLE AND CLEANING A. Adjust appliances and equipment for proper operation. B. Clean appliances and equipment of dirt, dust, fingerprints and markings detrimental to good appearance. END OF SECTION 1130 00 Residential Appliances 1130 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 12 2113—HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with [polymer] slats. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For horizontal louver blinds, include fabrication and installation details. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats that have been tested for compliance with NFPA 701, for tests performed by [a qualified testing agency]. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages,marked with manufacturer,product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet- work and finish work in spaces,including painting,is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Horizontal Louver(Polymer) Blinds 12 21 13-1 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, POLYMER SLATS A. Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Slats: Polymers that are lead free, UV stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, and will not crack or yellow; antistatic, dust-repellent treated. 1. Formulation: [extruded PVC]. 2. Width: [2 inches]. 3. Thickness: [0.105 inches]. 4. Spacing: [Manufacturer's standard]. 5. Profile: [Manufacturer's standard]. 6. Features: a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back (outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats]. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrail fully encloses operating mechanisms on three sides and ends. 1. Capacity: [One] blind(s)per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motorized Operating Mechanisms: Coordinate headrail with motorized operator requirements. Provide headrail acceptable to blind and motorized operator manufacturers and suitable for applications indicated. 3. Manual Lift Mechanism: a. Lift-Cord Lock: [Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within full operating range] b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull. Horizontal Louver(Polymer) Blinds 1221 13-2 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders. a. Tilt: Full. b. Tilt: [Two]-direction, positive stop or lockout limited at an angle of [60] degrees from horizontal [, both directions]. c. Operator: [Corrosion-resistant steel rod] d. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to prevent over rotation of gear. 5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: [Manufacturer's standard] 6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: [Manufacturer's standard] D. Bottom Rail: Secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords. 1. Type: [Manufacturer's standard] E. Lift Cord: Manufacturer's standard braided cord. F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. 1. Type: [Braided cord] G. Valance: [Manufacturer's standard] H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Type: [Overhead] 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. J. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: 1. Slats: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] 2. Components: [Providing rails,cords,ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated] 2.03 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B.Unit Sizes:Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total,plus or minus 1/8 inch.Length Horizontal Louver(Polymer) Blinds 1221 13-3 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application,baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 2. Wood: Apply [manufacturer's standard] factory-applied finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than [1 inch] from interior faces of glass and not closer than [1/2 inch] from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds. 2.Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds,adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. Horizontal Louver(Polymer) Blinds 12 21 13-4 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds,adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. B. Electrical Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. END OF SECTION 12 2113 Horizontal Louver(Polymer) Blinds 1221 13-5 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 12 49 20—MANUAL OPERATED ROLLER SHADE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roller Shade. B. Related Work includes the following: 1. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 2. Division 08,Aluminum Windows 3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant. 1.02 REFERENCES A.National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 701. B. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of Interior Materials. C. California Administrative Code Tide 19. D. Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New Jersey for drapery, curtain, and upholstery material). E. Boston Fire Department Test BFD IX-1. F.New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Subject under provisions of Section 01330— Submittal Procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted for each product specified, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Finishes,material descriptions, dimensions of individual components. 3. Construction and installation instructions. 4. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning C. Drawings and Diagrams: Product details, installation details, working and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested. D. Sample: Responsible contracting officer or agent shall supply one sample shade of each type specified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all required components,mounting and associated hardware,instructions and warranty. Manual Operated Roller Shade 12 49 20-1 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 E. Electric shade motors shall comply with UL standards. Copy of compliance availability for submission upon request. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. B.Installer: Installer or agent shall be qualified to installed specified products by prior experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation. C. Uniformity: Provide product of only one manufacturer for entire project. D. Mock Up.Provide one (1)mock-up shade for each roller shade type/assembly specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer's original packaging. B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes, and operating mechanisms. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Prior to shade installation,building shall be enclosed. B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit during and after installation;relative humidity shall not exceed 80%.Wet work shall be complete and dry. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide a limited manufacturer's warranty from date of Substantial Completion covering the following periods. 1. Lifetime Limited Warranty on all hardware components, fabrics warrantied for 5 years by Hunter Douglas, and most fabrics warrantied for 10 years by the fabric manufacturer. Specified and custom product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Hunter Douglas Architectural Window Coverings—Justin Pratt, 13915 Danielson Street, Suite 100,Poway, CA 92064;Phone: 214-499-5513; Website: www.hunterdouglasarcitectural.com/windowcoverin�4s; or architect approved equivalent. B. Request for substitutions must be approved by architect prior to close of bid. 2.02 MANUAL ROLLER SHADE A. Fabrics: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering, room darkening, and blackout fabrics providing 0%to 20%openness, 5 oz/sq.yd.to 20.70 oz/sq.yd., Manual Operated Roller Shade 12 49 20-2 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 containing fiberglass,PVC,polyester,acrylic,vinyl laminates,cotton,and vinyl coatings(based upon fabric choice).Finish selected by architectfrom fnanufacturer's available contract colors. 1. Horizontal stabilizing battens are not required,nor will they be accepted. B. Control Systems: 1. Clutch Operated: Chain-driven operator capable of lifting up to 20 pounds of weight with a maximum allowable pull force of 10 pounds. Utilization of adjustment-free continuous qualified T304 stainless ball chain with 110 lbs. breaking strength for precise control, smooth operation,and ensures a uniform look. Components must be maintenance-free from adjustments or lubrication for trouble-free lifetime operation. a. 90 pound breaking strength chains will not be acceptable. b. Chain anchor device to be compliant with WCMA safety standard A100.1.1-2010 and must prevent the clutch system from moving the roller shade through lowering and raising if not properly installed as specified in ANSI Standard Section 6.5.2. 2. Roller Tube: Circular-shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T-6. Extruded tube to have a .063" wall thickness (2.5" outside diameter to have a 0.79" wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum of six internal ribs and flutes providing additional tensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch and end plug. 3. Spring-Loaded Idle End: Reinforced idler assembly containing spring loaded end plug with positive locking wheel allowing for up to 7/8" adjustment and provides for a secure installation and removal of shade. Locking tube bearing plug contains minimum 6 ribs and flutes and inserted a minimum of 2 3/8"into roller tube on heavy duty systems. 4. Bottom Bar: Industry standard sealed hembar with weight sewn into pocket providing for tracking adjustments and uniform look of the hanging fabric panel.RB500 Bottom Bar with wool pile. 5. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard or heavy duty bracket constructed of hardened 1/8"thick steel to support full weight of shade with bracket and screw hole covers to provide uniform look. Locking mechanism on bracket adapter provided for a secure installation and removal of the shade. a. Cradle-seated hardware without a locking mechanism will not be accepted. 6. Integrated Leveling Device: Built into the idle-end bracket (or intermediate bracket of a coupled shade) allowing for the vertical height adjustment of+/- one-half inch direction up or down, allowing the easy leveling of a fabric panel on its mounting surface. This assists to keep the fabric rolling square to the tube,minimizing the chance of the fabric rolling into its hardware causing creases and damage to the ends of the fabric. a. Adjusting fabric skewing through means of tape,paper,or cardboard tucked up inside the fabric at the tube is not acceptable. 7. Fascia: L-shaped removable aluminum extrusion valance that attaches to brackets and conceals roller shade. Fascia at the bottom enclosure must allow a maximum of 1" gap to allow fabric to come through. Exposure underneath greater than 1" is not to be accepted. Manual Operated Roller Shade 12 49 20-3 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 8. Blockout System: Extruded aluminum side channel with concealed mounting brackets. Bottom bar with Nylon wool pile to prevent light leakage. 9. Coupling Or Banding: Coupling is utilized when more than one fabric tube assembly is mechanically linked with adjacent panels, allowing a single operator to move multiple panels of fabric. Banding is utilized when multiple panels of fabric are placed on the same tube. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within +/- 1/8" or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICS A. PVC-coated fiberglass or PVC-coated polyester. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surface, installation conditions, and field measurement for this work. B. Other interacting trades shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly, and installation methods from subcontractor upon request. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Installation shall comply with manufacturer's specifications,standard and procedures as detailed on contract drawings. B.Adequate clearance shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware. C. Clean finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstration operation method and instruct owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the roller shades. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. See drawings for locations. END OF SECTION 12 49 20 Manual Operated Roller Shade 12 49 20-4 File Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 13 34 19-METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS (PEMB) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes engineering, fabrication and installation of new free standing pre- engineered metal building, including attached awnings as indicated on Drawings. 1. All exterior metal shall be galvalume finished as specified and all exterior fasteners shall be corrosion resistant. B. System Performance Requirements: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads,thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, roof panels, supporting members for exterior wall and canopies, and accessories complying with requirements indicated. 1. Structure compliant with International Building Code (IBC), latest edition approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Metal Building System Design: Of size, spacing, slope, and spans indicated. 3. Structural Performance: Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Low Rise Building Systems Manual." 4. Thermal Movements: Provide metal building roof and wall panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. 5. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies for the building that meet requirements of UL 580 for Class 150 wind-uplift resistance,unless greater resistance is required by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. The design wind load shall be: 150 mph(up-lift resistance: UL580, Class 150). C. Submittals: I. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, structural analysis, anchor- bolt plans, structural-framing drawings,roof and wall panel layout drawings,personnel door schedule, and attachments to other Work. 3. Samples: For factory-applied color finishes. 4. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: a. Name and location of Project. b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Building dimensions and roof slope. f. Indicate compliance with RISC and AISI standards. g. Governing building code and year of edition. h. Design loads and load combinations. i. Building-use category and its effect on load importance factors. j. Statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer. 5. Certification that roof will remain watertight at slopes indicated. Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 1334 19- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 6. Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Engage a qualified engineer or land surveyor to perform surveys and certify their accuracy. D. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and label structural framing to comply with special inspection requirements at point of fabrication for welding and other connections required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." F. Warranty: Submit as follows: 1. Provide a ten-year warranty covering the cost of labor and materials to repair or replace pre-engineered building systems or components which are found to be defective or nonconforming in materials or workmanship. Coverage shall include,but not be limited to, the following: a. Failure for roof to remain watertight, 2-years. b. Leaking, rupture, rusting, structural failure or perforation of roof panels and accessories,including panels, gutters, downspouts, trim and accessories, 2-years. 2. Provide manufacturer's 20-year warranty for the panel and trim finish coating system, covering blistering,peeling,cracking,flaking,checking,chipping,fading,and chalking PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide metal building by one of the following: 1. Alliance Steel Building Systems 2. Red-Dot Buildings 3. Robert S. Henry Company 4. Rigid Building Systems 5. Mid-West Steel Building Company 6. USA(United Steel of America) 7. As approved by Architect during Bidding 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural-Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 529/A 529M. B. Steel Plate, Bar, or Strip: ASTM A 529/A 529M, ASTM A 570/A 570M, or ASTM A 572/A 572M; 50,000-psi minimum yield strength. C. Steel Tubing or Pipe: ASTM A 500, Grade B; ASTM A 501; or ASTM A 53, Grade B. D. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled,ASTM A 570/A 570M,Grade 50 or Grade 55;hot-rolled, ASTM 568/A 568M; or cold-rolled,ASTM A 611, structural-quality, matte(dull) finish. E. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet,ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M),alloy as standard with manufacturer,with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 13 34 19-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 F. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers,uncoated. G. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers, uncoated. H. Fasteners Exposed to Exterior: Factory-coated steel fasteners complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening to substrate. I. Anchor Rods,Bolts,Nuts, and Washers: As follows: 1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50. 3. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon- steel,hex-head bolts; and carbon-steel nuts. 4. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M),Type 1,heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts. 5. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 490(ASTM A 490M),Type 1,heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts. 6. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M. J. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25;red iron oxide, zinc oxide,raw linseed oil and alkyd primer. K. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids,gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; '/z-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick. L. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone- rubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer. 2.03 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Vinyl Faced Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation, complying with ASTM C 991, Type lI, of 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density, 6" thick(R30),with a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and 2-inch- wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs. Refer to Wall Section Drawings for application of roof insulation systems at exposed ceiling areas vs. ceiling areas, and wall insulation systems. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:Premixed,nonmetallic,noncorrosive,non-staining grout, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. C. Finish Painting: Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting." 2.05 STRUCTURAL FRAMING Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 1334 19-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 A. Manufacturer's standard framing designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements and as follows: 1. Fabrication: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. Shop prime with specified primer after fabrication. a. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's"Low Rise Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances." 2. Primary Framing: Includes transverse frames;rafter,rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. a. Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. b. Frame Configuration: As indicated. 3. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped straight shaft sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0747 inch. 4. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch. 5. Secondary Framing: Fabricate from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated, to comply with the following: a. Purlins: C-or Z-shaped sections;fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges; depth as indicated. b. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange,C-shaped sections;fabricated from 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet,built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. c. Flange and Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch structural-steel angles, with a minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch. d. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0747-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. e. Purlin Clips: Minimum 0.0747-inch-thick,zinc-coated(galvanized) steel sheet. f. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from minimum 0.0747-inch- thick,zinc-coated(galvanized) steel sheet. g. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick,cold-formed,structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head,jamb, and sill of other openings. h. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads. 6. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: a. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade D; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50; 1/2-inch- diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 12 inches at each end. b. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. 2.06 ROOF PANELS A. Panels complying with the following: 1. Standing-Seam Flat Roof Panels complying with Section 07 41 13. Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 13 34 19-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 2. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly. Match materials and finishes of roof panels. 2.07 WALL, LINER, FASCIA AND SOFFIT PANELS A. Panels complying with the following: 1. Wall, Liner, Fascia and Soffit Panels complying with Section 07 42 13 2.09 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Personnel Doors: Refer to Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." B. Overhead Sectional Doors: Refer to Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors." 2.10 WINDOWS A. Aluminum Windows: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Systems." 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Metal building system manufacturer's standard units, fabricated from galvalume sheet pre-painted with coil coating, of thickness indicated; in same finish as roof panels. 1. Fasteners: Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roof or wall sheets by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Flashing and Trim: 0.0179-inch metal thickness. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. 3. Gutters and Downspouts: 0.0179-inch metal thickness, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Finish gutters and downspouts to match roof fascia and rake trim. a. Tie downspouts into underground drainage. 4. Louvers: Refer to Division 10 Section "Louvers." 5. Closures: Closed-cell, laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre-molded to match roof and wall panel profile. 6. Pipe Flashing: Pre-molded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examination: Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, baseplates, and anchor bolts to receive structural framing. Verify compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. B. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written instructions,erection drawings, and the following: Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 1334 19-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 I. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and roughen surfaces before setting baseplates and bearing plates. a. Set baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges,shims,or setting nuts. b. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. c. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. 2. Framing, General: Align and adjust framing members before permanently fastening to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Erect framing true to line, level,plumb,rigid, and secure. a. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer. b. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. 3. Primary Framing and End Walls: Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures,set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. a. Make field connections using high-strength bolts. Tighten bolts by turn-of-the-nut method. 4. Secondary Framing: Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength bolts. Hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. a. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers,ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. 5. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 6. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 7. Provide all framing for canopies. 8. Provide connections/bracing/framing to support lateral loads imposed on exterior walls. C. Roof Panel Installation: Provide roof panels of full length from cave to ridge when possible. Install panels perpendicular to purlins. Rigidly fasten cave end of roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. Fasten roof panels to purlins at location and spacing determined by manufacturer. Flash and seal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. 1. Standing-Seam Roof Panels: Fasten roof panels to purlins with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint. Install clips overtop of insulation. 2. Reference Metal Roof Panel(07 41 13)for product information and execution. D. Fascia and Soffit Panel Installation: Provide panels full width of fasciae and soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1. Fascia Panels: Align bottom of panels. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 2. Soffit Panels: Flash and seal panels with weather closures where soffit meets walls and at perimeter of all openings. E. Blanket Insulation Installation: Refer to Wall Section Drawings for application of insulation systems at exposed ceiling areas vs. ceiling areas. Install insulation concurrently with panel installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Set vapor-retarder-faced units Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 13 34 19-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 with vapor retarder to warm side of construction,unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces,except for firestopping.Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. Comply with the following installation method: 1. Over-Framing Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by panels fastened to secondary framing. 2. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to standoffs. 3. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. F. Accessory Installation: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. Provide for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. 1. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. G. Structural-Steel Erection Tolerances: Comply with erection tolerance limits of AISC 5303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." H. Source and Field Quality Control: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control testing and special inspections, and to prepare test reports. a. Special inspections of shop fabrications will not be required when fabrication is performed by a fabricator registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such work without special inspection. b. Shop- and field-bolted connections will be visually inspected. c. Shop-and field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." d. Shop-and field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." e. In addition to visual inspection, shop welding will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1. 2. Metal building manufacturer's representative to provide periodic onsite inspections throughout construction and shall provide written documentation to owner stating that the building has been constructed as designed. Inspections shall include, but not be limited to the following: main frame erection, secondary framing erection and roof panel installation. 3. General Contractor to engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform air leakage testing and special inspections, and to prepare test reports. Testing to include either blower door or smoke testing. Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 1334 19-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 I. Adjusting: After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate,test, and adjust doors, windows, and accessory units to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion. J. Damaged Panels: Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. K. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime welds, bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing plates. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint. 1. Repair damaged coil coating on exposed surfaces with touch-up paint approved by coating manufacturer for touch-up use. L. Wind Load Certification: Provide certification from an independent structural engineer in good standing certifying that the metal building system has been designed and constructed to comply with the more stringent of building code specified wind load or as noted on drawings. END OF SECTION 13 3419 Metal Building Systems(PEMB) 1334 19-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 0/2024 SECTION 22 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the plumbing system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional—ASHRAE 5. BSC— Building System Commissioning Certification—NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as related to the Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations&Maintenance data to Commissioning authorityfor preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 7. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 8. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre-Functional Checklists has been completed. 9. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 10. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 11. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 12. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 13. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 14. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 15. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 16. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 17. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 18. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals,start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process.This information shall be routed through Architect. 19. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 20. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 21. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions.Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority comments. 22. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub-Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems,according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 document that control devices,components,equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to document they operate in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. 6. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 7. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System interface with applicable plumbing system equipment. 2. Service water heating systems (100%). 3. Service water circulation equipment (100%). 4. Domestic water booster pumps (100%). C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 2. Calibration of sensors 3. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 4. Verify the functionality of all alarms. D. Performance criteria 1. Water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Water heating system "recovery" rates shall be within specified time frame. 3. Booster pump shall maintain system pressure within specified tolerance. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part,to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations & Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training, and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMSSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced, tested, and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division,which outline responsibilities for start- up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub-systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist commissioning authority with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning authority for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of their systems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned, to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements,for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling, and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning authority shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning authority with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Sub-Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation &Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review. Commissioning authority copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor,details of such departures and the reasons therefore,shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition;and the Contractor,in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein,indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article,device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item)reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to,materials,labor, supervision,transportation,storage,equipment, utilities,all required permits,licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building,and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Engineer,who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding,where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid;the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above"Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however,it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later,or necessary for a complete and functioning heating,ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural,architectural and reflected ceiling plans,and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment,fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices,conduit,wire and J-boxes are included in the Workof this Division. 1.06 PERMITS,TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits,fees,tests,and all inspections as required bygovernmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy,or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations,supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping,ducts or other parts of the Work,the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes,specifications,local ordinances,industry standards,utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association, ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers,ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association,AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes,state and local ordinances,industry standards,utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as"Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled","Specified"and "Detailed"are used in lieu of"Indicated",it is forthe purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted",and"Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However,no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals,requests for information,applications,inquiries,reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractorfrom responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly,erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term"Provide"is used to mean "Furnish and Install",complete and ready for intended use,as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarityof reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements,indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 2004ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook,chapter 37"Abbreviations and Symbols",ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings,they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications,and indicated on the Drawings,is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction,and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product,material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances,and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. J. Changes in architectural,structural,electrical, mechanical,and plumbing requirementsfor the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected,the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any,due to the substitutions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change,shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor,prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30)days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight(8)complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight(8)sets.All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations,then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications,signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked"REVIEWED",the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may orderthe equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. NOTAPPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractorshall resubmit submittal on material,equipment or method of installation.The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed bythe General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which isjudged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15. Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. 33. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34. Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 22 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU's,ACCU's,and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=V-0"or larger;detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal,filter removal,and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans,elevations,and details to indicate penetrations in floors,walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures,communication systems components,and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project,this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems,products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches,size and location,for both exterior and interior;locations of dampers,fire dampers,duct access panels,and other control devices;filters,fuel fired heaters,fan coils,condensing units,and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems,with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 located(i.e.,traps,strainers,expansion compensators,tanks,etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT"prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details,alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by"Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducible is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct,locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. G. When the option described in paragraph F.,above is not exercised then upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three(3)sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,engineering data and tests,and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions;regulation,control,stopping,shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 22. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type"binders by National model no.79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow%"of spare capacity. Three(3)sets of all approved shop drawing submittals,fabrication drawings,bulletins,maintenance instructions,operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 22 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions,in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22,include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions;regulation,control,stopping,shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate,listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction,and submitthe outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 22 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 22 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer,as appropriate for the specific purpose intended,will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims,damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator,the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60)day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners(TBAE)has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record purposes",then an AutoCAD based compact disc("Cl)")will be prepared. The"CD" BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot" format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD"to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD". The "CD"will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The"CD" will be prepared in a 'Awg"format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)per"CD"cost of reproduction will be paid directlyfrom the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment,valves,controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 28 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence,coordinate,and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems,equipment,and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical,connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,these units shall be products of a single manufacturer,- however,the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating,painting,piping,ducts,etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting,fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer,uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-21 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim,and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE,TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however,the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing,fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 Plumbing/Elec.Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Fuse # Type Fuse Size MOCP Type Size MOCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-22 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 -#23180 Rev 1/2022 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-23 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 -#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 07 00 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes general requirements, products,and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the structure. B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of every description and of whatever substance encountered to the depth indicated,or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawing. Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material on compact backfill material. C. SPECIAL NOTE:All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications.The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work.The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABE CODES A. Local Codes and Ordinances B. Texas Safety Standards C. OSHA—Section 1926.650 1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696,29 U.S.C.Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA)and all amendments thereto,and to enforce and comply with all of these provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION, ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET,THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653,OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2—BEDDING MATERIAL 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use clean sand. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches(4"). PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner,and in conformance with safety codes. B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling. C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on drawings B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DEWATERING INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested, inspected and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others,and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under,around,and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods,taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and to provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12"depth before adding other backfill. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade,or as shown on drawings. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95%of maximum density,taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact all backfill under footings,slabs,and other structures to 95%of maximum density or more, if required by the Architect. C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlements,or at least 85%of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface of grade. B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to prevent pipe damage. INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations. B. Minimize number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls. C. Support footings,foundations,and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible chance of damage,and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage. D. Backfill under footings and bearing walls, using maximum compaction or concrete or proportions as specified for footings. E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services,foundations, cables,conduit lines or foundations. Repair any existing underground work accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 UNDER EXISTING SLAB INSTALLATION A. When breaking out an existing floor slab, make a saw cut and remove concrete.When repouring concrete,compact the fill to the same specifications as the building fill. Re: Architectural/Structural. Make necessary saw cuts and patching as required. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 08 00 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 220500—Basic Materials and Methods 2. Division 2—Site Work B. Description:This section described general requirements, products,and methods of execution relating excavation, backfill, and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings.The arbitrary line of demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5 feet outside the building perimeters. C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696,29 U.S.C.Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA)and all amendments thereto,and to WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET,THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653,OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. D. SPECIAL NOTE:All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications.The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work.The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maximum aggregate size passing a 2"sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 08 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders,and debris. Maintain moisture content within range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size shall be 4 inches. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings. B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner and in conformance with safety codes. C. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfill. D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade,fill to required depth with granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DE-WATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested, inspected,and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench work in a timely manner. OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 08 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under,around,and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods,taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6" depth before adding other backfill. D. Cover water line with 18" bedding material before backfilling. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade,or as shown on the drawing. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to al least 95%of maximum density,taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement or at least to 90%of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Restore all surface areas to original conditions,or improve as shown on the drawings. C. Replace all paving, base course,gravel surfacing,sub-base,topsoil or other existing finished surface shown or not shown on the drawings. D. Clean up and finish all construction areas to original condition or better. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 08 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 232400-Vibration Isolation. B. Section 222600- Piping Insulation. C. Section 232800- Equipment Insulation. D. Section 211300- Fire Protection System. E. Section 224100- Plumbing System. F. Section 235300—Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME 631.1 - Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. All hangers, supports and rods in areas exposed to the outdoors, such as but not limited to crawl spaces, service bays, wash bays, open shops and warehouses shall be hot dipped galvanized. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. K. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3"through 8" —Type PS For multiple pipes—Type PSE -Custom L. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions. Unistrut "Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. M. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 231400-3.03. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 O. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief"Pipe Titan" or equal. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME 1331.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 &6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION 22 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 22 19 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton nameplate company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return Fire Protection Red Fire Protection Automatic Red Fire Sprinkler Sprinkler C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 22 19 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Compressed Air Green Chilled Water Supply and Return Light Blue PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. END OF SECTION 22 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 22 19 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by PolyPhen 2500 Insulation. F. Polyisocya n u rate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow "Trymer 2000 XP". G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.08 MATERIALS A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers,thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. B. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint. C. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing. D. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts, underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. E. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. F. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap-On" jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. 3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket. 3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1%2 inch B. Interior domestic cold water pipe: 1 inch C. Condensate drain lines: 3/ inch PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch E. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1% inch blanket wrap Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1 inch thick rigid (phenolic) with all service jackets 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS A. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch END OF SECTION 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 4100 PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Storm sewer piping system. E. Domestic water piping system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 022220- Excavating. B. Section 022230- Backfilling. C. Section 022250-Trenching. D. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. E. Section 221900—System Identification and Pipe Marking. F. Section 232420-Vibration Isolation. G. Section 222600- Piping Insulation. H. Section 224400- Plumbing Fixtures. I. Section 224500- Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping. B. ANSI B31.9- Building Service Piping. C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. ASME Sec. 9 -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ASME B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. F. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. G. ASME B16.4-Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. H. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings I. ASTM A47- Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. K. ASTM A74-Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM B32 -Solder Metal. M. ASTM B42 -Seamless Copper Pipe. N. ASTM B306-Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). O. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120. P. ASTM D2241- Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). Q. ASTM D2466- Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. R. ASTM D2564-Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. S. ASTM D2729- Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. T. ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems. U. ASTM F493-Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. V. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. W. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. X. CISPI 301 -Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Y. CISPI 310-Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,Pipe fittings,valves,and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. D. Foreign pipe,fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturers name and country of origin. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. 1.10 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2729 schedule 40; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, installed per the requirements of ASTM D 2855. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 ***OR*** B. PVC pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings:ASTM F 1336 PVC,drainage pattern,with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM F 477 or F 913, elastomeric gaskets or solvent weld. 2.02 SANITARY SOIL,WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 1. Fittings: PVC,ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement,clear, medium bodied,for sizes 3"and smaller and gray,heavy bodied,for sizes 4"and larger,mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application. 2.03 SANITARY SOIL,WASTE AND VENT PIPING,WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVE GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 1. Fittings: PVC,ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement,clear, medium bodied,for sizes 3"and smaller and gray,heavy bodied,for sizes 4"and larger,mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785 schedule 80. 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2467 PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, soft annealed. Provide for pipe sizes up to and including 2-1/2". 1. Fittings: ASTM B16.22 wrought copper pressure fittings. 2. Joints shall be as follows: a. No joints shall be permitted for pipe sizes 2"and smaller.All such piping must be run continuous below slab on grade and brought up to no less PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 than 12"above the finished floor before any joint is provided. b. For sizes larger than 2",joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be brazed and shall be made in accordance with all the applicable portions of ASTM B828, manufacturer's recommendations,and AWS requirements. Brazing filler metal shall be in accordance with AWS A5.8 and any required flux shall meet AWS A5.31,Type FB3-A or F133-C. 3. Beginning at no closer than the 5'-0"mark from the building,all piping buried or in contact with concrete shall be provided with one of the following,which shall also extend to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor: a. AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type,elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. b. Continuous polyethylene lining, minimum 60 mil nominal thickness. B. Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum pressure class 150,ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. Provide for pipe sizes 3" and larger. 1. Fittings: Standard ductile iron, ANSI/AWWAC110/A21.10. 2. Joints: Rubber-gasketed and bolted mechanical joints, ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 and approved pipe lubricant shall be used for optimum gasket sealing and long-term performance. 3. Note: A single fitting may be installed below slab on grade to facilitate underground pipe entry up to above floor from an immediately adjacent exterior building wall. 4. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor. C. Stainless Steel Pre-Fabricated In-Building Riser(acceptable for sizes 2"through 10") 1. Corrosion resistant Type 304 stainless steel construction single, extended 90 degree fitting. 2. UL listed, FM approved and NFPA 24 compliant. 3. Lead free and NSF/ANSI 61 (372) certified. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Ames Fire &Waterworks Series IBR (4"through 10") and IBR2 (2", 2- 1/2", and 3") b. Zurn Wilkins Model WBR (4"through 10") 5. Note: For this application, the inlet joint for larger diameter (4" through 10") PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 piping (which shall not be located below a building slab or foundation) can be rubber gasketed push-on type,ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. 6. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor. 2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVE GRADE: A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88,Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy HB lead-free solder. 3. Fittings and joints for pipe sizes 1/2"through 4"may be mechanical press-connect system joints with ASME B16.51 lead-free copper bodied fittings with integral ethylene-propylene diene monomer rubber (EPDM) sealing gaskets.All fittings, couplings,and adapters shall be the product of a single system manufacturer and only that manufacturer's approved press tools, kits, and jaws shall be used. a. EPDM o-rings shall be pre-installed and lubricated with ANSI/NSF 61 listed lubricant. b. All installers of copper press-connect fittings shall be trained bythefitting manufacturer's appointed representative and carry such credentials for the duration of the project. C. The fitting manufacturer's representative shall conduct periodic inspections of the installation and shall provide written reports of such inspections to the Contractor and Engineer, including any observed deviations from the manufacturer's recommended installation practices. d. Acceptable system manufacturers:Viega, Merit Brass,or pre-approved equal. 2.07 FLANGES AND UNIONS A. Drainage Applications: 1. Provide approved listed adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements. 2. For dissimilar piping above ground, provide stainless steel shielded, molded elastomeric couplings and adapters meeting ASTM C564 and ASTM C1460. Applies to installations including cast iron to PVC transitions immediately adjacent to building slabs on grade. 3. For dissimilar underground piping not below building slab,provide shear resistant .012"thick 300 series stainless steel shielded, PVC gasketed flexible couplings and PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 adapters meeting ASTM D5926 and ASTM C1173. For direct-bury applications, provide AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type,elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines,to completely wrap the shield, banding, and screws. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Anaco-Husky/Cremco b. Mission Rubber Company LLC C. Fernco, Inc. d. Fernco, Inc.Strong Back RC 1000 Series(underground piping, not below building slab; or readily accessible underground piping transitions in backwater valve pits, etc.) 5. Adapters, couplings, bushings for copper DWV pipe shall be cast bronze or wrought copper, ASME 1316.23/1316.29. B. Domestic Water Applications: 1. Provide joints between various materials with approved adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements and the manufacturer's instructions. 2. For copper tube and pipe:adapters, bushings,plugs,caps,and couplings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze;flanges(minimum class 150)and unions shall be cast bronze. Provide with solder or threaded connections as necessary and as produced to applicable ASME standards B16.15,B16.18,B16.22,B16.24,B16.50, 131.20.1.All such appurtenances shall be for use in above ground potable water systems. 3. Above slab transitions for water service entries: a. 100% fusion bonded epoxy coated ASTM AS36 cast ductile iron construction coupling with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber(NBR)gaskets and EPDM insulating boot for water service. 5/8 inch high strength stainless steel bolts and nuts.Coupling shall meet AWWA C219. Romac Industries, Inc. IC501 or pre-approved equivalent. b. 100%fusion bonded 14 mil epoxy coated coupling with ASTM A536 cast ductile iron rings. Complete with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) gaskets and type 304 stainless steel bridge, spacers, nuts, and bolts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Krausz USA Hymax Grip Coupling Restraint or pre-approved equivalent. 4. Dielectric connections: a. For pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller,provide lead-free dielectric unions,rated to 180 F at 250 psi and compliant to ASSE 1079. b. For pipe sizes larger than 2 inches, provide lead-free dielectric flanged pipe fittings, rated to 180 F at 175 psi and meeting ASME B16.1. C. For grooved copper joining systems, provide grooved end dielectric PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 transition fitting from system manufacturer, with virgin polypropylene internal lining, meeting NSF 61, C. General: 1. Unions for ferrous pipe shall be ASTM B16.39 galvanized malleable iron, threaded, minimum pressure class 150. 2. Plugs and bushings for ferrous pipe shall be ASME B16.14 galvanized malleable iron,threaded. 3. Nipples for ferrous pipe shall be schedule40,galvanized,ASTM A53 welded steel pipe nipples,threaded, meeting ASTM A733. 4. Couplings for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized steel,threaded, manufactured in accordance with ASTM A865. 5. Flanges for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized forged steel construction, either socket weld or slip-on weld type, minimum pressure class 150, manufactured to ASME B16.5. 6. Bolts, nuts,and gaskets for flanged connections shall be appropriate to the pipe material, fluid type, temperature, and pressure. 1/16" thick pre-formed neoprene,typical. 7. Provide flexible stainless steel connectors at pumps and other such equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Connectors shall have corrugated hose and braided 300 series stainless steel jacketing. Carbon steel flanged or grooved ends as appropriate. NSF 372 lead-free for all potable water applications. Metraflex Company or pre-approved equivalent. 2.08 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-111 up to 2-1/2"; F-617-0 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 428 up to 2-1/2";465-1/2 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-100 up to 2-1/2"; G-623 3" and over. C. Grinnell No. 3010 up to 2-1/2"; 6020A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2" Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim,rising stem,handwheel,inside screw, solid wedge threaded ends. C. Over 3" Inches: Iron body, bronze trim,rising stem, handwheel,OS&Y,solid wedge,flanged ends. D. Provide bronze tee or cast iron square nut operator for all valves installed below ground. 1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be equipped with ASTM B62 solid red bronze tee securely affixed to the valve stem. 2. Valves 3" and larger shall be equipped with a standard 2" square combination nut/socket securely affixed to the valve stem. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Provide owner with two extended tee handle operating wrenches for each type of valve head installed. 2.09 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-585-66-LF (full port)for all sizes up through 2" 2. Nibco No. T-580-66-LF (conventional port) for sizes 2-1/2" and 3" 3. Valves 4" and larger shall be split body stainless steel construction, 275psi cold working pressure, blow-out proof stem, PTFE seated, type 316 stainless steel trimmed, class 150 full port desing with manual gear operator. Nibco F-515-S6-F- 66-FS 4. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Apollo 77 CLF-A series (full port)for all sizes up through 2". b. Milwaukee UPBA-400S (full port) for all sizes up through 2". C. Apollo 77 CLF-A series (full port)for size 2-1/2" and Apollo 70LF-140 series (standard port) for 3". d. Milwaukee UPBA-100S (standard port) for sizes 2-1/2" and 3". B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, lead-free, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union. C. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops. 2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-413-Y-LF up to 2"; F-918-13-LF 2-1/2" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G931 3" and over. C. Grinnell No. 3300 up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends. C. Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation. 2.11 SPRING LOADED (SILENT) CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Nibco No. W-910 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Grinnell No. 402 B. Iron body, bronze trim,stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc,screwed,wafer, or flanged ends. 2.12 SOLDER A. 95.5%tin, 4%copper, 0.5%silver. B. Lead free, antimony free, zinc-free. C. Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division 2. B. Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Install,clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe,and to cover all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chromium plated. C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator. I. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration, which ever is the greater. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Gate valves installed below grade shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water'cast on top and set flush to finished paving or 2"above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions. N. Prepare pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories not pre-finished,ready for finish painting. O. Excavate in accordance with Division 2. P. Backfill in accordance with Division 2. Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. R. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix materials types. S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. T. Solderjoints shall be wiped clean at each joint,remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 U. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. V. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformity to the manufacturers published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to ASTM D 2321. W. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the requirements outlined in ASTM D 2855. X. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter. Y. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using standard or wide bodied no hub couplings for as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and attest tee for storm drainage piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors with using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in section 231400. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections. C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items,distinct parts of systems, or vertical risers. D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply line. E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve. F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control) services. G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device. H. Provide spring loaded, non-slam, check valves on discharge of water pumps. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at minimum grade specified. B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated, polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping D. Inject disinfectant,free chlorine in liquid, powder,tablet or gas form,in sufficient quantity to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems. E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required. C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility service lines or those materials specified herein. E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated. 3.08 RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation. B. This Work shall be done,as part of the contract,to make certain that all lines are clear,and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned. 3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested with water and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. Leaks,damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints,or defective pipe,shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit,each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. G. Domestic Water: 1. Provide hydrostatic pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 prig, which ever is the greater, for 24 hours. H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer: 1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10'above the lowest portions of the system being tested. 2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested,or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described,and the test repeated until,after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation,additional tests including peppermint smoke,or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible. 3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc. END OF SECTION 22 4100 PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 4110 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods,Section 220500,are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing,complete installation and testing of the gas piping system, with all metering,valves, piping and auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Coordinate with the gas company and pay all fees and permits required for a complete and operating gas service to the project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 All gas piping above ground shall be Schedule 40 black steel as manufactured by National Tube, Republic, Youngstown, or approved equal domestic manufacturer. 2.02 All gas piping larger than 2" shall be of welded construction. Screwed fittings will only be permitted for size 2" and smaller. Unions and valves will not be permitted above furred ceiling areas or in walls or chases. 2.03 All pipe fittings shall be of materials as follows: 1. All welding fittings shall be factory-made and shall be full line size, for each tee, branch, elbow, etc., with reducers after fittings, if required. 2. All screwed fittings shall be Crane, or approved equal, Class 150 malleable iron. Screw joints shall be made up with graphite and oil or Teflon tape. Screwed threads shall be in accordance with American Pipe Thread Standards. 3. All piping and fittings shall be from a domestic manufacturer. 2.04 All underground gas piping with 5 pound working pressure or less shall be as follows: NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. The pipe shall be yellow polyethylene with socket heat fusion joints and fittings. Pipe sizes 1-1/2" and 2" shall be SDR 11, (PE 2406) and pipe sizes 3" and 4" shall be SDR 11.5 (PE 2406). B. All socket heat fusion fittings shall be D.O.T. approved and meet ASTM D-2513 and ANSI B31.8 codes. C. All gas valves shall be polyethylene ball type,doubled union, rated for natural gas use. All valves shall be placed in a cast-iron valve box of an adequate size for accessibility and maintenance. 4. All transition meter risers shall be D.O.T.approved anode-less service type,fusion coupled and PE 2406 rated. E. The contractor shall take thermal expansion under consideration during installation. The contractor shall follow all requirements set bythe manufacturer to protect the system from damage due to thermal expansion. F. The contractor shall provide detector tape approximately 12" above all gas piping. G. Wrap pipe with 18 gauge minimum copper tracer wire. 2.05 Gas piping installed in unventilated spaces shall be routed in properly vented continuous sleeve where required by the building code. 2.06 Gas valves shall be U.L. listed as follows: A. Ball Valves: Nibco T585-70-UL for%" to 1" and T580-70-UL for 1-%"to 3". B. Plug Valves: DeZurick Series 425 or 435 Eccentric valves with RS 49 plug seals. 2.07 Gas pressure regulators shall be capable of reducing 75 psi pressure gas to 0.5 psi gas at capacities required by Gas Demand. Install per A.G.A. Bulletin 90. Regulators shall be as manufactured by Rockwell, Fisher-Governor or approved equal. 2.08 All gas regulators located inside the building shall be vented to atmosphere with schedule 40 black steel pipe. This includes all regulators provided with mechanical and plumbing equipment and all other regulators provided under this contract. Vent piping shall be the full size of regulatory port opening, or as recommended by regulator manufacturer, and shall run independent of any other regulator vent through to point of termination. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 All underground gas piping shall be laid on 6" of wet compact banksand approximately 24" below grade. Backfill trench with wet compacted banksand to 6" above pipe. The remainder of backfill shall be selected backfill and shall meet all compaction requirements set forth by the general trenching and backfill requirements. 3.04 Provide lever handle gas valve,drip leg and union to each piece of equipment and where indicated. 3.05 All gas lines entering building shall be valved on the exterior of the building above grade. PART 4-TESTING 4.01 TESTING OF GAS PIPING SYSTEMS A. All gas system testing shall be in compliance with local codes or as required in NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code whichever is the more stringent requirement. B. All work shall be performed by a Journeyman Plumber holding current State and local licenses. C. All tests shall be accomplished during normal working hours and after having given due notification to building owner,construction manager or designee,of tests to be performed. All tests shall be performed in the presence of and witnessed by the building owners representative or designee D. All gas system piping shall be subjected to a pneumatic test pressure of 60 psig for not less than 2 hours upon completion of all rough-in work and prior to covering. While the systems are subjected to this air pressure test, all joints shall have a soapy water solution applied and shall be observed for leaks. During test period there shall be no perceptible drop in test gage pressure E. A final test shall be performed after all portions of the piping system are completely installed and covered. The entire system shall be tested,with all system outlets plugged or capped, before any equipment or appliances are connected to the piping. 1. Final test shall be with mercury, measured with a manometer or slope gage. Test pressures shall in no case be less than one and one half times the normal operating pressure or as listed below; which ever is the greater: a. 10.5 inches mercury(5 psig)for 4 ounce system. b. 21.0 inches mercury(10 psig)for 8 ounce system. 2. Tests shall be for a period of not less than 30 minutes and shall prove absolutely tight, showing no perceptible drop, for the entire test period. NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. Purge air from test piping before connecting equipment or appliances. Purge air to outdoors or to ventilated space of sufficient volume to prevent accumulation of flammable mixtures. END OF SECTION NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 43 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cleanouts. B. Backflow preventers. C. Water hammer arrestors. D. Thermostatic mixing valves. E. Hose bibbs hydrants. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 224100- Plumbing Piping. C. Section 224400- Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI/ASSE 1019-Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. F. ANSI A112.26.1 -Water Hammer Arresters. G. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters H. AWWA C506-Backflow Prevention Devices-Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CLEANOUTS PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Zurn B. Watts C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Cleanouts 1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover; 2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover; 3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scored cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas; 4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and 6" round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; 5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas:Calked orthreaded type.Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. Woodford B. Zurn C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS 1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed to interior with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011; 2. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze,self-draining type with rough chrome plated lockable recessed box hose thread spout,lockshield and removable key,and vacuum breaker; 3. Floor Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019;chrome plated lockable recessed box,hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker; 2.03 RECESSED VALVE BOX PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Manufacturers: 1. Oatey. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 3. Sioux Chief 4. Guy Gray. 5. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass quarter turn ball valves and water hammer arrestors on both hot and cold connections, socket for waste, slip in finishing cover; 6. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with quarter turn brass ball valve,slip in finishing cover; 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Watts B. Wilkins C. Febco D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:ANSI/ASSE 1013;bronze bodywith bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs;two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves;third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks; 2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent; 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Sioux Chief B. Wilkins C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range-100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700 kPa) working pressure; 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Powers B. Bradley C. Leonard D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve,with checkvalve,volume control shut-off valve on outlet,stem type thermometer on outlet,strainer stop check on inlet,mounted in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting,forming of roof and/or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION 22 43 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 22 44 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods,Section 220500,are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Drains and cleanouts. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Piping systems. 2. Pipe valves, and fittings. 3. Plumbing systems testing. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. PLUMBING FIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved equal products manufacturers are as follows: a. Water closet, urinals, lavatories, bath tubs and showers: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer. b. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay,Just and Moen. C. Mop sinks: Stern-Williams, Fiat d. Faucets: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, e. Faucets: Chicago,T&S Brass, Zurn, Sloan f. Faucets: Moen Commercial, Speakman g. Shower valves: Leonard, Powers, Symmons, Chicago h. Shower Systems: Bradley,Acorn, Willoughby i. Flush Valves: Sloan "Royal", Zurn "AauaVantage" j. Drinking fountains: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws, Acorn Aqua. k. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn,J.R. Smith,Josam and Watts. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 I. Emergency Fixtures: Bradley, Chicago, Haws, Speakman and Encon 2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1.;Adjustable cast iron frame,integral drain hub and vent,adjustable spud, lugs forfloor and wall attachment,threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Watts. 3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN & URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1;cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith,Josam or Watts. 4. TRAPS,STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire,Chicago or Zurn. B. CLEANOUTS: 1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city building code. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn J. R. Smith,Josam and Watts. 3. TYPES: a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover. b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable assembly with round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material. C. DRYWALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and countersink bronze plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover. d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts. e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs. f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4" thick concrete pad. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect. B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 recommendations. C. All rough-in pipe openings,for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection. D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold." Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible. F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment. G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout. H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner. I. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim,they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply. J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. L. Hot and cold water riser air chambers: Provide air chambers for hot and/or cold water riser located at the rough-in tee at all fixtures. The air chamber shall be of the same materials and the next larger diameter than the required rough-in supply pipe and a minimum of 24" tall. The contractor may install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture. Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,or overflow. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1. B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings. B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and supplied with controls properly installed,to comply with requirements as directed by ADA Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with all state and local ADA Code requirements. C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with the fully molded, Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect. D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space,whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture,shall be supplied with skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture. END OF SECTION 22 44 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 22 45 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. B. In-line circulator pumps. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. C. Section 224100- Plumbing Piping &Valves. D. Section 224300- Plumbing Specialties. E. Section 261800 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A- Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ASME Section VIIID - Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. C. ANSI/NFPA 54- National Fuel Gas Code. D. ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. E. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include heat exchanger dimensions. size of tappings, and performance data. 2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Product Data: 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction. 3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers'Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 ANSI/NFPA 70 ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section Division 1. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1. B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters, water storage tanks, and packaged water heating systems. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two sets of electric heater elements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. State Industries. b. Bradford White. B. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. D. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nickle-chrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Manufacturer: 1. Amtrol. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Bell & Gossett. b. Armstrong. C. Taco. B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles. C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting,tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig. 2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell &Gossett. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. TACO. b. Grundfos C. Armstrong B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure. C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related work to achieve operating system. C. Provide secondary drain pan and route secondary drain pipe to outside the building or as indicated on the construction documents. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Route TPR drain line to the exterior of the building and terminate 6 inches above grade. E. Provide 18 inch high galvanized stand manufactured for supporting water heaters. 3.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide steel pipe support for tanks, independent of building structural framing members. C. Clean and flush tank after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made. 3.03 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. C. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. D. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. F. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. G. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. END OF SECTION 22 45 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the HVAC system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional—ASHRAE 5. BSC—Building System Commissioning Certification—NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as related to the Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide Testing and Balancing Report before Functional Testing begins. 7. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 8. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 9. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre- Functional Checklists has been completed. 10. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 11. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 12. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 13. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 14. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 15. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 16. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 17. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Test Engineer in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 18. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 19. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process.This information shall be routed through Architect. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 20. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 21. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 22. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority comments. 23. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub- Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems, according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to document that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to documentthey operate in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. 6. Air and hydronic system balancing: Air and water flow rates shall be COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within the tolerances provided in the contract documents. System balancing shall be performed by T.A.B. contractor as specified in the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing specification section 23 99 00. 7. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 8. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System: 1. Graphical User Interface 2. Automation Software 3. Field Level Controllers 4. Field Level Devices 5. Control Sequences 2. Condensing Systems 3. Air Handling Systems (All AHU) 4. Exhaust Fan Systems (100%) 5. Service water heating systems (100%) C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Energy conservation programs (economizer, optimal start, etc) 2. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 3. Calibration of sensors 4. Testing shall affirm winter and summer design conditions. 5. Test under full outside air conditions. 6. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 7. Verify the functionality of all alarms. D. Performance criteria 1. Air and water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Space temperatures shall be maintained within 1 degree of specified set points. 3. Space humidity shall be maintained within 5%of specified levels. PART 2—PRODUCTS COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part,to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations & Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training, and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMSSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced, tested, and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start- up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub- systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist commissioning authority with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning authority for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of their systems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned, to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS(PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements, for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling, and ultimatelyto ensure that training is completed. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning authority shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning authority with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Sub-Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review. Commissioning authority copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 23 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor,details of such departures and the reasons therefore,shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition;and the Contractor,in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein,indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article,device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item)reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to,materials,labor, supervision,transportation,storage,equipment, utilities,all required permits,licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building,and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Engineer,who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding,where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid;the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above"Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however,it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later,or necessary for a complete and functioning heating,ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural,architectural and reflected ceiling plans,and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment,fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices,conduit,wire and J-boxes are included in the Workof this Division. 1.06 PERMITS,TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits,fees,tests,and all inspections as required bygovernmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy,or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations,supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping,ducts or other parts of the Work,the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes,specifications,local ordinances,industry standards,utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association, ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers,ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association,AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes,state and local ordinances,industry standards,utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as"Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled","Specified"and "Detailed"are used in lieu of"Indicated",it is forthe purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted",and"Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However,no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals,requests for information,applications,inquiries,reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractorfrom responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly,erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term"Provide"is used to mean "Furnish and Install",complete and ready for intended use,as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarityof reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements,indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook,chapter 34"Abbreviations and Symbols",ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings,they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications,and indicated on the Drawings,is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction,and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product,material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances,and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 16. J. Changes in architectural,structural,electrical, mechanical,and plumbing requirementsfor the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected,the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades,the Owner,the Architect or Engineer,if any,due to the substitutions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change,shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change,including conduit,wiring, motor starting equipment,etc.,shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30)days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight(8)complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight(8)sets.All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations,then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications,signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked"REVIEWED",the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may orderthe equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. NOTAPPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractorshall resubmit submittal on material,equipment or method of installation.The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed bythe General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which isjudged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15. Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. 33. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34. Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU's,ACCU's,and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=V-0"or larger;detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal,filter removal,and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans,elevations,and details to indicate penetrations in floors,walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures,communication systems components,and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project,this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems,products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches,size and location,for both exterior and interior;locations of dampers,fire dampers,duct access panels,and other control devices;filters,fuel fired heaters,fan coils,condensing units,and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems,with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 located(i.e.,traps,strainers,expansion compensators,tanks,etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT"prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details,alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by"Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct,locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. G. When the option described in paragraph F.,above is not exercised then upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three(3)sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,engineering data and tests,and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions;regulation,control,stopping,shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 23. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type"binders by National model no.79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow%"of spare capacity. Three(3)sets of all approved shop drawing submittals,fabrication drawings,bulletins,maintenance instructions,operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions,in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23,include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions;regulation,control,stopping,shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate,listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction,and submitthe outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer,as appropriate for the specific purpose intended,will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims,damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator,the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60)day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners(TBAE)has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record purposes",then an AutoCAD based compact disc("Cl)")will be prepared. The"CD" BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot" format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD"to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD". The "CD"will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The"CD" will be prepared in a 'Awg"format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)per"CD"cost of reproduction will be paid directlyfrom the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment,valves,controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence,coordinate,and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems,equipment,and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical,connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,these units shall be products of a single manufacturer,- however,the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating,painting,piping,ducts,etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting,fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer,uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-21 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim,and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE,TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however,the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing,fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-22 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Mech/Elec. Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Type Fuse Size MOCP Type Fuse Size MOCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-23 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 -#23180 Rev 1/2022 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-24 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2 -#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 OS 10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing,adjusting, and balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014000-Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 017000- Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Section 239900-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect, Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Adjust electrical amp draw on motors to within 80%of rated amp draw. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. STARTING OF SYSTEMS 23 05 10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 I. Adjust return air to 500 fpm at each air unit inlet. Replace drive packages as necessary to achieve design airflows. J. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 014000 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.05 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A. Mechanical Division will secure the services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 239900. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used STARTING OF SYSTEMS 23 05 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 END OF SECTION 23 0510 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 23 05 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 07 19 DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS Part 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems. 1. Refrigerant suction (low pressure gas) piping. 2. Refrigerant hot gas (discharge or high pressure gas) piping. 3. Refrigerant liquid piping,for VRF/VRV and Heat Pump systems. 4. Condensate drainage piping. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include thermal conductivity,water vapor permeance,thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualification: Only trained installers that are familiar with the products should be used. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Material to be delivered in new condition,free of defects and stored in a clean, dry space that provides protection against damage and contamination. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 231400 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment". B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and space required for maintenance. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing and leak testing of systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. Part 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: EPDM -Closed cell expanded rubber. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials for refrigeration pipe sizes 1/4" and greater. 1. Outdoor Use, Basis of Design Product: Provide Reftekk AC-SSPT(EPDM pre-split with lap seal and field applied Aeroflex Aerocoat) or comparable product by one of the following. a. Aeroflex, EPDM SSPT with field applied Aerocel Aerocoat b. Armacell, LLC, EPDM UT Solaflex, Pre-split with lap seal and with field applied Black PVC jacket 2. Indoor Use, Basis of Design Product: Provide Reftekk AC-SSPT(EPDM pre-split with lap seal) or comparable product by one of the following. a. Aeroflex, EPDM SSPT b. Armacell, LLC, EPDM UT Solaflex, Pre-split with lap seal 3. Applied to Annealed Coiled Tubing (Line Sets), Basis of Design Product: EPDM continuous tube. B. Elastomeric insulation shall not use CFC's or HFC's in the manufacturing process. C. Elastomeric insulation shall have a flame spread-index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for all products through 2"thickness. D. Elastomeric insulation and elastomeric joining system shall be suitable of use from -70°F to 257°F continuous service temperature, per ASTM C 411. E. Elastomeric insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.235 Btu-in/h-ftZ-°F at a mean temperature of 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. F. Elastomeric insulation shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of<_0.03 perm-inch when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, latest revision. G. Elastomeric insulation must exhibit long-term UV resistance in outdoor installation per ASTM G 7 and ASTM G 90. H. Elastomeric insulation must not contribute to external stress corrosion cracking when tested per ASTM C 692. 2.02 ADHESIVES,AND TAPES A. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive for Indoor and Outdoor Application: 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Aeroflex AeroSeal contact adhesive or comparable product by one of the following. a. Armacell, LLC HT 625 contact adhesive B. Flexible Elastomeric for LEED low VOC Application: 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Aeroflex AeroSeal LVOC C. Seaming tape to be 15-mil EPDM rubber with acrylic adhesive. 2.03 INSULATING PIPE HANGER SUPPORTS DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Support the piping system using high density rigid foam insulating pipe hanger supports with an inner lining of EPDM rubber insulating tape and 15-mil exterior EPDM rubber jacket. Insulation density to be a minimum of 10 lb./cu.ft.with a compressive strength of 284 PSI or greater, and a k-value of 0.312 or lower. Continuous use temperature range to be -70°F to 257°F with water absorption of 5% or less. 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Reftekk"Cush-A-Therm", model UX insulated pipe support complete with steel channel insulation OD clamp or comparable product by one of the following. a. Aeroflex USA,Aerofix-U with matching steel channel insulation OD clamp. b. Armaflex LLC, Armafix IPH with matching steel channel insulation OD clamp. 2.04 METAL JACKETING A. Childers "Strap-On"jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers on all elbows and tees. Part 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1.Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and free of leaks and defects 2.Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean, dry and free of dirt, dust, grease,frost, and moisture. 3. Work shall be performed at the installation temperatures recommended by the product manufacturer. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B.Tape seams and lap seam tape overlaps shall be clean dry,fan free of dirt, dust, grease, frost and moisture. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All piping,valves and fittings scheduled to be insulated to have all insulation applied in strict accordance with the insulation manufacturers installation instructions and practices described in the National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards Manual. In case of conflict,the manufacturers installation guidelines and instruction will be used. B. Install insulation materials, accessories and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids,throughout the length of the piping including supports,fittings,valves and specialties. DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. D. Install insulation materials,vapor barriers,vapor dams,jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of the pipe system as required. E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams oriented per the insulation manufacturers installation instructions for all horizontal runs. F. Keep insulation dry and clean during application and finishing. Do not apply insulation to operating systems. G. Install insulation with the least number of joints practical. H. Piping to be insulated with tubular preformed pipe insulation. I. Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations, wall penetrations and floor penetrations. J. Install insulation continuously through fire rated wall and fire rated floor penetrations complying with Penetration Fire-stopping details. K. Insulating Pipe Hanger Supports are to be installed at all pipe support and clamp locations. Insulating Pipe Hanger Supports are to be installed at the time of piping installation such that the pipe insulation system is installed in a continuous manner through the pipe support system. L. All insulation terminations, butt joints, longitudinal joints, and access points to be properly glued or sealed with the insulation manufacturers sealant system. M. Vapor dams to be installed every 12'to 18' per insulation manufacturers installation instructions, high point of piping run and at all insulation terminations (supports,valves, flanges and end of pipe runs) N. Provide sufficient clearance between insulated pipes to allow air circulation. O. Provide mitered insulation fittings at elbows to prevent compression of the insulation at the throat of the elbow and stretching on the outside of the bend. P. Do not compress the insulation at penetrations or structural members, such as joists or studs. Do not allow the insulation to be compressed by ceiling hanger wires. Q. Do not allow attachment of anything to the insulated piping that will reduce the effective thickness of the insulation, such as control wiring, cabling, telephone wiring, etc. When using insulation manufacturers recommended tape on joints, do not compress the insulation. R. Insulation should be installed such that butt joints are in slight compression. This prevents separation of the insulation joints overtime or due to changes in temperature. Do NOT apply the insulation in a stretched condition. S. Insulation thickness to be the most restrictive of the following options. 1. Liquid, suction, and discharge lines per state energy codes. 2. In accordance with the thickness tables for piping insulation in the latest version of ASHRAE 90.1. 3. In accordance with local building code requirements and Authority Having Jurisdiction. DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. In accordance with the requirements of the manufacturers of the equipment being served by the insulated refrigerant piping system. 5. Sufficient thickness to prevent condensation on the surface of the insulation under all operating conditions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Condensate drain lines: % inch B. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch C. Refrigerant Piping (1) 1%"and smaller 1 inch (2) Larger than 1% inch 1 inch END OF SECTION 230719 DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 24 00—Sound and Vibration Control. B. Section 23 26 00- Piping Insulation. C. Section 22 4100- Plumbing System. D. Section 23 23 01—VRF-VRV Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME 631.1 - Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2- PRODUCTS SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. All hangers, supports and rods in areas exposed to the outdoors, such as but not limited to crawl spaces, service bays, wash bays, open shops and warehouses shall be hot dipped galvanized. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. K. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3"through 8"—Type PS For multiple pipes—Type PSE-Custom L. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut "Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. M. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 231400-3.03. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. O. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief"Pipe Titan" or equal. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods:Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq.ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq.ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted,two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 6'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger;tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any),to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME 1331.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 &6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 END OF SECTION 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Painting 2. Automatic temperature controls. 3. Power control wiring to motors and equipment. 1.03 WARRANTY Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on data of substantial completion against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures variations, and accessories. C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional information. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible. 1. Baldur 2. Marathon 3. Siemens-Allis 4. General Electric 5. U.S. Motor B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows: 1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. 2. CLASS F: a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors. C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used. 1. UP TO 1/2 HP: Provide permanent split, capacitor-start single phase with inherent overload protection. 2. 3/4 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphone. 3. Provide two separate windings on 2-speed polyphone motors. 4. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's normal voltage, serving the motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for multiphase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-graspable ball bearings; with top mounted ale mite lubrication fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows: MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional hp. motors or polyphone requiring minimum noise level. H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures as follows: 1. CONCEALED INDOOR: Open drip proof. 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Guarded. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type II. TEC. 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Type I. TEA. I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table, when tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B, including stray load loss measure. NEMA Efficiency Motor Horsepower INDEX Letter Minimum Efficiency 1800 RPM Synchronous Speed 7.5-10 F 89.5 15-20 E 91.0 25-30 E 92.4 40 D 93.0 50 C 93.0 60 C 93.6 75 C 94.1 100-125 B 94.5 150-200 B 95.0 1200 RPM Synchronous Speed 3-5 G 87.5 7.5 G 89.5 10 F 89.5 15 F 90.2 20 E 90.2 25-30 E 91.7 40-50 D 93.0 60 D 93.6 75 C 93.6 100-125 C 94.1 150-200 B 95.0 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS(STARTERS) A. All motor controllers (for equipment furnished under Division 23) shall be furnished under Division 23 and installed under Division 26 unless otherwise noted on the plans. B. Motor starters shall be furnished as follows. 1. GENERAL: Motor starters shall be Square D Company Class 8536 across-the-line magnetic type, full-voltage, non-reversing (FAVOR) starter. All starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower. ICE sizes are not acceptable. Starters shall be mounted in a general purpose dead front, painted steel enclosure and surface-mounted. Provide size and number of poles as shown and required by equipment served. Provide two speed, two winding or two speed, single winding motor starter as required for two speed motors. 2. CONTACTS: Magnetic starter contacts shall be double break solid silver alloy. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. The starter shall have straight-through wiring. 3. OPERATING COILS: Operating coils shall be 120 volts and shall be of molded construction. When the coil fails, the starter shall open and shall not lock in the closed position. 4. OVERLOAD RELAYS: Provide manual reset, trip-free Class 20 overload relays in each phase conductor in of all starters. Overload relays shall be melting alloy type with visual trip indication. All 3 phase and single phase starters shall have one overload relay in each underground conductor. Relay shall not be field adjustable from manual to automatic reset. Provide 6 overload relays for two speed motor starters. 5. PILOT LIGHTS: Provide a red running pilot light for all motor starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter and shall not be wired across the operating coil. 6. CONTROLS: Provide starters with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches. Coordinate additional motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. 7. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Provide a single-phase 480 volt control power transformer with each starter for 120 volt control power. Connect the primary side to the line side of the motor starter. The primary side shall be protected by a fuse for each conductor. The secondary side shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. 8. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Each starter shall have one normally open and one normally closed convertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock", remote monitoring, and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field-install three more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring or removing the starter from its enclosure. MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 9. UNIT WIRING: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for line and load power wiring and HVAC control wiring. 10. ENCLOSURES: All motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures or NEMA-311 if mounted exposed to high moisture conditions. Provide NEMA 4X when located by cooling towers. 11. POWER MONITOR: Provide a square "D" 8430 MPS phase failure and under- voltage relay, base and wiring required for starters serving motors 5 horsepower and larger. Set the under-voltage setting according to minimum voltage required for the motor to operate within its range. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Cerus. 2.03 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL: Combination motor starters shall consist of a magnetic starter and a fusible or non-fusible disconnect switch in a dead front, painted steel NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted and shall be surface-mounted. Size and number of poles shall as shown and required by equipment served. Combination motor starters shall be as specified for motor starters in Paragraph 2.01/13, except as modified herein. B. DISCONNECT SWITCH: Disconnect switches shall be as specified in Section 264900. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Franklin-Cerus. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors' price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. GENERAL: Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. B. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. C. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. D. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section,with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 23 19 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company,431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton Nameplate Company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Chilled Water Green Chilled Water Supply Chilled Water Return Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Storm Drain Green Storm Drain Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return Fire Protection Red Fire Protection Automatic Red Fire Sprinkler Sprinkler SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 23 19 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Compressed Air Blue Compressed Air C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Compressed Air Green Chilled Water Supply and Return Light Blue PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. END OF SECTION 23 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 23 19 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 24 00 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Vibration and sound control products. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One specification sections, apply to work of this section B. This section is Division 23 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to vibration control products specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Vibration and sound control products shall conform to ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load conditions. C. Except as otherwise indicated, sound and vibration control products shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. B. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 23 24 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide vibration isolation supports for equipment, piping and ductwork, to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the building structures that may cause discomfort to the occupants. B. Model numbers of Amber/Booth products are included for identification. Products of the additional manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification. 2.03 FLOOR MOUNTED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth CAL-2, style C aluminum housed isolators sized for 2" static deflection. Cast iron or steel housings may be used provided they are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication B. If floor mounted air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, provide 2" thick Amber/Booth type NRC ribbed neoprene pads to address high frequency breakout and afford additional unit elevation for condensate drains. Ribbed neoprene pads shall be located in accordance with the air handling unit manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 SUSPENDED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type BSWR-2 combination spring and rubber-in-shear isolation hanger sized for 2" static deflection. B. If suspended air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, furnish Amber/Booth type BIRD rubber-in-shear or NR AMPAD 3/8" thick neoprene pad isolation hangers sized for approximately %" deflection to address high frequency break-out. 2.05 SUSPENDED FANS AND FAN COIL UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type HS spring hangers sized for 1" static deflection. 2.06 PIPING A. Provide spring and rubber-in-shear hangers, Amber/Booth type HRS in mechanical equipment rooms, for a minimum distance of 50 feet from isolated equipment for all chilled water and hot water piping 1-1/2" diameter and larger. Springs shall be sized for 1" deflection. B. Floor supported piping is required to be isolated with Amber/Booth type AW-1 open springs sized for 1" deflection. C. Furnish line size flexible connectors at supply and return of pumps, Amber/Booth style SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 23 24 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2800 single sphere EPDM construction, connector shall include 150 lb. cadmium plated carbon steel floating flanges. 2.07 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All vibration isolators shall be designed and treated for resistance to corrosion. B. Steel components: PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers: zinc-electroplated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 If internal isolation option is used on air handling units, the mechanical contractor shall verify proper adjustment and operation of isolators prior to start-up. All shipping brackets and temporary restraint devices shall be removed. 3.04 The vibration isolation supplier shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all external isolation materials and devices are installed correctly and functioning properly. END OF SECTION SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 23 24 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork system insulation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500- Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 231700- Motors and Motor Controllers 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84(NFPA 255) method. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA and NBFU Standards No. 90A and 90B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. Provide 8x11 sample of product along with submittal. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer's stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf, Certain-Teed,Johns-Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Minnesota Mining, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center. On rectangular ducts over 24" wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers. DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Seal all seams and joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic, Childers CP-30 or approved equal. Contractor may choose to seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of aluminum foil tape. Duct tape shall be UL listed 181 A-P/B-FX and UL 723. Shurtape No. AF-982 or approved equivalent. C. All external duct insulation shall be a minimum of Johns Manville Type 75 fiberglass duct wrap insulation with reinforced aluminum facing or approved equal. D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts, return ducts, and supply air ducts that are not internally insulated. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. A minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. 2. A minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outside of the building. 3.03 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS A. Round duct routed exposed shall be double wall with solid inner liner and R-6 thermal insulation as manufactured by United McGill Company model no. Acousti-27 or approved equal. 3.04 AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed with external duct wrap equivalent to the insulation specified. B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 2 inch thick external fiberglass duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation had been eliminated at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 53 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Provide for the systems as shown. Submit shop drawings of piping systems showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories; drawing to be marked "Approved", and signed by a representative of the Application Engineering Department of the condensing unit manufacturer. Pipe sizes shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. Refer to piping schematic on drawings. 2.02 MATERIAL A. PIPE: Copper ACR tubing. B. FITTINGS: Wrought copper streamlined sweat fitting. C. SOLDER: Sil-Fos, except on valves use solder recommended by valve manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES All accessories shall be UL listed and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 710. A. On systems 7-1/2 tons and larger, each separate refrigerant circuit shall have a separate filter dryer. Each filter dryer shall have a replaceable core and a three valve bypass. The filter drier shall be full line size and installed in the refrigerant liquid line. The filter shall have a minimum 4-3/4 inches diameter shell with removable flange and gasket. Flange shall be tapped for 1/4 inch FPT access valve. Size filter-drier for maximum 2.0 psi pressure drop at evaporator operating temperature. Similar to Mueller Brass Company model Drymaster micro-guard refillable filter series SD-485 through SD19217 or Sporlan catch-all. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 53 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. On systems less than 7-1/2 tons, the filter dryer shall be the sealed type sizes as above. One drier per refrigerant circuit. C. Liquid-Moisture Indicator shall be installed in liquid refrigerant line full line size similar to Mueller Brass Company model "Vuemaster" with soldered ends. D. Thermostatic expansion valve shall have adjustable super heat and be as manufactured by Sporlan. 2.04 EVACUATION Evacuate moisture completely by applying a commercial vacuum pump for a minimum of 24 hours. Moisture indicator shall indicate a completely moisture-free condition at time of final inspection. The vacuum pump shall run until the system indicates a maximum of 35 degrees FDB. The system shall be flushed with the operating refrigerant and the vacuum pump connected and rerun to repeat the evacuation. Evaluation shall be performed under supervision of the Engineer. 2.05 FREON AND OIL A. Contractor shall leave the refrigeration system with a full charge of freon and oil and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of freon and oil in the systems for a period of one year from date of acceptance. B. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system to a full charge of freon and oil at no cost to the Owner. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment and piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. A. All pipe joints and pipe fittings shall be properly cleaned prior to brazing. B. An inert gas purge (e.g. nitrogen) shall be used during brazing to prevent oxides, which can contaminate system. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 53 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 58 54 "DX" FAN COIL UNIT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on drawings. Carrier, York, Trane or McQuay shall be considered as equal, if they comply with the specification and schedule. Special Note: Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for air handling units. Units shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by Architect/Engineer. A. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor horsepower shown on the drawings. B. Units shall be factory fabricated, draw-thru type, and shall have fan section, cooling coil section, condensate drain pan, adjustable blower drive with motor on resilient mounted base, vee-belts with guard, filter section, and mixing box (if scheduled) assembled as integrated air handling units. C. REQUIREMENTS: 1. Mill-galvanized steel, rigidly framed, braced, and reinforced; access panels each side of unit; minimum panel ga. - 18; minimum weight formed framing member 14 ga. 2. Fan section, cooling coil section, and outlet frame throats shall be internally insulated at the factory with 1" thick, 3/4 PCF density, Neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with water-proof adhesive, having fire-retardant characteristics in accordance with NFPA 90A. 3. Drain pan shall be not lighter than 14 ga.; extend completely under the coil section and be all-galvanized,foam insulated pan with drain connections. DX" FAN COIL UNIT 23 58 54-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. When the fan coil unit is installed above an accessible ceiling, the unit shall incorporate a secondary drain pan. The secondary pan shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, 16 gauge minimum with cross breaking sloped towards a drain. The sides shall be a minimum 2" tall and the corners shall be soldered watertight. The top edge shall have a 1/4" hem to provide additional rigidity and the secondary pan shall be supported at a minimum of six points. The pan shall extend on all sides a minimum of 3" beyond the sides of the unit casing. Route the secondary drain piping to a conspicuous location or install a float switch at the low point in the secondary pan. The secondary pan should be sloped a minimum of 1/8" per foot and supported so that the unit is not in contact with the bottom of the secondary pan. 5. The fan section, including wheels, shafts, bearings, drive, etc., shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly, and the shaft shall not pass through the first critical speed, while accelerating from rest to operating speed. Submittal data shall state the first critical shaft speed. Shaft bearings shall be of vacuum de-gassed steel, and shall be selected for 200,000 hours average life. 6. Coil shall be as hereinafter specified. 2.02 COILS A. Cooling coils shall be cartridge type and, when mounted in air handling units, shall be removable from either end. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins and shall be designed for even distribution of air across the face of the coils; air shall not pass around coil frames: Coils shall have same end connection for DX or chilled water piping. B. DX refrigerant coils shall be counter-flow refrigerant to air, shall have inlet and outlet connections permanently marked shall have thermostatic expansion valves with adjustable super heat. C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on schedule. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. END OF SECTION DX" FAN COIL UNIT 23 58 54-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilators for indoor installation. B. Within this document,these units maybe referred to as Energy Recovery Ventilator(ERV) for brevity. 1.02 RELATED Drawing and general provisions of the contract, including General Requirements Division 01, Division 23, Division 23 Specifications Sections, and common work requirements for HVAC apply to work specified in this section. A. Section 23 09 00: Controls and Instrumentation B. Section 23 17 00: Motors and Motor Controllers C. Section 23 88 85:Air Filters D. Section 23 99 00:Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: For each type or model of Energy Recovery Ventilator, include the following: 1. Unit performance data for both Supply Air and Exhaust Air, with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Enthalpy plate performance data for both summer and winter operation. 3. Motor ratings and unit electrical characteristics. 4. Dimensioned drawings for each type of installation, showing isometric and plan views, to include location of attached ductwork and service clearance requirements. 5. Estimated gross weight of each installed unit. 6. Filter types, quantities, and sizes 7. Installation, Operating and Maintenance manual (IOM)for each model. B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery ventilators, include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Operation and maintenance data for air-to-air energy recovery ventilator 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilator with all appurtenant components or accessories from a single manufacturer. B. For the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of work under this section, use only thoroughly trained and experienced workers completely familiar with the items required and with the manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation. C. The ERV core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use,for a period of ten (10)years from the date of purchase.The balance-of-unit shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use,for a period of two (2) years from the date of installation. D. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of the core by Underwriters Laboratory (UL),verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA90A and NFPA 90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air intended for circulation through a duct system.The method of test shall be UL Standard 723. E. Certifications: 1. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be third party Certified by AHRI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published certifications shall confirm manufacturer's published performance for airflow, static pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air(OACF) and exhaust air leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently AHRI certified will not be accepted. OACF shall be no more than 1.02 and EATR shall be zero when application design criteria reduce static pressure differential to zero or less. 2. Entire unit shall be listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat Exchangers and comply with CSA Standard 22.2. F. Every unit to be factory tested prior to shipping: Motor Dielectric Voltage-Withstand Bench Test, Unit Dielectric Voltage-Withstand Test, Continuity of Internal Control Circuits Test, Unit Amperage Test 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of all building penetrations required for installation of each Energy Recovery Ventilator and associated electrical systems. B. Coordinate sequencing of construction for associated plumbing, HVAC, electrical supply. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved manufacturers: Renewaire, Greenheck, Lennox. Alternates may be considered under Division 1. B. Manufacturer should be in business for minimum 5 years manufacturing energy recovery ventilators. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilators shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of a fixed-plate cross-flow heat exchanger with no moving parts, an insulated single wall G90 galvanized 20-gauge steel cabinet, filter assemblies for both intake and exhaust air, enthalpy core, supply air blower assembly, exhaust air blower assembly and electrical control box with all specified components and internal accessories factory installed and tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection. Entire unit with the exception of field-installed components shall be assembled and test operated at the factory. 2.03 CABINET A. Materials: Formed single wall insulated metal cabinet,fabricated to permit access to internal components for maintenance. B. Outside casing: 20 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components that do not receive a painted finish. C. Access doors shall be hinged with airtight closed cell foam gaskets. Door pressure taps,with captive plugs, shall be provided for cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement. D. Cabinet Insulation: Case walls and doors shall be fully insulated with 1 inch, expanded polystyrene foam insulation faced with a cleanable foil face on all exposed surfaces. E. Enthalpy core: Energy recovery core shall be of the total enthalpy type, capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water vapor transfer from one airstream to the other,without exposing transfer media in succeeding cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air. No condensate drains shall be allowed.The energy recovery core shall be designed and constructed to permit cleaning and removal for servicing.The energy recovery core shall have a ten year warranty. Performance criteria are to be as specified in AHRI Standard 1060. F. Control center/connections: Energy Recovery Ventilator shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage power supply connections to the fused disconnect. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 G. Passive Frost Control:The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal operating conditions(defined as outside temperatures above-102F and inside relative humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function, performance or durability of the core. No condensate drains will be allowed. H. Motorized Isolation Damper(s): None included. 2.04 BLOWER SECTION A. Blower section construction, Supply Air and Exhaust Air: Blower assemblies consist of a 208- 230V]1 Phase 60 HZ, ECM motor, and a direct driven backward-curved blower. B. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower. 2.05 MOTORS A. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency.The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC) and shall be supplied with factory installed motor starters. 2.06 UNIT CONTROLS A. Fan control:Terminal strip for EC motors. B. Bypass economizer control: Differential enthalpy control, 2 position dampers with 100%airflow through the core or 100%airflow bypassing the core. C. Sensors: Dirty filter monitor for both airstreams. D. Timeclock: Digital Time Clock wall mount with up to 8 on/off cycles per day or 50 per week, 24VAC power, with battery backup protection of program settings against power failure to energize unit E. Carbon Dioxide: Adjustable control from 600 -2000 PPM for duct mounting with digital display F. Factory-installed microprocessor controller and sensors, ERV controls that: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" 2. Has factory-installed hardware and software to enable the building automation interface via BACnet to monitor, control, and display status and alarms 3. The microprocessor controller shall be capable of operating at temperatures between - 20F to 160F 4. The microprocessor controller shall be a DIN rail mounting type 5. Factory-installed microprocessor controller shall come with backlit display that allows menu-driven display for navigation and control of unit AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. The microprocessor controller shall have the ability to communicate with the BMS via Modbus RTU/TCP and BACnet MSTP/IP 7. The microprocessor controller shall have integrated ethernet interface and a web server for displaying unit parameters 8. The microprocessor shall have near field communication (NFC) capability for android devices 9. The microprocessor controller shall have an internal programmable time clock that will allow the user to add up to different occupancy schedules and add holidays 10. The microprocessor control shall be capable of integral diagnostics 11. The microprocessor control shall be capable of IP or SI unit display 12. The microprocessor controller shall have a battery powered clock 13. The microprocessor controller shall at a minimum offer the ability for three modes of determining occupancy: a dry contact,the internal time clock or the BMS 14. A remote user terminal to allow for remote monitoring and adjustment of parameters, allowing ease of control access without going outdoors or into the mechanical room if desired by the user 15. The microprocessor controller shall have at a minimum (10) universal inputs/outputs (AI, DI, AO) and have (6) six relay outputs (DO) 16. The microprocessor controller shall have an integrated fieldbus port 17. The microprocessor controller shall have the capability for 1/0 expansion 18. The microprocessor controller shall have a micro USB port to load the application program, the unit parameters, saving logs, etc. 19. The sensors that will be required for control are: a. (2)Temperature sensor for fresh air and exhaust air b. (2)Temperature and humidity sensor for outside air, return air c. (2) Differential pressure sensors for filter alarms d. (2) Differential pressure sensors for measuring pressure drop across energy recovery core and for determining airflow in both airstreams e. (2) Adjustable current switches 20. The microprocessor controller shall have the capability to monitor the unit conditions for alarm conditions. Upon detecting an alarm, the microprocessor controller shall have the capability to record the alarm description, time, date, available temperatures, and unit status for user review.A digital output shall be reserved for remote alarm indication. Alarms to be also communicated via BMS as applicable. Provide the following alarm functions: a. Outside air temperature sensor alarm b. Outside air humidity sensor alarm c. Return air temperature sensor alarm d. Return air humidity sensor alarm AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 e. Fresh air sensor alarm f. Exhaust air sensor alarm g. Dirty filter alarm h. Supply and exhaust air proving alarm i. Outside airflow sensor alarm j. Exhaust airflow sensor alarm k. Duct static pressure sensor alarm 21. Display the following on the face of microprocessor controller: a. Unit on b. Outdoor air temperature c. Outdoor air humidity d. Return air temperature e. Return air humidity f. Supply air temperature g. Airflows in both airstreams h. Unit on/off i. Fan on/off j. Damper status k. Alarm digital display 22. The microprocessor controller shall have factory pre-programmed multiple operating sequences for control of the ERV. Factory default settings shall be fully adjustable in the field. Available factory pre-programmed sequences on operations are: SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS DDC CONTROLLER: A. Controller with integral LCD readout for changing set points and monitoring unit operation. B. Provided with required sensors and programming. C. Factory programmed, mounted, and tested. D. Integral USB and Ethernet ports for updating programs and retrieving log files. BMS INTERFACE: A. BACnet IP GENERAL OPERATION POWER UP: A. When the unit main disconnect is closed a delay of 10 seconds (adjustable) occurs for the controller to come online. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 ERV UNIT START COMMAND: A. An input signal is required to enable the unit operation.The unit will be commanded on by: 1. Internal time clock B. All types of input that are enabled must be true before the unit will start. 1. The exhaust fan starts after a 3 second delay(adjustable). The exhaust fan will not start until the damper actuator end switch closes. 2. The supply fan starts after a 6 second delay(adjustable). The supply fan will not start until the damper actuator end switch closes. 3. The supply fan and exhaust fan are controlled based on the chosen unit operating modes and air conditions. ERV UNIT STOP COMMAND (OR DE-ENERGIZED): A. The unit can then be commanded off by: 1. Internal time clock B. Supply fan and exhaust fan are de-energized. C. All dampers are unpowered and spring return to their default position after a 10 second delay (adjustable). SUPPLY FAN OPERATION: A. The supply fan speed will be controlled fort 1. Supply air flow(CFM) B. The unit will attempt to start the supply fan when the supply fan delay timer expires. When the supply fan starts the supply fan adjustable current switch should close and remain closed until the fan is turned off. SUPPLY FAN STATUS: Once the supply fan current switch closes operation is allowed. After a delay of 90 seconds (adjustable)from supply fan start signal, if the supply fan current switch is still open the supply fan alarm should be set to true and operation shall be prohibited. The supply fan status shall be set to true only when the supply fan output is on and supply fan current switch is closed.The supply fan status shall be false in all other circumstances. SUPPLY AIR FLOW CONTROL OPTION: The controller will adjust the supply fan ECM command to maintain the supply air flow rate at a set point.The supply air flow rate set point is entered and adjusted from the unit controller display.The minimum and maximum values for supply air flow rate set point are unit dependent. An adjustable PI (proportional & integral) loop will compare the measured supply air flow to the air flow rate set point and adjust the fan speed. If the measured supply air flow rate varies from the desired air flow rate by more than 10% (adjustable)for more than 60 seconds AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (adjustable) a supply air flow rate alarm will be set to true.This supply fan operation mode can be used to provide a constant supply air flow rate as the unit filters become loaded. EXHAUST FAN OPERATION: A. [The exhaust fan speed will be controlled for:] 1. Exhaust air flow(CFM) B. The unit will attempt to start the exhaust fan when the exhaust fan delay timer expires. When the exhaust fan starts the exhaust fan adjustable current switch should close and remain closed until the fan is turned off. EXHAUST FAN STATUS: After a delay of 90 seconds (adjustable)from exhaust fan start signal, if exhaust fan current switch is still open the exhaust fan alarm should be set to true.The exhaust fan status shall be set to true only when the exhaust fan output is on and exhaust fan current switch is closed.The exhaust fan status shall be false in all other circumstances. EXHAUST AIR FLOW CONTROL OPTION: The controller will adjust the exhaust fan ECM command to maintain the exhaust air flow rate at a set point.The exhaust air flow rate set point is entered and adjusted from the unit controller display.The minimum and maximum values for the exhaust air flow rate set point are unit dependent.An adjustable PI (proportional & integral) loop will compare the measured exhaust air flow to the air flow rate set point and adjust the fan speed. If the measured exhaust air flow rate varies from the desired air flow rate by more than 10% (adjustable) for more than 60 seconds (adjustable) an exhaust air flow rate alarm will be set to true.This exhaust fan operation mode can be used to provide a constant exhaust air flow rate as the unit filters become loaded. CONSTANT TEMPERATURE OPTION: The controller will stage the heaters or adjust the 0 to 10 VDC analog output to the heating device to maintain the air temperature at a set point.The air temperature set point is entered and adjusted from the unit controller display [or provided by the BMS]. The minimum and maximum values for the air temperature set point are unit dependent and are adjustable.An adjustable PI (proportional & integral) loop will compare the measured air temperature to the air temperature set point and adjust the analog output. A digital output that indicates a call for heating will also be provided.The analog and digital output can be used to control a hot water valve, electric heater, gas heater, or heat pump. RESET AIR TEMPERATURE OPTION: The controller will adjust the 0 to 10 VDC analog output to the heating device to maintain the air temperature at a set point.The air temperature set point is calculated based on the outdoor air temperature.The air set point is adjusted between the 100 degree F maximum (adjustable) and AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 the 70 degree F minimum (adjustable) as the measured temperature varies from the 20 degree F minimum (adjustable)to the 70 degree F maximum (adjustable).These values are entered and adjusted from the unit controller display.An adjustable PI (proportional & integral) loop will compare the measured supply air temperature to the supply air temperature set point and adjust the 0 to 10 VDC analog output.A digital output that indicates a call for heating will also be provided.The analog and digital output can be used to control a hot water valve, electric heater, gas heater, or heat pump. Coil freeze protection must be provided by others in the field. 2.07 FILTER SECTION A. ERV shall have 2" thick MERV 8 disposable pleated filters located in the outdoor air and exhaust airstreams.All filters shall be accessible from the exterior of the unit. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to start of installation, examine area and conditions to verify correct location for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. See unit IOM. B. Examine roughing-in of plumbing, electrical and HVAC services to verify actual location and compliance with unit requirements. See unit IOM. C. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be accomplished in accordance with these written specifications, project drawings, manufacturer's installation instructions as documented in manufacturer's IOM, Best Practices and all applicable building codes. B. Install unit with clearances for service and maintenance. 3.03 CONNECTIONS ERV's are to be installed per manufacturers' guidelines and industry Best Practices shall be incorporated, and duct connections are to conform to use material,weight,thickness, gauge, construction, and installation methods as outlined in the SMACNA publications below, and Division 23 of this document, and are to be made subject to the installation requirements shown above. A. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition, 2005 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2nd Edition, 2012 C. HVAC Systems- Duct Design, 4th Edition, 2006 D. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standard, 2nd Edition, 2004 E. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 2nd Edition, 1999 F. Thermoplastic Duct(PVC) Construction Manual, 2nd Edition, 199S A. Electrical installation requirements are specified in Division 26 of this document. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation,to include electrical and piping connections. Report results to Architect/Engineer in writing. Inspection must include a complete startup checklist to include (as a minimum)the following: Completed Start-Up Checklists as found in manufacturer's IOM. Insert any other requirements here. 3.05 START-UP SERVICE A. Contractor to perform startup service. Clean entire unit, comb coil fins as necessary, and install clean filters. Measure and record electrical values for voltage and amperage. Refer to Division 23 "Testing,Adjusting and Balancing" and comply with provisions therein. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Contractor to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain the entire Make-Up Air unit. Refer to Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures and Demonstration and Training. END OF SECTION AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 72 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 86 00 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Centrifugal roof ventilators. B. Ceiling and inline ventilators. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500—Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 231700—Motors and Motor Controllers C. Section 232400—Sound and Vibration Control D. Section 239900—Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators." B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled. C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." F. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. G. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 2. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: a. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. b. Materials gages and finishes, include color charts. C. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. d. Full color paint samples. 3. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. 4. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 23 Section "Basic Materials and Methods", for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following:Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. b. Ceiling suspension members. C. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 5. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. 6. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 7. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 23 Section "Basic Materials and Methods". 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions. B. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions. D. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,with protective crating and covering. POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated,and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ACME, Inc. B. Loren Cook Company C. Greenheck Fan Corporation D. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished with indicated capacities and characteristics. B. Fans and Shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. C. Provide factory baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Color shall be verified during the submittal process. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Fan shall be a spun aluminum, centrifugal, roof mounted, direct driven or belt driven as indicated. B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. The discharge baffle conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in transit tested packaging. D. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA standard 204-96, balance quality and vibration levels for fans. E. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. F. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. G. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing,factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable%inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base,factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb base. 5. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, 12 inch high, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2 inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2 inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 2.04 CEILING AND INLINE VENTILATORS A. Ceiling and inline ventilators shall be direct drive or belt drive as indicated, centrifugal blower type. Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The housing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge corrosion resistant galvanized steel and acoustically insulated for quiet operation. Blower and motor assembly shall be easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork. The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a powder-painted white steel grille. B. Ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air and Sound Performance. Ventilator performance shall be based on tests and procedures performed POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Ventilators shall be UL listed and CSA certified. C. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Dampers: a. Aluminum backdraft damper. b. Motor-operated volume control damper. C. U.L. listed ceiling radiation damper for ceiling fans comply with NFPA Standard 90A rated for 3 hours. 2. Disconnect Switch: Fans less than one horsepower, provide nonfusible type with thermal overload protection. Fans greater than one horsepower, disconnect shall be provided by Division 26. 3. Speed Controls: Fan mounted,solid state speed controller. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION 23 86 00 POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 88 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ceiling air diffusers. B. Wall registers and grilles. C. Louvers. D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500—Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 238900—Metal Ductwork C. Section 239100—Ductwork Accessories D. Section 239900—Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ASHRAE 70"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.04 SUBMITTALS AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air distribution devices including the following: 1. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished; indicating construction,finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including aspiration ability,temperature and velocity traverses;throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air distribution devices, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data,including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air distribution devices in original cartons and protect from weather and construction worktraffic. Where possible,store indoors;when necessary to store outdoors,store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant the installation of the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or nonconforming workmanship. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Titus Company B. Price C. Nailor Industries D. Krueger AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air devices when shown of size, shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper air distribution. B. Provide air devices that have,as minimum,temperature and velocity traverses,throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be#26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied. D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system, and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems. E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screw driver slot or a concealed lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device. F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre-assembled with UL classified radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely assembled; one assembly per carton. Each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink wrap with installation instructions. 2.03 LOUVERS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's rain resistant Hurricane rated louvers where shown;of size,shape,capacity and type indicated;constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area,and maximum pressure drop of each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule. C. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate,and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate. D. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. Louvers shall meet IBC windstorm ratings for Hurricane force winds. E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company 2. Greenheck Company 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black. 3.02 See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices. 3.03 Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 23 88 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 88 85 AIR FILTERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTERS A. The filters shall be AAF Flanders Mini-Pleat Filters or approved equal. B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: The following manufacturers are approved subject to specification compliance. 1. AAF Flanders 2. American Air Filter. 3. Airguard Industries, Inc. 4. Cambridge. 2.02 LOW VELOCITY FILTER SECTION - MERV 8 FILTERS A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 24 inches X 24 inches with 2 inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be rated at 500 feet per minute. B. Filtering media shall be formed of non-woven reinforced cotton fabric type filtering media bonded to 96% open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the inclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Average efficiency shall be 25-30% on ASHRAE test standard 52.2. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.20 inches water gauge at 350 FPM face velocity. 2.03 LOW VELOCITY RIGID BOX FILTER SECTION - MERV 13 FILTERS AIR FILTERS 23 88 85-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 24 inches X 24 inches with 4 inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be rated at 500 feet per minute. B. Filtering media shall be formed of microglass paper with a water repellent binder type filtering media bonded to an open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the inclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Average efficiency shall be 85% at 0.5 microns on ASHRAE test standard 52.2. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.15 inches water gauge at 500 FPM face velocity. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install differential pressure switch to activate "Filter Dirty" light when pressure difference across filters reaches 0.5 inch W.G. (adjustable). Locate "filter dirty" lights in mechanical rooms with identifying label B. Install and relocate filters in the mechanical or the storage room in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Refer to Section 230500 for additional filter information. END OF SECTION 23 88 85 AIR FILTERS 23 88 85-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 89 00 METAL DUCTWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ductwork. B. Medium and high pressure ductwork. C. Casings. D. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500- Basic Material and Methods. B. Section 231400-Supports and Anchors. C. Section 232900- Duct Insulation. D. Section 239100- Ductwork Accessories. E. Section 238810-Air Distribution Devices. F. Section 239900-Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with latest SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems", and NFPA 96 Standard. 4. IECC 2015: Comply with the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. 1.04 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, duct fabrication standards and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are to be used only for design intent.The contractor shall prepare sheet metal shop drawings, fully detailed and drawn to scale, indicating all structural conditions, all plumbing pipe and light fixture coordination, and all offsets and transitions as required to permit the duct to fit in the space allocated and built. All duct revisions required as a result of the contractor not preparing fully detailed shop drawings will be performed at no additional cost. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain indicated clear size inside lining. Where offsets or transitions are required, the duct shall be the equivalent size based on constant friction rate. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: % inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 1,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 1,500 fpm, and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm. Low pressure ductwork shall be defined as all return, exhaust, and outside air ducts associated with constant volume air handling units with a scheduled external static pressure of less than 1.5", and all supply ductwork downstream of terminal units in variable volume systems. C. Medium Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 3 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm but less than 3,000 fpm, 4 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 3,000 fpm but less than 4,000 fpm, and 6 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 4,000 fpm. Medium METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 pressure ductwork shall be defined as all supply ducts extending from variable volume air handling units to terminal units in variable volume systems with air handling units having a scheduled external static pressure of less than 4". The supply ductwork of constant volume air handling units having scheduled external static pressure greater than 2" and less than 4" shall be rated for medium pressure. D. High Pressure: 10 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 6,000 fpm. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings, use sheet metal end caps on any lined duct exposed to the weather and use 3 mil vinyl wrap with duct tape on end pieces where stored inside. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal.: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A167; Type 316; with No.4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003,Temper H14. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Non combustible and conforming to UL 181, Class 1 air duct materials. METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Flexible Ducts: Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 8M or approved equal, corrosive resistant galvanized steel formed and mechanically locked to inner fabric with factory wrapped insulation blanket with aluminum vapor barrier and an R-6 thermal conductance. Flexible duct shall have reinforced metalized outer jacket comply with UL 181, Class 1 air duct. Equivalent manufactures are Thermaflex. C. Sealants: Hard-Cast "iron grip" or approved equal, non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive and shall not be a solvent curing product. Sealants shall be compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic. D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials. 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials. 2.03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with latest SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by approved shop drawings. Obtain engineer's approval prior to using round duct in lieu of rectangular duct. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct sizes 6 inch smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.04 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1% times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil- turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Weld in place. C. Transform duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence and 30 degrees convergence. D. Fabricate continuously welded medium and high pressure round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.05 CASINGS A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and construct for operating pressures indicated. B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. C. Reinforce doorframes with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Provide clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 X 6 inch size. D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cubic foot minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of ductwork at beginning of installation. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with four feet maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum, 4 feet minimum, length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. G. The interior surface of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or anything else may project into the ducts for any reason, except as specified to be so. All seams and joints shall be external. H. All ductwork located exposed on roof shall be "crowned" to prevent water from ponding. Ref: Insulation for additional requirements. I. Where ducts pass through floors, provide structural angles for duct support. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable sheet metal escutcheons as closers. J. All angles shall be carried around all four sides of the duct or group of ducts. Angles shall overlap corners and be welded or riveted. K. All ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Determine the minimum length of flexible duct needed for each connection. Excess flex causing tight bends and increased pressure drops are not acceptable. Do not exceed 6'- 0" extended length. B. Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's, "HVAC Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Cut outer vapor barrier and insulation. Fold back insulation and outer vapor barrier to expose inner core. Using sheet metal snips, cut the inner core. D. Connect the inner core to the tap or collar by pulling it a minimum of 1" over the collar. E. Where collars are less than 1" in length, i.e. diffusers, connect a separate collar to the existing collar and proceed as described in 3.02.0 above. F. Wrap the core twice with UL181 Tape over the collar. Secure the connection by placing a clamp over the tap or collar, UL listed Panduit clamps for collars with beads and Stainless Steel clamps for collars without beads are acceptable. G. Roll the insulation and vapor barrier back over the collar or tap as described in 3.02.0 above and wrap twice with UL181 Tape. H. Secure the outer vapor barrier with a clamp as described in 3.02.F above if desired. I. For Medium to High Pressure applications, use duct sealer for 3.02.F and 3.02.G in lieu of UL181 Tape. J. Flexible duct shall be hung with proper support to minimize sagging and snaking between supports. Maximum of 4'-0" between supports. Hanger material will be a minimum of 1 1/2" wide. K. Supports will be used before all vertical 90° bends to prevent sagging and ensure a 1.5 center line turn radius of flexible duct. 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIT CASINGS A. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. 3.04 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Steel Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel Outside Air Intake Steel METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Combustion Air Steel 3.05 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All ductwork shall be properly suspended or supported from the building structure. Hangers shall be galvanized steel straps or hot-dipped galvanized rod with threads pointed after installation. Strap hanger shall be attached to the bottom of the ductwork, provide a minimum of two screws one at the bottom and one in the side of each strap on metal ductwork. The spacing, size and installation of hangers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the latest SMACNA edition. B. All duct risers shall be supported by angles or channels secured to the sides of the ducts at each floor with sheet metal screws or rivets. The floor supports may also be secured to ducts by rods, angles or flat bar to the duct joint or reinforcing. Structural steel supports for duct risers shall be provided under this Division. 3.06 DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS A. Seal all non-welded duct joints and seams with duct sealant as indicated. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections in metallic and non-metallic ducts shall be constructed as per specified in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections shall be sealed in accordance with the International Energy Conservation Code 2018 edition. END OF SECTION 23 89 00 METAL DUCTWORK 23 89 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 9100 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Round Duct Taps. C. Fire dampers. D. Combination fire and smoke dampers. E. Back draft dampers. F. Air turning devices. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Duct access doors. I. Duct test holes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. B. Section 238900—Metal Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A- Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA- Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300, for fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches. C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/2 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint, action flanged bushing, with set screw. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 24 inch. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. 1. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 2. On outside air, return air, and all other dampers required to be low leakage type, provide galvanized blades and frames, seven inches wide maximum, with replaceable vinyl, EPDM, silicone rubber seals on blade edges and stainless steel side seals. Provide blades in a double sheet corrugated type construction for extra strength. Provide hat channel shape frames for strength and blade linkage enclosure to keep linkage out of the air stream. Construction leakage not to exceed 1/2%, based on 2,000 fpm and 4 inch static pressure. F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 2.02 ROUND DUCT TAPS DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Taps to trunk duct for round flexible duct shall be spin-in fitting with locking quadrant butterfly damper, model no. FLD-1303 by Flexmaster or approved equal. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. Louvers and Dampers Inc. C. Ruskin. D. Nailor Industries. 2.04 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Provide curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream. C. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers per U.L. with 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. D. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.05 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL555 and UL 555S, and as indicated. B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft. C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. 1. Operators shall be spring return electric type suitable to operate on 120 V AC, 60 cycle. 2. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. See smoke dampers for details and accessories to be included 2.06 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. B. Motorized Smoke Dampers: normally open with power on, close automatically when power is interrupted, UL-listed and labeled damper and damper operator. Unit shall close upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally. C. Electro thermal Link: Fusible link which melts when subject to local heat of 165 degrees F and from external electrical impulse; UL listed and labeled. D. Each smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with end position indicators for remote indication of damper blade position. E. Furnish each smoke damper with a duct mounted smoke detector and sensing tube for proper operation of smoke damper. Duct smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectronic type. Sensing tube shall run the entire width of the duct and comply with manufactures instructions. Smoke detector and sensing tube shall be furnished and factory installed by the damper manufacture. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent. C. Louvers and Dampers Inc. D. Ruskin. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.08 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 varying differential static pressure. 2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Young Regulator. B. Titus. C. Tuttle and Bailey. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.10 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. On duct sizes less than 12 x 12, multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator. 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Metaledge. B. Ventglass. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Greenheck B. Ruskin. C. Titus. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.14 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. Insulation shall be replaceable without field cutting or patching. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.15 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Balancing Dampers 1. Provide at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 2. All regulators mounted on externally insulated ductwork shall have 16 gauge elevated platforms at least 1/8 inch higher than the thickness of the insulation. Damper shaft shall have Ventlock No. 607 bearing mounted on ductwork within elevated platform. If duct is inaccessible the operating handle shall be extended and the regulator installed on the face of the wall or ceiling. Where regulators DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 are exposed in finished parts of the building, they shall be flush type, Ventlock No. 666. All regulators shall be manufactured by Ventlock, or approved equal. 3. All dampers in lined ductwork shall have bushing to prevent damper damage to liner. 4. Provide cable extensions with adjustable regulators and cover plate for dampers located in locations not accessible such as behind sheetrock ceilings. Regulators shall be equivalent to Young's Regulator. C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Provide back draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. F. Provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Provide at least one inch slack at all flexible duct connections. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION 23 9100 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 9100-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 23 99 00 TESTING, ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the contract and general requirements in Division 1 apply to work specified in all section of Division 23. B. All Division 23 specification sections, drawings, and general provisions of the contract apply to work of this section, as do other documents referred to this section. C. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. D. Requirements for submittals, shop drawings, and substitutions, Division 1, Section 013000 and 016000, apply to work specified in all sections of Division 23. E. The basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. The publications listed below from a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL(AABC) (2002) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems NATIONAL EVROMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) (1998) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems (1994) Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration B. TAB shall be preformed in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e.,AABC or NEBB procedural standards, unless otherwise specifies herein.All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB standard shall be considered mandatory.The provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc. Shall, as nearly as practical, be used to TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 satisfy the Contract requirements.The TAB standard shall be used for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications,for the TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard,the manufacture's recommendations shall be adhered to.All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB standard TAB procedures shall be developed by the TAB Specialist.Where new procedures, requirements, etc. applicable to the Contact requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC or NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory. C. The TAB contractor shall submit all questions regarding interpretations and questions regarding these standards in writing or as required by documents to the A/E team who shall provide formal reply in ka reasonable time. Decisions of the A/E team shall be final. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND SIMILAR TERMS A. In some instances,terminology differs between the Contract TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this section is to use the industry standards specified, along with the additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent the corresponding AABC or NEBB where differences. CONTRACT TERM AABC TERM NEBB TERM TAB Standard National Standard Procedural Standards Testing and Balancing for Testing Adjusting Heating, Ventilating, and Environmental System Air Conditioning System TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor System Readiness Construction Phase Field Readiness Check Inspection Check& Preliminary Field Procedures 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an independent, impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB, and is not a part or subsidiary of any other project contractor or subcontractor,to include, but not limited to General Contractor, and Mechanical; Contractor.The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of qualified Professional Engineer employed as a full time employee of TAB firm. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. The TAB agency shall be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications. C. QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PERSONAL: Submit evidence to show that the people who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personal be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer's opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing. D. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of specified herein. If,for any reason,the firm losses subject certification during this period,the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency's applicable Performance Guaranty,then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB firm for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner,Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives.Any firm that has been the subject to disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems including TAB.All work specified in this section and in other related sections to be performed by the TAB firm shall be considered invalid if the TAB firm losses its certification prior to contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representative.The TAB firm shall have an occupied office within 100 miles of the project site. E. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM PERSONAL: 1. A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the State the work is performed, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm. 2. The TAB Specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the firm certified by NEBB.The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason the Specialist losses subject certification during this period,the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency's applicable Performance Guaranty,then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner,Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible performed any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this section and other related sections to be performed TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 by the TAB Specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist losses certification prior to the contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to the Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. 3. Personal used on the job site shall be either Professional Engineers or technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of work for that specified project. 4. Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personal who actually balanced the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) shall be required. F. ACCEPTABLE TAB FIRMS SHALL INCLUDE: 1. PHI Service Agency (210-224-1665) 2. Unity Technical Building Services (833-882-7822) 3. Testing Specialties (210-492-8885) 4. TCx Synergy(361-960-3475) 1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor will contract with a professional TAB firm under the provisions of paragraph 1.04 of this section. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the data on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices.The Contactor and the various subcontractors of the equipment installed shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor ad material required to eliminate deficiencies or poor performance. D. The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and tools required in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC systems, as described in these specifications or shown on accompanying drawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance, taking specified measurements, recording and reporting the results.The items requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing include the following(as applicable to contract drawings): AIR SYSTEMS Air Handling Units TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Exhaust Fans Diffusers, Registers, &Grilles Coils (Air Temperature) Energy Recovery Ventilator PLUMBING SYSTEMS Recirc Pumps Mixing Valves Circuit Setters 1.06 SUBMITTALS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The name of the selected AABC or NEBB certified firm shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 30 days after contract award. B. Within 30 days after the award of contract,the TAB firm shall submit for approval an organizational chart and proof of current certification which shall identify all AABC or NEBB certified Supervisors or Specialist.The TAB firm shall submit a company resumes listing personal and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing.TAB firm will also provide information showing successful completion for three similar scope projects for which the firm is being contracted. C. Within 30 days after the award of contract,the TAB firm will submit for approval the name of the TAB Specialist and/or Professional Engineer, who will have direct supervision of all TAB related labor through completion of project. D. Within 30 days after the award of contract the TAB firm shall submit TAB procedures and agenda proposed to be used. E. Within 30 days after the award of contract, but prior to TAB field measurements,the TAB firm shall submit sample report forms, sample report forms, which shall include minimum data required by either the AABC or NEBB National Standards. F. Within 15 days of notification of approval of TAB firm and TAB Specialist by engineer,TAB firm shall conduct a Design Review of contract drawings and submit a Design Review report. G. Proposed date and time for execution of Systems Readiness Inspection shall be submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection.A copy of the Systems Readiness Inspection Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard. H. Proposed date and time to begin field measurements, making adjusting, ext.,for the TAB report, shall be submitted with the Systems Readiness Inspection Report. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 I. Six (6) copies of the completed TAB Report shall be submitted for approval no later than 7 days after the execution of TAB. All copies of TAB Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard. J. Proposed date and time to begin TAB Completion Verification, shall be submitted with the TAB Report. Six(6) copies of TAB Completion Verification Report shall be submitted no later than 7 days after execution of TAB verification. K. Proposed date and time for execution of Opposite Season Inspection shall be submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection. 1.07 INSTRUMENTATION A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated.TAB firm shall submit list of all instruments,to include gauges,thermometers, flow measuring hoods, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. The list will indicate name of equipment,function, model number, serial number, date of the last calibration, and date calibration is due.TAB firm shall submit copies of calibration certificates for all test instruments used showing all devices were properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. All instruments will be within one year of calibration for duration of the project. If duration of project exceeds the tenure of instrument calibration,then said instrument must be recalibrated, and copy of calibration certificate sent to Engineer, before the instrument is placed into continued use. 1.08 TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. It is the intent of this specification section to provide for a completely tested, adjusted, and balanced (TAB) installation without overlaps or omissions between the installing contractor and the TAB contractor.The installing contractors are those who perform the installation of this work and make all preparations for the TAB contractor who performs the testing, adjusting, and balancing described herein. B. The contactor Manager or General Contractor performing the General construction work shall coordinate the work of the contractors performing the Mechanical, Electrical, Automatic Temperature Control, and TAB work to provide complete properly tested, adjusted, and balanced systems.The Construction Manager or General Manager shall require and provide a start-up report for each piece of equipment furnished. C. The contractor performing the HVAC work shall coordinate all Mechanical work, including Sheet Metal work and Automatic Temperature Controls, to provide a complete, properly tested adjusted and balanced system throughout. He shall furnish progress reports regarding this phase of the work on a regular basis as directed.At such time as the systems are started up,the Contractor performing the Mechanical work shall provide TAB Contractor with documentation that the duct systems have been tested to the satisfaction TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 of the Duct Leak Test Specifications.The Mechanical Contractor shall insure that all comments are installed and operating, and the major components such as fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, and the like are capable of producing the scheduled capacity requirements.The requirement does not relieve the Mechanical Contractor of any other requirements specified elsewhere. Should any of these components or systems not be capable of producing these requirements, he shall make corrections within the limits of his responsibility or as otherwise authorized and shall certify in writing that the systems are ready for final testing and balancing by the Tab contractor. D. The contractor performing the Electrical work shall work coordinate all electrical work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is electrically operable, including the check for proper rotation of equipment. E. The Contractor performing the Automatic Temperature Controls work shall coordinate all controls work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is operational from an Automatic Temperature Controls standpoint.This contractor shall also provide to TAB contractor all necessary submittal information, software, and/or personal complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems. F. The TAB contractor shall from the award of contract, begin preparation. PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The drawing and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, provide access as requested by the TAB firm. B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Construction Manager that such a condition exists. C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance of new work as required by TAB firm, at no additional cost to owner. D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced, to determine, whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves,thermometers,gauges, pressure in the duct systems, TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item. E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts to each air handling unit has individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified, operate the systems at no expense for the Owner at the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period. H. Project Contract completion schedules shall allow time for allowance to permit the successful completion of TAB services to Owner's final inspection and expectance. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, window, ceilings, installed and penetrations complete, to obtain project operating conditions. 2. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply, return, and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified. b. Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air, return and relief shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. C. Supply return, exhaust and transfer grilles, registers and diffusers. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils,filter sections, access doors, ect., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. e. Fans (supply and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating ; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings. f. Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes. 3. WATER CIRCLULATING SYSTEMS a. Position valves pertinent to system design and require operation to permit full flow of water through system components. Operate systems under full flow conditions until circulating water is clean. Remove and clean strainers as required during this cycle of operation. b. Record each pump motor amperage and voltage. Readings shall not exceed nameplate rating. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Verify, on new equipment, electrical starter overload heater elements to be of proper size and rating. d. Ensure that water circulating systems shall be full of water and free of air; expansion tanks set for proper water level, and air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. Advise Owner of deficiencies. e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements. 4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS a. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets,fire and freeze stats. b. Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory pre-calibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable. C. The temperature shall be regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Owner of deficiencies or malfunctions. 3.02 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract. The re-inspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete. B. Upon completion of the installation and start—up of the mechanical equipment,to check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Owner complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems. C. Measurements and recorded readings of air,water and electricity that appear in the TAB reports will be done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to effect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings.At time of opposite season check-out,the Owner's representative will be notified before readings and adjustments are made. E. In fan systems,the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees with each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary,without cost to the Owner,to attain the specified air volumes. F. The various existing water circulating systems shall be cleaned, filled, purged, of air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing. 3.03 PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made the TAB will furnish the Owner the following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer. 1. Summary of main supply, return and exhaust duct pilot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan exhaust fan,filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems included in the retrofit Work.These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available, S. Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors.The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 6. The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used,final velocity reading obtained,temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items.The test results will be recorded on standard forms. 7. A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation. The final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personal. 3.03 BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A. GENERAL 1. Place all equipment into full operation, and shall continue the operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during OFF-Peak cooling seasons Balancing Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that time. 2. The contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After the approval by the Architect, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system.All Work shall be done under the supervision of Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1%of scale and maintained in good working order. 3. Upon completion of the balancing and testing,the Balancing Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Architect for evaluation 4. The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c. Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature in each conditioned space room or area. d. Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage readings at each fan. B. AIR SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check fan rotation. 2. Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4. Test and record motor full load amperes. 5. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 6. Test and adjust system for design cfm, return air and outside air(+2%). Change out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8. Test and record leaving air temperature, db and wb 9. Adjust all zones to design cfm (+2%). 10. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5%of design. C. WATER SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check pump operation 2. Check operation of all mixing valves. 3. Test water flow rate at all pumps. Adjust balancing valves as required. 4. Record water temperature entering and leaving the pump and water heater. 5. Record pump suction and discharge pressures. D. DX SYSTEMS: 1. Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2. Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3. Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of operation or drawing schedule. E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated and all thermostats and dampers, adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to approval of the Architect. F. The Air Balance Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 END OF SECTION 23 99 00 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 01 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall execute all work as hereinafter specified, as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide complete and functioning systems. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. 1.02 LAWS AND ORDINANCES: A. All work and materials shall conform to the requirements of the federal, state, and local laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the jobsite. The installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The Contractor at no increase in contract price shall make all modifications to the work, which may be required by an authority having legal jurisdiction over the work. 1.03 LICENSES, FEES AND PERMITS: A. The Contractor shall have a Master Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. Additionally, and at all times while work is being performed, for every five or less craftsman working on the project site, at least one craftsman shall have a Journeyman Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. A city electrical construction permit will be required for this project. 1.04 THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. The drawings and specifications shall be interpreted together, and any and all work included in either, though not in both, shall be part of the contracted work. The drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the project and existing job site conditions will permit. Any changes due to equipment supplied, conflict with the work of other trades or to make this work conform to the National Electrical Code shall be made by the Contractor at no increase in contract price. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Before submitting his bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all existing conditions and his bid shall be based on accepting conditions as they exist. 1.06 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such materials and equipment. Where two or more units of the same item are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall unload and properly store all electrical materials and equipment delivered to the jobsite. 1.07 UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE: A. The Contractor shall make arrangements for connection with the electrical utility company that will serve the jobsite and shall comply with all the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility company. The Contractor shall examine the site, confer with the utility company and verify the requirements for connections prior to bidding the work. The Contractor shall verify with the utility company the exact location of service tie-in points, cable routes, etc. Failure of the Contractor to contact the utility company and obtain such information prior to bidding the work shall not be considered as a basis for additional compensation. Where outages to existing electrical service are required, the Contractor shall coordinate the timing and duration of such outages with Owner's representative. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a meter enclosure for the utility company meter. The enclosure and installation shall be in accordance with utility company requirements. 1.08 SAFETY: A. It shall be the responsibility of the electrical Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions required by local, state, and federal laws, including OSHA. 1.09 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals for Approval: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 013000 except as otherwise stated herein. 2. Within 30 calendar days after award of contract, the Contractor shall furnish seven (7) sets of drawings and data as described herein for Engineer approval. No item of equipment or material shall be ordered ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 or shipped to the job site until the Engineer has given written approval of the submittal data. 3. The submittal data shall be bound in a 3-ring binder with dividers. The binder shall include a cover and a table of contents with the contractors name as well as the name of the project. All data shall be divided by specification section. 4. The submittal data for each item shall include descriptive literature, performance data, shop drawings technical literature and any other necessary data to readily identify that the equipment will meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. 5. One complete submittal of drawings and data shall be made for all required items. Partial or incomplete submittals will be returned without comment. All copies furnished shall be manufacturer's original copies of good quality, legible photocopies or blue line prints. Copies transmitted by facsimile machine are not acceptable. 6. Submittal documents shall be job specific. Where manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog sheets are provided, they shall be marked to show specifically what is being furnished. Drawings shall be marked to show Owner's name, plant location, project description and equipment designation. 7. Substitutions for specified products shall be in compliance with Paragraph 1.10. 8. The Contractor shall review all manufacturers' submittals for completeness, accuracy and compliance with project specifications before submitting to Engineer. 9. The Engineer will review the complete submittal package and return five (5) sets to the Contractor with individual items marked in one of the following three forms: Reviewed as submitted Reviewed with comments Disapproved Items that are disapproved shall be corrected as required and shall be resubmitted to the Engineer for approval. B. Approval of submittals, etc. shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from further responsibility, but rather as a means to coordinate the work and to aid in the proper selection and installation of the materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of the project. C. Submittal of Record Data: 1. Record Data: Provide seven (7) sets of record data books containing information listed below. The material shall be bound into appropriately sized 3 ring binders, organized with dividers and index sheets. The ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 binders shall be appropriately labeled with the Owner's name, project name and location. The data books shall include: a. Certified as-built shop drawings for all fabricated equipment. b. Approved product data for all items required in Paragraph 1.09A. c. Spare parts lists d. Test records. 2. Record Drawings: Provide one (1) set of project drawings marked neatly and legibly in colored pencil to show any significant deviation between actual conditions and original design layout. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide seven (7) sets of manufacturer's operation and maintenance data on equipment and components. The data shall be organized into loose-leaf binders with dividers and master index. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Requirements for Substitutions: It is the intention of the drawings and specifications to establish a definite standard when a particular manufacturer's product is mentioned. Written request for substitutions of equivalent products will be considered provided all the following conditions are met. Substitutions for specified products will not be permitted unless all of the following conditions are met: 1. Written request shall be received in the Engineer's office ten (10) days prior to the day of bid opening. Requests after ten days prior to the day of bid opening will not be considered. 2. Request shall include complete technical data, i.e. product data sheets, curve, ratings, etc. 3. Request shall include a complete written comparison of differences and similarities between the proposed and specified product. Provide a written comparison for each substitution being requested. 4. Space and clearance requirements are adequate for products mentioned. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify space and clearance requirements for products proposed for substitution. 5. If modifications to the drawings and specifications are necessary for the proper installation of a product proposed for substitution, the request shall explain such in detail, accompanied by drawings if necessary. B. Approval: If the above has been complied with, and in the Engineer's opinion the product proposed for substitution is equivalent to that mentioned, the product will be approved for substitution and all prospective bidders will be so notified. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.11 PROTECTION: A. All new work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent damage or breakage, either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters, cribbing of any apparatus above floor construction and covering of apparatus in incomplete buildings with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Temporary electric heaters shall be installed to keep apparatus dry. All rotating equipment and/or machinery shall be properly lubricated and rotated on a regular basis. All electrical materials and equipment damaged during handling, storage, and installation, until the Owner has accepted the project, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor with no increase in contract price. 1.12 COORDINATION: A. The Contractor shall not hinder and/or delay any work being accomplished by other construction companies at or near the general construction site; nor shall the Contractor impede normal operation of the Owner at any time except as otherwise indicated. 1.13 WORKMANSHIP: A. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their particular trades. All installations shall be complete in both effectiveness and appearance whether finally enclosed or left exposed. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal or replacement of any item which, in his opinion, does not present a reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance, providing that same can be properly installed in an orderly way by usual methods for such work. All specialties and appurtenances shall be installed to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise specified. 1.14 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS: A. This Contractor shall make electrical connections to equipment installed by other trades. The mechanical contractor shall install all motor driven equipment and motors furnished under this contract. 1. The Contractor shall verify the electrical requirements of equipment and appliances furnished by others with data provided by the successful vendor or vendors. The Contractor shall provide the proper sized circuits, circuit breakers, starters, disconnect switches, receptacles, etc. as required to connect this equipment. If changes are required to electrical systems shown on the drawings, the ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Contractor shall make these changes at no additional cost to Owner. 1.15 CUTTING AND REPAIRING: A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to eliminate cutting of the construction except as specified. Where it becomes necessary to cut through the construction to permit the installation of work or the repair of defective work, it shall be done by mechanics skilled in the trade of erecting the type of work involved. The Contractor without additional compensation shall pay the cost of cutting and repairing. No cutting shall be done to any structural members unless the Engineer grants specific permission, in writing. 1.16 SLEEVES, INSERTS, SUPPORTS, ANCHOR BOLTS, FLASHING AND FOUNDATIONS: A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, supports, anchor bolts, flashing, counter flashing and foundations required for the proper installation of the proposed work. 1.17 CLEANING: A. All debris resulting from the construction shall be removed from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, unused materials and equipment shall be removed from the project site. All visible labels, dirt overspray, paint, grease, and stains shall be removed from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approval or giving parts numbers shall be left in place. 1.18 TESTING: A. The Contractor shall test the entire wiring system for proper voltage level and balance, and for short circuits and grounds in accordance with established methods upon completion of work. The system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. This Contractor shall make all corrections to accomplish such. 1.19 INSPECTIONS: A. The Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance to the Engineer or the Engineer's Inspector in making periodic and final inspections of the work. This assistance shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the furnishing of labor, tools, etc. to operate equipment and demonstrate its proper functioning. Also included shall be the removal of outlet,junction box and panel covers, etc. as necessary for the Engineer to inspect the work. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.20 GUARANTEE: A. Any defects from imperfect or improper materials or faults arising from improper workmanship that may appear within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of the system shall be amended and made good by the Contractor at his own cost. Any defects or faults shall be attended to within ten (10) days after receiving written notice from the Engineer. Failure to promptly attend to said defects or faults shall be sufficient cause for the Owner to correct the problem with the Owner's forces or the forces of others and invoice the Contractor for any and all charges, including management and overhead, related to correcting said problem. END OF SECTION 26 01 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the lighting system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner or shall be performed by the installing contractor if the owner has not hired a commissioning firm.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional—ASHRAE 5. BSC—Building System Commissioning Certification—NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as relate to Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 7. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 8. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre- Functional Checklists has been completed. 9. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures,and Pre- Functional Checklists. 10. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 11. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 12. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Commissioning authority. 13. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 14. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 15. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 16. Proprietarytest equipment required by the manufacturer,whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 17. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 18. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process.This information shall be routed through Architect. 19. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 20. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 21. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority's comments. 22. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents.All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub-Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning Agent proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems,according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority. C. Electrical contractor shall provide a letter certifying the installed lighting controls meet COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 documented performance criteria specified in the commissioning plan within 90 days of substantial completion. 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: a. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. b. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. C. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. d. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. e. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. f. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. g. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Electrical System Equipment to be tested a. Occupancy sensors. b. Time switch controls C. Daylighting controls. C. Testing functions and conditions COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Daylighting control devices a. Verify the devices have been calibrated, properly located and adjusted. b. Loads adjust to light level set points in response to daylight. c. Location of calibration equipment is accessible to authorized personnel only. b. Time switches a. Verify schedule,time, date and programming is accurate. b. Verify override time limit is set, battery is installed and switch operates the lights that are specified in the design documents. c. All specified lights can be turned on and off by area control switch. d. Manual override switch allows only the lights in the space where the switch is located turn on or remain on until next scheduled shut off. C. Occupant sensors: a. Certify the sensor has been located and aimed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. For projects with fewer than seven sensors, each sensor shall be tested. c. Fore projects with more than seven occupant sensors,testing shall be done for each unique combination of sensor type and space geometry. Where multiples of each combination are provided not less than 10 percent shall be tested. d. Verify correct operation of status indicators. e. Controlled lights turn off or down to the permitted level with in the required time. f. For auto-on sensor,the lights turn-on to the permitted level when an occupant enters space. g. Verify the lights are not incorrectly turned-on by movement in adjacent areas or by HVAC operation. D. Performance criteria a. Daylighting controls shall maintain specified light levels within 5% of design. b. All time switches shall be accurate to time on cellular network devices. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part, to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations& Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training, and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING A Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start-up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub-systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist Commissioning Agent with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning Agent for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of their systems. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned, to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC) A Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements, for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. C. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. B. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A The following requirements are in addition to Operations&Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible fortraining coordination and scheduling,and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning Agent shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning Agent with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations&Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review. Commissioning authority's copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include,service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: a. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 03 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 06 00 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Solid grounding of electrical systems, equipment, machine frames, enclosures, appliances and structures. 2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. 3. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft. 3. B33 Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code 2. 78 Lightning Protection Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 467 UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for grounding conductors, ground rods, clamps, connectors, wells and insulating materials. GROUNDING 26 06 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: A. Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. C. Test Reports 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this Section shall be listed or labeled by UL. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Provide components and installation as required by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, Article 250. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Provide products in quantities, sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC or the design drawings, whichever requirements are more stringent. B. Conductor Materials: Copper C. Connector Materials: Copper or bronze, tin-plated where required for corrosion resistance. 2.02 CONDUCTORS: A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, 600 volt TW, THW or THWN insulation. Size per NEC 250. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8 except that conductor sizes Nos. 12 and 10 AWG used in lighting and receptacle branch circuits may be solid conductor. All conductors shall have 600 volt, TW, THW or THWN insulation. C. Grounding Grid Conductor: Medium hard drawn bare copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, No. 2/0 AWG or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. GROUNDING 26 06 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Color Code: Insulation color shall be green, except that sizes No. 2 AWG and larger may be black with green colored tape spirally applied over all visible surfaces within enclosures. 2.03 WIRE CONNECTORS: A. Terminal Lugs: Copper alloy, tin-plated, compression type, Burndy type, YA, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 6 through No. 1/0 AWG. Burndy type YGHA, NEMA 2 hole pad for sizes No. 2/0 AWG and larger. B. Split Bolt Connectors: Burndy SERVIT, type KS C. Taps and Splices: 1. Grounding Grid below Grade: Exothermic type (Cadweld) or compression type (Burndy Hyground). 2. Above Grade: Compression type. 2.04 CONDUIT CONNECTORS: A. Conduit Clamps: Burndy type GAR or GD. B. Grounding Bushings: 0-Z/GEDNEY 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A. Ground Rods: 1/4 inch diameter, 10 feet long, copper clad steel with high strength sheath, molten welded to core. B. Rod Connectors: 1. Exothermic type: Cadweld 2. Mechanical type: Burndy type GAR or GD C. Test Wells: (Not Required) 2.06 INSULATING MATERIALS: A. Tape: Scotch 33+ vinyl plastic. B. Mastic Pads: Scotch EZ— Seal PART 3 EXECUTION GROUNDING 26 06 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide grounding of systems, equipment and structures in accordance with NEC Article 250, the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and the design drawings. B: Service Entrance: 1. Not applicable. B. Building Steel and Piping: 1. Not applicable. E. Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide a green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuits and feeder conduits. Size conductor in accordance with NEC 250 unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to panelboard or switchgear ground bus and to all metallic raceways, outlet boxes, lighting fixtures, equipment enclosures, appliances and motor frames. 3. Where metallic raceways are installed, both the raceway and the internal equipment grounding conductor shall be utilized for equipment grounding. F. Grounding Grid: 1. Not applicable G. Conduit: 1. Provide grounding bushings where metallic conduits connect to non-metallic enclosures or stub-up into open-bottom, floor-mounted enclosures. 2. Provide conduit grounding clamps where metallic conduit stub-ups are connected to non-metallic underground conduits. GROUNDING 26 06 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 END OF SECTION 26 06 00 GROUNDING 26 06 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment nameplates and labels 2. Warning and caution signs 3. Operational instruction signs 4. Identification labeling of conduits, cables B. Related Sections: 1. Additional identification requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 26. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1. 29CFR1910.145 Specification for Accident Prevention Signs B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product used on project. C. Schedules: Nameplate engraving schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Engraved Nameplates and Signs: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Material: 3 ply plastic laminate, matte-finish, 0.125 inch thickness, white with black center core except that material used for warning signs shall be red with white center core. Provide punched mounting holes for mechanical fasteners. 2. Size: Minimum size to be 1 inch by 2.5 inches, rectangular shape with square corners. 3. Engraving: Accurately align lettering and engrave into center core. Lettering shall be normal block style. Character size shall be 3/8 inch high for grouped equipment and load designation and inch for individual equipment, loads and devices. B. Warning Signs: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, non-adhesive backed, indoor- outdoor with punched mounting holes, Brady B-120. 2. Polyester overlaminated with plastic coating, adhesive-backed, indoor-outdoor, Brady B-302. 3. High Voltage warning signs to read "Danger-High Voltage-Keep Out." 4. Provide identical signs for each application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide labels and signs in accordance with NEC requirements. 2. Install labels and signs at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 3. All nameplates and signs used on the project shall be of similar size, style and appearance. B. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Provide engraved identification nameplates for each of the following: a. Panelboards b. Circuit breakers C. Switches d. Contactors e. Pull and junction boxes ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Nameplate legends shall include the equipment identification number as indicated on the design drawings and an appropriate service description. 3. Nameplates for switchgear assemblies, panelboards, and separately enclosed breakers, switches, starters and contactors shall include the operating voltage. 4. Attach engraved nameplates to equipment with self-tapping, stainless steel, round head screws. Use adhesive attachment only where the substrate material is not suitable for screw attachment. C. Warning Signs: 1. Voltage warning signs where required by the NEC, where indicated on drawing and as follows: a. Equipment Rooms: On all doors to equipment rooms containing equipment or circuits over 600 volts or containing exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 7 inches x 10 inches. b. Pull Boxes: On removable covers for all pull and junction boxes containing circuits over 600 volts. C. Equipment: On front and rear compartment access doors and covers enclosing live parts. Signs provided as part of equipment that meet these requirements are acceptable. d. Fences: On each gate and on each side of fences that enclose equipment or circuits over 600 volts or exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Locate at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 2. Multiple Source Signs: a. Where enclosures contain voltages from more than one source which are not interrupted by opening the local unit disconnecting means, provide an engraved nameplate bearing the following (or similar) legend: "WARNING— MULTIPLE ELECTRICAL SOURCES EXIST WITHIN THIS ENCLOSURE" OR "WARNING—VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH OPEN" ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Hazardous Operation: a. Where operation of an electric switch or control device may create an unsafe or undesirable operating condition, provide an engraved plastic sign with appropriate warning statement. D. Multiple Services: 1. Where multiple services exist, provide each service disconnect with an additional sign which states the name and location of other service disconnects. E. Conduits: 1. Identify conduits at each termination and at all transitions from exposed to concealed or underground installation. 2. Mark conduits legibly with a permanent marker pen to indicate conduit per circuit number. F. Cables: 1. Identify cables in pull and junction boxes, vaults, manholes and where entering switchgear panelboard assembly. 2. Provide an engraved plastic nameplate or other suitable permanent tag for each cable or cable assembly. Attach with self-locking nylon cable tie. 3. Cable identification shall include circuit number and phase as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 12 30 WIRE &CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section includes copper wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware used on systems operating at 600 volts or less. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductor, Hard, Medium Hard, Or Soft. B. National Electrical Contractor Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables 2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors 4. 486C Splicing Wire Connectors 5. 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 6. 1569 Metal-Clad Cables 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of wire and cable, terminal lugs, connectors, and cable fittings. WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Furnish wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware bearing UL label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE: A. Single conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductor, Class B stranded except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller used for lighting and power branch circuits may be solid. Insulation shall be 600 volt, type THHN/THWN per UL 83 or type XHHW per UL 44. 2.02 TYPE MC CABLE: Metal Clad Cable type MC multi-conductor cabling as manufactured by AFC Cable Systems or equivalent having the following construction features: A. Conductor: Bare, soft annealed copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8. B. Insulation: Polypropylene tape assembly with 600 volt, 900C (dry) type THHN insulation with printed number and color identification. C. Neutral conductor: White— 120v circuits; Gray—480Y277v circuits D. Grounding conductor: Green insulated copper ground conductor. E. Assembly: Three insulated conductors with grounding conductor, non- hygroscopic fillers and overall binder tape per UL 1569. F. Sheath: High strength, lightweight galvanized interlocking steel strip and color coded on the out side for easy identification. G. U.L rated 1569 2.03 CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS: A. Insulated Crimp Type Connectors and Terminals: Nylon insulated, Burndy INSULINK and INSULUG, or Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon. WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Split Bolts: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy SERVIT or Thomas & Betts Split-Bolt. C. Two Bolt Connectors: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy OKLIP, Type KVS or Blackburn 2BU. D. Compression Terminals: Copper, long barrel, Burndy HYLUG or Thomas & Betts Color-Keyed. E. Bolted Terminals: Cast copper alloy, Burndy QIKLUG or Thomas & Betts Locktite. F. Spring Wire Connectors: Insulated, twist-on type, Ideal Wire Nut or 3M Scotchlok. Push-in type connectors are prohibited. 2.04 CABLE TERMINATIONS: A. Type MC Cable: Steel set screw connectors 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS: A. Tape: UL 510 1. Vinyl Plastic: 3M Scotch 33+ or Scotch 88. 2. Varnished Cambric (VC): 3M Irvington 2920. 3. Friction: Black friction tape. B. Pulling Lubricants: Ideal Yellow 77 or Polywater Type J. C. Wire Markers: 1. Individual Wires: Heat shrink, machine printed, Raychem. 2. Multi-Conductor Cables or Groups of Wires as a Cable: Nylon tie on marker, Thomas & Betts Nylon I.D. Ties, Ty-Raps. D. Wire and Cable Ties: Thomas & Betts Ty-Raps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Wire and Cable: 1. THWN-THHN for power wiring through No. 250 AWG and control wiring in conduit. XHHW for sizes above No. 250 AWG in conduit. WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. TW or THW for equipment grounding conductor. 3. Type MC cable for fixture wipes no longer than 6' and in accordance with NEC Article 334. 4. No. 12 AWG minimum for power circuits and No. 14 AWG minimum for control circuits unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Splices and Taps: 1. Use insulated spring wire connectors for lighting and receptacle branch circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller. Push-in type connectors are prohibited. 2. Use solderless pressure connectors for branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and larger. 3. Do not make splices or taps in feeder circuits or control circuits. C. Terminals: 1. Use copper compression terminals, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 4 AWG and smaller, NEMA 2 hole for sizes No. 2 AWG and larger. 2. Use insulated, ring tongue terminals for signal and control conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. B. Installation in Conduit: 1. Swab conduits completely and thoroughly before pulling in conductors. 2. Pull all conductors into conduit at same time. 3. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire No. 4 AWG and larger. 4. Do not pull in conductors until conduit system is completed. Do not pull through boxes, fittings or enclosures where a change of conduit alignment or direction occurs. 5. Limit pulling tension to maximum values as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Do not combine circuits into a common conduit other than as indicated on the drawings. C. Direct Burial Cable: WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Trench and backfill for direct burial cables. Minimum depth of installation shall be 24 inches. 2. Terminate and ground metallic cable sheath with suitable fittings. D. Compression Connectors and Terminals: 1. Install on wire and cable with approved tool and die to recommended compression pressure. Do not cut strands from conductors to fit lugs or terminals. E. Bolted Connectors and Terminals: 1. Torque to manufacturer's recommended foot-pounds for size and class of connector. 2. Where manufacturer's published torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with UL 486A torque values. 3. Use galvanized steel bolts, nuts, split-lock washers and flat washers on terminal connections. F. Wiring in Enclosures: 1. Form and tie conductors in panelboards, cabinets, control panels, motor controllers, wireways, and wiring troughs in a neat and orderly manner. 2. Use Thomas & Betts wire and cable ties of appropriate size and type. 3. Limit spacing between ties to not more than 6 inches. G. Taping: 1. Above Ground and Dry Locations: Fill voids and irregularities with half-lapped layers of VC (two minimum) or electrical insulation putty. Insulate with three half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic and one half-layer of friction tape. 2. In damp or wet locations, wrap insulated spring wire connectors with 2 layers of vinyl plastic tape. 3.03 COLOR CODING: A. Power Wiring: Provide color coding for single and multi-conductor power circuits as follows: Voltage OA 013 (PC Neutral WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 240 volts and below Black Red Blue White 250 — 600 volts Brown Purple Yellow Gray 1. For specified insulation and jackets not manufactured with integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color- coding tape. 2. Color code conductors entering boxes, troughs, cabinets, and other enclosures. 3. Color code conductors in wireways, trenches, and other locations where conductors are continuously accessible at intervals not exceeding 5 feet. B. Insulated Equipment Ground: Green. C. Isolated Ground conductor: Green with Yellow tracer. 3.04 WIRING IDENTIFICATION A. Control Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall match approved schematic and wiring diagrams. B. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall include source panel designation and circuit number. 3.05 FIELD TESTS: A. Test conductors after installation is complete and prior to connection to equipment. B. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor phase-to-ground with adjacent conductors grounded and test conductor disconnected from equipment. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for one minute. Minimum acceptable test values shall be 50 megohms. Investigate deviations in test values between adjacent phases. C. Verify tightness of bolted connections with a calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be terminal lug manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 12 30 WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 13 60 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) 2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (CRGS) 3. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 5. PVC Conduit (PVC) 6. Flexible Conduit 7. Associated Fittings 8. Wireways 9. Pull and Junction Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit—Zinc Coated 2. C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing —Zinc Coated 3. C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) 2. TC 3 PVC Fitting for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 3. TC 13 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT) 4. TC 14 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 1 Flexible Metal Conduit 2. 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 3. 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings 4. 6 Rigid Metal Conduit 5. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit RACEWAYS 26 13 60-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 7. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing 8. 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings 9. 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 10. 1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of conduit, fitting, connector, pull and junction box, and wireway used on the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS): A. Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads and lacquered inside. B. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro- plated and lacquered. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or Gedney or an equal. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Boxes shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Boxes shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Gedney or equal. D. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated fasteners and hardware will not be acceptable. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC - SCHEDULE 40): RACEWAYS 26 13 60-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit per NEMA TC 2 with a 900 UL rating, and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or approved equal. B. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 3 and shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 2.03 PVC COATED STEEL CONDUIT (CRGS): A. Conduit: Prior to coating, all conduits, elbows, couplings, nipples etc. shall be standard weight rigid, threaded steel and shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and out and over the ends. The conduit shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1, UL 6, and NEMA RN-1, 1980. B. Fittings: Prior to coating, fittings shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized, Appleton Form 35 or Crouse-Hinds or equivalent with cast cover and neoprene gasket. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with PVC coated conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs and gasketed cast covers or device plates. Boxes shall be the product of Appleton or Crouse-Hinds. D. PVC Coating: Conduit, fittings, boxes and accessories shall be Plasti-Bond 2 coated, as produced by Robroy Industries Inc. or an approved equal. Before coating, the galvanized surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy-acrylic primer. Exterior surfaces shall have a 40 mil PVC coating applied by dip method. Interior surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. shall have a fusion bonded phenolic coating with a thickness of 4-6 mils. E. Fasteners and Supports: U-bolts, conduit clamps, straps, modular framing channels shall be 1-5/811 ❑ 1-5/811 minimum section dimensions, Type 304 stainless steel, and shall be the product of Unistrut. Fasteners and attachment hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings and nipples shall be standard weight, threaded, rigid aluminum 6063 alloy, with a copper content not to exceed 0.20%. The conduit shall have a silicon or lacquer coating inside. B. Fittings: Fittings, accessories and device boxes for aluminum conduit systems shall be the standard threaded type as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Both fittings and covers shall be aluminum containing less than 0.4 of 1% copper. All screws shall be stainless steel. Covers shall be gasketed. C. Fasteners: All straps and clamps used to support aluminum conduit shall be hot- dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron, with a 40 mil fused PVC coating, Plastibond, Ocal or equivalent. Strut type framing channels shall be either PVC coated galvanized steel or fiberglass. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Galvanized or cadmium-plated hardware will not be acceptable for use with aluminum conduit. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out with an organic corrosion resistant coating applied to the inside. B. Fittings and Boxes: Conduit fittings, boxes, and accessories for use with EMT conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro- plated and lacquered. Fittings shall be compression type. Setscrew fittings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, OZ Gedney or an equal. C. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. 2.06 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: A. Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit shall have a spiraled, flexible, galvanized steel inner core and an outer jacket of neoprene. Sizes 3/8" through 4" shall have a continuous, internal copper ground. Liquid-tight connectors shall be galvanized steel or malleable iron with neoprene sealing gaskets, external ground lugs and insulated throats. Connectors shall be Appleton type STB or Gedney or equal. 2.07 WIREWAYS: A. Sheet Metal: 1. Indoor, dry locations: NEMA 1, sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. Finish being manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2. Outdoor and damp locations: NEMA 3R, galvanized sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. B. Non-Metallic: 1. NEMA 4X, Robroy Industries fiberglass trough with gasketed cover attached with non-metallic fasteners. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, hubs, elbows, adapters, end caps and other fittings to match and mate with type of wireway furnished as required for a complete system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: RACEWAYS 26 13 60-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. General: 1. All field wiring shall be installed in conduit except as otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2-inch nominal diameter. B. Exposed: 1. Conduit installed outdoors exposed shall be rigid galvanized steel. 2. Conduit installed indoors exposed and below 7 feet shall be rigid galvanized steel. Exposed conduit above 7 feet installed indoors may be EMT. C. Underground: 1. Conduit installed underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC. See section 3.02-E for additional requirements. 2. Elbows used for underground conduit stub-ups from below grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, non-metallic Schedule 80 PVC, or Rigid Galvanized Steel completely taped with non-corrosive protective tape. D. Concealed: 1. Conduit installed concealed above lay-in ceilings and in dry wall construction shall be EMT. E. Flexible Connections: 1. Indoor-dry areas: Flexible metal conduit. 2. Indoor-wet, damp areas: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3. Outdoors: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Installation Methods: Conduit shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceiling or underground as indicated on the drawings. 2. Cleaning: All conduit systems shall be completed and shall be swabbed clean before conductors are pulled in. 3. Field cuts: Do not cut conduit with pipe cutters. 4. Bends: Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. The maximum number of 90❑ bends, or equivalent between pulling points in any conduit run shall be three. Pull and junction fittings and/or boxes shall be provided as necessary to satisfy this requirement. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5. Protection: The ends of all conduit runs shall be closed immediately after installation to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign material. 6. Locknuts: Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits and shall be the insulating type. 7. Conduit couplings shall be threaded type for RGS or RA conduit and compression type for EMT conduit. Set-screw couplings are not acceptable. 8. Spare conduits: Spare conduits shall have a pull cord installed. The pull cord shall be plastic with a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds. Not less that 12 inches of slack shall be left at each end of the pull cord. 9. Supports: Supports shall be provided a minimum of every 10' and within 3' of all enclosures. In addition, conduits shall be rigidly supported between couplings, on either side of bends and at terminations and fittings. 10. Boxes: Boxes shall be provided in the raceway system as indicated on the drawings and also wherever required for pulling of wires or making connections. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, boxes installed in normally wet locations or on the outside of exterior surfaces shall be NEMA 3R, stainless steel sheet construction. Boxes shall be furnished with hinged and gasketed doors and stainless steel back panels. Each box shall have the volume required by the NEC for the number of conductors enclosed in the box. All boxes shall be securely anchored in place. 11. Flexible Connections: Flexible connections of short length shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections. Flexible conduit connections shall be rigidly and securely supported in an approved manner at intervals not exceeding 24 inches in length and within 12 inches of each conduit termination. Lengths of not more than 36 inches may be installed without such supports where flexibility is required. 12. Identification: Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260750. 13. PVC: PVC conduit joints shall be solvent cement welded and shall be watertight. All PVC conduits shall have a separate grounding conductor installed. Where transition is made to the metallic conduit or enclosures, the grounding conductor shall be bonded to the metal conduit or enclosure. 14. Penetrations through walls, floors, and roof: All penetrations shall be sealed with a UL listed fire sealant equal to Dow Corning #3-6548. B. Exposed Conduit: RACEWAYS 26 13 60-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Routing: Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to structure lines. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with fittings or symmetrical bends. Conduit in damp locations or outdoors shall be exposed to the air on all sides and shall not be installed tight against walls, ceilings and structural members, etc. Clamp backs and/or offsets shall be used as necessary to maintain uniform clearances. 2. Supports: Acceptable supporting and clamping materials for exposed conduit include one-hole straps and clamp back, "U" bolts, parallel or right angle conduit clamps, hot-dipped galvanized structural steel frames or modular stainless steel channel as manufactured by Unistrut or equal. Perforated steel tape, stamped steel one- and two-hole straps shall not be used. Conduits shall be supported in accordance with NEC 346-12. 3. Obstructions: Conduit shall be routed so as not to create any tripping or head banging hazard and so as not to create any obstruction to Owner's operation and maintenance activities. 4. Hubs: Watertight conduit hubs shall be installed where conduits enter the tops or sides of sheet metal or non-metallic enclosures. 5. Drains: Drain fittings shall be installed at low points throughout the conduit system where condensation is likely to occur. C. PVC Coated Conduit: 1. PVC coated conduit requires special care to minimize damage to the PVC coating during cutting, threading, bending and installation. Contractor shall install conduit in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing strap wrenches, cutting dies, vises, and other special tools required to install PVC coated conduit. Standard pipe wrenches, chain wrenches or channel locks shall not be used. Conduit bending equipment shall have the proper diameter shoes or dies to allow for the thickness of the PVC coating. 3. PVC coated conduit shall be supported with Type 304 stainless steel clamps, straps, hangers and supports. Attachment hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. All PVC coated conduit and fittings that have teeth marks, cuts, nicks or are otherwise damaged shall be repaired by coating damaged area with a liquid PVC touch-up compound. Spray-type compound is not acceptable. 5. Unistrut channel supports and related accessories for use with PVC coated conduit shall be Type 304 stainless steel. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum conduit shall not be installed in direct contact with earth, concrete, steel, copper, brass or bronze. Where aluminum conduit comes into contact with dissimilar metals or passes through concrete walls or floors, it shall be wrapped with 2 layers, half-lapped, of corrosion preventative pipe tape, Scotch 50 or equal. 2. Aluminum conduit threads shall have a Penetrox, No-Ox-Id or equal, applied when installed. E. Underground Conduit: 1. Under Landscaping (i.e. sod or grass): a. Underground conduits 2" and larger shall be laid in sand and covered with a 4" red concrete cap. The conduit shall be surrounded by a minimum of 3-inches of virgin sand (top, bottom, and sides). b. The top of concrete cap shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade. C. Communication conduits shall be buried a minimum of 36" to top of conduit. d. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. e. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical conduits must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the minimum depth cannot be met. Backfill for all trenches shall be compacted to original density. 2. Under Paved Areas (i.e. Parking Lot, Driveways, and Roads): a. Underground communication conduit runs shall be buried a minimum 36" below grade to top of conduit. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade overall conduits. b. Underground power conduit runs shall be buried the minimum depth per the National Electric Code. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. C. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical conduits must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the minimum depth cannot be met. Backfill for all trenches shall be compacted to original density. 3. Separation: Minimum separation between the outside edges of adjacent conduits shall be 3 inches. 4. Elbows: All elbows shall be long radius type. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5. Spacers: Conduit spacers shall be installed at 5 feet on centers. 6. Expansion Fittings: Provide expansion fittings in aboveground, vertical portion of each underground conduit stub-up. END OF SECTION 26 13 60 RACEWAYS 26 13 60-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 14 00 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Snap Switches 4. Wall Plates 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD1-83 General Requirements for Wiring Devices 2. WD-5 Specific Purpose Wiring Devices B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20-86 Standard for Safety General Use Snap Switches 2. 94-91 Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 3. 498091 Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit for approval and record purposes in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of device used on project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Terms 'listed" and 'labeled" shall be defined as they are in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA Standards. B: Receptacles, General Use Duplex Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type, TAMPER RESISTANT, by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. C: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type "non feed-through" conforming to UL 498 and UL 943 by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. D: Snap Switches: 120/277 volt, 20 ampere, quiet rated, heavy duty, complying with UL 20 and NEMA WD1 by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. Wall Plates: 1. Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required by devices. 2. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. 3. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. 4. Provide plates possessing following additional construction features. a. Device plates: Nylon. Color to match device b. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 inch sq boxes: 1/2 inch stainless steel covers. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Weatherproof covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations: Raintight while in use, UL listed, molded UV stabilized poly-carbonate with stainless steel screws and mounting gaskets. Tay Mac Corporation safety outlet enclosure, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from building materials, dirt and debris. D. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, boxes for wiring devices shall be mounted so that the centerline of the device is at the following height above finished floor (AFF) or above finished grade (AFG). DEVICE FINISHED AREAS UNFINISHED AREAS Snap switches 48" 48" Convenience Receptacles 18" 18" E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. H. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 I. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box connection. 3.02 PROTECTION: A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity and for short circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six (6) times. B. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal for correct polarity, proper ground connection and wiring faults. C. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 14 00 WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install panelboards as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. B. Panelboard types included in this Section are: 1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. PB 1 Panelboards 3. PB1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 2. 67 Panelboards 1.03 SUBMITTALS - FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000, 260100, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Enclosure outline drawing with complete dimensions 3. Breaker layout drawing 4. Component list PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5. Conduit entry/exit locations 6. Assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit current b. Voltage C. Continuous current 7. Cable terminal sizes. 8. Installation Instructions 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final (as-built) drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.03 2. Installation, operation and maintenance instruction 3. Spare parts list 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens D. ABB 2.02 RATINGS: PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. B. Panelboards rated 480 Vac shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. All panelboards shall be fully rated. Series ratings shall not be used. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION: A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. B. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door covering all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semiflush, cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible. D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 inch on all sides. Trims shall be secured to box with concealed clamps. E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of each door in a metal frame. F. All locks shall be keyed alike. 2.04 BUS: A. Main bus bars shall be tin-plated copper, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 651 C above an ambient of 401 C maximum. B. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards indicated to have a neutral bus. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings with oversized neutral conductors. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Distribution panelboards including circuit breakers contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall have bolt-on, molded case circuit breakers as indicated below. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated. C. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push- to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism. D. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be current limiting. E. Circuit breakers below 600-ampere shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics. F. Circuit breakers 600-ampere through 1200-ampere shall be provided with microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units. 1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. 2. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an overload condition until after a preset time delay. 4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall be provided with an instantaneous override. Internal ground fault protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four-wire loads. 5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker, by means of a 120-volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all breakers 600-ampere and above. 6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based, time-current curve shaping adjustments: Adjustable long-time pick-up Adjustable short-time pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping Adjustable instantaneous pick-up Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping. G. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure. H. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as indicated on the drawings. I. Circuit breakers supplying air conditioning branch circuits shall be UL listed as type HACR. 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. The minimum integrated short circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be indicated on the drawings. B. Bolt-in type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100- ampere frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits and HACR for air conditioning branch circuits. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights, energy management and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels. 2.07 ENCLOSURE: A. General: Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide and made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends. B. Rating: NEMA type 12 enclosure except where other enclosure requirements are indicated. 2.08 FINISH: A. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a finish coat of the manufacturers standard paint color shall be applied. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Provide TVSS system integral to distribution panelboards and appliance panelboards where indicated on drawings. Reference section 266710 for specifications on TVSS units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Confirm installation space and clearance requirements for panelboards in accordance with NEC requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install panelboards as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and NECA "Standard of Installation". B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6 feet 2 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: 1. Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Typed directory indicating final circuit connections. Obtain approval before installing. E. Install filler plates in unused breaker spaces. F. Provisions for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: 1. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. 2. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade. G. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with wire ties after completion of load balancing. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide unit nameplate in accordance with Section 260750. B. Provided one (1) 8-1/2"x11" stainless steel nameplate engraved with one- line diagram and year installed. One-line diagram shall include panel voltages, amps, AIC ratings, and feeder sizes. Nameplate shall be mounted to the exterior door of the main distribution panel — LB. 3.04 GROUNDING: A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required in Section 260600. B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. C. Provide isolated ground bars for panels serving sensitive electronic equipment and as indicated on panel schedules. 3.05 CONNECTIONS: A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.06 FIELD TESTING: A. Inspect for compliance with drawings and specifications. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Inspect for defects, damaged or missing parts. C. Operate each breaker a minimum of three (3) times to insure proper operation. D. Perform insulation resistance test on complete assembly at 1000 Vdc. Disconnect any solid-state devices prior to testing. Minimum acceptable test results are 100 megohms. 3.07 CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. C. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. D. Clean interior of panelboard. 3.08 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS: A. Balancing Loads: Prior to final acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows: 1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner. 2. Advise Engineer of load imbalances exceeding 20% or of loads exceeding 80% of circuit ratings. Reconnect branch circuit loads as directed by Engineer. 3. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical circuits. 4. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 32 13 SPARK IGNITED ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Spark-Ignited Engine. 2. Natural Gas Fuel Supply System. 3. Control and monitoring. 4. Generator overcurrent and fault protection. 5. Generator, exciter, and voltage regulator. 6. Outdoor engine generator enclosure (where selected). 7. Vibration isolation devices (where applicable). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 33 00 "Transfer Switches"for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generators. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. EPS: Emergency power supply. B. EPSS: Emergency power supply system. C. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Include thermal damage curve for generator. 3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. 4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour (liters per hour) at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator capacity. 5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator capacity. 6. Include airflow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cubic feet per minute (cubic meters per minute) at 0.8 power factor, Provide Drawings Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 indicating requirements and limitations for location of air intake and exhausts. 7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to, kilowatt rating, efficiency, reactances, and short-circuit current capability. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: With engine and generator mounted on rails, identify center of gravity and total weight for provided components; fuel tank, enclosure, silencer, base tank, each piece of equipment not integral to the engine generator. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain. 4. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams indicating terminal markings for engine generators and functional relationship between all electrical components. 7. Rigging Information: Indicate location of each lifting attachment, generator- set center of gravity, and total package weight in submittal drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for engine generator, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Source Quality-Control Reports: Including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Provide the following test results: a. Maximum Power Level b. Maximum Motor Starting (sKVA) C. Structural Soundness d. Torsional Analysis e. Transient Response f. Alternator Temperature Rise g. Engine Cooling Requirements (unit mounted radiator) h. Harmonic Analysis (per IEEE-115 and ANSI-100) i. Voltage Regulation j. Endurance Testing Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 011 February 27, 2025 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, indicating evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 4. Report of sound generation. 5. Report of exhaust emissions indicating compliance with applicable regulations. 6. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. C. Field quality-control reports. Field start up report and unit in-service documentation, including load bank test results if applicable. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance and periodic testing plan in accordance with NFPA 110, Chapter 8. B. Furnish extra materials required by local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and defined in project documents that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The generator set covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, rated, assembled and installed in accordance with all applicable standards below: 1. CSA C22.2, No. 14-M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 2. CSA C22.2, No. 100 Motors and Generators 3. CSA 282-15 4. EN 61000-6 5. EN 55011 6. FCC Part 15 Subpart B 7. ISO 8528 8. 1 EC 61000 9. UL 508 10. UL 2200 11. UL 142 12. UL 6200 13. Designed to allow for installed compliance to NFPA 37, NFPA 70, NFPA 99 and NFPA 110 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Current certificate holder for ISO 9001 compliance. 2. The power system shall be produced by a manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 25 years and who maintains a Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 service organization of factory-authorized generator technicians available twenty-four hours a day throughout the year. 3. Manufacturing and assembly of products must be done in the United States using domestically sourced materials to the extent practical. C. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and certified by the manufacturer on stationary power systems. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty: 5 Year Comprehensive from date of Substantial Completion. 2. A Comprehensive Warranty is defined as the manufacturer covering replacement parts, labor, and limited technician travel costs for covered warranty repairs during the listed warranty period. A Limited warranty is defined as the manufacturer covering replacement parts, labor, and limited technician travel costs for the first 2 years and then replacement parts for the remainder of the listed warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Generac Power Systems, Inc.; 150 kW, 14.2L with a K0250124Y21 - 250kW alternator. The Three Phase generator shall be rated for 150 kW at 208 volts and 60 Hz, at 0.8 power factor lagging while operating at a maximum ambient temperature of 122 Fahrenheit and maximum altitude of 7500 feet above sea level without reduction in electrical output capacity. Comparable products by one of the following will also be considered: 1. Caterpillar, Inc. 2. Cummins Power Generation. B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single source from single manufacturer. "Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single supplier. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of NEC and all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production. There shall be one source responsibility for warranty; parts and service through a local representative with factory certified service personnel. C. Requests for substitutions shall be made a minimum of ten (10) days prior to bid date. Manufacturers catalog data and a completed generator sizing model using the proposed manufacturer's generator sizing software shall accompany each Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 request and authorized acceptance shall be addenda only. Should any substitutions be made, the contractor shall bear responsibility for the installation, coordination and operation of the system as well as any engineering and redesign costs, which may result from such substitutions. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic — non-OSHPD: Provide materials, bracing, and mounting to ensure generator will withstand, and continue to operate, through a seismic event. Present seismic calculations and certificate for the specific model generator in accordance with the relevant IBC and ASCE standard. This will include drawings of the generator and mounting details. Seismic Performance: Engine generator housing, sub-base fuel tank, engine-generator assembly, batteries, battery racks, silencers, sound attenuating equipment, accessories, and components to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7 when required on the project. B. NFPA Compliance: 1. Comply with NFPA 37. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. 3. Comply with NFPA 99. 4. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 EPSS. C. UL Compliance: Engine generator assembly and factory enclosure (if provided) shall be UL 2200 listed. D. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable US EPA, State and Local Government requirements. Spark-ignited Stationary Emergency: Engines shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with 40 CFR Part 60 Subpart JJJJ, Table 1, Emission Standards for Stationary Emergency SI Engines and Table 2, Requirements for Performance Tests. 2.3 ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Factory-assembled and -tested, water-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. C. Power Rating: Standby. D. Service Load: The generator set shall be a Generac model 150 kW, 14.2L with a K0250124Y21 - 250kW alternator. It shall provide 150 kW and 187.5 kVA while operating at the maximum ambient operating temperature and elevation specified in the project documents. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 E. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging. F. Frequency: 60 Hz- G. Voltage: 208 Volts ac. H. Phase: Three Phase, Four Wire. I. Induction Method: Naturally aspirated or Turbocharged. J. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. K. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving. L. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name, model and serial number of component. M. Engine Generator Performance: 1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10.00 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease at unity power factor. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. 3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2.0 Hertz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease at unity power factor. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds. 6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. 8. Start time to comply with NFPA system requirements. 2.4 ENGINE PERFORMANCE A. Fuel: Natural gas shall be "pipeline grade" meeting the following conditions: Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 1. Methane number 80 or greater. 2. High heating value shall be within the range of 950 - 1,150 BTU/scf. 3. Hydrogen sulfide shall not exceed 0.3 g/100 scf. 4. Total sulfur shall not exceed 20 g/100 scf. 5. Water vapor content shall not exceed 0.32 g/100 scf. B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. C. Lubrication System to be engine mounted. 1. Oil filter shall be engine-mounted replaceable cartridge type with integral bypass valve, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. D. Jacket Coolant Heater: Jacket water heater shall be sized per NFPA110 and UL listed to ensure that genset will start within the specified time period and ambient conditions. E. Integral Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gauge glass and petcock. 3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 4. Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature on Radiator: 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). 5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, UV-, and abrasion-resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum. b. Meets SAE 100R1A Type S, EN853 1SN, ISO 1436-1 Type 1SN C. a Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. F. Muffler/Silencer: 1. Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 011 February 27, 2025 G. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. H. Starting System: 12 or 24-V electric, with negative ground. 1. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 2. Battery: Lead acid, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle as required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 3. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35 minimum continuous rating. 4. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing, and float-charging type designed for lead-acid batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and NFPA 110 Section 5.6.4.6 for Level 1 systems.: 2.5 FUEL SYSTEM — NATURAL GAS A. Comply with NFPA 37. B. Operating Pressure: 7 inches of water column. C. Flowrate: Maximum gas flow demand at 100% load: 2220 cubic feet per hour. 2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of engine generator. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, engine generator starts. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms. B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts engine generator. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms. C. Provide minimum run time control set for 15 minutes with override only by operation of a remote emergency-stop switch. D. Control panel must comply with UL 6200. The controller shall meet ASTM 13117 (salt spray test). E. Remote Connectivity: Controller shall be capable of remote connectivity via RS485]. Remote connectivity shall be provided by a physically separate module that can be secured, access limited, and/or physically removed to restrict and/or completely isolate the generator system from any outside control or monitoring. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 F. Connection to Building Management: Provide connections for data transmission of indications to remote data terminals via Modbus. G. Environmentally Hardened Design: Open circuit boards, edge cards, and PC ribbon cable connections are unacceptable. H. PCB Construction: Circuit boards with surface-mounted components to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards utilizing large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components. I. Configuration: 1. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gauges shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the engine generator. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from engine generator vibration. Panel powered from the engine generator battery. J. Control and Monitoring Panel: 1. Digital engine generator controller with integrated touch screen, controls, and microprocessor, capable of local and remote control, monitoring, and programming, with battery backup. 2. Instruments: Located on the control and monitoring panel and viewable during operation. a. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gauge. b. Engine-coolant temperature gauge. C. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). d. Running-time meter. e. AC voltmeter, for each phase. f. AC ammeter, for each phase. g. AC frequency meter. h. Generator-voltage adjusting feature. 3. Controls and Protective Devices: Controls, shutdown devices, and common alarm indication, including the following: a. Cranking control equipment. b. Run-Off-Auto switch. C. Control switch not in automatic position alarm. d. Overcrank alarm. e. Overcrank shutdown device. f. Low-water temperature alarm. g. High engine temperature pre-alarm. h. High engine temperature. i. High engine temperature shutdown device. j. Overspeed alarm. k. Overspeed shutdown device. I. Low fuel main tank. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 1) Low-fuel-level alarm shall be initiated when the level falls below that required for operation for duration required for the indicated EPSS class. M. Coolant low-level alarm. n. Coolant low-level shutdown device. o. Coolant high-temperature prealarm. p. Coolant high-temperature alarm. q. Coolant low-temperature alarm. r. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. s. EPS load indicator. t. Battery high-voltage alarm. U. Low cranking voltage alarm. V. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. W. Battery low-voltage alarm. X. Lamp test. y. Contacts for local and remote common alarm. Z. Remote manual stop shutdown device. aa. Total engine run hours, non-resettable. bb. Engine generator metering, including voltage, current, hertz, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere, and power factor. K. Engine Generator Metering: Comply with [Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."] [Section 262713 "Electricity Metering."] [Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" and Section 262713 "Electricity Metering."] L. External Alarm & Status Relays: Provide a separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status condition required by Building Management or other external systems as shown on electrical drawings. M. Common Remote Panel with Common Audible Alarm: Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. Remote panel shall be powered from the engine generator battery. N. Remote Alarm Annunciator: An LED indicator light labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event, and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. 1. Overcrank alarm. 2. Low water-temperature alarm. 3. High engine temperature pre-alarm. 4. High engine temperature alarm. 5. Low lube oil pressure alarm. 6. Overspeed alarm. 7. Low fuel main tank alarm. 8. Low coolant level alarm. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 9. Low cranking voltage alarm. 10. Contacts for local and remote common alarm. 11. Audible-alarm silencing switch. 12. Air shutdown damper when used. 13. Run-Off-Auto switch. 14. Control switch not in automatic position alarm. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. Lamp test. 18. Low-cranking voltage alarm. 19. Generator overcurrent-protective-device not-closed alarm. O. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Provide remote emergency stop switch in quantity and style as shown on electrical drawings. Electrical contractor to coordinate exact location with engineer and local AHJ. P. Engine Run Relay: The generator set shall be provided with a run relay which shall provide a double-pole, double-throw relay with 10-amp/250 VAC contacts to indicate that the generator is running. The run relay dry contacts can be used for energizing or de-energizing customer devices while the generator is running (e.g. louvers, indicator lamps, etc.) Q. Data Logging: 1. Event Logging—the controller keeps a record of up to 8,000 events with date and time locally for warning and shutdown faults. This event log can be downloaded onto a USB storage device or onto a PC through the service program. 2. Event Snapshot—the control system shall capture 15 seconds of critical data around the time a fault or warning. This data shall be viewable on the controller and downloadable. 3. Data Logging — the controller shall allow customized parameters to be logged based on a start trigger from the controller interface. a. The parameters are selectable from all monitored parameters. b. The sample period shall be configurable from 1 second to 1 day. C. The collected data shall be stored on a USB storage device plugged into the control panel. 2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Overcurrent protective devices shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. 1. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both utility and EPSS as the voltage source. 2. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS shall be accessible only to authorized personnel. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 B. Generator Overcurrent Protective Device: 1. Unit mounted circuit breakers. Rating, ampacity, accessories, as shown on drawings or as listed below: 2. Molded-case circuit breaker, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489: a. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. b. Trip Rating: Matched to generator output rating. C. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices. d. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel. C. Generator Controller Integrated Alternator Protective Functions: 1. Short-time 1112t function : Generator controller-based function shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of alternator output, integrate alternator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. As overcurrent heating effect on the alternator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the engine generator. When signaled by generator protector or other engine generator protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. 2. Long-time function: Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other engine generator malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for load shed functions. 3. Short-circuit fault clearing: Under single- or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds. 4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot. 5. Ground Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground fault. Indicate ground fault with other engine generator alarm indications. 6. Ground Fault Protection: Comply with NFPA 70, section 215 "Feeder Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment". When configured for ground fault protection; trip generator protective device(s) on ground fault." 2.8 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 C. Electrical Insulation: Class H. D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Range: Provide range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level. F. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. Stator shall be skewed construction to minimize harmonic voltage distortion. G. Enclosure: Drip proof. H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. I. Voltage Regulator: 1. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter. The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall maintain steady-state generator output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full load. The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS. The regulator shall provide an adjustable Volts/Hz slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and frequency response for site conditions. 2. Alternator Excitation: Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) shall provide excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. 3. The generator must accept rated load in one-step. 4. Calculated Transient Voltage Performance: Motor starting performance and voltage dip determinations shall be based on the complete generator assembly. Voltage dip shall not exceed 18.2 percent based on the largest project block load, as determined by manufacturer's sizing program. 5. System Transient Voltage Performance: Alternator shall be capable of supplying 557 sKVA with a voltage dip not more than 35% at 0.3 starting power factor. Sustained voltage dip data or manufacturer-published SKVA numbers based on unity PF alternator-only dynamometer testing will not be accepted. 6. Calculated Transient Frequency Performance: Transient frequency dip performance shall be based on the complete generator set. Maintain frequency within 3.2 percent based on largest project block load, as determined by manufacturer's sizing program. J. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. The strip heater shall be wired directly to the incoming power distribution panel or load center. K. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 L. Tropical Coating: An additional coating of resin shall be applied to the alternator to protect in high humidity or tropical climates. Resin shall be an anti-fungal coating, protecting the alternator. 2.9 OUTDOOR ENGINE GENERATOR ENCLOSURE A. Basis of design is a Weather. B. Generator packaged within manufacturer's weather protective, sound attenuated enclosure. Enclosure and generator set shall be UL 2200 Listed as a system. C. Enclosure Construction: Minimum 14 gauge construction. Roof construction shall be raised-seam, gasket-free interlocking panels. Rivets shall not be used on external painted surfaces. Design shall be rodent resistant. D. Doors shall be equipped with lift-off pin and sleeve type hinges to allow access to the engine, alternator, and control panel. Hinges shall be adjustable for door alignment. Hinges and all exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. Each door shall be equipped with minimum 2-point latching mechanism and identical keys. Perimeter of all door openings shall include polyethylene gasket. E. Upward discharging exhaust hood for engine cooling airflow and exhaust. F. Engine exhaust silencer mounted within enclosure discharge hood. G. Enclosure Finish: Electrostatic applied powered paint, baked and finished to manufacturer's specifications. Finish system shall be subjected to the following tests: 1. ASTM D1186 - 87; 2.5+ mil Paint Thickness 2. ASTM D3363 - 92a; Material Hardness 3. ASTM D522 - B; Resistance to Cracking 4. ASTM D3359 - B; Adhesion 5. ASTM B117 D 1654; Resistant to Salt Water Corrosion 6. ASTM D1735 D 1654; Resistant to Humidity 7. ASTM 2794 93 (2004); Impact Resistance 8. SAE J 1690 - UV Protection" H. Enclosure Color: Manufacturer's standard color, or custom color matched based on architect's design with color sample provided to generator manufacturer. I. Wind Rating: Enclosure shall be constructed to attain basic wind speed rating of 110 MPH; WIF 1.15, Exposure Category "C", Building Classification "Enclosed", Topographic Factor Kzt = 1. Wind Design Pressures: windward, 20.6 Ib/ft^2; leeward, -12.9 Ib/ft^2; roof, -18.0 Ib/ft^2." J. Snow Load Rating: Minimum 70 pounds per square foot. K. Engine-Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 for two hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. L. Sound Insulation: Enclosure and air discharge hood completely lined with reflective silver mylar faced sound attenuating closed cell foam that meets UL 94 HF1 standards for flammability(FMVSS 302 test method). Roof sound insulation panels shall include additional mechanical retention. M. Sound Performance: The engine generator, while operating at full rated load, shall not exceed 78.50 dBA average measured at 23 ft (7 meters) from the engine generator in a free field environment. N. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Stormproof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. O. Convenience Outlet: Factory-wired convenience 120v duplex-outlet within enclosure, GFCI. 2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized- steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment for units with a ratings 750kw or below. 1. Material: Standard neoprene separated by steel shims. B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint for units with a rating larger than 750kw. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment-mounting and -leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Minimum Deflection: 0.5. C. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine generator using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with IEEE 115 and with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters. B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine generator and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Test generator, exciter, and voltage regulator as a unit. 3. Full load run. 4. Maximum power. 5. Voltage regulation. 6. Transient and steady-state governing. 7. Single-step load pickup. 8. Safety shutdowns. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. 2.12 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 011 February 27, 2025 conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service in accordance with requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Manager in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without written permission. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 404. B. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install packaged engine generators on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases or steel dunnage as indicated on drawings. 2. Coordinate size and location of mounting bases for packaged engine generators. 3. Install unit with vibration isolation devices described in section 2.11. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory certified technicians to inspect the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include: 1. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold)within the specified time. 2. Verification of engine parameters within specification. 3. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required. 4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator. 5. Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification by using building load. B. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here, including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. C. Battery and Charger Tests: 1. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. 2. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications." D. System Integrity Tests: Verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. F. Operational Test:After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment. G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest and reinspect as specified above. I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations, and retest until specified requirements are met. J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Repair Service Capabilities: 1. The generator set supplier shall maintain service parts inventory for the entire power system at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain a central parts inventory to support the supplier, covering all the major components of the power system, including: engines, alternators, control systems, paralleling electronics, and power transfer equipment. 2. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of power system replacement parts in the local service location. Service vehicles shall be stocked with critical replacement parts. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The service organization shall be physically located within 50 miles of the site. 3. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. B. Preventative Maintenance Service Agreement: The supplier shall include as a line item adder in the proposal, a one-year maintenance service agreement. The maintenance shall be performed by factory authorized service technicians capable of servicing both the engine generator set(s) and the transfer switch(es). This Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 011 February 27,2025 agreement shall include semi-annual preventative maintenance visits to verify operation and/or complete the following: 1. All periodic engine maintenance as recommended by the service manual. 2. All electrical controls maintenance and calibrations as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. All auxiliary equipment as a part of the emergency systems. 4. The supplier shall guarantee emergency service. 5. All expendable maintenance items are to be included in this agreement. 6. A copy of this agreement and a schedule shall be provided in the submittal documents, detailing scope of work and preventative maintenance service visit interval. END OF SECTION Spark Ignited Engine-Driven Generator 26 32 13- 19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 SECTION 26 33 00 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Automatic Transfer Switches 1.02 SYSTEM A. Furnish the automatic transfer switches to automatically transfer between the normal and emergency power source. 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The automatic transfer switches covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, and assembled in strict accordance with all applicable standards of ANSI, U.L., IEEE and NEMA. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for review, which shall include the following, as a minimum: 1. Descriptive literature 2. Plan, elevation, side, and front view arrangement drawings, including overall dimension, weights and clearances, as well as mounting or anchoring requirements and conduit entrance locations. 3. Schematic diagrams. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Accessory list. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Russelectric B. ASCO 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. General AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 1. The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished as shown on the drawings. Voltage and continuous current ratings and number of poles shall be as shown. The automatic transfer switch shall be Service Entrance Rated, unless otherwise indicated 2. On 3 phase, 4 wire systems, utilizing ground fault protection, a true 4- pole switch shall be supplied with all four poles mounted on a common shaft. The continuous current rating and the closing and withstand rating of the fourth pole shall be identical to the rating of the main poles. 3. The transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall be sized to exceed minimum wire bending space required by UL 1008. 4. The transfer switch shall be equipped with an internal welded steel pocket, housing an operations and maintenance manual. 5. The transfer switch shall be top and bottom accessible. 6. The main contacts shall be capable of being replaced without removing the main power cables. 7. The main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly of the transfer switch. 8. All bolted bus connections shall have Belleville compression type washers. 9. When a solid neutral is required, a fully rated bus bar with required AL-CU neutral lugs shall be provided. 10. Control components and wiring shall be front accessible. All control wires shall be multiconductor 18 gauge 600-volt SIS switchboard type point to point harness. All control wire terminations shall be identified with tubular sleeve-type markers. 11. The switch shall be equipped with 90 degrees C rated copper/aluminum solderless mechanical type lugs. 12. The complete transfer switch assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the specification requirements. A copy of the factory test report shall be available upon request. B. Automatic Transfer Switch 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by a single electrical operator momentarily energized, and connected to the AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 transfer mechanism by a simple over center type linkage. Total transfer time shall not exceed one half second 2. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungsten alloy. Separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts shall be provided on all transfer switches. Interlocked, molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe external manual operator, designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall provide the same contact to contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent a flashover from switching the main contacts slowly. The external manual operator shall be safely operated from outside of the transfer switch enclosure while the enclosure door is closed. C. Automatic Transfer Switch Controls 1. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control system, to provide all the operational functions of the automatic transfer switch. The controller shall have two asynchronous serial ports. The controller shall have a real time clock with NiCad battery back up. 2. The CPU shall be equipped with self diagnostics which perform periodic checks of the memory 1/0 and communication circuits, with a watchdog/power fail circuit 3. The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication protocol for high-speed serial communications via multidrop connection to other controllers and to a master terminal with up to 4000 ft of cable, or further, with the addition of a communication repeater. The serial communication port shall be RS422/485 compatible. 4. The serial communication port shall allow interface to either the manufacturers or owner furnished remote supervisory control. 5. The controller shall have password protection required to limit access to qualified and authorized personnel. 6. The controller shall include a 20 character, LCD display, with a keypad, which allows access to the system. 7. The controller shall include three-phase over/under voltage, over/under frequency, phase sequence detection and phase differential monitoring on both normal and emergency sources. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 8. The controller shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for access either locally or remotely: a. Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position (total since record reset). b. Number of hours emergency power is available (total since record reset). C. Total transfer in either direction (total since record reset). d. Date, time, and description of the last four source failures. e. Date of the last exercise period. f. Date of record reset. D. Sequence of Operation 1. When the voltage on any phase of the normal source drops below 80% or increases to 120%, or frequency drops below 90%, or increase to 110%, or 20% voltage differential between phases occurs, after a programmable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds factory set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips, the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant. 2. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant has reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases. 3. After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value of at least 90% to 110% of rated voltage, and at least 95% to 105% of rated frequency, and voltage differential is below 20%, an adjustable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds (factory set at 300 seconds) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source. 4. After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a programmable period of 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds. E. Automatic Transfer Switch Accessories 1. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage. Programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases, set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 2. Programmable three phase sensing of the emergency source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 3. Time delay for override of momentary normal source power outages (delays engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Programmable 0-9999 seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds, if not otherwise specified. 4. Time delay on retransfer to normal, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide programmable 0-9999 second time delay, factory set at 300 seconds, unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal. 5. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds. 6. A maintained type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, keypad initiated. 7. A remote type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, remote switch initiated. 8. A time delay bypass on retransfer to normal shall be included. Keypad initiated. 9. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to close on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting. 10. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source for customer functions. 11. Light emitting diodes shall be mounted on the microprocessor panel to indicate: switch is in normal position, switch is in emergency position and controller is running. 12. A plant exerciser shall be provided with (10) 7-day events, programmable for any day of the week and (24) calendar events, programmable for any month/day, to automatically exercise generating plant programmable in one-minute increments. Also include selection of either "no load" (switch will not transfer) or 'load" (switch will transfer) exercise period. Keypad initiated. 13. Provision to select either "no commit" or "commit" to transfer operation in the event of a normal power failure shall be included. In the "no commit position," the load will transfer to the emergency AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 position unless normal power returns before the emergency source has reach 90% of it's rated values (switch will remain in normal). In the "commit position" the load will transfer to the emergency position after any normal power failure. Keypad initiated. 14. Two auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 100 to 800 amps) 15 amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 1000 to 4000 amps), shall be mounted on the main shaft, one closed on normal, the other closed on emergency. Both contacts will be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections. 15. A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all three separate phase to phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and emergency source. 16. A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for both normal and emergency source. 17. An LCD readout shall display normal source and emergency source availability. F. The following accessories shall be available by simple activation, via the keypad: 1. Include (2) time delay contacts that open simultaneously just (milliseconds) prior to transfer in either direction. These contacts close after a time delay upon transfer. Programmable 0-9999 seconds after transfer. 2. A block transfer function shall be included, energized from a 24VDC signal from the generator control switchgear, to allow transfer to emergency. 3. A load-shed function shall be included, energized from a 24VDC signal from the generator control switchgear, to disconnect the load from the emergency source when an overload condition occurs. 4. A peak shave function shall be included, energized from a 24VDC signal from the generator control switchgear. This function will start the emergency generator and transfer the ATS to the emergency source reducing the utility supply to the building. After the peak shave signal is removed, the transfer switch will retransfer to the normal supply, bypassing the retransfer time delay. G. Approval 1. As a condition of approval, the manufacturer of the automatic transfer switches shall verify that their switches are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-1008 with 3 cycle short circuit closing and withstand as follows: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27,2025 RMS Symmetrical Amperes 480 VAC Current Limiting Amperes Closing and Withstand Fuse Rating 100—400 42,000 200,000 600—800 65,000 200,000 1000— 1200 85,000 200,000 1600—4000 100,000 200,000 2. During the 3 cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact welding or damage. The 3 cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current limiting fuses. The test shall verify that contact separation has not occurred, and there is contact continuity across all phases. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL- 1008, and testing shall be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 3. When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008, the manufacture shall include post-endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. 4. The microprocessor controller shall meet the following requirements: • Storage conditions- 25 degrees C to 85 degrees C • Operation conditions- 20 degrees C to 70 degrees C ambient • Humidity 0 to 99% relative humidity, noncondensing • Capable of withstanding infinite power interruptions • Surge withstand per ANSUIEEE C-37.90A-1978 5. Manufacturer shall provide copies of test reports upon request. H. Manufacturer 1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall employ a nationwide factory- direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour a day, 365 days a year, call basis. 2. The manufacture shall include an 800-telephone number, for field service contact, affixed to each enclosure. 3. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each transfer switch, by serial number, for a minimum 20 years. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be provided with adequate lifting means for ease of installation of wall or floor mounted enclosures. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 B. Provide access and working space as indicated or as required. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Tighten assembled bolted connections with appropriate tools to manufacturer's torque recommendations prior to first energization. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 [Addendum 01] February 27, 2025 SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protective devices (SPD) for the protection of all AC electrical circuits. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Other sections that may relate to the work in this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 262413 — Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards 2. Section 262416 — Low-Voltage Panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product information for approval and final documentation in the quantities listed according to the Conditions of the Contract. All transmittals shall be identified by customer name, customer location, and customer order number. B. Submittals shall include UL 1449 4th Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting www.UL.com, clicking "Certifications" link, searching using UL Category Code: VZCA. 1. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 2. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV) 4. I-nominal rating (1-n) 5. SPD shall be Type 1 UL listed and labeled C. Upon request, an unencapsulated but complete SPD formally known as TVSS shall be presented for visual inspection. D. Minimum of ten (10) year warranty 1.4 RELATED STANDARDS A. IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits, B. IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits, C. IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits. D. National Electrical Code: Article 285 E. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. UL 1449, Fourth Edition — Surge Protective Devices 1.5 LISTING REQUIREMENTS A. SPD shall bear the UL Mark and shall be Listed to most recent editions of UL 1449 and UL 1283. "Manufactured in accordance with" is not equivalent to UL listing and does not meet the intent of this specification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least ten (10) years experience in manufacturing transient voltage surge suppressors. B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals. One (1) copy of this document to be provided with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide an externally mounted transient voltage suppressors by Siemens or pre- approved equal. Approved manufacturers are as follows: 1. SIEMENS 2. APT 3. Eaton 4. Leviton 5. ABB 2.2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE FEATURES A. SPD shall be UL 1449 listed and labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstrated withstand testing of SPD, per NEC 285.6. B. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 intended for use without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls. Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal overcurrent and thermal over-temperature controls. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety disconnects do not meet the intent of this specification. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled with 20kA I-nominal (1-n) (verifiable at UL.com) for compliance to UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780. D. Suppression components shall be heavy duty `large block' MOVs, each exceeding 30mm diameter. E. Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems. F. If a dedicated breaker for the SPD is not provided in the switchboard, the service entrance SPD shall include an integral UL Recognized disconnect switch. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for distribution SPD's. G. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be: a. Service Entrance applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 12 with Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall be 250kA per phase. b. Distribution applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 09 with Maximum surge current capability of 100kA per phase 2. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following: VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 208Y/120V 700V 700V 700V 480Y/277V 1500V 1500V 1500 V I. UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes of protection (verifiable at UL.com): System Voltage Allowable System MCOV Volta e Fluctuation 208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/277V 20% 320V J. Service Entrance SPD shall be complimentary UL 1283 listed for EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of-50dB at 100kHz. K. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of ten (10) years, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period. L. Service Entrance SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function (excluding branch). 3. Form C dry contacts 4. Optional —Surge Counter SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation. M. Distribution Panels SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible Alarm & Dry Contacts 3. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION I. The installation shall meet the following criteria: 1. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and contract documents. 2. Install units plumb, level and rigid without distortion 3. One primary suppressor shall be installed external to the service entrance in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 4. Service Entrance SPD shall be installed on the line or load side of the main service disconnect. 5. Service Entrance SPD ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground. 6. At Service Entrance or Transfer Switch, a UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of servicing disconnect if a 60A breaker is not available. 7. One SPD shall be installed external to each designated distribution panelboard. 8. At Distribution, MCC and Branch, SPD shall have an independent means of servicing disconnect such that the protected panel remains energized. A 30A breaker (or larger) may serve this function. 9. SPD shall be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions with lead lengths as short (less than 24") and straight as possible. Gently twist conductors together. 10. Installer may reasonably rearrange breaker locations to ensure short & straightest possible leads to SPDs. 11. Before energizing, installer shall verify service and separately derived system Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers per NEC. 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Remove debris from SPD and wipe dust and dirt from all components. B. Repaint marred and scratched surface with touch up paint to match original finish. 3.3 TESTING A. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacture's recommendations. B. Check all installed panels for proper grounding, fastening and alignment. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.4 WARRANTY A. Equipment manufacturer warrants that all goods supplied are free of non- conformities in workmanship and materials for one year from date of initial operations, but not more than eighteen months from date of shipment. END OF SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 44 10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non- fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL. 1.04 SUBMITTALS -- FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000, 260100, and as stated herein. B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Dimensioned outline drawing 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Switch ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 5. Fuse ratings and type 6. Cable terminal sizes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS -- FOR INFORMATION A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Product sheets. 1.06 SUBMITTALS--FOR CLOSEOUT DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.08 NOT USED 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions prior to installation. Installation of all switches shall comply with the National Electric Codes clearance and mounting height requirements. B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Three (3) copies of these instruction manuals shall be submitted with the closeout documents listed in section 1.06. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens D. ABB 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings: 1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC, DC; 600 volts AC (30A to 200A 600 volts DC) 3. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. Non-Fusible and Fusible 5. Copper/aluminum standard mechanical lugs. B. Construction 1. Switchblades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily pad lockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeat-able door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Fusible switches rated 100A to 1200A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick- make/quick-break type (except 30A plug fuse-type). 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. All exterior switches shall be heavy-duty type. 11. All interior switches shall be general-duty type unless otherwise noted. C. Enclosures A. Exterior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 3R rainproof unless otherwise noted. B. Interior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. D. Fuses 1. Fuses shall be dual element, current limiting type such as Bussmann Low-Peak Yellow or equal. 2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers nameplates shall be front cover mounted, contain a permanent record of switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. All switches shall be cleaned free of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance by the owner. Remove all miscellaneous paint markings, grease and tar. 3.02 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 44 10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 51 00 LUMINAIRES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures 2. Lamps 3. Ballasts 4. Emergency lighting units 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C78 Series Lamps 2. C82.1-97 Electric Lamp Ballast- Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 3. C82.2-84 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Methods of Measurements 4. C82.4-92 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low- Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type) 5. C82.11-93 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.11-93 IEEE Recommended Practice on Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 844-95 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 2. 924-95 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 3. 935-95 Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 4. 1029-94 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 5. 1570-95 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures 6. 1571-95 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 7. 1572-97 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Emergency Lighting Unit: Fixture with integral emergency battery power supply and means for controlling and charging battery. Emergency units are available with integral lamps only. B. Fixture: Complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include battery and means for controlling and recharging battery. Emergency lighting units are available with and without integral lamp heads and lamps. C. Luminaire: Fixture. D. Average Life: Time after which 50% will have failed and 50% will have survived under normal conditions. E. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic current components divided by total fundamental (60 hz) current. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Describe fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following information: a. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal features. b. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of independent laboratory tests. C. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units. C. Shop Drawings: LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Detail nonstandard fixtures indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. D. Supplies: 1. Submit sample of fixture if different than specified. E. Miscellaneous: 1. Warranty for rechargeable battery. 2. Coordination drawings for fixtures that require coordination with other equipment installed in the same space. F. Substitutions to Specified Product 1. Prior approval requests will include the following a. Full submittal data, by type, clearly highlighted and arrowed to identify the specific proposed manufacturer's nomenclature b. Full submittal data of lamps of proposed manufacturer c. Full submittal data of ballast/driver (LED) data of proposed manufacturer d. LED lumen data shall include: i. Lumen output ii. L70 and L90 testing iii. Confirmation of independent test lab data ITL iv. Color temperature and CRI with quantity of McAdam Ellipse steps v. Data shall include sphere and goniometer results for total lumen, total power, luminaire efficacy, CRI and junction temperature for the specified color temperature vi. Make and brand of LED diode should be clearly identified on submittal data vii. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to the specified drivers, Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range, freedom from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial environment. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 viii. All substitutions must meet specified fixtures certifications ( UL,ETL,CE,CSA,RoHS,DLC, Energy Star) 2. Provide lighting calculations with the prior approval request based on reflectance values and light loss factors provided by the engineer and displayed on lighting calculation drawings. (may be unique by area) Calculations shall be shown on one sheet with dimensions as shown on construction set. Data will be submitted electronically in dxf format on a flash drive and with printed calculations on Architectural E size sheets to scale with construction set sheets. a. Discrepancies between prior approval data calculations and the original design calculations will result in immediate disqualification of review due to time based constraints on the bid process 3. Prior approval request may require a sample of both the proposed and specified fixtures provided by the alternate manufacturer at NO additional cost to the project. Samples of both specified and proposed must be provided within 10 working days of request. 4. Energy calculations (Comcheck) must be provided with specification sheets including lamp and ballast data supporting input wattages highlighted in yellow and clearly identified by type. Input voltages must coincide with panel schedules. This data will be submitted under separate cover with the prior approval request 5. All data will be submitted electronically and in a bound format a. Bound data will be secured in hard binder with 3" rings for ease of review. b. Types will be marked with a tab by type and indexed for ease of reference 6. LED warranty information MUST be included by type and marked in RED to clearly identify the manufacturer's warranty terms. Warranty data MUST meet or exceed the specified manufacturers terms 7. Prior approvals MUST be received and acknowleged to the specifiers office no less than 15 days prior to bid. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 8. ALL prior approval data must be submitted in one package with complete information. Information that is incomplete will be rejected without review. 9. The prior approval will be returned marked approved or rejected by type with no explanation. If any specification is deemed not equal the review will be stopped and the type rejected with no explanation. 10. Lumen output for the proposed fixture must be highlighted in yellow for clear identification 11. All inverter systems that supply power to LED fixtures must have pure PWM sine wave function and work with any type of lighting load. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage. B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scarring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Coordinate fixtures mounting hardware and trim with ceiling system. PART 2 PRODUCTS LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.01 FIXTURES, GENERAL: A. Comply with requirements specified in Paragraphs below and lighting fixture schedule. 2.02 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL: A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support components to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85% 2. Specular Surfaces: 83% 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75% 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90% E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100% virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass except as indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch, minimum. 2.03 SUSPENDED FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS: A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, '/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount single fixture. Finish same as fixture. C. Rod Hangers: '/4-inch diameter cadmium plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord and locking-type plug. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.04 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LED LAMPS A. All LED products must be UL, ETL and/or CSA listed B. All LED products must have LM-79 and LM-80 testing noted on specification sheet by an independent test lab 1. See note P this section C. All LED products should be identified as L70 and/or L90 ratings based on independent test lab data D. All outdoor pole mounted products must have surge suppression within each fixture. 1. See note P this section E. All outdoor and wet location listed products must clearly state the I rating carried on the fixture based on independent test lab data F. All LED products must be serviceable for accessable for field reapair needs G. All outdoor lighting color rendering should be within a 7 step McAdams Ellipse. All outdoor lighting should be 4000 kelvin unless specifically noted 1. See note P this section H. All indoor lighting color rendering should be within a 3 step McAdams ellipse. All indoor lighting should be 4000-4100 kelvin unless specifically noted 1. See note P this section I. All control systems that interface with an LED product will be supported by a project "integrator" until project completion. This includes contact with the installer prior to installation, availability during installation, and final checkout and startup after installation. The quantity of days required for startup will be based on the manufacturer/agents discretion and need. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. The project integrator must be capable of performing low voltage and dmx terminations. High voltage terminations are performed solely by the electrical subcontractor. 2. Reporting of final startup completion of the controls system back to the engineer is mandantory. J. Invitation to attend the training with the owners representative should be made to the engineer no less than 5 days prior to training K. Signature confirmation of training and startup is required within 5 business days after completion back to the engineers office. 1. A follow up call will be made to the owner 30-45 days after the startup and training of the controls system by the manufacturers representative to ensure all systems are operating to design specification. A 3 hour onsite system fine tuning at no additional cost to the owner is inclusive if requested by the owner at that time for additional training and programming. L. All LED drivers should be capable of 0-10 volt controls and DMX control and shall dim to 1% of total lumen output . Where specifically specified the dimming driver may be required to dim to .1% of lumen output , otherwise known as "dim to dark" M. Driver manufacturers must have a 5 year history producing dimmable electronic LED drivers for the North American market. N. Ambient driver tiemperatures must be within -20 degrees to 50 degrees C (4 degrees to 122 degrees F) O. Driver must limit inrush current. 1. Base specification: meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430 amp per 10 amps load with a maximum of 370 amps/2 seconds 2. Preferred specification : Meet or exceed 30ma's at 277 VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75A at 240us att 277 VAC for 100 watts of load 3. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A 4. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10% line voltage input. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5. Total harmonic distortion less than 20%, and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD 6. See note P this section. P. Any exceptions are at the engineers discretion based on project needs and applicability. 2.05 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570. B. Ballasts: Electronic type. Conform to UL 935, ANSI C82.11 and NFPA 70. 1. Certification: By Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). 2. Labeling: By Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P, 0.95 P.F. minimum. 4. Sound Rating: "A" rating, except as indicated otherwise. 5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. 6. Temperature: Start and operate at minimum of 501 F. 7. THD: 10 percent maximum. C. Low Temperature Ballast: Start and maintain operation at a minimum of 00 F. D. T-8 Lamp Ballasts: Full-light output type, compatible with energy-saving lamps. Following are required average input wattages when tested according to ANSI C82.2. 1. 39 or less when operating one F32T8 lamp. 2. 62 or less when operating two F32T8 lamps. 3. 95 or less when operating three F32T8 lamps. 4. 114 or less when operating four F32T8 lamps. E. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall have 100% acrylic prismatic lenses with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Provide ballasts with following features, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high-power- factor type. 2. Voltage rating matches system voltage. 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of—300 C. 4. Normal ambient operating temperature is 400 C. 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. 6. Noise Suppression: Manufacturer's standard epoxy encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. 2.07 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES: A. Conform to UL 1571. 2.08 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS: A. Conform to UL 844 or provide units that have Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) certification for indicated class and division of hazard. 2.09 EXIT SIGNS: A. Conform to UL 924. 1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code. B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Backup): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium type 1.5 hour minimum emergency run time. 2.09 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS: A. Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with features and characteristics as indicated on the drawings. 2.10 LAMPS: A. Conform to ANSI C78 series applicable to each type of lamp. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Fluorescent Lamps: Color temperature of 35000 K. 2.11 FINISH: A. Steel Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters and defects. Remove fixtures showing evidence of corrosion during project warranty period and replace with new fixtures. B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Set units plumb, square and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent fixtures, and secure according to manufacturer's printed instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. C. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job prior to commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style and pattern of ceiling being installed. D. Where recessed fixtures are supported by ceiling support grid, install additional support wires near each corner of the fixture. E. Make branch circuit wiring connections with conductors having an insulation temperature rating suitable for the fixture. F. Ground and bond fixtures in accordance with Section 16060. G. Install lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions and fixture schedule. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Give 7-days notice of dates and times for field tests. C. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. D. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. 1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shut-down. 3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Low supply voltage transfer. E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean fixtures upon completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. C. Set and adjust photocells and/or time switches for proper operation as directed by Owner. 3.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION JOBSITE VISIT: A. Pre-construction On-site Services to be provided by Lighting/Controls vendor/supplier: The project electrical contractor shall contact Lighting vendor/supplier to schedule a jobsite meeting prior to the installation of the lighting control system. Purposeof the meeting is to review submittals and installation documentation provided by the system manufacturer. Discussion should include wiring conventions and specific wiring requirements. Installation of specific devices is also to be addressed. Prior to start-up Lighting manufactures representative shall send a field service technician to visit the jobsite to confirm progress and answer any additional questions. Start-up date is to be confirmed at the time of this visit. Training agenda shall be provided to the contractor/distributor. Contractor/distributor shall confirm with the owner's representative and specifying engineer attendance at lighting system demonstrations and for LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 training. Contractor/distributorshall provide to field service technician programming information as required for start- up such as but not limited to zone assignments, time schedules for operation, presets for all control stations, programming sequences for dynamic LED fixtures, emergency operation, blink-warn, and system override. Programming information is required for system set-up and pre-start-up. B. Lighting Control System Start-up and Training 1. Prior to energizing lighting control system the following must be completed: No component of the lighting control system shall be energized until a factory certified field service engineer has approved the installation of the system by the project electrical contractor. The electrical contractor/distributor shall contact the Lighting vendor/supplier at least 3 weeks prior to the requested start-up date to schedule a field service technician to be at the jobsite. Request shall be in writing and shall include filled out start-up request form and dated jobsite photos of the dimmer and/or relay panels. Lighting Control system is defined as the dimmer/relay panel(s) and all associated control stations and related accessories. The electrical contractor is responsible to install the entire lighting control system, all power feeders, all load wiring, and control wiring. Equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, contract documents, and national and local codes and regulations. Equipment shall be plumb and level to the finished floor. All components of the lighting control system shall be clean, free of dust and paint spatters. Components shall be unmarred or damaged. All cable shall be dressed, neatly routed, and labeled. All conduit shall be securely attached to the dimmer/relay panel. Start-up services are not provided in conjunction or in association with anycommissioning of lighting or other related control systems. 2. System Start-up Each dimmer/relay shall be tested by the electrical contractor (with a multi-meter) to confirm what voltage is being passed and to confirm that no voltage is being passed when the circuit is open. A representative of the owner shall be present to observe the testing/demonstration of the dimmer/relay panels. Each individual LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 dimmer/relay panel shall be load tested with all circuits on while under load for a minimum of 1 hour. Where external devices are to be attached to the dimmer/relay panel including photocell, occupancy sensor, time clock, DMX controller, and/or control stations, operation of each device should be verified at the panel and specific circuits that are programmed to be controlled by the external device(s). Where control signals originate from the dimmer/relay panel for control of lighting fixtures, the control signal shall be tested by the electrical contractor to confirm that it is being delivered to each lighting fixture. Proper operation of the lighting fixtures shall beconfirmed as part of the system testing/demonstration. 3. Training Training shall be provided for the owner's representative and contractor. Prior to start-up the owner's representative and electrical contractor/distributor shall acknowledge receipt of training agenda. The electrical contractor/distributor shall confirm that the specifying engineer has been contacted and been invited to attend the system demonstration and/or training. All product and lighting control system documentation and operation's manuals shall be provided by electrical contractor/distributor at the time of training. Training is to include, but not be limited to: basic operation of lighting control system, set-up of system and control panels, operation of control stations, programming of system, basic de-bugging, and overall system testing. At completion of training session all in attendees shall sign the start-up technician's field service report to confirm participation in the training session. Completed field service report shall be submitted to the electrical contractor/distributor and specifying engineer. 3.05 Follow-up Contact Services Approximately 90 days following the initialization of the lighting control system the Lighting/controls vendor/supplier shall contact the electrical contractor/distributor to confirm that the system is operating correctly and answer any questions that have come-up since system initialization. 3.06 Extended Follow-up Contact On-site Services Approximately 300 days following initialization of the lighting control LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 system the Lighting/controls vendor/supplier shall contact the owner's representative in order to schedule a job site visit. The purpose of the visit shall be to confirm that all lighting control equipment that was initialized by lighting/control vendor/supplier is fully functioning. Any equipment not functioning as originally specified shall be repaired as required. In addition if the end user has adjustments that need to be made to programming or to any of the control of the system these shall be made during the jobsite visit. If further training on the system is required this shall be provided at the time of the visit or scheduled at a time of mutual convenience. A completed field service report shall be submitted to the electrical contractor, specifying engineer, and the owner's representative. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 74 00 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS (ROUGH-IN) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions govern work under this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes work required to provide a system of raceways,outlet boxes with covers, terminal boards, and grounding to accommodate the installation of the telephone/data cabling system by Owner/Owner's vendor. Note that some indicated ceilings are inaccessible and extensions of raceways to accessible ceiling areas will be required. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 — ELECTRICAL 1.04 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. It is the intent of this Specification to provide a system of raceways and outlets to accommodate the installation of telephone and data cabling by the Owner's vendor under a separate contract. The Contract Documents indicate the location and size of the main telephone service raceway and the location of telephone/data outlets and terminal boards. Routing of raceway system between outlets and terminal points shall be determined in the field by the contractor. Design of the system is based upon the premise that the telephone/data system installer will provide UL listed low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to NEC requirements, permitting open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Raceways: All raceways shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 261360. B. Outlet Cover Plates: All outlet coverplates shall be in accordance with the TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS(ROUGH-IN) 26 74 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 requirements of Section 261400. Provide for unused outlet boxes. C. Terminal Boards: Terminal boards shall be 3/4-inch type Marine grade plywood having two coats of insulating oil base exterior enamel paint applied before installation on both sides and all edges. The quantity and dimensions shall be as indicated on the drawings. D. Cabling: By Owner's vendor under separate contract. E. Jacks: By Owner's vendor under separate contract. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Install terminal boards straight and level at locations indicated on drawings. Attach to masonry walls using expansion anchors, to CMU walls using toggle bolts, and to sheetrock and plaster walls using wood or sheet metal lag bolts fastened into the wall supporting the structure. The use of toggle bolts in sheetrock and plaster walls is not acceptable. Install anchors at a maximum of 24-inches on center at the perimeter of each board. B. At the main terminal board, stub-up the service entrance conduits at one end of the board within 3 inches of the supporting wall. C. Service entrance conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel or PVC encased in concrete with steel reinforced where it passes through the foundation and for at least 5' beyond the building line. D. Unless otherwise indicated, distribution raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing, except the PVC Schedule 40 may be used where raceway is buried in concrete slabs, columns, or beams. Provide insulating bushings at the ends of all raceways. E. The conduit size for each outlet shall be 1-1/4 inch minimum. F. Boxes shall be steel having the minimum dimensions of4-11/16"x4-11/16"x2-1/8". G. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling. Terminate conduit with bushing. H. Provide raceways sufficient to accommodate telephone cabling where passing through mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, pipe chases, mechanical chases, areas without ceilings(exposed structure), and nonaccessible areas such as ceiling plenums and crawl spaces. I. Provide 3/4-inch conduit with#6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location and bond to building grounding system as indicated on drawings. J. Contact local telephone company to coordinate the exact telephone service entrance location and requirements prior to installing the telephone service raceways. K. Refer to construction drawings for additional requirements. END OF SECTION 26 74 00 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS(ROUGH-IN) 26 74 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 26 75 00 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM (ROUGH-IN) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions govern work under this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes work required to provide a system of raceways,outlet boxes and grounding of a cable TV system. Note that some indicated ceilings are inaccessible and extensions of raceways to accessible ceiling areas will be required. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 — ELECTRICAL 1.04 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. It is the intent of this Specification to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes and grounding to accommodate a CATV system by the Owner's vendor under a separate contract. The Contract Documents indicate the location and size of the main Cable service raceway and the location of TV outlets. Routing of raceway system between outlets and terminal points shall be determined in the field by the contractor. Design of the system is based upon the premise that the cable TV system installer will provide UL listed low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to NEC requirements, permitting open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Raceways: All raceways shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 261360. B. Outlet Cover Plates: Provide outlet cover plates in accordance with the requirements of Section 261400. Provide where outlet boxes are unused. C. Terminal Boards: Terminal boards shall be 3/-inch type Marine grade plywood CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM (ROUGH-IN) 26 75 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 having two coats of insulating oil base exterior enamel paint applied before installation on both sides and all edges. The quantity and dimensions shall be as indicated on the drawings. Label terminal board "CATV". PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Install terminal boards straight and level at locations indicated on drawings. Attach to masonry walls using expansion anchors, to CMU walls using toggle bolts, and to sheetrock and plaster walls using wood or sheet metal lag bolts fastened into the wall supporting the structure. The use of toggle bolts in sheetrock and plaster walls is not acceptable. Install anchors at a maximum of 24-inches on center at the perimeter of each board. B. At the main terminal board, stub-up the service entrance conduits at one end of the board within 3 inches of the supporting wall. C. Unless otherwise indicated, distribution raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing, except the PVC Schedule 40 may be used where raceway is buried in concrete slabs, columns, or beams. Provide insulating bushings at the ends of all raceways. D. The conduit size for each outlet shall be 3/4-inch minimum. E. Boxes shall be steel having the minimum dimensions of4-11/16"x4-11/16"x2-1/8". F. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling. Terminate conduit with bushing. G. Provide raceways sufficient to accommodate cabling where passing through mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, pipe chases, mechanical chases, areas without ceilings (exposed structure), and non-accessible areas such as ceiling plenums and crawl spaces. H. Provide 3/4-inch conduit with#6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location and bond to building grounding system as indicated on drawings. I. Provide pull wire or mylar cord in any empty conduit. J. Coordinate final termination with the Architect, Owner's representative and the Local Cable TV provider. END OF SECTION 26 75 00 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM (ROUGH-IN) 26 75 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes general design requirements, administration topics, and installation for communications systems. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The objective of this project is to provide a complete communications cabling infrastructure system installation including, but not limited to: fiber backbone, riser system, horizontal data and voice cabling with attendant terminations, mounting equipment, cable pathway and management systems, testing and other items/materials, as specified in drawings, these specifications, and contract documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 3. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 4. Section 270543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 5. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 7. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems (including related sub-sections) 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections) 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section establishes an infrastructure to be used as signal pathways for communications systems, but is not limited to the following: 1. Comply with all Project Contract documents and the following requirements for a complete project installation. 2. Provide a structured cabling system as described hereafter that includes, but is not limited to, supplying, installing and testing of: backbone cabling, riser cabling; data and voice horizontal cabling, cable connectors, communications outlets and terminations, and equipment racks/cabinets for networking hardware and patch panels. 3. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation described herein. 4. Follow industry standard installation procedures for communications cable to assure that the mechanical and electrical transmission characteristics of this cable plant and equipment are maintained. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 B. Work of this section covers complete installation of permanent and channel links for a data and voice communications networks utilizing copper and fiber transmission media that includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Provide, install,terminate,test,and document all fiber and copper backbone cables, riser cables, and horizontal cables. 2. Provide and install all termination devices such as, but not limited to, modular patch panels, termination blocks, information outlets (jacks and plates), phone jacks, fiber distribution panels, bulkheads, connectors, and fiber fan out kits. Document all termination devices with proper labeling. 3. Provide in quantities specified, interconnect components such as, but not limited to,fiber patch cables, copper patch cords, and station cables. 4. Provide and install specified Telecommunication Room equipment such as, but not limited to, racks, cabinets, horizontal and vertical cable support devices, cable trays and cable runway, and required mounting brackets/hardware. 5. Provide and install UL-approved firestopping systems in all communication pass-through locations of rated ceiling, wall or floor penetrations involving, conduits, cable, and cable trays in coordination with General Contractor. 6. Provide and install grounding and bonding connection to the bus (PBB/SBB) provided by Division 26. 7. Provide and install all appropriate consumable items required to complete the installation. 8. Coordination with other trades. 9. Provide complete documentation and demonstration of work. 10. Provide indexed and organized complete Test Results of all copper and fiber cable and their components in native format. 11. Provide Submittals as outlined below. 12. Provide a Manufacturer's Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system. 13. Conduct a final document handover meeting with client, consultant, and PM to review, discuss and educate the Owner on the final product, test results, and As-Built Drawings. C. Changes to the Scope of Work 1. Owner changes to the scope of work shall be in writing. 2. Change orders shall be submitted to the Owner/Project Manager complete with price breakdown and description for approval before any work is done. 3. The Contractor shall respond to these changes with a complete material list, including pricing, labor, and taxes in writing to be presented to the Owner for approval. 4. The Contractor shall not proceed with additional scope of work without signed approval by the Owner. Owner will not pay for additional work performed by the Contractor without written/signed approval of these changes. 5. Contractor will attach a copy of the signed change order with billing information. 1.4 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS(NIC) COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 A. The Owner may separately procure and/or provide certain equipment and component that will be installed during the course of project. Such items may not be indicated in the documents. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and Owner's suppliers when considering: 1. The provision and installation of phone systems, related system equipment/software,and employee station equipment/software. 2. The provision and installation of multi-port routers, switches, and other Layer 2/ Layer 3 networking components in communications rooms. 3. The provision and installation of Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) devices in communications rooms. 4. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building electrode system. 5. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, and utility outlets. 6. The installation and finishing of plywood backboards. 7. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system (HVAC), and environmental control sensors. 8. Communication pathway devices such as, but not limited to, cable tray and flex-tray in corridors, office spaces and open areas, outlet boxes and stub-ups, conduits, conduit sleeves, and penetrations in walls and floors. 1.5 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitution may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. An alternate product must be equal to or exceed specified requirements. The material substituted shall not void, alter or change manufacturers' structured cabling system warranty. B. Document substitution requests with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Include in each request for substitution: 1. Product identification, manufacturer's name and address. 2. Product Data: a) Description, performance and test data, reference standards,finishes and colors. b) Samples: Finishes. c) Complete and accurate drawings indicating construction revisions required (if any) to accommodate substitutions. d) Data relating to changes required in construction schedule. e) Cost comparison between specified and proposed substitution. C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 D. The Owner will be the final judge of acceptability, with review by DataCom Design Group and the distribution of the acceptance by the Architect. E. No substitute shall be ordered, installed or utilized without the Architect's prior written verification of acceptance from the Owner. 1.6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General provisions of the contract, including Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Architectural plans and specifications, requirements of Division 1, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, Audio-Visual, Security and Communications specifications and plans,and the publications listed below applyto the Communications section, are incorporated into this specification by reference, and shall be considered a part of this section. B. Reference to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract. C. The Contractor shall read all sections in their entirety and apply them as appropriate for work in this section. D. Conflicts 1. Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. 2. In general,the specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials and tests, and the drawings establish the quantities,details,and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to during the installation of the communications system components. 3. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, or between specification sections, the items with the greater quantity and/or quality shall be estimated and installed. 4. Clarification with the Owner and/or DataCom Design Group about these items shall be made in writing prior to procurement and installation. E. Codes and Standards 1. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA) a) ANSI/TIA-568.0-E "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" b) ANSI/TIA-568.1-E "Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard" c) ANSI/TIA-568.2-D-2 "Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard" COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 d) ANSI/TIA-568.3-D "Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard" e) ANSI/TIA-568.4-D "Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard" f) ANSI/TIA-569-E "Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" g) ANSI/TIA-606-D "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure" h) ANSI/TIA-607-D "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications" i) ANSI/TIA-758-C "Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard" j) ANSI/TIA-862-B "Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard" k) ANSI/TIA-942-B: "Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers" 1) ANSI/TIA-1152-A: "Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling" 2. BICSI a) BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual b) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) a) NEC Article 250- Grounding and Bonding b) NEC Chapter 8- Communications Systems 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a) NEMA RN1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit b) NEMA TC2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Tubing and Conduit c) NEMA TC3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing d) NEMA VE 1- Metal Cable Tray Systems e) NEMA VE 2 -Cable Tray Installation Guidelines 5. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of installation. 6. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 a) It shall be indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any, and the country of origin. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Communications Contractor shall have a complete working knowledge of low voltage communications cabling applications such as, but not limited to data, voice and video network systems. B. Communications Contractor shall have installed similar-sized systems in at least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5) years prior to this bid and be regularly engaged in the business of installation of the types of systems specified in this document. C. Communications Contractor and individual installation crew members shall be experienced and qualified to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. All onsite supervision personnel that will be assigned to this project shall be listed in the Pre-Installation Submittal. 1. 80%shall have a minimum of three (3)years of experience in the installation of the types of systems, equipment, and cables specified in this document prior to this bid. 2. All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all applicable methods, standards, and codes. 3. All members of the installation team shall be certified by the Structured Cabling System Assurance Warranty provider as having completed the necessary training to complete their part of the installation and capable of an installation that falls under manufacturer's guidelines necessary to obtain the Manufacturer's System Assurance Warranty. 4. Any personnel substitutions shall be noted in writing to the Owner. D. A BICSI RCDD shall supervise and approve all on-site work as a recognized member of the Contractor's installation team. E. Refer also to General Conditions. 1.8 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. In order to accomplish the conditions of this agreement, the Contractor shall perform the specific duties listed herein. B. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, supervision, tools, equipment, test equipment, tests and services to provide and install a complete communications cabling infrastructure system. Pay all required sales, gross receipts, and other taxes. C. Insurance 1. The Contractor shall procure, submit for review, and maintain for the duration of this agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from, or in connection with, the performance of work hereunder by the COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 Contractor, his agents, representatives,employees or subcontractor.The Contractor shall pay the cost of such insurance. 2. The Owner, its directors, officers, representatives, agents and employees, respectively, shall have no responsibility to the Contractor with respect to any insurance in accordance with the provisions set forth herein. D. Regulatory Requirements 1. Communications Contractor shall supply all city, county, and state telecommunication cabling permits required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Communications Contractor shall be licensed and/or bonded as required for telecommunications/low voltage cabling systems. E. Privacy and Confidentiality 1. The Contractor will respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of Owner, its employees, processes, products,and intellectual property to extent necessary,consistent with the legal responsibilities of the Owner policies. 2. Contractors shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this project. F. Use of Subcontractors 1. Successful bidder shall inform the Owner's contact and General Contractor in writing about the intention to use Subcontractors and the scope of work for which they are being hired. 2. The Owner or Owner's designated contact must approve the use of Subcontractors in writing prior to the Subcontractor's hiring and start of any work. G. The Contractor's designated Project Manager will be recognized as the single point of contact. The Project manager shall oversee all work performed to ensure compliance with specifications as outlined in bid documents (which includes all specifications, references, and drawings) to ensure a quality installation and attend project meetings with the telecommunication consultant,the Owner and others. H. Coordination 1. Coordinate installation work with other trades(examples include ceiling grid contractors, HVAC and sheet metal contractors,etc.)to resolve procedures and installation placement for cable trays and cable bundle pathways. 2. The goal of this coordination will be to establish priority pathways for critical data/voice network cable infrastructure, materials, associated hardware, as well as mitigate delays to the project and to allow service access for communications and HVAC components. 3. Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 4. Coordinate with electrical contractors and plan for the pathway routes used communications cabling to minimize cable lengths. Report any potential over distance cable runs for approval before pulling the cables. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 5. Record agreements with other trades and distribute record to other participants, Owner and telecommunication consultant. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Communications Contractor shall attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work of this section. This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing with consultant and/or project manager/Owner representative. B. Agenda 1. Safety 2. Work to be performed 3. Scheduling 4. Coordination 5. Other topics as necessary C. Attendance 1. Communications project manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by General Contractor, Owner's representatives, and other parties affected by work of this document. 2. All individuals who will serve in an on-site supervisory capacity, including project managers, site supervisors, and lead installers, shall be required to attend the pre- installation conference. Individuals who do not attend the conference will not be permitted to supervise the installation and testing of communications cables on the project. 1.10 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION A. DataCom Design Group may perform site visits and provide job field reports upon inspection of Contractor's installation, materials, supporting hardware, coordination with other trades and progress to schedule to the client. B. Job Field Report outline: 1. General: The general installation progress in relation to scheduled work made by the Contractor up to that date. 2. Deficiencies and/or Items of Note: Documents observations of the cable installation that may require corrective action by the Contractor. 1.11 POST INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. At the time of substantial completion the contractor shall call and arrange for a post installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to include but not be limited to As-Built Drawings,Test reports, Warranty paperwork, etc. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 B. Attendees shall include 1. Communications Contractor 2. Project Manager/Owner Representative 3. DataCom Design Group 4. General Contractor 5. Other trades that the GC deems appropriate. C. At this meeting the Communications Contractor shall present and explain all documentation. D. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by participants shall be remedied by the Communications Contractor and resubmitted within one (1) week of the meeting. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Coordination with delivery companies, drivers, site address, and contact person(s) will be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Communications Contractor requirements: 1. Be responsible for prompt material deliveries to meet contracted completion date. 2. Coordinate deliveries and submittals with the General Contractor to ensure a timely installation. 3. No equipment materials shall be delivered to the job site more than three weeks prior to the commencement of its installation. 4. Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification clearly marked. 5. Equipment shall not be damaged in any way and shall comply with manufacturer's operating specifications. 6. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity,temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 7. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 8. Contractor shall be responsible for all handling and control of equipment. Contractor is liable for any material loss due to delivery and storage problems. 1.13 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall be a certified Manufacturer's Value Added Reseller (VAR) and/or Authorized Installer and provide an end-to-end product warranty, adhere to the industry standard engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this project. B. Contractor shall coordinate with manufacturer for warranty paperwork and procedures prior to the start of the project. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 C. Contractor shall provide a minimum one (1) year warranty on installation and workmanship PLUS an Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system and shall commit to make available local support for the product and system during the Warranty period. 1. The Extended Product Warranty shall apply to all passive structured cabling system components and shall cover the replacement or repair of defective products and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective products for a minimum of one (1)year. 2. The System Assurance Warranty provides a complete system and product warranty that will be extended to the end-user, ensuring the structured cabling system will be free of defects in materials and workmanship, will meet or exceed applicable performance requirements defined in the contract documents, and support all current and future network applications for a minimum of twenty(20)years. D. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer shall be provided with a numbered certificate,from the manufacturer, registering the installation. 1.14 PAYMENT A. Refer to the General Contractor contract documents and/or master specifications issued by Architect for project and cost payment details. 1.15 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Requirements of Division 1. B. Refer to Sections 271300 and 271500. C. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data,or samples until Owner has approved the respective submittal in writing. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. D. Pre-Installation Submittal Requirements 1. Communications Contractor shall provide certificates for the appropriate insurance coverage as defined in contract documents. 2. City, county, and/or state telecommunication cabling permits as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Executed non-disclosure agreement. 4. Appoint a Project Manager and provide the name and contact information. 5. Shop Drawings a) Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, floor plans that identify all device locations, cable routes, cable lengths,cable quantities and cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1) Communication Contractor shall notify Owner of cable routes exceeding standardized lengths. b) Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, diagrams that show room layouts, rack layouts (including elevations), riser layouts, etc. c) The Contractor shall make any corrections as required by the consultant team and submit revised shop drawings to the team for approval. d) Approval by the Consultant of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. Requests to deviate shall be submitted in writing to the Architect. 6. Product Data Cut-sheets a) Communications Contractor shall submit catalogue cut-sheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and complete model number for each product specified. Model number shall be handwritten and/or highlighted to indicate exact selection. b) Communications Contractor shall identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for each component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation. 7. Warranty a) The Communications Contractor shall submit appropriate documentation from the certifying manufacturer showing the project is registered and qualified for the System Assurance Warranty. b) All subsequent work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring approval of the System Assurance Warranty manufacturer's warranty registration qualification procedures that would disqualify any part or all of the wiring system from that warranty qualification. 8. Qualifications a) Communications Contractor shall submit a list of the Contractor's previous projects that demonstrate qualification for this project. This list shall include, but not be limited to: 1) At least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5)years 2) Name and location of project 3) Project contacts, email addresses, and phone numbers 4) Total square footage 5) Total number of cables/drops COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 6) Types of media b) Communications Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid statement of qualifications for those assigned to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. 1) Communications Contractor Employees 2) Subcontractors c) Manufacturer certifications for Contractor and installers. 9. Cable Testing Plan a) The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed test plan for approval of the cabling system specified herein, including a complete list of test equipment for copper and fiber components and accessories prior to beginning cable testing. b) The following minimal items shall be submitted for review: 1) A testing plan that clearly describes procedures and methods. 2) Product data for test equipment. 3) Certifications and qualifications of all persons conducting the testing. 4) Calibration certificates indicating that equipment calibration meets National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards and has been calibrated at least once in the previous year of the testing date. 5) Examples of test reports, including all graphs, tables, and charts necessary for display of testing results. 10. Samples a) For workstation outlet connectors, jack assemblies, housings and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical specifications and requirements. Confirm with Architect, interior designer, and Owner representative for color before purchasing materials. E. Closeout Submittal Requirements 1. As-Built Drawings a) Communications Design drawings are to be supplied to the Architect to prepare the master "As-Built" drawings. b) Submit one electronic copy and one hard copy with project deliverables within three (3) weeks subsequent to substantial completion. Provide a laminated floorplan with drop designations in the respective serving Telecom Room. c) As-Built drawings shall be in AutoCAD format, same version as used by Architect and consultant. Dimensions and scale of the drawing sheets submitted shall match the size of the drawing sheets used for the contract documents. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 d) Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that match AutoCAD standards, Architect and Consultant guidelines, and methodology. e) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the building identified in, but not limited to, addendum, change notices, site instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions. 1) Contractor shall clearly identify any resubmitted drawing sheets, documents or cut sheets either by using a color to highlight or cloud around resubmitted information. 2) Maintain drawing numbering or page/sheet scheme consistency as per previously issued drawings/documents. f) Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of networking components, showing: 1) All work area outlet locations complete with outlet/cable labeling. 2) Rack and/or cabinet locations complete with labeling. 3) One-line diagram of equipment/device interconnections with the cable plant. 4) Standard or typical details of installations unique to Owner's requirements. 2. The Communications Contractor shall deliver the Installer's Extended Product Warranty and Manufacturer's signed System Assurance Warranty of installed cabling system to include all components that comprise the complete cabling system. a) Delivery shall be completed within two (2) weeks of the time of final punch list review. b) Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 3. Cable Testing Report Requirements a) Submit certified test reports of Contractor-performed tests. Contractor shall submit the required Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon completion of testing the installed system. b) The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the media and its components fully comply with the requirements specified herein. c) Three(3)sets of electronic and hardcopy versions of test reports shall be submitted together and clearly identified with cable designations. d) Cable inventory data shall be submitted for all fiber, copper, and coaxial cabling and termination components. Include products furnished: 1) Manufacturer's name 2) Manufacturer's part numbers COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3) Cable designations 4) Location and riser assignments 5) Product Data 4. Supply Owner with training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases. F. The Contractor's BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) supervisor shall review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting.The Contractor's RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein upon completion of all work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMMARY A. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening. B. All material and equipment, as provided, should be the standard Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) products of a manufacturer engaged in the manufacturing of such products. 1. All shall be typical commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. 2. All material and equipment shall be readily available through manufacturers and/or distributors. C. All equipment shall be standard catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied complete with any optional items required for proper installation. D. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance and backward compatibility. E. All materials shall be UL- and/or ETL-approved and labeled in accordance with NEC for all products where labeling service normally applies. F. Materials and equipment requiring UL 94, 149 or 1863 listing shall be so labeled. Modification of products that nullifies UL labels is not permitted. G. Backward Compatibility: The provided products shall be backward compatible with lower category ratings such that if higher category components are used with lower category components, the basic link and channel measures shall meet or exceed the lower category's specified parameters. H. Component Compliance: The provided products shall each meet the minimum transmission specifications listed herein such that no individual component will be less than specifications for COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 permanent link and channel, regardless of the fact that tests for link and channel ultimately meet required specifications. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Identification (Labeling) System 1. Brady 2. Dymo 3. Hellerman-Tyton 4. Acceptable alternate B. Fire-Stop Systems 1. Hilti 2. SpecSeal 3. 3 M 4. Acceptable alternate C. Other Products as Referenced in other Division 27 Specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements 1. Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. B. Established Dimensions 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, coordinate with the General Contractor to establish dimensions. 2. When approved in writing, proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. 3. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. C. Pre-installation inspection 1. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport. 2. Visibly damaged goods are not acceptable and shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Contractor shall install work in accordance with specifications, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data. B. Allowable cable bend radius and pull tension: a) In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. b) Refer to cable manufacturer's bend radius recommendations for the maximum allowable limits. c) After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue. Use only lubricants specifically designed for cable installation. C. Pull Strings 1. Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed (trailer strings) as part of this contract. 2. Data and video cables can be pulled in tandem with pull strings. 3. The pull strings must move freely to prevent cable jacket/cable damage during pulls. D. Labeling 1. Cable labels:Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. 2. Flat-surface labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth labels, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. 3. Provide transparent plastic label holders, and 4-pair marked colored labels. 4. In accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-C "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure": a) Install colored labels according to the type of field as per color code designations. b) Use "designation strip color-code guidelines for voice, data, cross-connect, riser, and backbone fields". 5. Pathway Labels and Labeling System a) Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer b) Conduits: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an ultra-aggressive adhesive. Label size shall be appropriate for the conduit size. Font size shall be legible from the finished floor. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 c) Inner duct: Polyethylene general-purpose tagging material attached using tie wraps. d) Junction boxes:General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an ultra-aggressive adhesive,trade name. Font size shall be easily visible from the finished floor. e) All labels shall be permanent, i.e. will not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time. f) Identification 1) All conduits, junction boxes, gutters, and pull boxes shall have machine- generated labels easily visible from the finished floor. 2) Conduits shall be labeled with the word "communications"and the conduit's origination room number and destination room number. 3) The Contractor shall label conduit at each wall and floor penetration and at each conduit termination, such as outlet boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes, or as otherwise specified in other sections. 4) Junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be labeled with identification name or number as determined by contractor and submitted for approval. 5) The Contractor shall label conduit sleeves at each wall and floor penetration. E. Firestop 1. Provide approved fire-resistant materials to restore originally-designed fire-ratings to all wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations used in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system. 2. Install and seal penetrations(conduit, sleeves,slots, chases) in fire-rated barriers created for communications infrastructure to prevent the passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas, or water through the penetrations. 3. The firestopping material shall maintain/establish the fire-rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has been penetrated. 4. All through penetrations in a fire rated surface require a sleeve, regardless of penetration diameter or penetrating cable count. 5. Using a "ring and string" method of installing cabling for membrane penetrations in a wall cavity is acceptable, provided the solution was accepted by the Owner in writing. Code- compliant firestopping rules still apply. 6. Coordinate firestopping procedures and materials with General Contractor. 7. Sharing the pathway of other trades/utilities through compliant and non-compliant penetrations does not remove the requirement to maintain code-compliant firestopping. 8. Provide and install removable, intumescent mechanical systems in floor chases for all openings greater than 0'-4". 9. Provide and install removable, intumescent, firestop bricks for all openings greater than 0'-4" where there are penetrations through walls. 10. Bricks shall be listed for insertion in fire-rated openings and require restraining materials or apparatus as needed per manufacturers' specifications. 11. Provide manufacturer recommended material for rated protection for any given barrier. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 12. Laminate and permanently affix adjacent to chases the following information: a) Manufacturer of firestop system. b) Date of installation/repair. c) Part and model numbers of system and all components. d) Name and phone numbers of local distributor and manufacturer's corporate headquarters. 13. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for firestop materials and systems shall be presented to the General Contractor for written approval of materials/systems prior to purchase and installation. 14. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL-listed for intended use, and meet NEC and locals codes for fire stopping measures. 15. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials, adhere to itself, and maintain the characteristics for which it is designed to allow for the removal and/or addition of communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material. 16. Develop training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases. F. Within the normal environment, the installed systems shall not generate nor be susceptible to any harmful electromagnetic emission, radiation, or induction that degrades, or obstructs any equipment. G. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in cable pathways and backboard layouts to accommodate 20%future increase in structure cable system capacity. H. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein,the Contractor, at their own expense, shall take all measures necessary to make the cabling system work and comply with the applicable manufacturer written technical recommendations and standards. I. System Tests 1. Upon completion of the installation of the communications infrastructure systems, including all pathways and grounding,the Contractor shall test the system. a) Cables and termination modules shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the designed/specified permanent location prior to testing. b) Any removal and reinstallation of any component in a circuit, including faceplates, shall require retesting of that circuit and any other disturbed or affected circuits. c) Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 d) The Contractor must verify that the requirements of the specifications are fully met through testing with an approved tester (rated for testing parameters listed elsewhere), and documentation as specified below. e) This includes confirmation of requirements by demonstration, testing and inspection. Demonstration shall be provided at final walk-through in soft copy and printed test data. 2. Non-Compliant Cabling a) Testing that shows some or all pairs of a cable do not comply with specifications, without written approval by the Owner, shall be replaced at Contractor's expense (including respective connectors). b) With the Owner's written approval,the over-length cable(s)shall be excluded from requirements to pass standardized tests and shall be explicitly identified. 1) Testing is still required for non-compliant cabling. 2) The tests shall be for wire-mapping, opens, cable-pair shorts, and shorts-to- ground. 3) The test results must be within acceptable tolerances and shall be submitted with the Owner's acceptance document. 3. Failed Tests a) If tests fail,Contractor shall correct as required to produce a legitimate passing test. b) Manipulation of tester parameters on a failing test in order to achieve a passing test is unacceptable. c) If the Contractor is found to have manipulated or falsified any failing test result to show a "PASS" for any reason (without written notice and prior approval of the Owner), the Contractor shall be required to employ a Third-Party Testing Agent selected by the Owner to retest the complete cable plant and shall be required to pay all costs associated with this retesting. 4. Owner reserves the right to be present during any or all testing. 3.3 CLEANING A. The Contractor will clean all surfaces prior to final acceptance by Owner. 3.4 COMPLETION INSPECTION AND PUNCH LIST A. When the Contractor determines that the Scope of Work has been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications, Contractor shall schedule a Completion Inspection with the Owner. COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 B. A Punch List will be generated during the Completion Inspection containing deficiencies in need of corrective action. C. Complete all punch list deficiencies within 10 working days. The work is not complete until all punch list deficiencies have been addressed. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted, and Owner is satisfied that all work is in accordance with contract documents, the Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system. B. Contractor must warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein (Standards Compliance &Test Requirements). C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and receipt of full documentation soft and hard copies as described herein. END OF SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes grounding and bonding products, design requirements and installation for communications systems. B. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications Systems 4. Section 270543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 5. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 7. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced in Section 270000 form a part of this specification.The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions,or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to Section 270000. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to Section 270000. 1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. All conductor wire, busbars and conduit shall be UL listed. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2. The communications ground system shall be independent from all power grounding except for the connection to the building's electrical service main grounding electrode system. 3. Power grounding and/or bonding shall not be allowed to interfere or provide any back feed or be a conductor to the separate communications ground system source or to any communications bonded materials or equipment. B. Primary Bonding Busbar(PBB) and Telecommunications Bonding Conductor(TBC) 1. The main ground source feed for the Primary Bonding Busbar(PBB) in the ER (MDF) shall be an independent feed from the building's electrical service main grounding electrode system, known as the Telecommunications Bonding Conductor(TBC). 2. The TBC shall be a stranded copper ground wire from the building ground system to the PBB in the ER (MDF) sized at a minimum #4/0 unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record. 3. The TBC connections shall be low emission exothermic welds at the connecting ends. C. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB) and Secondary Bonding Busbar(SBB) 1. The Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB) originates at the PBB and shall be extended from the PBB within the ER(MDF)throughout the building along the same route as the telecommunications backbone pathways, to the Secondary Bonding Busbar(s) (SBBs) in each TR (IDF). 2. The minimum TBB conductor size between busbars shall be a stranded copper ground wire one (1)AWG size smaller than the Telecommunications Bonding Conductor(TBC). D. TEBC and RBC 1. All cabinets and racks shall be connected by the Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC). The TEBC is a stranded copper #4 conductor from the PBB/SBB extending along each row of racks within the room. Bond each rack with a Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC). The RBC is a stranded copper#6 conductor connected to the vertical rack bonding terminal. All connections shall be irreversible crimp connections. Route conductor so as to minimize the quantity of sweeping bends. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 270000. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 270000. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 270000. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 B. The Contractor shall ship on manufacturer's standard reel sizes of one continuous length.Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel quantity accordingly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include: B. Cable Manufacturers 1. Houston Wire and Cable Company 2. Okonite Company 3. General Cable 4. Pirelli Cable Corporation 5. Triangle Wire and Cable 6. Owner Approved Alternate C. Electrical Service Entrance Bonding Conductor and Connector Manufacturers 1. Copperweld 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Blackburn 4. Owner Approved Alternate D. Exothermic Connector Manufacturers 1. Erico Products (Cadweld) 2. Continental Industries (thermoweld) 3. Harger 4. Owner Approved Alternate E. Crimp Connector Manufacturers 1. Thomas & Betts 2. FCI Burndy Electrical 3. O-Z/Gedney 4. Owner Approved Alternate F. Telecommunication Grounding Busbars 1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Leviton 4. Owner Approved Alternate GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 G. Bonding Straps 1. Chatsworth 2. Harger 3. Brundy 4. Owner Approved Alternate H. C-Type Compression Taps 1. Brundy 2. Harger 3. Owner Approved Alternate I. Antioxidant Joint Compound 1. Chatsworth 2. Owner Approved Alternate J. Labeling 1. Refer to Section 270000. K. Firestopping 1. Refer to Section 270000. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Communications Grounding Conductors: Copper American Wire Gauge (AWG) wire of the following sizes: 1. Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TBC): #4/0 (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 2. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB): #3/0 (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 3. Backbone Bonding Conductor(BBC):equal AWG as the TBB(unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 4. Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor(TEBQ#4 5. Rack Bonding Conductor(RBC): #6 B. Grounding Connectors 1. Connectors shall be a copper alloy material and two-hole, double-crimp compression lug type at the connecting ends. C. Primary Bonding Busbar(PBB) 1. Use pre-drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25%growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 0'-%"thick X 0'-4"wide X 20" long. 4. Contain (2) tiers of pre-drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two-hole copper compression lugs. 5. ASTM-B187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two-hole compression-type copper lugs. D. Secondary Bonding Busbar(SBB) 1. Use pre-drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors. 2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25%growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 0'-%"thick X 0'-4"wide X 10" long. 4. Contain (2) tiers of pre-drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two-hole copper compression lugs. 5. ASTM-13187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two-hole compression type copper lugs. E. Equipment Cabinet and Rack Bonding Busbar(RBB) 1. Provide and install a vertical ground busbar in all racks and equipment cabinets to be used as an equipment grounding bus with associated mounting hardware. 2. The minimum dimensions shall be 0'-%" in width by 0'-3/16" in thickness. 3. The busbar shall have pre-drilled holes and shall be suitable for use with two-hole compression-type copper lugs. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 270000. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 270000. B. Copper and copper alloy connections should be cleaned prior to connection. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 270000. B. The Contractor shall install the work in accordance with the specifications, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data. C. All work shall be supervised and reviewed by the Contractor's on-site RCDD. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 D. Installation plans and Requests For Information (RFIs) shall be reviewed by the Contractor's RCDD. E. General 1. Bonding and grounding procedures and components shall comply with ANSI/TIA-607-C "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications". 2. Bonding should be accomplished such that the bonding system is integrated and compliant with NEC specifications. 3. Bonding conductors shall be routed with minimum bends or changes in direction and should be made directly to the points being bonded. 4. Bonding connections should be made by using compression copper lugs. However, for parts of the ground electrode system that are subject to corrosion, must carry high currents reliably, or for locations that require minimum maintenance, connections are made with low emission exothermic welding(see NEC Article 250). 5. Make connections to dry surfaces only. 6. Remove paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt from surfaces before making connection. 7. Burnish clean a 0'-1"X 0'-1"area,drill,tap,apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint compound mixed for the metal surface types affected,and bolt conductor and connector to burnished and compounded area. Ensure proper conductivity. 8. Route bonding conductor(s)the shortest distance between bonding contact points. 9. The ground-wire connecting ends shall have a minimum amount of insulation removed at the ground lug. 10. Do not connect ground wire in power cable assemblies to the telecommunications ground system. 11. All grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper and may be insulated. If bare- bonding conductors are used, isolate bonding conductors and prevent contact. 12. Antioxidant material shall be installed to separate dissimilar metals and prevent corrosion. 13. If multiple systems are involved (lightning protection systems,communications,radio and TV,CATV, etc.),those systems shall be bonded together to minimize potential differences between the systems, per NEC 250.94. F. Telecommunication Bonding Conductors 1. Each telecommunications grounding and bonding conductor shall be labeled at each end detailing the function and room number of its opposite end. Labels shall be located on conductors as close as practicable to their point of termination in a readable position. Labels shall be nonmetallic and include the following text, "TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUND - DO NOT REMOVE. IF THIS CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER". 2. Furnish and install all required bonding material, hardware, and utilize tools manufactured for this purpose. 3. The connections of the TBC, TBB, BBC, TEBC, and RBC shall be made using low emission exothermic welding or hydraulically crimped with a double crimp connector. Two-hole grounding lugs are preferred for connection to the grounding bus bars. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 a) All low emission exothermic welding shall be by Division 26. b) Coordinate with the building services personnel in occupied spaces to prevent the smoke from the exothermic weld process from potentially setting off smoke/fire alarms. 4. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in a ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 1m (3ft) in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6AWG conductor, minimum. 5. The bonding conductors should be installed without splices. a) Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be minimized, be accessible, and be located within the telecommunications spaces. b) Joined segments of a bonding conductor shall be connected using exothermic welding,irreversible compression-type connectors,or equivalent.All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage. G. Equipment Cabinets and Racks 1. The busbar shall be installed at the base and back of each cabinet/rack for floor fed cabinets/racks. 2. The busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each cabinet/rack for top fed cabinets/racks. 3. Each cabinet and rack shall be provided with a minimum #6 AWG ground wire. 4. Do not loop from cabinet/rack to cabinet/rack. 5. Each cabinet or rack bay against the wall shall be bottom/side ground fed from the wall. a) Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls. b) Exception: Some cabinet or rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway. 6. All ground raceways within each cabinet/rack or cabinet base and adjacent-ganged cabinet base shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets. H. Cable Runway, Cable Raceway and Support System Grounding 1. The Contractor shall provide communications cable tray and cable runway systems with a communications dedicated ground from the SBB. 2. All cable tray needs to be electrically continuous per NEC 250.96. a) Metal raceways, wire-mesh cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames,fittings, and other metal non-current-carrying parts that are to serve as an alternate grounding path, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current plausibly to be imposed on them. b) Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at the threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. c) Grounding or bonding conductors shall be connected by fittings designed for that purpose to ensure adequate bonding. 3. The Contractor shall provide and install a #6 AWG ground wire to bond one end of each cable tray/runway system to the SBB. 4. For electrically non-continuous conduits that contain only grounding conductor, the Contractor shall bond the conduit and conductor together at both ends to ground to the nearest TGB with grounding bushings or ground clamps. I. Shielded Backbone Cabling 1. The Contractor shall terminate and bond the shield to the nearest SBB or PBB at both ends, following manufacturer's guidelines. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. Upon completion of the electrical system, including all grounding, the Electrical Contractor shall test the system for stray currents, ground shorts, etc. 2. Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. 3. If stray currents, shorts, etc., are detected, eliminate or correct as required. END OF SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Hangers and Supports, including open-top supports (cable hooks) for communications systems. 2. Conduits and Pull Boxes for communications systems. 3. Cable Tray and Cable Runway with associated accessories and fittings for communications systems. B. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications Systems 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 5. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 7. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced in Section 270000 form a part of this specification.The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to Section 270000. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to Section 270000. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 270000. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 270000. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,and HANDLING A. Refer to Section 270000. B. Conduit Storage 1. Package conduits in bundles maximum 10'-0" long, with conduit and coupling thread protectors for indoor/outdoor storage. 2. Package fittings in manufacturer's standard quantities and packaging suitable for indoor storage. 3. Protect coating on plastic-coated rigid conduit, fittings, and bodies from damage during shipment and storage. 4. Store conduit above ground on horizontal racks to prevent corrosion and entrance of debris. 5. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity,temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Protect plastic conduit and inner duct from sunlight. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include: B. Cable Hooks 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Erico 3. Caddy 4. Owner approved alternate C. Cable Tray 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Chatsworth (CPI) 3. Hoffman PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 4. WBT Wire Mesh 5. Owner approved alternate D. Polyethylene Cable Support System 1. Erico 2. Owner approved alternate E. Innerduct 1. Carlon Riser Guard Flexible Raceway(corrugated Innerduct) 2. MaxCell (fabric Innerduct) 3. Owner approved alternate F. Measured pull tape (pull tape printed with sequential footage markings) 1. Fibertek 2. Condux International 3. Owner approved alternate G. Labeling 1. Refer to Section 270000. H. Firestopping 1. Refer to Section 270000. 2.2 CABLE HOOKS A. Cable hooks shall be factory assembled for direct attachment to walls, hanger rods, beam flanges, purlins, strut,floor posts, etc.to meet job conditions. B. Features 1. Cable hooks shall have a flat bottom and provide a minimum of 0'-1.625" cable-bearing surface. 2. Cable hooks shall have 90' radius edges to prevent damage while installing cables. 3. Cable hooks shall be designed so that the mounting hardware is recessed to prevent cable damage. 4. Cable hooks for non-corrosive areas shall be pre-galvanized steel. Where additional strength is required, cable hooks shall be spring steel with a zinc-plated finish. 5. Cable hooks for corrosive areas shall be stainless steel. 6. Cable hooks shall have a stainless steel cable latch retainer to provide containment of cables within the hook. 7. The retainer shall be removable and reusable. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 C. Factory assembled multi-tiered cable hooks shall be used where required to provide separate cabling compartments, or where additional capacity is needed. D. Load cable hooks in accordance with manufacturer requirements and recommendations. E. Provide capacity for 20%growth, add additional hooks as needed. 2.3 PULL BOXES,JUNCTION BOXES,AND GUTTERS A. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements. B. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall meet the following minimum material requirements: 1. 16-gauge steel or heavier 2. Seams shall be continuously welded and grounded smooth 3. External screws and clamps 4. External mounting feet (where applicable) 5. Oil-resistant gasket and adhesive 6. ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surface C. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be provided with bushings for conduits and/or cabling. D. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be securely installed. 2.4 CONDUITS A. All conduits shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements. B. Conduit Fittings 1. All fittings shall be compression or threaded. 2. Fittings shall provide a secure connection for pulling communications cables. 3. Setscrew fittings are not permitted. 4. Conduit "condulets" are not permitted. C. Non-metallic conduits are not permitted in above ground installations. Conversion fittings are required for non-metallic (below ground)to metallic (above ground)transitions. D. Innerduct: 1. All fiber shall be installed in innerduct unless fiber cabling is armored. 2. Shall be constructed of non-metallic material. E. Only manufacturer's fittings,transition adapters,terminators and fixed bends shall be used. F. Measured Pull Tape PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. Pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn with footage markers printed on the tape. 2. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1130 lbs. for 0'-1.5" and smaller conduits and innerduct. 3. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1800 lbs.for conduits larger than 0'-1.5". G. Fill and Bend Radius 1. Conduit fill shall comply with NEC requirements. 2. The minimum bend radius is 6 X the conduit inside diameter(ID)for 0'-2" conduit or less. 3. The minimum bend radius is 10 X the conduit ID for a conduit greater than 0'-2". 4. There shall be no more than two 90° bends (180'total) between conduit pull boxes. 5. Changes in direction shall be accomplished with sweeping bends observing minimum bend radius requirements above. 6. Do not use pull boxes for direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise in the drawings. 7. Unless otherwise noted in the drawings,conduits entering pull boxes shall be aligned with exiting conduits. H. Routing 1. Conduits shall be routed in the most direct route possible, with the fewest number of bends possible. 2. There shall be no continuous conduit sections longer than 100'-0"for premises conduits. For runs that total more than 100'-0", insert junction or pull boxes so that no continuous run between pull boxes is greater than 100'-0". I. Penetrations 1. All conduit penetrations shall comply with all applicable fire codes. 2. All conduit penetrations in fire-rated walls or floors shall be sealed and fire-proofed to meet or exceed the designed rating of the penetration area. 2.5 CABLE TRAY A. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to,straight sections of cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, wyes, vertical bends, up/down tees, cable support fittings, drop-outs, supports and accessories. B. Install all traytypes utilizing manufacturer recommended installation instructions and applicable standards. C. Load cable tray and cable runway in accordance with manufacturer requirements and applicable standards. D. Cable Tray Materials 1. Aluminum PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2. Pre-galvanized Steel 3. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel 4. Stainless Steel 5. Yellow Zinc Dichromate 6. Pre-Galvanized Zinc 7. Electro-Galvanized Zinc E. Cable Tray Systems 1. Wire basket (mesh) of types and sizes indicated on the drawings; with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates, cable drop outs, bonding accessories, and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces. 2. Continuous mesh polyethylene cable-support system: with connector assemblies and appropriate support components. All parts shall be UL-listed. Plastic(non-metallic) parts shall have a zero detectable halogen content as substantiated by an independent test laboratory. 3. Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails) with transverse members(rungs)welded to the side rails. Rungs shall be spaced 0'-9" on center. Spacing in radius fittings shall be 0'-9" as measured at the center of the tray's width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable-bearing surface of 0'-.875" with radius edges. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. 4. Ventilated trough type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails) with a corrugated bottom welded to the side rails. 5. Solid bottom trough type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members welded to the side rails. F. Cable trays shall have sufficient depth and width so as not to exceed a maximum 50%fill ratio, including 20%capacity for anticipated growth. G. All straight sections shall be supplied in minimum 8'-0" lengths, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORT A. Steel support brackets shall be galvanized steel and capable of supporting a minimum of 200 Ibs with a safety factor of 3. B. Steel support brackets shall have a removable galvanized steel retaining strap. C. Steel support brackets shall accept 0'-3/8" (10mm) threaded rod for attachment to building structure or sub structure. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 A. Refer to Section 270000. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 270000. B. Verify system is properly sized for cables before installation. C. Verify that the manufacturer recommended loads are not exceeded. D. Verify general routing and coordinate locations with other trades before installation. Layout cable runs in advance to determine quantities of cable to be installed along pathways, and to ensure non-interference from other trade installations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 270000. B. Cable Hooks 1. Provide cable hook (j-hook) cable support system for horizontal and/or riser cabling in accessible ceiling space.Assemblies shall be complete with mounting hardware. 2. Provide threaded rod for supporting hangers when hanging from floor deck and deck members. 3. Follow manufacturers fill capacities. 4. Locate cable hooks on 4' to 5' centers to adequately support and distribute the cable's weight. 5. Suspended cables shall be installed with at least 0'-3" of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels. 6. For larger quantities of cables, provide special supports that are specifically designed to support the required cable weight and volume. 7. Do not support pathways or cables with the ceiling suspension system or use electrical, plumbing, or other pipes for support. 8. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached,and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. 9. Secure and support exposed horizontal cable at intervals not exceeding 5'-0"and not less than 1'-4" (16") from cabinets, pack pole, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 10. Cable sag between vertical supports for horizontal pathway shall not exceed 0'-6". Provide at least 0'-3" cable sag between supports. 11. Painted J-hooks shall meet or exceed NEC requirements for the environment in which the product is installed. C. Conduit and Pull Boxes PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. The Contractor shall route the conduit in approximate locations unless drawing is dimensioned for precise placement. 2. Conduit cuts shall be square. Ream ends of burrs and remove metal shavings and cutting lubricants before conduit is connected to the conduit system. 3. For conduit embedded in concrete, coat threaded connections in conduits with colloidal rust and corrosion inhibitor and sealant. Conduit must be clean and dry and must pass standard sizing test after concrete is poured. 4. Cap unused conduits with watertight caps 5. Make conduit connections with appropriate fittings and tighten securely. 6. Use appropriate tools to install PVC coated conduit; avoid damage to exterior coating. 7. Install liquid-tight flexible metal conduit where exposed to weather, water, or other liquids. 8. Use IMC, PVC conduit, or rigid galvanized steel conduit in underground installations. D. Innerducts 1. The Contractor shall provide fabric innerduct in all underground conduits, as indicated on the drawings. a) The Contractor shall use pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant fabric. b) The Contractor shall be trained for proper installation technique by the innerduct manufacturer. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner to demonstrate that pull ropes in each inner duct cell move freely from end to end. E. Cable Tray and Cable Runway 1. Cut wire basket tray members square with approved cable tray cutting tool as to not leave sharp edges at cut point. Remove burrs and smooth the ends before the cut is connected to wire-mesh tray system. 2. Ensure that standard splices are designed to have less than 1 milliohm (0.0001 0) of resistance between connections and provide bonding between sections. Painted wire mesh tray requires the outer mask of the non-conductive surface be removed at each end of the tray prior to installing the splice to provide continuity between painted tray sections. 3. Threaded rod (minimum 0'-%2" diameter) or equivalent and slotted channel shall be used for hanging cable tray between floor deck and deck members F. Fiber Support: 1. Support vertical fiber optic cable with basket weave wire/cable grips. Support fiber riser with single weave support grip with a single offset eye. 2. Mount/attach pulling eye to a wall or ceiling deck secured hook to support/provide strain relief to riser cable. Provide a minimum 3'-0" loop of fiber prior to entering fire stopped floor sleeve. 3. Where required coil up slack fiber cable into pull box and secure with single weave support grip. G. Clearances PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. A minimum of 1'-0" access headroom shall be provided above a cable tray. Ensure that other building components do not restrict access to the cable trays from the sides. 2. Power outlets shall not be installed in or mounted to cable tray or cable runway. 3. Provide 3'-0" of unencumbered space for every 10'-0" segment of tray. 4. Cable tray clearances a) Motors or transformers: 4'-0" b) Power cables and conduit: 1'-0" c) Fluorescent lighting: 0'-5" d) Halide lights: 1'-0" e) Above the ceiling tiles: 0'-3" f) Access above and on one side of the cable tray: 1'-0" 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test system to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections. B. Ensure compliance with specified maximum ground resistance. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials, and debris from each area where Work has been completed unless designated for storage. B. Wipe clean all cable trays and apply appropriate manufacturer's paint to areas that have been scratched. END OF SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes underground communications duct banks, hand-holes and maintenance holes B. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications Systems 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 7. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security(including related sub-sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. Refer to section 270000. B. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 270000. C. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. Refer to section 270000. D. Related Documents 1. Refer to section 270000. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 270000. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 270000. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. 1. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming B. The contractor shall endeavor to make the site ready for installation of manholes when delivered so that they can be placed off of the truck into final position. 1. When this is not possible,store precast concrete and other factory-fabricate underground utility structures as Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. D. Clearly mark containers "For Communications Duct Banks Only". E. Refer also to section 270000. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 270000. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to section 270000. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTIBLE MANUFACTURERS A. Ducts 1. Use owner approved solution B. Hand Holes 1. Hubbell 2. Christy Concrete Products 3. Cretex Concrete Products West, Inc.; Riverton Division 4. Oldcastle Precast Group 5. Oldcastle Precast Inc/; Utility Vault Division 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC 7. Owner Approved equivalent C. Maintenance (Man) Holes UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. Christy Concrete Products 2. Cretex Concrete Products West, Inc.; Riverton Division 3. Oldcastle Precast Group 4. Oldcastle Precast Inc/; Utility Vault Division 5. Utility Concrete Products, LLC 6. Owner Approved equivalent D. Innderducts 1. MaxCell Fabric Pre-Lubricated Multi-Cell innerduct 2. Owner Approved equivalent 2.2 MATERIALS A. Continuous Tape for Underground Conduit 1. The Contractor shall use orange warning ribbon, PVC tape (detectable, i.e., containing metallic tracings), three inches wide, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION--BURIED COMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW" in black letters, minimum 0'-1" high. B. Labeling 1. Refer to section 270000. C. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 270000. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Where necessary, Contractor shall provide all excavation, boring, trenching, backfill and restoration of grounds for all OSP pathways. 1. In addition, Contractor shall include all labor, materials, and equipment. B. The owner of the property has the option to obtain a testing laboratory to ensure proper soil compaction. C. All work shall comply with all city,county and State Codes, NEC, EIA/TIA,OSHA,and BICSI TDMM requirements, codes and standards. D. The above referenced codes and standards are to be considered as a minimum requirement. 1. If the plans or specifications call for material and/or methods of construction higher than the standard, the plans or specification shall govern. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 E. All holes, trenches and/or any other excavation shall be covered, fenced, and/or taped off to make the area safe at all times. 1. Conform to general Contractor requirements. F. The Contractor will visit the job site prior to submitting a proposal to determine existing conditions. 1. Contractor shall evaluate the site for materials,and any other information that may affect the work to be performed. G. The Contractor shall locate and protect all existing conduits. 1. Should damage occur notify the appropriate utility. 2. Damage costs are the responsibility of the Contractor. H. The Contractor shall CALL BEFORE YOU DIG, (Texas: 1-800-669-8344) to locate any existing conduits (Power, Gas,Telephone, and other utilities) prior to start of work. I. Any proposed re-routing of all trenches/pole lines shall be reviewed and approved by the owner/consultant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 270000. B. The Contractor shall verify materials are on-site in proper condition and of sufficient quantity. C. The Contractor shall verify proper excavation depth (minimum 4'-0" below finished grade), width, route and support of work. 1. Verify proper location of hand-holes and maintenance holes (minimum every 350'-0"). 2. Communications facilities must be placed in separate hand-holes and maintenance holes from electrical facilities. D. Trenches greater than or equal to 5'-0" deep shall: 1. Be shored to prevent cave-in. 2. Have 2'-0" clearance from the dirt pile. E. Directional boring is a suitable option when trenching is impractical or impossible. 1. Locating existing underground utilities is crucial when directional boring is planned because of the potential for the drilling unit to encounter high voltages. 2. Although directional boring machines are manufactured with electrical strike sensing capabilities, which can warn the operator of any contact with a high voltage source, accidents may still occur. 3. Operators of directional boring machines require special protection due to the potential for exposure to high voltage. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 a) Therefore, operators must always have a ground mat grid underfoot as insulation protection. b) In addition, operators must wear insulating boots and gloves, along with hard hats and safety glasses. F. Minimum separation between electrical and communications underground cable (measured from conduit sidewall: 1. Concrete: 0'-3" 2. Masonry: 0'-4" 3. Well-tamped earth: 1'-0" G. Before encasement,the Contractor shall: 1. Prove and verify all ducts are free of debris and properly installed in support and spacer system. 2. Verify the system is properly fitted together and hold-down hardware is properly installed. 3. Verify ducts are capped at both ends 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to section 270000. B. Hand Holes 1. Unless otherwise shown, Hand-holes shall be at least 4'-0" X 4'-0" and shall be constructed of 0'-2"thick cement covered with 0'-3/8" steel plate. 2. The hand-hole or maintenance hole shall rest on a 0'-4" blanket of sand, and 0'-4"around the sidewalls shall be filled with sand. 3. Each hand-hole or maintenance hole which contains a pedestal shall have four bollards installed 1'-6" (18") diagonally from each corner, with a cross member welded at 2'-6" (30") connecting the four corners. a) These barriers will be constructed of 0'-4" ridged conduit filled with concrete, driven 4'-0" in the ground and extending 3'-0" above the protective cover. 4. All Hand-holes shall have a hasp and locking plate installed so they can be locked with padlock. C. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel for Encasement 1. Furnish products following Division 03, except strengths as follows: a) Compressive Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days, class A b) Flexural Strength: 500 psi at 28 days c) Dye concrete encasement "orange" to identify communications conduit UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 D. The Contractor shall install conduit in excavations following drawings. 1. If directional boring is utilized, cable or flexible conduits can be attached to the unit and pulled back to the origination point(after the drilling unit reaches its destination). E. The Contractor shall install watertight penetrations through foundation, hand-hole and maintenance-hole walls. 1. Wherever a hand-hole is used to simply pass through,the conduit entrances and exits will be situated at opposite ends of the hand-hole instead of 90° angles. F. The Contractor shall assemble duct banks with non-magnetic saddles, spacers and separators. 1. Position separators for 0'-2" minimum concrete separation between outer surfaces of adjacent ducts, and: a) Make uniform required bends with a minimum 2'-0" radius for conduits less than 0'-3" diameter, and a minimum 4'-0" radius for conduits 0'-3" and larger. b) Maintain vertical or horizontal separations of 1'-0"of well-packed topsoil from any electrical service conduit run parallel to communications conduits. G. Install concrete encasement fully surrounding reinforcing steel and ducts. H. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, reinforce with longitudinal#5 steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at maximum parallel spacing of 1'-0" on center, and #5 tie-bars transversely placed at 1'-0" on center maximum longitudinal. 1. Maintain maximum clearance of 0'-2" from bars to edge of forms and ducts. I. For duct banks that are being installed for future use, extend rebar well past end of concrete for future tie-in to future concrete pour to ensure that both sections are firmly tied together to prevent slippage between the two pours. J. Add orange colorants at mixing site at the rate of 10 Ibs per cubic yard for voice and data cable. K. Place concrete with minimum 0'-2" cover surrounding ducts and reinforcement. L. Maintain ducts in proper place during concrete placement. M. For duct banks that are being installed for future use, all conduits shall be extended minimum of 1'-0" past the end of the concrete and capped. N. Transition from nonmetallic to metallic conduit where duct banks enter structures or turn upward for continuation above grade: 1. Where ducts enter structures such as hand-holes, maintenance holes, pull boxes, or buildings, terminate ducts in proper end bells, insulated L-bushings, Meyers hubs or couplings on steel conduits. 2. Ducts shall be sealed to prevent water and debris from entering the building. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 O. Extend below grade conduits to 0'-4" above the finished floor inside a building: 1. Cover or temporarily seal open conduit ends to prevent water and other foreign matter from entering conduit. P. Tag conduits entering pull boxes with stamped stainless steel tags following cable and conduit schedule. Q. Backfill after concrete cures 24 hours. R. The Contractor shall pull a 1'-0" long mandrel (0'-%"smaller than duct diameter)through ducts. 1. Pull a rag swab or sponge through to remove debris, until it shows clean. S. Where fiber optic cables will be used and/or where indicated in the drawings, innerduct shall be provided. T. The Contractor shall provide a metered pull tape in all underground conduits and innerduct: 1. Pre-lubricated,woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn. 2. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1130 Ibs for 0'-1.5" and smaller conduits and innerduct. 3. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1800 Ibs for conduits larger than 0'-1.5". 3.4 CLEANING A. Refer to section 270000. END OF SECTION 27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes basic communications and equipment room design requirements and fittings including: 1. Equipment cabinets, racks,frames and enclosures 2. Cable management and ladder racks 3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways 4. Rack mounted power protection and power strips B. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 270543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 6. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 7. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions,or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 270000. D. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. Refer to section 270000. COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 11 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1.3 COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS A. Communications rooms must be dedicated to designated equipment and services: 1. Space shall not be used for storage of equipment not related to designated equipment and services. 2. Hazardous or corrosive materials shall not be stored in the space. 3. Piping, ductwork and distribution of power, not related to designated equipment and services shall not pass through or be located within the space. a) Foreign piping such as water pipes, steam pipes, soil pipes, sanitary drains, storm drains,A/C ducts, and other unrelated systems utilized for or containing liquids, or gases shall not be installed or pass through communication rooms. b) With the exception of fire sprinklers, all water pipes shall be routed around communications room. B. Each communication room shall be equipped with fire detection, fire-extinguishing system and prevention devices. Connect detection devices to base building fire alarm system. A minimum of one (1) smoke detector shall be installed in each communications room. C. Walls shall be covered with 0'-%"X 4'-0"X 8'-0"AC-grade plywood backboard 1'-0"AFF(smooth side to interior of room mounted vertically), capable of supporting mounted hardware and equipment. 1. Plywood shall be affixed to the studs in the walls with screws that penetrate the studs a minimum of 0'-1", are spaced not greater than 1'-6" (18") apart in each stud, and with screws 0'-0"from the top and bottom of plywood. 2. Plywood shall be sealed against the wall and painted on all exposed sides with two coats of flat white non-reflective paint. 3. If applicable fire-treatment verification stamps on plywood shall be left unpainted to be readable. D. Communications room walls shall extend from floor slab to ceiling deck, with no drop ceilings installed. E. Cable tray or ladder rack should be used to distribute cables between rooms through finished wall penetrations. F. Cable ladder rack should be used to distribute cables within rooms, complete with cable bend limiters (drop outs). G. To reduce static,floors should not have carpet, but be sealed concrete to prevent concrete dust from forming. H. Communications rooms shall have only one lockable entrance door, a minimum of 3'-0" wide and 7'-0" high, that opens towards the outside of the room, and does not open into another room. COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 11 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. Doors shall be provided with a lockset for the appropriate technology key with pinned hinges and anti-pry guards. 2. Doors should have no windows or door seals. 3. Communications rooms should have no exterior identifying markings. I. Mechanical 1. Install monitoring sensors with dedicated environmental controls operating 24 hours a day, 365 days a year in the communications rooms. 2. Provide ventilation in the communications rooms to dissipate heat generated by active devices. 3. Temperature and Humidity requirements: a) Maintain communication rooms at an average of 60°F to 70°F,with a relative non- condensing humidity of 30%to 50%. b) The temperature range should be maintained within ± 9° J. Plumbing 1. If "wet" fire suppression is used, install wire cages on sprinkler heads to prevent accidental operation. 2. Do not place sprinkler heads over equipment or cabling. In the event of a leak this will protect the equipment and cabling. 3. Drainage troughs are also recommended for leakage protection. K. Electrical 1. One manufacturer's product is recommended for each type of installation.The mixing of different manufacturer products for one item is not acceptable. 2. No electrical feeders/branch circuits shall be placed in or run through any communications room except as required to service those rooms. 3. The Contractor shall install a slot (a UL-approved fire-rated assembly) to accommodate cable runway entry from corridor and a fire-retardant system (bricks, boards, mechanical, etc). The formed slot shall have no burrs or sharp edges. This opening in the wall will be used to pass data and voice cabling from the corridor cable tray into the communications room. 4. The Contractor shall provide uniform illumination of at least 50 foot-candles(fc) 3'-0"AFF for communications rooms located a minimum of 8'-6"AFF. a) Light fixtures in communications rooms are to be positioned for maximum lighting. Do not install over cable tray, ladder rack, or 1'-7" (19") standing racks. b) Provide enough power receptacles to support equipment and service. Coordinate power requirements of active equipment with electrical designer. L. Relay Racks 1. 1'-7" (19") X 7'-0" relay racks are to be used for mounting and termination of inter- building and intra-building fiber optic/copper cables and components. COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 11 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 a) The racks shall have adequate horizontal and vertical cable management for the 8P8C patch panels and switches. b) Racks with active electronics shall have rack mounted power strips. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 270000. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 270000. B. Product Standards 1. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening. 2. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to section 270000. B. Coordinate layout and installation of equipment with owner's communications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 270000. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 270000. B. At the start of the project, contractor shall register the project with the manufacturer to help insure and facilitate manufacturer's warranty process. COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 11 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 1'-7" (19") Floor-Mounted Equipment Racks and Support Components 1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line 3. Owner approved alternate B. Horizontal Runway and Support Components 1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line 3. Owner approved alternate C. Horizontal Rack-Mount Cable Management 1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Owner approved alternate D. Vertical Rack-Mount Cable Management 1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Owner approved alternate E. Equipment Cabinet, Floor-Mounted 1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line 3. Owner approved alternate F. Equipment Cabinet, Wall-Mounted 1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line 3. Owner approved alternate G. Labeling 1. Refer to section 270000. H. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 270000. COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 11 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 270000. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 270000. B. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. C. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to section 270000. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 270000. 3.5 CLEANING A. Refer to section 270000. 3.6 ACCEPTANCE A. Refer to section 270000. END OF SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 11 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the backbone cabling portion of a structured cabling system including: 1. Fiber backbone cabling 2. Splicing 3. Termination and patch cables B. Provide all backbone cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in Communications rooms. C. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 270543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 6. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 7. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions,or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 270000. D. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. Refer to section 270000. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 270000. B. Cable Pulling Plan 1. The contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan prior to installation. 2. Submittal requirements: a) Indicate the installed backbone conduit layout in schematic format, including junction boxes and distances between junction boxes. b) Indicate contents of each conduit. c) Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs and tensions. d) Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of communications rooms. e) Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling plan and calculations by the engineer. C. Splice Plan 1. The contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended cable splice points, mounting method and equipment list prior to installation D. Cable Testing Plan 1. Refer to Section 270000. E. Cable Testing Reports 1. Refer to Section 270000. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 270000. B. Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of five years splicing experience and shall have completed a minimum of five major splicing projects. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to section 270000. B. Storage temperature range: -40oF to 149°F (-40°C to WC) COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 270000. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 270000. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE FIBER CABLE MANUFACTURERS A. OSP (Outside Plant) cable 1. Corning 2. Draka 3. CommScope 4. Berk-tek 5. Belden 6. Owner approved alternate B. OSP (Outside Plant) armored cable 1. Draka 2. Corning 3. Belden 4. Berk-tek 5. CommScope 6. Owner approved alternate 2.2 ACCEPTABLE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS A. Fiber Connectors, (LC) 1. Leviton 2. CommScope 3. Belden 4. Corning 5. Panduit 6. Owner approved alternate B. Fiber Duplex Patch Cables (Type SM) 1. Ortronics 2. Leviton 3. Panduit COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 4. Systimax 5. Corning 6. Owner approved alternate C. Fiber adapter panels (6-port) 1. CommScope 2. Panduit 3. Leviton 4. Corning 5. Belden 6. Owner approved alternate D. Fiber Termination Shelf(Rack-Mounted) 1. Belden 2. CommScope 3. Leviton 4. Corning 5. Panduit 6. Owner approved alternate E. Labeling 1. Refer to section 270000. F. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 270000. 2.3 FIBER BACKBONE CABLING A. Fiber General Requirements 1. Fiber shall be certified to meet all parts of TIA-455 and comply with TIA-492,ANSI/ICEA S- 83-596 and ANSI/ICEA S-83-640 and the NEC. 2. Fibers shall have D-LUX coating or approved equivalent to ensure color retention, minimize micro bending losses and improve handling. The coating shall be mechanically strippable. 3. Cable installed in plenums or air-handling spaces shall meet UL 910 and shall be marked OFNP (optical fiber non-conductive plenum) in accordance with the NEC. a) Plenum Fiber rated cable consisting of multiple fibers shall have a Plenum PVC outer jacket. 1) Each group of fibers shall have a color-coded Low Smoke PVC buffer. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2) The buffered fibers are organized in subunits of fibers, reinforced with aramid yarn for extra strength and surrounded with a color-coded low smoke tube. b) Within the premises, all fiber shall be placed in plenum rated innerduct the entire length of the cable for protection. Use manufacturer plenum rated couplings for all connections. 4. Riser cable shall meet UL 1666 and be marked OFNR(optical fiber nonconductive riser) in accordance with the NEC. a) Non-plenum, riser rated cable consisting of multiple fibers, shall have an orange, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) outer jacket. 5. OSP (Outside Plant) Fiber a) Stranded loose tube dielectric fiber cable shall be utilized for underground conduit, direct buried, or aerial applications. b) Underground cable, including cable installed in conduits or duct banks, shall contain an additional moisture barrier in the form of a flooding compound. c) All OSP fiber strength members shall be dielectric without any metallic elements. 6. Fiber conductors shall follow standard color code schemes. Fiber numbers and binders shall correspond to the following color codes: a) Fiber/Binder No. 1—blue b) Fiber/Binder No. 2—orange c) Fiber/Binder No. 3—green d) Fiber/Binder No. 4—brown e) Fiber/Binder No. 5—slate f) Fiber/Binder No. 6—white g) Fiber/Binder No. 7—red h) Fiber/Binder No. 8—black i) Fiber/Binder No. 9—yellow j) Fiber/Binder No. 10—violet k) Fiber/Binder No. 11—rose 1) Fiber/Binder No. 12—aqua 7. Cable Minimum Bending Radius: a) During Installation: 20X cable diameter b) After Installation: 10X cable diameter 8. Operating temperature range: -767 to 1857 (-60°C to 85°C) B. Single Mode Fiber Requirements 1. Fibers shall have dual wavelength capability, transmitting at 1310 and 1550 nm ranges. 2. 8.3 µm core COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3. 125 µm ± 1 µm cladding diameter 4. Cladding non-circularity: = 1% 5. Core/cladding concentricity error: = .5 µm 6. Colored fiber diameter: 254 µm ± 7 µm 7. Maximum Attenuation: 1.0 dB/km at 1310 and 1550 nm (inside premises) and 0.5 dB/km at 1310 and 1550 nm (OSP) 8. Minimum Bandwidth: 20 GHz 9. The mechanical and environmental specifications for OSP fiber cable shall be in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-87-640. OSP fiber cables shall be of a water-block construction and meet the requirements for compound flow and water penetration as established by ANSI/ICEA S-87-640. Outdoor cable shall have minimum pull strength of 2670 N (600 Ibf). 2.4 FIBER PATCH CABLES A. Verify exact quantities and lengths with Owner prior to purchase B. Provide the appropriately-rated (matched to the installed cable plant) Modular Patch Cords for the appropriate location and equipment. C. Single Mode patch cables shall be a stepped-index 8.3 µm core with a 125 µm cladding. D. Duplex LC connectors shall meet the following specifications: 1. Made and warranted by the manufacturer of the cabling system installed in this project and shall meet or exceed patch cord specifications as outlined in TIA standards. 2. Patch cords shall be in original packaging when presented to the Owner. E. Aramid yarn and a jacket of flame-retardant PVC shall cover the fiber cladding. F. Single Mode patch cable additional requirements: 1. Return Loss: -50 dB maximum 2. Mated Connector Loss: µ=0.35 dB, 6=0.2 dB 3. Connection Repeatability: 0.20 dB maximum changes per 200 re-connects. G. The Single Mode connector (visible portion) and adapter/outlet shall be identified by the color blue. 2.5 LABELING A. Refer to Section 271500. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 A. Refer to Section 270000. B. Verify the following before proceeding: 1. Conduits, cable trays and pull boxes are properly installed following section 270528 2. Backboards in communications rooms are properly installed following section 271100 3. Grounding system is properly installed and tested following section 270526 4. Liquid-carrying pipes are not installed in or above voice and data system communications rooms. a) Do not proceed with installation in affected areas until removed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 270000. 3.3 FIBER INSTALLATION A. Fiber Cable Installation 1. Fiber cable shall be installed in innerduct from near end termination point to far end termination point. a) Only UL-approved plenum-rated innerduct shall be installed in all plenum areas. b) Metallic conduit may be used in lieu of innerduct in plenum-rated ceilings if it is bonded and grounded correctly. 2. Only technicians certified by the product manufacturer shall perform terminations. a) Terminations shall be made in a controlled environment. b) Cables may be assembled off-site, although testing must be completed with the cable in its final installed condition. c) Test optical fiber on the reel for distance and continuity verification before installation. 3. At each location where fiber cable is exposed to human intrusion, it shall be marked with warning tags. a) These tags shall be yellow or orange in color, and shall contain the warning "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE". b) The text shall be permanent, black, block characters, and at least 0'-.1875" high. c) A warning tag shall be permanently affixed to each exposed cable or bundle of cables, at intervals of not less than 5'-0". d) Any section of exposed cable that is less than 5'-0" in length shall have at least one warning tag affixed to it. B. Fiber Distribution Center COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. Contractor shall provide sufficient spare adapter plates to fill the appropriate-sized FDC. 3.4 FIBER TERMINATION AND SPLICING A. Interconnect Units and Distribution Shelves 1. Modular in design and used in fiber interconnection, cross-connection, and splicing applications 2. 1'-7" (19") rack-mountable 3. Accept 12-strand, 24-strand,48-strand or 72-strand terminations 4. Owner approved industry standard connector B. Splicing and closures 1. Fiber splice modules shall be utilized for all OSP terminations. 2. The link shall consist of: a) Fiber cable b) Splice c) Splice tray holder/closure d) Fiber panel/coupler e) Pre-manufactured fiber pigtail with pre-polished fiber connector f) Fiber jumper to connect the pigtail-coupled link to the appropriate electronic switch C. Fiber Fusion Splice 1. Fusion splices shall be mounted in protective trays within the closure. 2. Fusion splices shall not exceed a maximum optical attenuation of 0.3 dB when measured in accordance with ANSI/TIA-455-34, Method a (factory testing) or ANSI/TIA-455-59(field testing). a) Fiber splices shall have a minimum return loss of 20 dB for Multi-mode b) Fiber splices shall have a minimum return loss of 26 dB for Single Mode 1) Minimum Single Mode return loss for broadband analog video (CATV) applications is 55 dB. 3.5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-D standards, BICSI methods,and industry standard installation guidelines. 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. 3. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation. B. The Contractor shall provide service loops for cables terminating in the communications rooms. 1. A 10'-0" service loop shall be provided and secured in a neat and standards-compliant manner above the equipment racks or cable trays unless specified otherwise. 2. This allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables. C. Documentation 1. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with and approved by owner so that data can be incorporated into existing databases. 2. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination,type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers. 3. Complete cross connect documentation is required. It shall include detailed documentation of each pair of all copper backbone cable and strand of fiber. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 270000 3.7 FIBER POST-INSTALLATION TESTING A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, field-test instruments and equipment required for the complete and proper test measurements of the installed fiber cabling. B. Contractor shall have successfully attended a fiber testing training program, which includes testing with an OLTS and an OTDR and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof. C. All outlets,cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field-testing. 1. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work. D. Dust caps shall be placed on fiber endfaces or adapters for each optical fiber link after all testing is complete on the fiber link. E. Pre-test Submittals 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets and specifications for the fiber cable field-test instruments including a) OLTS (Optical Loss Test Set) b) OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2. A schedule (list) of all fiber cables to be tested 3. Fiber testing training program certificate 4. Sample test reports F. Fiber testing standards 1. The Contractor shall meet or exceed the following standards and guidelines: a) ANSI/TIA-568.3-D Optical Fiber Transmission/Test Requirements, and Annex E: Optical Fiber Field Test Guidelines (Tier 2) 1) Tier 2 testing is a higher level of testing that provides qualitative measures of the installed condition and performance of the cabling system b) ANSI/TIA-568.3-D Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard c) TIA/TSB-140 Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems 2. Single Mode requirements a) ANSI/TIA-526-7, Method A.1: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single Mode Fiber Cable Plant-OFSTP-7 3. The cable installers shall have a copy of these references in their possession and be familiar with the contents G. In order to conform to the overall project event schedule, the contractor shall survey and coordinate the optical fiber testing with other applicable trades. H. In addition to the test regiment detailed in this document,the contractor shall notify the Owner of any additional tests that are deemed necessary to guarantee a fully functional system. 1. The contractor shall carry out and record any additional measurement results at no additional charge. I. The contractor shall provide all test measurement results two (2) weeks prior to substantial completion in spreadsheet format and native file format from the test instrument. 1. Software shall also be provided to view the native results. J. All tests performed on optical fiber cabling that use a laser or LED in a test set shall be carried out with safety precautions in accordance with ANSI Z136.2. 1. A visible fault locator (VFL) normally uses a Class 2 or 3 light source and should not be directly viewed. 2. Safe usage of the tool requires indirect viewing of the light source by pointing the end of the fiber at an adjacent surface(or introducing another surface in front of a fixed mounted connector) until the presence of light is determined. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 K. Link attenuation measurement and allowance calculation 1. The measured link attenuation shall be less than the link attenuation allowance.The link attenuation allowance is calculated as: a) Link Attenuation Allowance (dB) = Cable Attenuation Allowance (dB) + Connector Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) +Splice Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) 1) Connector Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) = Number of Connector Pairs X 0.4d B 2) Splice Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) = Number of Splices X 0.15dB 3) Cable Attenuation Allowance(dB)=Maximum Cable Attenuation Coefficient (dB/I<m) X Length (km) L. Fiber Testing Requirements 1. All installed fiber links shall be field-tested and pass the following tests: a) OLTS (Optical Loss Test Set) length and dual wavelength attenuation b) OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) traces and event tables 2. OLTS (Optical Loss Test Set) a) The length and attenuation of each installed fiber link shall be measured and documented. b) System loss measurements requirements: 1) 1310 and 1550 nanometers for Single Mode c) Reflective events (connections) shall not exceed 0.75 dB. d) Non-reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.3 dB. e) The acceptable link attenuation for Multi-mode horizontal fiber is based on the maximum distance of 295'-0". f) A horizontal link in a network with a consolidation point may be tested using a fixed upper limit for attenuation of 2.75 dB. g) Optical sources shall be turned on for a minimum of 5 minutes prior to referencing. h) Fiber links shall be measured and reported for attenuation in each direction and attenuation bi-directionally (averaged in both directions) i) Polarity shall be verified for duplex connector systems j) Mandrels 1) Mandrels shall be used when testing attenuation of Multi-mode fiber cabling 2) Where mandrels are used, secure the mandrel to the light source by some means such as a cable tie or tape. 3) Care should be taken to ensure that the fiber jacket is not deformed or damaged when using a cable tie or tape. 4) The light source shall be referenced to the meter a minimum of twice daily (i.e., in the morning and noon). COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3. OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) a) An OTDR trace shall be taken of each fiber link in one direction to ensure uniformity of cable attenuation and connector insertion loss b) Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per TIA 455-61 c) Individual connector, splice and fiber insertion loss shall be evaluated using the OTDR trace. d) Fibers shall be inspected at 250X for Multi-mode and 40OX for Single Mode 4. Maximum Attenuation a) Single Mode ISP (inside) 1.0 dB/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm b) Single Mode OSP (outside) 0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm c) Multi-mode 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm 5. Test Cords (Jumpers) a) Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the same fiber type and core size as the cabling under test. Use a single patch cord reference for fiber testing. 1) OLTS test cords shall be between 3'-3" (1m) and 16'-4" (5m). 2) OTDR testing shall be approximately 328'-0"(100m)for the launch cable and at least 82'-0"(25m)for the receive cable.OTDR testing shall be Bidirectional with Pigtails installed. b) The test jumper, the adapters, and fiber under test shall be cleaned immediately prior to each fiber being tested. 1) After cleaning, cleaning solutions shall be given sufficient time to evaporate (approximately 30 seconds) prior to the mating of fiber test jumper to the fiber under test. 6. Test Failure a) Any fiber link that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. b) Any corrective action that must take place shall be documented and followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets performance requirements. 7. Acceptable Testers a) Fluke DTX Cable Analyzer b) Owner Approved equivalent M. The Owner or the Owner's representative shall be invited to witness, review or both witness and review field-testing. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. The Owner or the Owner's representative shall be notified of the testing start date, five (5) business days before testing commences. 2. The Owner or the Owner's representative will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links and test that sample. a) The measured results obtained from the random sample shall be compared to the data provided by the contractor. b) If more than 2%of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the contractor under supervision of the Owner or Owner's representative shall repeat 100%of the testing at no cost to the Owner. N. Test Results 1. The detailed test results documentation data is to be provided in an electronic database for each tested fiber strand and shall contain the following information: a) Identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user. b) Name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results. c) Name of the personnel performing the test. d) Date and time the test results were saved. e) The manufacturer, model and serial number of the test instrument. f) The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held within the test instrument. g) Fiber identification number h) Length for each optical fiber i) Index of refraction used for length calculation when using a length capable OLTS. j) Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at the appropriate wavelength(s) and the margin (difference between the measured attenuation and the test limit value). k) Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces and event tables at the appropriate wavelength(s). 1) Length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDR. m) Overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test for OLTS and OTDR measurements. n) Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument should match the specified label ID. 3.8 CLEANING A. Refer to section 270000. 3.9 ACCEPTANCE A. Refer to Section 271500. END OF SECTION 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section of the horizontal cabling portion of a structured cabling system includes: 1. UTP Copper cabling 2. Termination and patch cables B. Provide all horizontal cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in communications roams. C. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 270543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 6. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 7. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 8. Section 274100 Audio-Visual Systems 9. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions,or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 270000. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to section 270000. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to sections 270000 and 271300. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 270000. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to sections 270000 and 271300. B. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C) 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 270000. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 270000. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Labeling 1. Refer to section 270000. B. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 270000. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE COPPER MANUFACTURERS A. UTP Plenum Rated Cable 1. Ber-tek 2. CommScope 3. Superior Essex 4. Belden COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 5. General Cable 6. Owner approved alternate B. Data/Voice Outlet Components 1. Leviton 2. Ortronics 3. Panduit 4. Systimax 5. Owner approved alternate C. Patch Panels (24 or 48 port) 1. Ortronics 2. Leviton 3. Panduit 4. Owner approved alternate D. Copper Patch Cords 1. Ortronics 2. Leviton 3. Panduit 4. Systimax 5. Owner approved alternate E. Wall and/or Rack Mount 110 Termination Blocks 1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Ortronics 4. Owner approved alternate F. Faceplate for wall-mount telephones 1. Leviton 4108W-1SP 2. Panduit KWP6 3. Owner approved alternate 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mount one laminated full-size hard copy in color of an as-built floor plan designating workstation locations, pathways, and communications room locations. Confirm hard copy size with Owner. B. Provide clear plastic lamination serving each communication room. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 C. Install the laminated drawings within a protective Plexiglas encasement on the wall of the servicing communications rooms. To ease accessibility the Plexiglas encasement shall be in either flip-down format or file folder format. 2.4 HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLING A. Recognized cabling for providing the signal medium from the work area to the communications room shall include the following: 1. Category 6 UTP cable B. Category 6 UTP Cable Requirements 1. 23/24 AWG solid bare copper 2. Cable jacket shall comply with NEC Article 800 for use as a plenum cable and shall be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (communications multipurpose plenum) 3. Cable shall terminate on an eight-pin modular jack at each outlet. All horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the ANSI/TIA-568.2-D Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components 4. Cables shall be marked as UL verified with a minimum of Category 6 rating 5. The cable shall support Voice,Analog Base band Video/Audio, Fax, Modem, Switched-56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, 10BASE-T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM,AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, as well as all 77 channels (550 Mhz) of analog broadband video 6. The maximum horizontal cable length for Category 6 copper cable from the termination of the cable in the communications room to the outlet is 295'-0". 7. Cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical characteristics: 8. Cable shall be specified to 250 MHz and shall meet the manufacturer's guaranteed electrical performance and physical specifications. 2.5 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Patch panels 1. Patch panels shall be rated to match installed cable plant 2. The wiring block shall accommodate#23 AWG cable conductors. 3. All modular cross connect panels shall be UL-listed. B. Work Area Outlet 1. Universal eight-position jack pin/pair assignments 2. Jack Color: a) Data: White b) Voice: Blue COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 C. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: 1. White or ivory to match electrical outlets. 2.6 PATCH CABLES A. Verify exact quantities and lengths with Owner prior to purchase B. Patch Cable requirements: 1. Category 6, stranded UTP cable 2. Standard modular non-keyed, 8-position 8-conductor plug 3. 94V-0 rated 4. UL listed 5. Meets FCC Part 68 C. Provide either a 3'-0", 5'-0", 7'-0", or 10'-0" Patch Cords at the communications room for each installed port. 1. Coordinate with Owner on the active equipment layout prior to purchase to ensure correct sizing of patch cords from patch panels to switching equipment. 2. When connecting voice ports to a copper riser, provide a one-pair stranded 8138C connector on one end and 110GS on the other end and shall be of appropriate length for application. D. Provide a 10'-0" Station Cord for each work area outlet port. E. Place each size/length patch cord in a separate container,and mark the containers that hold the patch cords with the length of patch cords contained within. F. All cords shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568.2-D Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cabling Section, and be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program. G. Cords shall be equipped with an eight-pin modular connector on each end, wired straight through and shall be of appropriate length for application. H. All rated patch cords shall be round, and consist of #23 AWG copper, stranded conductors, tightly twisted into individual pairs. I. Patch cords shall be made and warranted by the manufacturer of the cabling system installed in this project and shall meet or exceed patch cord specifications as outlined in TIA standards. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING)SYSTEM A. Refer to sections 270000 and 271300. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 270000 and 271300. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 270000. B. The Contractor shall check pathways, raceways, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, debris, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to section 270000. B. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-D standards, BICSI methods, industry standards and manufacturer's installation guidelines. 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. 2. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. 3. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation. C. Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified data cabling and the installed components and that ensure specified performance levels of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Pull cables in smooth and regular motions using methods that prevent cable kinking. 2. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same raceway/pathway. 3. If necessary, use approved cable pulling lubricant 4. Use fish tape, cable, rope, basket weave wire/cable grips, and other tools that will ensure no damage to the media or raceway. 5. Install open cabling parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural members following surface contours where possible. 6. Do not bend cable greater than a bend radius of 0'-1". D. Provide a 10'-0"service loop at the communications room and shall provide a 3'-0" service loop above the access ceiling or cable trays unless specified otherwise. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 1. All service loops shall be a minimum of 1'-6" (18") in diameter and be accessible for maintenance. E. Coordinate loop placement and orientation with the technology consultant. 1. This allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables. F. Install cables in continuous "home run" lengths from work station outlet to specified patch panel. 1. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized between the communications rooms and the workstation outlet without written Owner permission. G. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. 1. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable. 2. There shall never be more than 0'-%" of unsheathed cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations. H. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. 1. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair equipment's efficient use of their full capacity. 3.4 CABLING METHODS A. The Contractor shall provide cabling in accessible spaces, cable tray, (surface and/or enclosed raceway), conduits, and/or J-Hook cable support system. 1. Within consoles, racks, cabinets, desks, and counters, in accessible ceilings spaces and in gypsum board partitions where open cable method may be used. 2. Use UL or ETL listed plenum rated cable in all spaces. 3. Provide all necessary installation materials, hardware, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type terminations at all data outlets, patch panels, and voice termination materials. B. Conceal raceway and cabling except in unfinished spaces as is practical. C. Exposed Cable 1. All station cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible. 2. Exposed station cable will only be run where indicated on the drawings and will only be allowed when no other options exist. a) Owner must approve all exceptions. D. The Contractor shall utilize conduits/cable tray as indicated on the drawings. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 E. All cabling placed above drop ceilings must be supported by cable tray, J-hooks, caddy bags or conduit. 1. The Contractor shall permanently affix cable supports to the building structure or substrates and provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and are suitably sized to sustain the weight of the cables to be supported. a) Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. b) Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid wires. 2. Multiple cables are to be dressed every 5'-0"to 7'-0". a) Maximum cable sag between cable hooks is 3"-6". F. The Contractor shall route data and voice cables separately in a neat and orderly fashion. 1. No cable ties or wraps shall be used to secure the cables in the runway outside of the communications rooms. Cable ties shall be rated for the environment. G. Keep all items protected before and after installation with dust and moisture proof barrier materials/envelopes. H. If wiring is terminated on patch panels, data, voice jacks prior to painting, carpet installation, and general finish clean up, these jacks shall be placed in a protective envelope to ensure dust, debris, moisture, and other foreign material do not settle onto jacks' contacts. 1. Envelope will be removed on final trim out after other trades have completed their finish work. 2. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure the integrity of these protective measures throughout the life/installation of the project. a) Cable bundles brought into the communications rooms shall be routed and dressed in such a manner that prior to termination the cables are not subject to damage and misuse such as installers walking on the bundles that are on the floor. b) Cable pulling force shall not exceed 25 Ibs of pulling tension or cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. c) Do not leave cables on the floor unprotected or cable bundles hanging from the ceilings. Coil them up in a temporary manner and protect them from damage. I. Communications room cables shall be combed and dressed in a manner as to prevent twists, "braiding" and crossed cables in the cable bundle from the communication room entrance to the termination point at the rear of the patch panel. 1. Behind the patch panel,the cable bundle shall be attached to the rear cable support bar, and shall drop out each cable in a neat, cascading manner to prevent crossed and/or interwoven cables to each patch panel port termination point. a) Use Velcro wraps instead of cables ties for all bundling in the communications rooms. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 b) Plastic/nylon tie-wraps are not allowed to permanently secure cables inside the communications room. 3.5 CABLING SEPARATION A. Comply with TIA rules for separating unshielded copper communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. B. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1'-6" (18") from electrical feeders and/or branch circuit wiring including, but not limited to, light fixtures, sources of heat and EMI sources. C. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1'-0"from auxiliary systems cabling. D. Maintain a 1'-0" separation where cables must pass perpendicularly to electrical, plumbing, or other wiring, conduit, or piping systems. 1. Use non-conduit bushings, if necessary to maintain separation, which allow for the addition of a reasonable number of cables in the future. E. Maintain communications pathways away from electrical apparatus such as motor driven equipment and transformers, minimum separation distance of 10'-0" is recommended. 3.6 CABLING TERMINATION A. Terminate cables in consistent consecutive order. B. Terminate cables onto 8138C modular patch panels without damaging twisted pairs or jacket. C. Arrange cables on patch panels and voice termination hardware in ascending order of room numbers and outlet numbers within rooms. D. Provide a 10'-0" service loop for horizontal cables at each rack in communications rooms. 1. Locate loop at ceiling deck or on bottom of cable runway in minimum 1'-6" (18") diameter. E. Provide a 3'-6"service loop for horizontal cables at work area outlets. Locate service loop above or below data/voice outlet were vertical cable run transitions to horizontal run. F. Maintain twists in cable pairs to within 0'-%" of termination. G. Building Systems Cabling (BAS, FA, elevator line, etc) 1. Coordinate exact placement and connectivity requirements with applicable trade prior to installation. 2. Group all building systems cables in one group. 3. Clearly label cable number and function, in the last positions on the horizontal cabling blocks in each communications room. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 H. Limit cable-bending radius to 20X the cable diameter during installation, and 15X the cable diameter after installation. I. Start numbering at the left of the main door to the room and continue in a clockwise direction around the room. 1. The cables within the room will be terminated starting with the cables located to the left of the main door to the room and continue around the room in a clockwise direction. 3.7 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Station Hardware 1. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box. 2. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or access hatches without prior Owner approval. 3. 8138C Jack Pin Assignments for work area outlets shall match the T-568B wiring scheme. B. Patch panels 1. Copper cables shall be terminated in eight position/eight conductor(8138C)modular patch panels. 2. All Modular jack panels shall match the T-568B wiring scheme. C. Work Area Outlet 1. 8138C non-keyed modular outlets for applications up to one Gbps and ANSI/TIA-568-D compliant for the specified transmission requirements. D. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: 1. Furnish and install blank plates in all unused ports. 3.8 SPECIAL CIRCUITS A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on the cable termination plan for special circuits, including cables to wireless access point locations, security, elevators,fire alarms, etc. B. Wireless Access Points 1. Install one (1) cable from dedicated wireless patch panel(s) in communications room to outlets having 8P8C connectors within a secure metal enclosure. 2. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated for the environment to which they are exposed. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer and labels appropriate to the application. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. B. Fiber termination hardware (designation strip) shall have a 0'-%" x 0'-%" thermal transfer printable label with a permanent acrylic adhesive. C. 110-type copper termination hardware shall have a laser printable, non-adhesive label designed for 110 terminal block marking. D. All labels shall be permanent and shall not fade,peel,or deteriorate due to environment or time. E. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the finalized plan in writing to the Owner representative and DataCom Design Group for review and authorization to proceed. 1. Coordinate with Owner for specifications on labeling of all hardware, cabling, and related equipment prior to any testing. F. Labeling requirements: 1. Label cable terminations on designation strips. 2. Label all cable at each terminating point. 3. Label each port of the work area outlet. 4. Cable identification numbers shall not be duplicated. 5. Label patch panels and wall mounted termination blocks in the communications rooms to match those on the corresponding voice and data outlets. a) The font shall be at least 0'-1/8" in height. 6. Where a wireless access point is installed above an acoustical ceiling, label the ceiling grid frame below the access point, displaying the data port number and, if applicable, the access point identification number. Coordinate labeling of grid with Owner and Architect prior to application of labels. 7. Label each distribution rack, block and other terminating equipment unit and field within that unit within 0'-4"from the block or patch panel termination. Keep labels in a neat and orderly lineup. 8. Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware within connector fields, in wiring closets and equipment rooms. a) Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data- processing equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. 9. Post the cable schedule in a prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations,origins, and destinations. G. Location and termination field description 1. Room location COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 2. Rack-mount or Wall mount 3. Termination field type a) Specific patch panel ports versus a separate dedicated patch panel b) 110-type or M66 blocks H. Unique identifiers 1. Segregation and position on equipment rack 2. Port color-coding 3. Unique labeling I. Documentation 1. Provide electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for project in software and format selected by Owner. a) All labels shall correspond to as-built drawings and to final test reports. 2. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with and approved by Owner so that data can be incorporated into existing databases. 3. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination,type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers. 4. Complete cross connect documentation is required. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 270000. 3.11 POST-INSTALLATION TESTING A. Contractor shall test each pair or strand of every cable prior to acceptance. (100% PASS) B. Contractor shall submit acceptance documentation as defined below. No cabling installation is considered complete until test results have been completed, submitted and approved. C. Standards Compliance and Test Requirements: 1. Cabling shall meet ANSI/TIA-568.2-D Category 6 Horizontal cabling requirements. D. Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ELFEXT,and PSELFEXT data that indicate the worst case result,the frequency at which it occurs,the limit at that point, and the margin. 1. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements. 2. Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both directions when required by the appropriate standards. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. a) Length, propagation delay, and delay skew shall be tested relative to the relevant limit. b) Test shall also include mutual capacitance and characteristic impedance. 1) Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a 'FAIL". E. Cable Test Documentation: 1. Cable test documentation shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic formats. a) If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary software application required to view test results. b) Electronic reports shall be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. c) Certificate shall reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record. 2. Each test record shall contain the cable ID as follows: a) "MEDIATYPE—SOURCE ROOM—DESTINATION ROOM—STRAND/PAIR#",e.g. MM- MC-HC23-001. 3. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into an accessible database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. a) These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in the field- test instrument". b) The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. 4. Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling element: a) Wire map results that indicate that 100%of the cabling has been tested for shorts, opens, miss-wires, splits, polarity reversals,transpositions, presence of AC voltage and end-to-end connectivity. b) Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL. c) Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP d) Tester make & model, serial number, hardware version, and software version. e) Cable ID and project name f) Auto-test specification used g) Overall pass/fail indication h) Date of test COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 F. Cable Test Equipment 1. Contractor shall supply all of the required test equipment used to conduct acceptance tests. 2. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment. Manufacturers shall be ISO 9001 certified. 3. Testing equipment shall be UL-verified to meet Level III accuracy. a) The cable installers shall have a copy of this reference in their possession and be familiar with the contents. 4. Testing equipment shall be within the calibration period recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Testing equipment shall have the latest software and firmware installed. 6. Testing equipment of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results output. 7. Test adapter cables shall be approved by the manufacturer of the test equipment. a) Adapter cables from other sources are not acceptable. b) Adapter cables must be replaced after 1000 tests to ensure accuracy. 8. Test equipment must have a dynamic range of at least 100 dB to minimize measurement uncertainty. 9. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests and printing color graphical reports for all swept measurements. 10. Test equipment must include S-Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and return loss (TDNXT and TDRL)for accurate and efficient troubleshooting. 11. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc measurements in addition to auto tests. Individual tests increase productivity when diagnosing faults. 12. Test equipment must include a library of cable types, sorted by major manufacturer. 13. Test equipment must be able to internally group auto tests and cables in project folders for good records management. a) Test equipment must store at least 1000 auto tests in internal memory. 14. Test equipment must include DSP technology for support of advanced measurements. 15. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with TIA standards. 16. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment interface connector. 17. There shall not be a time domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the measurement. 18. Acceptable testers: a) Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer b) Owner approved equivalent COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 3.12 FIBER TESTING A. Refer to Section 271300. 3.13 CLEANING A. Refer to section 270000. 3.14 ACCEPTANCE A. Once all work has been completed,test documentation has been submitted and approved, and the Owner is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance with contract documents, the Owner will notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system. B. Contractor's RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100%of the installation meets the requirements specified herein. C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and submittal and approval of full documentation as described above. Tests with the "* PASS" (asterisk)will not be acceptable. 1. These circuits must be repaired to meet "PASS". END OF SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2—23180 November 11, 2024 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This document covers the general requirements for the installation of Audio Visual (AV) systems. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 CODES A. Execute work in accordance with best AV system installation practices, National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local codes. 1.4 REGULATIONS A. Comply with terms and conditions of Americans with Disabilities Act, especially regarding provisions for hearing impaired and wheelchair access in control areas 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Refer to Division 1. 2. Submit in quantities, format and timetable as required by General Conditions. B. Product Data Binders 1. Minimum number of Sets: four (4). 2. Timetable a) Submit within thirty (30) days after award of contract. b) Submit simultaneously with Shop Drawings. c) Drawing must be reviewed, approved and stamped with either an AVIXA CTS-1 or CTS-D certification from a staff member employed by the AV firm. d) Allow minimum of ten (10) business days for review. All sets minus one (1) will be returned with review comments. If a resubmit is required, resubmit total quantity of complete sets. If second resubmit is required, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred during additional review process. e) Review and approval of Product Data is required before equipment purchase and installation. f) Bind product data sheets together either in GBC or 3-ring type binders. C. Shop Drawings 1. Minimum Number of Sets: four (4). 2. Timetable AudioVisual Systems 27 41 16- 1 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 a) Submit within thirty (30) days after award of contract. b) Submit simultaneously with Product Data Binders. c) Allow minimum of ten (10) business days for review. All sets minus one (1) will be returned with review comments. If a resubmit is required, resubmit total quantity of complete sets. If second resubmit is required, Contract shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred during additional review process. 3. Description: a) Shop Drawings shall be used for coordination between trades and updated as final record drawings. b) Bind all Shop Drawings together to form set. Loose drawings will not be accepted. c) Each drawing shall include: Project, Building, Location, Contractor Name, Architect, AV Consultant, Date and Revision Number. d) Number and title each drawing in logical manner as a set. e) Include cover sheet with listing of all drawings included in bound set. f) Ensure that labeling on Shop Drawings match labeling on equipment. g) Minimum Scale: 1) Floor Plans: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 2) Rack Elevations: 1-% inch = 1 foot. 3) Plate/Panel Details: 6 inches = 1 foot. 4) Loudspeaker Details: 1 inch = 1 foot. h) Include as a minimum: 1=) Floor plans indicating locations of all AV devices, vertical risers, pull boxes, and exposed wiring. Include Device ID (PRJ, SCREEN, FRK, FB,AVP,etc.,as referenced in design contract documents), as appropriate for projectors, screens, racks, floor boxes, AV plates in walls, etc. 2) Schematic diagram showing all primary and secondary devices, interconnectivity and signal flow. 3) Plate details showing size, material, finish, connectors, engraving, etc. 4) Mounting detail drawings of loudspeakers, racks, and overhead equipment. Hire services of professional structural engineer, licensed by the appropriate governing authority,to review shop drawings, building structural drawings, and any existing structures from which equipment is to be suspended. Include Structural Engineer's stamped report with shop drawing submittal. Report shall include: i) Itemization of items reviewed by the Structural Engineer. j) Confirmation that proposed methods of suspending equipment as shown on the shop drawings conform to required safety factors. k) Confirmation that building structure from which equipment is to be suspended will support equipment including required safety factors. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-2 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 1) Rack elevations. 2) Complete schematic diagram. One-line diagram with detailed descriptions of product inputs and outputs is acceptable. Include terminal strip details and cable label information. If wiring diagram spans more than three (3) sheets, additionally provide simplified block diagram of entire system on one (1) sheet. 3) Electrical power wiring diagram. Include circuit, switching, and control details. 4) Wiring diagram of grounding and shielding scheme. .S) Drawings for custom-fabricated items (i.e., plates, panels, cables, and assemblies). 6) General construction drawings necessary for completion of work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Minimum number of Sets: four (4). 2. Bind Operation and Maintenance Manuals using either GBC or 3-ring binders. 3. Format and Minimum Information below: a) Section 1 - System Operation. 1) Introduction/overview to system components and their functions and locations. Include a brief listing of basic system functions. 2) Complete but simple system operating instructions to accomplish basic system functions, written for non-technical personnel. ) Certificate indicating names of Owner personnel trained by AV Contactor, date of training, name of AV Contractor representative that provided training, and name of project. b) Section 2 - System Documentation. 1) Simplified system one-line schematic diagram showing changes made during construction. 2) Complete inventory of system components including serial numbers. Identify location (equipment rack, over stage, stored in control room, etc.) of each component. 3) Cable and terminal strip documentation including cable numbers, functions, originating locations, terminating locations, and signal levels. 4) All Shop Drawings corrected to reflect as-built conditions. .S) Other data and drawings required during construction. ) Initial Tests and Adjustments data. 7) Final Tests and Adjustments data. ) CD-ROM discs including all utilized manufacturer's software and saved copies of software configurations (configurations as established during Final Tests and Adjustments). Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-3 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 c) Section 3 - Manufacturer's Documentation. 1) For each equipment model at no additional costs to Owner, even if manufacturer does not include costs of such documentation with purchase of equipment item. 2) Manufacturer's Product Data. 3) Operating instructions. 4) Installation instructions. ) Service information. 6) Schematic diagrams. 7) Replacement parts list. d) Section 4 - Maintenance Information. 1) Preventive maintenance schedule letter clearly stating target dates of six month and end-of-warranty preventative maintenance inspections, and list of maintenance tasks performed. 2) Maintenance instructions including manufacturer's recommended maintenance, recommended maintenance schedule and information concerning proper inspection, testing, and replacement of components. 3) Troubleshooting information complete with instructions for procedures during equipment failure. e) Section 5—Warranty Information 1) System warranty letter. 4. Provide three (3) sets on CD-R disc that include all material in Operation and Maintenance Manuals in PDF format except for copyrighted material. 5. Submit one (1) set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals at least ten (10) days before Final Tests and Adjustments procedures (minus data from Final Tests and Adjustments). This set will be reviewed by Owner and returned to Contractor. Re-submit after Final Tests and Adjustments and include data. NOTE: Do not schedule Final Tests and Adjustments or perform training of Owner personnel before submitting Operation and Maintenance Manual. 6. Submit remaining number of complete manuals as required by General Conditions within ten (10) days after return of reviewed set(s). Include Final Tests and Adjustment data, warranty period letter, and any other data not included in first submission. E. Samples 1. Request for Samples- Upon request,furnish samples (at no additional cost)to Owner and/or General Contractor of submitted items proposed as substitutes for specified items. Products will be reviewed to determine if proposed substitute items meet required function and quality. 2. Product Tests a) Products submitted as samples may require testing by independent laboratory. Testing at expense of Contractor. AudioVisual Systems 27 41 16-4 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 b) Obtain written approval of tested products before incorporating into system. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AV Contractor Qualifications 1. Be established AV System Contractor, regularly engaged in furnishing and installing AV systems. NOTE: Electrical or general contracting firms responsible for completion of this work, but not meeting above requirement, shall employ services of approved AV Contractor as subcontractor to perform work described herein. 2. Be experienced in installations of similar size and scope within last five (5) years. Submit list of four (4) (minimum) installed jobs of similar magnitude, completed within last five years. For verification, submit complete information, including project name, project address, contact person, daytime telephone number plus month and year of project completion. At Owner's request, accompany Owner or Owner's representative on visit to any or all example completed projects submitted. 3. Be Authorized Dealer for all major lines of equipment listed in Part 2 (Chief, Epson, Extron, Mersive, Middle Atlantic, Panasonic, QSC, Screen Innovations, Shure, etc.) Must have at least one permanent staff member who is factory trained in the installation and maintenance of each major product line offered. 4. Employ personnel (at all levels of work) experienced in projects of similar size and scope. Provide list of key personnel to be responsible for each of the following aspects of work: Project Management, Technical Documentation, Control System programming, DSP programming and Leadership of Field Work (one who is present for all field work). For each identified employee, indicate number of years employed by contractor, number of years' experience in assigned responsibilities, and list of previously completed projects where similar responsibilities were required. 5. Project manager assigned to this project must have a minimum of five (5) years' experience in installing and integrating AV systems of similar scale. Project Manager shall also have either an INFOCOMM CTS-1 or CTS-D certification. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GUIDELINES A. All active AV equipment shall be furnished by AV Contractor selected by the Owner. All active electronics shall be contractor furnished, contractor installed (CFCI). B. Infrastructure Products—All conduits, basket tray/cable tray, pull boxes and associated parts required for infrastructure shall be installed by the electrical contractor unless specifically excluded in these specifications or drawings. C. Performance - Regardless of completeness of descriptive paragraphs herein, each device shall meet its manufacturer's published specifications. Verify performance. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-5 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 D. Contract Documents - Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. In general, the specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials, and the drawings establish the quantities, details, and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to in the installation of the AV system components. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, the items with the greater quantity or quality shall be provided and installed. Clarification with the owner about these items shall be made prior to the ordering and installation. E. Quantities—All quantities are indicated on AV drawings or in Part 2 AV Products list. Confirm quantities on final Contract Documents. If Contract Documents do not include quantities necessary to deliver complete working system, provide notification of disparity, and install required quantity of devices for complete working system. F. Small Parts -Systems are described in terms of major products. Even if not specifically mentioned, provide and install patch cables, connectors, hardware, converters, power supplies, labels, terminals, mounting accessories etc. necessary for complete and working system meeting design intent of specifications. G. Balanced Lines— Unless specifically directed otherwise, wire all line and microphone level circuits as balanced with respect to signal ground. For products without balanced inputs or outputs, provide high quality balancing transformers with proper level, shielding, and impedance characteristics. Assure all audio levels arriving and leaving matrix and routing switchers are equal to the manufacturer's recommended input audio level. If required, use Radio Design Labs, Inc. products or equivalent for level matching. H. Keys - Provide five (5) sets of keys for any AV system product requiring keys. I. Condition — Provide and install products listed in this section in factory new condition, conforming to applicable provisions of American National Standards Institute. J. Designations - Each major product item is given unique designation (such as MIX1 for mixer number 1). The product designations are unique in this section only and may be repeated in other specification sections. K. Security Screws- Use Middle Atlantic HSK Guardian Series button-head screws and bits to secure rack components, LCD mounts, Projector mounts and any other location deemed necessary by Owner. Use nylon washers (not provided by Bryce) to protect equipment surfaces. Account for appropriate tip wear when ordering quantity and do no use a bit beyond the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide ten (10) additional unused driver bits and deliver to the customer after completion. L. AV Electrical Power- Ensure that "Star" ground configuration is properly implemented by the Electrical Contractor. Ensure that ground wires from each outlet are isolated from conduit, neutrals, and each other and are each home-run back to the dedicated breaker panel for AV systems. M. Wireless Microphones - Coordinate frequency selection with other radio-frequency sources in the area and with manufacturer's recommendations. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-6 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 N. Control System Programming: 1. Program each panel to provide simple, intuitive control of all basic AV functions including: per zone program and speech volume levels, video and audio source and destination routing, AV system power, media player transport functions and CATV tuner control (including channel guide, navigation, last channel, channel select (up, down and manual input) and channel presets). In most applications program audio should follow video but allow subpage for additional audio routing. Provide one button macros for projection screen, projector, lighting preset (as required) and default input selection. Utilize owner provided graphic representing owner organization on startup screen and as a background on each screen. Provide auto start up function when plugging in devices to turn display on. 2. Utilize Infocomm International's(AVIXA) "Dashboard for Controls" concept for touch panel layout unless directed otherwise by Owner. 3. AV management software shall be installed on Owner furnished computer(s) with adequate specifications per manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide layout of each and every touch panel and hard-button panel pages in the product data submittal for approval by Owner. Provide examples of touch panel options for color, button and icon styles for owner approval with submittals. 120 days before system testing provide to owner a page by page powerpoint or other document showing touch panel layout with descriptions of functions for approval. 5. Provide web-control for each touch panel in AV system. Include page tracking, and track current button feedback between touch panel and web-control panel. 6. Staff member certified by control system manufacturer shall program control system. Control programming must be done by in-house personnel. Programming cannot be subbed out to another contractor or individual. 7. After programming is approved, all control system code and programming, including touch panel code and graphics, will become property of Owner. AV Contractor shall provide Owner both raw and compiled code on CD-R disc. O. Audio System Programming - Owner shall coordinate layout and logical branching of DSP audio system. Include screen layout and menu branching drawings in AV submittal. After AV system is approved, all audio control system code and programming will become property of Owner. AV contractor shall provide virtual mixer web or desktop interface for mixer functions. Provide all DSP licenses required. AV Contractor shall provide Owner both raw and compiled code on CD-R disc. P. EDID Configuration —The variety of resolutions of laptops and other computer devices that may be connected to these systems is unknown. Set preferred EDID settings to 1920x1080, 60Hz, 2-channel audio. Q. AV Racks: 1. Provide blank faceplate in any area marked BLANK in drawings. 2. Provide shelf for mounting of any device for which rack mount kit is not available. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-7 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 3. Provide one Panelcrafters DATCO-XXXXX-RHIM-01 designer/integrator information plate or approved alternate per rack. Install information plate at the top of each rack unless 1RU space is not available. Contact Panelcrafters sales department to add AV Contractor graphic to the "integrator" section (approximately 8.5"x 1.75" of the right-hand side). All alternates must include AV Consultant graphic. Submit to AV designer for approval of final plate design prior to purchasing and installation. R. AV Floor Boxes and Poke-thrus: 1. Clean floor boxes and poke-thrus of all dust and debris prior to installation of any active or connectorized plate. 2. Any floor box or poke-thru with active or connectorized AV plates found to have any dust, debris or water in bottom of box are subject to replacement of all plates and components. A re-test of all associated components must be completed. 3. Provide blank plates for all unused compartments in the AV floor boxes and poke-thrus. S. AV Plates 1. The project standard plate color is white unless the plate is mounted on a wood or stone wall in which case it is to be stainless steel. T. AV Design Bid & Substitutions: 1. System design is around products listed in Part 2. Intent of product specification is to provide standard of quality and function for installed materials. Certain performance specifications are given to clarify job requirements. 2. Bid AV system with products specified in section below unless noted otherwise from Owner. 3. No substitutions will be allowed without prior approval from Owner specific to proposed manufacturer and model numbers. 4. Equipment listed in Part 2 is based on performance criteria to meet Owner design requirements. 5. All requested substitutions need to meet or exceed performance of devices listed in Part 2. For each request provide manufacturer's published specifications to verify performance and explain functional and cost impact. 6. Evaluation and approval of substitution requests will be performed by Owner. 2.2 ROOM DESCRIPTIONS A. MULTIPURPOSE ROOM 113: 1. Contains a movable room partition that divides the room into two equal parts, north and south. The rooms are both physically and functionally combinable. 2. Each room contains a large flat panel display for displaying local presentations and web-conferencing. A videoconferencing bar with camera and microphone will appear below each display. 3. Additional web-conferencing microphones are ceiling mounted in each room. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-8 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 4. Media input sources include a HDMI and USB both in the floor boxes and at the wall under the display. 5. Local program and voice lift audio will be accommodated via ceiling mounted monoaural loudspeakers. Far end web-conferencing audio will be accommodated by the videoconferencing bar. 6. Two (2) wireless microphones are provided for each room. All four (4) microphones are available when the room is combined. 7. Control will be handled via a wall mounted touch panel appearing in each room. 8. Equipment will reside in an equipment rack installed in mill work appearing at the rear of the north multipurpose room space. 2.3 AV PRODUCTS A. The following are major active and infrastructure products for this project. Submit product equals for approval. 1. AMP—Audio Power Amplifier a. Extron XPA U 1002 2. ANT—Wireless Microphone Antenna a. Shure MXWAPT8 3. AUDTX—Wired Microphone Transmitter a. Extron AXI 22 AT D 4. CAMERA—Videoconferencing All-In-One Bar a. Logitech Rally Bar 1) Provide Logitech TV mount 2) Provide Logitech microphone pods. Qty. as shown in the drawings. 5. CP—Control Processor a. Crestron RMC4 6. DSP—Audio Signal Processor a. Biamp TesiraFORTE X800 7. FPD - Flat Panel Display a. ViewSonic IFP110 110" diagonal, 4K display 1) Provide Chief XSM1U wall mount 2) Refer to Architectural drawings for precise placement. 8. MCH —Wireless Microphone Charger a. Shure MXWNCS4 9. MRK— Mill Work Equipment Rack a. Middle Atlantic SRSR-2-12 b. Include power strip for appropriate power distribution. C. Include vent and blank panels as required. 10. NWS - Network Switch a. Netgear M4300-16X (XSM4316PA) 11. PWR— Power Conditioner a. Furman Sound PL-8C 12. S—Audio Loudspeaker Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16-9 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 a. JBL Control 26CT 13. TP—Control Touch Panel a. Crestron TSW-7-x-S 1) Coordinate finish with architect. 14. TPDAN — Dante Encoder/Decoder a. Crestron DM-NVX-363 15. TPRX—Shielded Twisted Pair HDMI Receiver a. Crestron DM-NVX-D20 16. TPTX—Shielded Twisted Pair HDMI Transmitter a. Crestron DM-NVX-E20-2G-X-T 1) Include decora cover plate as approved by Architect 17. USBRX—Shielded Twisted Pair USB Receiver a. Extron USB Extender Plus R 18. USBTX—Shielded Twisted Pair USB Transmitter a. Extron USB Extender Plus D T 1) Include decora cover plate as approved by Architect 19. WMIC—Wireless Microphone Transmitter a. Type 1—Shure MXW1 b. Type 2— MXW2/SM58 20. WP1—Custom Wall Plate a. 3-gang wall plate 1) Provide HDMI female connector 2) Provide two (2) USB-C connectors 3) Provide two (2) USB-A 3.0 connectors 4) Label connections as "Display" or "Conferencing Bar" as appropriate 2.4 CABLES A. Interconnect Wiring—AII AV cables will be plenum rated per NEC. 1. Analog Audio Plenum Rated Cable - West Penn 25291, or similar. 2. Digital Audio Plenum Rated Cable: Belden 1801E plenum-rated AES/EBU compliant equivalent. 3. Analog Composite Video Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn 25806 or Belden 89120. 4. RGBHV Plenum Rated Cable: Belden 1283S5, or West Penn 258195. 5. Control Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn D25350. 6. Loudspeaker Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn 25226B & 25227B. 7. Interface/Adapter Cables: Extron Certified Cables 8. HDMI Interconnect Cables: Extron Pro Series HDMI Cables B. Connectors—All AV (including microphone) connectors shall be made by Canare or Neutrik. Connectors shall be of the quantity and type as required for proper and durable operation, and signal transmission of the electrical characteristics for associated circuitry. 1. Microphone connectors: 3-conductor XLR AES/EBU compliant (for microphones in tables/lecterns, use Neutrik RF shielded connectors). 2. Control panels: XLR type with number of conductors as required. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16- 10 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 3. Line level and left/right audio connectors: tip/ring/sleeve 1/4" phone jacks with insulated bushings. 4. Composite video and RGBHV connectors: BNC dual crimp true 75 ohm BCP-C. 5. BNC shall be made by ADC or Kings and be HD-SDI compliant to 3 GHz. 6. Fiber: UniCam LC connectors. 7. Loudspeaker shall be Neutrik Speakon type. 8. Provide strain relief for each and every connector. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Guidelines 1. Quality of Work- Perform labor to accepted industry standards and state and local codes to accomplish complete and working system. 2. Material and Labor- Provide specified products and other incidental materials, appliances, tools, and transportation required for complete and functioning systems. Provide personnel to perform labor who are skilled in techniques and can demonstrate technical knowledge AV infrastructure system installations. 3. Documents at Job Site - Keep following documents at job site during entire construction period: a) Complete Specifications and Drawings. b) Approved Shop Drawings. c) Approved Product Data. d) Progress Set of Project Record Documents. 4. Mounting- Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and square. Ensure that permanently installed equipment is firmly and safely held in place. Design equipment supports to support loads imposed with project safety factor of five (5) or greater. For devices hung overhead, obtain review by Structural Engineer licensed by the appropriate governing authority prior to installation. 5. Dimension Verification -Verify dimensions and space requirements to assure that proper mounting, clearance, and maintenance access space is available for system components. 6. Clean-Up - Leave project clean each day. Place debris where designated by General Contractor. Debris includes but not limited to: solder splatter, cable ends, stripped insulation, spent crimp connectors, gypsum board and ceiling tile dust, and product wrappings and cartons. After completion of installation, thoroughly clean areas worked, including non-visible areas such as equipment rack interiors, rack top panels, and inside lockable floor and wall boxes. 7. Coordinate installation of AV infrastructure and equipment with other trades in order to follow project schedule. 8. Maintain any licensing required by the appropriate governing authority to install and terminate low voltage systems. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16- 11 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 B. Labeling 1. Equipment Labels - AV Contractor shall provide engraved lamicoid labels on front and rear of rack-mounted equipment. Mount labels plumb and square. Include schematic reference design, item name, and system or area controlled by labeled component. On program preamps and mixers, provide label for each input indicating which source is controlled by labeled channel. Unless otherwise indicated, provide permanently-mounted black labels engraved with 1/8-inch white block characters. Handwritten, self-laminating, or embossed plastic (Dymo) labels are not acceptable. Provide labels for major equipment with two (2) lines (minimum) of engraving, coded as follows: a) Line 1: Generic name of device, such as MIXER AMPLIFIER. b) Line 2: Schematic designation of device, such as AV-MSW-1. 2. Control Labels — AV Contractor shall provide engraved label over each user- operated control that describes the function or purpose of control. Provide label of proper size to fit available space. 3. Terminal Strip Labels - AV Contractor shall label each terminal strip with unique identification code in addition to numerical label (Cinch MS series) for each terminal. Show terminal strip codes on system schematic drawings included with Project Record Documents. 4. Rear Equipment Labels -AV Contractor shall provide adhesive label on rear of equipment where cables attach, to indicate designation of cable connected at each point. 5. Cable and Wire Labels - Label cables and wiring logically, legibly and permanently for easy identification. Labels on cables shall be adhesive strip type, covered with clear heat shrink tubing. Factory stamped heat shrink tubing may be used. Hand-written or self-laminating type labels are not acceptable. 6. Cable Label Codes and Locations- Label each cable with unique alpha-numeric code. Locate cable designation at start and end of each cable run,within three (3) inches of termination point. For cable runs that have intermediate splice points, label cable with same designation throughout, with additional suffix to indicate each segment of run. Provide cable designation codes to schematic drawings included with Project Record Documents and Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Power and Grounding 1. Power Coordination—Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to rack. Electrical contractor will provide power to audio visual systems. Before installation, verify load requirements for systems as accepted. AudioVisual Systems 27 41 16- 12 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 2. Bus Bars - Install 1-inch by %-inch copper ground bus bar, top to bottom in floor mounted AV racks. Ground and bond equipment chassis of each rack- mounted component without three-pin grounding plug to bus bars with #12 AWG insulated green wire using 6-32 or larger nuts, bolts, lock-washers, and appropriate NEMA connectors. Electrical Contractor (Division 16) shall provide and connect #4 AWG green insulated wire from Bus Bars to ground point in AV technical electrical panel. D. Equipment Racks 1. Ventilation - Provide ventilation adequate to keep temperature in rack below 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Use "whisper" type ventilation fans in racks, adjusted to come on when temperature in rack rises above 85 degrees Fahrenheit, only if adequate cooling cannot be provided by Owner. E. Wiring 1. Wiring Standards - Execute wiring in strict adherence to best AV engineering practices. 2. Field Connection Devices-Connect cable to active components through screw terminal connections and spade lugs when appropriate. For BNC connections use three-piece, dual crimp BNC properly sized for cable with insulating bushings. Wire nut or "Skotchlock" connectors are not acceptable. Do not wrap audio cable splices or connections with adhesive backed tape. Punch connectors or telephone-style punch blocks are not acceptable anywhere in the installation unless specifically authorized by Owner. 3. Run cable in ceiling plenums neatly parallel to building walls, supported every three feet to structure with plenum rated ties. 4. Raceways - Run vertical wiring inside rack in Panduit (or equivalent) plastic raceways with snap-on covers, sized to allow at least 50% future wiring. Mount raceways on full length %-inch flat black plywood backboards,attached to rack sides. If between-rack wiring chases are provided, Panduit raceways are not required. Horizontal wiring in rack shall be neatly tied in manageable bundles with cable lengths cut to minimize excess cable slack, but still allow for service and testing. Provide horizontal support bars if cable bundles sag. Individually bundle excess AC power cable away from rack mounted equipment with plastic cable ties. Electrical tape and adhesive backed cable tie anchors are not acceptable. 5. Accessibility - Ensure that wiring and connections are completely visible and labeled in rack. Mount termination resistors, if required, on terminal strips, fully visible and not concealed within equipment or connectors. 6. Loudspeaker Polarity - Connect loudspeakers electrically in phase, using same wire color for loudspeaker wiring throughout project. 7. Physical Damage Prevention -Take necessary precautions to prevent physical damage to cables and equipment. Damaged cables or equipment will not be accepted. Separate, organize, and route cables to restrict channel crosstalk and feedback oscillation. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16- 13 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 8. Racks- Looking into the rack from the rear, locate AC power, control, data and speaker wiring on the left; line level audio, control,video, and RF wiring on the right. Keep several inches of space between power cables and other signals. 9. Hum Prevention - Ensure that electromagnetic and electrostatic hum is at inaudible levels. For line level signals, float cable shields at the output of the source device. Do not cut or remove shield conductors;fold back unconnected shields over cable jacket and cover with clear heat-shrink tubing. Do not obstruct cable labels. 10. Other Connections - Make connections using rosin core solder or approved mechanical connectors. Where spade lugs are used, crimp properly with ratchet type crimping tool. Solder spade lugs mounted on#22 AWG or smaller cable after crimping. 3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Power up any electronic equipment to ensure its proper functioning before its arrival onsite. B. Ensure that materials (especially electronic and electro-acoustic devices) are protected against physical, environmental, and electronic damage until final acceptance by Owner. C. Schedule delivery to minimize delays in the project. D. Provide storage protection against temperature and humidity extremes, theft, vandalism, physical damage, and environmental damage. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Refer to Division 1. B. Warranty- Submit letter providing warranty covering labor and materials supplied under this contract. Bind in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Terms as described in General Conditions. Minimum terms as follows: 1. System - Systems shall be free of manufacturing or installation defects for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. Clearly designate begin and end dates of system warranty period. 2. Parts and Labor - Provide parts and labor to repair defects in materials and workmanship during system warranty period. 3. Response Time-Within system warranty period, provide initial on-site service response within one (1) business day of service call. Provide resolution to any system defects within 72 hours or within 48 hours of receipt of repaired or replaced product from manufacturer. 4. Replacement Products - If any item must be removed for repair during system warranty period, provide replacement item of similar quality at no charge. 5. Repair Limit - Do not repair any piece of equipment found defective during installation or system warranty period more than two (2) times. After second repair, replace defective item with similar approved item at no additional cost to Owner. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16- 14 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 6. Extended Manufacturer's Warranties— Identify products with manufacturer's warranties extending beyond one (1) year. Provide terms and conditions of such warranties. 7. Service Personnel Information - Provide name(s) and telephone number(s) of service personnel to be contacted regarding repair and maintenance. C. Extended Warranty- Provide cost to extend complete AV system warranty from one (1) year to three (3) years. Included a list of all provided services including maintenance schedules. 3.4 INITIAL TESTS A. Purpose—These tests are to ensure that the AV system is installed and functioning as specified, and to ensure the system is ready for Final Tests and Adjustments (described later). B. Testing Standards— Perform testing in accordance with ANSI standards. C. Inspection -Verify prior to beginning actual tests and adjustments on systems: 1. Proper grounding of all electronic components (through third prong of power connector or separate connection between component chassis and ground bus bar). 2. Cables dressed, routed, and labeled, connected with proper polarity. 3. Insulation and shrink tubing in place. 4. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. removed. 5. Proper frequency settings (or modules) at crossovers and controllers. 6. All equalizer bands and tone controls set for flat frequency response. 7. Survey temperatures of each piece of equipment after four (4) hours use (minimum). Note and report any hot equipment. D. Electrical Power Quality- While all sound and AV system components are unplugged from electrical power outlets, AV Contractor shall turn on power to outlets, and confirm proper voltages at each outlet across the following pairs of terminals: hot and neutral, hot and ground, and neutral and ground (zero volts across neutral and ground). AV Contractor to document measurements. E. General Function Tests -Test each piece of equipment to ensure that it performs its intended function. Include all portable equipment in tests. Intent of initial tests is to verify complete, functioning system before Final Tests and Adjustments. Correct problems found during initial testing before beginning Final Tests and Adjustments. Document whether all pieces performed intended functions; note any unresolved malfunctions. F. Initial Tests and Adjustments Data - Submit written report of Initial Tests and Adjustments data upon completion to Owner. Include printed name(s) of technician(s) performing tests, date(s) and time(s) of tests, model and serial numbers of test equipment, results of each initial test, descriptions of problems encountered and their solutions, and statement that system is ready for Final Tests and Adjustments. Initial Tests and Adjustments Data to include signatures of technician(s) performing tests. AudioVisual Systems 27 41 16- 15 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 3.5 FINAL TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Purpose—These tests are to be witnessed by AV Consultant to determine if system is complete and functioning as designed and specified. Also, AV Consultant will perform listening and viewing tests and witness adjustments of all images for optimum clarity. B. Timetable - Coordinate with Owner, General Contractor, and AV Consultant to schedule Final Tests and Adjustments after submittal of Initial Tests and Adjustments data. C. System and Site Conditions —AV Consultant will witness Final Tests and Adjustments. Have systems fully functional and ready for observation and testing upon AV Consultant's arrival. Coordinate with all trades for quiet conditions throughout the listening areas and for the duration of the test schedule. If upon AV Consultant's arrival, systems do not meet criteria, site is not sufficiently quiet, or if Owner or AV Consultant is required to make additional trips to job site to witness additional testing or perform additional reviews of installed equipment, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for labor and expenses incurred by having incurred costs deducted from payments to contractor. D. Test Labor- Provide technician familiar with this project's AV systems and operation of test equipment to perform testing. Provide additional technician to assist in the tests and to perform troubleshooting, repairs, and adjustments. Include labor for these technicians to be present for one (1), eight (8)-hour day during Final Tests and Adjustments. E. Tools - Provide standard hand tools including screwdrivers, pliers, wire strippers, nut drivers, soldering iron, and other tools appropriate for troubleshooting system problems. F. Ladders and Scaffolds - Provide ladders and scaffolds to inspect/adjust loudspeakers and rigging points. G. Verification of Initial Tests and Adjustments -Verify that Initial Tests and Adjustments have been performed and meet criteria. During Final Tests and Adjustments, AV Consultant may require portions of the Initial Tests and Adjustments to be repeated. Repeat measurements as requested without claim for additional payment. 3.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER A. Certificate—Submit Certificate of Final Acceptance form signed by Owner verifying complete installation and proper operation of systems upon fulfillment of all requirements and upon recommendation by Owner. B. General Adjustments—Adjust, balance, and align equipment for optimum quality, meeting manufacturers published specifications. C. Input/Output Jack Demonstration — Demonstrate proper performance and phase of each system input and output jack (all audio input and output jacks) as received at AV and network systems. D. Inventory— Inventory all installed and portable equipment for correct quantities. E. Functional Demonstration — Demonstrate operation of each function of each major piece of equipment. Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16- 16 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 F. Other Tests - Perform any other tests on any part of the AV system as requested by Owner. G. Final Equipment Settings— Record final settings of all equalizer bands, tone controls, filters, delays, limiters, etc., including those established through computer software settings. Include descriptions of settings (including software settings) in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Include software copy of configuration file(s) in Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Security Inspection— Inspect equipment for security from tampering (covers, shaft- locks, etc.). I. Review of Labels— Review installed labels on cables, equipment, controls, and terminal strips. 3.7 OWNER TRAINING A. Provide Owner training as described in General Conditions. As a minimum, provide eight (8) hours instruction (within two (2) trips to site) regarding AV Systems operation to Owner-designated personnel. Schedule instruction time(s) with Owner to occur after completion of Final Tests and Adjustments. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule instruction time. Document date, time, and attendees of the training session and include documentation in Operation and Maintenance Manuals to serve as record of trained personnel. 3.8 SUPPORT DURING OWNER'S FIRST USE OF COMPLETED SYSTEM A. Provide personnel familiar with design, installation, and operation of each system to be present at Owner's first use of each completed system (up to six (6) hours total in two sessions). During first use of each system, respond to Owner requests for troubleshooting, adjustments, and additional training. If no one contractor employee or representative can provide expertise in all aspects of the system, provide multiple personnel for the six (6) hours per session as required. Schedule presence of personnel in advance with Owner. Should significant elements of the new system be operational prior to final completion, Owner may elect to schedule contractor presence for Owner function prior to final completion of system. Should Owner exercise this option, contractor presence will not be required at first use following final completion. END OF SECTION 27 4116 Audiovisual Systems 27 41 16- 17 Fire Dept. Resource Center, Phase 2-#23180 November 11,2024 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT SUMMARY/OVERVIEW A. This document covers the general requirements for work to be performed to provide electronic surveillance. B. The contents of this document, along with related drawings and other documentary material, are critical to the security of this project and Owner and shall remain secure and confidential. 1. Confidential information shall not be deliberately or inadvertently disclosed to anyone other than the Contractor's personnel and subcontractors who require disclosure to perform their portion of the work. 2. This confidential information shall be tracked to ensure that copies are accounted for and properly destroyed when no longer needed to perform the work. C. The security systems shall consist of the following integrated subsystems as specified herein: 1. Video Surveillance 2. Wire and Cable D. One electronic security systems integrator (security subcontractor) will provide the work specified in sections 280000, 281000, and 282300. This work in these sections require subsystem integration,will not be subcontracted, and will be provided by one contractor. E. Provide complete turnkey systems with the exception of those items noted within this specification as being provided by others. F. Related Sections include: 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications (including related sub-sections) 3. Section 282300 Video Surveillance 4. Section 283100 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Upon completion of commissioning testing and Owner acceptance, DataCom Design Group bears no liability or responsibility for the continued proper operation of the installed systems. B. The Items described herein shall not be modified or substituted without consent of DataCom Design Group and/or the Owner. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 C. Security subcontractor's manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by the Contractor, Architect, Owner or other parties affected by the work of this Section 280000. D. If the manufacturer of security devices or connecting hardware has supplied post manufacture performance data, copies of such are to be kept for inclusion in the documentation and made available to the Owner upon request. E. All materials are to be new unused and of the latest series of model number, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner or security system designer. F. All materials shall be rated for the environment they are installed. 1. All materials shall be UL-and/or ETL-approved and labeled in accordance with NEC for all products where labeling service normally applies. 2. Materials and equipment requiring UL 94, 149 or 1863 listing shall be so labeled. 3. Modification of products that nullifies UL labels is not permitted. G. All security integrator personnel must be manufacturer certified and capable of an installation that falls under the manufacturer's guidelines necessary to obtain a manufacturer warranty. 1. The integrator shall provide all components/materials essential for a complete and functional security access and surveillance system. H. Security integrator shall issue a two (2) year warranty on installation and workmanship. I. These Specifications and Drawings are intended for bidding purposes only, No part shall be copied or used for any purpose other than bidding on this project. 1. This package shall be contractual upon bid award. J. Drawings and Specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. 1. In general Specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials and tests, and drawings establish the quantities, details and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to in the installation of the security system components. 2. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, or within the specifications themselves, the items with greater quantity or quality shall be estimated and installed. 3. Clarification with the Owner/Designer about these items shall be made prior to purchase and installation. 4. Questions regarding the Specification or system requirements should be directed in writing to DataCom Design Group or the Owner. K. Security integrator shall adhere to Division 1 general requirements and written security Specifications and Drawings within this construction package and shall be responsible for complying with all local, state and federal laws or regulations applicable to the work being performed, even though said law, rule or regulation is not identified herein. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 L. Security integrator shall arrange and pay for any inspections required by the public agencies having jurisdiction in the area. M. The security contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of this agreement,insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from, or conjunction with,the performance of the work hereunder by the security integrator, his agents, representatives, or employees. 1. The security integrator shall pay the cost of such insurance. N. The security integrator will respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the Owner, his employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the extent necessary, consistent with the legal responsibilities of the State of Texas and the Owner. O. If required the security integrator shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by its requirements to keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project. P. Furnish submittals and manuals in accordance with Division 1. Q. Furnish a detailed material list complete with suppliers (distributors) list of components and distributors name, address, and phone number. R. Refer to Specifications issued by Architect, Division 1,for Project and cost payments. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in Specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions,or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. For conflicts between referenced requirements and contract documents comply with the one that is more stringent. 1. Federal, State, and Local codes, regulations and ordinances 2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code 4. NFPA 730: Guide for Premises Security 5. NFPA 731: Standard for the Installation of Electronic Premises Security 6. National Electric Code (NEC), latest edition 7. Building Codes (UBC) (IBC), latest editions 8. Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA) 9. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 10. Local Governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction 11. Underwriters Laboratory(UL)Applicable Standards for Safety and Security 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)Applicable Standards ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 13. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Applicable Standards D. Related Documents 1. Security Drawings 2. General provisions of contract 3. Uniform general conditions 4. Supplementary general conditions 5. Architectural plans&specifications 6. Requirements of Division 1 7. Electrical/Mechanical /Telecommunications specifications and plans. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM WORK A. Furnish and install all materials, tools, equipment, and services for all electronic security/surveillance devices to provide functioning systems in accordance with performance requirements specified and any modifications resulting from reviewed shop and field coordinated drawings. 1. Video Surveillance System a) This system is used to provide video surveillance through the use of cameras of security sensitive areas and target items. b) The system shall allow for the viewing and recording of images. B. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound and complete installation. C. Drawings are representative and show general arrangement of systems and equipment, except when dimensioned or detailed. 1. For exact locations refer to dimensioned architectural drawings. a) Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings. b) Field verify locations and arrangement of all systems and equipment. c) Coordinate all work with other trades and Contractor. D. Circuit Supervision 1. Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, and sensors. a) Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected zone and trouble signals. b) Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, or shorting of a signal or data transmission line. E. RACKS AND ENCLOSURES ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1. Wall mounted enclosures, data gathering panels, and power supply panels shall be installed as per manufacturer's requirements. a) Coordinate pathways and power with Electrical and Telecommunications Contractors b) Furnish all labor, materials,tools, equipment, and services for all control consoles, equipment racks, cabinets, and enclosures not provided by others in accordance with contract documents. c) Completely coordinate with work of other trades to avoid duplication in purchasing. d) Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 2. The installation of the relay racks/cabinets for Electronic Surveillance shall be by the Telecommunications Contractor. 3. The designated security space will provide an area reserved for rack security equipment. a) The rack area allows for vertical relay rack(s). F. Electronics systems work as specified in this Section and Section 282300 shall include: 1. Preparation of pre-installation submittals, including point-to-point wiring information for security equipment to interface to work by others prior to start of any installation work. 2. Furnishing and installation of all security devices, components and accessories. 3. The furnishing and coordination on installation of special back boxes for security equipment and field devices as required. 4. Furnishing, installation and termination of all copper wiring and cabling including any special purpose wire and cable for electronic security systems. a) Coordinate all network and fiber optic cable interface provided by telecommunications subcontractor. 5. Coordinate raceway and power distribution systems provided by Division 26. 6. Provide and install 12/24 VAC/DC input power to all field devices as required. 7. Coordination with other trades and Owner required to facilitate the installation of the security equipment including: a) Division 26 (power, raceways, and fire alarms) b) Division 27 (telecommunications network interface). 8. Programming of all security control equipment and prior coordination with the Owner's security and telecommunications personnel. 9. Preparation of"As-Built" documentation. 10. Warranty service for completed work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 A. Refer to Requirements of Division 1. B. Pre-Installation Submittal Requirements 1. Submittals for electronic security shall be complete and submitted at the same time. a) No partial submittals will be accepted for review. b) Allow 2 weeks for consultant review of submittals. 2. General Requirements a) A functional description of each system. b) Power supply points listing with devices and maximum loads to prevent overloading. c) Battery backup calculations to show load and back-up times for UPS and power supplies with batteries. d) Equipment schedules listing all system components, manufacturer, model number and quantities of each. e) Qualifications and proof of work history(with references). 3. Product Data Cut-sheets a) Complete manufacturer's technical data including manufacturer warranty information, descriptive literature, illustrations, and installation instructions for all components included within this project indicating compliance with applicable referenced standards, size, dimensions, model number, electrical characteristics, support requirements, connection requirements and all applicable information verifying that submitted components comply with Contract Documents. 4. Shop Drawings a) Floor plans necessary to identify specific device locations, cable routes and quantities, cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams. b) Riser diagram showing routes between floors or other areas that are not easily identified on the floor plans. c) Security One-line diagrams showing all input and output points of the system. 1) The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the consultant team, file with him two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. 2) The consultant's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the Architect's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. d) Release of CAD Files ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1) Contractor may request to utilize DataCom's AutoCAD floor plan files for assistance in producing shop drawings. 2) Request shall be made by signing DataCom's"Agreement for Release of CAD Files" letter. 5. Warranty a) The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements described in the WARRANTY section. 6. Qualifications a) The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements described in the QUALITY ASSURANCE section. C. Product Substitution 1. All product substitution requests require written Owner acceptance. a) Document substitution requests with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents b) An alternate product must be equal to or exceed specified requirements. c) Include in each request for substitution: 1) Product identification, manufacturer's name and address. 2) Product Data: 2. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. 3. No substitute shall be ordered, installed or utilized without prior written verification of acceptance from the Owner. D. As-Built drawings shall be in current AutoCAD format, same version as used by the Architect. 1. Dimensions and scale of the drawing sheets submitted shall match the size of the drawing used for the contract documents, and shall include the following. a) Utilize normally recognized drafting procedures that match AutoCAD standards, Architect, and Designer guidelines and methodology. b) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the building identified in, but not limited to, Addenda, contemplated change notices, Site Instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions. c) Dimensioned plan and elevation views of all security components. d) Cable routing paths of security cables to identified infrastructure pathways. e) All rack, cabinet, and enclosure locations and labeling thereof. f) One-line diagrams of equipment/device interconnecting cabling of the security systems. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 g) Standard or typical installation details of installations unique to Owner's requirements. h) Submit one soft and one hard copy with project deliverables within 30 days of project completion. E. Security integrator shall provide three(3) paper copies and one(1) electronic copy(PDF format) of a properly indexed O&M Manual at the conclusion of the project, which will include, but not be limited to the following requirements: 1. Ring binder with project title, properly indexed,and contractor's name on cover and spine including: a) Sequence of operations, design philosophy, and specific functions b) System block diagram c) Equipment list including: 1) A brief description 2) Model 3) Total number of each item used in the project. d) Camera schedule including: 1) Number 2) Location 3) Camera model/manufacturer 4) View 5) Lens 6) Power source 7) Multiplexer/input 8) Settings entered on site e) Manufacturers' data sheet and O&M manual for associated equipment. f) Maintenance requirements for equipment, inspections and preventative maintenance schedules. g) As-built drawings for each floor plan layout and rack and wall elevation layouts. Each drawing shall show: 1) Cable type and identifier 2) Actual cable routing pathway 3) Device number(camera, etc.), 4) Device input/output number. h) Final test data (measured video levels, day & night camera snapshots in JPEG format and other significant operating parameters). i) List of system associated mechanical locking keys with key codes and tamper resistant hardware types. F. Additional Closeout Documentation: ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1. The Security Contractor shall provide written confirmation that all camera manufacturer default admin passwords have been removed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electronic security systems integrator (security subcontractor) shall meet the following minimum requirements. 1. Maintain a valid Type B license from the Texas Private Security Bureau. 2. Maintain a valid UL 2050 certification for electronic security systems. 3. Have successfully completed three (3) projects of similar size and complexity that have been in proper operation for a period of one (1)year. 4. Technicians shall be factory trained and certified in specified systems. 5. The Project manager and supervising/lead technician shall have been regularly engaged in the installation and testing of the products specified for not less than five(5)years and maintain manufacturer certification. 6. The security integrator must maintain an operating facility in the local area (50 mile radius) of the Project location to provide service to the Owner for the warranty period. a) At the Owners request for service, the security integrator shall dispatch a service technician to the location to affect the required repairs or adjustments. 7. The contractor shall maintain a spare parts inventory necessary to resolve component failures of the system. a) Refer to individual specification section for a list of specifically required parts provided to the owner and stored on site. These parts will become the property of the owner. 1) At the end of the warranty period the security integrator shall test the owner's spare parts and repair or replace as needed to bring the parts up to proper operation. 8. A BICSI RCDD shall approve all on-site work as a recognized member of the Contractor's installation team. a) All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all BICSI,TIA/EIA, UL, and NEC methods, standards and codes. B. Security integrators desiring approval must comply with Division 1 requirements. C. Security integrator must be cognizant of site conditions, verify locations of new and existing equipment, and determine exact requirements for connection and interface. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 A. Attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work of this section. 1. Agenda a) This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing related to work to be performed, scheduling, and coordination with the Project manager/Owner representative and consultant. 2. Attendance a) The security project manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by General Contractor, Owner's representatives, and other parties affected by work of this document. b) All individuals who will be installers of the electronic security system and equipment in an on-site supervisory capacity, including project managers and lead installers, shall be required to attend the pre-installation conference. c) Individuals who do not attend the conference will not be permitted to install, or supervise the installation of, any component of the security system. 1) This includes supervisors, project managers, and lead installers of this project. 1.8 POST INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. At the time of substantial completion the contractor shall call and arrange for a post installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to include but not be limited to As-Built Drawings,Warranty paperwork, etc. 1. Attendees to be invited shall include: a) Project manager/Owner representative b) DataCom Design Group c) General Contractor d) Other trades that the GC deems appropriate. 2. At this meeting the contractor shall present and explain all documentation, asking for feedback on its completeness. 3. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by participants shall be remedied by the contractor and resubmitted within one week of the meeting. 1.9 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment and components shall be delivered properly protected and undamaged with original containers, packaging, and labels intact. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 B. Store, handle, and protect all related materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking, scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 1. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. E. Protect all equipment and components that are to be installed from theft,vandalism, or use by unauthorized persons. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Security integrator is responsible for conducting a site survey prior to the commencement of work to determine locations of all existing security devices and verify the proposed locations of the new components to be installed. B. Security integrator will coordinate all work through the Contractor and schedule work to cause as little interference or interruption of existing services as possible. C. Security integrator will arrange and pay for all necessary permits, licenses, and inspections. 1. Security integrator shall prepare all information necessary to obtain a permit for Electronic Locking Mechanisms in compliance with the Owner requirements. D. Verify with Division 26 installer all conduits and special back box requirements in a timely manner. 1.11 WARRANTY A. See requirements in Division 1 Specifications. B. The Security Integrator shall warrant all completed work, including all materials and labor,to be free from defects in design, workmanship, and/or materials for a period of two (2) years from final acceptance date. 1. System acceptance is defined as the completion of all functional performance testing and the resolution of all punch list items. C. Warranty Service 1. In the event that defects in the materials and/or workmanship are identified during the warranty period, the contractor shall provide all labor and materials to correct the deficiency. 2. All service work shall be performed by factory certified technicians. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 3. All warranty service shall include the replacement of all parts and or components as required to restore normal system operation. a) If parts or components need to be repaired, a loaner will be supplied and installed until the part or component can be repaired and reinstalled. 4. Immediately following a warranty service request, the Contractor shall provide written documentation to Owner which details the service work completed,cause of trouble,and any outstanding work required to restore a complete and normal system. D. Warranty service requests shall be responded to within 4 hours of notification with a qualified service technician on site. E. All repairs shall be completed within 48 hours upon site arrival. 1. If the failure exceeds 48 hours, the Owner reserves the right to require the contractor provide on-site manufacturer support at no additional cost to Owner. F. Extended warranties on equipment components offered by the manufacturer shall be passed through to the Owner. 1. Warranty provisions shall be fully transferable only at the direction of the Owner, in the event that ownership of the installed security systems is transferred. 1.12 SYSTEMS STARTUP AND TRAINING A. After all systems have been tested, accepted and turned on for operation, the Security integrator shall provide "User Training"to Owner personnel. 1. The onsite training shall cover all newly installed electronic security components, devices and systems. The training classes shall total a minimum of twenty (20) hours for up to eight(8) people of the Owner's choosing. 2. Two (2) separate training sessions will be conducted, one for system operators and one for system administrators. 3. The contents of the manuals will include: a) Title page with subject, system name, owner's name, and an owner approved confidentiality notice. b) Table of contents. c) Manual that details system and sub-system operation. d) Manuals that details system administration procedures and tasks. e) Manuals that fully detail all programming commands. 4. Provide ten (10) Bound hardcopy System Operation training manuals and one electronic copy(PDF format). 5. Provide two (2) Bound hardcopy System Administration training manuals and one electronic copy(PDF format). ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers are shown in individual specification sections. B. Equipment manufacturers and model numbers indicated in individual specification sections are identified as minimum equipment requirements. C. All substitutions shall meet or exceed these minimum requirements and must be approved by the Owner/Architect prior to purchase. D. All manufacturers' equipment shall be available through a nationally recognized supplier network. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Provide security fasteners on all equipment, device plates, etc. within public areas. 1. Allen head with center pin, hardened steel. 2. Provide four(4)fastener tools to Owner. B. Equipment installed in exterior applications shall be fitted with fasteners and exposed surfaces of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material. C. All materials and equipment used must be new and unused, prime quality products. D. All equipment or components installed on the exterior of a building where the equipment is subject to adverse weather/elements shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures. 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE A. All wire and cable shall be U.L. approved for its intended application and shall meet or exceed manufacturer's recommendations for the components connected. B. All conductors and cable shall meet individual security system manufacturer specifications. 1. Provide shielded conductors and cable as required by the manufacturer or as required to provide for interference-free signals. 2. Color coding shall be accomplished by using solidly colored insulation. a) Grounding conductors, where insulated, shall be colored solid green or identified with green color as required by NEC. C. Increase conductor sizes on cables as required to be consistent with circuit current ratings, length of wire runs, and manufacturers' recommendations. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1. Alarm device field wiring shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's specifications. 2. Low voltage power circuits shall use conductors as required by the equipment manufacturer's specifications. 3. Plenum rated cable shall be used as required by code. D. UTP Structured Cabling Systems for IP cameras and intercoms (including pulling, terminating, and testing) by Division 27 Telecommunications contractor. 1. Intra-building data communications circuits shall utilize UTP cable as specified in Telecommunications specifications. E. Patch Cables 1. Provide pre-manufactured patch cables (cable, connectors, boots, etc.) as required to connect security systems to voice and data communication outlets. 2. Patch cables shall be certified for their specific use to meet or exceed applicable industry specifications. 3. Provide cable lengths as necessary to neatly route cables through cable management systems and other cable organization systems. 4. Provide connectors as required for proper termination. a) Provide boots for connectors where applicable to prevent snagging. F. The minimum conductor sizes are for distances as per the manufacturer's specifications from security device to security panel. 1. The contractor shall size the conductor accordingly for longer runs. 2. Minimum Conductor and Cable Types and Sizes. a) Alarm device field wiring shall be 18/20 AWG stranded copper conductors. b) Low voltage power circuits will use 18 AWG stranded copper conductors. 1) Increase conductor gauge consistent with circuit current requirements. G. Wire and Cable size and type 1. Tamper Switch/Alarm a) Min 22 AWG, 2-Conductor, Plenum Non-Shielded Cable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All personnel working on this project shall be experienced, highly skilled installers with a minimum of three (3) years work on similar type projects. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 B. Changes in location of any work require the written approval of the Architect/Owner prior to initiation. C. Changes in indicated sizes shall not be made without the written approval of the Owner/Architect. D. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. All systems shall be designed and installed to provide 24 hour a day, 7 days a week operation. F. Primary pathways 1. All security cabling run from rack/enclosure head-end equipment to security devices shall follow primary telecom routing pathways. 2. Security wire non-UTP cabling shall be kept separated from the data cabling 3. Security wire non-UTP cabling shall be routed in bridle rings secured to the outside of the telecom tray where applicable. a) Arlington loops or J hooks shall be used where telecom pathways are not present 4. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports. a) Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated. b) Check loading and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings. c) Do not cut or weld to, building structural members. G. Secondary pathways 1. Arlington loops or J hooks shall be used for secondary pathways 2. Security wire non-UTP cabling shall be kept separated from the data cabling 3. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports. a) Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated. b) Check loading and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings. c) Do not cut or weld to, building structural members. H. Coordinate extension and connection to commercial, emergency/UPS power circuits provided by Division 26. 1. Make power connections in accordance with Division 26. I. Shielded and/or screened cables shall be grounded per the hardware manufacturer's instruction. 1. Single point shield grounds shall be grounded at the field panel feeding the device or sub panel and insulated from ground at the termination end of the cable. J. All installation of security systems shall be complete at least thirty calendar days prior to occupancy. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 3.2 RACK AND CABINET INSTALLATION A. Rack/cabinet installation by Telecommunications contractor. B. After racks are installed, install all required components to support rack mounted security equipment. 1. Extend UPS/emergency power to rack mounted equipment as required. C. Install all conduits, back boxes, wire and cable management as required for interconnection of security equipment, data gathering panels, power supply enclosures, and distribution panels in the Security room. D. Extend commercial/emergency/UPS power circuits as required to security components as required. E. Neatly lace and dress all cables in each rack. 1. All wiring and cable shall be properly supported. 2. Utilize suitable cable management devices, no tie-wraps for UTP structured cabling allowed. 3.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Equipment Cabinets and Racks 1. To provide electrical continuity between rack elements,paint-piercing grounding washers shall be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides, under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack. 2. A horizontal busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each rack for floor fed cabinets/racks. 3. A vertical busbar shall be installed to the rear of the right-hand side rail with thread- forming screws to ensure metal-to-metal contact. 4. Each rack shall be provided with a minimum#6 AWG insulated ground wire. 5. Do not bond racks serially(loop from rack to rack). 6. Each rack bay against a wall shall be bottom/side ground feeds from the wall. a) Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls. b) Exception 1) Some rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway. Refer to drawings for details. 7. The Contractor shall provide a ground strap for each equipment rack and bond to the nearest Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) connection, Furnish all required bonding materials and hardware manufactured for this purpose. a) Follow NEC bonding procedures/specifications. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 8. All ground raceways within each rack shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets. 9. Each ground feed shall provide proper installation allowances and penetration depths to provide conversion fittings from solid metallic to insulated metallic flex conduit raceways. 10. To bond each rack to ground, burnish clean a one square inch area, drill, tap, apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint compound mixed for the metal surface types affected, and bolt connectorized conductor to burnished and compounded area. a) Ensure proper conductivity. B. Cable Runway, Cable Raceway and Support System Grounding 1. The Contractor shall provide communications cable tray and cable runway systems with a communications isolated ground from the TBB. 2. All cable tray needs to be electrically continuous per NEC 250.96. a) Metal raceways, wire-mesh cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames,fittings, and other metal non-current-carrying parts that are to serve as an alternate grounding path, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed on them. b) Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces, and be connected by means of fittings designed so as to make good bonding points. 3. The Contractor shall provide and install #6 AWG insulated ground wire to bond one end of each cable tray/runway system to the#2/0 TBB. 4. For electrically non-continuous conduits that contain only grounding conductor, the Contractor shall bond the conduit and conductor together at both ends to ground to nearest TGB with grounding bushings or ground clamps. 3.4 LABELING A. Provide labeling for all security equipment components using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels. 1. Coordinate with Owner on numbering/labeling scheme. B. Provide labeling for all security cable/wiring using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels. 1. Coordinate with Owner on numbering/labeling scheme. 2. Label all cables/wiring on both ends. 3. At multi conductor cable terminations label each conductor. 4. At a minimum, each cable/wire label shall designate: a) Origination Point ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 b) Alarm point description c) Opening description (if applicable) C. Provide a complete cable/wire identification plan/list with project completion submittal. D. Conduit and junction box exteriors may be identified with unique color paint, but shall not be identified with written words that easily identify the function of the conduit and boxes. 3.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. Back-up power for all equipment and devices shall be for at least 4 hours unless otherwise specified. 1. When generator backup power is available, provide a UPS, rated to maintain the load for a minimum of 15 minutes for all 120VAC equipment. B. Rack-mounted Uninterruptible Power Supply(UPS) 1. Provide a UPS to support 120% of the required load to allow for future load expansion and age related deterioration of the battery performance. 2. The UPS interface port shall have an RS-232 communications port and a 10 Base-T Ethernet for LAN management. a) Provide the necessary data connection, hardware and software to remotely monitor the UPS b) Provide user configurable computer operating system shutdown capability 3. The control panel shall have a LED status display for load and battery bar graphs in addition to replace battery and overload indicators. a) Rack-mounted surge suppression shall be vertically mounted and made for this orientation. C. Connect to AC power and provide UL listed power supplies and transformers to distribute low voltage power to the system components as required. 1. Provide uninterrupted battery backup power for the duration required above. D. All equipment connected to AC circuits shall be protected from power surges. 1. The devices shall be installed and grounded per manufacturer instructions. 2. Equipment protection shall meet requirements of ANSI C62.41. 3. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. E. All non-fiber optic data circuits that serve devices exterior to the buildings will be protected by surge protectors at the device and the termination. 1. The devices shall be installed and grounded per manufacturer instructions. 2. Equipment protection shall meet requirements of ANSI C62.41. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 3. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 3.6 TESTING A. Ensure that all provisions and requirements of this specification are met. 1. Verify through inspections, demonstrations and tests. B. Perform required tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance. 1. Conduct tests with Architect/Owner and if required, inspectors of agencies having jurisdiction present. 2. Arrange test dates in advance and give all parties a minimum of 48 hours notice. C. Repair or replace equipment or systems found defective or inoperative and re-test until 100% satisfactory results are obtained. D. Verification inspections will be made of all equipment components and installations for proper functioning of cameras, etc. to guarantee requirements of the Contract Documents are complied with. 1. The Owner's quality control representative shall have the opportunity to witness all inspections, or to conduct installation inspections of his own. 3.7 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST A. The Functional Performance Test (FPT) will be conducted at the end of the project and prior to system acceptance by the Owner. 1. The security integrator will provide all necessary staff and communications needed to fully test all functions of the system. 2. The contractor will submit for approval by the Architect and Owner,a comprehensive test plan that will include testing of every function on every door and security device thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled start of the test. 3. The system will not be considered for acceptance prior to the successful completion of the FPT and completion of punch list items. B. Pre-Testing 1. Following installation and prior to the FPT, the security integrator shall individually test each component and field device and verify the proper functioning of each component within a particular sub-system. a) The contractor shall also test surveillance system and display components. b) Prior to the FPT all deficiencies must be corrected. ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00- 19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 c) After sub-system verification is complete, test the entire system to assure that all elements and subsystems are compatible and function properly as a complete system. C. Upon completion of the outlined tasks and tests the security integrator shall schedule the FPT with the Architect and Owner. 1. The security contractor must demonstrate that the security system components and sub- systems operate together as a system and meet specification requirements in the "As- Installed" operating environment. 2. On conclusion of the FPT the test report document will be submitted to the architect for approval. 3. The FPT will be observed by the architect's and Owner's representatives. 4. The FPT may be stopped at any time by these representatives if they believe the failure rate is too high or the system is not performing to contract document requirements. 5. The FPT will only resume when all deficiencies have been corrected. 6. Retesting will be required of all failed tests. 3.8 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TEST A. Upon completion of the FPT, conduct a formal test to be known as the System Operational Test (SOT), in which all components and sub-systems of the security system are demonstrated to operate error and failure free together as a system. 1. This test is to be performed over a continuous seventy-two (72) hour period. 2. A formal test plan and test procedures shall be prepared by the security subcontractor and submitted to the Owner/Architect for approval. 3. The Security integrator must demonstrate that the system components and sub-systems meet specification requirements in the"As-Installed"operating environment and operate error and failure free for the duration of the test. 4. If a system failure does occur,the failure must be documented and repaired, after which the seventy-two hour SOT period will restart. B. In the event that the Owner, Architect, or Contractor are required to witness a retest at a later date because the Security integrator is not properly prepared to conduct the acceptance tests or because the systems being tested have failed such tests,which shall be solely determined by the Architect or Owner witnessing the tests,the cost of witnessing additional tests shall be borne exclusively by the Security integrator. 1. Costs are to be based on time and materials at the established rates of the Architect or Owner. END OF SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 28 00 00-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 SECTOIN 28 02 01 COORDINATION DRAWINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions 013100 and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. 1.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall take the lead in coordinating the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems within the building. B. The General Contractor shall coordinate a three-dimensional (3D) model of the building which includes the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems. The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Contractors shall prepare their work and generate 3D models which will be given to the General Contractor for coordination. The Contractor will be provided with the REVIT model that was used to generate the contract documents,this file may be used as the background file. The Contractor shall replace the systems drawn with the actual shop drawing models. The Contractor is not limited to using REVIT, but may use any 3-D software in generating and combining the coordination model. C. Submitting the contract drawings as coordination drawings will not be acceptable. D. The model shall include detailed and accurate representations of all equipment to be installed based upon the reviewed equipment submittals. E. The Contractor shall hold a 3-D coordination meeting with all sub- contractors present to review the model and discuss coordination of the installation of the building systems. F. Upon completion of the coordination meeting, the Contractor shall submit the 3- D model and 1/4" scale drawings for review. G. The model shall detail major elements, components, and systems in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and COORDINATION DRAWINGS 28 02 01-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Panel and transformer locations. e. Conduits 1-1/2" and larger. f. Fire Alarm Panels and Devices. g. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. h. Equipment connections and support details. i. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. j. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. k. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. I. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. m. Valve stem movement. n. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. H. Sequence of Coordination Below is hierarchy of model elements and the sequencing by which the models will be coordinated. 1. Structural and Architectural model 2. Miscellaneous steel 3. Perform preliminary space allocation COORDINATION DRAWINGS 28 02 01-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. Identify hard constraints (locations of access panels, lights, AN space requirements, etc.) 5. Main and medium pressure ducts from the shaft out 6. Main graded plumbing lines and vents 7. Sprinkler mains and branches 8. Cold and hot water mains and branches 9. Lighting fixtures and plumbing fixtures 10. Smaller sized ducts and flex ducts 11. Smaller size cold water and hot water piping, flex ducts, etc. I. The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall not install any item until the coordination has been completed and reviewed by the Construction Manager, Owner, and A/E team. J. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. K. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. END OF SECTION 28 02 01 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 28 02 01-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 OVERVIEW A. This section provides specifications for the installation of an IP based Video Surveillance System and related components. B. Related Sections 1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications (including related sub-sections) 3. Section 280000 Electronic Security 1.2 REFERENCES A. See Section 280000 Electronic Security. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The project will be equipped with a Video Management System (VMS) that is an extension of the existing VMS maintained by the City of Corpus Christi. 1. The new Video Management System (VMS) shall facilitate interface with the existing security head end equipment. 2. All work required to make available an extension to existing equipment shall be furnished and installed by the security subcontractor. 3. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be used to make available the viewing of live and recorded signals from the local PC based NVR to other locations. B. The security integrator shall furnish and install the surveillance system, consisting of camera assemblies. 1. All active surveillance equipment and communication devices shall be on emergency/UPS power. C. Camera assemblies include camera, lens, housing, and mount. D. Coordinate all work that must be performed in security head end spaces with the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor, and the Telecommunications contractor. (if applicable) E. Camera images shall support H.264 compression formats. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00- 1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 F. Camera lenses for fixed cameras shall be varifocal and sized to provide the owner approved field of view. The lens shall be IR corrected and have megapixel resolution. G. Surveillance camera audio functions shall not be installed and/or disabled unless specifically requested by Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Follow provisions of Section 280000 for additional requirements. B. Project Data 1. Provide a description of system operation indicating the purpose and capability of each device/component of the system with a functional diagram indicating all interfaces to other systems. C. Video Quality test reports shall be provided for all cameras to confirm an optimum high definition video signal. D. Shop drawings shall reflect all requirements associated with Owner provided or existing equipment and materials that will be used as part of this system. E. Video Storage calculations to show the system capacity can accommodate the specified video retention. F. Battery calculations to show the expected loads and backup duration for camera power supplies and UPS devices for all active surveillance equipment. G. System programming, camera titles, descriptions, camera images and database 1. Camera titles and descriptions prior to system programming 2. Programming/database prior to performance testing 3. Provide a cross reference between specified camera numbers and programmed camera numbers 4. Final programming, camera images and system documentation on electronic media to Owner H. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's technical data sheets and specifications 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow provisions of Section 280000. B. Spare Parts: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1. Provide the following spare parts: a) One (1) of each type of surveillance camera 2. The security integrator will turn over the new and unused components and devices to the owner at project closeout. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See Section 280000. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. See Section 280000. 1.8 WARRANTY A. See Section 280000. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS A. All cameras shall be a Dome Camera unless otherwise specified 1. Compatible with the VMS 2. Vandal resistant with polycarbonate dome 3. Wide Dynamic Range Feature: All exterior cameras and interior cameras that have exterior lighting or headlights in their field of view shall have a Wide Dynamic Range feature to improve picture quality in situations with strong backlighting. 4. Multi-stream so that recording and viewing can be at different frame rate and compression. S. Day-night Color/B&W camera with cut filter 6. Exterior cameras: a) Include a heater to permit fog-free viewing in low temperatures b) Fan to prevent overheating in high temperatures (as required) B. Interior Fixed Dome Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 2MP (1080p) at 30 FPS 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Smoked lower dome 4. Varifocal auto-iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 5. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 6. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.05 Lux at 30 IRE C. Interior Single Sensor Panoramic 1802 and 3602 Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 12MP at 20 FPS 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Smoked lower dome 4. Native edge processing to allow for multiple views including: a) 1809/3609 overview b) Up to 4 individually cropped out and de-warped views 5. Fixed Iris/ Fixed Focus 6. Horizontal/Vertical FoV: min 1802 7. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 8. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.19 Lux at 50 IRE D. Interior Multi Sensor 1809, 2702, and 3602 Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 8MP at 30 FPS (4x 1080p) 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Smoked lower dome 4. Allows for up to 4 multiple views 5. Varifocal auto-iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view. 6. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 7. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.17 Lux at 50 IRE E. Exterior Fixed Dome Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 2MP (1080p) at 30 FPS 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Clear lower dome, unless otherwise specified 4. Vari-focal auto-iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view. 5. Outdoor rated to meet International Protection Rating (IP) 66 6. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.05 Lux at 30 IRE F. Exterior Single Sensor Panoramic 1809 and 3609 Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 12MP at 20 FPS 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Clear lower dome, unless otherwise specified 4. Native edge processing to allow for multiple views including: a) 1802/3602 overview b) Up to 4 individually cropped out and de-warped views VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 5. Fixed Iris/Fixed Focus 6. Horizontal/Vertical FoV: min 1802 7. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 8. Outdoor rated to meet IP66 9. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.19 Lux at 50 IRE G. Exterior Multi Sensor 1802, 2702, and 3602 Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 81VIP at 30 FPS (4x 1080p) 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Clear lower dome, unless otherwise specified 4. Allows for up to 4 multiple views 5. Varifocal auto-iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view. 6. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 7. Outdoor rated to meet IP66 8. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.17 Lux at 50 IRE 2.2 MIDSPAN PoE POWER INJECTORS A. Provide rack mounted power injectors when PoE camera power exceeds capacity of owner provided Network Switch port power. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Video Management System (VMS) Platform Software 1. VIVOTEK's VAST 2 2. Owner approve equivalent B. NVR Server: Compatible with VMS Requirements 1. NVR specification compliant hardware C. Interior Standard Fixed Camera 1. Vivotek 2. Owner Approved Equivalent D. Interior Single Sensor Panoramic 1802 and 3602 Camera 1. Vivotek 2. Owner Approved Equivalent E. Interior Multi Sensor 1802, 2702, and 3602 Camera 1. Vivotek VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 2. Owner Approved Equivalent F. Exterior Standard Fixed Camera 1. Vivotek 2. Owner Approved Equivalent G. Exterior Single Sensor Panoramic 1802 and 3602 Camera 1. Vivotek 2. Owner Approved Equivalent H. Exterior Multi Sensor 1809, 2709, and 3609 Camera 1. Vivotek 2. Owner Approved Equivalent I. Exterior Parapet/Roof Deck Camera Mount 1. Axis Communications 2. American Dynamics 3. Pelco 4. Owner Approved Equivalent J. Wide Angle Megapixel Camera Lens 1. Computar 2. Theia 3. Owner Approved Equivalent K. Media Converter-Copper-to-Fiber Outdoor rated (Hardened for extreme temperatures) 1. Axis Communications 2. Pelco 3. IFS/ UTC Security 4. ComNlet 5. Owner Approved Equivalent L. Mid-span PoE Injector 1. Leviton 2. Panduit 3. Owner Approved Equivalent M. Uninterruptible Power Supply(UPS) 1. Eaton UPS a) 5S series for workstations b) 9170 for rack mounted equipment VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 2. APC Smart-UPS Series a) SMT series for workstations b) Smart-UPS on-Line series for rack mounted equipment 3. MinuteMan a) Pro series for workstations b) Enterprise Plus series for rack mounted equipment 4. Owner Approved Equivalent N. Surge Protection 1. Ditek 2. Owner Approved Equivalent O. Workstation Hardware: 1. Dell 2. HP 3. Owner Approved Equivalent PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONFIGURATION A. Video Cameras 1. Provide day/night cameras in exterior locations 2. Lenses shall be field tested with Owner present to verify clear, crisp images and desired field of view a) Substitute camera lenses as necessary to obtain required field of view at no additional cost b) Provide spot filters for exterior lenses as required to reduce picture washout caused by sunlight B. IP PoE Cameras 1. The security integrator shall coordinate network and IP address requirements with Owner to identify the Media Access Control (MAC) address (Layer 2) of each provided camera, the location to be installed, and the port configuration needed for communication. 2. Make all necessary adjustments to camera lenses to obtain clear,crisp images and desired field of view to the Owners satisfaction. a) Substitute camera lenses as necessary to obtain required field of view at no additional cost. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1) Adjust all cameras to produce high-definition images with no blooming, streaking or noticeable lag. 2) Provide and install in-line PoE injectors as required when non PoE network switches are used or when manufacturer specified power is not available to the camera. 3) All camera power shall comply with the specified power requirements. 3.2 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. Provide uninterruptible power supplies for all active surveillance equipment 1. Rack mounted components, including all active network communication hardware, shall be on an Uninterruptible Power Supply<UPS>system. 2. Refer to Section 280000 for UPS and power requirements 3. Camera power supplies shall be on an Auxiliary Power Supply<APS>, system as required, with a battery backup. a) The Auxiliary power supply shall be furnished with a power distribution panel with each camera individually fused or protected with an over-current protector. B. Power supplies shall provide: 1. 120 VAC input and output voltage as required 2. UL Listed 3. Power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power a) Connect each power supply power fail alarm as a separate alarm input into AC/ID system 4. Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch 5. Independently fused outputs 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to provisions of Section 280000 B. All surveillance system devices and components shall be compatible. C. Review landscape drawings, Building Information Model (BIM) files, and field verify landscape and adjacent architectural structures to ensure that video surveillance camera views are on target and unobstructed. D. Camera Housings and Mounts 1. Cameras shall include housings and mounts as indicated in the Drawings. a) Provide the smallest available housing for each camera application. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 1) Integrated miniature dome cameras are preferred 2. Wiring to cameras shall pass from the back-box through the mount and into the housing. Exposed wiring or conduit shall not be acceptable. 3. Provide sun shields for camera housings in outdoor locations exposed directly to sunlight. 4. Provide surge protection for power and copper video cables for exterior cameras at the camera and at the point of termination (security rack). 5. Field verify the exact camera location, position, and mounting prior to installation. 6. Roof mounted cameras shall use roof deck brackets. E. Video Management Control System 1. System platform software shall be 'open architecture' allowing for compatibility and integration with other building automated systems. 2. The system shall allow for secure remote viewing of live and recorded video as required. F. Provide labeling suitable to Owner for all major equipment components. Coordinate with Owner on numbering scheme to match existing. Major equipment components: 1. Video monitors, IP camera Patch Panels, and Network Video Recorders (NVR) G. Coordinate with Telecommunication subcontractor for network and patch panel provisions for security connections in the IT room. (If applicable) H. Coordinate with Owner for all system programming and database requirements. 1. Provide all programming, setup, camera and device titling and data entry 2. Camera and device title and descriptions shall be consistent for all components I. Install all Point-to-Point wiring with appropriate terminal connections for every wire and component termination so that all connections are mechanically and electrically secure. J. Install field wiring in continuous lengths, without splices. K. Verify upon job completion that all wiring and terminations are clearly labeled to identify the wire and terminal. L. Testing of the surveillance system includes checkout of installed cameras back to the Security head end equipment to confirm proper operation of camera assemblies. Security integrator shall provide all necessary test equipment to fully demonstrate proper performance of field devices. Copies of test results shall be included in the project completion submittals given to the Owner. END OF SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-23180 November 11, 2024 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 13800 - Building Automation and Control. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and test- ing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire detection equipment re- quired to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be lim- ited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Pro- tected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this speci- fication. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all con- ductors. 1. The Secondary Power Source of the fire alarm control panel will be capable of providing at least 24 hours of backup power with the ability to sustain 5 minutes in alarm at the end of the backup period. C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for Aux- iliary Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices. 1. The Secondary Power Source of the fire alarm control panel will be capable of providing at least 60 hours of backup power with the ability to sustain 5 minutes in alarm at the end of the backup period. 2. The Secondary Power Source installed in a system backed up by a generator need to supply 4 hours of backup power. D. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994. E. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manu- facturer(or division thereof). It's acceptable for peripheral devices to be manufactured outside of the U.S. by a division of the U.S. based parent company. F. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the instal- lation shall be in compliance with the UL listing. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers—Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units UL 2075 Standard for Gas and Vapor Detectors and Sensors UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired UL 2017 General-Purpose Signaling Devices and System G. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems integrity. 1.3 SCOPE: A. An intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. B. Basic Performance: 1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC), NFPA Style 6 (Class A) or NFPA 7 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 4. All circuits shall be power-limited, UL864 Ninth edition requirements. 5. A single ground fault or open circuit on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. 6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure or outage of any kind until the alarm signal is processed and recorded. 7. Panel shall meet requirement of UL 864 10t' Edition C. BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION 1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: a. The system alarm LED on the system display shall flash. b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c. A backlit 80-character LCD display on the FACP shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises. d. In response to a fire alarm condition, the system will process all control pro- gramming and activate all system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) associated with the point(s) in alarm. Additionally, the system shall send events to a central alarm supervising station via either dial-up over PSTN, IP, Cellular, Internet, Intranet via PSDN or virtual private network. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met. 3. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations. C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and mainte- nance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnec- tions between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the infor- mation required to properly operate the equipment and system. D. Software Modifications: 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the techni- cian to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. 2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of soft- ware shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 while modifications are being made. 3. Provide firmware updates through USB thumb drive. E. Certifications: 1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representa- tive of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification. 1.5 GUARANTY: A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. 1.6 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE: A. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semi-annual schedule or as required by the local AHJ. A preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the protocol for preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include: 1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, waterflow switches and all accessories of the fire alarm system. 2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually. 3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 10. B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty. 1.7 POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS: A. The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labor to expand the system specified, if so requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance. B. As part of the submittal, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and test labor as needed to increase the number of intelligent or addressable devices by ten percent (10%). This quotation shall include intelligent smoke detectors, CO detec- tors, intelligent heat detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor mod- ules, and addressable control modules equal in number to one tenth of the number re- quired to meet this specification (list actual quantity of each type). FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. The quotation shall include installation, test labor, and labor to reprogram the system for this 10% expansion. If additional FACP hardware is required, include the material and labor necessary to install this hardware. D. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire except for labor to make final connections at the FACP and at each intelligent addressable device. Do not include the cost of conventional peripherals or the cost of initiating devices or notifi- cation appliances connected to the addressable monitor/control modules. E. Submittals that do not include this estimate of post contract expansion cost will not be accepted. 1.8 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The sys- tem shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: 1. No. 13 Sprinkler Systems 2. No. 70 National Electric Code (NEC) 3. No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code 4. No. 101 Life Safety Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)- USA: 1. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes 2. No. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 3. No. 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station 4. No. 228 Door Closers—Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 5. No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 6. No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 7. No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications 8. No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 9. No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances 10. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 11. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances 12. No. 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units 13. No. 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances 14. No. 2017 General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems D. Local and State Building Codes. E. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.9 APPROVALS: A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recog- nized agencies: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc 3. FM Factory Mutual 4. NYFD New York Fire Department 5. CSFM California State Fire Marshal PART 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL: A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code. B. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment, such as con- trol panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. C. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring dia- grams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram for all specific system installation/termination/wir- ing data. D. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fas- teners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE: A. Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-29. 4. With the exception of telephone connections, wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary func- tions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All cir- cuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Arti- cle 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire detection system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire detection system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm)for Initiating Device Circuits, Signaling Line Circuits and Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and sup- port a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet when sized at 12 AWG. The design of the system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication circuit. Shielded wire shall not be required. 6. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault. 7. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of T-tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4) Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of T-taps, length of T-taps etc., is not acceptable. C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: 1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. D. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. E. The control panel enclosure shall feature a quick removal chassis to facilitate rapid re- placement of the FACP electronics. 2.3 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL: A. The FACP shall be a NOTIFIER model NFW-50X and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an economical space saving single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, digital dialer and other system controlled devices. Ethernet Communicators and other system controlled de- vices. Ethernet communications shall be via a IPOTs card. B. Operator Control 1. Acknowledge Switch: a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multi- ple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition. b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annuncia- tor piezo sounders. 2. Alarm Silence Switch: a. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notifi- cation appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all appli- cable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-si- lence timers. 3. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch: a. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset. 4. System Reset Switch a. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically-latched ini- tiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. 5. Lamp Test: a. The System RESET switch shall also function as a Lamp Test switch shall ac- tivate all system LEDs and light each segment of the liquid crystal display. 6. Programmable Buttons: a. The system should have at a minimum 4 programmable function keys for quick zone and NAC disable during maintenance. C. System Capacity and General Operation 1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of, expansion to 50 intelligent/ad- dressable devices. 2. The control panel shall include two Form-C programmable relays which can be used for Alarm, Supervisory, and a fixed Trouble relay rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC and 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC. 3. It shall also include two programmable Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) ca- pable of being wired as Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z). 4. The fire alarm control panel shall include an operator interface control and annunci- ation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color-coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the field pro- gramming and control of the fire alarm system. 5. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel. The system shall be fully programmable, configura- ble, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM program- mers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes. The control unit will support the ability to upgrade its operating program using FLASH memory technology. The unit shall provide the user with the ability to program from either the included keypad, or a USB drive programmed from a computer running upload/download program utility. 6. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 group of outputs. Systems which have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or REQUIRE a laptop personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes. 7. The FACP shall provide the following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy during the accumulation of dust and foreign material. b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of ex- cessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. c. The ability to display or print system reports. d. Alarm verification. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a detector enters verification an excessive number of times. e. Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS presignal), meeting NFPA 72 requirements. f. Rapid manual station reporting. g. Non-alarm points for general (non-fire) control. h. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software. i. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address. j. Universal end of line resistor for NACs and remote sync output k. Temporal-4 NAC coding for CO alarms. I. Built in Class-A capability for all 4 NACs. m. Local upload/download using USB drive. n. Flash firmware with USB thumb drive. 8. The FACP shall be capable of coding Notification Appliance Circuits in March Time Code (120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72) for fire alarm and CO alarm, and California Code. Main panel notification circuits (NACs 1 & 2) shall also automatically syn- chronize and be programmable for any of the following manufacturer's notification appliances connected to them: System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex with no need for additional synchronization modules. D. Central Processing Unit 1. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art; high speed device and it shall com- municate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include hardware for system program storage, non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor fail- u re. 2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all specific actions to be taken in the condition of an alarm. Control programming shall be held in non-volatile program- mable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. 3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of sys- tem displays, printer, and history file. 4. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator er- rors. 5. An auto-programming capability (self-learn) shall be provided to quickly identify de- vices connected on the SLC and make the system operational. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based pro- gram utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off-line program the system with batch upload/download. This program shall also have a verification utility which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating changes. This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing after system modifica- tion. E. Display 1. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system opera- tor and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. 2. The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones. 3. The display shall contain an alphanumeric, text-type display and dedicated LEDs for the annunciation of AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, ALARM SILENCED and CO Alarm conditions. 4. The display keypad shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent un- authorized system control or programming. 5. The display shall include the following operator control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE/STEP, ALARM SILENCE, DRILL (alarm activate), and SYSTEM RESET. G. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) 1. The SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 50 devices of any type including: intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric, multi-sense, CO or thermal), addressable pull stations, intelligent modules (monitor or control). Each SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring. 2. The CPU shall receive information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, pre-alarm or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically compensate for the accumulation of dust in each detector up to allowable limits. The information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the determination of detector maintenance con- ditions. 3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72 requirements and be certified by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument. H. Serial Interfaces 1. The system shall provide a means of interfacing to UL Listed Electronic Data Pro- cessing (EDP) peripherals using the EIA-232 communications standard. 2. An annunciator RS-485 (ANN-Bus) bus shall be used to connect an UL-Listed 80- FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 column printer anywhere within the 6,000 range of the serial bus connection. The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an RS-485 converter/inter- face complying with Electrical Industries Association standard EIA-232D. Power to the printer shall be 120 VAC @ 60 Hz. The interface shall contain both a 9-pin se- rial and standard centronics parallel connector. Either shall be capable of connec- tion to a serial or parallel printer. The bus shall also provide connection to addi- tional addressable modules supporting remote 80 character LCD text annunciators that mimic the standard panel display and controls. Said annunciators shall sup- port remote acknowledge, silence, drill and reset functions and shall be enabled via a keyswitch. The bus shall also provide connection to addressable modules supporting up to 40 LEDs for use with a graphic annunciator. The bus shall also provide connection to programmable relay modules. The bus shall also provide connection to addressable LED annunciators. I. The control panel will have the capability of Reverse Polarity Transmission or connection to a Municipal Box for compliance with applicable NFPA standards. J. Internet Protocol Over Telephone Service (I POTS) is an interface for communicating dig- ital information between a fire alarm control panel and a UL-Listed central station. The IPOTs module is capable of transmitting contact ID formatted alarms to a central station equipped with a compatible IP receiver via Ethernet over a private or public WAN/LAN, Intranet or Ethernet. 1. The IPOTS communicator shall be an integral module component of the fire alarm control panel enclosure. 2. The IPOTS communicator shall be completely field-programmable locally from a USB port or via Ethernet,Telnet and through AlarmNet. 3. The IPOTS communicator shall be capable of transmitting events in contact ID for- mat. 4. Communication shall include vital system status such as: a. Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory) b. Independent Addressable Device Status c. AC (Mains) Power Loss d. Low Battery and Earth Fault e. System Off Normal f. 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal g. Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements) h. EIA-485 Communications Failure i. IP Line Failure 5. The IPOTS communicator shall support independent zone/point reporting. In this format, the IPOTS shall support the transmission of addressable points within the system. This format shall enable the central station to have exact details concern- ing the location of the fire for emergency response. The communication over IP / cellular shall be transparent to the panels normal operation over phone lines. 6. The IPOTS communicator shall utilize a supervisory heart beat signal of no less than once every 90 seconds insuring multiplexed level line supervision. Loss of In- ternet or Intranet connectivity shall be reported in no more than 200 seconds. This FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 IPOTS communicator can also can program communication in supervisor accord- ing to all NFPA guidelines. Alarm events shall be transmitted to a central station in no less than 90 seconds from time of initiation to time of notification. K. Enclosures: 1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and painted (red or black) via manufacturer's standard finish. 2. The back box and door shall be constructed of steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. 3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall provide for the viewing of all indicators. 4. The cabinet shall accept a chassis containing the PCB and to assist in quick re- placement of all the electronics including power supply shall require no more than two bolts to secure the panel to the enclosure back box. 5. The cabinet shall also support a mechanical secured optional dress panel limiting access to the internals of the panel. L. Field Charging Power Supply (FCPS) 1. The FCPS-24S6/8 is a device designed for use as either a remote 24 volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances. 2. The FCPS-24S8 shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge up to 18.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby. The FCPS-24S8 shall offer up to 8.0 amps (6.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall include an inte- gral charger designed to charge up to 18.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby. 3. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a re- lay. Four outputs (Style Y or Z) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices. 4. The FCPS shall optionally provide synchronization of all connected strobes or horn strobe combinations when System Sensor, Wheelock or Gentex devices are in- stalled. 6. The FCPS shall function as a sync follower as well as a sync generator. 5. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include an attractive surface mount back box. 6. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per NFPA requirements. 7. The Field Charging Power Supply includes power limited circuitry, per UL stand- ards. 8. The Field Charging Power Supply shall use the same key type as the fire alarm control panel and fire command center. M. Power Supply: 1. The main power supply for the fire alarm control panel shall provide 3.0 amps of available power for the control panel and peripheral devices. 2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies. 3. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over- current protection shall be provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger or may be used with an external battery and charger systems. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field. 4. The main power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions. 5. The main power supply shall operate on either 120VAC, 60 Hz or 240 VAC, 60 Hz and shall provide all necessary power for the FRCP. 2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Programmable Electronic Sounders: 1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device. 3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans. B. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fully syn- chronized, and shall meet the following criteria: 1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. 2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. C. Audible/Visual Combination Devices: 1. Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility. 2. Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility. D. Manual Fire Alarm Stations 1. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non-code, non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock so that they may be tested without operating the handle. 2. Stations must be designed such that after an actual activation, they cannot be re- stored to normal except by key reset. 3. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually de- tected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) front or side. 4. Manual stations shall be constructed of high impact Lexan, with operating instruc- tions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the manual station in letters one half inch (12.7 mm) in size or larger. D. Conventional Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors 1. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC, two wire, ceiling-mounted, light scattering type using an LED light source. 2. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 3. Detector shall be provided on a twist-lock base. 4. It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector without the need for the generation of smoke. The test method shall test all detector circuits. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Di- odes (LEDs), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level over 360 de- grees. These LEDs shall flash at least every 10 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the detector. 6. The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 3000 feet (914.4 m) per minute. 7. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field clean- ing of the detector chamber. 8. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw. E. Conventional Ionization Type Area Smoke Detectors 1. Ionization type smoke detectors shall be a two wire, 24 VDC type using a dual uni- polar chamber. 2. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 3. Detector shall be provided on a twist-lock base. 4. It shall be possible to perform a calibration sensitivity and performance test on the detector without the need for the generation of smoke. 5. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Di- odes (LEDs) over 360 degrees, on the detector, which may be seen from ground level. This LED shall flash every 10 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the detector. 6. The detector shall not alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 1,200 feet (365.76 m) per minute. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber. 7. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw. F. Duct Smoke Detectors 1. Duct smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC type with visual alarm and power indica- tors, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the composite sup- ply/return air ducts(s), with properly sized air sampling tubes. G. Projected Beam Detectors 1. The projected beam type shall be a 4-wire 24 VDC device. 2. The detector shall be listed to UL 268 and shall consist of a separate transmitter and receiver capable of being powered separately or together. 3. The detector shall operate in either a short range (30' - 100') or long range (100' - 330') mode. 4. The temperature range of the device shall be -22 degrees F to 131 degrees F. 5. The detector shall feature a bank of four alignment LEDs on both the receiver and the transmitter that are used to ensure proper alignment of unit without special tools. 6. Beam detectors shall feature automatic gain control which will compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses. 7. The unit shall be both ceiling and wall mountable. 8. The detector shall have the ability to be tested using calibrated test filters or mag- net activated remote test station. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 H. OSID Detection 1. Open-area Smoke Imaging Detector shall be an available option. The OSID pro- jected beam detector shall use UV (ultraviolet) and IR (infrared) technology to de- tect the presence of smoke, while providing nuisance alarm rejection. 2. The detector shall use an imager to measure the level of smoke based on the readings between the emitters and the imager, up to 7 emitters shall be supported. 3. The detector shall operate from 24 VDC 4. The detector shall be able to provide up to 80 degree wide viewing angle 5. The detector shall provide selectable alarm thresholds 6. The detector shall provide alarm and trouble relays used to activate a fire alarm control panel. I. Aspirating Detection 1. An optional air aspiration detection system shall be available. 2. The aspirating system shall support multiple sensitivity settings. 3. The aspirating system shall operate from 24 VDC. 4. The aspirating system shall provide alarm and trouble relays used to activate a fire alarm control panel. J. Automatic Conventional Heat Detectors 1. Automatic heat detectors shall have a combination rate of rise and fixed tempera- ture rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (57.2 Celsius) for areas where ambient tem- peratures do not exceed 100 degrees (37.7 Celsius), and 200 degrees (93.33 Cel- sius) for areas where the temperature does not exceed 150 degrees (65.5 Cel- sius). 2. Automatic heat detectors shall be a low profile, ceiling mount type with positive in- dication of activation. 3. The rate of rise element shall consist of an air chamber, a flexible metal dia- phragm, and a factory calibrated, moisture-proof, trouble free vent, and shall oper- ate when the rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. 4. The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft. 5. Automatic heat detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet (762 square meters). K. Waterflow Indicator: 1. Waterflow Switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard type. 2. Waterflow Switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conven- iently adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. 3. All waterflow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series. 4. Waterflow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but in- stalled by the mechanical contractor. 5. Where possible, locate waterflow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting which changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3)feet from a valve. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 L. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with su- pervisory switches. 2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. 3. The switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjusted to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the dis- tance from its normal position. 4. The supervisory switch shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, which shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) conduit entrance and incorporate the nec- essary facilities for attachment to the valves. 5. The switch housing shall be finished in red baked enamel. 6. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from its mount- ing. 7. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section and installed by mechanical contractor. M. Specific System Operations 1. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the sys- tem may be independently programmed for verification of alarm signals. The alarm verification time period shall not exceed 2 minutes. 2. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. 3. Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnos- tic functions: a. Device status b. Device type c. Custom device label d. Device zone assignments 4. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report will be generated and printed, listing all system status. 5. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 500 events. Each of these acti- vations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activa- tion. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its entirety. a. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes. 6. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automati- cally interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a read- ing that is above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display. This FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to per- form. 7. Pre-Alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays. The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm level, to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms. 8. The fire alarm control panel shall include Silent and Audible Walk Test functions - Silent and Audible. It shall include the ability to test initiating device circuits and Notification Appliance Circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. The operation shall be as follows: a. The Silent Walk Test will not sound NACs but will store the Walk Test infor- mation in History for later viewing. b. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are se- lected to participate in Walk Test. c. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs. d. Walk Test shall be selectable on a per device/circuit basis. All devices and cir- cuits which are not selected for Walk Test shall continue to provide fire protec- tion and if an alarm is detected, will exit Walk Test and activate all pro- grammed alarm functions. e. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer. 9. Waterflow Operation a. An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the control panel display; turn on all programmed Notifica- tion Appliance Circuits and shall not be affected by the Signal Silence switch. 10. Supervisory Operation a. An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the control panel display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble mode. 11. Signal Silence Operation a. The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification cir- cuit or relay) to deactivate upon depression of the Signal Silence switch. 12. Non-Alarm Input Operation a. Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non-alarm input to monitor normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices. 2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices - General 1. Addressable devices shall employ the simple-to-set decade addressing scheme. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Addressable devices which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch, are not an allowable substitute. 2. Detectors shall be addressable and intelligent, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits. 3. Addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indi- cating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust ac- cumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their perfor- mance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. 4. Detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. Base options shall include a base with a built-in (local) sounder rated for a minimum of 85 DBA, a relay base and an isolator base de- signed for Style 7 applications. 5. Detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. 6. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL, CO). Detectors shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches. B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station) 1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communi- cation module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to nor- mal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. 3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instruc- tions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the sta- tions in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger. C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. 2. The detectors shall be ceiling-mounted and available in an alternate model with an integral fixed 135-degree heat-sensing element. 3. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 4. Detector shall be provided on a twist-lock base. 5. It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector without the need for the generation of smoke. The test method shall test all detector circuits. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Di- odes (LEDs), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level over 360 de- grees. These LEDs shall periodically flash to indicate that the detector is in com- munication with the control panel. 7. The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 1500 feet per minute (fpm). 8. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field clean- ing of the detector chamber. 9. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw. D. Intelligent Multi-Sensing Detector 1. The intelligent multi-sensing detector shall be an addressable device that is de- signed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the ap- propriate sensing settings. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that re- act to slow smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing de- vice. 2. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal to provide a quick response in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false alarm condition by exam- ining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke sensing chambers and compar- ing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive phenomena. E. Projected Addressable Beam Detector 1. The projected beam type shall be a 4-wire 24 VDC intelligent, addressable pro- jected beam smoke detector device. 2. The detector shall be listed to UL 268 and shall consist of a single transmitter\re- ceiver and corresponding non powered reflector. 3. The detector shall operate in either a short range (16' - 230') or long range (16' - 328') when used with an extender module. 4. The temperature range of the device shall be -22 degrees F to 131 degrees 5. The detector shall feature an optical sight and 2-digit signal strength meter to en- sure proper alignment of unit without need of special tools. 6. The unit shall be both ceiling and wall mountable. 7. The detector shall have the ability to be tested using calibrated test filters or mag- net-activated remote test station.} 8. The detector shall have four standard sensitivity selections along with two auto- matic self-adjusting settings. When either of the two automatic settings is selected the detector will automatically adjust its sensitivity using advanced software algo- rithms to select the optimum sensitivity for the specific environment. E. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 F. Intelligent Thermal Detectors 1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 de- grees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute 2. A high heat thermal detector rated at 190 degrees Fahrenheit shall also be availa- ble 3. The thermal detectors shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit. G. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector 1. The smoke detector housing shall accommodate an intelligent photoelectric detec- tor that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. 2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and ap- propriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. H. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any normally open dry contact de- vice) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLCs. 2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. 3. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor mod- ule is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED. 5. For multiple dry contact monitoring a module shall be available that provides 10 Style B or 5 Style D input circuits. I. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module 1. Means shall be provided for the monitoring of conventional Initiating Device Cir- cuits populated with 2-wire smoke detectors as well as normally open contact alarm initiating devices (pull stations, heat detectors, etc). 2. Each IDC of conventional devices will be monitored as a distinct address on the polling circuit by an addressable module. The module will supervise the IDC for alarms and circuit integrity (opens). 3. The monitoring module will be compatible, and listed as such, with all devices on the supervised circuit. 4. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 5. The monitoring module shall be capable of mounting in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box or in a surface mount back box. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 6. For multiple 2-wire smoke detector circuit monitoring a module shall be available that provides 6 Style B or 3 Style D input circuits. J. Addressable Control Module 1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the opera- tion of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized au- dio/visual notification appliances 2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with a current rating of 2 Amps for Style Z and 3 Amps for Style Y. 3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised circuit from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote supply. K. Addressable Relay Module 1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other network building functions. 2. The module shall provide two form C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and up to 2.0 Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary devices energize at the same time on the same pair of wires. L. Isolator Module 1. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short cir- cuits on an SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be pro- vided for each floor or protected zone of the building. 2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section. 3. The isolator module shall not require address-setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation. 4. The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. M. Serially Connected ANN-BUS Devices 1. The panel shall support serially connected devices, these devices shall communi- cate with the fire alarm control panel via a two wire EIA 485 (multi-drop) communi- cations circuit and be powered from 24 VDC Ann-Bus shall be capable of wiring distances up to 6,000 feet. System shall support a secondary serial bus. System shall support up to 8 Ann-Bus devices. 2. Supported ANN-BUS devices shall include the following: a. 80-Character LCD mimic annunciator capable of remote control of fire alarm panel functions. b. LED annunciator c. LED driver module for interfacing to custom graphic annunciators d. Serial or Parallel Printer driver module FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-21 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 e. Relay module with up to 10 programmable Form-C relays N. Door Holders: 1. Door Holders will be available in 120 VAC and 24 VDC models. 2. 120 VAC models will be transient-protected against surges up to 600 volts. 3. Door holders will be designed for Fail Safe operation (power failure release door to close). O. Elevator Recall: 1. Smoke detectors will be installed in the elevator hoist shaft. An alarm from such devices will signal the elevator to initiate emergency procedures. All lift call but- tons; door buttons and signals will become inoperative in the lift bank serving the machine room. Lifts will immediately be sent to the main floor of egress (ground level) where they will be decommissioned until the alarm condition has been cleared or manually taken over by Fire Department personnel. 2. Smoke detectors will be installed in each elevator lobby. These detectors will func- tion to signal the elevator to recall to the primary floor of egress (ground level) in the event of an alarm. Detectors on the first floor will signal the elevator to recall to the secondary floor of egress. 2.6 BATTERIES AND EXTERNAL CHARGER: A. Battery: 1. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire detection system for not less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power fail- ure. 2. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required. 3. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger systems may be used. PART 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. D. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-22 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor. 3.2 TEST: A. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. B. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. C. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. D. Verify activation of all flow switches. D. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. E. Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. F. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. G. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals. I. Ground signaling line circuits and verify response of trouble signals. J. Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals. K. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. L. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors during a walk test. M. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. N. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped de- vices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. 3.3 FINAL INSPECTION: A. At the final inspection, a minimum NICET Level II technician of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.4 INSTRUCTION: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-23 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstra- tions of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a type- written "Sequence of Operation." END OF SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-24 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 311100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the clearing and grubbing as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING 1.03 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specifications have the meanings ascribed to them A. Clearing and Grubbing - the clearing, grubbing, and stripping of objectionable matter including the removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site by mechanical means. PART 2-PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubble and other objectionable matter as indicated on Drawings,or as directed by the Owner. C. Trees,Tree Stumps and Tree Roots 1. Within Right-of-Way a. Area bounded by the lines two-feet(2')behind back of curbs 1) Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2') below bottom of proposed road subgrade elevation. b. Area bounded by the lines two-feet(2')behind back of curbs to Right-of Way line 1) Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2') below proposed finished grade or below natural grade,whichever is lower. 2. Beyond Right-of-Way a. Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet(2')below proposed finished grade or below natural grade,whichever is lower. D. Vegetation,Humus,and Objectionable Matter 1. Areas which underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six-inches(6")of the soil. a. This material, with the exception of objectionable matter, shall be stockpiled, if feasible, and reused as surface stabilization material. 2. Objectionable matter shall be determined by the Owner and shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of in accordance with Local,State,and Federal regulations,unless otherwise instructed by the Owner. E. Holes remaining after removal of materials shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING. 3.02 Disposal of Materials A. Onsite 1. The material shall be disposed of at a disposal site as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of materials in accordance with all applicable Local, State,and Federal regulations. B. Offsite 1. The material shall be disposed of at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 1100-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. All material removed from site under this operation shall become the property of the Contractor's and therefore the Contractor's responsibility for proper disposal. 3. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of materials in accordance with all applicable Local, State,and Federal regulations. 3.03 Protection A. Existing Utilities 1. All existing utilities shall be identified and protected by the Contractor. 2. Damage to utilities shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the utility owner. B. Trees,Vegetation,Landscaping,and Other Features 1. That are designated to be preserved shall be protected by the Contractor. 2. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the Owner of the item. 3. Do not park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation. C. Benchmarks,monuments,and existing structures designated to remain shall be protected. 1. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the Owner of the item. 3.04 Hazardous Materials A. If the Contractor encounters hazardous substances,industrial waste,other environmental pollutants, underground storage tanks, or conditions conducive to environmental damage, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner's representative in writing. B. Contractor shall not be responsible for or required to conduct any investigation, site monitoring, containment, cleanup, removal, restoration or other remedial work of any kind or nature (the "remedial work") under any applicable level, State or Federal law, regulation or ordinance, or any judicial order. C. If the Contractor agrees in writing to commence and/or prosecute some or all of the remedial work, all costs and expenses,to include any extension of the contract time, of such remedial work shall be paid by the Owner to Contractor as additional compensation. 3.05 Archeological A. In the event that archeological material is encountered during clearing and grubbing activities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and cease all work until notified by the Owner. 1. The Contract Time maybe adjusted if the work on the project is delayed. 3.06 Contamination A. In the event that contaminated material is encountered during clearing and grubbing activities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and cease all work in the contaminated area until notified by the Owner. 1. The Contract Time maybe adjusted if the work on the project is delayed. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 1100-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 312213.10 SITE GRADING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for site grading as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Site Grading-all areas beyond the right-of-way of roadways and access ways PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Fill A. Shall be of similar material as to the natural occurring material onsite and approved by the Owner. B. Shall be uniform as to material,density,and moisture content. C. Shall be free of large clods,large rocks,organic matter,and other objectionable material. D. In all cases material shall be free of construction materials (concrete rubble, pipe, fiberglass, asphalt material,metal,etc.)and trash material. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Site Preparation A. Prior to site grading the site shall be cleared in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. B. Unless specified otherwise on Drawings,the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six-inches(6"). C. The loosened material shall be re-compacted with any fill material required for the project 3.03 Placement and Compaction A. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow,shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. B. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade and in layers not in excess of six-inches(6")of un-compacted depth,unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of the existing natural ground unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. The Owner may order test rolling to evaluate the uniformity of compaction. E. All irregularities,depressions,and soft spots which develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. 3.04 Excess Material A. Excess material from excavation that is not incorporated into the site as fill shall become the property of the Contractor,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. The Contractor is responsible for disposal of the excess material away from the project in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. SITE GRADING 3122 13.10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 312216.13 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for roadway subgrade shaping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM D 698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12 400 ft-lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3)) PART 2-PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to performing subgrade or base course work all utilities under pavement shall be inspected and tested prior to placement. 1. The Contractor may proceed at his/her own risk, knowing that any repairs required to utilities that requires the removal and replacement of the subgrade, base, and/or pavement surface in accordance with relevant specification will be completed at the Contractors sole expense. 3.02 Stripping and Excavation A. The site shall be cleared and grubbed in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. B. Unless otherwise noted,remove existing trees,shrubs,fences,curb,gutter,sidewalk,drives,paving,pipe and structures within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. C. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Owner. D. Unwanted roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Owner. E. "Unsuitable"material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts,when declared unwanted by the Owner,shall be replaced as directed by the Owner with material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. F. Maintain moisture and density until covered by the subbase or base. G. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time,replace with suitable material,and recompact(esp.utility trenches). 3.03 Subgrade Preparation A. That area shown on the Drawings for roadway construction shall be cut to grade as indicated on the Drawings. B. Irregularities exceeding two-inches(2")in sixteen-feet(16')shall be corrected. C. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed,replaced with acceptable material and compacted(esp.at utility trenches). D. The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained. 3.04 Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line A. Finished grade at the property line shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. The Owner may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation with permission from property owner. C. Use suitable material from the excavation. ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 3122 16.13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 D. Unless otherwise directed,cuts at right-of-way lines shall be made at a maximum slope of 3:1. 3.05 Drainage A. During construction,the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times,and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. B. All slopes that,in the judgment of the Owner,require variation shall be accurately shaped,and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. C. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 3122 16.13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 312216.23 CHANNEL SHAPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for channel shaping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING B. 3124 13.10 EMBANKMENTS 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Where shown on the Drawings, selected materials shall be utilized in the formation channels,in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately and deposited within limits and at elevations required. B. Material for fill shall be shall be in accordance with Section 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING or Section 3124 13.10 EMBANKMENTS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Excavated slopes shall be finished in conformance with the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. B. When completed,the average plane of slopes shall conform to the slopes indicated on the Drawings and no point on completed slopes shall vary from the designated slopes by more than 0.5 foot measured at right angles to the slope,unless otherwise specified. C. In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach on the roadbed. D. The tops of excavated slopes and the end of excavation shall be rounded as shown on the Drawings. E. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used,insofar as practicable,in the formation of embankments in accordance with the specification,Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENTS,or shall be otherwise utilized or satisfactorily disposed of as indicated on Drawings, or as directed,and completed work shall conform to the established alignment,grades and cross sections. F. During construction, the channel shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat workmanlike manner. G. Unwanted channel excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site and properly disposed of in accordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations. CHANNEL SHAPING 3122 16.23-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 312316.13 TRENCHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for trenching as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item(s) below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations B. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety 1.03 Submittals A. Submit a Trench Safety Program specifically for the construction of trench excavation and designed in accordance with Local,State,and Federal standards and regulations for trench safety laws. 1. Notice: Review of the safety program by the Owner will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute, in any form, approval by the Owner nor relieve the Contractor of any obligations under Local,State,or Federal trench safety regulations. B. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from local, state, and federal standards and regulations or special designs shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer of the State of Texas and retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general,the depth is greater than the width,but the width of a trench(measured at the bottom) is not greater than fifteen feet(15'). B. Trenches as used herein, shall apply to any excavation in which structures,utilities, or other items as a result of construction are placed or removed regardless of depth. C. Trench Safety Program as used herein, shall be a written and detailed plan that is developed by the Contractor with all methods and products used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project and includes all information required an in accordance with Local, State(Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety,but not limited to),and Federal(Part 1926, Subpart P-Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations,but not limited to)standards and regulations. D. The Trench Safety System shall include,but are not limited to,sloping,sheeting,trench boxes or trench shields,sheet piling,cribbing,bracing,shoring,dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 1.05 Indemnification A. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,its employees and agents,from any and all damages,costs (including,without limitation,legal fees,court costs,and the cost of investigation), judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of person(s) resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract B. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner,its employees and agents,in case the Owner,or its employees or agents,is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety,including,but not limited to safety program and design reviews,inspections,failures to issue stop work orders,and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Owner will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute approval by the Owner nor relieve the Contractor of any obligations under Local,State,or Federal regulations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 All products shall be in accordance with the Trench Safety Program. TRENCHING 3123 16.13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) Standards,29 CFR,in accordance with Local and State regulations,and industry standards. B. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor,and not the Owner,to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. 3.02 Installation A. Install and maintain the trench safety system in accordance with the Trench Safety Program and all Local, State,and Federal provisions. B. Install specially designed trench safety systems in accordance with the Contractors trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. A competent person,as identified in the Contractors Trench Safety Program,shall verify that trench safety equipment are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.03 Inspection A. The Contractor or Contractors independently retained consultant, shall make daily inspections of the trench safety system(s) to ensure that the installed system(s) and operations meet the requirements of the Trench Safety Program,and Local,State,and Federal regulations. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins, slides, or trench safety system failure is apparent,the Contractor shall immediately stop work in and around the trench and move all personnel and individuals to a safe location until the necessary precautions have been taken by the Contractor to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. The Contractor must maintain a permanent record of daily inspections on site. TRENCHING 3123 16.13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 312413.10 EMBANKMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the furnishing,placing,and compacting materials for the construction of roadways,embankments,levees,dikes,or any designated section of the roadway where additional material is needed as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 107"Embankment" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 216"Proof Rolling" E. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-104-E F. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-106-E G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-107-E H. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-115-E 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. In addition to the requirement in the excavation items of the specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on the Drawings,with such modifications as may be directed by the Owner. B. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than one-tenth of a foot(0.10') from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. 2.02 Materials A. Shall be approved on-site material capable of forming a stable embankment. B. Material shall be from on-site excavation free from vegetation or other objectionable material unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Offsite Material 1. When offsite material is to be used,the Contractor must comply with all local, state, and federal laws,ordinances,and regulations. 2. The Contractor must demonstrate and satisfy to the Owner that all permits, contracts, and legal documentation are in place prior to obtaining the material. 3. Prior to obtaining materials from offsite the Contractor shall provide all required material tests to analyze the material to insure compliance with specifications. a. When on-site excavation material is to be used and additional material from off-site is to be incorporated the materials shall be similar in properties. D. Water 1. Shall be free of objectionable materials. EMBANKMENT 3124 13.10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to placing embankment the area to be covered shall be stripped of all vegetation in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. C. Equipment shall be applicable to conduct the work as described in this specification or as specified on the Drawings. D. Washes,gulleys,wet areas,and yielding areas shall be corrected as directed by the Owner. E. Trees,stumps,roots,vegetation or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. F. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings the surface of the ground which is to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to depth of not less than six-inches(6"). 1. The loosened material shall be re-compacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. G. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material,density and moisture content before beginning compaction. 3.02 Placement A. Embankment shall be placed in layers not to exceed six-inch(6")un-compacted depth and the full width of the embankment,unless otherwise noted. 1. Where embankment is adjacent to a hillside or old roadbed,the existing slope shall be cut in steps to not less than the vertical depth of an un-compacted layer of six-inches (6"). B. The fill material shall be placed from the low side and compacted. C. Each layer shall overlap the existing embankment by at least the width indicated by the embankment slope. D. Where layers of unlike materials are adjacent to each other,each layer shall be featheredged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. E. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position,but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. F. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading,harrowing, disking or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. G. Except as otherwise required by the Drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of quarter-inch(1/4")per foot from the centerline of the embankment to the outside. 3.03 Compaction A. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density by rolling in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. B. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation,each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to obtain the required density C. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. D. Rolling shall be longitudinally, begin at the sides, and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller. E. All irregularities, depressions,weak or soft spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. 3.04 Density Control A. Laboratory Tests shall determine the maximum dry density(Da) and optimum moisture content(Wopt) by means of TxDOT TEX-114-E B. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with TxDOT TEX-115-E and on Table 2: Table 2 Field Density Control Requirements Description Density I Moisture Content TEX-115-E PI<_ 15 >_98%Da 15<PI<_35 >_98%Da and<_ 102%Da >_Wopt EMBANKMENT 3124 13.10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PI>35 >_95%D,and<_ 100%D, >_W'Pt C. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete,testing as required by the Owner will be made by the Contractor. D. If the material fails to meet the density specified,the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. E. Such procedure shall be determined by,and subject to,the approval of the Owner. F. The Owner may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the embankment layers. 1. Proof Rolling shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 216 3.05 Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking A. Should the subgrade,due to any reason or cause,lose the required stability,density or moisture,before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be re-compacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer or granular material. C. Excessive loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the subgrade soil moisture content is more than two-percent(2%)below the optimum. EMBANKMENT 3124 13.10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 321100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required, but not limited to, the furnishing and placement of subgrade and base course(s)as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 1113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE B. 32 1113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE C. 32 1123.23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Substitution of Base Course: 1. Product substitution submittal shall be in writing and submitted fourteen(14)working days prior to commencing construction of the base course and contain the following information: a. Product information conforming the requirements of the related Section, b. Design of Substituted Base Course indicating equivalence to the Base Course as indicated on the Drawings, c. Indicating other Bid Items affected by such a proposed substitution. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Subgrade A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 1. If no Subgrade Treatment is indicated in the Drawings the treatment shall be as follows: a. Sand Material 1) Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. a) If not indicated on the Drawings,shall be Cement treated in accordance with Section 32 1113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE,unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. b. Other 1) Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. a) If not indicated on the Drawings, shall be Lime treated in accordance with Section 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE,unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. 2.02 Base Course A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings 1. Aggregate Base Course a. Shall be in accordance with Section 32 1123.13 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to performing subgrade or base course work all utilities under pavement shall be inspected and tested prior to placement. 1. The Contractor may proceed at his/her own risk, knowing that any repairs required to utilities that requires the removal and replacement of the subgrade, base, and/or pavement surface in accordance with relevant specification will be completed at the Contractors sole expense. 3.02 Subgrade Treatment A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable specification for the SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 1100-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 product required. 3.03 Base Course A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable specification for the product required. 3.04 Substitution of Drawing Indicated Subgrade and/or Base Course Material A. General 1. Substitution of Subgrade and/or Base Course materials, other than as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications is allowed subject to: a. A combination of strength and thickness that is equivalent to the Subgrade and/or Base Course strength and thickness as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications, b. Lines and Grades of the roadway surface must be maintained as indicated on the Drawings, including allowances for utilities, c. Owner and Engineer approval. 2. The Contractor may request the Subgrade and/or Base Course product to be substituted in accordance with Part 1 Section 1.03 of this specification. B. Effects of Substitution 1. Proposed Utilities and Existing Utilities a. If the Subgrade and/or Base Course product being substituted changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course and as a result the horizontal and/or vertical location of utilities,as indicated on the Drawings,or determined in the field,are required to be adjusted, then: 1) The Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs associated with the changes including but not limited to; Designing, Drawing adjustments, Drawing reproduction, Specifications,Contract,Approvals,and incidentals,and, 2. Lines and Grades a. Roadway 1) If the Subgrade and/or Base Course product being substituted changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course it is not to affect the lines and grades of the roadway and shall be maintained as indicated on the Drawings. b. Excavation 1) If the substituted Subgrade and/or Base Course product changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course and in turn affects the quantities of existing materials to be excavated and/or filled, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to determine and to ensure that the project can be completed as per the Contract and in accordance with the Lines and Grades as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs associated with the changes including but not limited to: Additional labor,materials,equipment,maintenance,disposal,and all incidental expenses required to perform the changes. SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 1100-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 321113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, mixing, compacting of Lime Treated Subgrade as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 260"Lie Treatment(Road-Mixed) D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-121-E Soil-Lime Testing H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Test reports shall be as follows unless noted otherwise: 1. Submit within three (3)working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner, b. As directed by the Owner. 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station, 2) Distance from Center Line, 3) Travel lane, 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date, c. Company whom performed test, d. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name, 2) Initials, 3) Employee identification number, e. Material tested, f. Test used, g. Test values obtained, h. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s)and Drawing(s) requirements, i. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Soil A. Soil shall consist of Owner approved material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter, encountered in the roadbed section and other acceptable material used in the preparation of the roadbed in accordance with this specification. 2.02 Lime A. In accordance with TxDOT Item 260. 2.03 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminants and other objectionable materials. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime treated mixture,free from loose or segregated areas,of uniform density and moisture content,well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime,maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Owner prior to the beginning of construction operations. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local,state,and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. D. Storage Facility 1. Material shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution. 2. If storage bins are used,they shall be completely enclosed. 3. Material in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness. E. Lime Slurry Equipment 1. Slurry tanks shall be equipped with agitation devices to slurry lime on the projector other approved location. F. Pulverization Equipment 1. Provide pulverization equipment that: a. Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that will plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times. c. Uniformly mixes the materials. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight of lime determined on certified scales. 2. All exit ports are to be sealed at the plant. C. Bags 1. Each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. 2. Bags varying more than five-percent(5%)from that weight maybe rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment,as shown by weighing ten-percent(10%),with a minimum of five(5),of the bags taken at random from each pallet,shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. General 1. Before other construction operations are commenced,the roadbed shall be graded and shaped as required to construct the lime treatment for material in place in conformance with the lines,grades, thickness and typical cross section shown on the Drawings. 2. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. 3. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. 4. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. B. Pulverization 1. The soil shall be pulverized so that 100%of the material passes the two and one-half-inch(2-1/2") sieve when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. 3.05 Placement A. General 1. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work,to use the proper amount of lime,maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. B. Application 1. General a. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. b. Lime amount to be used is to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner,if not on the Drawings. 1) Any rates indicated on the Drawings are the result of preliminary tests and shall be verified. 2) Application rate may be varied by the Owner,if conditions warrant c. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner,the lime operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 402 F and falling,but may be started when the air temperature is above 352 F and rising. 1) The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat 2) Lime shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Owner are unsuitable. C. Method 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,lime shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry lime per square yards,in the form of a slurry. 2. Slurry Method a. The Lime shall be mixed with water to form a slurry with a solids content approved by the Owner. 1) Commercial Lime Slurry shall be delivered to the project in slurry form at or above the LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 minimum dry solids content approved by the Owner. 2) The distribution of lime at the rate(s)required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured. 3. Dry Method a. Dry placing is not allowed unless approved by the Owner and: 1) The lime is distributed by an approved spreader at the specified rate or as directed by the Owner. 2) The lime is distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of lime by the wind. b. The material shall be sprinkled as approved by the Owner. c. The distribution of lime at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured. d. Lime shall be applied to the roadway and water and mixing shall commence to permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil-lime mixture. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of lime quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry hydrated lime. 3.07 Mixing A. General 1. Mixing shall begin within six(6)hours of lime application. 2. During the interval of time between applications and mixing,hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of six(6) hours or more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. B. Initial Mixing 1. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Owner, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained,free from all clods or lumps. 2. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application,brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure one(1)to four(4) days as directed by the Owner. 3. During the curing period,the material shall be kept moist as directed. C. Final Mixing 1. After the required curing time,the material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. 2. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, planning,harrowing,scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that,when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the 3/4"sieve are removed,the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements in Table 1 when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E,Part III: Table 1 Gradation Requirements Sieve Size Minimum Percent(%)Passing 1-3/4" 100 3 4" 85 #4 60 3.08 Compaction A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction,the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth. 2. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than twenty-four(24)hours after final mixing. 3. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 4. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. At the start of compaction,the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps,based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil-lime mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. When necessary,sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. S. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half(1/2)the width of the roller unit. 6. On superelevated curves,begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 7. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 8. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH,or as directed. 9. When the uncompacted soil-lime mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction,the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 10. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density,stability,or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 11. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 12. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 13. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one (1) operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. a. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. 14. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 15. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 16. After each section is completed,tests as required by the Owner will be made by the Contractor. B. Density Control 1. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. 2. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. 3. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100') per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter,unless noted otherwise,or directed by Owner. S. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. C. Rework 1. General a. Rework,when required to meet pulverization requirements or density. b. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Owner, compacting, and finishing. c. When a section is reworked,a new optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 103-E and density in accordance with Tex-121-E will be determined from the reworked material. d. Compact in accordance with Section 3.8 of this specification. e. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading,and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 2. Within seventy-two(72)hours of final compaction a. Shall be done until compaction is met. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Beyond seventy-two (72)hours of final compaction a. Shall include the addition of additional lime at ten-percent(10%)to fifteen-percent(15%)of the initial application rate or as deemed necessary by the Owner. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped,skinned,or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch(1/4"). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No.4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense,uniform surface,free of surface compaction planes,is produced. S. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction,rolling,blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth,closely knit surface,free of cracks,ridges or loose material conforming to the crown,grade and line shown on the Drawings,within three (3)hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the treated material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 8. Remove all loosened material from the surface of the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within one-inch (1") in the cross-section and one-inch (1") in sixteen-feet (16') measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2") in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2") in sixteen-feet(16') measured longitudinally. 3.10 Curing A. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by addition of an asphalt material at the rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallons per square yard. B. Curing shall continue for two (2) to five (5) days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted,unless otherwise approved by the Owner. C. However,the lime treated material may be covered by other courses,the day following finishing,when approved by the Owner. D. When the Drawings provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material,the next course shall be applied within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 3.11 Construction Joints A. At the end of each day's construction,a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance A. The Contractor is required to maintain the subgrade in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include,but not limited to,the immediate remedy of any defects,maintaining moisture content,repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment,rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work,or as required by the Owner. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. Local traffic and construction equipment may be allowed on the completed section if the section has had time to cure or the application of a single course surface treatment has been completed. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 321113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing,mixing,compacting of Cement Treated Subgrade as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ASTM C-150-Portland Cement B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-120-E Soil-Cement Testing H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement I. TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program(HCQMP) 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). 2. Cement information shall include date information on when it was manufactured and a use-by date. B. Test reports 1. Submit within three (3)working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner, b. Owner,and c. As directed by the Owner. 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station 2) Distance from Center Line 3) Travel lane. 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date, c. Company whom performed test, d. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name, 2) Initials, 3) Employee identification number, e. Material tested, f. Test used, g. Test values obtained, h. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s) and Drawing(s) requirements, i. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Soil A. Soil shall consist of Owner approved material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter, encountered in the roadbed section and other acceptable material used in the preparation of the roadbed in accordance with this specification. 2.02 Cement A. Cement shall be Type I Portland cement. B. Cement shall meet the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4600, TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP),and ASTM C-150 Type I Portland Cement. 1. Sources not on the HCQMP or other sources to be used in combination with an approved source will require approval before use. C. Cement shall be used prior to the expiration date. 2.03 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminants and other objectionable materials to the hardening of the cement treatment. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement treated mixture,free from loose or segregated areas,of uniform density and moisture content,well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of cement,maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Owner prior to the beginning of construction operations. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local,state,and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. D. Storage Facility 1. Material shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution. 2. If storage bins are used,they shall be completely enclosed. 3. Material in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 dampness. E. Cement Slurry Equipment 1. Slurry tanks shall be equipped with agitation devices to slurry cement on the project or other approved location. F. Pulverization Equipment 1. Provide pulverization equipment that: a. Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that will plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. b. Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times. c. Uniformly mixes the materials. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight of cement determined on certified scales. 2. All exit ports are to be sealed at the plant C. Bags 1. Each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. 2. Bags varying more than five-percent(5%)from that weight maybe rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment,as shown by weighing ten-percent(10%),with a minimum of five(5),of the bags taken at random from each pallet,shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. General 1. Before other construction operations are commenced,the roadbed shall be graded and shaped as required to construct the cement treatment for material in place in conformance with the lines, grades,thickness and typical cross section shown on the Drawings. 2. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. 3. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. 4. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. B. Pulverization 1. The soil shall be pulverized so that 100%of the material passes the two and one-half-inch(2-1/2") sieve when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. 3.05 Placement A. General 1. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work,to use the proper amount of cement, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. B. Application 1. General a. Cement shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. b. Quantity of cement to be used is to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner if not on the Drawings. 1) Any rates indicated on the Drawings are the result of preliminary tests and shall be verified. 2) Application rate may be varied by the Owner,if conditions warrant. c. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner,the cement operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 402 F and falling,but may be started when the air temperature is above 352 F and rising. 1) The temperature will betaken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2) Cement shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Owner are CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 unsuitable. C. Method 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, cement shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry cement per square yards,in the form of a slurry. 2. Slurry Method a. The cement shall be mixed with water to form a slurry with a solids content approved by the Owner. b. The cement shall be mixed with water in trucks with approved distributors and applied as a slurry. c. The distribution of cement at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper cement content has been secured. d. Slurry shall be applied within two (2) hours of adding water and when the roadway is at moisture content drier than optimum. 1) The percentage of moisture in the soil,at the time of cement application,shall not exceed the quantity that will permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil cement mixture. 3. Dry Method a. Dry placing is not allowed unless approved by the Owner and: 1) The cement is distributed by an approved spreader at the specified rate or as directed by the Owner. 2) The cement is distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of cement by the wind. b. The material shall be sprinkled as approved by the Owner. c. The distribution of cement at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper cement content has been secured. d. Cement shall be applied to the roadway and water and mixing shall commence to permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil-cement mixture. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of cement quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry cement. 3.07 Mixing A. General 1. Portland cement treatment for materials in place may be constructed with any machine or combination of machines and auxiliary equipment that will produce results as outlined in this specification. 2. Mixing shall begin immediately once cement is applied. 3. The mixer shall in one(1)continuous operation mix the soil and cement full depth,and the required moisture uniformly,thoroughly moist-mix the soil,cement and water,until a homogeneous mixture is obtained 4. The mixer shall spread the completed soil cement mixture evenly over the machine processed width of the subgrade and leave it in a loose condition ready for immediate compaction. S. The soil and cement mixture shall not remain undisturbed,after mixing and before compacting,for more than 30 minutes. B. Moisture 1. The mixture shall be sprinkled in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to maintain optimum mixing moisture. C. The soil shall be mixed so that,the material will meet the following requirement in Table 1 when tested from the oadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. Table 1 Gradation Re uirements Sieve Size Minimum Percent % Passing 1-3 4" 100 3 4" 85 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 #4 60 3.08 Compaction A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction,the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth. 2. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after mixing and be complete within two (2) hours after the application of cement. 3. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 4. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. a. At the start of compaction, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps,based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil-cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. When necessary,sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. S. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half(1/2)the width of the roller unit. 6. On superelevated curves,begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 7. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 8. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH,or as directed. 9. When the uncompacted soil-cement mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction,the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 10. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density,stability,or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 11. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 12. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 13. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one (1) operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with cement as previously specified. a. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. 14. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 15. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 16. After each section is completed,tests as necessary will be made by the Contractor. B. Density Control 1. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. 2. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. 3. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100') per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter,unless noted otherwise,or directed by Owner. S. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. C. Rework 1. General a. Rework,when required to meet pulverization requirements or density. b. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Owner, compacting, and finishing. CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c. When a section is reworked,a new optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 103-E and density in accordance with Tex-121-E will be determined from the reworked material. d. Compact in accordance with Section 3.8 of this specification. e. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading,and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. f. Shall include the addition of additional cement at the initial application rate or as deemed necessary by the Owner. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped,skinned,or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch(1/4"). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No.4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense,uniform surface,free of surface compaction planes,is produced. S. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction,rolling,blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth,closely knit surface,free of cracks,ridges or loose material conforming to the crown,grade and line shown on the Drawings,within three (3)hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the treated material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 8. Remove all loosened material from the surface of the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within one-inch (1") in the cross-section and one-inch (1") in sixteen-feet (16') measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2") in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2") in sixteen-feet(16') measured longitudinally. 3.10 Curing A. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by: 1. Sprinkling in accordance with TxDOT Item 204,and/or 2. Addition of an asphalt material at the rate of O.OS to 0.20 gallons per square yard. B. Moisture content shall be maintained at no lower than 2.S percentage points below optimum. C. Curing shall continue for at least three(3)days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. D. When the Drawings provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material,the next course shall be applied within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 3.11 Construction joints A. At the end of each day's construction,a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. The Contractor is required to maintain the subgrade in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include,but not limited to,the immediate remedy of any defects,maintaining moisture content,repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment,rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work,or as required by the Owner. 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. Local traffic and construction equipment may be allowed on the completed section if the section has had time to cure or the application of a single course surface treatment has been completed. CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 321123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placing Flexible Base Course as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 1100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE B. 32 1113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE C. 32 1113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE D. 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO T193-Standard Method of Test for The California Bearing Ratio B. ASTM C-131-Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine C. ASTM C-150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement D. ASTM D-1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 247"Flexible Base" H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing I. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-104-E Determining Liquid Limits of Soils K. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils L. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-110-E Particle Size Analysis of Soils M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials N. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-406-A Material Finer Than 75 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates(Decantation Test For Concrete Aggregates) 0. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-460-A Determining Crushed Face Particle Count P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-11000, Evaluating and Using Nonhazardous Recyclable Materials Guidelines S. TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program(HCQMP) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Design Mix Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal the following: a. Gradation b. Admixture Ratio (if admixture is required) FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. The Texas Required Base Thickness d. Addition information as directed by Owner C. Test reports 1. Submit within three (3)working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner b. Owner,and c. As directed by the Owner 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station 2) Distance from Center Line 3) Travel lane designation 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date c. Weather 1) Temperature 2) General weather conditions d. Company whom performed test e. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name 2) Initials 3) Employee identification number f. Material tested g. Test used h. Test values obtained i. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s)and Drawing(s) requirements j. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Base Material A. Shall be Type A, Grade 1, in accordance with TxDOT Item 247, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or by the Owner. 2.02 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminates and other objectionable materials. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. 2.03 Prime Coat A. Shall be bituminous material in accordance with Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform mixture free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content,well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work to process a sufficient quantity of material to provide full depth as shown on Drawings,to use the proper amount of chemical stabilization material(if required),maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery,tools and equipment necessary for the proper construction of the work shall be on the project,and be approved by the Owner. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local,state,and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight/quantity of material determined on certified scales or a Owner approved method. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. Before placing base course, the subgrade shall be graded and shaped in conformance with the lines, grades,thickness and typical cross section as shown on the Drawings,in accordance with Section 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE or Section 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE, and/or as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. C. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. D. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. 3.05 Test Section A. The Contractor shall be required to construct a"Test Section". B. The first section of base shall serve as a test section. C. Its length shall be between 300 and SOO linear feet single lane width. D. Evaluation of the equipment and procedure will be done during this section. E. In case it is found that the work is not satisfactory with respect to the specification requirements, the Contractor shall revise his procedures and augment or replace equipment as necessary to assure work completed in accordance with the specifications. F. Additional test sections may be required as directed by the Owner. G. Test sections not conforming to the requirements of the specifications shall be reconstructed. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of all materials quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of material. 3.07 Placing A. Spread and shape the material into a uniform layer with an approved spreader the same day it is delivered unless otherwise approved. B. Construct loose material layers that are a maximum of six-inches(6")in thickness. C. Maintain the shape of the course. D. Sprinkle in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to control dust. 3.08 Compaction FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction,the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth for a maximum depth of six-inches(6"). 2. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 3. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. a. At the start of compaction,the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps,based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. Maintain moisture content within three-percent(3%) of optimum on the wet side. 1) When necessary,sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. 4. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half(1/2)the width of the roller unit. S. On superelevated curves,begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 6. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 7. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH,or as directed. 8. When the uncompacted soil mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 9. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density,stability,or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 10. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 11. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 12. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 13. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 14. After each section is completed,tests as necessary will be made by the Contractor. 3.02 Density Control A. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. B. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. C. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent(95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. D. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100') per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter, unless noted otherwise,or directed by Owner. E. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped,skinned,or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch(1/4"). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No.4 is present in the mixture;one(1)complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner,surface finishing methods maybe varied from this procedure provided a dense,uniform surface,free of surface compaction planes,is produced. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 S. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction, rolling, blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth,closely knit surface,free of cracks,ridges or loose material conforming to the crown,grade and line shown on the Drawings,within three(3)hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed. 8. Remove all loosened material from the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2") in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2") in sixteen-feet(16') measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within quarter-inch (1/4") in the cross-section and quarter-inch (1/4") in sixteen- feet(16') measured longitudinally. 3.10 Prime Coat A. Shall be in accordance with Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 3.11 Construction joints A. At the end of each day's construction,a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance A. The Contractor is required to maintain the base in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include,but not limited to,the immediate remedy of any defects,maintaining moisture content,repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment,rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work,or as required by the Owner. 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. The Contractor shall not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions,but pneumatic- tired equipment required for hauling cement,and water may be permitted after the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent the equipment from marring the surface,provided protection and cover specified herein are not impaired. B. The base may be opened to local traffic as soon as the prime coat has been applied and sanded or cured as necessary to prevent it from being picked up by traffic. C. It may be opened to all traffic after seven(7)calendar days. 1. Surface course shall be applied prior to opening to through traffic. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved areas as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rollers" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 300"Asphalts,Oils,and Emulsions" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 310"Prime Coat" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-922-K "Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment" 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Bituminous material manufacturer information and recommendations. C. Equipment information as required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Bituminous Material A. The material used shall be MC-30 in accordance with TxDOT Item 300,unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2.02 Blotter Material A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved,use either: 1. Native sand 2. Base course sweepings obtained from cleaning the base PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Prime coat shall be applied when the air temperature is 60'F and above,or is above SO'F and is rising. 1. The air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. B. Material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Owner, are not suitable. C. Do not permit traffic,hauling,or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until placement of subsequent courses or the Owner accepts the work. E. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling bituminous material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times,and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the bituminous material with foreign material. PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. 3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the bituminous material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor,for determining the rate at which it is applied,and for securing uniformity at the junction of two(2)distributor loads. B. Distributor 1. Furnish a distributor that will apply the bituminous material uniformly at the specified rate or as directed. 2. Calibration a. Furnish to the Owner a distributor test report,no more than six(6)months old,documenting that the variation in output for individual nozzles of the same size does not exceed ten percent (10%)when tested at the greatest shot width in accordance with Tex-922-K. b. Include the following documentation on the test report: 1) The serial number of the distributor 2) A method that identifies the actual nozzle set used in the test 3) The fan width of the nozzle set at a twelve-inch(12")bar height 3. Transverse Variance Rate a. When a transverse variance rate is shown on the Drawings,confirm that the nozzles outside the wheel paths will output a predetermined percentage more of bituminous material by volume than the nozzles over the wheel paths. b. When a transverse variance rate is required, perform the test using the type and grade of bituminous material to be used on the project. c. The Owner may verify the transverse rate and distribution at any time. 1) If verification does not meet the requirements,correct deficiencies and furnish anew test report. C. Tank Volume 1. Furnish a volumetric calibration and strap stick for the distributor tank in accordance with Tex- 922-K,"Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment,"Part I. 2. Calibrate the distributor within the previous three(3)years of the date first used on the project. 3. The Owner may verify calibration accuracy in accordance with TxDOT Tex-922-K. D. Computerized Distributor 1. When paying for bituminous material by weight, the Owner may allow use of the computerized distributor display to verify application rates. 2. Verify application rate accuracy at a frequency acceptable to the Owner. E. Broom 1. Furnish rotary,self-propelled brooms. F. Rollers 1. Rollers provided shall meet the requirements for their type as shown in TxDOT Item 210. G. Digital Measuring Instrument 1. Furnish a vehicle with a calibrated digital-measuring instrument accurate to±6 ft.per mile. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. When,in the opinion of the Owner,the base and/or area is satisfactory to receive the prime coat,the surface may be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods. B. If found necessary by the Owner,the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the bituminous material to control dust and ensure absorption. 3.04 Application A. Bituminous 1. The material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified,evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. 2. Shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per TxDOT Item 300. a. Apply material within 15'F of the selected temperature. 3. Distribute the material smoothly and evenly at a pressure necessary for proper distribution at an application rate not exceed 0.20 gallon per square yard of surface,unless otherwise specified. 4. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the bituminous material applied appear to be in PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 error,the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Owner before proceeding with the work. 5. During the application of the material,the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement,curb,gutter,and structures. 6. When directed roll the freshly applied material with a pneumatic-tire roller to ensure penetration. B. Blotter 1. Shall be spread in areas as directed by the Owner before allowing traffic to use the primed surface. 2. Remove blotter material prior to placing subsequent courses. 3.05 Disposal of Materials A. Disposal of all materials shall be in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations,and will be the responsibility of the Contractor. PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 12 16.13 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of plant-mix asphalt paving as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 300"Asphalts,Oils,and Emulsions" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 320"Equipment for Asphalt Concrete Pavement" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 340"Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt(Method)" E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 341"Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt(QC/QA)" F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-107-E,Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils H. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-203-F,Sand Equivalent Test 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-207-F, Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-212-F, Determining Moisture Content of Bituminous Mixtures K. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-217-17, Determining Deleterious Material and Decantation Test for Coarse Aggregates L. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-227-F, Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-236-F, Determining Asphalt Content from Asphalt Paving Mixtures by the Ignition Method N. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-243-F,Tack Coat Adhesion 0. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-408-A, Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-410-A, Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate Using the Los Angeles Machine Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-411-A, Soundness of Aggregate Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-460-A, Determining Crushed Face Particle Count S. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-461-A, Degradation of Coarse Aggregate by Micro-deval Abrasion T. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) Bituminous Rated Source Quality Catalog(BRSQC) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Mixture design report C. Quality Control Plan(QCP) D. Truck"Pay Tickets" PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All products shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 340,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings of by the Owner. B. All sources and materials shall be TxDOT approved. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,TxDOT Item 340,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. For this specification when a TxDOT Item is indicated the terms within the TxDOT Item shall be adjusted as follows: 1. Department-TxDOT 2. Engineer-Owner 3.02 Mixture Design A. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Item 340 and conform to the requirements of this specification with the following modifications: 1. The Owner(Engineer)will not be able to provide any software. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a mixture design report that includes the following: a. The combined aggregate gradation,source,specific gravity,and percent of each material used, b. Results of applicable tests, c. The mixing and molding temperatures, d. All applicable correlation and correction factors, e. The signature(s) of the Level II specialist certified by TxDOT-approved hot-mix asphalt certification program who performed the design, f. The date the mixture design was performed, g. A unique identification number for the design. 3.03 Equipment A. General 1. Provide equipment for Asphaltic Concrete Paving in accordance with TxDOT Item 320. 3.04 Quality Control Plan A. General 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to design,produce,transport,place and compact the specified paving mixture in accordance with the requirements herein. 2. The Owner will perform verification testing as needed. 3. Provide quality control (QC) testing as needed to meet the requirements of this Item. 4. Provide a certified Level I-A specialist at the plant during production hours. 5. Provide a certified Level I-B specialist to conduct placement tests. 6. The requirements of TxDOT Item 341 shall be adhered to. B. Quality Control Plan(QCP) 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,the Contractor shall develop and follow a Quality Control Plan(QCP). b. The QCP shall be submitted to the Owner and the on-site Inspector. c. Obtain approval from the Owner for changes to the QCP made during the project d. The Owner may suspend operations if the Contractor fails to comply with the QCP. e. Submit a written QCP to the Owner and receive the Owner's approval of the QCP before beginning production. 2. Include the following items in the QCP: a. Project Personnel 1) Provide: PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a) A list of individuals that will conduct tests as well their associated certifications (i.e. Level IA, IB, and I1 certifications), including when certifications will expire for each individual b) A list of individuals responsible for QC with authority to take corrective action and the contact information for each individual listed b. Material Delivery and Storage 1) Provide: a) The sequence of material processing, delivery, and minimum quantities to assure continuous plant operations b) Aggregate stockpiling procedures to avoid contamination and segregation c) Frequency,type, and timing of aggregate stockpile testing to assure conformance of material requirements before mixture production d) Procedure for monitoring the quality and variability of asphalt binder c. Production 1) Detail: a) Loader operation procedures to avoid contamination in cold bins b) Procedures for calibrating and controlling cold feeds c) Procedures to eliminate debris or oversized material d) Procedures for adding and verifying rates of each applicable mixture component(e.g., aggregate,asphalt binder,RAP,lime,liquid antistrip) e) Procedures for reporting job control and acceptance test results f) Procedures to avoid segregation and drain-down in the silo d. Loading and Transporting 1) Provide: a) The type and application method for release agents b) Truck loading procedures to avoid segregation e. Placement and Compaction 1) Provide: a) The proposed agenda for mandatory pre-paving meeting including date and location b) The type and application method for release agents in the paver and on rollers, shovels,lutes,and other utensils c) Procedures for the transfer of mixture into the paver while avoiding segregation and preventing material spillage d) The process to balance production, delivery, paving, and compaction to achieve continuous placement operations e) The paver operations (e.g., operation of wings, height of mixture in auger chamber) to avoid physical and thermal segregation and other surface irregularities f) Procedures to construct quality longitudinal and transverse joints 3.05 Construction A. Prime Coat 1. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT. B. Tack Coat 1. The material shall not be applied on a previously primed base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. The surface upon which the material is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3. The material shall be applied when the surface temperature is 60' F or higher unless otherwise approved. 4. All contact surfaces of base, curbs,structures,and joints shall be coated with the material. 5. During the application of the material,the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement,curb,gutter,and structures. 6. The surface shall be given a uniform application of shall be applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard and/or as shown on the Drawings. 7. When directed roll the freshly applied material with a pneumatic tire roller to ensure penetration PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 as necessary. 8. The Owner may use TxDOT Tex-243-F to verify that the material has adequate adhesive properties. C. Storage and Heating of Asphalt Materials 1. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. 2. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. D. Proportioning 1. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the job-mix. E. Mixing 1. Weight Batch Plant a. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 2. Drum Mix Plant a. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. 4. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one- percent(1%)by weight of total mix when determined by TxDOT Tex-212-F. 5. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250'F and 325' F,or as required. a. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25'F. F. Placing Asphaltic Concrete 1. General a. The material shall not be applied on a previously primed base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Owner. b. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a paving machine or other approved equipment in such a manner such that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth or uniform density,and meet the requirements of the typical cross sections as shown on the Drawings. 2. Base Surface a. The surface upon which the material is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods to the satisfaction of the Owner. b. Asphaltic material shall be placed when the surface temperature is 60' F or higher unless otherwise approved. 3. Placement Temperature a. Asphaltic material shall be placed prior to it falling below 200'F. 1) If all or any portion of a load is found to be below the temperature then the load may be rejected and will need to be removed by the Contractor prior to placing any additional material. G. Flush Structures 1. Adjacent to flush curbs,gutters,liners and structures,the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted,it will be one-quarter inch (1/4") above the edge. H. Construction joints 1. Joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six-inches (6"). 2. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines,or as directed by the Owner. I. Compacting 1. General a. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the Drawings. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed,all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175'F. c. The use of hand tamps shall only occur in areas where rollers are not able to obtain compaction. d. The edges of the pavement along curbs, headers and similar structures, and all places not accessible to the roller, or in such positions as will not allow thorough compaction with the rollers,shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled tamps. e. Rolling with a trench roller will be required on widened areas,in trenches and other limited areas where satisfactory compaction cannot be obtained with the approved rollers. f. Unless otherwise directed,use only water or an approved release agent on rollers,tamps,and other compaction equipment. 1) Keep diesel,gasoline,oil,grease,and other foreign matter off the mixture. 2. In-Place Compaction Control a. Use density control unless ordinary compaction control is specified on the Drawings. b. Use the control strip method given in TxDOT Tex-207-17 to establish the rolling pattern for density controlled areas. c. Where specific density or air void requirements are waived,furnish and operate compaction equipment as approved. d. Do not use pneumatic-tire rollers if excessive pickup of fines by roller tires occurs. e. When rolling with the three-wheel,tandem or vibratory rollers,it is recommended that rolling start by first rolling the joint with the adjacent pavement and then continue by rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-foot(1'). f. Alternate trips of the roller should be slightly different in length. g. On super-elevated curves,rolling should begin at the low side and progress toward the high side. h. When rolling with vibratory steel-wheel rollers, equipment operation shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210, and the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. i. Vibratory rollers shall not be left vibrating while not rolling or when changing directions. In addition, vibratory rollers shall not be allowed in the vibrating mode on mats with a plan depth of less than one and one-half inches (1-1/2"),unless approved by the Owner. j. The motion of the rollers shall be slow enough to avoid other than usual initial displacement of the mixture. k. If any displacement occurs, it shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner and/or Inspector. 1. Ensure pavement is fully compacted before allowing rollers to stand on the pavement. 3. Rolling Pattern a. Rolling patterns shall be established by the Contractor to achieve the maximum compaction. b. The selected rolling pattern shall be followed unless changes in the mixture or placement conditions occur which affect compaction. c. When changes in the mixture or placement conditions occur, a new rolling pattern shall be established. J. In-Place Density and Air Voids 1. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin,irregular level-up courses. 2. Material should be compacted to between ninety-two percent(92%)and ninety-six percent(96%) of maximum theoretical density or between four-percent(4%)and eight-percent(8%) air voids. 3. Average density shall be greater than ninety-two percent(92%) and no individual determination shall be lower than ninety percent(90%). 4. Density and Air Void Testing Rate a. Whichever is less 1) One (1) set every 500 tons of compacted asphaltic material, 2) One (1) set every 1,000 linear feet. b. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Tex-207-F and TxDOT Tex-227-F. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture,will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. d. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Owner. K. Thickness 1. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the Drawings. 2. No more than ten percent(10%)of the measured thicknesses shall be more than one-quarter inch (1/4")less than the Drawing thickness. 3. If so,the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Owner. 3.06 Ride Quality A. General 1. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines,grade, and cross-section. B. Equipment 1. Ten foot(10') straight edge. 2. Diamond Grinding Equipment a. Shall be self-propelled powered grinding equipment that is specifically designed to smooth and texture pavements using circular blades. b. Shall have automatic grade control capable of grinding at least a three-foot (3') width longitudinally in each pass without damaging the pavement. C. Testing 1. The Owner, Inspector, and/or Owner may require any of the following tests to be performed to verify the project. a. Straight-Edge 1) The Owner, Inspector, and/or Owner shall have the Contractor to test localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) with a ten-foot (10') straightedge placed parallel or perpendicular to the roadway centerline depending on location of defect. 2) The maximum deviation shall not exceed one-eighth inch (1/8") in ten-feet(10'). b. Mays Roughness Meter 1) The surface shall be tested by the Owner with the Mays Roughness Meter. 2) The Mays Roughness Value for each block (intersection to intersection) or 600-foot section,whichever is the less,shall not exceed ninety inches(90")per mile per traffic lane. D. Correction of Deficiencies 1. Areas not meeting criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Local defects a. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies by grinding and fog sealing the aggregate exposed. b. All areas that are corrected shall be retested. 3. Mays Roughness Deficiencies a. For each block of 600-foot section not meeting this criteria,the Owner shall have the option of requiring that block or section to be reworked to meet the criteria, or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. b. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: 1) Adjusted Unit Price= (Adjustment Factor)X Surface Course Unit Bid Price 2) The adjustment factor shall be: a) For Residential Streets:Adjustment Factor= 1.999-0.0111 M b) For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential):Adjustment Factor= 1.287-0.0143 M, Where M-Mays Roughness Value c. In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. d. If the surface course is an inverted penetration(surface treatment)the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches (10")per mile,prior to applying the above criteria. 3.07 Opening to Traffic A. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Owner. B. Traffic shall not be allowed on pavement until the temperature is 150' F or lower unless otherwise directed. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. D. If the surface ravels, flushes, ruts, or deteriorates prior to final acceptance it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense to the satisfaction of the Owner. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Concrete Paving as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 Submittals A. roduct Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcing steel,if required,shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification,Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL. B. All steel shall be grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint filler shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. B. Cap seal shall be Greenstreak#610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 2.04 Backfill A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings,no section shall be a length less than eight-feet(8'). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Foundation A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. B. Be straight,free from warp,and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. D. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. The reinforcing steel,if required,shall be placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Joints A. Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. 3. Where the paving abuts a retaining wall,sidewalk,curb,or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion joint shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through paving. S. Dowels a. The dowel shall be extended across the joint nine inches (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch(18")on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4'-0"on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden or metal float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2") radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curing A. Within twenty(20)minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.10 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 16 13.13 CURB&GUTTER PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Curbs and Gutters as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this specification shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification,Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. Reinforcing steel and Dowels, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification,Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL,or as noted on the Drawings. B. All steel shall be Grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint material shall be 3/4" thick wood fiber asphalt-impregnated material meeting the requirements specified in Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES or as noted on the Drawings. 2.04 Backfill Material A. Select Backfill Material 1. Shall be native on-site material from excavation,imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material free from vegetation,rocks,debris,and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches(2")meeting the following requirements: a. Liquid limit of thirty-five(35)maximum, b. Plasticity index range from eight(8)to twenty(20), c. Moisture range from-1%to 3%. 2. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL,MH,OH,CH,and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. B. Topsoil Backfill Material 1. Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used. 2. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods,which will not readily break down under compaction. 3. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. 4. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 5. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. 6. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Shall be placed in sections of the length indicated on the Drawings. C. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint of cross section specified for the curb and gutter and of the thickness indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Subgrade A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. The reinforcing steel and Dowels shall be of type and placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.04 Expansion Joints A. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. 1. If curb and gutter is attached to rigid concrete pavement than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the rigid concrete pavement,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. B. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter. C. Expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the curb and gutter. D. Dowels 1. When required shall be extended across the joint nine-inches (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased on one(1)end. 3.05 Control Joints A. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at 10'-0"on centers,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. B. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.06 Concrete Placement A. General 1. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 2. If dry,the foundation material shall be sprinkled lightly immediately before concrete is deposited thereon. 3. After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become sufficiently set,the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden float. 4. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on Drawings. S. All exposed surfaces of curb and gutter,or curb,shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. B. Curing 1. The completed curb and gutter shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented, curing compound unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification,Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 3.07 Formed Concrete A. Forms 1. General a. Forms will be required for all curb and gutter that is not Machine Laid. 2. Outside Forms a. Shall be of wood or metal,of a section satisfactory to the Owner. b. Be straight,free of warp,and a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. c. Shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. d. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3. Inside Forms a. Shall be of wood or metal. b. Of a section satisfactory to the Owner. c. Be straight,free of warp,and a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. d. Shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 e. Shall be rigidly attached to the outside forms. f. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.08 Machine Laid A. Can be used when approved by the Owner. B. The machine weight shall be such that the required compaction is obtained without the machine riding above the bed on which curbing is constructed. C. Shall form curb and gutter that are uniform in texture,shape,and density. D. Forming tube of the extrusion machine or the form of the slip form machine must be easily adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the machine to provide variable heights necessary to conform to the established grade line. E. A pointer,gauge,or other Owner approved method shall be attached to the machine so that a continual comparison can be made between the extruded or slip form work and the grade guideline. 3.09 Backfill A. Sidewalk not Attached 1. Material a. 6"Below Top Of Curb 1) Select Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. b. 6"Below Top Of Curb to Top of Curb 1) Topsoil Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) two- feet(2')beyond curb immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock,or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent(90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Topsoil Backfill Material 1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. B. Sidewalk Attached 1. Material a. To bottom of Sidewalk Structure 1) Select Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) full width of sidewalk immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock,or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent(90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Driveway Attached CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Material a. To bottom of Driveway Structure 1) Select Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) full width of driveway or to Right-of-Way line,whichever is greater,immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock,or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent(90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 16 23 SIDEWALKS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Sidewalks as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL C. 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Administrative Code,Title 16,Part 4,Chapter 68,Rule§68.10 B. Texas Accessibility Standards C. Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). 1.05 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. ADA Standards-shall mean compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standards and the Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum 28 day strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. Reinforcing steel and Dowels,if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL,or as noted on the Drawings. B. All steel shall be Grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Concrete Curing A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING. 2.04 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint material shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. 2.05 Detectable Surface A. Unless otherwise stated, shall be in accordance with Texas Accessibility Standards for Detectable Warnings, Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design for Detectable Warnings, and the Drawings,otherwise specified by the Owner. 2.06 Pavement Markings A. All stripping shall be in accordance with the standard details and specifications of the local governing entity. 2.07 Backfill Material A. Select Backfill Material 1. Shall be native on-site material from excavation,imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material free from vegetation,rocks,debris,and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches(2")meeting the following requirements: a. Liquid limit of thirty-five(35)maximum, b. Plasticity index range from eight(8)to twenty(20), c. Moisture range from-1%to 3%. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL,MH,OH,CH,and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. B. Topsoil Backfill Material 1. Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used. 2. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods,which will not readily break down under compaction. 3. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. 4. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 5. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. 6. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings,no section shall be a length less than eight-feet(8'). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Subgrade A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be compacted to 95%Standard Proctor or as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. General 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 1113.11 CONCRETE FORMS 2. Opening in forms shall be provided,if needed,for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. 3. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. 4. If,at any stage of the work,the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. The reinforcing steel and Dowels shall be of type and placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter. 3. Where the sidewalk abuts a retaining wall, driveway, curb,or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the sidewalk. S. Dowels a. When required shall be extended across the joint nine-inch (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased on one(1)end. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch(18")on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4'-0"on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. D. Subgrade shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2") radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curb Ramp with Detectable Surface A. General 1. Shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings and recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Properly constructed curb ramp shall be true to line, section, grade and shall be free of loose surfacing and irregularities. 3. The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, cross section, and shall be of uniform density and moisture,when concrete is placed. 4. The subgrade shall be hand tamped and sprinkled to achieve the desired consistency and uniform support. S. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, ramps shall have a minimum concrete thickness in excess of four-inches (4"),prior to application of textured surface. B. Slope 1. Slopes,S,shall be as shown in Table 1 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings: Table 1 Required Slopes for Curb Ramps and Sidewalks Ramp Sloe S i Ramp in direction of travel S< 1:12 Side slope of ramp (flare) S< 1:10 Cross Slope 1:100<S< 1:50 Sidewalks Sloe S Landings adjacent to ramp S< 1:20 Driveways abutting tied sidewalk S< 1:10 1 In all cases the slope shall be in accordance with ADA Standards C. Width of ramp 1. Shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Obstructions 1. Shall be removed or relocated, as appropriate, or the location of the ramp may be shifted, if authorized. E. Detectable Warning 1. Surfacing shall be flush with abutting areas and placed using a template as required to achieve an esthetic well-defined edge. 2. Perpendicular Curb Ramps a. Within the public right of way,detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24" in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the curb ramp shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Parallel Curb Ramps a. Within the public right-of-way,detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24"in depth(in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the landing shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. 4. Diagonal Curb Ramps a. Within the public right-of-way,detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24" in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the curb ramp or landing, shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. b. The detectable warning shall be curved with the radius of the corner. S. The detectable warning shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6"minimum and 10"maximum from the curb line. 6. Abutting curbs,sidewalks,gutters,driveways,etc.shall not receive textured surfacing. F. Pavement Markings for Street Crossings 1. Shall be placed such that the crosswalk is properly aligned with respect to the Curb Ramp. Curb ramp must be wholly contained within cross walk markings. 2. Proper alignment of striping with respect to intersection and curb ramp shall be done in accordance with ADA Standards,and the Drawings. 3. All stripping shall be in accordance with the standard details and specifications of the local governing entity. 3.10 Curing A. Within twenty(20)minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Shall be as outlined in the Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING will be acceptable with a required curing period of seventy-two (72) hours,unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.11 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 16 33 DRIVEWAYS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Driveways as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 Submittals A. roduct Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcing steel,if required,shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification,Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL. B. All steel shall be grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint filler shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. B. Cap seal shall be Greenstreak#610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 2.04 Backfill A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings,no section shall be a length less than eight-feet(8'). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Foundation A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. B. Be straight,free from warp,and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. D. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel DRIVEWAYS 32 16 33-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. The reinforcing steel,if required,shall be placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Joints A. Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. 3. Where the driveway abuts a retaining wall,sidewalk, curb,or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion joint shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through driveways. S. Dowels a. The dowel shall be extended across the joint nine inches (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch(18")on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4'-0"on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden or metal float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2") radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curing A. Within twenty(20)minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.10 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage DRIVEWAYS 32 16 33-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, installation, and removal of painted pavement markings as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(TMUTCD) B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 666"Reflectorized Pavement Markings" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 678"Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings" D. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8200,Traffic Paint E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8220, Hot Applied Thermoplastic F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8290, Glass Traffic Beads G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-828-B H. National Board of Fire Underwriters I. Texas Railroad Commission 1.03 Submittals A. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report on the quality of materials ordered for the work. 1. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Type I and Type II Marking Materials A. Shall be thermoplastic in accordance with TxDOT Item 666. B. Containers shall be clearly marked with the following information: 1. Color 2. Mass 3. Material Type 4. Manufacturer S. Manufacturing Date 6. Batch Number 2.02 Glass Traffic Beads A. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 666. B. Containers shall be clearly marked with the following information: 1. Color 2. Mass 3. Material Type 4. Manufacturer S. Manufacturing Date 6. Batch Number 2.03 Abrasive-blasting Medium A. Shall be of commercial quality and capable of producing the specified surface cleanliness. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, TMUTCD, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the sequencing of the work and estimate the daily production. C. If roadway is currently open to traffic, the placement of markings shall minimally interfere with the operations of the roadway. 1. Use traffic control as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform work or services necessary for complete and proper construction of the completed system of pavement markings. E. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, permanent pavement markings on newly constructed pavements surfaced with asphaltic concrete or bituminous seals shall not be applied for a minimum of fourteen(14) days or a maximum thirty-five(35)days. 1. Temporary pavement marking shall be provided during the fourteen (14) to thirty-five (35) day period. 3.02 Storage of Materials A. All materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Materials shall be stored within a weatherproof enclosure and protected from damage. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. Equipment 1. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. 2. Equipment shall be able to prepare concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the pavement surface will not be damaged. 3. Air Blasting Equipment a. Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture,oil,or other contaminants on the roadway surface. B. Construction 1. Prepare pavement surface of sufficient area for the pavement marking as recommended by the manufacturer,TxDOT Item 678,shown on the Drawings,and/or as directed by the Owner. 2. Immediately before application of the paint marking material,the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from dirt, grease, oil, acids,laitance, or other foreign matter which would reduce the bond between the marking and the pavement 3. Remove all contamination and loose material from pavement surface by sweeping,air blasting,flail milling,blast cleaning,or as recommended by the manufacturer,directed on the Drawings or by the Owner. a. Contaminates up to 0.5 square inch may remain if they are not removed by the following test which is preformed just prior to applying marking material: 1) Air-blast the surface to simulate blasting during application, 2) Firmly press a ten-inch(10")by two-inch(2")wide strip of monofilament tape onto surface, leaving two-inch(2")end free, 3) Firmly grasp the two-inch(2")free end and remove with a quick pull. 4. When existing marking material is present all loose and flaking material shall be removed by approved method(s). C. Pavement Sealer for Type I Marking Material 1. Pavements less than three(3)years old a. No sealer required unless recommended by manufacturer or noted on Drawings. 2. Pavements greater than three(3)years old a. Pavement shall be sealed as recommended by the manufacturer or in accordance with the following: 1) Seal pavement with Type 11 marking or an acrylic or epoxy sealer. 2) Sealer shall be of same configuration and color as the Type I marking unless noted on the Drawings. D. Dryness Test 1. Prior to marking placement the pavement shall be tested for dryness by the following method: a. Type I Marking Material 1) Place a sample of marking material on a piece of tarpaper on the pavement. 2) Allow material to cool to ambient air temperature, and then inspect the underside of the tarpaper in contact with pavement. 3) Pavement is considered dry if there is no condensation on the tarpaper. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. Type II Marking Material 1) Place a one(1)square foot piece of clear plastic on the pavement during a sunny day. 2) The pavement is considered dry if after fifteen(15)minutes no condensation has occurred on the underside of the plastic. 3.04 Marking Equipment A. General 1. Equipment shall be maintained in satisfactory condition. 2. Equipment shall meet or exceed the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Texas Railroad Commission. 3. All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Owner and shall include the apparatus necessary to clean the existing surface, mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand marking equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. 4. The mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray-type marking machine. S. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed to apply markings of uniform cross sections and clear-out edges without running of spattering and within the limits for straightness set forth herein up to a width of eight-inches(8"). 6. Suitable adjustments shall be provided on the sprayer(s) of a single machine or by furnishing additional equipment for marking the width required. 7. For Type I a hand-held thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the marking material when applied. 3.05 Layouts and Alignments A. Suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be spotted in advance of the marking application. B. Control points shall be spaced at such intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings. C. The Contractor shall provide an experience technician to supervise the location, alignment, layout, dimensions,and application of the marking. 3.06 Weather A. The suitability of the weather shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and by the Owner. B. If the Contractor decides to place markings when inclement weather is impending then all markings damaged due to weather shall be replaced at the Contractors sole expense. 3.07 Application A. General 1. Marking shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the Drawings or as specified. 2. Marking shall not be applied until the layouts,indicated alignment,and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Owner. 3. All marking shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner. 4. The Owner shall be notified upon arrival of shipment or inspecting and sampling of the materials. B. Straightness and Width Tolerances 1. In the application of straight stripes,any deviation of the edges exceeding one-inch(1") in fifty-feet (50')shall be obliterated and the marking corrected at the Contractors sole expense. 2. The width of the markings shall be as designated within a tolerance of five-percent(5%). C. Type I Markings 1. Place Type I sealer in accordance with the following and allow to cure: a. Type II paint shall be in accordance with Type 11 application requirements of this specification. b. Acrylic sealer shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. c. Epoxy sealer shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 2. Apply within the temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. If during application, the operation ceases for five (5) minutes or longer the spray head shall be flushed until the material returns to recommended temperatures. 4. Apply only to pavement surface which is clean and passes the Dryness Test of this specification. 5. For concrete pavement,the surface shall be air-blasted just prior to placing the marking material. a. Air compressor shall be able to generate compressed air at a minimum of 150 cfm and 100 psi using 5/16-inch(5/16") or larger hose. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev l/2022 6. The marking shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the surface temperature is above 50' F or as recommended by the manufacture, and when the weather is not excessively windy,dusty,or foggy. 7. Thickness a. Minimum 1) New Markings and Retracing water-based markings on surface treatments a) 0.100-inch(100 mils) 2) Retracing on thermoplastic markings a) 0.060-inch(60 mils) 3) All other Type I markings a) 0.90-inch(90 mils) b. Maximum 1) All markings a) 0.180-inch(180 mils) D. Type II Markings 1. Paint shall be applied uniformly by suitable equipment at a rate as recommended by the manufacture and which will result in the required thickness to cover the pavement surface of width and length as required by the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. Apply within the temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. If during application, the operation ceases for five (5) minutes or longer the spray head shall be flushed until the material returns to recommended consistency. 4. Apply only to pavement surface which is clean and passes the Dryness Test of this specification. 5. For concrete pavement,the surface shall be air-blasted just prior to placing the marking material. a. Air compressor shall be able to generate compressed air at a minimum of 150 cfm and 100 psi using 5/16-inch(5/16") or larger hose. 6. The marking shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the surface temperature is above 50' F or as recommended by the manufacture, and when the weather is not excessively windy,dusty,or foggy. E. Glass Traffic Beads 1. Apply beads on top of all Type I and Type II marking material almost instantly after placing the marking material. 2. Provide a uniform distribution of beads across the surface of the stripe with a forty-percent(40%) to sixty-percent(60%) embedment. 3.08 Protection of Markings A. After application,all markings shall be protected while curing. B. The fresh markings shall be protected from damage of any kind. C. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for the protection of markings and shall erect or place suitable warning signs,flags or barricades,protective screens,or coverings as required. D. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter,splashes,spillage,drippings of paint or other materials. E. If markings are damaged or disfigured due to traffic, construction equipment, or construction method the Contractor shall replace the marking at his expense. 3.09 Eliminating Pavement Markings A. Equipment 1. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. 2. Equipment shall be able to eliminate markings on concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the color and texture of the pavement surface will be held to a minimum. 3. Air Blasting Equipment a. Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture,oil,or other contaminants on the roadway surface. B. Marking Removal 1. Asphaltic Surface a. Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: 1) Surface Treatment Method PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a) Apply surface treatment material at a rate shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b) Place a surface treatment a minimum of two-foot (2') wide to cover the existing marking. c) Place a surface treatment thin overlay,or microsurfacing a minimum of one(1)lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic occur or as directed by the Owner. d) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 2) Burn Method a) Use an approved burning method. b) For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement markings,heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the material prior to blast cleaning. When using heat, avoid spalling pavement surface. c) Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. d) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 3) Blasting Method a) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. b) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 4) Mechanical Method a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. c) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 2. Concrete Surface a. Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: 1) Blasting Method a) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. b) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 2) Mechanical Method a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. c) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 3.10 Marking Material Containers A. When required,all emptied containers shall be returned to the paint material storage or made available for tallying by the Owner. B. The containers shall not be removed from the job site or destroyed without permission. C. The Contractor shall make an accurate accounting of the paint materials used in the accepted work. D. All containers shall be disposed of in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations 3.11 Clean Up A. At all times,the project site shall be kept free of all unnecessary traffic hazards. B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from the work site, and shall clean and restore the area to a manner acceptable to the Owner. C. Also,all damage done by the Contractor during the prosecution of the work must be repaired. D. Before acceptance,the work site must be neat and in a presentable condition throughout. E. Disposal of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and completed in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 3.12 Defective Workmanship or Material PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. When any material not conforming to the requirement of the specifications or Drawings has been delivered to the project or incorporated in the work or any work performed is of inferior quality,such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Owner,at the expense of the Contractor. 3.13 Performance Requirements A. Adhesion 1. Installed pavement markings shall adhere to the pavement sufficiently to prevent lifting,shifting, smearing,spreading,flowing or tearing by traffic. B. Appearance 1. In addition to complying with all requirements listed herein,pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance, and shall be free of unsightly conditions caused by spread of excess adhesive. C. Visibility 1. The pavement marking material,in place on the roadway,shall have uniform and distinctive retro reflectance when observed in accordance with TxDOT Tex-828-13. D. Observation Period 1. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by manufacturers guarantee and/or warranty for a period of twelve (12) months commencing on final delivery date of materials. 3.14 Performance Period A. All markings and replacement markings that fail to meet all requirements of this specification and Tex- 828-B for a minimum of thirty(30)calendar days after installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. B. Markings and replacement markings failing to meet the performance requirements shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor within thirty(30) calendar days after notification at his expense. 1. All replacement pavement markings shall also meet all requirements of this specification for the same warranty period after installation. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the placement and maintaining seeding as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Agriculture Code-Chapter 63 Commercial Fertilizer B. Texas Seed Law C. US Department of Agriculture D. Federal Seed Act PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Topsoil A. Shall be easily cultivated,fertile soil that is free from objectionable material which is able to support the required vegetation. B. On-Site Material 1. The Contractor shall obtain topsoil from on-site during Clearing and Grubbing operations and shall stockpile this material at a location shown on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. 2. Material to be used from on-site shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, non-soil materials, litter, contamination, and roots, stumps, woody material, and stones larger than two-inches (2"), and materials that the Owner deems inappropriate. C. Off-Site Material 1. The Contractor shall obtain topsoil from Owner approved off-site source(s). 2. Material to be used from off-site shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, non-soil materials, litter, contamination, and roots, stumps, woody material, and stones larger than two-inches (2"), and materials that the Owner deems inappropriate. 2.02 Fertilizer A. All fertilizer used shall be delivered in bags or containers with clearly marked analysis, manufacturer, trademark,and all inert materials. B. Shall be a granulated or pellet fertilizer. C. Shall have an analysis containing nitrogen (N), phosphoric acid (P), and potash (K) nutrients unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. 1. The analysis shall be 12(N)-12(P)-12(K)or as recommended by the Seed provider. a. These figures represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash nutrients respectively,as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. b. At least fifty-percent(50%) of the nitrogen component must be of a slow-release formulation such as urea-based and plastic resin-coated fertilizers. D. The rate of application shall be not less than recommended by the manufacturer. E. In the event that it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer with a different analysis,it shall be with a lower analysis. F. The total nutrients applied per unit area shall not be less that the specified amount of each nutrient. G. Fertilizer is subject to testing by the Texas A&M Feed and Fertilizer Control Service in accordance with the Texas Agriculture Code-Chapter 63. 2.03 Seed A. Seed shall be labeled and conform to the requirements of the US Department of Agriculture,Federal Seed Act,and Texas Seed Law. B. Labels shall indicate purity,germination,name and type of seed. C. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within twelve(12)months of delivery to the project. D. The quantity of"Commercial Seed"required to equal the quantity of"Pure Live Seed"shall be computed by the following formula: 1. Commercial Seed=Pure Live Seed x 10.000 %Purity x%Germination SEEDING 32 92 19-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 E. The quantity of pure live seed(PLS)and type required are indicated below in Table 1 and Table 2,or as shown on the Drawings for mixture. Table 1 Clay Soil Seed Mix March 1 to September 30 October 1 to March 1 Common Name lb.PLS acre lb.PLS acre Green Sprangletop 0.3 -- Sideoats Grama 3.6 3.6 Haskell Common Bermuda grass 40.0 40.0 (Hulled) Common Bermuda grass Unhulled -- 40.0 Buffalo grass T 1.6 1.6 exoma Annual Rye grass -- 30.0 Foxtail Millet 34.0 -- Table 2 Sandy Soil Seed Mix March 1 to September 30 October 1 to March 1 Common Name lb.PLS acre lb.PLS acre Green Sprangletop 0.3 0.3 Common Bermuda grass 40.0 40.0 Hulled Common Bermuda grass Unhulled -- 40.0 Buffalo grass 1.6 1.6 Texoma Annual Rye grass -- 30.0 Foxtail Millet 34.0 -- 2.04 Mulch A. Wood/Cellulose Blend Fiber Mulch 1. Shall consist of: a. Seventy-percent(70%)long wood grain fibers produced from grinding clean,whole wood chips, and thirty percent (30%) cellulose fiber produced from ground newsprint, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. 2. Mulch shall have no growth inhibiting ingredients. 3. Shall be dried with a moisture content less that 10%by weight. 4. Fibers shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering and application of mulch. S. The cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that after addition and agitation in slurry tank with fertilizers, seeds, and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to forms a homogeneous slurry 6. When sprayed on the ground,the material shall form a uniform cover impregnated with seeds and the cover shall allow added water to percolate to the underlying soil. 7. The fiber material shall be supplied in packages of not more than 100 pound gross weight and shall be suitable for outdoor storage for up to six(6)months. a. Package is to be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the manufacturer name, address, customer telephone number,the dry weight content,and material content analysis. B. Hay SEEDING 32 92 19-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1. Hay shall be locally available and free of deleterious material,non-native grasses and material. a. If non-native grasses and material shall be apparent the Contractor will be required to remove this material by an Owner approved method. 2. The Owner and/or Owner shall approve the hay prior to placement. a. This approval does not relive the Contractor from any responsibilities of the removal of non- native grasses and materials. 2.05 Water A. Water shall be free from oils, acids, alkali's, salts, industrial wastes, and other substances, which may inhibit vegetation growth. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, water shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be transported and applied by the Contractor with approved equipment and machinery,which is in good working order. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Topsoil A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of objectionable material in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Prior to placing topsoil the existing soil shall be cultivated to a depth of four-inches(4"). C. The approved topsoil shall be spread across the cultivated area to a uniform loose depth of four-inches (4")minimum or as specified on the Drawings or by the Owner. D. The area shall be watered and lightly compacted by means of a light roller or other suitable equipment. 1. Compaction shall be minimal and should not inhibit vegetative growth. E. If the topsoil settles below the established grade or will not allow for positive run-off, the area shall have additional topsoil added and sprinkled with water and rolled as directed by the Owner. F. The topsoil shall be protected from erosion from wind and water until protected by vegetation or other Owner approved method(s). 3.03 Equipment A. The fertilizing, seeding and/or mulching operations shall be accomplished with equipment suitable to the required function. B. It shall be of current design and in good operating condition. C. Hydro Seeding Equipment 1. Special seeding and mulching equipment must also meet the following requirements: a. Seeder 1) Equipment for applying a seed-fertilizer mix shall be a hydraulic seeder designed to pump and discharge a waterborne,homogeneous slurry of seed and fertilizer. 2) The seeder shall be equipped with a power driven agitator, and capable of pressure discharge. b. Wood/Cellulose Fiber Mulch Spreader 1) Equipment used for this application of fertilizer, seeds, wood pulp, water and other additives shall have a built-in agitation system with sufficient capacity to agitate,suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to 40 lbs.of fiber plus the required fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. 2) It shall have sufficient agitation and pump capacity to spray a slurry in a uniform coat over the area to be mulched. 3.04 Mulch A. Wood Cellulose Blend Fiber Mulch with Seeds 1. After tilling,mulch shall be applied. 2. Wood cellulose fibers shall be added to the hydraulic seeder after the proportionate amounts of seeds,fertilizer,water and other approved materials are added. 3. Application shall be 1500 lb/acre on flats, 2000 lb/acre on 3:1 slopes,and 2500 lb/acre on 2:1 or SEEDING 32 92 19-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 greater,or as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Owner. 4. The mulch shall provide a uniform cover over the soil surface. 5. Placement shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by the Owner. B. Hay 1. Seed shall be applied to the surface at the appropriate rate as recommended by the manufacturer and/or directed by the Owner. 2. Hay shall be spread lightly across the area as directed by the Owner. 3. The area shall be lightly rolled and watered. 3.05 Maintenance A. The Contractor will water,repair and reseed areas as required for a period of 45 days. B. This includes erosion damage. C. If at any time the seeded area becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, or the seedlings have been damaged or destroyed, the affected portion shall be re-established to the specified condition prior to acceptance of the work. 3.06 Guarantee A. The Contractor shall assure ninety-five percent(95%)of the seeded area has established growth at forty- five(45)calendar days after seeding,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Where established,growth is defined as at least one(1)plant per square foot. 3.07 Watering A. Sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after planting and subsequently at such intervals to promote growth or as directed by the Owner. 1. 0 to 21 days a. Every two days with a minimum of 1/2 inch(1/2")water,unless a comparable amount of rain has occurred. 2. 22 to 42 days a. Twice a week with a minimum of 1/2 inch(1/2")water,unless a comparable amount of rain has occurred. 3. Water shall be applied in late afternoon or at night to enable absorption of the water with minimum evaporation. 4. During drought conditions,contact the Owner on any special requirements or provisions. B. The Contractor shall furnish and operate equipment to distribute water at a uniform and controllable rate. C. Ensure that watering does not erode soil or plantings. 3.08 Fertilizer A. Fertilizing and seeding shall be done concurrently. B. Fertilizer shall be applied uniformly over the area and in a manner in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations or as directed by the Owner. C. Shall be dry and in good physical condition with any fertilizer being in powder or cake form being rejected. D. Fertilizer shall be uniformly applied at a rate of 400 lb/acre,after tilling. E. If seeds and fertilizer are distributed in a water slurry. F. The mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within thirty(30)minutes after all the components have come into contact. 3.09 Mowing and Maintenance A. Mow at intervals to keep the grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches(3-1/2"). B. Mower shall be set at a minimum height of 2-1/2 inches(2-1/2")or at a height that will not remove more than one-half of the grass leaf surface. C. Mow areas when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. D. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. E. Restrict all vehicular and pedestrian traffic from area(s)until sod is established or for minimum 30 days during growing season. F. Maintain area(s)for a minimum of ninety(90)days,or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. 1. For area(s)seeded in the fall,continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. SEEDING 32 92 19-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for trenchless utility installation as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 0155 26.13 TRAFFIC CONTROL B. 3123 16.13 TRENCHING C. 33 30 13.13 WASTEWATER UTILITIES CLEANING D. 33 3113.13 PUBLIC WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM C581 - Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service B. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials C. ASTM D2122-Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings D. ASTM DS813-Standard Specification for Cured-In-Place Thermosetting Resin Sewer Piping Systems E. ASTM F1216-Standard Practice for Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by the Inversion and Curing of a Resin-Impregnated Tube F. Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) Standards and Interpretations G. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety 1.04 Submittals A. Cured-In-Place-Pipe (CIPP) 1. Resin a. Technical data sheet indicating physical and chemical properties for the proposed resin to be used. b. Test results to show compliance with ASTM 581. 2. Tube a. Technical data indicating physical properties 3. CIPP a. Schedule b. Copies of curing log sheets with temperature reading prior to curing, during curing, and cool down for each installation section. c. Copies of all test results performed by the Contractor's Independent Testing Laboratory. d. Contractors Quality Control Plan and/ or Procedures showing control conditions used during impregnation of the resin to ensure proper materials and proper dispersion is achieved in the wet out process. e. Submit pre-installation video inspection after cleaning and video inspection after placement and curing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Casing Pipe A. Steel Pipe 1. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings,casing pipe shall be seamless smooth pipe with minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. 2. Minimum casing wall thickness shall be as shown in Table 1: Table 1 Minimum Casing Wall Thickness Casing Diameter(Inches) Minimum Wall Thickness(Inches) Less than 12 5/16 Over 12 to 18 3/8 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Over 18 to 22 7/16 Over 22 to 28 1/2 Over 28 to 34 9/16 Over 34 to 42 5/8 Over 42 to 48 11/16 Over 48 Specified by Owner B. Casing End Seal 1. Shall be made of synthetic rubber, conical shape, pull-on or wrap-around style with Type 304 stainless steel bands 2.02 Cured-In-Place-Pipe(CIPP) A. Pre-Approved Products 1. The only pre-approved products for this work shall be those identified in the plans. 2. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. B. General 1. The Contractor is to supply all products and equipment required to perform the work 2. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 3. Shall be properly sized Type III cured-in-place thermosetting resin wastewater pipe in accordance with ASTM D5813. 4. The flexible felt fiber tube shall be fabricated to a size that when installed it will neatly fit the internal circumference of the existing pipe. a. An allowance shall be made for some circumferential stretching during inversion. S. The minimum length shall effectively span the distance from the inlet to the outlet of the respective manholes unless otherwise specified. 6. The Contractor shall verify the circumference of the host pipe and the lengths in the field before impregnation of the tube with the resin. 7. Individual insertion runs can be made over one or more manhole sections as determined in the field by the Contractor and approved by the qualified factory field service representative and the Owner. C. Tube 1. The tube shall consist of one or more layers of flexible needled felt or an equivalent nonwoven or woven material or a combination of nonwoven and woven materials that are compatible with the resin system used and are capable of supporting and carrying resin. 2. The tube shall be capable of withstanding installation procedures and curing temperatures. 3. Longitudinal and circumferential joints between multiple layers of a tube should be staggered to not overlap. 4. The tube shall be fabricated to fit its final in-place position in the existing pipe,with allowance for stretch as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. The elongation or expansion of the flexible tube during installation, both longitudinally and circumferentially should be limited to 5-10%to minimize reduction of the finished wall thickness. D. Tube Coating 1. The inside or outside surface,or both,of the tube shall be coated with a plastic flexible material that is compatible with the tube and the resin system used. 2. The coating shall allow visual inspection of the proper impregnation of the tube fabric with resin. 3. The final inside flexible plastic coating will form the inner layer of the finished pipe and is required to contain the impregnated resin in the tube. E. CIPP Wall 1. The layers which constitute the pipe wall must be such that when the thermosetting resin cures the Cured-In-Place-Pipe has no delamination,dry spots or lifts. 2. The minimum allowable wall thickness for CIPP shall be per Table 3 and as directed by the Owner after review of the TV Inspection. TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Table 3 Wall Thickness For CIPP H DR T Feet Sound Host Pie Deteriorated Host Pie inch <10 60 50 10- 15 50 40 15-20 45 35 T=D/DR 20-25 40 30 >25 40 25 H,Height of cover over pipe(ft) DR-Dimension Ratio,D/T T=Wall thickness of CIPP in D=Nominal Diameter in 3. When cured,the CIPP must forma mechanical bond with the conduit. 4. The wall color of the interior pipe surface of the CIPP after installation shall be a light reflective color so that a clear detail examination with closed circuit television inspection equipment may be made. 2.03 Pipebursting A. Polyethylene 1. Shall be in accordance with ASTM D-3350 with a cell classification of 335434B,D,or E. 2. In addition linear shall be manufactured of resins classified as Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34,in accordance with ASTM D-1248. 3. Shall conform to PPI PE3408. 4. Dimensions a. Shall be SDR17, IPS per ASTM F714 of the nominal diameter indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 5. Quality a. All pipe shall be homogenous throughout, and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters,or other deleterious faults. b. All materials shall be of the highest quality and highest performance. c. It shall be the product of a manufacturer actively engaged in research, development, and the manufacturer of said materials. 2.04 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10.00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Coordination and permitting with other utilities, facilities, and agencies shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Where encasement or carrier pipe is required to be installed under railroad embankments or under highways,streets,or other facilities by jacking,boring or tunneling methods,construction shall be made in a manner that will not interfere with the operation of the railroad,highway, or other facility, and will not weaken or damage any embankment or structure. D. During construction operations,barricades and lights to safeguard traffic and pedestrians shall be furnished and maintained in accordance with Section 0155 26.13 TRAFFIC CONTROL,as directed by the Owner,until such time as the backfill has been completed and then shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. E. The drilling of pilot holes for the alignment of pipe prior to its installation by jacking,boring or tunneling will not be a requirement but may be necessary to maintain grade. F. The drilling of pilot holes will be considered as incidental work and the cost thereof shall be included in such contract pay items as are provided in the proposal and contract. G. The Contractor shall take the proper precautions to avoid excavating earth beyond the limits of excavation needed to install the conduit. TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 H. All damages by excavating or tunneling, either to surface or subsurface structures, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense to the requirements of the damaged items owner. I. The removal of any obstruction that may be found to conflict with the placing of this pipe will not be measured for payment or paid for as a separate contract pay item. J. All surplus materials shall become the Contractors and disposal shall be in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations and will be the responsibility of the Contractor,unless otherwise directed by the Owner. K. The ends of the carrier pipe shall be enclosed as noted on the Drawings,or directed by the Owner. 3.02 Safety Requirements A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to adhere to all safety procedures and requirements of local,state, and federal regulations. B. If at any time a trench shall be required to perform the work then the requirements of Section 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING shall be required. C. Any excavation that remains open after working hours shall be covered with a steel plate of sufficient thickness to support traffic. 3.03 Construction by Jacking A. If the grade of the pipe at the jacking end is below the ground surface,suitable pipes or trenches shall be excavated for the purpose of conducting the jacking operations and for placing end joints of the pipe. B. This excavation shall not be carried to greater depth than is required for placing of the guide and jacking timbers and no nearer the roadbed than the minimum distance shown on the Drawings. C. At the other end of the pipe,an approach trench shall be excavated accurately to grade. D. All open trenches and pits shall be braced and shored in such a manner as will adequately prevent caving or sliding of the walls into the open trench or pit E. Heavy-duty jacks suitable for forcing the pipe through the embankment shall be provided by the Contractor. F. In operating jacks,even pressure shall be applied to all jacks used. G. A suitable jacking head not less than six-inches (6")larger than the outside diameter of the pipe,usually of timber and suitable bracing between jacks and jacking head, shall be provided by the Contractor so that pressure will be applied to the pipe uniformly around the ring of the pipe. H. The jacking head shall be of such weight and dimensions that it will not bend or deflect when an opening for the removal of excavated material as the jacking proceeds. I. A suitable jacking frame or backstop shall be provided by the Contractor. J. The pipe to be jacked shall be set on guides that are straight and securely braced together in such manner to support the section of the pipe and to direct it in the proper line and grade. K. All timber and other materials used in the construction of the jacking assembly will be of such quality and dimensions that they will withstand all stresses to which they are subjected in such a manner as to insure even pressures on the pipe during jacking operations. L. The whole jacking assembly shall be placed so as to line up with the direction and grade of the pipe. M. As the jacking proceeds,the embankment material shall be excavated slightly in advance of the pipe in such a manner to avoid making the excavation larger than the outside diameter of the pipe,with the excavated material being removed through the pipe. N. The excavation for the underside of the pipe, for at least one third of the circumference of the pipe, shall conform to the contour and grade of the pipe. 0. The excavation for the top half of the pipe shall conform closely to the outside diameter of the pipe and a clearance greater than two-inches(2")will not be permitted. P. All voids between the pipe and the earth shall be filled with non-shrinking grout Q. Grout holes shall be provided in the pipe. R. The grouting shall follow immediately upon completion of the jacking operation. S. All carrier pipes installed by jacking shall be supported as required by the Drawings. T. The distance that the excavation shall extend beyond the end of the pipe depends on the character of the materials,but it shall not exceed two-feet(2')in any case. U. The pipe, preferably, shall be jacked from the low or downstream end, as indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. V. When jacking of pipe is once begun, the operation shall be carried on without interruption, insofar as practicable;to prevent the pipe from becoming firmly set in the embankment TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 W. Any pipe damaged in jacking operations shall be repaired or removed and replaced by the Contractor at his entire expense. X. The pits or trenches excavated to facilitate jacking operation shall be filled immediately after the jacking of the pipe has been completed unless an encasement only has been installed;in which case,the trenches and pits shall be left open until the carrier pipe has been laid through and manholes have been built if required. Y. The pits or trenches shall then be backfilled in accordance with the backfill for the applicable utility. 3.04 Construction by Boring A. The hole shall be bored,at a minimum diameter,mechanically with a suitable boring assembly designed to produce a smooth,straight shaft and so operated that the completed shaft will be at the established line and grade. B. The size of the bored hole shall be of such diameter to provide ample clearance for bells or other joints. C. Voids outside the casing shall be grouted with non-shrinking grout and will be considered subsidiary work. D. In addition to the requirements stated above, the applicable provisions of "Construction By Jacking", in regard to the construction of trench,tolerance in line and grade,method of operation,backfilling,etc.,shall govern for construction by boring. 3.05 Construction by Tunneling A. The tunnel shall be excavated in such a manner and to such dimensions,which will permit placing of the proper supports necessary to protect the excavation. B. The Contractor shall take the proper precautions to avoid excavating earth beyond the limits of excavation shown on the Drawings. C. All damages by excavating,either to surface or subsurface structures,shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. D. If required by the Drawings or if required for safety,suitable steel or timber sheeting,shoring and bracing shall be used to support the sides and roof of the excavation. E. Supports may be left in place provided that they clear the steel liner plate or carrier pipe. F. No separate payment will be made for supports left in place. G. Nothing contained herein shall prevent the Contractor from placing such temporary or permanent supports as he shall deem necessary,nor shall it be construed as relieving the Contractor from his full responsibility for the safety of the work,and for all damages to persons and property. H. Liner plate shall be place when the foundation is in a condition satisfactory to the Owner. I. Tunnel dimensions shall be minimum dimensions and subsequent backfill,concrete or grout fill,shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The liner plate shall be laid true to line and grade. J. Tolerance in line and grade shall be as specified in,"Construction by Jacking". K The void between the tunnel wall and the tunnel lining shall be backfilled with non-shrinking grout having a minimum compressive strength of 1000 psi at twenty-eight(28)days. L. No concrete or grout shall be placed around the pipe unless the sheeting,bottom,sides and roof of the tunnel are in a condition satisfactory to prevent displacement of the liner plate. M. All pipe damaged during construction operations shall be repaired or removed and replaced by the Contractor at his entire expense. 3.06 Microtunneling A. Microtunneling Equipment.In case of MTBM,use spoil transportation system which: 1. Balances soil and ground water pressures by use of slurry or earth pressure balance system; system shall be capable of adjustments required to maintain face stability for particular soil condition and shall monitor and continuously balance soil and ground water pressure to prevent loss of slurry or uncontrolled soil and ground water inflow,or,in case of slurry spoil transportation system: a. Provides pressure at excavation face by use of slurry pumps, pressure control valves, and flow meter. b. Includes slurry bypass unit in system to allow direction of flow to be changed and isolated, as necessary. c. Includes separation process. d. Design it to provide adequate separation of spoil from slurry so that slurry with sediment content within limits required for successful tunneling can be returned to cutting face for reuse. e. Appropriately contain spoil at site prior to disposal. TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 f. Uses type of separation process suited to size of tunnel being constructed,soil type being excavated, and work space available at each work area for operating plant. g. Allows composition of slurry to be monitored to maintain slurry weight and viscosity limits required. 2. In case of cased auger earth pressure balance system,system shall be capable of adjustments required to maintain face stability for particular soil condition to be encountered. Monitor and continuously balance soil and ground water pressure to prevent loss of soil or uncontrolled ground water inflow. a. In cased auger spoil transportation system, manage pressure at excavation face by controlling volume of spoil removal with respect to advance rate. b. Monitor speed of rotation of auger flight,and addition of water. 3. Remote Control System.Provide MTBM which includes remote control system with following features: a. Allows for operation of system without need for personnel to enter tunnel. b. Has display available to operator, at remote operation console, showing position of shield in relation to design reference together with other information such as face pressure, roll, pitch, steering attitude,valve positions,thrust force,and cutter head torque;rate of advance and installed length. C. Integrates system of excavation and removal of spoil and its simultaneous replacement by pipe. d. As each pipe section is jacked forward,control system shall synchronize all of operational functions of system. 4. Active Direction Control. a. Provide MTBM which includes active direction control system with following features: 1) Controls line and grade by guidance system that relates actual position of MTBM to design reference (e.g.,by laser beam transmitted from jacking shaft along pipe to target mounted in shield). 2) Provides active steering information which shall be monitored and transmitted to operating console. 3) Provides positioning and operation information to operator on control console. 5. Use generator which is suitably insulated for noise("hospital"type)in residential or commercial areas. B. Line and Grade 1. The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the line and grades. 2. Contractor shall record the exact position of the MTBM during the process. C. Monitoring 1. Instruments a. The Contractor shall install and maintain instrumentation system to monitor and detect movement of ground surface and adjacent structures. b. Instruments shall be installed in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Settlement or Upheaval a. The Contractor shall record location of settlement or upheaval to an accuracy of 0.01 feet for each monitoring point b. Points shall be along the centerline of the tunnel at a maximum of 100-foot intervals. c. Railroads 1) Monitor track sub base at centerline of each tract. d. Utilities and Pipelines 1) Monitor ground directly above and ten-feet (10') before and after utility or pipeline intersection. 3.07 Casing Joints A. Steel 1. Joints shall be welded sealed for the full circumference. 3.08 Cured-In-Place-Pipe(CIPP) A. Pre-Installation 1. General a. The Contractor will be solely responsible for complying with all safety regulations. TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. The Contractor will be responsible for providing all Traffic Control when required. 2. Control of Wastewater Flow a. The Contractor shall control the wastewater flow in accordance with Section 33 30 23.13 CONTROL OF WASTEWATER FLOWS. 3. Cleaning a. The Contractor shall clean the wastewater system in accordance with Section 33 30 13.13 WASTEWATER UTILITIES CLEANING. 4. Televised Inspection a. The Contractor shall inspect the condition of the pipe in accordance with Section 33 31 23.14 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING TELEVISED INSPECTION REPORT LOG. 5. Point Repairs and Line Obstructions a. The Contractor shall clear the line of obstructions that may impede or injure the CIPP. b. Point repairs shall be made when directed by the Owner in the event that the existing pipe is in an unsuitable condition to allow the CIPP to be constructed. 6. Service Connections a. The Contractor shall maintain continuous service without disruptions. 7. Public Notification a. The Contractor will be responsible for contacting each property owner connected to the wastewater line three(3) days prior to commencing work that affects the owner. 1) Written notice shall be delivered to each property owner describing the work, schedule, how it affects them,telephone number to Contractor to discuss any concerns or issues. b. The Contractor shall contact the property owner the day prior to performing the work to ensure the owner knows of the work. B. Installation 1. Wet-Out a. The Contractor shall identify the location where the tube will be impregnated ("wet-out")with resin using distribution rollers and vacuum to saturate the tube felt fiber thoroughly prior to installation. 1) A vacuum impregnation process shall be used. 2) To insure a thorough wet-out, the point of vacuum shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and per ASTM F1216. b. The Contractor shall allow the qualified factory field service engineer and Owner to inspect the materials and wet-out procedure at the designated location. c. A catalyst system or additive compatible with the resin and the tube shall be used. d. The amount of resin used for tube impregnation shall be sufficient to fill the volume of air voids in the tube with additional allowances for polymerization shrinkage and the loss of resin through cracks and irregularities in the original pipe wall. e. Handling of the resin-impregnated flexible tube to prevent resin setting until it is ready for insertion and during installation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Insertion a. The wet-out tube shall be inserted through an existing manhole or other approved access by means of an inversion or pull-in process and the application of a water column sufficient to fully extend it to the next designated manhole or termination point. b. The tune end shall initially be turned inside out and attached to a platform ring or standpipe. c. The inversion water column will be adjusted to be of sufficient height to cause the impregnated tube to invert from manhole to manhole and hold the tube tight against the existing pipe wall, to produce dimples at side connections,and flared ends at the manholes. d. If the pull-in method is used, the primary (impregnated) liner is towed into the host pipe through the existing manhole with a cable winch or approved other device. e. The primary liner shall be floated into place virtually eliminating stresses on the material. f. Proper lubrication may be needed for longer and thicker liners. g. This may extrude small amount of resin through the perforations of the outer coating of the primary liner. h. For the pull-in method,insertion of the new liner shall in no case exceed 800 linear feet. 3. Curing TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. After installation is complete, the Contractor shall cure the material in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. Temperature gauges shall be placed at the ends of the CIPP material to ensure that the temperature is consistent. c. Do not discharge water above 100 degrees Fahrenheit into the wastewater system. 4. Cool Down a. The Contractor shall cool the hardened CIPP to a temperature below 100 degrees Fahrenheit before relieving the water column. 1) Do not discharge water above 100 degrees Fahrenheit into the wastewater system. b. Care shall be taken in the release of the water column so that a vacuum will not be developed that could damage the CIPP. C. Warranty 1. The CIPP shall be continuous over the entire length of an inversion run and be free from visual defects. 2. It shall meet the leakage requirements of Section 33 31 13.13 PUBLIC WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING D. Sealing of Manholes 1. If the CIPP fails to make a tight seal at a manhole,the Contractor shall apply a seal at that point. 2. The seal shall be of a material compatible with the CIPP material. 3. Do not leave any angular gaps. 4. Seal the annular space with a one-half inch (1/2") diameter activated Oakum band soaked in chemical sealant. 5. Seal any annular spaces greater than one-half inch(1/2")with the manhole wall repair material. 6. Finish off the seal with a non-shrink all solids epoxy placed around the pipe opening from inside the manhole in a band at least four-inches(4")wide. 7. Complete the sealing procedure for each liner segment immediately after the liner is cured. E. Service Connections 1. After curing is complete the Contractor shall reopen the existing active service connections as designated by the Owner. 2. Reestablishing service connections shall be accomplished without excavation by means of robotic cutting devices with lights and cameras. a. The opening shall be the same size as the service connection with no inner lip. b. High pressure water is not allowed to be used to cut the CIPP. 3. The edges of the opening shall be sealed with a resin mixture compatible with the tube resin. 4. The Contractor shall have a minimum of two (2) cutting devices plus additional parts on-site prior to commencing insertion. F. Testing 1. Chemical Resistance a. The CIPP shall meet the chemical resistance requirements of ASTM F1216. b. The test specimens shall be capable of exposure for a minimum of one (1) month at a temperature of 73.4 F. c. During this period the CIPP test specimens should lose no more than twenty-percent(20%) of their initial flexural strength and flexural modulus when tested in accordance with ASTM F1216. 2. Leakage Testing a. It shall be in accordance with Section 33 3113.13 PUBLIC WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 3. Wall Thickness Test a. This thickness shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D 2122 4. Samples a. Per ASTM F1216, the preparation of two (2) CIPP samples is required for each insertion segment. 1) The sample shall be cut from a section of cured CIPP at an intermediate manhole or at the termination point that has been inverted or pull-in through a like diameter pipe which has been held in place by a suitable heat sink,such as sandbags. 2) The sample should be fabricated from material taken from the tube and the resin/catalyst TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 system used and cured in a clamped mold placed in the down tube when circulating heated water is used and in the silencer when steam is used. 3) The samples for each of these cases should be large enough to provide a minimum of three (3) specimens and a recommended five (5) specimens for flexural testing and also for tensile testing,if applicable. 4) The Short-term Flexural (Bending) Properties testing should be in accordance with Test Methods ASTM D 790 and shall have a minimum flexural modulus of 250 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 2500 psi. b. Post Inspection S. The Contractor shall video the line in accordance with 33 3123.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING TELEVISED INSPECTION. G. Patent 1. This process is patented and is to be installed by a licensed Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall warrant to the Owner that the methods,materials,and equipment used herein, are covered by the license and are furnished in accordance with the license. 3. The Contactor shall warrant and save harmless the Owner and all individuals and representatives against all claims for patent infringement and any loss thereof. 3.09 Pipebursting A. Delivery,Storage and Handling of Materials 1. The Contractor shall handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Pipe Jointing 1. Sections of the liner pipe shall be joined by butt-fusion method and performed in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations using approved equipment 2. The Contractor shall make arrangements to have a technical representative of the pipe manufacturer present for the start-up of the butt-fusion jointing and training of the Contractor's personnel, or arrangements shall be made for the pipe manufacturer's representative to remain on the job until all jointing has been completed. 3. When requested by the Owner,samples of butt-fusion joints shall be furnished by the Contractor for laboratory testing. 4. The test of such samples shall clearly demonstrate joint integrity,strength,etc. C. Pulling Pipe 1. New polyethylene pipe shall be pulled immediately behind the pipe bursting equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 2. The equipment shall be specifically designed and manufactured for the pipe insertion process. 3. The Contractor shall install all pulleys, rollers, bumpers, alignment control devices, and other equipment required to protect existing manholes and to protect the new pipe from damage during installation. 4. Lubrication may be used as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. S. Under no circumstances shall the pipe be stressed beyond fifty-percent(50%)of its tensile strength at yield. 6. Provide a suitable pull measuring device connected to the pulling system. 7. Upon commencement, insertion shall be continuous without interruption, unless approved by the Owner. 8. Terminal sections of pipe that are joined within the insertion pit shall be connected with a quarter-inch (1/4")thick neoprene gasket and a stainless steel band clamp having a minimum of four(4)bolt/nut down fixtures. 9. The butt gap between pipe ends shall not exceed half-inch(1/2"). 10. The installed pipe shall be allowed the manufacturer's recommended amount of time,but not less than twenty-four(24)hours,for relaxation prior to any reconnection of service lines,sealing of the annulus, or backfilling the insertion pit. 11. Sufficient excess length shall be allowed to provide for this occurrence. D. Service Connections 1. All service connections shall be identified,excavated,and disconnected prior to pipe bursting. 2. After the new main has been pulled into place,allowed to recover,and secured to the manhole walls, TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 each service shall be reconnected to the new main. 3. Shall be connected by the use of an approved pre-fabricated saddle. a. Saddle shall be equipped with a neoprene gasket installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the two-piece saddle is placed around the polyethylene pipe and pulled together with stainless steel bands. 4. Drill hole in main shall be flush with the inside diameter of the saddle. S. Continuous service shall be maintained,unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. E. Annulus Sealing 1. The relaxed pipe shall be cut four-inch(4")inside of manholes and any annular space sealed. 2. The annular space may be sealed with a mechanical device,chemical seal,or quick-setting concrete. a. The method chosen shall be approved by the Owner prior to construction. 3. The sealant shall form a smooth transition above the liner projection into the manhole. 4. The sealant shall be applied three-inches(K)beyond the annulus on the inside wall of the manhole. S. The complete joint shall be uniform and water-tight. F. Cleanup 1. The Contractor will be responsible for all cleanup and restoration of the existing surface improvements to a like or better condition as existed prior to construction. 2. All excess materials shall become the property of the Contractor whom is responsible for disposal in accordance with Local,State,and Federal regulations. G. Television Inspection 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 31 23.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING TELEVISED INSPECTION. 3.10 Excavation and Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10.00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Insertion Pits 1. The location and number of insertion pits shall be determined by the Contractor to maximize insertion lengths and keep the number of excavations to a minimum. 2. The insertion pit size shall be the minimum necessary to perform the insertion operations in a safe manner. 3. Locations of the pits shall be acceptable to the Owner. TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 07-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 O5 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the excavation and Backfill of water utilities, wastewater utilities,and storm drainage utilities,as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111.13 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 3123 16.13 TRENCHING C. 3124 13.10 EMBANKMENT D. 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION E. 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING F. 33 3113.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM C 150-Specification for Portland Cement B. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures C. ASTM D 698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12 400 ft-lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3)) D. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) E. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) F. Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations G. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 421,Hydraulic Cement Concrete I. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-4610,F1yAsh J. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-106-E 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Final Backfill-Material located from the top of the Initial Backfill to a specified height and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall B. Pipe Bedding-Material located from the top of the foundation to the bottom level line of the pipe and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. C. Initial Backfill- Material placed from the Pipe Bedding up to a determined level line above the top of pipe and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. D. Pipe Embedment-Backfill Material consisting of Pipe Bedding and Initial Backfill. E. Pipe Foundation-Material located at the bottom of the trench and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Class I Backfill Materials A. Material shall be well-graded gravels, sands, gravel-sand mixture, with all meet the following requirements: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM D2487 for:GW,SW. 2. Gradation a. GW 1) D60/D10-greater than four-percent(4%) 2) 1-1/2"(37.5 mm) Sieve-one-hundred percent 100%passing 3) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-less than 50%of coarse fraction passing 4) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than or equal to five-percent(5%)passing EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. SW 1) D60/Dlo-greater than six-percent(6%) 2) 1-1/2"(37.5 mm) Sieve-one-hundred percent 100%passing 3) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-more than 50%of coarse fraction passing 4) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than or equal to five-percent(5%)passing 3. Plasticity Index a. GW 1) Non-plastic b. SW 1) Non-plastic 2.02 Class II Backfill Materials A. Material shall meet the following requirements: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM D2487 for:GM,GP,SM,SP,SP-SM,SW-SM,GP-GM,GW-GM. 2. Gradation a. GP 1) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-minimum 30%passing 2) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than five-percent(5%)passing b. SP 1) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-minimum 30%passing 2) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than five-percent(5%)passing c. GP-GM,GW-GM,SP-SM,SW-SM 1) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-minimum 30%passing 2) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-between five-percent(5%)and twelve-percent(12%)passing 3. Plasticity Index a. GP 1) Non-plastic to 4 b. SP 1) Non-plastic to 4 c. GP-GM,GW-GM,SP-SM,SW-SM 1) Non-plastic to 4 2.03 Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material A. Material shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421,Aggregate Grade 4 or 5. 2.04 Crushed Stone Backfill Material A. Material shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421,Aggregate Grade 2,3,or 4. 2.05 Flowable Fill Backfill Material A. Cement 1. Shall be Cement Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150,Type I. B. Fly Ash 1. Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4610. C. Filler Aggregate 1. Shall consist of sand, stone screenings, other granular material that is compatible with the other components. 2. Shall be fine enough to stay in suspension to the extent required for proper flow without segregation and for minimal settlement. 3. Shall have a Plasticity Index(TxDOT Test Method Tex-106-E) less than 15 and shall conform to the following gradation: a. Percent passing Sieve No.200 shall be 0%-10% D. Mixing Water 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. E. Additives 1. Darafill®or approved other. F. Strength 1. Shall be 100-300 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days 2.06 Select Backfill Material A. Shall be native on-site material from excavation, imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 other suitable granular material free from vegetation,rocks,debris,and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches(2")meeting the following requirements: 1. Liquid limit of thirty-five(35)maximum, 2. Plasticity index range from eight(8)to twenty(20), 3. Moisture range from-1%to 3%. B. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL,MH,OH,CH,and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. 2.07 Sand Backfill Material A. Sand 1. Gradation shall be as follows: a. Percent passing #4 sieve-55- 100 b. Percent passing #10 sieve-40- 100 c. Percent passing #40 sieve-25- 100 d. Percent passing#200 sieve- 10- 20 e. Plasticity Index-Non-plastic to 4 2.08 Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material A. Shall be a mixture of cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of two (2) sacks of standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand. B. Sand 1. Gradation shall be as follows: a. Percent passing #4 sieve-55- 100 b. Percent passing #10 sieve-40- 100 c. Percent passing #40 sieve-25- 100 d. Percent passing#200 sieve- 10- 20 e. Plasticity Index-NP- 10 2.09 Native Backfill Material A. Suitable material chosen from on-site excavation or imported may be used. 1. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. B. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. C. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. D. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 2.10 Topsoil Backfill Material A. Suitable material chosen from on-site excavation or imported may be used. 1. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. B. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. C. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. D. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. E. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. 2.11 Other Backfill Materials A. Other material of comparable featured and equal quality may be substituted for the above items with approval of the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. All surplus materials shall become the Contractors and disposal shall be in accordance with local,state, and federal regulations and will be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. C. All damages by excavating,either to surface or subsurface structures,shall be repaired or replaced by the EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Constructor at his own cost and expense to the requirements of the damaged items owner. 3.02 Safety Requirements A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to adhere to all safety procedures and requirements of local,state, and federal regulations. B. If at any time a trench shall be required to perform the work then the requirements of Section 3123 16.13 TRENCHING shall be required. C. Any excavation that remains open after working hours shall be covered with a steel plate of sufficient thickness to support traffic. 3.03 Excavation A. General 1. Trenching a. Excavation shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides in accordance with Section 3123 16.13 TRENCHING. b. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks,driveways,power pole,drainage,streets,etc. c. The Contractor shall not have more the 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the Drawings and specification. 1) No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours, without prior authorization from the Owner. d. If,for whatever reason,the trench width at the top of pipe must exceed that width indicated in the bedding details, the Contractor shall modify bedding as required by the Owner to accommodate the additional load on the pipe. 1) Excavation width shall not exceed the right-of-way width,easement width,or as indicated on the Drawings or by Owner. e. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material develop or is encountered during the excavation,the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the Drawings. 1) If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, the Contractor, prior to additional excavation shall control it. 2) After stable conditions have been achieved,unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of: a) Two-feet(2')below the bottom of pipe for pipes two-feet(2') or more in height. b) To a depth equal to the height of pipe, twelve-inches (12") minimum, for pipe less than two-feet(2') in height. c) Such excavation shall be carried at least one-foot(1') beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. 3) All unstable soil removed shall be replaced with Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or approved suitable stable material,placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Owner,and each layer shall be wetted,if necessary,and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. 4) For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms,seals,sheathing,and bracing,any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. a) The limit of excavation may be modified to allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. 2. Trenchless a. Shall be done in accordance with Section 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION 3. For all utilities to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one-foot (1') above the top of the pipe or conduit in accordance with Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENT, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. B. Pipes 1. General a. The limit of excavation shall allow for all work to be performed in a safe manner,for placing and removing forms,installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. Trenches shall have a maximum width as required to one-foot(1') above the outside surface of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or by the Owner. 2. Vertical Side a. The limit shall not exceed three-feet (3') outside the Pipe Embedment on a vertical plane parallel to the Pipe Embedment except where specifically approved otherwise by the Owner. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, other improvements and utilities,etc. c. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all trench protection. d. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed,as the excavation is backfilled in a safe manner. 3. Sloping Sides a. In unimproved areas, where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation as long as it is completed in a safe manner in accordance with all Local,State,and Federal regulations. 1) Backfill material will be required to be in accordance with the backfill for the pipe installed. 4. Unauthorized Over Excavation a. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation,the Contractor at his expense shall bring the grade back to requirements by filling with Pipe Embedment Backfill material as required,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. C. Manholes and Inlets 1. General a. The limit of excavation shall allow for all work to be performed in a safe manner,for placing and removing forms,installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. 2. Vertical Side a. The limit shall not exceed three-feet(3') outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Owner. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, other improvements and utilities,etc. c. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all trench protection. d. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed,as the excavation is backfilled in a safe manner. 3. Sloping Sides a. In unimproved areas, where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation as long as it is completed in a safe manner in accordance with all Local,State,and Federal regulations. 1) Backfill material will be required to be in accordance with the backfill for the pipe installed. 4. Unauthorized Over Excavation a. Excavation for slabs,footings,etc.,that rest on earth,shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the Drawings. 1) In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation,the Contractor at his expense shall bring the slab,footing,etc.,to the required grade by filling with concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. D. Shaping of Trench Bottom 1. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. E. De-watering 1. The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams,bailing,pumping well pointing,or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. a. Removal of well-points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction,removal of forms,and inspection of exterior of formwork. 3. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. 4. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure,but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven (7) days after placing concrete. S. All de-watering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Owner. 6. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Owner before work on the structure is started. 7. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth,firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner,regardless of the soil conditions encountered. a. The Owner will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. F. Excavation in Streets 1. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified,and the restoration of the pavement riding surface shall be in accordance with Drawing detail,or as required by other applicable specifications. G. Removing Abandoned Structures 1. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of one foot(1')below the bottom of the trench. 2. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no Drawing provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility,such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one-foot(1')below the bottom of the trench. 3. In each instance,the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. 4. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned,these sewers shall be cut flush with sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. H. Protection of Utilities 1. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute,provide temporary detours,or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. 2. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. 3. If a utility is damaged it shall be restored promptly by the Contractor at his expense in accordance with the utility owners requirements. 4. The Contractor shall not hold the Owner liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. I. Excess Excavated Material 1. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed, by the Contractor,from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved,or incorporated into the project. 3.04 Water Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not enclosed in concrete valve boxes,laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 5) Care shall be taken to not damage the tracer wire or cause wire to come off of pipe. b. Pipes 6"to 14" 1) Material a) Shall be Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Eight-inches (8") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes 16"and Larger 1) Material a) Shall be Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Twelve-inches (12")below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Warning Tape a. Shall be placed as required in Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Pipe Embedment Material to the bottom of road subgrade material EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (1) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Pipe Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6") (1) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent(0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. S. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 6. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one(1)for any pipe section between main line valves and every one-hundred linear feet (100') of main pipe per two-feet (2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material,starting at two feet(2') above top of pipe,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Service Lines 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes up to 2" 1) Material a) Shall be Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of six-inches (6") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Six-inches (6") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes Larger Than 2" a) Shall be considered Main Piping and be in accordance with Section A of the Water Utilities Backfill in this specification. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Shall be Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Compaction Testing a. Are to be tested at a rate of one(1)for every six(6)services staggered or every three-hundred linear feet(300') of water service installed. 3.05 Wastewater Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes 6"to 14" 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material,Class II Backfill Material,Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes 16"and Larger 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material,Class II Backfill Material,Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Twelve-inches (12")below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Class I Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Class I1 Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 5) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Warning Tape a. Ductile Iron Pipe 1) Shall be placed as required in Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING b. Plastic Pipe 1) Shall be placed as required in Section 33 3113.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 4. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to three-feet (3') below the bottom of road subgrade material (1) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Three-feet (3') below the bottom of road base material to the bottom of the road subgrade material (1) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6") (1) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent(0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 S. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 6. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between manholes and every one-hundred linear feet(100')of main pipe per two-feet(2')vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of pipe,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Service Lines 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-13 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes 4"to 6" 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of six-inches (6") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Six-inches (6") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes Larger Than 6" a) Shall be considered Main Piping and be in accordance with Section A of the Wastewater Utilities Backfill in this specification. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Shall be Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-14 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. 2) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. S. Compaction Testing 6. Are to be tested at a rate of one (1) for every six (6) services staggered or every three-hundred linear feet(300') of wastewater service installed in accordance with ASTM D 2922. C. Manhole A. Schedule of Backfilling 1. Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B. Subgrade 1. Shall be undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2. Compact top six-inches (6")to 95%Standard Proctor Density. C. Bedding 1. General a. The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-15 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Material a. Crushed Stone Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Requirement a. Below Foundation (1) Eight-inches (8"),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) Foundation width plus two-feet(2') or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4. Placement a. Compact to form a stable surface to place foundation upon,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D. Initial Backfill 1. General a. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Flowable Fill Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Allow to cure prior to placement of Final Backfill 3. Requirement a. Above Bedding (1) Five-feet(5'),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) To extent of excavation. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. b. Crushed Stone Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E. Final Backfill 1. General a. All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. C. Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2. Material a. Paved Areas (1) Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Non-Paved Areas (1) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (a) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Top six-inches (6") (a) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Placement EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-16 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Select Backfill Material (1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Topsoil Backfill Material (1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. F. Compaction Testing 1. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet(2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of Initial Backfill,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2. Failure a. If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. 3.06 Storm Water Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner.. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. All Pipes 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material,Class II Backfill Material,Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-17 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Class I Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Class 11 Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to three-feet (Y) below the bottom of road subgrade material (1) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Three-feet (Y) below the bottom of road base material to the bottom of the road subgrade material (1) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6") EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-18 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (1) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent(0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-19 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 5. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between manholes, junction boxes,inlets,and every one-hundred linear feet(100') of main pipe per two-feet(2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of pipe,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Manhole A. Schedule of Backfilling 1. Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B. Subgrade 1. Shall be undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2. Compact top six-inches (6")to 95%Standard Proctor Density. C. Bedding 1. General a. The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Crushed Stone Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Requirement a. Below Foundation (1) Eight-inches (8"),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) Foundation width plus two-feet(2') or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Class I Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Class I1 Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Crushed Stone Backfill Material EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-20 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D. Initial Backfill 1. General a. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Flowable Fill Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Allow to cure prior to placement of Final Backfill 3. Requirement a. Above Bedding (1) Five-feet (5') or to the bottom of the bottom of road subgrade material,whichever is less,or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) To extent of excavation. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E. Final Backfill 1. General a. All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. C. Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2. Material a. Paved Areas (1) Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Non-Paved Areas (1) Top of Initial Backfill to six-inches (6")below finished grade (a) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Top six-inches (6") (a) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-21 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Native Backfill Material (1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%) Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Topsoil Backfill Material (1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet (2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material,starting at two feet (2') above top of Initial Backfill,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure (1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. C. Inlet A. Schedule of Backfilling 1. Backfilling shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B. Subgrade 1. Shall be undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2. Compact top six-inches (6")to 95%Standard Proctor Density. C. Bedding 1. General a. The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Crushed Stone Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Requirement a. Below Foundation (1) Eight-inches (8"),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) Foundation width plus two-feet(2') or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Crushed Stone Backfill Material EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-22 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D. Initial Backfill 1. General a. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Paved Side (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Requirement (a) Above Bedding i. Five-feet (5') or to the bottom of the bottom of road subgrade material, whichever is less,or as required by the Drawings or Owner (b) Width i. To extent of excavation. b. Non Paved Side (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Requirement (a) Above Bedding i. Five-feet (5') or eight-inches (8") below final grade, or as required by the Drawings or Owner (b) Width i. To extent of excavation. 3. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Shall be hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E. Final Backfill 1. General a. All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. C. Flooding or jetting of Backfill is not allowed. 2. Material a. Paved Side (1) Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Non-Paved Side (1) Top of Initial Backfill Material to six-inches(6")below finished grade (a) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Top six-inches (6") (a) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-23 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Native Backfill Material (1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%) Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Topsoil Backfill Material (1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. F. Compaction Testing 1. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet(2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of Initial Backfill,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2. Failure a. If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-24 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 O5 76 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of Wastewater Utility Manholes,Frames,and Covers as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 105-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings B. AASHTO M 306 C. ASTM A 27-Standard Specification for Steel Castings,Carbon,for General Application D. ASTM A 36-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel E. ASTM A 48-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings F. ASTM A 536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings G. ASTM C 581-Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service H. ASTM C 923-Standard Specification for Resilient manhole connectors 1. ASTM D 695-Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics J. ASTM D 790 - Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. K. ASTM D 2412-Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. L. ASTM D 2583-Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. M. ASTM D 2584-Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins N. ASTM D 3034-Type PSM Poly(Vinyl) Chloride) (PVC)sewer pipe and fittings 0. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals P. ASTM D 3753-Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Manholes Q. ASTM F 477-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe R. ASTM F 794-PVC Profile Wall Sewer Pipe (riser) S. Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.55 - Manholes and Related Structures T. Texas Accessibility Standards(TAS) U. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) V. American Welding Society 1.04 Submittals A. Submit manufacturer's data, details, and shop drawings for the following items showing compliance with specifications: 1. Manhole a. Design b. Fabrication c. Fiberglass components d. Installation instruction e. Pipe Connector f. Base g. Inflow Inhibitor 2. Grade Adjustment Rings 3. Frames and Covers 4. Concrete Coatings FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All products shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C,Rule 217.55-Manholes and Related Structures B. Refer to the Sanitary Sewer Standard Details within the Drawings for additional information regarding products. C. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. D. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Manholes A. Manholes shall be made monolithically from Fiberglass and shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D 3753 latest edition and the referenced design criteria as follows: 1. ASTM C 581-Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass- fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service 2. ASTM D 695-Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics 3. ASTM D 790 - Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. 4. ASTM C 923-Standard Specification for Resilient manhole connectors S. ASTM D 2412 - Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. 6. ASTM D 2583 - Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impressor. 7. ASTM D 2584-Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins 8. ASTM D 3034-Type PSM Poly(Vinyl) Chloride) (PVC)sewer pipe and fittings 9. ASTM F 794-PVC Profile Wall Sewer Pipe (riser) 10. The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be one-half inch(1/2"). 11. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be no less than forty-eight inches(48")or 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe,whichever is larger,or as noted on the Drawings. 12. The length of the manhole shall be in whole foot increments of±two inches(± 2") 13. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a minimum inside diameter of 31 7/8 inch inside diameter. 14. Shall be designed to withstand HS-20 loading in accordance with AASHTO M 306. 15. 16. Markings and Identifications a. Shall be placed on the inside and/or outside as required. b. Inside required Markings and Identifications shall be placed immediately below the upper factory bond joint or approximately one foot(1')below the corbel,whichever is less. 1) Manufacturers Name 2) Manufacturers Trademark 3) Manufacturers Serial Number 4) Manhole Length B. ASTM DesignationManhole Diameter 1. Shall be as noted on the Drawings a. In all cases shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30,Part 1,Chapter 217, Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 C. Manhole Pipe Seal Gasket 1. The gasket shall eliminate leaks around the pipe entering the manhole wall and shall permit pipe movement without loss of seal integrity and be in conformance with ASTM D 3212. 2. Material for elastomeric seal in push-on joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. 3. Material for rubber sleeve shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 443. 4. Manhole pipe connectors gasket shall be as noted on the Drawings or approved equal. D. Manhole Base 1. Concrete shall be Class Ain accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Caulk for seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete cast-in-place base shall be Epo-Flex epoxy (gun grade consistency) as manufactured by Dewey Supply of Corpus Christi,or approved equal. 3. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Base shall be in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 478 as shown on construction Drawings and detail drawings. 4. Reinforcing steel where used shall conform to requirements of Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. E. Inflow Inhibitors 1. Inflow inhibitors shall be installed in all manholes. 2. They shall be of 316 stainless steel with an equivalent thickness of not less than eighteen (18) gauge and load tested in excess of 3000 pounds. 3. The inhibitor shall rest on the lip of the seating surface of the manhole ring and shall not exceed a depth of six and one-half inches (6 1/2"). 4. The seating surface of the inhibitor shall have an attached gasket on the weight bearing side. S. The inhibitor shall have a gas relief valve made of Nitrite and shall operate at a 1 psi differential pressure. 6. The inhibitor shall be fitted with a handle of 3/16"plastic coated stainless steel cable attached to the insert body with a 64 316 stainless steel rivet. 7. The inhibitor shall be constructed of materials that withstand highly corrosive sewer gases. 2.03 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from 100%HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches(30"). 2.04 Frames and Covers A. General 1. Manhole frame&cover shall be designated for street application designed to meet AASHTO M306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. a. Shall be rated for traffic service withstanding an application of 40,000 pound proof load in accordance with AASHTO M 306. b. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements,Sidewalks,Driveways 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated meeting AASHTO M 306 c. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements,Sidewalks,Driveways within School Zones 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated and able to be bolted meeting AASHTO M 306 2. All products shall be domestically made in the United States of America. 3. Shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Drawings. a. Other patterns for frames,grates,and covers may be submitted for approval by the Owner 4. If cover is within the sidewalk or accessible pathway it shall meet the requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards(TAS) S. Shall be true to pattern,form,and dimensions. 6. Shall be free from cracks,sponginess,and blowholes. 7. Shall be machined to yield a fit which will not rattle with passing traffic load. 8. Each casting shall be identifiable and show,at a minimum,the following: a. Name of the producing foundry b. Country of manufacture c. ASTM material designation d. Recycle symbol e. Individual part number f. Cast or heat date B. Welded Steel Frames and Grates 1. Shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the Drawings and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. 2. Welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society 3. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36. C. Castings 1. Whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown in the Drawings and shall be clean substantial castings,free from burnt-on sand and shall be FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 reasonable smooth. a. Runners,risers,fins,and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. 2. Bearing surfaces between manhole frames and covers or grades and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the facilitate subsequent identification at installation. 3. Steel Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of specifications for"Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel Castings for General Application",ASTM A 27. b. Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. 4. Cast Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of"Gray Iron Castings",ASTM A 48,Class 30,and AASHTO M 105. S. Ductile Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of"Ductile Iron Castings",ASTM A 536. b. Grade 70-50-05 shall be used otherwise specified. D. Manufacturing Facilities 1. Manufacturing facilities shall be domestic in compliance with Local,State,and Federal workplace and environmental regulations. E. Bolts 1. Commercial grade 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or required by the Owner. 2.05 Concrete A. All concrete and accessories shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11- CONCRETE STRUCTURES and in accordance with this specification. B. All concrete and accessories shall be rated for use in high sulfur dioxide conditions. 2.06 Non-Shrink Grout A. Shall be prepackaged and meet the requirements of ASTM C1107,be flowable,Nonmetallic,Inorganic, Non-gas liberating, Cement based, have a compressive strength of 7000 psi, and requires only the addition of water. 2.07 Concrete Coatings A. Provide as indicated on the Drawings or approved equal. 2.08 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Manholes A. General 1. Work shall be completed and finished in a careful workmanlike manner,with special care being given to sealing joints around all pipes extending through walls of the manholes and at the frames and rings. 2. Refer to the Sanitary Sewer Standard Details within the Drawings for additional information regarding execution. 3. Installation Assist Marks a. Shall be vertical lines 90 degrees apart at the base of the manhole and at other locations to assist in construction. b. Can be applied by Manufacturer and/or by Contractor. c. Marks shall be in a color and visible so that the Contractor and Owner can easily determine the use and determine when requirements are met. FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 d. Required Marks 1) Continuous mark around manhole a) Minimum embedment into base b) Maximum embedment into base c) Minimum initial backfill height 2) Location of dowels (if required) 3) Location and size of pipe penetrations prior to cut. B. Excavation 1. Asper Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. C. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. For sanitary sewer application,pipe penetrations for pipe four-inch(4")through fifteen-inch(15") shall be made with appropriately sized core drill bits recommended by the Manufacturer. 2. Pipe penetrations other than described above and as authorized by the Owner shall be made as follows: a. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it,plus two-inches (2"),plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. b. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with masonry blade. c. Impact type tools shall not be used. 3. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12") between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. D. Pipe Penetrations 1. All pipe penetrations shall be in accordance with the Drawings. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the point that the pipe enters the manhole and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. F. Handling 1. Manholes shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the manhole or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks,debris,etc. G. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. H. Inverts 1. Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section for all pipes entering and exiting the manhole. 2. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. 3. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts in accordance with the Drawings. 1. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. c. All exposed concrete inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed concrete inside the manhole shall have a concrete coating as indicated on the Drawings applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. J. Backfill Material 1. Asper Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. K. Grade Adjustment Rings 1. A minimum of twelve-inches (12") of rings are allowed. 2. A maximum of eighteen-inches(18") of rings are allowed. L. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of frame and concrete. M. Manhole Leakage Testing 1. Leakage testing shall be performed on each manhole and separate and independent of the collection system pipes by isolation. 2. Hydrostatic Test a. Plug all pipes entering the manhole and fill the manhole completely with water. b. The minimum length of the test shall be one(1)hour. c. Maximum leakage shall be calculated to be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter of manhole depth per hour. 3. Vacuum Testing a. Plug all lift holes and exterior joints by approved methods. b. Plug all pipes entering the manhole. c. The test head shall be placed at the top of the manhole in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. d. A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole, the valve on the vacuum line of the test head closed,and the vacuum pump shut off. e. The time of the test will start once the vacuum pump is shut off. f. The manhole shall pass if the time for the vacuum reading to drop from ten (10) inches of mercury to nine (9) inches of mercury exceeds two (2) minutes. g. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made by an approved method and then be retested until a satisfactory test is obtained. 4. Testing and Certification a. Testing shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner or his representative. b. All manholes and structures shall be tested as finished and completed for final acceptance. c. ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. d. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable. 3.03 Frames and Covers A. Frames,grates,and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and shall be placed carefully to the lines or grades indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. C. Apply non-seize graphite or approved equal around all the frame, grate, and/or cover prior to installation. 3.04 Grade Adjustment of Existing Fiberglass Manholes A. Adjustment by Rings 1. The adjustment of the frame and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. 2. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between each ring in a manner to form a continuous seal between each ring. 3. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between the ring and manhole to form a continuous seal. FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 B. Adjustment by Lowering Top of Manhole 1. If the frame and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of grade adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole,this work shall be done as described below: a. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least six inches (6")below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. c. Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. d. Mark,cut and remove the required section of the manhole. 1) Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. e. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. f. Replace and align the top. g. Apply new Fiberglass in accordance with Manhole Manufacturer recommendations and the recommendations of the repair kit. 1) Repair kit shall be of type as required by Manhole Manufacturer. h. After curing,backfill in accordance with the backfill requirements for Manholes,the Drawings, and/or as directed by the Owner. C. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of frame and concrete. 3.05 Grade Adjustment of Existing Brick Manholes A. Shall be in accordance with the Drawings. FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 33 05 76-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe and fittings as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ANSI A 21.4(AWWA C104) -Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water B. ANSI A 21.5 (AWWA C105) -Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems C. ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) -Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 inch through 48 inch D. ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C111) -Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings E. ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C115) - Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray Iron Threaded Flanges F. ANSI A21.16 (AWWA C 116) - Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey iron Fittings for Water Supply Service G. ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C150) -Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe H. ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151) -Ductile Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast,for Water and Other Liquids I. ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153) -Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service J. ASME B 16.1-Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings K. ASTM A 36-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel L. ASTM A 536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings M. ASTM F 477-Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe N. ASTM D 1599-Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing,and Fittings 0. ASTM F 1674-Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe P. ASTM D 1784-Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Compounds and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride(CPVC) Compounds Q. ASTM D 2122-Standard Method of Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings R. ASTM 2241-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series) S. ASTM D 3139-Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals T. AWWA C 900-AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings,4 Inch Through 12 Inch,for Water Transmission and Distribution U. AWWA C 905-AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Water Transmission Pipe Diameters 14 inch through 36 inch V. AWWA M 23-PVC Pipe Design and Installation W. AWWA C 600-Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances X. NSF/ANSI Standard 61-Drinking Water System Components Y. American Public Works Association (APWA) Z. Texas Administrative Code-30 TAC§217.53(d) AA. Texas Administrative Code-30 TAC§290.44(e) BB. Standard Water Details (as applicable) 1.04 Submittals A. Pipe 1. Submit manufacturer's certifications that the pipe meets the provisions of this section and comply with the references. B. Fittings 1. Submit manufacturer's certifications that the fittings meet the provisions of this section and comply with the references. C. Gaskets 1. An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present shall be supplied. WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1.05 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers B. ASTM-American Society of Testing and Materials C. ANSI-American National Standards Institute D. AWWA-American Water Works Association E. Dimension Ratio (DR)-the ratio of the pipe outside diameter to the minimum wall thickness. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. B. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. C. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Plastic Pipe A. General 1. Identification markings a. Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA. b. Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet(5') on the pipe. c. The minimum markings are as follows: 1) Nominal Size and OD base 2) PVC 3) Dimension Ratio (DR#) 4) AWWA Pressure Rating(PR#) 5) AWWA Designation Number(AWWA C#) 6) Manufacturer's name and trademark 7) Manufacturer's production code, including day,month,year,shift, Plant,and extruder of manufacture. 2. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of twenty-feet (20') (plus or minus one-inch (1")),unless otherwise noted. 3. Certification a. Pipe 1) The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. b. Gaskets 1) The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. c. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 4. Pipe shall be integrally blue in color. B. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 1. General a. Specification covers six-inch(6")through twelve-inch(12") diameter. 2. Material a. Shall be made of Class 1245A or Class 1245B compounds,as defined in ASTM D 1784 with an established Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB)of 4,000 psi. 3. Dimension a. Shall be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. b. Dimensions and tolerances for each nominal pipe sizes shall be in accordance with AWWA C900. 4. Joint a. Pipe shall have an integral bell formed on the pipe end and be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall in accordance with ASTM D 3139. b. The use of solvent weld pipe is not allowed. WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 c. Joint restraints shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer or Owner. 5. Gasket a. An elastomeric gasket shall be manufactured with a retainer ring,which"locks"the gasket into the integral bell groove and shall be installed at the point of manufacturer. b. Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F 477. 6. Pipe Pressure Class a. Shall be Class 150 (DR 18)with the following requirements: 1) Sustained pressure requirement of 500 psi in accordance with ASTM D 2241, 2) Minimum burst pressure of 755 psi in accordance with ASTM D 1599. 7. Dimension Ratio a. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings pipe shall have a dimension ratio of 18(DR 18)and in accordance with AWWA C 900. 8. Cause for Rejection a. Pipe does not meet the specification, b. Scratched pipe, c. Evidence of ultraviolet radiation"sunburn"due to extended unprotected storage conditions, d. Damaged pipe,or e. Damaged gasket C. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 1. General a. Specification covers sixteen-inch(16")through twenty-four inch(24") diameter. 2. Material a. Shall be made of Class 1245A or Class 1245B compounds,as defined in ASTM D 1784 with an established Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB)of 4,000 psi. 3. Dimension a. Be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. b. Dimensions and tolerances for each nominal pipe sizes shall be in accordance with AWWA C 905. 4. Joint a. Pipe shall have an integral bell formed on the pipe end and be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall in accordance with ASTM D 3139. b. The use of solvent weld pipe is not allowed. c. Joint restraints shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer or Owner. S. Gasket a. An elastomeric gasket shall be manufactured with a retainer ring,which"locks"the gasket into the integral bell groove and shall be installed at the point of manufacturer. b. Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F 477. 6. Pipe Pressure Class a. Shall be Class 165 (DR25)with the following requirements: 1) Sustained pressure requirement of 500 psi in accordance with ASTM D 2241, 2) Minimum burst pressure of 755 psi in accordance with ASTM D 1599. 7. Dimension Ratio a. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings pipe shall have a dimension ratio(DR)of 25(DR25) and in accordance with AWWA C 905. 8. Cause for Rejection a. Pipe does not meet the specification, b. Scratched pipe, c. Evidence of ultraviolet radiation"sunburn"due to extended unprotected storage conditions, d. Damaged pipe,or e. Damaged gasket 2.03 Ductile Iron Pipe A. General 1. Shall conform to ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C115), ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C150), and ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C 151). 2. Identification Markings WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA. b. Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet(5') on the pipe. 1) The minimum markings are as follows: a) Nominal Size and OD base b) Wall Thickness c) AWWA Pressure Class d) AWWA Designation Number(AWWA C#) e) Manufacturer's name and trademark f) Manufacturer's production code,including day,month,year,shift,plant. c. The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readily identified in the field. 3. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths plus or minus one-inch (1") unless otherwise noted. 4. Certification a. A certification shall accompany each order furnished to job site. b. The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. S. Pressure class for ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of Table 1: Table 1 Pressure Class for Ductile Iron Pipe Pressure Wall Range of Maximum Allowable Diameter Class Thickness Depth Cover(A-B)l (inches) (psi) (inches) (feet) 6 350 0.25 30-65 8 350 0.25 20-50 12 350 0.28 15-44 16 300 0.32 13-39 24 250 0.37 11-29 i Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A=Groundwater,unstable bottom,or quick condition B=Ideal trench conditions,and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90%Standard Proctor. B. Coatings 1. Interior a. Shall be either: 1) Lined with Cement mortar with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104). 2) Lined with Fusion Bonded Epoxy in accordance with ANSI A21.16 (AWWA C 116). b. Shall be free of voids and holidays. 2. Exterior a. Shall have a coating of coal tar epoxy of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151). 2.04 Fittings A. General 1. Shall be ductile iron and in accordance with ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110)or ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153). WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Shall be same size as pipe. 3. Shall have a pressure rating of: a. 250 psi for sizes through twelve-inch (12"),unless shown differently on Drawings, b. 150 psi for sixteen-inch (16") and twenty-four inch (24"), unless shown differently on Drawings. B. Coatings 1. Interior a. Shall be either: 1) Lined with Cement mortar with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A 21.4(AWWA C104), or 2) Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated in accordance with ANSI A21.16 (AWWA C 116). 2. Exterior a. Shall have a coating of coal tar epoxy of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151). C. Reducers 1. Are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting, 2. Reducing bushings are prohibited, 3. Make reductions in pipe size by reducing fittings. D. Certification 1. A certification shall accompany each order furnished to job site. 2. The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. 3. A copy of a lab analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. 2.05 Joining A. Pipe 1. Shall be tighten on or push on type. B. Fittings 1. Shall be mechanical joints,unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Push on Joints 1. Push on joints shall conform to ANSI A 21.11.Push on joints shall be complete with lubricant and gasket material. Gasket material shall be synthetic rubber, odor free, and containing no natural rubber. D. Mechanical Joints 1. Shall conform to ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C111) and/or ANSI A 21.53 (C153). 2. Shall be furnished complete with joint material,Cor-ten nuts,Cor-ten bolts,glands and gaskets. E. Restrained Joints 1. When indicated on the Drawings or required by manufacturer of pipe, restrained joints for pipe and fittings shall be mechanical joint push on type with retainer gland with a minimum of 250 psi rated working pressure,manufactured from high strength ductile iron,and be in accordance with ASTM A 536. F. Gaskets 1. Shall be of synthetic rubber. 2. An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present shall be supplied. 2.06 Polyethylene Wrapping A. The polyethylene material shall: 1. Have a minimum thickness of 8 mils 2. May be either clear or black. 2.07 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2.08 Warning Tape A. The tape shall be: 1. APWA compliant color coding WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Blue 2. Shall be heavy duty polyethylene 3. Minimum three-inches (Y)wide 4. 4 Mil thickness S. Be continuously repeated in one and one-half inch(1-1/2")letters marked with a. "CAUTION BURIED WATER LINE BELOW" 2.09 Tracer Wire A. Wire shall be of solid core 10 gauge insulated B. Shall be Blue insulation PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Handling A. General 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the handling and safe storage of all materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the specifications. 2. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected. a. Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work by the end of the work day. 3. Care shall be taken not to scratch pipe and fittings. a. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of pipe or fitting. B. Unloading 1. Materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery and hauled to the site by the Contractor. 2. Materials maybe unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the project within ten (10) days. C. Storing Materials 1. Materials shall be stored on platforms and allows the material to not touch the ground or vegetation and protects it from damage,and blowing soil and debris. 2. The interior of materials shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. 3. Materials shall be stored as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Owner. 4. Materials shall not be placed on private property,unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor. 5. Materials shall not be placed within ten-feet(10') of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Owner. a. If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public. D. Distribution of Materials 1. Distribution of materials at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated into the work within ten(10)days. 2. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. 3. Materials shall not be placed on private property,unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor. 4. Materials shall not be placed within five-feet (T) of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Owner. a. If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public. 3.03 Excavation A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3.04 Placing Pipe and Accessories in Trench A. General 1. Shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C 600 and the specifications. 2. The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe centerline with the required clearances below the pipe bottom and the required clearance from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of the bell hole as per 33 05 10.00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES and manufacturer recommendations. 3. Proper implements,tools and facilities satisfactory to the Owner shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. 4. Pipe identification markings shall be located on the top of the pipe when pipe is in the final position in the trench. 5. All pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick,ropes,or other suitable equipment,in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and accessories. 6. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. B. Inspection of Pipe and Accessories 1. The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench. 2. Any defective,damaged,or unsound pipe shall be replaced. C. Clean Pipe 1. All foreign matter,or dirt,shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into the trench. 2. Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. D. Tracer Wire 1. Tracer wire shall be taped directly to the pipe at a minimum of ten-inch(10")increments. 2. Wire shall be continuous along the top of the pipe with no splices allowed. 3. Wire shall come up to the top of valve extensions and fire hydrant stems,as directed by the Owner. 3.05 Alignment and Grade A. General 1. All pipes and fittings shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. 2. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported,relocated,removed,or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense,in cooperation with the Owners of such utility structures. 3. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. B. Utility Separation Distances 1. General a. Separation is to be measured from the outside surface of each respective piece. 2. General utilities a. Parallel - vertical and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2'), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. b. Crossing 1) Separation of six-inches (6") to two-feet (2') - cement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yard of sand) shall be placed between and two-feet(2') beyond each utility,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. 2) Separation of more than two-feet(2') -backfill shall be as Drawings indicate or equal to or better than existing, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. 3. Wastewater utilities a. General 1) In all cases the water utility shall be above the wastewater utility 2) Waterline pipe joint(18'+) is to be centered on the crossing b. Separation nine-feet(9') or more in all directions 1) In all cases the water line is to be located above the wastewater utility and installed as indicated on the Drawings and by manufacturer recommendations. c. Separation nine-feet(9') or less in any direction WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1) New wastewater utility a) The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC §290.44(e). (1) Parallel-vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet(2') and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4'), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. (2) Crossing - vertical separation shall be a minimum of one-foot (1') between outside diameters and have cement stabilized sand (10%cement per cubic yard of sand)placed between and five-feet(5')beyond utility and the sewage line must be below the water utility,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. 2) Existing wastewater utility a) If the wastewater utility line is leaking the line must be replaced nine-feet(9')in each direction of the crossing,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. b) The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC §290.44(e). (1) Parallel-vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet(2') and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4'), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. (2) Crossing - vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and have cement stabilized sand(10%cement per cubic yard of sand)placed between and five-feet(5')beyond,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. 4. Utilities conveying hazardous materials (oil,etc.) a. Contact Owner for requirements. C. Deviation from Drawings 1. No deviation from the line and grade shown on Drawings maybe made without the consent of the Owner. D. Depth of Cover 1. Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanent improvement,or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel. 2. Under Paved Area a. Lines less than twelve-inch(12") 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six inches (36"). 2) The maximum depth of cover shall be forty-eight inches (48"). 3) When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48") to avoid obstruction the use of bends may be required. 4) The top of pipe shall be a minimum of twelve-inches (12")below subgrade at all points. b. Lines twelve-inch (12") and greater 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight- inches (48"). 2) When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48") to avoid obstruction the use of bends may be required. 3) Be a minimum of twelve-inches (12")below subgrade at all points. 3. Under Non-Paved Area a. Lines less than twelve-inch(12") 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six- inches (36"). 2) The maximum depth of cover shall be forty-eight inches (48"). 3) When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48") to avoid obstruction the use of bends may be required. 4) Lines under Creeks and Drainage Channels shall be placed at a minimum of thirty-six inches (36")below the anticipated depth. WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. Lines twelve-inch (12") and greater 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight inches (48"). 2) When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48") to avoid obstruction the use of bends may be required. 3) Lines under Creeks and Drainage Channels shall be placed at a minimum of forty-eight inches (48")below the anticipated depth. 4. Deviations from the minimum depth or maximum depth shall be promptly marked on the field Drawings. 3.06 Joining Pipes A. All pipes shall be joined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. B. When mechanical joints or restrained joints are to be constructed they are to be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Pipe deflection shall not exceed seventy-five percent (75%) of the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. 3.07 Polyethylene Wrapping A. All buried ductile iron pipe and fittings,valves,except pipe or valves which are laid in encasement pipe, in concrete valve boxes, or above ground, shall be wrapped in two (2) plys of polyethylene in accordance with ANSI A 21.5 (AWWA C105). B. The wrapping shall be lapped in such manner that all surfaces of pipe valves and fittings, including joints,shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. C. Polyethylene shall be lapped a minimum of eighteen-inches (18") and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap. D. The wrapping shall be lapped in such a manner that all surfaces of the pipe shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. E. The polyethylene shall be secured in place with poly vinyl tape and/or twine at not more than six-foot (6') intervals. F. Damage to the polyethylene wrapping shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Owner,so as to form the best protection to the pipes. 3.08 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. B. The backfill shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shall be compacted under, around the sides, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to a minimum and as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Hydrostatic Testing and Sterilization of Water System A. Products 1. General a. All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. b. Pre-Approved materials and equipment can be found within the City of Corpus Christi Product List-Water Department. 1) Use of material and equipment from the list does not relieve the Contractor from meeting the requirements of this specification. c. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. d. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Test Riser Assembly a. Test Riser Assembly for two-inch(2")water line shall consist of(in order): 1) 2" Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12" minimum to 36"maximum above grade 2) 2"Brass Gate Valve 3) 2"Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow 4) 2"x 12"Brass Nipple b. Test Riser Assembly for four-inch(4")and up waterline shall consist of(in order): WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1) M.J.Cap,ring,gasket,and hardware with a drilled and tapped 2"female iron pipe thread 2) 2"Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow 3) 2"x 12"Brass Nipple 4) 2"Brass Straight Coupling 5) 2" Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12" minimum to 36"maximum above grade 6) 2"Brass Gate Valve 7) 2"Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow 8) 2"x 12"Brass Nipple 3. Water a. Water for filling the new waterline and performing all tests shall be furnished by the Contractor from the City potable water system through a standard water construction meter connection. 4. Standard Water Construction Meter and Gauge a. Will be supplied by the City after the Contractor has paid all applicable fees for the water construction meter. S. Test Pump and Gauge a. The test pump,gauge, and applicable hardware at connection points shall be furnished by the Contractor b. The Gauge shall be protected against extreme pressures by the use of a one-inch(1")safety relief valve set at ten(10)psi above the test pressure. 6. Calcium Hypochlorite a. Shall be furnished and handled in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and local, state,and federal regulations. B. Execution 1. General a. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 2. Riser Assembly a. The Contractor shall install riser assemblies on each end of water lines to be tested. 1) Note that this includes all two-inch(2")service connections. b. The assembly shall be wrapped in polyethylene,and concrete thrust blocking shall be applied at the base. c. After the line is tested and ready for connection to the existing water system,the Contractor shall remove the test riser assembly as listed below: 1) For two-inch(2")waterline a) Removal (1) 2"Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12"minimum to 36"maximum above grade (2) 2"Brass Gate Valve (3) 2"Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow (4) 2"x 12"Brass Nipple b) Install (1) 2"Brass Plug 2) For four-inch(4")and up water line a) Removal (1) 2"Brass Straight Coupling (2) 2"Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12"minimum to 36"maximum above grade (3) 2"Brass Gate Valve (4) 2"Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow (5) 2"x 12"Brass Nipple b) Install (1) 2"Brass Cap 3) The removed test riser assembly shall remain the property of the Contractor. 3. Test Pump and Gauge WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-10 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Connection points shall be approved by the Water Superintendent or designated agent. b. Installation shall be approved by the Water Superintendent or designated agent. c. Gauge shall be directly connected to the pipe being tested by the use of copper tubing or an approved reinforced hose. 4. Hydrostatic Testing a. General 1) Tests shall be made by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner only after completion of backfill as specified in Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 2) Testing shall be completed,and all work shall pass the required testing prior to placement of pavement. a) Contractor may proceed with placement of pavement and will incur all costs associated with the removal and replacement of pavement if utility fails testing and needs to be replaced. 3) Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation,shall be applied. 4) During the filling of the pipe,and before applying the specified test pressure,all air shall be expelled from the pipeline. 5) During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be carefully examined. a) If found to be leaking,they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. b) If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material,the defective material shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material. b. Testing 1) All pipes shall be subjected to two (2)hydrostatic tests. a) The first hydrostatic test shall be a two (2)hour test at a pressure of 150 P.S.I. (1) Ductile Iron Pipe (a) The maximum allowable leakage shall be calculated by the equation as follows: L=S(DvP)/ 133,200 L=Maximum Allowable Leakage(Gal./Hr.) Or S=Length of Pipe Tested(feet) L=N(D,/P)/7,400 N=Number of Joints in Tested Line(Pipe&Fittings) D=Nominal Diameter of Pipe(In.) P=Average Test Pressure(P.S.I.) (2) Plastic Pipe (PVC) (a) The maximum allowable leakage shall be calculated by the equation as follows: L=N(D✓P)/7,400 L=Maximum Allowable Leakage(Gal./Hr.) N=Number of Joints in Tested Line(Pipe&Fittings) D=Nominal Diameter of Pipe(In.) P=Average Test Pressure(P.S.I.) b) The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressure for waterlines. (1) The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of the first hydrostatic test. (2) The maximum allowable leakage shall be zero (0). 2) If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements,the Contractor shall make the required repairs to the system and the system shall be retested. 3) This procedure shall be repeated until the system complies with leakage requirements. 5. Sterilization a. General 1) Where soil or other substances have come in contact with the water surfaces of the pipe and accessories, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with a two-percent (2%) solution of calcium hypochlorite. b. Test WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-11 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1) After passing the hydrostatic test, the new line shall be slowly filled with a solution of water and a concentrated calcium hypochlorite solution, and allowed to stand for 48 hours. 2) After sterilization period is completed,lines shall be flushed by the Contractor under the direct supervision of a representative of the City Water Department a) The calcium hypochlorite water shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with TCEQ regulations. 3) After flushing of the new main, the Contractor will be required to obtain a sample and perform all required City and Texas State Health Department Purification Standards tests. a) After a 24 hour incubation period the results of the bacteriological test shall be obtained. b) If the sample does not pass Texas State Health Department purification standards,the procedure shall be repeated. (1) Two (2) series of test failures shall require the Contractor to "pig" the system before any more bacteriological samples can be collected. 4) The entire procedure shall be coordinated under the supervision of the Water Superintendent or designated agent and Owner. 5) During sterilization process, valves shall be operated only under the supervision of the Water Superintendent or designated agent and Owner. c. Passing Test 1) Remove test riser assembly. 2) Complete tie-in of new waterline to existing water system. a) Contact Water Superintendent or designated agent and Owner on date and time of final tie-in a minimum of 24 hours prior to. WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 14 13-12 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 14 19 TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of Tapping Sleeves and Valves,Gate Valves,and Fire hydrants as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES C. 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Water Works Association B. ANSI B 16-Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings C. ANSI/AWWA C502-Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants D. ANSI/AWWA C550-Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants E. ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C111) -Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings F. AWWA C 509-Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service G. NSF/ANSI Standard 61-Drinking Water System Components H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 246-Standard for Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 262-Standard for Safety for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service J. Factory Mutual(FM) 1510-Fire Hydrants(Dry Barrel Type) K. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(TMUTCD) L. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 672"Raised Pavement Markers" M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 678"Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings" N. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4100,Jiggle Bar Tiles 0. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4200, Raise Markers(Reflectorized) P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4300,Traffic Buttons Q. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-6100,Epoxies and Adhesives R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6130, Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers S. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-828-13 T. Standard details (as applicable) 1.04 Submittals A. The Contractor shall submit,for approval,Certified Drawings of each size and type of valve sixteen-inch (16") and larger showing principal dimensions, construction details, and materials used indicating compliance with the specification. B. Information regarding products indicating compliance with this specification. C. All required certifications 1.05 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Fire Hydrant - includes all items required for the installation, including all piping, fittings, valves, hydrant,and accessories as noted. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. B. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. C. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Tapping Sleeve A. Tapping sleeves shall have a Class 125 ANSI B 16.1 outlet flange of stainless steel. 1. Sleeves shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel with a compression gasket capable of providing full support of the tapped pipe. 2. Tapping sleeves shall be sized for the type and size of pipe to be tapped. 3. It should be understood that existing pipes to be tapped might not be of the type of material and/or size that is shown on the Drawings. a. The proper size and type of tapping sleeve shall be provided and installed regardless of what is encountered. 2.03 Tapping Valve A. Tapping Valves shall conform to AWWA Standards and shall conform to the sections related to Gate Valves set forth in this specification. B. Lugs,bolts,washers,and nuts shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel. C. Gasket materials shall be of material suitable for potable water systems. 2.04 Gate Valve A. Shall be domestically made and conform to AWWA Standard C 509 except for changes or additions as follows: 1. The gate valves shall be: a. Have non-rising stems. 2. Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. a. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for bell ends and flanges. 3. Valves eighteen-inch(18") and larger shall be furnished for horizontal installation. 4. Stem seals shall be: a. 0-ring type on valves through twelve-inch(12"). b. Sixteen-inch(16")and larger maybe equipped with stuffing boxes. S. Valves shall open left(counter clockwise). 6. Valves over eighteen-inch(18") shall have the main valve stem furnished with a combination hand wheel and operating nut. 7. Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one(1)end mechanical joint 8. The minimum number of turns to open as applied to the operating nut for valves through twelve- inch (12") shall be as set out in Table 3 (AWWA C500) and for valves sixteen-inch (16") shall be 96 turns to open. 9. All valves shall be equipped with bronze hooks or wedge pins. 10. All valves eighteen-inch(18") in diameter and above shall be equipped with bevel gears. 11. All gears shall be in oil filled extended type gear cases. 12. No position indicator will be required. 2.05 Cast Iron Valve Boxes for Gate Valves A. Cast iron valve boxes shall be provided over all operating nuts of gate valves twelve-inch (12") and smaller. B. The word"WATER"shall be cast in the top cover. C. The boots shall be hemispherical in shape and shall fit the particular valve size. D. The boxes and lids shall be given a coat of hot tar dip. E. Valve boxes shall be hemispherical in shape and shall measure ten-inch(10")at the bottom diameter. F. The valve box shall have one-inch (1") wide by two-inch (2") thick rim around the middle four-inches (4")from the top. G. It shall have a six-inch (6") inside diameter bell type top extension with a seven-inch (7)by seven and one-eighth inch(7-1/8")tapered bell of one-inch(1")depth. H. The vertical distance from the bottom of the extension to the top of the bell shall be eleven-inches(11"). TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 I. The casting shall be free of defects with all mold marks and defects ground off. 1. The valve box shall have one(1) coat of hot tar dip. K. The extension pipe of the valve box shall be eight-inch(8")PVC(SDR18 or better). 2.06 Hydrant A. The hydrant shall be in accordance with UL 246, UL 262, FM1510, and conform to ANSI/AWWA C502 standard specifications for hydrant for ordinary water works service,except for changes,additions and supplementary details specifically outlined herein: 1. Hydrant shall be of the traffic model type equipped with a safety flange or collar on both the hydrant barrel and stem. a. Breakable Collars,Barrel and Stem 1) Hydrants shall be equipped with a breakable coupling on both the barrel section and the stem. 2) The couplings shall be so designed that in case of traffic collision the barrel and stem collar will break before any other part of the hydrant breaks. 3) Weakened stainless steel bolts that are used in the breakable barrel couplings will not be acceptable. 4) Breakable couplings shall be located at two-inches(2")above back of curb grade. a) If hydrant is placed where curbing is not present then the breakable couplings shall be at least two-inches(2")and less than six-inches(6")above the finished grade. 2. Size of Hydrant a. The main valve opening shall not be less than five and one-quarter inch(5-1/4")inside diameter. 3. Type of Shutoff a. Be of the compression type only. 4. Inlet Connection a. Be AWWA C111 mechanical joint for six-inch(6"),Class 150 ductile iron pipe. b. A complete set of joint material shall be furnished with each hydrant S. Bury Length a. Be furnished in the bury length as indicated on Drawings. b. Minimum burial length shall be three-feet(3') 6. Nozzles a. Hose 1) Shall have two(2)nozzles 2) Diameter a) Two and one-half inch(2 1/2")nominal inside diameter 3) Threads a) Have two and one-half inch (2-1/2") National Standard thread (7-1/2" threads per inch). 4) Nozzle Cap Gaskets a) Required 5) Nozzle Chain a) Not required b. Pumper Nozzle 1) Shall have one(1)nozzle 2) Diameter(Nominal Inside) a) Four inch(4")nominal inside diameter 3) Threads a) Have six(6)threads per inch with an outside diameter of 4.658 inches,pitch diameter of 4.543 inches,and a root diameter of 4.406 inches. 4) Nozzle Cap Gaskets a) Required 5) Nozzle Chain a) Not required 7. Harnessing Lugs a. None required 8. Valve Seat Ring TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Shall not be made an integral part of the shoe. b. Be bronze and shall thread into a bronze drain ring. 9. Drain Openings a. Required b. Tapping of the drain opening for pipe threads is not required. 10. Drain Valve Mechanism a. Drain valves operating through springs or gravity are not acceptable. 11. Direction to Open a. The hydrants shall open left(counter clockwise). 12. Color of Finish Above Ground Line a. That portion of the hydrant above the ground line shall be painted chrome yellow. 13. Shape and Size of Operating and Cap Nuts a. The operating and cap nuts shall be tapered pentagon one and one-fourth inch(1-1/4")point to face at base and one and one-eight inch(1-1/8")point to face at top of nut. 14. Valve Facing a. The main valve facing of the hydrant shall be rubber with 90+Durometer hardness. b. When the main valve lower washer and stem nut are not an integral casting then the bottom stem threads shall be protected with a bronze cap nut and a bronze lock nut. 15. Barrel Sections a. The hydrant shall be made in two(2)or more barrel sections with flanges connecting the barrel to the elbow and to the packing plate. b. 316 Stainless steel bolts and nuts are to be used to connect the sections together. 16. Hydrant Adjustment a. The hydrant shall be designed as to permit its extension without excavating after the hydrant is completely installed. 17. Operating Stem a. Stems that have operating threads located in the waterway shall be made of manganese bronze, everdure,or other high quality non-corrodible metal. b. Stems that do not have operating threads located in the waterway must be sealed by a packing gland or"0"ring seal located between the stem threads and waterway. c. Iron or steel stems shall be constructed with a bronze sleeve extending through the packing or "0"ring seal area. 1) The sleeve shall be of sufficient length to be in the packing gland"0"ring seal in both open and closed positions of the main valve. 2) The sleeve shall be secured to the steel stem so as to prevent water leakage between the two when subjected to 300 pounds hydrostatic test pressure. d. Operating Stem Nut 1) The operating stem nut shall be designed to prevent seepage or rain, sleet and the accumulation of dust between the operating nut and the hydrant top. 2) Be made of bronze. e. Packing Gland or"0"Ring Seal 1) Hydrant having the threaded part of the stem at the hydrant top shall be equipped with a packing gland or an"0"ring seal immediately below the threaded section of the stem. 18. Interior Coating a. Shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C550 NSF 61 fusion bonded epoxy coating. B. Certification 1. The Contractor is to furnish to the Owner two (2) certified sets of prints showing complete details and dimensions of the hydrant. 2. The Contractor is to furnish to the Owner two (2) certified copy of the physical tests of all metals used in the manufacture of the fire hydrant that is normally manufactured and that will meet these specifications. 2.07 Pipe for Fire Hydrant A. All required piping from the main required to install the Fire Hydrant shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Ductile Iron TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING unless noted on the Drawings. 2.08 Raised Pavement Marking for Fire Hydrant A. Shall conform to TxDOT Item 672 and TxDOT DMS-4200. 1. Shall be type II-B-B a. Two reflective faces,each of which shall reflect blue.The body other than the reflective faces shall be blue.(Fire Hydrant Application). 2. Adhesive for securing Pavement Markers to asphalt or concrete surfaces shall conform to the following: a. TxDOT DMS-6100 b. TxDOT DMS-6130 3. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, Pavement Markers shall be applied to the roadway surface with a non-integral adhesive 2.09 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2.10 Polyethylene Wrapping A. The polyethylene material shall: 1. Have a minimum thickness of 8 mils 2. May be either clear or black. 2.11 Concrete A. Shall be in Class A accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. Shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Tapping Sleeve and Valve A. Shall be installed and set plumb as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall pre-test the valve prior to installation. C. Shall be wrapped with two(2)plies of polyethylene. 3.03 Valve A. Contractor shall test the valve to ensure that it is in working condition prior to installation. B. Shall be installed and set plumb as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. C. Shall be wrapped with two(2)plies of polyethylene. 3.04 Valve Boxes A. Street 1. Shall be set flush with pavement B. Right of Way 1. Shall beset flush with proposed grade. C. Cultivated Area 1. The top of box shall beset eighteen-inches(18")below natural ground and long enough to be raised to natural ground at a future date. 3.05 Fire Hydrant Information A. Fire hydrants shall be installed as shown on Drawings. B. Minimum burial length shall be three-feet(T). C. Breakable couplings shall be located at least two-inches (2") and less than six-inches (6") above finish grade. D. All fittings shall be restrained joints. E. Hydrant shall be blocked against firm soil. F. Hydrant shall be installed plumb. TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 G. Pumper Nozzle to face road,unless otherwise noted. H. Hydrant shall not be placed closer than four-feet(4')to any vertical obstructions 3.06 Piping for Fire Hydrant A. All required piping from the main required to install the Fire Hydrant shall be installed in accordance with the following: 1. Ductile Iron a. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING unless noted on the Drawings. 3.07 Storage and Sterilization for Hydrants A. Hydrants and fittings shall be stored on timber and kept clean. B. The interior surfaces of hydrants and fittings shall be washed and sterilized with approved sterilized agent,if requested by the Owner at time of installation. 3.08 Raised Pavement Marker A. Install one(1)marker in the center of the paved roadway perpendicular to the hydrant B. Storage of Materials 1. All materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Materials shall be stored within a weatherproof enclosure and protected from damage. C. Surface Preparation 1. Equipment a. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. b. Equipment shall be able to prepare concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the pavement surface will not be damaged. c. Air Blasting Equipment 1) Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture,oil,or other contaminants on the roadway surface. 2. Construction a. Prepare pavement surface of sufficient area for the pavement marking as recommended by the manufacturer,TxDOT Item 678,shown on the Drawings,and/or as directed by the Owner. b. Immediately before application of the paint marking material,the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from dirt, grease, oil, acids, laitance, or other foreign matter which would reduce the bond between the marking and the pavement. c. Remove all contamination and loose material from pavement surface by sweeping,air blasting, flail milling,blast cleaning,or as recommended by the manufacturer,directed on the Drawings or by the Owner. 1) Contaminates up to 0.5 square inch may remain if they are not removed by the following test which is preformed just prior to applying marking material: a) Air-blast the surface to simulate blasting during application, b) Firmly press a ten-inch (10") by two-inch (2") wide strip of monofilament tape onto surface,leaving two-inch(2")end free, c) Firmly grasp the two-inch(2")free end and remove with a quick pull. d. When existing marking material is present all loose and flaking material shall be removed by approved method(s). 3. Dryness Test a. Prior to marking placement the pavement shall be tested for dryness by the following method: 1) Type I Marking Material a) Place a sample of marking material on apiece of tarpaper on the pavement. b) Allow material to cool to ambient air temperature,and then inspect the underside of the tarpaper in contact with pavement. c) Pavement is considered dry if there is no condensation on the tarpaper. 2) Type II Marking Material a) Place a one(1)square foot piece of clear plastic on the pavement during a sunny day. b. The pavement is considered dry if after fifteen (15) minutes no condensation has occurred on the underside of the plastic. D. Marking Equipment 1. General TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 a. Equipment shall be maintained in satisfactory condition. b. Equipment shall meet or exceed the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Texas Railroad Commission. E. Alignment and Positioning 1. The Contractor shall establish guides to mark the lateral location of pavement markings as shown on the Drawings or as directed by Owner. 2. The Owner shall approve locations of these markings and may authorize necessary adjustments from the Drawings. 3. Alignment and positioning of pavement markers shall be such that the reflective faces are aligned for proper visibility: a. Type II markers shall be positioned so that the direction of reflection of one (1) face shall be directly opposite to the direction of reflection of the other face and be visible to the intended traffic. b. Type I-C shall have clear reflector face towards traffic. c. Type II C-R shall have the clear face toward the normal traffic flow and the red face toward wrong- way traffic. 4. Pavement markers placed in broken lines shall be placed in line with and midway between the stripes. S. All pavement markers not placed in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner shall be removed by the Contractor the Contractors expense. F. Weather 1. The suitability of the weather shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation and by the Owner. 2. If the Contractor decides to place markings when inclement weather is impending then all markings damaged due to weather shall be replaced at the Contractors sole expense. G. Application 1. General a. Marking shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the Drawings or as specified. b. Marking shall not be applied until the layouts, indicated alignment, and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Owner. c. All marking shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner. d. The Owner shall be notified upon arrival of shipment or inspecting and sampling of the materials. 2. Adhesive a. Adhesive shall be applied such that 100% of the lower surface of the marker or button is in contact with the adhesive and in sufficient quantity to serve as a cushion between the marker or button and the paved surface. b. Any surplus adhesive shall be removed so that the visibility of the marker or button is not impaired. H. Protection of Markings 1. After application,all markings shall be protected while curing. 2. The fresh markings shall be protected from damage of any kind. 3. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for the protection of markings and shall erect or place suitable warning signs,flags or barricades,protective screens,or coverings as required. 4. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter,splashes,spillage,drippings of paint or other materials. S. If markings are damaged or disfigured due to traffic, construction equipment, or construction method the Contractor shall replace the marking at his expense. I. Eliminating Pavement Markings 1. Equipment a. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. b. Equipment shall be able to eliminate markings on concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the color and texture of the pavement surface will be held to a minimum. c. Air Blasting Equipment TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 1) Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture,oil,or other contaminants on the roadway surface. 2. Marking Removal a. Asphaltic Surface 1) Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: a) Surface Treatment Method (1) Apply surface treatment material at a rate shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. (2) Place a surface treatment a minimum of two-foot (2') wide to cover the existing marking. (3) Place a surface treatment thin overlay, or microsurfacing a minimum of one (1) lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic occur or as directed by the Owner. (4) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. b) Burn Method (1) Use an approved burning method. (2) For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement markings,heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the material prior to blast cleaning. When using heat,avoid spalling pavement surface. (3) Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. (4) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. c) Blasting Method (1) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting,abrasive blasting,water abrasive blasting,shot blasting,slurry blasting,water-injected abrasive blasting,or brush blasting as approved. (2) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. d) Mechanical Method (1) Use any mechanical method except grinding. (2) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. (3) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. b. Concrete Surface 1) Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: a) Blasting Method (1) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting,abrasive blasting,water abrasive blasting,shot blasting,slurry blasting,water-injected abrasive blasting,or brush blasting as approved. (2) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. b) Mechanical Method (1) Use any mechanical method except grinding. (2) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. (3) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. J. Clean Up 1. At all times,the project site shall be kept free of all unnecessary traffic hazards. 2. Upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from the work site,and shall clean and restore the area to a manner acceptable to the Owner. 3. Also,all damage done by the Contractor during the prosecution of the work must be repaired. 4. Before acceptance,the work site must be neat and in a presentable condition throughout. S. Disposal of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and completed in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 K. Defective Workmanship or Material 1. When any material not conforming to the requirement of the specifications or Drawings has been delivered to the project or incorporated in the work or any work performed is of inferior quality, such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Owner,at the expense of the Contractor. L. Performance Requirements 1. Adhesion a. Installed pavement markings shall adhere to the pavement sufficiently to prevent lifting, shifting,smearing,spreading,flowing or tearing by traffic. 2. Appearance a. In addition to complying with all requirements listed herein,pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance, and shall be free of unsightly conditions caused by spread of excess adhesive. b. Markings shall be free of ragged edges and misshapen lines or contours, and splices in transverse markings. 3. Visibility a. The pavement marking material,in place on the roadway,shall have uniform and distinctive retro reflectance when observed in accordance with TxDOT Tex-828-13. 4. Observation Period a. All material,workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by manufacturers guarantee and/or warranty for a period of twelve (12) months commencing on final delivery date of materials. M. Performance Period 1. All markings and replacement markings that fail to meet all requirements of this specification and Tex-828-13 for a minimum of thirty (30) calendar days after installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 2. Markings and replacement markings failing to meet the performance requirements shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor within thirty(30)calendar days after notification at his expense. a. All replacement pavement markings shall also meet all requirements of this specification for the same warranty period after installation. 3.09 Excavation and Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES for the type of pipe that the tapping sleeve and/or valve is placed on. 3.10 Concrete A. Shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings and Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES TAPPING SLEEVES,VALVES,AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY 33 14 19-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 3113 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of gravity flow Wastewater Utility Public Piping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) B. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems C. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings D. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings E. ASTM D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals F. ASTM D3311-Standard Specification for Drain,Waste,and Vent(DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns G. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" H. Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association"Recommended Practice for Low Pressure Air Test of Installed Sewer Pipe" UNI-B-6 I. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 421,Hydraulic Cement Concrete J. Texas Administrative Code K. American Water Works Association(AWWA) L. American Public Works Association (APWA) M. UNI-BELL PVC Pipe Association N. American National Standards Institute 0. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Certification 1. Pipe a. The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. 2. Gaskets a. The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. 3. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. B. Televised Inspection 1. A Televised Inspection Report Log must be turned into the Owner within in three(3)working days after completion for review shall be submitted for each line or segment inspected. Report format shall be in accordance with the specifications and procedures of the local governing entity. 2. A Inspection Video and Report must be turned into the Owner within in three (3) working days after completion for review shall be submitted for each line or segment inspected. a. The Video and report shall be labeled with the following information: 1) Line Identification 2) Date WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3) Project 4) Inspection Company PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Fittings A. Poly-vinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe and Fittings 1. Shall be in accordance with: a. ASTM D3034 for pipe sizes three-inch(K)to fifteen-inch(15") b. ASTM F679 for pipe sizes eighteen-inch(18")to forty-eight inch(48"). 2. Pipe shall be integrally green in color. 3. Pipe shall have an SDR of 26 and a Pipe Stiffness of 115 psi. 4. Pipe and fittings shall have push-on compression gasket joints in accordance with ASTM D3212. S. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of twenty-feet(20'),plus or minus one-inch(1") unless otherwise noted. 6. Identification markings a. Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA. b. Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet(5') on the pipe. c. The minimum markings are as follows: 1) Nominal Size and OD base 2) PVC 3) Dimension Ratio (DR#) 4) AWWA Pressure Rating(PR#) 5) AWWA Designation Number(AWWA C#) 6) Manufacturer's name and trademark 7) Manufacturer's production code,including day,month,year,shift,plant, and extruder of manufacture. 7. Certification b. Pipe 1) The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. c. Gaskets 1) The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. 2) Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 2.02 Backfill Materials A. As per SECTION 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 2.03 Wastewater Public Service Lines A. Pipe and fittings shall be solvent weld SCH 40 PVC in accordance with ASTM D2665 and ASTM D3311, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. B. Pipe Size 1. Residential-four-inch (4") diameter and as noted on the Drawings. 2. Commercial-six-inch (6") diameter and as noted on the Drawings. C. Solvent cement for PVC shall comply with ASTM D2564. D. No co-mingling of different materials except through the use of proper adaptors. E. Adaptors shall have a stainless steel or fiberglass shear ring. F. Cleanout Boot 1. Sigma VB 103 or approved equal. 2.04 Service Marker A. Shall be brass and in accordance with applicable details or governing municipality 2.05 Concrete A. Shall be Class B concrete in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2.06 Warning Tape A. The tape shall be: 1. APWA compliant color coding a. Green WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Shall be heavy duty polyethylene 3. Minimum three-inches (K)wide 4. 4 Mil thickness 5. Be continuously repeated in one and one-half inch(1-1/2")letters marked with: a. "CAUTION BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW" PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Handling Materials A. General 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the handling and safe storage of all materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the specifications. 2. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected. a. Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work by the end of the work day. 3. Care shall be taken not to scratch pipe and fittings. a. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of pipe or fitting. B. Unloading 1. Materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery and hauled to the site by the Contractor. 2. Materials maybe unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the project within ten (10) days. C. Storing Materials 1. Materials shall be stored on platforms and allows the material to not touch the ground or vegetation and protects it from damage,and blowing soil and debris. 2. The interior of materials shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. 3. Materials shall be stored as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Owner. 4. Pipe shall be protected against ultraviolet radiation"sunburn". S. Materials shall not be placed on private property,unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor. 6. Materials shall not be placed within ten-feet(10') of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Owner. a. If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public. D. Distribution of Materials 1. Distribution of materials at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated into the work within ten(10)days. 2. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. 3. Materials shall not be placed on private property,unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor. 4. Materials shall not be placed within five-feet (5') of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Owner. S. If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public. 3.03 Excavation A. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.04 Jointing Pipe A. Poly-Vinyl Chloride Pipe 1. Shall have mating surfaces of the gasket joint wiped clean of dirt and foreign matter. WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigot mating surfaces just prior to joining. 3. The spigot shall then be centered on grade into the bell of the previous pipe and shall be shoved home to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces. 4. Pipe shall not be assembled in reverse order by pushing bell onto spigot. S. When the pipe is being installed,bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material. 6. When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with material to provide for adequate support of the pipe. 7. The spigot shall be centered within one-quarter inch(1/4) of the home line marked on the spigot. 3.05 Alignment and Grade A. General 1. All pipes and fittings shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. 2. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported,relocated,removed,or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense,in cooperation with the Owners of such utility structures. 3. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. B. Utility Separation Distances 1. General a. Separation is to be measured from the outside surface of each respective piece. 2. General utilities a. Parallel - vertical and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2'), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. b. Crossing 1) Separation of six-inches (6") to two-feet (2') - cement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yard of sand) shall be placed between and two-feet(2') beyond each utility,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. 2) Separation of more than two-feet(2') -backfill shall be as Drawings indicate or equal to or better than existing, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. 3. Wastewater utilities a. General 1) In all cases the water utility shall be above the wastewater utility 2) Waterline pipe joint(18'+) is to be centered on the crossing b. Separation nine-feet(9') or more in all directions 1) In all cases the water line is to be located above the wastewater utility and installed as indicated on the Drawings and by manufacturer recommendations. c. Separation nine-feet(9') or less in any direction 1) New wastewater utility a) The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC §290.44(e). (1) Parallel-vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet(2') and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4'), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. (2) Crossing - vertical separation shall be a minimum of one-foot (1') between outside diameters and have cement stabilized sand (10%cement per cubic yard of sand)placed between and five-feet(5')beyond utility and the sewage line must be below the water utility,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner. 2) Existing wastewater utility a) If the wastewater utility line is leaking the line must be replaced nine-feet(9')in each direction of the crossing,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. b) The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 §290.44(e). (1) Parallel-vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet(2') and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of four-feet(4'). (2) Crossing - vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and have cement stabilized sand(10%cement per cubic yard of sand)placed between and five-feet(5')beyond,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. 4. Utilities conveying hazardous materials (oil,etc.) a) Contact Owner for requirements. C. Deviation from Drawings 1. No deviation from the line and grade shown on Drawings maybe made without the consent of the Owner. D. Depth of Cover 1. Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanent improvement,or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel. 2. Under Paved Area a. Lines less than twelve-inch(12") 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six inches (36"). b. Lines twelve-inch (12") and greater 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight- inches (48"). 3. Under Non-Paved Area a. Lines less than twelve-inch(12") 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six- inches (36"). b. Lines twelve-inch (12") and greater 1) Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight inches (48"). 4. Deviations from the minimum depth or maximum depth shall be promptly marked on the field Drawings. 3.06 Pipe Placement A. General 1. The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe centerline with the minimum clearances below the pipe bottom and the required clearance from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of the bell hole as per the Backfill portion of this specification. 2. Proper implements,tools and facilities satisfactory to the Owner shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. 3. All pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick,ropes,or other suitable equipment,in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and accessories. 4. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. B. Inspection of Pipe and Accessories 1. The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench. 2. Any defective damage or unsound pipe shall be replaced. C. Clean Pipe 1. All foreign matter,or dirt,shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into the trench. 2. Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. 3.07 Backfill A. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.08 Warning Tape A. Shall be as per Drawings. 1. If not indicated on the Drawings then the tape shall be placed eighteen-inches(18")directly above the pipe. 3.09 Wastewater Public Service Lines WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 A. Where possible,service tees or wyes shall be placed along the main as required for services (no taps). B. Minimum slopes: 1. Residential - Four-inch (4") pipes shall be one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot (S= 0.01), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. 2. Commercial - Six-inch (6") pipes shall be one-sixteenth inch (1/16") per foot (S= 0.005), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings,or required by the Owner. C. Sanitary sewer service lines shall cross under water mains D. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing alignment and maintaining grade for the proposed service. E. Lines shall be bored,jetted,or jacked under sidewalks,driveways,and other such improved surfaces; unless authorized by the Owner. F. Service lines shall be leakage tested with the main sewer. 3.10 Testing A. General 1. Testing shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner. 2. The Contractor may wish to check pipe immediately after backfilling for job control. a. However,this shall not qualify as acceptance testing. 3. No pipe can be tested for formal acceptance until it has been in place, complete with backfill for at least thirty(30)days. 4. Retesting a. Any defective work or Materials shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor at the Contractors sole expense,and retested. 5. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable. 6. Testing shall be completed and all work shall pass the required testing prior to placement of pavement. a. Contractor may proceed with placement of pavement and will incur all costs associated with the removal and replacement of pavement if utility fails testing and needs to be replaced. B. Low Pressure Air Test 1. General a. Required for all pipe b. Equipment for test shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. c. The Contractor shall test the entire sanitary sewerage piping system for leaks. d. This work shall be witnessed by the Owner or a representative designated by the Owner. 2. Testing a. Shall be tested in accordance with Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association'Recommended Practice for Low Pressure Air Test of Installed Sewer Pipe"UNI-13-6,and Texas Administration Code. b. The test section shall be plugged and subjected to a test pressure not in excess of five(5)psi. c. The time required for a one (1)psi pressure drop shall be measured and be a minimum of the value obtained in Equation A and/or shown in Table 1. Equation A: T=0.0237D2L Where: T=Minimum allowable time(seconds)for a pressure drop of one(1)psi gage pressure D=Nominal pipe diameter(inches) L=Length of pipe run feet Table 1 Minimum TestingTimes for Low-Pressure Air Test Pipe Diameter Minimum Time Maximum Length Time for Longer Length inches seconds for Minimum Time seconds foot 4 226 597 0.380 6 340 398 0.855 8 454 298 1.520 10 567 239 2.374 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 12 680 199 3.419 15 850 159 5.342 18 1020 133 7.693 21 1190 114 10.471 24 1360 100 13.676 27 1530 88 17.309 30 1700 80 21.369 33 1870 72 25.856 C. Deflection Testing 1. General a. Required for all PVC Pipe,except for pipe that is a service line. b. All pipe shall be tested for deflection no less than thirty(30)days after placement of backfill. c. All deflection testing is to be completed by means of pulling a mandrel through the pipe. a) For pipes with an inside diameter(ID)of twenty-seven inches(27")and greater,other test methods may be used to determine vertical deflection. 2. Equipment for Deflection Testing a. All equipment is to be provided by the Contractor. b. Mandrels 1) Mandrel Size a) Shall have an outside diameter(OD) of not less than ninety-five percent(95%) of the base inside diameter(ID)or average inside diameter(ID)of the pipe as specified in the appropriate standard by the ASTMS,American Water Works Association,UNI-BELL,or American National Standards Institute. 2) Mandrel Design a) Mandrels shall be of machined rigid corrosion resistant pipe that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed and shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code. b) With a length not less than one and one-half(1-1/2)diameters. c) Adjustable or flexible mandrels are prohibited. d) Mandrels will be sized for SDR 26 PVC pipe at five-percent(5%)deflection. 3. Procedure a. Shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code. b. The test shall be witnessed by the Owner or a representative designated by the Owner. c. The mandrel shall not be pulled by any mechanical pulling devices. d. If a section of pipe fails then that portion shall be corrected and a second test of that portion shall be completed no less than thirty(30)days after placement of backfill. D. Televised Inspection 1. Shall be completed in accordance with the local governing entities specifications and procedures. Reports shall be submitted as required by the local governing entity. 2. If bellies/dips are found,they shall not be more then as noted in Table 2 and may not occur more than one (1)time between manholes or in 300 feet,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or by the Owner. Table 2 Maximum Allowable Belly Dip Depth in Inches Pipe Size 8" 101, 12" 15" 18" 21" 24" 27" >27" Maximum 1- 1- 1- 2- 2- 2- Bell Di 3/4 ill 1 4" 1 2" 3 4" 2 1 4" 1 2" 3 4" 3.11 Soil Borings A. The Owner does not assume responsibility for subsurface information. B. Soil data and other subsurface information shown on the Drawings or in the appendix is without warranty as to correctness of fact or interpretation. WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placing of stormwater pipe and the material and incidental construction requirements for stormwater pipe as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 3123 16.13 TRENCHING D. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 198 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants B. AASHTO M 259-Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts,Storm Drains,and Sewers C. AASHTO M 273-Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains,and Sewers with Less Than 2 ft of Cover Subjected to Highway Loadings D. AASHTO M 288-Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications E. ASTM C 76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe F. ASTM C 443-Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe using Rubber Gaskets. G. ASTM C 497-Standard Test Method for Concrete Pipe,Manhole Sections,or Tile. H. ASTM C 506-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe. 1. ASTM C 507-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe. j. ASTM C 655-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe. K ASTM C 990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants L. ASTM C 1433-Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts,Storm Drains,and Sewers. M. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) N. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 462-Concrete Box Culverts and Storm Drains 0. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO) P. American Welding Society Specifications Q. American Concrete Pipe Association(ACPA) R. National Precast Concrete Association(NCPA) 1.04 Submittals A. Pipe information noting compliance with this specification. B. Gasket information noting compliance with this specification. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All pipe shall be manufactured at an American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) Certified Plant or a National Precast Concrete Association(NCPA) Certified Plant. B. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. C. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.02 Concrete Pipe A. General 1. All pipe shall be bell and spigot,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. 2. Bell and spigot shall be formed for the acceptance of gasket material B. Workmanship and Finish 1. Pipe shall be substantially free from fractures,large or deep cracks and surface roughness. 2. The ends of the pipe shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. 3. Shall be in accordance with the industry standards. a. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. C. Fabrication 1. Pipe shall conform to ASTM Designation C 76 for Circular Pipe;ASTM Designation C 506 for Arch Pipe, or ASTM Designation C 507 for Elliptical Pipe. 2. All precast concrete pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. 3. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved hatching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. 4. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. D. Lifting Holes 1. Do not place more than two(2)holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast pipe 2. Cast,cut,or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the pipe. a. The holes shall be neat and without spalling of the concrete. 3. The maximum hole diameter is three-inch(K)at the inside surface of the pipe wall and four-inch(4") at the outside surface. 4. Do not cut more than one (1) longitudinal wire or two (2) circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. E. Design 1. All pipe shall be Class III(Wall"B")unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. 2. The shell thickness,the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the specified Class as summarized in ASTM Designation C 76 for Circular Pipe; C 506 for Arch Pipe;C 507 for Elliptical pipe. 3. Minimum cover for all pipes shall be one foot(1'). F. Physical Test Requirements 1. The acceptability of the pipe shall be determined by the results of the following tests: a. Material tests required in ASTM C 76,C 655,C 506,or C 507 b. Absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C 497 c. Three-edge bearing test in accordance with ASTM C 497 1) Shall be performed on one(1)pipe for each 300 pipes,or faction thereof,for each type,size class,or D-Load produced within 30 calendar days. 2) Test for the load to produce a 0.01-inch crack or fifteen-percent (15%) in excess of the required D-Load,whichever is less. 3) Test the pipe to ultimate load when directed. d. As an alternate to the three-edge bearing test, concrete pipe fifty-four inches (54") in diameter and larger may be accepted, at the option of the manufacturer, on the basis of compressive strength of cores cut from the wall of the pipe. e. The manufacturer must determine the compressive strength of the samples. Obtain, cure, prepare,and test the cores in accordance with ASTM C 496. f. The manufacturer must plug and seal the core holes in the pipe wall after testing. g. Inspect the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. G. Marking 1. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: a. The class of pipe, STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 b. ASTM designation, c. The date of manufacture, d. The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, e. All markings shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. f. Elliptical Pipe 1) One (1) end of each section of pipe with elliptical reinforcement shall be clearly marked during the process of manufacture or immediately thereafter on the inside and the outside of opposite walls to show the location of the "top" or "bottom" of the pipe as it should be installed,unless the external shape of the pipe is such that the correct position of the top and bottom is obvious. H. Inspection 1. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the pipe manufacturing Plant. 2. In addition,the finished pipe shall be subject to further inspection by the Owner at the project site prior to and during installation. I. Curing 1. Pipe shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe. J. Minimum Age for Shipment 1. Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein and has cured. K Causes for Rejection 1. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. 2. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint, b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding, c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, d. Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint, e. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of twelve-inch(12")or more. f. Circular pipe which is"out-of-round". L. Repairs 1. Pipe may be repaired if necessary,because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling in accordance with manufacturer recommendations,and will be acceptable if,in the opinion of the Owner,the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of the specifications. M. Rejections 1. All rejected pipes shall be plainly marked by the Owner and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe that meets the requirements of these specifications. 2. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 2.03 Concrete Box Culvert A. General 1. The Contractor shall have the option of furnishing cast-in-place and/or precast boxes unless a specific type is called for on the Drawings or in the special provisions. B. Cast-in Place 1. When cast-in-place boxes are used,they shall conform to the details of the culvert designs shown in the Drawings. C. Precast 1. General a. All pipe shall be manufactured at an American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) Certified Plant or a National Precast Concrete Association(NCPA) Certified Plant. b. All box culvert shall be bell and spigot,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. c. Bell and spigot shall be formed for the acceptance of gasket material STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2. Workmanship and Finish a. Box culvert shall be substantially free from fractures,large or deep cracks and surface roughness. b. The ends of the box culvert shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the box culvert within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. c. Shall be in accordance with the industry standards. 1) In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3. Fabrication a. Box culvert shall conform to AASHTO M 259,AASHTO M 273,ASTM C 1433,and be rated for AASHTO HS-20 loading. b. All precast concrete box culvert shall be machine made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. c. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved hatching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. d. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete box culvert 4. Lifting Holes a. Do not place more than four (4) holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast box culvert b. Cast,cut,or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the box culvert. 1) The holes shall be neat and without spalling of the concrete. c. The maximum hole diameter is three-inch (3") at the inside surface of the box culvert wall and four(4)inch at the outside surface. d. Do not cut more than one (1) longitudinal wire or two (2) circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. S. Design a. All box culvert shall be Class III(Wall"B")unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. b. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the box culvert shall conform to ASTM C 1433. c. Minimum cover for all box culverts shall be two-foot(2'). 6. Physical Test Requirements a. The acceptability of the box culvert shall be determined by the results of the following tests: 1) Material tests required in ASTM C 1433. 2) The manufacturer must plug and seal the core holes in the box culvert wall after testing. 3) Inspect the finished box culvert to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. 7. Marking a. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of box culvert: 1) The class of box culvert, 2) ASTM designation, 3) The date of manufacture, 4) The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, 5) All markings shall be indented on the box culvert section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. 8. Inspection a. The quality of materials,the process of manufacture,and the finished box culvert shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the box culvert manufacturing Plant b. In addition,the finished box culvert shall be subject to further inspection by the Owner at the project site prior to and during installation. 9. Curing a. Box culvert shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of box culvert 10. Minimum Age for Shipment a. Box culvert shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein and has cured. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 11. Causes for Rejection a. Box culvert shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. b. Individual sections of box culvert may be rejected because of any of the following: 1) Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint, 2) Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding, 3) Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, 4) Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint, 5) Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of twelve-inch(12") or more. 6) Box culvert which is'but-of-square". 12. Repairs a. Box culvert may be repaired if necessary,because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, and will be acceptable if,in the opinion of the Owner,the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired box culvert conforms to the requirements of the specifications. 13. Rejections a. All rejected box culverts shall be plainly marked by the Owner and shall be replaced by the Contractor with box culvert that meets the requirements of these specifications. 1) Such rejected box culvert shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 14. Alternate designs of precast boxes will be considered for approval upon submission of shop drawings detailing the box and certifications that the box,as designed,is structurally comparable to or better than the box shown in the contract drawings and is designed to support HS-20 loading per AASHTO M 273 and ASTM C 1433. a. The shop drawings and certifications shall be signed and sealed by a Texas Registered Professional Engineer. D. Concrete 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, Class "A" concrete shall be used for cast-in-place and precast (formed) boxes, conforming to the requirements of Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Class"C"concrete will be required for direct traffic boxes for cast-in-place and precast boxes. 3. Concrete for precast(machine-made) boxes shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 76,Sections: Cement,Aggregates and Mixture, and shall have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. 2.04 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe A. General 1. The product supplied under this specification shall be high density polyethylene corrugated exterior/smooth interior pipe. Twelve to 36 inch diameters shall conform to AASHTO M294 Type S; 8- and 10-inch diameters shall meet the strength requirements of AASHTO M252 with the addition that the pipe have a smooth interior liner. Material shall conform to ASTM D3350. Minimum conveyance factors shall be as shown in Table 1. B. Rejection of Polyethylene Pipe 1. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe which meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the site of work. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding. c. Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. d. Careless dumping of pipe from truck.The Engineer shall be judge of aforesaid items. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 2.05 Jointing Materials A. Concrete Pipe 1. Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets a. Shall conform to AASHTO M 198 and ASTM C 990. b. Joint material and primer shall be supplied for use on pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Geotextile for wrapping joints shall be Class 1 geotextile for subsurface drainage with an average opening size,AOS,of.22 mm.and two-feet(2)wide in accordance AASHTO M 288. B. Polyethylene Pipe 1. Pipe joints and fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252 or AASHTO M294 2. All coupling bands shall conform to ASTM D3212 (10.8 psi watertight)and meet or exceed the soil- tightness requirements of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Section 23, paragraph 23.3.1.5.4(e). a. Coupling bands shall cover at least one full corrugation on each section of pipe. b. When gasketed coupling bands are required,the gasket shall be made of closed-cell synthetic expanded rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056,Grade RE42. 1) All gaskets shall be installed on the coupler by the pipe manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. 3. Fittings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M294. 2.06 Lift Hole Plug A. Concrete Plug 1. Shall be tapered,or as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe. 2. Shall be used for mechanically and man-made lift holes B. Polyethylene Plug 1. Shall resist internal pressure within the pipe of a minimum of 7 psi. 2. Shall be used for mechanically made lift holes 2.07 Cement Mortar A. Shall be composed of one(1)part Portland Cement and(2)parts sand. 2.08 Backfill Materials A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Cast-in Place 1. The requirement of Section 03 31 11.13 CONCRETE STRUCTURES shall govern for cast-in-place concrete culverts and for precast(formed)boxes except where otherwise specified herein. 2. Concrete boxes shall be given an ordinary surface finish. 3. Forms a. Forms for precast(machine-made)boxes shall be made of steel. b. Forms for cast-in-place boxes and precast(formed)boxes may be either wood or steel. c. Forms shall be mortar-tight and of sufficient strength to prevent excessive bulging or misalignment of adjacent boxes. d. They shall be constructed to permit their removal without damage to the concrete. e. Offsets at form joints shall not exceed one-eighth inch(1/8"). f. Forms shall be clean and free of extraneous matter when concrete is placed. 4. Positive means of supporting steel cages in place throughout forming and concrete placement shall be required and subject to the approval of the Owner. S. Welding of reinforcing steel will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings. a. Welding shall be done by a qualified welder and shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the American Welding Society specifications. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Precast(machine-made)boxes shall be cast by a process,which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure dense concrete. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch Plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. E. Transit mixed concrete shall not be acceptable for use in precast(machine-made)boxes. 3.02 Testing and Certification A. Physical Requirements 1. Precast boxes shall meet the requirement of TxDOT Tex 704-I. B. Testing 1. Testing shall be done by a Materials Engineering Laboratory which meets the requirements for membership in the American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. Certification 1. Certification of quality shall be provided with each delivery of materials to the job site by the manufacturer. 2. Certification shall be a written report by the Materials Engineering Testing Laboratory. 3.03 Fabrication Tolerances A. Precast boxes shall conform to the following tolerances: 1. When two (2) box sections are fitted together on a flat surface, in proper alignment and in the position they will be installed,the longitudinal opening at any point shall not exceed one-inch(1"). 2. When fine cracks or hairline cracks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, further production of precast boxes shall be discontinued until corrections are made and proper curing provided. 3.04 Defects and Repairs A. Fine cracks or checks on the surface 1. If it does not extend to the plane of the nearest reinforcement will not because for rejection unless they are numerous and extensive. 2. Cracks that extend into the plane of the reinforcing steel but are acceptable otherwise, shall be repaired in an approved manner. B. Small damaged or honeycombed areas 1. Purely surface in nature may be repaired. 2. Excessive damage,honeycomb or cracking will be subject to structural review. 3. Repairs shall be sound, properly finished and cured in conformance with the pertinent specifications. 3.05 Excavation A. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.06 Laying Pipe A. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner,the laying of pipe on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream and shall proceed upstream with the abutting sections properly matched,true to the established lines and grades. B. Lifting holes shall be at the 12:00 position(on the top)of the pipe when pipe is in final place. C. Where bell and spigot pipe are used,cross trenches shall be cut in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the prepared bed. 1. These cross trenches shall be not more than two-inches(2")larger than the bell ends of the pipe. D. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. E. The ends of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is placed. F. As each length of pipe is laid,the mouth of the pipe shall be protected to prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. G. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in the bed,it shall form a smooth,uniform conduit H. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used,the pipe shall be laid in the trench in such position that the markings"Top"or'Bottom",shall not be more than five (5)degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 1. Multiple installations of reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid with the centerlines of individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated on Drawings,the Table 1 clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipe shall be used. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 Table 1 Minimum Clear Distance Between Multiple Pipes Diameter of Pipe(inch) Clear Distance Between Pipes 18" 0'-9" 24" 0'-11" 30" 1'- V. 36" 1'-3" 42" 1'-5" 48" 1'-7" 54" 1'-111, 60"to 84" 2'-0" 3.07 Jointing A. Joints using Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets: 1. Primer a. Shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. b. No primer shall be applied over mud,sand,dirt,or sharp cement protrusions. c. The surface to be primed must be clean and dry when primer is applied. 2. Gasket a. Before laying the pipe in the trench,the plastic gasket sealer shall be attached around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. b. Gasket shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. c. The paper wrapper shall be removed from one side only of the two-piece wrapper on the gasket and pressed firmly to the clean,dry pipe joint surface. d. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F,plastic joint seal gaskets shall either be stored in an area warmed to above 70 degrees F,or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 1) Gaskets shall be applied to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in trench,followed by connection to previously laid pipe. e. The outside wrapper shall not be removed until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. f. Additional gasket material may be required if,in the opinion of the Owner,a proper joint is not secured, and additional gasket material shall be required for non-circular concrete pipe as required by the Owner. 3. Joining a. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, the outside wrapper on the gasket shall be removed and the pipe shall be pulled or pushed home with sufficient force and power to cause the evidence of squeeze-out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. b. Any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow shall be removed. c. Pipe shall be pulled or pushed home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times. 4. All pipe joints shall be wrapped with Geotextile. a. The wrap shall be centered on each join" b. The wrap does not remove the requirements of the use of gasket. B. Mortar Joints 1. Is prohibited from jointing pipe except at manholes,pipe junction,etc.,or where specifically approved by the Owner. 2. Pipe shall be pulled or pushed home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 3. Shall be placed as to forma durable watertight joint. 4. The installation shall be as required by the Owner. 3.08 Lifting Holes A. When used by the Contractor to handle the pipe shall be used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Filling of Hole 1. Concrete Plug a. Plug shall be used in conjunction with a Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gasket to form a seal that will not allow soil to migrate through the opening, or required on the Drawings or by the Owner. b. Shall be used for mechanically and man-made lift holes c. The pipe at the location of the plug shall be wrapped with Geotextile. 1) Care shall be taken to not allow the Geotextile to move or allow backfill material to be under Geotextile 2. Polyethylene Plug a. Plug shall be installed as recommended by Manufacturer b. Shall be covered with mortar and allowed to set to firm prior to installation of backfill c. Shall be used only for mechanically made lift holes. 3.09 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-9 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 33 42 30 STORMWATER STRUCTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installing of storm water utility manholes,inlets,frames,grates,and covers as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 105-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings B. AASHTO M 288-Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications C. AASHTO M 306-Standard Specification for Drainage,Sewer,Utility,and Related Castings D. ASTM A 27-Standard Specification for Steel Castings,Carbon,for General Application E. ASTM A 36-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel F. ASTM A 48-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings G. ASTM A 536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings H. ASTM C 76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,Storm Drain,and Sewer Pipe. I. ASTM C 443-Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,Using Rubber Gaskets J. ASTM C 478-Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections K. ASTM C 581-Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service L. ASTM C 923-Standard Specification for Resilient manhole connectors M. ASTM D 695-Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics N. ASTM D 790 - Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. 0. ASTM D 2412-Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. P. ASTM D 2583-Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. Q. ASTM D 2584-Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins R. ASTM D 3753-Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Manholes S. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) T. Texas Administrative Code Title 30,Part 1,Chapter 217,Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 U. Texas Accessibility Standards(TAS) V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS 7340 - Qualification Procedure for Multi-Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Junction Boxes and Inlets W. American Welding Society 1.04 Submittals A. Submit manufacturer's data, details, and shop drawings for the following items showing compliance with specifications: 1. Manhole a. Design b. Fabrication c. Fiberglass components d. Installation instruction e. Pipe Connector f. Base g. Inflow Inhibitor 2. Grade Adjustment Rings 3. Frames and Covers STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-1 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. B. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Manholes A. General 1. Manholes may be made from cast in place Class "A" Concrete, precast concrete, fiberglass, or a combination of these materials when indicated by the Owner. 2. Reinforcing steel,if required,shall be as shown on Drawings. a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. 3. The bottom of manholes shall be carefully formed and inverted smoothly when finished, with pipes cut to fit inside surface of walls. 4. Mortar for masonry or plastering shall be: a. One (1) part Portland Cement to three (3) parts clean hard and sharp mortar sand,free of all foreign substances or injurious alkalis. b. Water shall be clean potable water free of foreign substances or injurious alkalis. B. Concrete 1. Formed in Place a. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES b. Concrete shall be Class "A"conforming to Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Precast a. Precast manholes shall allow unobstructed view of all pipes connected to the manhole. b. Precast manholes shall be designed in accordance with ASTM C 478,and AASHTO M 306. 1) Must be designed and sealed by a Texas Licensed Engineer. c. Either concentric or eccentric cones may be required. 1) Where not specified,the eccentric cones shall be used. d. Manhole designs shall be submitted for approval. e. Shall be monolithic when possible. 1) If non-monolithic then joint shall be tongue and groove. f. The following information shall be clearly marked on each manhole: 1) The class of pipe, 2) ASTM designation, 3) The date of manufacture, 4) The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, 5) Marking shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. g. Shall be constructed with base of not less than twelve-inches (12")thick below lowest invert. C. Fiberglass 1. Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D 3753 and the referenced design criteria as follows: a. ASTM C 581 - Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service b. ASTM D 695-Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics c. ASTM D 790 - Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. d. ASTM D 2412 -Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. e. ASTM D 2583 -Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. f. ASTM D 2584-Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins 2. The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be one-half inch(1/2"). 3. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be either forty-eight inches (48") or one and one- half(1.5)times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe,which ever is larger. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-2 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a minimum inside diameter in accordance with the Drawings. 5. Shall be able to withstand AASHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. 6. Markings and Identifications a. Shall be placed on the inside and/or outside as required. b. Inside required Markings and Identifications shall be placed immediately below the upper factory bond joint or approximately one foot(1')below the corbel,whichever is less. 1) Manufacturers Name 2) Manufacturers Trademark 3) Manufacturers Serial Number 4) Manhole Length 5) ASTM Designation D. Manhole Diameter 1. Shall be as noted on the Drawings a. In all cases shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30,Part 1,Chapter 217, Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 E. Manhole Pipe Connectors 1. Fiberglass a. Gasket Material 1) Shall be in accordance with ASTM C 923 2. Concrete a. Shall provide a watertight connection and be in accordance with ASTM C 923 b. Mortar shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or by the Owner. F. Geotextile Wrap 1. Shall be Class A Subsurface Drainage Geotextile,AASHTO M 288. G. Manhole Base 1. Concrete shall be Class A in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Base shall be in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 478 as shown on construction Drawings and detail Drawings. 3. Reinforcing Steel a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. 2.03 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS- 20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches(30"). 2.04 Inlets A. General 1. Concrete a. Concrete for inlets shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to the requirements of the specification,Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES,except as otherwise provided on the Drawings. b. Mortar 1) Mortar shall be composed of one (1) part Portland cement and two (2) parts clean,sharp mortar sand suitable graded for the purpose by conforming in other respects to the provisions of the section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES for fine aggregate. 2) Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix but in no case shall it exceed ten- percent(10%)by weight of the total dry mix. c. Reinforcing Steel 1) Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. B. Precast Inlet 1. Submit shop drawings which indicate size of the inlet and is sealed by a Licensed Texas Professional Engineer. 2. Inlet top shall be interlocking to the base and be grouted in which will construct a one-piece unit. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-3 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Inlet Pipe Connectors 1. Gasket Material a. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1) Rubber gaskets are not allowed. 2. Geotextile Wrap a. Shall be Class A Subsurface Drainage Geotextile,AASHTO M 288. 2.05 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from 100%HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches(30"). 2.06 Frames,Grates and Covers A. General 1. Manhole frame&cover shall be designated for street application designed to meet AASHTO M306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. a. Shall be rated for traffic service withstanding an application of 40,000 pound proof load in accordance with AASHTO M 306. b. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements,Sidewalks,Driveways 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated meeting AASHTO M 306 c. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements,Sidewalks,Driveways within School Zones 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated and able to be bolted meeting AASHTO M 306 2. All products shall be domestically made in the United States of America. 3. Shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Drawings. a. Other patterns for frames,grates,and covers may be submitted for approval by the Owner 4. Cover shall be permeable with openings that meet the requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) S. Shall be true to pattern,form,and dimensions. 6. Shall be free from cracks,sponginess,and blowholes. 7. Shall be machined to yield a fit which will not rattle with passing traffic load. 8. Each casting shall be identifiable and show,at a minimum,the following: a. Name of the producing foundry b. Country of manufacture c. ASTM material designation d. Recycle symbol e. Individual part number f. Cast or heat date B. Coatings 1. Shall be dipped in coal tar or asphalt unless the Drawings or Owner requires a different treatment. C. Welded Steel Frames and Grates 1. Shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the Drawings and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. 2. Welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society 3. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36. D. Castings 1. Whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown in the Drawings and shall be clean substantial castings,free from burnt-on sand and shall be reasonable smooth. a. Runners,risers,fins,and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. 2. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grades and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the facilitate subsequent identification at installation. 3. Steel Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of specifications for"Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel Castings for General Application",ASTM A 27. b. Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-4 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 4. Cast Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of"Gray Iron Castings",ASTM A 48,Class 30,and AASHTO M 105. 5. Ductile Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of"Ductile Iron Castings",ASTM A 536. b. Grade 70-50-05 shall be used otherwise specified. E. Openings 1. Shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 F. Manufacturing Facilities 1. Manufacturing facilities shall be domestic in compliance with Local,State,and Federal workplace and environmental regulations. G. Bolts when required 1. Commercial grade 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or required by the Owner. 2.07 Concrete A. All concrete and accessories shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and in accordance with this specification. B. All concrete and accessories shall be rated for use in high sulfur dioxide conditions. 2.08 Non-Shrink Grout A. Shall be prepackaged and meet the requirements of ASTM C1107,be flowable,Nonmetallic,Inorganic, Non-gas liberating, Cement based, have a compressive strength of 7000 psi, and requires only the addition of water. 2.09 Concrete Coatings A. Provide as indicated on the Drawings or approved equal. 2.10 Backfill Materials A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Manholes A. General 1. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES,unless otherwise specified. 2. Refer to the Details within the Drawings for additional information regarding execution. 3. Installation Assist Marks a. Shall be vertical lines 90 degrees apart at the base of the manhole and at other locations to assist in construction. b. Can be applied by Manufacturer and/or by Contractor. c. Marks shall be in a color and visible so that the Contractor and Owner can easily determine the use and determine when requirements are met. d. Required Marks 1) Continuous mark around manhole a) Minimum embedment into base b) Maximum embedment into base c) Minimum initial backfill height 2) Location of dowels (if required) 3) Location and size of pipe penetrations prior to cut. B. Excavation 1. Asper Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-5 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 C. Non-monolithic 1. The tongue and groove joint shall have a gasket material placed between prior to joining and exterior of joint wrapped with geotextile. D. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus two-inches (2"), plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. 2. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with proper blade. 3. Impact type tools shall not be used. 4. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12") between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. E. Pipe Penetrations 1. Pipe connection shall be made with gasket material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the exterior portion shall have geotextile placed across it, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. F. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the end of the pipe and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. G. Handling 1. Shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the item or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks,debris,etc. H. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. I. Inverts 1. The inverts passing out or through the manhole shall be shaped and routed across the floor of manhole as shown on the Drawings. 2. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. J. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed grout inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. K. Backfill 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. L. Grade Adjustment Rings 1. A minimum of twelve-inches(12") of rings are allowed. 2. A maximum of eighteen-inches(18") of rings are allowed. M. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-6 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 frame and concrete. 3.03 Inlets A. General 1. Shall be constructed from concrete with all concrete work in accordance with the requirements of the Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES,unless otherwise specified. 2. Forms will be required for all concrete walls,except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. 3. Inlets for Precast Concrete Pipe Sewers. a. The construction of inlets for precast concrete pipe sewers shall be done as soon as is practicable after storm lines into or through inlet locations are completed. b. All sewers shall be cut neatly at the inside face of the walls of inlet and cleaned up with mortar. B. Excavation 1. Asper Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. C. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus two-inches (2"), plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. 2. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with proper blade. 3. Impact type tools shall not be used. 4. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12") between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. D. Pipe Penetrations 1. Pipe connection shall be made with gasket material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the exterior portion shall have geotextile placed across it, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. E. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the end of the pipe and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. F. Handling 1. Shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the item or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks,debris,etc. G. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. H. Inverts 1. The inverts passing out or through the inlet shall be shaped and routed across the floor of inlet as shown on the Drawings. 2. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. I. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed grout inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-7 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 J. Backfill 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 Frames,Grates and Covers A. Frames,grates,and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and shall be placed carefully to the lines or grades indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. C. Apply non-seize graphite or approved equal around all the frame, grate, and/or cover prior to installation. 3.05 Grade Adjustment of Existing Fiberglass Manhole A. Adjustment by Rings 1. The adjustment of the frame and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. 2. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between each ring in a manner to form a continuous seal between each ring. 3. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between the ring and manhole to form a continuous seal. B. Adjustment by Lowering Top of Manhole 1. If the frame and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of grade adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole,this work shall be done as described below: a. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least six inches (6")below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. c. Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. d. Mark,cut and remove the required section of the manhole. 1) Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. e. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. f. Replace and align the top. g. Apply new Fiberglass in accordance with Manhole Manufacturer recommendations and the recommendations of the repair kit. 1) Repair kit shall be of type as required by Manhole Manufacturer. h. After curing,backfill in accordance with the backfill requirements for Manholes,the Drawings, and/or as directed by the Owner. C. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of frame and concrete. 3.06 Grade Adjustment of Existing Concrete Manhole A. Shall be in accordance with the Drawings. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-8 Fire Department Resource Center Phase 2-#23180 Rev 1/2022 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE DEPARTMENT RESOURCE CENTER—PHASE 2 6226 Ayers Street Corpus Christi, Texas UES Project No. G124240 July 30, 2024 Prepared for: Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas, 78411 Attention: Ms. Jodi Smith Schade, RID NCIDQ Prepared by: Ivo TM s UES 16817 Leopard St., Corpus Christi, TX 78409 1 office: 361.883.4555 1 fax: 361.883.4711 Environmental Geotechnical Engineering UES Materials Testing 10TM Field Inspections&Code Compliance Geophysical Technologies July 30, 2024 Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas, 78411 Attention: Ms. Jodi Smith Schade, RID NCIDQ Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE DEPARTMENT RESOURCE CENTER—PHASE 2 6226 Ayers Street Corpus Christi, Texas UES Report No. G124240 Dear Ms. Jodi Smith Schade: UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC (hereinafter "UES") has performed a geotechnical exploration for the project referenced above. This study was authorized by Kira Bonesteel with Turner Ramirez Architects and performed in accordance with UES Proposal No. CGP060424B dated June 11, 2024. The results of this exploration, together with our recommendations, are presented in the accompanying report, an electronic copy of which is being transmitted herewith. UES appreciates the opportunity to be of service on this project. If we can be of further assistance, such as providing materials testing services during construction, please contact our office. Sincerely, UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC. TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM NO. 2101 � g�Pt��f x�s*,�► ;,/ / JAMES P. BAUER /....:......................:..../ � 1 'i 129201 :•�: / GtNI James P. Bauer, P.E. `Joshua A. McCann, E.I.T. Gulf Coast/South Texas Area Manager Project Manager UES 16817 Leopard St.,Corpus Christi,TX 78409 1 office:361.883.4555 1 fax:361.883.4711 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................................ 1 Purposeand Scope............................................................................................................................................................... 1 General................................................................................................................................................................................. 1 SITEDESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................................................ 2 FIELDEXPLORATION......................................................................................................................................................... 3 Scope.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Drillingand Sampling Procedures ........................................................................................................................................ 3 FieldObservations................................................................................................................................................................4 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................4 SUBSURFACECONDITIONS............................................................................................................................................... 5 General................................................................................................................................................................................. 5 SoilConditions...................................................................................................................................................................... 5 GroundwaterObservations.................................................................................................................................................. 6 SeismicSite Classification..................................................................................................................................................... 6 OSHASoil Type Classification............................................................................................................................................... 6 GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION............................................................................................................................................ 7 ProjectDescription............................................................................................................................................................... 7 Potential Vertical Rise(PVR) Discussion............................................................................................................................... 8 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS................................................................................................................................9 Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations.................................................................................................... 9 PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS.........................................................................................................................................10 Rigid Pavement Recommendations................................................................................................................................... 11 Pavement Subgrade Preparation....................................................................................................................................... 12 Routine Maintenance of Rigid Pavement Systems ............................................................................................................ 12 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS.......................................................................................................................................12 Drainage and Flatwork Construction Considerations......................................................................................................... 12 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS.................................................................................................................................14 SitePreparation—Building Area ........................................................................................................................................ 14 SelectFill ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance............................................................................................................................. 15 DemolitionConsiderations................................................................................................................................................. 15 VaporRetarder................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Utilities............................................................................................................................................................................... 17 Expansionand Control Joints............................................................................................................................................. 17 GENERAL COMMENTS.....................................................................................................................................................17 APPENDIX Site Vicinity Map Boring Location Plan Boring Logs Key to Soil Classifications and Symbols ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a subsurface exploration, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical analysis for the proposed Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center - Phase 2 Building project planned for a site located at 6226 Ayers Street Corpus Christi, Texas. This report contains foundation and pavement recommendations and construction considerations for the proposed construction. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical recommendations suitable for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration,field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface conditions, provision of foundation recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report or on the boring log regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The recommendations submitted herein are based on project details provided by the client and the soil information obtained at the boring locations. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design of the foundation, and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, UES will provide the additional recommendations requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. UES operates in general accordance with "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" (ASTM D3740). No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. Page 1 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 SITE DESCRIPTION The project site is located at 6226 Ayers Street in Corpus Christi,Texas. The location of the project site is shown on the Site Vicinity Map included in the Appendix. At the time of our field services the site ground surface was relatively level and covered by grass. As shown on Google Earth TM, historical imagery, the Corpus Christi Fire Department Station Number 18 was constructed around 2017 and the pre-engineered metal building located on the southeast side of the site was constructed in 2022. Therefore, we would anticipate that some surficial disturbance to the on-site soil had occurred. Additionally, as discovered by the presence of existing fill at the location of Boring B-1 and confirmed by the client, trenches were excavated years prior to the time of our field investigation and to depths of about 8 feet in the locations as depicted in Figure 1 below. Documentation regarding the placement of backfill at these locations was not available at the time of this report. The ground surface provided adequate support for our drill rig to access the boring location. It should be noted that the supporting capability of the site soils may be different at the time of construction, particularly after rain events. With this in mind,we recommend that the contractor verifies the ground conditions before construction starts and be prepared to use adequate equipment and vehicles capable of accessing and traversing the site. r ` 41 ; > V _ I Figure 1: Location of Previous Trench Excavations (Picture provided by client.) Page 2 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration performed to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the boring operations, and obtaining disturbed split spoon samples and relatively undisturbed Shelby tubes. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with the "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock", (ASTM D5434). Four(4) borings were performed at the site for the purpose of providing geotechnical information. The table below provides the boring identification, boring depths, and approximate Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates at the boring locations. Boring Identification Depth,feet GPS Coordinates Location B-1 35 N 27.71561' W 97.43804' Building area B-2 35 N 27.71549' W 97.43813' Building area P-1 10 N 27.71559' W 97.43781' Pavement area P-2 10 N 27.71538' W 97.43800' Pavement area Approximate GPS coordinates were obtained at the boring locations using a recreational grade device and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. The client determined the number of the borings and UES determined the boring depths and performed the drilling and logging operations. Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations,the boreholes were backfilled with excavated soil. A Boring Location Plan is provided in the Appendix. The borings performed for this project were used to determine the classification and strengths of the subgrade soils. The information provided on the boring logs includes the boring location, depths, soil classifications, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring logs are included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test borings were performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning hollow stem augers to advance the boreholes. Relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained using thin-wall tube sampling procedures in general accordance with "Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils" (ASTM D1587). The samples obtained by this procedure were extruded by a hydraulic ram in the field. Disturbed soil samples were obtained employing split-barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils, (ASTM D1586)." The samples were classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depths and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Page 3 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 Field Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) — During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration value of the soil at selected intervals. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1 foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The "N" value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. The drill rig utilized an automatic hammer when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of one, indicating minimum energy loss. The results of standard penetration tests indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations — Water level observations were made during the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted on the boring logs provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sands,the indicated depth is usually a reliable groundwater level. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to water bodies, and recent rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater depth. The amount of water in an open borehole largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring location. Ground Surface Elevations—The ground surface elevations at the boring locations were not provided at the time of this report. Therefore, the depths referred to in this report are measured from the existing ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation (further referenced in this report as the "existing grade") unless specified otherwise. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the foundation system for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318), Unconfined Compression Strength tests (ASTM D2166), and percent material finer than the#200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140). The estimated soil strengths of cohesive soils sampled using Shelby tubes were obtained using a hand penetrometer. The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. Page 4 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of soil materials encountered in the test borings have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring logs. The results of water level observations, field strength tests and laboratory tests are also presented on the boring logs. Representative samples of the soils were placed in sealed polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring logs, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur and should be expected between and beyond the boring locations. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test borings were drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Soil Conditions Descriptions of the various strata and their approximate depths and thickness per the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) are provided on the boring logs included in the Appendix. A generalized summary of the stratigraphy indicated by the borings is provided in the table below. Depths referenced in this report and in the tables below are measured from the existing ground surface at the respective boring location at time of the field exploration. The generalized soil conditions encountered at the project site have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength, and plasticity are provided in the following table. Generalized Subsurface Conditions at Proposed Building Location (Borings B-11) Nominal Depth,feet General Detailed Description of Top of Bottom of Description Soils/Materials Encountered Layer Layer 0 10.5 Fat CLAY Soft to Firm; FILL: Fat Clay with Sand/Sandy Fat Clay(CH) (13-1) Firm to Hard; Fat Clay with Sand (CH) (13-2, P-1 and P-2) 10.5 18 Lean CLAY and Soft to Stiff;Sandy Lean Clay(CL)and Clayey Sand (SC). CLAYEY Sand 18 28 SAND Loose to Medium-Dense,Silty Sand (SM). 28 35 Lean/Fat CLAY Stiff to very stiff; Lean/Fat Clay with Sand (CL and CH)and CLAYEY Sand and CLAYEY Sand (SC). Note(s): Borings P-1 and P-2 terminated at a depth of 5 feet below the existing ground surface. 1)Boring B-2 was terminated at a depth of 35 feet below the existing ground surface level. Page 5 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 It should be noted that the depths provided in the above tables and on the boring logs are based on our Field Technician's and Engineer's interpretation of conditions believed to exist between actual samples retrieved. Therefore, depth information contains both factual and interpretive information. Lines delineating subsurface strata are approximate and the actual transition between strata may be gradual or not clearly defined. In addition, variations may occur between or beyond the boring locations. Groundwater Observations Groundwater (GW) observations are provided in the following table. Groundwater(GW)Observations Boring During Drilling Upon Completion of Drilling Delayed GW Readings afterCompletion of Drilling B-1 GW at 18 feet GW at 22 feet 24 hours: GW at 23 feet B-2 GW at 18 feet Caved at 15 feet' Caved at 15' Note(s):Groundwater was not encountered in Borings P-1 and P-2 during drilling. Based on the results of the field exploration and laboratory testing, as well as data from a previous exploration performed in 2011, the groundwater depths are likely in the range of 12 to 15 feet at this site and may be lower during drier seasons. It should be noted that the water level in open boreholes may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and that groundwater levels at this site may be subject to seasonal conditions, recent rainfall, drought or temperature effects. Seismic Site Classification In accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), "When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless it is determined that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site." Since our field investigation has not included a 100- foot-deep boring, by definition the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Site Class D soils should have a Standard Penetration Resistance of 15 to 50 blows per foot (bpf), or an undrained shear strength between 1,000 and 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). The predominate soil strengths within the depths explored at this site generally meet or exceed the typical strength range above and therefore the site should be classified as Seismic Site Class D. OSHA Soil Type Classification The following table provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring locations. Page 6 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 OSHA Soil Type Classification Depth (feet) Description OSHA Soil Type Classification 0-18 Cohesive Soil (Clay)with unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf Type B but less than 1.5 tsf and non-Cohesive soils yp 18-20 Cohesive and Non-Cohesive Soil Below the Groundwater Table Type C It should be noted that the contractor's "competent person" shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during excavation of the soils at the jobsite. Any soil from which water is freely seeping should be downgraded to Type C soil. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet needs to be designed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided in the following table. Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil or Rock Type Max.Allow.Slopes for Excavations<Than 20'Deep Type B 1 Horizontal : 1 Vertical Type C 1%Horizontal : 1 Vertical Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents, but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes, which will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply UES is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. The contractor shall comply with all rules, ordinances and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION Protect Description Based on information provided to UES,the project will include the construction of one (1) new building with a footprint on the order of approximately 7,500 square feet. Approximately one half of the building will consist of two(2) apparatus bays and the other half will consist of office spaces, restrooms, a kitchen, two classrooms, a utility closet, and a storage area. Additionally, drive lanes and parking areas are part of this project. It is anticipated that the foundation, finished floor slab elevation and pavement type will be consistent with the existing Corpus Christi Fire Department Station Number 18. Existine Fill Existing fill was encountered to depth of 8 feet in Boring B-1. Based on the results of the field testing, the existing fill does not appear to have been placed with much compactive effort. Additionally, documentation of the backfill placement was not available at the time of this report. Page 7 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 AMW Therefore, the engineering properties and performance of the existing fill cannot be predicted with certainty. As a result, there is risk of settlement or other performance problems if the slab-on-grade foundation or pavements are supported on the existing fill materials. In order to totally eliminate this risk, all of the existing fill would have to be excavated and recompacted or replaced. It should be noted that the depth of existing fill may vary between and beyond the "Figure 1 Location of Previous Trench Excavation" provided in the "SITE DESCRIPTION" section of this report. It is recommended that where existing fill will underlie the foundations, that the fill be excavated and either recompacted, or replaced. The disposition of the existing fill beneath pavements should also be considered. In order to eliminate potential settlement and cracking of the new pavements that would overlie the existing fill, the fill should be removed. However, the cost of entirely removing and replacing the fill beneath the pavement may not justify the potential benefit gained; and some risk of settlement of the pavement may be acceptable to the Owner. To mitigate some of the risks associated with supporting the pavements over the existing fill, a partial removal and recompaction operation to a depth of 3 feet placement beneath the pavements could be considered. If this option is chose the existing fill should be removed to a depth of 3 feet, the exposed subgrade moisture conditioned and recompacted and the removed materials placed back into the excavation in 8-inch thick loose lifts and compacted to within 92 to 96 percent of the soils maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor(ASTM D697) between at to 4 percent above the optimum moisture content, or as acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. After placement of the reconditioned clay soils subgrade treatment of the pavement subgrade may proceed as discussed later in this report. Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion Laboratory test results indicate that the subsoils in the active zone at this site are high in plasticity. The calculated total potential vertical rise (PVR) at this site is estimated to be on the order of 3 to 3% inches. This PVR value was calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and took into account the average depth of active zone, estimated to extend to a depth of approximately 13 feet and the Atterberg limits test result of the soils encountered within the active zone. It is important to note that the PVR value provided herein was calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and represents the vertical rise that can be experienced by relatively dry subsoils subjected to increases in soil moisture content resulting from capillary or surface water. The TEX-124E method is widely used in Texas for predicting expansive soil movements and has been found to be reasonably accurate for moisture variations resulting from normal seasonal and climatic controlled conditions (environmental conditions). The actual movement of the subsoils is dependent upon their change in moisture content. Conditions that allow the soils to become saturated or significantly exceed typical moisture variations resulting from environmental conditions or exceed the dry and wet boundary conditions established by the TEX-124E method, such as poor drainage and/or broken utilities may result in 2 to 3 times or more the magnitude of moisture related soil movements than estimated by the PVR provided herein. Page 8 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 Differential vertical movements may occur over a distance equal to the depth of the active zone and can potentially be equal to the expected total movements. Undercutting a portion of the natural expansive soils at this site and replacing them with properly compacted select fill soils should reduce the PVR. The resulting reduction in PVR at this site for the three improvement areas, calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and utilizing undercutting and replacement operations, are included in the table below. PVR Reduction Required Undercut Depth (ft) Minimum Select Fill Thickness (ft) Approximate PVR(in) 1 2 2.5 2 3 2.0 3 4 1.5 4 5 1.0 It should be noted that the required undercut provided above is specific to reduce the PVR and additional excavation and recompaction to a depth of 8 feet is required to eliminate the risks associated with supporting shallow foundation systems, slabs or flatwork over undocumented existing fill. Further earthwork discussion is provided in the "Site Preparation — Building Area" section of this report. The estimated PVR values provided above are based on the floor system applying a sustained surcharge load of approximately 1.0 pound per square inch on the subgrade soils resulting in a 4 to 6-inch concrete finished floor slab elevation 1%feet above the average grade elevation at the site. Additional undercutting and replacement may be required to further reduce the PVR based on architectural or structural design considerations, if the finished concrete slab elevation is something other than approximately 1% feet above the average existing grades, or if proper positive and rapid site drainage is not provided around the structure and/or other measures are not implemented during the design, construction and operation of the structure to ensure that saturation of the subgrade soils does not occur. In any of these cases, UES should be contacted and given the opportunity to revisit the recommendations provided herein and provide additional recommendations as warranted. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations We understand that a shallow foundation system consisting of a stiffened slab-on-grade is being considered to support the proposed building. A stiffened slab-on-grade foundation is feasible to support the proposed structure. It should be noted that rigid exterior walls and interior partitions are subject to distress with the slightest soil related foundation movements, even differential movements as small as % inch. Page 9 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 Interior and exterior grade beams should be founded within properly compacted select fill, at a minimum depth of 2 or 2%feet, respectively, below the finished floor slab elevation. Perimeter grade beams should be founded at least 2 feet below the final exterior grade and can be designed for a net allowable unit soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. The net allowable unit soil bearing pressure provided utilizes an approximate design safety factor of 3. The beams should be a minimum of 12 inches wide to reduce the potential for localized shear failure and the beams should be spaced at a maximum distance of 18 feet, in both directions. The Structural Engineer may vary beam depths and spacing based on experience designing and constructing similar type structures on sites with similar subsurface soil conditions. The "Design of Slab-On-Ground Foundations,"published bythe Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. (Aug. 1981), utilizes the design criteria provided in the following table. WRI Design Criteria Climatic Rating(Cw) 17 Effective Plasticity Index 26 Soil/Climatic Rating Factor(1-C) 0.12 Maximum Beam Spacing, Both Directions(ft) 18 WRI slab design criteria provided above considers that the building pad will be prepared as described in the "Site Preparation—Building Area" section of this report. A soil supported floor slab is subject to vertical movements as discussed earlier in this report. Even slight differential movements on the order of 1 inch can cause distress to interior wall partitions and rigid exterior walls or facades supported by a shallow waffle slab foundation, resulting in cosmetic damage. This amount of movement should be understood and addressed during the design phase of the proposed structure planned for construction at this site. Special attention must be given to designing the foundations immediately adjacent to the existing building. It is advisable to place the foundations for the proposed structure at the same level as those of the existing building. If the footings of the new addition bear at a different elevation, either the new or existing footing walls, whichever are deeper, should be structurally checked to evaluate whether they could accommodate the external stresses imposed by the shallower adjacent existing structure or new footings. In spite of these precautions, some minor settlement of the existing building adjacent to the addition should be expected. PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS In designing the proposed parking areas and driveways, the existing subgrade conditions must be considered together with the expected traffic use and loading conditions. The conditions that influence pavement design can be summarized as follows: Page 10 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 • Bearing values of the subgrade. These can be represented by a CBR and a Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (K). • Vehicular traffic, in terms of the number and frequency of vehicles and their range of axle loads. • Probable increase in vehicular use over the life of the pavement. • The availability of suitable materials to be used in the construction of the pavement and their relative costs. Recommendations for rigid pavements and preparation of the pavement subgrade are provided in the following sections. A traffic study indicating the number and type of vehicles on which to base the pavement design was not provided. The light duty pavement systems are designed for pavements that are exposed to passenger type vehicles only and their associated parking spaces. The medium duty pavement systems are designed for pavements that are to facilitate heavy truck traffic such as delivery vehicles and fire trucks.The recommendations contained herein are based upon our experience with similar projects assuming normal vehicular loading. Rigid Pavement Recommendations The recommended light and heavy duty pavement sections are provided in the following table. Heavy- duty rigid concrete pavements are recommended where heavy trucks including fire trucks will use the pavements. Rigid Pavement Light-Duty Heavy-Duty (Passenger Cars& Parking) (Driveways) Reinforced Concrete 6 inches 7 inches Lime Treated Subgrade (6%) 8 inches 8 inches Concrete pavement should be properly reinforced and jointed, as per ACI, and should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Expansion joints should be sealed with an appropriate sealant so that moisture infiltration into the subgrade soils and resultant concrete deterioration at the joints is minimized. The joints should be thoroughly cleaned, and sealant should be installed without overfilling before pavement is opened to traffic. Concrete pavement at least 8-inches thick is recommended for the trash dump approach areas due to the high wheel and impact loads that these areas receive. The concrete pads at the location of the trash dumpsters should be large enough to accommodate both the front and rear wheels of the vehicles used to pick up the trash dumpsters. Page 11 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 AA OF AMW Maintenance or operations managers need to stress the importance of placing the trash dumpsters in their proper locations to reduce the distress trash pickup operations place on the pavement. Allowances for proper drainage and proper material selection of base materials are most important for performance of pavements. Ruts, birdbaths and poor site drainage allow for quick deterioration of the pavement primarily due to saturation of the underlying base materials and subgrade soils. Pavement Subgrade Preparation In areas where the pavements will be constructed, after all surface organics and deleterious materials have been removed to the desired subgrade elevation,the subgrade shall be proofrolled using a heavy pneumatic roller. Any soft areas identified shall be removed to firm soils, reworked and recompacted in place to obtain a stable and non-yielding subgrade. Additionally, any areas featuring undocumented existing fill soils should be treated as previously discussed in this report based on the Owner's acceptance of risk. Upon completion of proof rolling, the lime stabilization operations shall be performed in accordance with TxDOT Item 260, "Lime Treatment for Materials Used As Subgrade (Road Mixed)". Based on the results of the Atterberg limits testing for the Subgrade soils and associated curves provided in TxDOT Test Method 121-E, LIES recommends that the pavement areas be mix lime at percentages of 6 percent based on the maximum dry unit weight of the raw Subgrade soils as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698). The lime stabilized soils should be compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by a standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at or above the optimum moisture content. Routine Maintenance of Rigid Pavement Systems The pavements will require routine maintenance such as crack sealing and joint maintenance for rigid pavement sections in order to achieve a desirable life of pavement. Without proper maintenance, moisture infiltration into the base material and subgrade will result in rapid deterioration of the pavement system. LIES recommends that the owner protect their investment by incorporating an aggressive maintenance program. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Drainage and Flatwork Construction Considerations The change in moisture content of the plastic clay soils is the primary mechanism resulting in the volumetric changes of the supporting soils. Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations. Some of these measures are outlined below: Page 12 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the structure and site flatwork through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeters and site flatwork. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundations and site flatwork should be designed and implemented. • We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during, and after construction. • The top 2 feet of utility trenches should be backfilled with low plasticity clays to assure the trenches do not serve as aqueducts that could transport water beneath the structure and flatwork due to excessive surface water infiltration. • Clay plugs or collars should also be installed inutility trenches just outside of the select fill building pads and/or underfloor areas to prevent water from moving laterally into the structure or improvement's select fill pads or underfloor areas, whichever is applicable. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the structure and site flatwork should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundation and flatwork at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. • Individual concrete panels of site flatwork should be dowelled together to minimize trip hazards as a result of differential movements within the flatwork. • Site flatwork should be designed to drain quickly with a minimum positive slope of 1 percent. • In areas where movement sensitive flatwork is planned for construction, if it is desired or necessary to reduce the PVR movements beneath flatwork, the expansive clay soils should be undercut and replaced with select fill as discussed in the applicable sections of the "PVR Discussion" and "Site Preparation - Building Area" sections of this report. Page 13 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 AMW • In areas where non-movement sensitive flatwork is planned for construction, and extending 5 feet outside the plan area of the flatwork, all surface organics and deleterious materials shall be removed, the upper 12 inches of exposed subgrade soils should be scarified, moisture conditioned to a minimum of 2 percent above the optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 90 percent and not more than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698). All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the improvement areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in South Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Site Preparation—Building Area Where the building structures will utilize stiffened slab-on-grade or floating floor slab foundation systems, in order to reduce the PVR to approximately 1 inch and to eliminate the risks associated with the undocumented existing fill, it will be necessary to remove soils, organics and other deleterious materials to a depth of at least 7 feet. The excavation should extend outside the building footprint and any appurtenances(including porches, attached sidewalks, stoops, etc.)for a distance of 5 feet.The top 4 feet of material should be discarded, while the remaining material should be stockpiled for re-use. Once the excavation operations in the building areas are performed,the stockpiled subgrade soils shall be moisture conditioned and recompacted to a minimum density within 92 to 96 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and the moisture content shall be maintained between at to4 percent above the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified, the soils should be removed and recompacted in place. Upon completion of the subgrade preparation operations including moisture conditioning and compaction of around 3 feet of clay fill soils, at least 5 feet of properly compacted "Select Fill" material should be placed back into the excavation to achieve a final subgrade elevation of 1 foot higher than surrounding grades. Properly compacted "Select Fill" soils shall be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts. Each lift shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. The "Select Fill" shall be placed in such a manner to provide a uniform fill pad thickness supporting the proposed buildings. Excavation of grade beams may proceed after placement of the "Select Fill" is complete. Page 14 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 During construction, existing footings must not be undercut, i.e. no excavation should encroach within an area extending 45 degrees downward and outward from the outside edge of the existing foundations. If this is required, then UES should be retained to provide specific recommendations to maintain support of the existing foundations and lateral support of the excavations. Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the #200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1% inches will be permitted. The select fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and at or above the optimum moisture content. Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance Exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at the foundation bearing levels if excavations remain open for long periods of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the foundation excavations be extended to final subgrade elevations and that the foundations be constructed as soon as possible to minimize potential damage to the bearing soils. The foundation excavations should be free of loose soil, ponded water or debris, and should be observed prior to concreting by the Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative. Concrete and flatwork constituents should not be placed on soils that have been disturbed by rainfall or seepage. If the subgrade soils are softened by surface water intrusion or by desiccation, the unsuitable soils must be removed and be replaced with properly compacted soils or base material as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative should monitor subgrade preparation. As a guideline, density tests should be performed on the exposed subgrade soils and each subsequent lift of compacted select fill soils at a rate of one test per 2,000 square feet or a minimum of three in-place nuclear tests per testing interval,whichever is greater. Any areas not meeting the required compaction should be recompacted and retested until compliance is met. Demolition Considerations Applicability. Recommendations in this section apply to the removal of any existing foundations, utilities or pavement which may be present on this site. General. Special care should be taken in the demolition and removal of existing floor slabs, foundations, utilities and pavements to minimize disturbance of the subgrade. Excessive disturbance of the subgrade resulting from demolition activities can have serious detrimental effects on planned foundation and paving elements. Page 15 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 Existing Foundations. Existing foundations are typically slabs, shallow footings, or drilled piers. If slab or shallow footings are encountered, they should be completely removed. If drilled piers are encountered, they should be cut off at an elevation at least 24-inches below proposed grade beams or the final subgrade elevation, whichever is deeper. The remainder of the drilled pier should remain in place. Foundation elements to remain in place should be surveyed and superimposed on the proposed development plans to determine the potential for obstructions to the planned construction. UES should be contacted if drilled piers are to be excavated and removed completely. Additional earthwork activities will be required to make the site suitable for new construction if the piers are to be removed completely. Existing Utilities. Existing utilities and bedding to be abandoned should be completely removed. Existing utilities and bedding may be abandoned in place if they do not interfere with planned development. Utilities which are abandoned in place should be properly pressure-grouted to completely fill the utility. Backfill. Excavations resulting from the excavation of existing foundations and utilities should be backfilled in accordance with Select Fill. Other Buried Structures. Other types of buried structures (wells, cisterns, etc.) could be located on the site. If encountered, UES should be contacted to address these types of structures on a case-by-case basis. Vapor Retarder A vapor retarder, with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms (ASTM E96), should be placed under the concrete floor slab on the properly prepared building pad or carton void forms to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the supporting soil through the concrete slab and to function as a slip sheet to reduce subgrade drag friction. Polyethylene film, or polyolefin, with a minimum thickness of 10-mils (0.25 mm) is typically used for reduced vapor transmission and durability during and after its installation. The vapor retarder should be installed according to the ASTM E1643, "Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs". All penetrations through the vapor retarder should be sealed to ensure its integrity. The vapor retarder should be taped around all openings to ensure the effectiveness of the barrier. Grade stakes should not be driven through the barrier and care should be taken to avoid punctures during reinforcement and concrete placement. Placement of slab concrete directly on the vapor retarder increases the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling making good concrete practice critical. A low water to cement ratio concrete mix design, combined with proper and adequate curing procedures, will help ensure a good quality slab. Page 16 of 17 ReportGeotechnical Engineering CorpusDepartment July r 2024 Where vapor transmission is not a concern, elimination of the vapor retarder may provide improvements in finishing characteristics and reductions in the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling. However, exposure of portions of the subgrade or granular layer, such as at blockouts for columns or utility penetrations to inclement weather during construction may create excessive or deficient moisture conditions beneath portions of the slab that have already been placed. Blockouts for slab penetrations should be protected if a vapor retarder is omitted. ACI 302.1R-96 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction," recommends that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be used only when required by the specific application. Utilities Utilities that project through a slab-on-grade floor or walls should be designed with either some degree of flexibility,or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion and control joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structure. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed Corpus Christi Fire Department Resource Center—Phase 2, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of UES be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation excavations prior to concreting in order to verify that the bearing soils are consistent with those encountered in the boring. UES cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundation if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for UES to accept any liability, then UES must review and agree with the plans and perform such observation during construction as we recommend. All dewatering, sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 17 of 17 APPENDIX c C a Q E 0 m U ti - � m 0 0 W U 0 c c a) L Ld Y C U ~ N aU W a) X N C N Q .N tn " a)C U T Q N H O = - 0 v a 0 a vILI W 0LT0 - W a U ~ N N Z N 7 W l.0 Q U U ol LLI U -1 ! O 00 i LA 00 f� LLI n � Ln � M ;A Z 1 CW w C — Ln Ln 00 QW C LL m H w oC 0 Z — a 00 V a r, cr x W o m U .Z> en • • Q 0 U a - CL ` . a C L 0 v Q J 00 j of b-0 O � • e N N W 41 N n a r-I w O r • �� N Z O v U d '�. O (n a) LU (D u C _O Q E O � U N 0) .c U � c _ c a U ui p F ! 6 N O N Ou W N x E ° .N 1i `^ v a)C U C L Q N H N N O N w U i� U' j a U 1 W N Q l.0 LN U -1 i V n � M z ° 00 W M (13 Ln C — z Ln aLn Q a v J F. o cyi oo Ljj CL cc 0 a _ A' a oo O x O 0- Air 1 / � Q i 0 O v � J oo b O N N w 41 N � C rl Eo l9 w O li N t ' m +; a > O Ln v w W , 0Z) LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %/ U E E Rock Enginerring&Testing Labortory LLC PROJECT: CC Fire Dept Resource Center- Phase 2 Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6226 Ayers Street, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 Y p Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124240 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 6/18/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wLu p > Groundwater(GW)encountered at 18 feet during drilling. Of ? w GW at 22 feet and caved at 27 feet. J � F Z r > o Delayed Reading:GW at 23 feet and caved at 25.5 feet. p D �LLC7 U U U N m Z 0 (n(n U)(n K (� (n Z (n co 0 0 ��(nZ > > Q ¢ w 0 � Z Z a o 0 0 L o ii ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 00 00 sS N=4 22 60 20 40 77 FILL: FAT CLAY WITH SAND(CH), dark gray and brown, 00 00 moist,firm. 00 00 ST00 p=0.5 23 65 21 44 82 S_2 Same as above, brown, soft. (CH) 5 ST P=0.5 35 57 19 38 80 S-3 Same as above, gray and brown. (CH) ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=6 19 52 24 28 64 g_q SANDY FAT CLAY(CH), brown, moist,firm. 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=3.0 18 35 16 19 115 1.7 62 S-5 SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL), brown, moist, stiff. ST P= 1.0 19 108 0.7 Same as above,firm. 15 S-6 ----- ———— ———— —----- -- ------------------------------ Ss N=20 19 35 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense. 20 S-7 N SS ' N=21 23 25 S_8 Same as above. J w ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ Y 0 s 9 P=2.0 26 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND, brown, moist, stiff. Z 30 w it a 0 w SS o S-10 N=11 21 Same as above. N 35 N Boring terminated at 35 feet. c� o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: 0 Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by UES at GPS coordinates p N 27.71561 W 97.43804 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %/ U E E Rock Enginerring&Testing Labortory LLC PROJECT: CC Fire Dept Resource Center- Phase 2 Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6226 Ayers Street, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 Y p Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124240 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 6/18/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wLu p > Groundwater(GW)encountered at 18 feet during drilling. w ? � Dry and caved at 15 feet. J F F LL zp -j r oo Delayed Reading:Dry and caved at 15 feet. p D F w w U U U N m Z 0 (n(n U)(n K (� (n Z (n co 0 0 ��(nZ > > Q ¢ w 0 � Z Z a o 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS N=12 22 8-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, dark gray, moist, stiff. ST P=4.5+ 21 69 22 47 84 S_2 Same as above, gray and brown, hard. (CH) 5 ST P=4.5 22 S-3 Same as above, brown. ST P=3.5 23 58 21 37 82 S_4 Same as above, very stiff. (CH) 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.5 18 111 1.3 CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, stiff. S-5 ST P= 1.5 20 32 17 15 51 0.3 46 Same as above, soft. 15 S-6 ss N=7 24 34 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, loose. 20 S-7 N SS ' N=12 30 25 S_8 Same as above, medium dense. J w . Y ; U. ; p ————— ———— ——-- SS S g N=17 28 CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist,very stiff. q.� 30 z : w ' F. a w — —— —————————————————————————————— w s 10 P=2.5 26 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, brown and greenish gray, moist,very 35 stiff. (D Boring terminated at 35 feet. o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCEco REMARKS: Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by UES at GPS coordinates p N 27.71549 W 97.43813 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING P-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %/ U E E Rock Enginerring&Testing Labortory LLC PROJECT: CC Fire Dept Resource Center- Phase 2 Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6226 Ayers Street, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 Y p Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124240 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 6/18/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: z Lu Lu 0 > Groundwater not encountered during drilling. w ? � Dry and open upon completion. z g J H F LL O J H } O O D F�LL� U U t� ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - z a 2 o 0 0 Ln o a a r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° 0 ai uai z a 0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 1 ss N=5 22 68 17 51 83 FAT CLAY WITH SAND(CH), dark gray, moist, firm. 2 S-1 3 4 ST P=3.0 23 Same as above, gray and brown,very stiff. s-2 5 6 ST P=2.0 2a Same as above, brown, stiff. 7 S-3 8 9 ST Same as above. a S-4 P=2.0 25 N O ti 10 o Boring terminated at 10 feet. wi 0 0 a z Lu it a 0 LU U- v N V N_ o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: m' Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by UES at GPS coordinates p N 27.71559 W 97.43781 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE J LOG OF BORING P-2 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %/ U E E Rock Enginerring&Testing Labortory LLC PROJECT: CC Fire Dept Resource Center- Phase 2 Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6226 Ayers Street, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 Y p Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124240 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 6/18/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: z Lu Lu 0 > Groundwater not encountered during drilling. w ? � Dry and open upon completion. z g J H F LL O J H } O O D F�LL� U U t� ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - z a 2 o 0 0 Ln o a a r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° 0 ai uai z a 0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 1 ss N=7 18 FAT CLAY WITH SAND,dark gray, moist, firm. 2 S-1 3 4 ST Same as above, hard. CH S-2 P=4.5+ 20 67 20 47 83 5 6 ST P=4.5+ 21 Same as above, brown. 7 S-3 8 9 ST p-3 0 22 Same as above,very stiff. S-4 N O ti 10 o Boring terminated at 10 feet. wi 0 0 a z Lu 0 LU U- v N V N_ o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: m' Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by UES at GPS coordinates p N 27.71538 W 97.43800 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE J UES 6817 Leopard Street r/0 Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 UESTM Telephone: (361)-883-4555 Fax: (361)-883-4711 KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE GW .'• Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures,little SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of weakness or no fines that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP °�� Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures,little FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks,frequently AND o D or no fines filled with fine sand or silt;usually more or less GRAVELLY vertical SOILS GM ° Silty Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of O varying color and texture,usually grading from sand COARSE GC Clayey Gravels,Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS SW Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or no blocks or crumbs on drying fines CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities of Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or no calcium carbonate,generally nodular SAND SP fines AND WELL GRADED having wide range in grain sizes SANDY and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle SOILS SM Silty Sands,Sand-Silt Mixtures sizes POORLY GRADED predominantly of one grain size SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip graded) ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour,Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA AND CL Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity,Gravelly CLAYS Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays,Lean Clays LL<50 _ a — Groundwater Level OL r Organic Silts and Organic Silt Clays of low plasticity (Initial Reading) 1 — Groundwater Level JH Inorganic Silts,Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine (Final Reading) Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' SILTS — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays LL>50 ® — SPT Samples Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity,Organic Silts m — Auger Sample Limestone a — Rock Core NON x x x m — USCS x x x Marl/Claystone Texas Cone Penetrometer MATERIALS x x x Grab Sample ••• Sandstone TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO.BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO.BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ.FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50- 1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"of Fine Grained Soils is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer = saawag6uuaaui6u3yojuawpeda4 a3AOO 0 "t m oo �?'r`s��y+ `tr waarv,w".w SVX31 0 0 �o (; lFW I1SIHHO SndHOD to A IO SMLXI ISNHosndeoo`iss93Av9zz9 113SVHd zauiUeua 'a31N30 3OanOS3a'ld3a 3aU3 CO NOI1d-S]a Aa 31tla ON NOISIA38 N011dlaOs3a Aa 31tla ON NOISIn3a al9 e03 YSSl 6ZOZ'�ONnI l 13S 031Ni10JN00 I lszoz'ev nj Z 3 £��o¢w O " as GG� d dwQG < o � � a d dooY� d� oou owwss:aaw Jg""�4"�gaJ u�E � d� so ««< sG CC da �""���"Q oo 8woo8oa8o8 x oo��ssssa� �$ cco g w <g1sss ssss �ww o03€ u w � i'a �aaaa mmmm""m a`��Qo,sa�a z s gss n amgEggEggEggEg�a�aSs�6 S ll »>l�l�a $$ 8 g aWy aYY 1aa 99 .. HN sd Z �8�8uu'm5 �ugg3333�66g6 'tl'tld binbb � 44 ��3? g d m 3 �� www dddddddd ddddddkkkd u� �w �wum 8�Nesss3 as`s� XI $'a � `N a a daeM M`ary`g O z w 0 W O o z LU z - W �� �i U o LU Lnn U O z W a + a ay�w 2 � ffi 4 Ma �' cU O = > N w m °�o� n C/� w o J 1 0 C/� w Q W zo e z CC Q V = m ¢ O _ 0 ~ o a U z o to' LL W W¢u U a m� O � U U Q CL W LU w L.Lc —. w -yy 6dN ��m tH 2 Q w a U WM oN i r y 5� $ p LLJ � 8 d Z � _ isy� roc 5 �13 s�� _off LLJ ®Z ar � N saOwag 6uu98ui6u3 yo iuewyedap SdVW`d3HV aNV NOIIVO0l oar"` 1'�+ m rowan e°w06 SV(31 o i 0-) a �o (; (pl; USIHHO sndHOD 10 A113 SMIXl'LLSWH3SndWO`1S SO"9U9 II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'IMN3O 3OunOS3U'ld3a 3HIJ S a wuaep5ao .Le 3<va ox xasuan rvoudta�sao ae 31va ox ra5in3a OIS HOJ 3no >ZOL'AON'II L US 03Wa0jN00 SZOIM-U L �P� FAO \ • • f bob p • • W.LO J 0 • ` ' 0 t•• / , I 0 W H - JA `r a r 0 1SS r� i CD SOONOS 6uueeul6u310 iueu4edep N011t/il\dd3S o StlX31 ONV ONI11X3 3HIJ kmviNv f1S 3000 0 = rn ; pl; USIHHO sndHOD 10 AII3 slre AV[%'usNYJSMWO`1sSe3SZZs 1 w II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'U31N30 30af10S321'1d30 3HIJ S a NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl NOIlMtl�53O A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl Ole H03303S1 >ZOL'AON'LL L {� pp 13S 03WWjN00 SZWldM-Uj Z i 7 -I o, o 5, o o o 0 o a' o o o o i Q / \ II I z I \ II I 3g3 G I ; 1 II I g It o o I \ ® II y b I � w II I o Fo S � { ne! fis I i/ z50 I wA __l_ I W V0 W cn I 111 ILVLL ` of o o-T W 51 QI o 0 0 0 � ��y LLILH U 315 S $ Sad J J u of g ,o s� < o�3mp� � o 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 o 0 o 1� m o4 rG�ew�� 9 lo A 888a : y3 b t sc g I y g R dos amgv3O .. ol e5=• m 5 U) I Q � I � G € I < g I Z 2 w � LLi "LL I F- X g 1 W b 1N 1 }} W _ 1'o l 0 1 1 $ gi 6 �Q b g Umg§ffl ,Z � � <a �¢ saOwag6uuaaui6u3yojuewyedep S1N3W an03HIVd3N3J "oa�``_�1' m rowan e°w06 SV(31 N USIHHO SfldHO0 io h113 9L/801'USWH3SrkrdM`1$M"9ZZ9 _ L II 3SHHd C w zauiUew 'H31N30 3ounOS3U'1d30 32113 S a o NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl 018 NOj 3no >ZOL'AON'LL L J3$®WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z Y$ 1.5 NffiP 12 Zia � � �aap�paa a���.e �s� �° 3a, tam Q�� ao " 8 x� A , S < a f�¥4!i88 p V V o....w� ;Gg3 £ w�8 g s w oq & 3m� R IN a g3�s� s� 's< f_S m 3 <. „E W 's g w s < � a s < s $$ yH u —.Roo. s»EE1EE�EEEE3 g a o pgI��£ � � €szi ; gm s w w rfl < o 9� 2298 M S �� 2°3 8 zo aI p=�EE0 H DIRE° . € 89<' sg M o o �g LLLLLL LL�3�°=== �f, <a ;3 a u8pmH � €I ��„ ° gig.= as s apewa �%8ga � 6�� o a x. asm o ws w€ mw ° 1 g QaLL S <>7 8 x § -. < ! 5� G�t 3Fgot gg w o d°A;W � ° wz s= a w o �sgs2sB=m . $ " gig �� �43 °, a=,o wzt SSW 4' sou 8 0 Lc <` w 3p P a �� a E� �aaV@ w3� g; a< �< '°x `f. se 8a8-RH3s w? 3 �wa-'o'o gp Q y gel wg� a 8 8 8.< w 8 9 m�° '88£aassawwwww < » xw �w o �E oho pp p� u s LLo �� e pa°� pm H� ��> .wH �ws s x � o; pa w saasa m aaB F£asa€....... Mx $ o � �g: a m f 8 Mr Mk J. '.... effgs Za�1 � M Nff6 Ma E ms<w aa fi 8 ° Hs ° «5 w co r E F ; C4 Q 2 : $Sg IS sLL 0 _ z L w g w s. _I co17 r �¢ saOwag6uuaaui6u3yojuewyedep S1N3W an03HlVd3N3J oa 1'�+ m rowan e°w06 SV(31 �`'� pE; USIHHOsndHOQiohll3 SMIXL'LLSINWSNrdW'lS MAY 9ZZs zauiUeLu 'IMN30 3odnOS3U"1d3O MIJ S CO NOLLdtl0530 A9 wo ONNq— NOOdltlOi30 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl 018 Wj30SS1 >ZOL'AON'LL L y US®WWJNOD I 19MM-UlZ �y� &; 1X31I53�`Jlw-09Ol.oe t(VW .4 �F'a �$� 1S3N-0�09O1.6.'NIW po�'ae W Hill l -t Mu Sg=� W FG Hill z IIII U r H W of 9s ��K' p� �o�u a �9 WW ° u uj 6u6 0 44. LL �6 co `td A.. Cl iE go W - § y} a 3 w W W O M1,k O} w�5 ,.A 4 S U Z 7 � —.H Nona o3,noaw�s yy �'LLB$ o J� W _ W n CN r-- Ri J - � 2i 'q SS Q $ „ {L ww.ar wlw As 2E F- Lj 2 ; W E fi Z ZU e;$ ° O Nlws t ➢_ aQ F W ., w O xF E j O W a� wy 11 It aw ,-- s LL N F U M� W Q saOwag 6uu98ui6u310 Iue uyedep SISAIVNV 3000 311S "oa 1' m rowan e°w06 SV(31 USIHHO sndHOD 10 A113 SL/BL XL USWH3 sndwo 1s SIUAV 9Zds II 3SVHd C zauiUeLu '2131N30 3odnOS3N"1d30 3613 S CO NOLLdM1530 A9 wo 'ON NgSN3tl NOIId"3G A9 3Lv4 'ON NdSI/dtl "Ontl SZOZ'B3i'¢ l 139 GM80iNO'J I ISMIM-UlE 4 g _ w z i_ O J I— s z w4 J O Z w U row wm z ~.1 R<m I o� w Wa I ° LL I Q LL I I I � � 8 A � 3 � z b � LL �I, Iwo HzII o = oN o 2" x —LJZILOU� �� � oQVi O�voz' wg � m " rc iJFu o i� S€ a n <Q w O p22 x `=& s s i $q U �` 53 �' £$ if if w 3 LL Ig o o 'm $ w �a k� .gg Q Hai xjxg€� 8g O ww 3 O ,` u�` '`w+.nN saawag 6uu98u16u3 yo luewyedap S3118N3SS`dln o m "oa 1+ m rowan e°w06 .SVX31 L[J ; p1; HMO SndaO0 io h110 MolXL,USWWsndWO`1s MAY 9ag II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'U31N30 3OanOSM U30 3HIJ 8 a NgidMla3° AB 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJaia Aa 31VO 'ON NdSI/da a a Wj 3naal >Z°L'AON'LL L YY US03NWJN00 SZO M-U Z 3w f .S 88 g,f B i zap ass g Fs°R %€ Rlfr A 'a6Y bvg FIBM- gs_to gaa. . E�b,� +� E sa s Peas � B gas € " � €ESF � _ d � gag ag�BgE °� €gs s aEm aa° orY E!a ' � ! e% z saa� '9aaa �€ ILI &" aF�� aye a;" >B J%I a`' % E n `a a� 9 g Ya gga m 8 3-t£ Y� af Vie£ s� sm aFe Q' atb $ e a asga s° ® Y �sss m 4 � m9 m s "t£� � � $jSatb bae bge�s $ 39 bg. YyggO bw � �Yg��a �� as �� E� {�$ zge ,g; �� ;ap �9 ��B �� a ➢a ee �,: ggt 3 s�<<e � z�g�g£- ��� :as f spa .aE , a = b a £z m • a $` a�n 7 sat: v €'a: € �§b I n >ns =g^• m£s a agar . �`'s• m € Um sat! � s $n se- a a 1•i gn $am �$� a° _ Eli�€ frp. aJ 8� z I_P #Yg pn� pp n$ apt u 1= H] aYB � �°a �9c � a`E s=y agv a$ Iggag HIJ '41 �z g 8 Rt- $ ° fr n- ° ='a Fagg C P ". - a°°£ YY t gfr ` 5 �° 3;- g, fr=t= £�s •; tc S$ �f $a € gel ➢$= t@�!� g� a $�� 9 g. g P n " Fa frm �'$ LL• Y � .E g•�$¢ � •5�. 5 `€4. §D� z � e�aw 1=� ' ; gy ® ire 4 s g ss� a �aob�a sae $ $ 33® � 2_$ bgFF V LL a a $ e g `s �P €t$8 H1 gg -, Hi i ���ag2 �Egmgm �g�� �a� 4z��®�b��i� E sFB p11 �£�� aag �P Ili :xg1 $� 1s£a O I a" }. 1i$ s F"g lag 8 o � g€ s€ ".� "c_s_ sin £Y € ofl Icing g vac z fl'a $a= Y Ia=fa - -g a'L'9' 3ta 'aEn ae� inY E s� 1 Hi J ' t f RR 8 t t8a $ i 6 § 4 £ ,�a. eE 8 af" :,as � $ god Ya az$E�°• s to aF " s E_ 6 a 0 3b' = �ga k s" °°g �° ma"3se ^__ ! gg E§ - 2 5 5 u °"°°y _ �$ �$ F af� sc¢S4 sae gw HEg�;Iqi � a s a f as " LLS a„'$ § G €� €aY aea� `�$ s`•t 98 g a�$ gaPF �a P Y � e , x oa :SY a� Eftmda a*q.g 5€�- a-ge §E esg. z€yz f °� gip^ gs £= .. , . fg8 n t I.gap=a t j$a ° aa'3 pn 'ag €' EE a- t sg I. b 5 'g== a s a € g >aa J 9�s � a g° t8 ' has : 3 t--s maba . 08 = ; T sgF< _: I �& Ea% .9 i HRI =6 0 M; `'•c f y g a ° a a a^ s t _£ ?�ggS7� Y"B �LeLL€ �a3y5 `gR s ,� e;� t "� m $N ofax east aks ' � a a ;$: ss - g as a:- $ 8• ry..^t ' a?Bg sg k by $-ag g3. fre£s as`s ��� §.s` a•<e. °ag,g3Paffia F ° � � t i"a" a �g;� �Ly�� Ej�' f�$ 'e ' z Y$�� $tee g a`�8�o�Y85£Eg�f���s se "a, a s% .�'s�e ss` �^ agt aLLz`-te".n sZ �F_' _ eases g g_ a Ea Yba c £« a"Yb-�- s€ fraf p a gsg gg- 808 a a� fraaof tte - s a [ _b a$:- 8€ $ ,g 8q e B MY s 'Em _'}' a a x e 5 $swg as gaes� Eae $f Y �➢ s `s�-`=sig 9 s "tg age t xjJ iay • < ay a eB6£ ss $ 's€" bag f � g M as s = H�.— °Qb a a=� e8 ells= ip- $ a_ tYbs °t` Eg ttr aR 6 f g- % s� $g £T- peFx• it g 8 sti.P ggga s a a "aS"aaS Y bnaR=` =E B •Ys5 °fa a�rr�a "ss-eS�sa5� �8s gtt =i t �- �$s s eye $ :,- £ as °t aE $_ °•' 4 �i app _�,£� a tel a"b, a g gg s° _ � E s"gmao8 a� 8e -e 8g"F°s�seaf R�€£r frb. aka - sa a 3 mr� s €£ 5 as I_ a 1F 3 ! $s Y" "a ^ £ £' �° " �`s•`�`e s'-,� g"; c$ ,£f�f $ a^.Y K sag. as n s - € fin a8 a ; x sq`- F € - 8' € £la• s `8sY s $-� se� b�.�fra"i s"a ,� aGp$E $ bag Yg9`#ag€ gaM a" , a£s m$ P,e a$- i$afvg �acP 38-= �LL T- B I 4 -- sa i8c�� a88 S ads an a frse _3 a s 1 c -�saa ➢ c 4' Wi $ ' a "` HMO am E li'-a =.Y -g_.00�j a;ga 8 1 tl 8 "a� 8 a 8g - 8 "`m;i„-gE a Y £gffi # gsY €b'a� Pas F 4 i z u . I S a _� F��_'•�j� �P a^> a a �Bg m3 L ° i; g£'safa: x I` 's i„ _?� 3 Iia $ b abs v i 7ms a^° 4 ?Ygry`F `x €t�s8o ,E �n �"a l 3 £_ - �_ ooge3� �erx gas r °� my £ s,aa K Et g w i�a g _ g9 7 _ , YQ£ a a- se 4 a say°y 4g as ;e'daa€_Fp� 1� .• n��a €bf� 3Es e" "'o as3asH£ gaF w a a=na_ •" is Y a€, $ - - a_m t� ;f$��•. S - ?R'ais a'.nnYYB "aoo w - m sa` _ =?4 xy a € sins $ I gal HIMlit " e = n n ? F =, n-s;b6ma i n = . s3zaa}RR gt < �g< 'a 3b t€ s� 4. ` s @�v. c a555s � � � � � g ab •� - � ac a Fo " sga H gaaE m v ar oaa4 838E 5;aa €ga Fs �E"E� sag €€f blf N€b3me ELL by a 3 - .`� _t is a s rf gi� E _ Yea $g -fr9Es YEg a- y ng� gg g - - "a �IQ a'ya VA aE _ F. 5?a °a •�ni,t b a t $ sp ab- a� yy n Bin n LLN0 < $ "_ g � a £W eeeeeeee<eee � '� 8 a�8 S p.s a - nm 4 az_ k� s� ® ;. § n_ a 2 E s°- 'g �•R N UN, g ps"A'a3P'AMA Y 3b �a sb' C a a #-` b=Y m t afr g .:..: E J` b asgg �a N Pe s °y®.a 9 aE` S g---• -HIM e A m n5 s` $�➢.� I �a a LL w ro t g a aj s y nt 7tf3 a=x�V`€ I Jul um `a 4- a R £ z_ €g. §" ;% H� fQa,e�t a g £ • as 3 ' syxa sN � 3s;z a4 %a < s °LL aF� gw # E a as s g 8z x Fa o?F :S $ $ xg IN 3s" a fFo 6 g 21 8 ill w ¢fin a to s"a2 z n`t g "aa as =gEm;aEm p & 3 n & 3 Qa o °, � rr � � oaf �€ ea 9°Y as ""�"_"_ sYa "`� g^K s•s iEt � y 3'yy�`s� a � I � � � y LL R� � w �E'; � 6 S ¢ �� SEO.^ �s Fa ffr—� An���A����S•iA sti °� �$ �"�� i� b�Y�aS maE Fb s � a !°� K i 8Fy$frsF Sap .3 8� " € si 8 zmn�gx$ A:a t w 't Y . a g eg 4 1Y" ta=$as gg o 7ag = m ev '� ee aBa E ig 3'a#. frM s es & LLs s 1s u W F, € a� 1a 0 Fs w - ^� €aa m ti na d $sE `g 'C € a rw ins$ a s •`, a^ u t ' be�ga w" gy m s = a m�S w msES ggF. _x "ass€ f s • z s a e S K� f K a ;='x @s. Y• dl -s. g 3 f3> = a 3a `£ fin £-- 18 Kx a =s 1 K u e ss faE B 8 $ �f 8 €s 8w €s_g '� ; LLfa B gab?£c g ji t'€e $g w s"- seas of i `e a oa gg 5 0 - S: 'aEaYams a BFxssf 8 _ 8 �°-�z - k . NS u o °', = 3fm Y_=. d 3.A sa Sa �af1fE6V e §, sY gs has eta R s T .fie B E. Es m z z Et aas� g°S� Yb a a R1 E i g %£ za ss f 921Fsx £Fga e E i i aim SP , E e 88£ gay; a . b Ia5 18Y 18 oFB Iea 9Es A orpg� � e� £oe� xg J8 :Ea, m5 � Yea`93 ° p r $ � aaPn A ads p b aY G o p < a Y e E E s € 4 E: Sea m It. ,m5s °f b mo 8 . Ye y' $z3 w 'ss $ $ f e : 1 51 g ' °b e - a a'aFa€ s s .a fl 9 8 = :flg a ; ig f s o s p a ffi 2 e :af zg b an 3m 2 � •ga w ea � _ g a ® � a � &E � �^ €tee° sas ggb �b a �� ° a ° � �f a K ff i w - m s Y " Qsf 8 1 ;I @a gm; se� 3g Sg� t s £ B3 g s m: v s F �" -° w e . Y a s a y w ?°�o aE - p s a " e 6s " $ k £ � � agoBY = &Ee a € $HST $€gY $$o Yrg � =a aaz C - 5 # K Es ar. CD plo sanwag 6uuaauiBu3�o uauaueaa° SION Wd IIN30'S a3AOO IIAI3 o w o oQaeg4 d, 4 SHX31 0 U o I1S121HO Sf1d2100 Jo AllO 9MI xi lislaHu sndao `is sa3nv ezz9 0 a .s II 3SHHd RM zauiueua m 2i31N3O3O2if10S32i'1d30IdIJ p NNidI� NOI1dl-O 'ON N01511,tl ale and 3nssl bzOZAON'" ES 03M OA00 Szuz'aVIN'zl z co i � Z - co 3 •k',F o �b b�Ba 6 - W �-_- Bib he LU -EN U m sifi RpIll ��U 99 X :cc :cc - p W w = o & g - S 8 =ao _g do - O g n� z z z z o oaf` # - a a we rvN�; pz W a oFoo e �. d o 0 0 — z_ - oNy a - a oho€ WHO ¢a H In W LLJ = w ¢¢ _o�maka=a �' S aB o oC ddg¢ opoF C�o�� Ito ¢ _ �x"' - aw� a - �; �aE "bow z - - =4 "a €r�w� J � �o wsN - a rw o=p 0 4 M --H o am w d 3mwo= a _ a �££ a oawa =aoP - a o=a - xaw a o a `< =pd Goy pN�pB -gowg`F m`i nwp N �� F p o8 _ i� €ate •,� �`o _ �i4 r a - =a'€'. S'=' e €pppga 3p = a€ Gk'"a'� 3 _ -`__ � � - _ 6 " _ il'JapQ - d'^= - €o - ;�oY m� d<�� o'a o�.=ax La �€ dba - _ r�2`= wBuo2mkw.¢ pew€ �a - � ova¢ p�>ann Sawa Hs z=� ` €" LL �mn .=god oo a a Sao "o� ag„8 a�- - - - -- O z¢ z¢ J _ a " moa��e yamwo On ws _ Boa_�,. GeJ=' - z - - oaazw=apop�a'a - d 0 Fpa sas .a= �_`o^�� a �a x o 0 og = - - NA LLJ a� as-= - H (n ¢ U U ¢ - jgo - - LLJ W - J 3m m _ - - - - Uoo�<d�ey� -ao - d d dw e - �bo5"oo=gmSa �"rsa ob€=dwgo - - U ee� -- - - - g���m mo<; my <o �w F" - - o_ >000,j�O _ o� RR ��������P���gSgWSS - s ge=����„ "'Se da,,�3�«<w««««GGGG€a�� ob�Sa=o N a off-- -- z - �"'o w� waa �Swm4 w'6" F of acKo�..s b..da"s`s:3��0003F2a mga�`>�EE¢g o'4000�0o a o`==i" oozo��'E'"d wa o8ada%¢Wy¢= N C> Nre m� r" ""_r.,>"e�mw _�_r.,�"e�m m - --_ rrrrrrrrr.= ire"e-mP r.,>=_r.,- _r.,-"e-mw �" --_--_ --- ad - saowaS buiaaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 (.0 Mdld N0ISN3WI4 IVaAN39 o It woss a,„„uae= ua SHX31 o O� iisidu snddOD JO Ally awatxi'usiaHasnaaoo'lssa3nvsaaa w s �� = II 3SHHd sk�e. 3== z u!usw 2EiN30 302if10S321'1d30 3dlI p NOI1dI—N 10 IiIN N 09— NOI1d180— ON N019- a1aW0 3nssi VNZAON'11 l 13603kb0JN00 96oz 2vna Z C i G z �#._ LU LU `l e a ------------ Y I II i II �I I i I I I N I Ig l �. I if � s III i �� r ��:. �.. zrm�• I I a 1# I y i I III T ---- ---_ —_ av�d,edt,oa,o��i ais—v I � n ad - saowaS buiaaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 (.0 Mdld NOISN3WI4 IVaAN39 o It SHXR o O� m i # usidu snddODJO Ally awatxi'usiaHosnaaoo'lssa3nvsaaa � w IN sk�n� __= II 3SHHd U a � , p... 3== Z 2EiN30 302if1OS321'1dK 38 p NOI1dI� 'ON NN— NOI1d1N-0 'ON NMI- OaWtl 3nssil VNZ'AON'11 l 13603kbO1NOO 96OL21vna Z C i G z �#._ LU LU m W ege l� --- � I �I III I i i 'i I n m - - d I I " ED I I �I j = IT I a• av 11e111-o11) -s—v I � n a - saowag buiaaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 Cfl inOAVI 1NIOP'R NOS103S 1N3W3AVd o It o aMM s a= SHX31 0 O� IlSI21u snddOD Jo Ally s�eae xi'uslaHu sndaoo'ls sa3nv szzs w ci o e� In' = = II 3SHHd �a= zawusua 2EiN30 302jnOS321'1d30 3dld NOI1dI—N 10 IiIN N 09— NOI1dI80— ON NMI- alaao33nssl VNIAON'L1 l 135 O3Wao3N0'J 9wO vIN al z cm z NB ebb Z yJ a-o 0 Z o ? a 3E= M W E �sHI —7' � 5 c I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E I - I I+I��T I - II I II I� I II � I d I �a II� o I II g I _ ice II - I I � 1 II ;, I -y Ili a II I I i a a - saowag buiaaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 � inOAVI 1NIOP'R NOI103S 1N3W3AVd o It SHX31 0 meat xi'usiaHa sndaoa'ls sa3nv sans o fn =N zs _ "�. d I1S121H�SHd210�J Ally V w `` =ss=�e� = II3SHHd 3n_u =' zoupiew 2i31N30302if1OS321'1d3032i1d NOI1dI—N 10 IiIN ON 09— NOI1d180— ON NMI- alaW0 3nssi VNIAON'L1 l 13503Wao3N0'J 9w0 vn al Z cm a 'SC L ebb Z - 0 Z 1 - W r � —— I —7' � ska I j ICI i II I I I i I ------ — < u j� ss II I I = I I I I� I I � I I I II I I �a 5 I I® III — I I IIa n I I I —y li Il ,r, LA � _______ a - saowag bulaaauiEu3 jo juawueda4 (.0 NHId SNI(MJ9 d o a ms a= SHX31 0 O� IlSI21u snddOD Jo Ally s�eae xi'usiaHu sndaoo'ls sa3nv szzs w ci o e� In' = = II 3SHHd �a= zawusua 2EiN30 302if1osar1d30 ldlI NOI1dI� .-Ng—— NOI1d N-0 0 0-Mi- OaW33nssil VNIAON'L1 l 13503Wa03N0O 9zOLavn al z cm 15 o Agar ff b £ cm w s € sa s e 8 a s ? eye 01 <C a 8131 z KO Y ` WIN a $ g C7 2 � Q U E VOZ-O 133HS 33S 3NI-lHOlb'W IS es o f �'. I F 1 oe A p III II D� U Ek �f i r�rs j. �I W�g 11 s. A �I d NI o mk 14 6 Ila I " l + --- t ¢---- ----- -PP �- AN �s" +P " y 9 (1vjd,adnAoa,OL) 133211S S2i3AV a - saowaS bulaaauiEu3 jo juawueda4 (.0 W Q a sq4 NHId SNI(MJ9 SHX31 d �N u - iisidu snddODJO Ally awatxi'usiaHosnaaoo'lssa3nvsaaa w � _� g qso __= II 3SHHd 3== zau 2EiN30 io2jnosarid30 ldlI NOI1dI—N 10 IiIN ON 09— NOI1d180— ON N019- alaW0 3nssil VNIAON'L1 l 13503MDJ N0'J 9dOL vn al Z cm 15 o Agar ff b £ cm a w s € sa s e 8 a s ? eye 01 <C a 8131 z KN gg Y ` WIN a $ g C7 2 � Q U E HbOZ-0133HS 33S 3NI-lHO-LVN M a oli �o �9 �° d ;i kk �y6 o � I a a N Ek �I I + a ge m F oe I III Il ao F sp 1 Z U 1 Ek 99I r�rs g, a N a oe +,o I I l�0 a� �I s I 0 I I ..ia Ila I � I g +r + PN+ #I P/ tv oPPN --I—k1Ag$@ otX—�����--�—_—"aN -- ---- --�----- — --_ --------- --- PN z � o� o o sN - e � o y 9 (1vjd,adnAoa,oL) - 133211S S2i3AV ad - saawaS 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 (.0 NHId SNI(MJ9 o w� a ass4 a,„„u e= ua SHX31 0 O� 0 ld;H iisidu snddOD J All: w 9�ea:xi'usiaHa sndaoa'ls sa3nv szzs ci o II 3SHHd zauiueua dliN30 30?mosid'ld30 38i NOI1dIt1 N 'ONNNg— NOI1d80— 'ONNMI- alaao33nssI VNZ'AoN'11 l 13603Wao3N0o 9zozbmZ Z S Cm z � Z LLJ LLJ 55 tS c tS tf LS 8 t5 S �E.$yyg Zo W evo 2 O �5 MIN � z �g U a U E +m I I I I i III �°a + �°' i li + I + I I II � I I I - II II I a I I I I I ° II 0 + - --- �- � R R 1 I 9 III r� �awl a tm—rn <m cm w,— � { k•. k � k gm kC d:el Ind I I + + I IV I BJg I °+ a I F r a� I £02:-O 133HS 33S 3NI-1H0lb'W ad - saawaS 6uuaauOu3 jo juawueda4 (.0 W Q a34 uu = ua SHX31 NHId SNI(MJ9 o m.. �N �u�€- iisidusnddODJOAll� watxi'uslaHasnaaoo'lssa3nvsaaa w e.a =I n's� � 11 3SHHd zauiueua dliN30 3amosid'ld30 38i NOI1dIt1�530 '.-Ng— NOI1d80— 'ONNOI S- a1e30330SS1 VNZAON'11 l 136 O3MO3NOO 9Zoz bmZ Z S Cm z � Z LLJ LLJ 55 tS c tS tf LS 8 t5 S �E.$yyg Zo W evo 2 O MIN �g U a U E f m I I I I i III �°a + �°' i li + I � I + I I II I I N ° II I I I III � II III � I II I I I `+ I I d el { I I � o' °+_ ro 5 Yid ro w am—rn <m cm tM— y , { k k k w r k kC { 8 99 me Ind I 3 I < s I IV •a r I I BJg F I 9 kk Z6 �W r + f g _ 1" kk ` M8 -O 133HS 33S 3NI-lHOlb'W sau!I buuaaui6u3 ja juawueda4 (.0 g NVId kinin o o a es SVXR 0 0'') I1S12 o snddOD JO Ally awatxi'uslaHosnaaoo'lssa3nvsaaa w a o � 113SVHd a gar zeupeua '2i31N30 3o2if1OS32i'1d34 32i1d NOUl s3a oNNas— NoII ONNMI- Oleaod3nssl VMAON<' < 13603MO1N0O 960Z 2vna CM LU LU Z na- - - II� 8HI� 3 �8�� IIlog eOH BIN ��a ng dNR 0b'�S War a I � g tie s - a. nn.a3;�� g - p 5 3 _ Y d F } � I� - f � ts ,1- I I o II f II o I I� II ell - II � II N N I lyl I I J 'l1 I ' 1 OR PI- I ma--�-- ----r-3a c— r'hr=;M Ai4i—im�w lei—`W— S �� � iaaale saenv ad - saowaS buiaaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 (.0 g NVId 39VNIVbO o It s s u = ua SVXR 0 p� o m � _ s�;H usidusnddODJ0 Ally ' meat xi'usiaHo sndaoo'ls sa3nv saga =; s -` II 3SVHd 3== z u!usw 2EiN30 3odnOS321'1d30 3dlI p NOI1dI� ON 09— NOI1d N-0 'ON NMl- OIa W0 3nssil VNZ'AON'11 l 13503kbOJNOO 96ozb IN2L cm e Z — _ n a 4LU _-- W = =----- $ � � $������ �II � II I ' aa2rygp�t A amAce � i A � '� - i r 4 $ RSR8 a- � �D — II veeeeseeveaeee _ jII III ='- E ENS AH'5 � r f E k o �, �<6.2.6o� 7 e - <<< \ 1. J 1 \ _ I f I 'smogs I " ao s` A � F^ !gl as QgO _ a Eli Un $� -- ��a G2 saowa buuaauiBu ojuawUeda Wd � o � =a S 3J O SHX31 NOLN3A3bd NOIlflllOd a31HM WbOlS iisidHo snddODJO A113 awatxi'uslaHosnaaoo'issa3nvsaaa w �yy�� 11 3SHHd =s o zawueua 2EiN30 io2jnOS32i'1dK 3bld p NOI1dI- 'ON Ndsn3a NOII 'ON N1ISIA3M OIa ao3 3nssl 9ZOZ'noN'V 4 l AS 03MOJN00 96oz 2vn a Z COe i _ff n Z a" o 0 a v iD _ 1 _ - �� N 1 m a 5 1 1 el In t'- I _ 9 1 1 I _ 1 III. _ ; I e 3 - E. I� _ 7a - e I - - i Um— P � a e I V I II $N � E v /I a th.. gr — Ril fln E oraaa � � 0 - ss,H3, v 80 $ 'aid ExN - saawag6uiaaau&3jobuamueda4 SlIV130 JNIAHd o SHX31 O� e ,e,,o USIM0 snddODJO A113 ee 'uslaHasnaaoo°lssa3nvszzs o w II3SHHd aga zoul1jeLudliN3D 302if1OS3d'ld3a ldl1 p NOI1dI—N 'ON NN9— NOI1dl— 'ON NOISV3 a and 3nssi VMAON'11 l 13603Wa01N0a 96oz bmNZ dZ cm i Z W g $ h g o 9 g us 553NIpIU,9 �2 'g€�O— lain u gs�p 1W. 9 I' b II o ` 53R1dA;9 3 F? r e a sa 'NIN,5'Z �s Jo�ab1 8 r Ba} 48 &y zb �a a b m fig® •by37b19 JIM � ��� P � � Hai w g aup-mmmv� O E E741�_ b Raw CE b _ •I a �� y p p3�a eke --a� - saowaS buiaaau&3 jo juauauedad SlIH130 Alllllfl o � NQae= SHX31 o 0-) USNH0 snddOD JO A113 se iisiaHu sneaou`is sa3nv szzs — o `C) ben� 113SHHd Zauiusua o CO 'dHN3O ianoS32i'1d34 3bld p NNid18B530 1. bN Nd9.1 Nnlidl-p 'ON N0111111 no aw 3nssi ezNz noNu � AS 03M OADO 'm aVIN ul z CMvi 0 W, g _ Z 0 a g SKI z - ❑ 08 C W CL Eo w g LLJ Q LLJ V1 -� op > -�Zm w owo Z si Q" x m Z Q C7 _ " " " gy m 9 g Z 5 \\\ O J zaH g° o °�,4a� �N a o� o�w ❑ • °mom ��z w4 m - - - �- w o�P yu Gm mSP � ��zp N Gw w W J ii o 'o� . =o p z ,o how °¢ d Q � wW�'pi Q°_ wWx wazm w pOmm° ¢mo mom x� �wwwOom `o F Cc W 0 �� Z 'm W n LD H mpo - _ m� m z - zw ';� �❑ ¢ ("tee 33sv V) CL 22 �OOOOOOOOOOOC a s w F wog m Z � _ ep i ad - saa!I 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 � =M uu = ua SHX31 s SlIVl34 b3M3S WbOlS o a s mq �`rvr usidusnddODJ0 Allyd;H l s w swa:x/'usiaHa sndaoa'is sa3nv szzs � =ss��e = 113SHHd zauiueua d31N30 3odnOSEld'1d30 38i " Noy I s3a oNNaa 3a NnIAN-0 oNNOI 3a als ao33nsSI VNZAON 11 l AS 03MO0 N0O Im bmZ Z C i Z W o o i cm = e8 W o ff ;q i e A / ,g Oi rca — o wWa Mo °�w'W^ oo h h�"ai Boggs "� �Nsb o� N em IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII ' III III IIhIII III III 3w o= �III _ ,o eew� mae0 m E Bo„�= Wopp,w sp o oo§osg�a�,° II III III-III III III °j M8 - o €,z o Eli H isN Q o Cc W € Me 'woB � Jmry yoo N �$ v � Ywee� wwa �� C3e fi� "F�zwSglw � �s 3wa zw og,W so�� a� Ezo - saowaS BuuaauiOu3 jo juawueda4 � °T Sl VEG AdOlS lOGXl j It w o 4 3 ¢ s a,'„a,°e= ua SHX31 ��'��,�,/, iisidu snddOD JO Ally was 'usiaHa snaaoa'As sa3nv szza w II 3SHHd np.o zauilleua dliN30 302if1OS32i'1d30 38i NOI1dIt1�530 '.-Ng— 0 ONNOI i- a1a30330SSI VNZ'AON 11 l 13603MOJ NOO 9ZOz bm ZL Z � z" W Z c�'9 a w LU zQ a3� v i W n E B V tl5 G P ti 9 A OC In ui d o ? ui 2 a �t8 cx o ,F-z . c u•`. Q `III (dA.V 2 hu�W>k 0 W Ln W W 2 N a N n Om0 mCC2 14,, to m K' lNeia z � G3O — O W a ci v OHO ` r a W � OOO � mm OElm Q C fi b Fz 9 9 417 1VOHW1 cj ero��az Saewag6uueaui6u3yojuawtedap N`dld 31S N0lIl0W3O tEa g` u:�1 o �o k;�'/` tr �w�rv,wvew SHX31 0 O� USIaHO SAdHOO)p A110 SMLX1'I1SIHH3Sndaoo'lssa3AV9zz9 II 3SVHd C zauiuel_u '2131N30 30Nf10S321'ld3a 36IJ y S CO NOUdY�53O A9 31tlO ON NOISIA38 NOI1d-30 A9 311 ON NOISIn3a a9 803 3nssl 6ZOZ'AON'Ll l 13S 03Wa0JN00 i 8m ZLI Z 3NIl Ala3d0Nd g b ; k k ✓ 111 & & 3 3 i `a a � z z a j f' wLU W - iTT�' TT ; --- — -- �/¢o% 0 a LU _ F 4 $LU 40lGI0l0I0 Y � $ 4� H k$ 4� �w p� �p E� _ 3Nn Aia3doad is sa3n> .. m m Z 0 sS"d> my WO T S31ONA3N (•1 2 12.MAR.2025 11.NOV2B24 CONFORMED SET ISSUE FOR BID REVISION NO. DATE v m BY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II T 6226 AYERS ST., CORPUS CHRISTI, T% 76415 g m 0) DEMOLITION OVERALL FLOOR PLAN mOFFgMY§§gOff gmm am. o� 4 A�£3 S31ON 1VZ13N3O REVISION NO CAIE BY DESORPRON CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services Marunez Architect LP Houston. Texas 77339 �¢ sPwag 6uu98ui6u310 juewyedep NOIDIOW30 NOUVA313 9018 o �?';' \ w ry e SVX31 0 alo USIHHO sndHOD io u10 MOLxi'USINNOsnrdOO'IsM"wzs L w II 3SHHd o cozauiUew '2MN30 30af10S321'1d30 MIJ a NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dItl�530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl 01880330SSI >ZOL'AON'LL L z US®WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z qb I I I I I I I I I I I a Lu Wo W ' Wm �w O cn �N CM M ao a ss � �10 I� �I 15 a3 ng � , I I FW- g3t mo O1p m I ° goo og o 1 I >z Y 1 ° 9 zw a I I I `$ .E Hogo I cpodGg o a b 3� E 9IT "I Rlo � QpQsy�� ' �� gy �8 6 ���e�o $��Q p�_ p4PM y�._w �4��GG �� op Lu a w $ io3 p qop� �p Po' w�+ s£8' ° f W I W a=44p �agyw _�88 � s 612 z €g p �€ Po G €g oa s ga Aga kbr r a . ° 6 wwo = m a saOwag 6uu99ul6u3 yo juewyedep NVId 311S 11"3AO o It p � mrowan SVX31 o i � a tW s' 11SIHHO sndHOD 10 ulO 9WOU'LLSM3 SNdWM'"1S M"9U9 zauiUew 'U31N30 3OanOS3N'ld3a 3613 S CO NOLLdtl0930 A9 wo "ON NgSN3tl NOOdIKS30 A9 3LVO 'ON NdSI/dtl L#O'W SZOZ'B3i"¢ l 139 GM80iNO'J I ISMIM-UlE S 8 n m_ i4m_R°6' 3NIl A183dOMd LU w 5 � I i 1 I I 3 I ' I y �II �6p s I z I I 3 I I , yp I - I c ��a 6W� I wp� I LL 3 g $ s LF- 6 n / x`3 �i ti 5 .`� a>ww y �!zla 3� g W ,`�'�°o �'�<'. SIX. 3 ` wow=a� _. _ 3Nn u83do8d 8e Uh bSooG94 12 `i N°�Q�SLL�� %p 'Msui r O m g w aoo �, # aoLLeB<pp8�<maow�€ r saOwag 6uu98ui6u3 yo juewyedep Wd 311S MEAL/lN3 0 m mo ''\'�+ ei wwarv=wwew SVX31 tW s' 11sIHHO sndHOD 10 u13 SL/8[%1'LLSItl1YJ SNdtlOo'"1S SL3AV 9R9 cn ZeuiUew '2131N30 3odnos3N"ld3a 3613 S CO NOLLdM1530 A9 3lW 'ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ53� A9 3Lv4 'ON NdSI/dtl l#M SZOZ'173i'¢ l 139 GM80iNoo I ISMIM-Ul g E Y� „ Z a ,T w m. 0° Q J Z o � i WN p U' my _ po W OO O K I c V w � E 8 w � LU m1 z � 111N : Y F. i TTT ; ay giF 0-jogF -"s soot§ 3 Lou _ 88 8�S�m pg 8 J e f saOwag 6uu98ui6u3 yo juewyedep SlId130 311S o It m SVX31 o i0-) a N (W ?I$ USIHHO sndHO0 io h113 SMIXL USINN3snaa00 1SM"9U9 L w `n II 3SHHd o CO zauiuew '2131N30 3odnOS321.1d30 3HIJ S a NOLLdM1530 Aa 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJSia A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/da oa NOj 3no >ZOL'AON'LL L USMVMJN00 loonmul Z z5" �g s° a O -> sup az Z W LO LO o 8; a zz az N 6 =U L� b � b 8L d o § V IF am z p g 8 �2 a w8 J o ogoxp wp op$ z w3 8 FS�` a g mz a aN ay m Q =Ei-8 Zo o� d� N Q g o $ r F a F I Z i Oo <uSS kpw � J n 20� 3 o o� Hig OU a r Q pl; SOONOS 6UPON 6u310lueuwodep NVId WOIJ IIV'd3AO a It .�, �' StlX31 � OD ; USIHHO sndHOD io ul0 SMIXl'LLSINWSndWO'IS �AY9ZZS _ Q 'wrr� 4p µ• V o II 3St/Hd zauiUew 'IMN30 3odnOS3U"ld3a MIJ a NOLLdtl0530 A9 wo NgSN3tl NOOdltlOi30 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl 018 Wj3nSSl >ZOL'AON'LL L US®WWJNOD SUZIM-Ul Z X < TT S2 a sL N p I O ® O O ® p — — — — X o I <I o I I I IN I U �I W 3 F w I� e U U tr 0 I w no I I I a7 I erm� 3 1=r� ^ I tLg _ IM O _ _ J I �@ H ° ® .—.—._.—._ _._. .--- .------- —.I — >u, LIJ ® III - K¢ 7 it i i Q 09 X X 1� � o 0 0 p ° ., p � "88 co cF � I w Yw 8�LLm:m i5 3 1 F e I Q gix. 1 Q' 4 1 a � Q y HIP $� � w PHI 1 ZZ�p� ggg�HI� L 1 Q HIM D " 1 00 ro 0 1LL '" a"UN t,$44 K'fl4g J' .."11101 � a I Ww has o ��f& c3eog Lu as sth 8l"aw,48d8� iIFi 8 a w 0 46 d o" LLdm Y m z 0 mm 'aD r r em p C m z O 0 m D z r mm cn- 1H 0 I 0 dl� O 1 0 0 1 2 44 O • r 0 S31ONA3M 9 A, 2 s 9 A 3111a3H3S 3Bdd 2 1 REVISION NO. 12.MAR.2025 11.NOV2024 CONFORMED SET ISSUE FOR BID DATE BY DESCRIPTION RE':ISON NO 1 SATE FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AYERS ST, CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 7B415 OVERALL EQUIPMENT FLOOR PLAN CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martinezt Marunez Architect LP Houston. Texas 77339 saOwag6uuaaui6u3yoluewyedep NHId b001�8W3d llHb3AO o It m StlX31 � O-) ; pl; USIHHO sndHOO io ulO Will X1'USWH3 srdwo`Is M"9ZZs _ II 3St/Hd zauiUew '2MN30 3oijnOS321'1d3O 3HIJ CO NgidM1530 A9 3lW oN NgSN3tl NONdtl�530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl oa NOj 3"M >ZOL'AON'LL L US®WWjN00 I 19ZIM-M-UlZ oI N of �, < I 1 0 o I I ' I I °=I I III I II sp ;II I I m Q I I II 12 Q I 1 I II --25.i 1 \rr It I III m i l W 1 '� III Wr 4 w qi€ W I � I3� W II < U �Fa ' M.2 O w -mo112 o Z 1 Iitl d Ix O � 48 In_ 00 w, g g m ; §�� ova >91 O� I i I III 1� IT o _o 0 0 oL X to I. o I I I I Uhl, En I I I I I I I U %� I Z In I X 1 w Bpi It € i °o m � 1 J g m �3o d4 J m Ea333m� I I I I 1 z g<4 m i 1 y3is3EE W Z W 0 amu°wLL saOwag6uuaaui6u3yoluewyedep NVId NOOld NOISN3WI(I IIVH3AO o It m SVX31 O� ; pl; USIHHO sndHOD io ul3 Mol X..,USWH3sI1dwo,Is M"9zz9 _ II 3St/Hd ZeuiUew '2MN3O 3OijnOS321'1d30 3HIJ S CO NgidM1530 AB 3lW ON NgSN3tl NONdtlA530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dN OIS NOj 30M >ZOL'AONLL L US®WWjN00 SZIM-M-ZL Z clq o� al o or+ o o — — — — — — � ' b � Q 1 I II w z III N U I —� - - - - - - -�-II w � o A-A �r s EE A-a w w w 1 D.b " O I I - UJ ' A A Z w �w >� I I I I I sl M X X X X oN.N—w.�+ N3aox3N oN�riao.x� I a I I I I I I I I m 1 I I I I I I I 1 Ln 1 W I 1 Z 1 J 1 a 8$ , ILL =p I 0 w n $p 2 L w W =sow I > Z �ggwVY�4g�m �Qs�0000��a I I I I I w Hog....g211 I I I z w saOwag 6uu98ui6u310 juewyedep Wd NOOl3 3dAi NOI11121t/d llVd3AO o m StlX31 Q p1; Lim USIHHO sndHOO io h113 M91 XL'USINlo snaa0o'1s se"9ZZ9 w � II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew '2131N30 3odnOS3U"1d3O 32113 S a NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl NONdIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl oa 8 0j 3no >ZOL'AON'LL L J3$®WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z SH "s tt �$ =3" a � s=mmm 4=0,� €wto 2 g<g3 p°o z " &2229 sB g pew o� "M H Wv br��io� goo � � a� �p �ogm�� o"000 Po a s„ V V���€§ a LL�m c) o S� o 0 �o � II IN MM � II tt B uB n � J LL o " a JJ r gy9 LL � jog= ;=s° a M F &Eg =g8 asg o 7.H9 rc4�5 s5�< YL---il w.o,9� 01. ;M p 8 o 0 0 F = " ou No€� Q 6c x E soep HUM. dEi aW W Z w amo saOwag6uuaaui6u3yoiuewyedep NHId0N11130(MOTEH11"3AO o It m SVX31 O� ; p1; USIHHO sndHOD io h113 SL/BL XL USWH3 srwwo Is M"9ZZs _ Q 'wrr� 4p µ• II 3St/Hd o zauiUew 'IMN30 30af1OS3U"ld3a 3HIJ S COa NOLLdtl0530 A9 3lWON NgSN3tl NOOdltlOi30 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl OIS NOj 3no >ZOL'AON'LL L US®WWjN00 SZOIMU Z d 4�G a g$ G 4 wmwS< S3 0 J ffo a �Olo9 s z y W LU 41 pFpa �gzL4 ®0-1 ® ® ®' ( ® ® ® 211ea P �0 �m ono a o §3LL R Z W w Nno LL �LL <m o. �mLL I �i :ALL =t< Q <�m mom saOwag 6uu98ui6u3 yo bus uyedep NVId JOOH o m StlX31 � O� ; pl; USIHHO sndHOD io u13 SMIXL'USWH3SndWO`1S MAY 9ZZS Q 'wrr� 4p Lim µ• II 3St/Hd o zauiUew 'IMN30 3ounOS3U'ld3a 3HIJ S COa NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl OIB NOj 3no >ZOL'AON'LL L US®WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z �t gH �,g �gF�' g U.- �p�;� �� �Ng,p A p �o a off ; a W 6 �=w& s o ze°Epasp�8s li > E9af LU v � I I I I � I 1 I rc � p I I I I � I y 55 v a IIIIIII _ _ _ I ' IIIIIII �\N ry� IIIIIII � ^ I IIIIIII I I I I I nl ^ I I g - _ - _ --- Zo T,!-E LL_ O W ° O Q 03 CD 0 c x m a 0 m 0 0 2 1 REVISION NO. 12.MAR2025 11.NOV2024 CONFORMED SET ISSUE FOR BID DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO DATE BY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER. PHASE II 6226 AYERS ST, CORPUS CHRISTI, T% 1B415 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martinez Mar.ez Architect LP Houston. Texas 77339 sPwag6uua9ui6u3yojuewyedap SNOUVA313HOIH31NI o It m m N � ¢e� a�v>aewiv:wveN o z # StlX31 � O� Q ( - - 9 OLXL'LLSWH3 MMM'"1S M"9ZZ9 rn � aIW � IlslaH�sndao��o ul� .¢p II 3SHHd o m ZeuiUew '2MN30 30af10S321'ld3a MIJ a NgidM1530 AB 3lW "ON NgSN3tl Ng1dItl�530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl 019803 WO >Z9L'AON'" L US®LVWjN00 I 19MM-UlZ HH 3; w 0; wPh � Jw m G < < E4 G G m g q. �i rn $ x `3 <z G o 's°p HIT LU LU O r „ m w w 0 Q U)4 ° wa z 65� b brc n w o Y ww G rd ❑U � u M o 0 a W _ J � z w 3 c ww Uy N m �LL m i F F N z w m z N r O Y z z z " ) O O O b J w w -w z J J J Q W W - W d n �4 F4 a F4 � H4 .- N zw N YU la OU OU b b b o C 0 U m Q m� sPwag6uua9ul6u3WReuyedep SNOUVA313 HOIH31NI o It 4E�,,,L.�'8` N ��'i SVX31 0 rn mQ (� � - - S OLXL'USWH3 SfkrdM'"1S MAY 9ZZ9 z rn ~ �Cj aIW � IlslaH�sndao��o ul� II 3SHHd ZeuiUew '2MN30 3oijnOS3N'ld3a 36IJ S CO wuaw93o Ae 3<w ox xasuan rvar�xs3a Ae 3<va ox rvonln3a Lp OOtl SZOZ'(13i"¢ Z 3 13S(BVMJNOO I ISMIM-UlS 3 3 3 3 3a 3a `6� �Sa u a Y5 k� 5 -k. Y.. 8-- 2 ..Hp All wd o LU Li o we € cs ;a4 O � p z #gw# #=fag =a s s =s «sg z8mopd Lu65 �o'" ab LU �N O O W � W IIL m W c W W.• W5 wt,, w� sb U U Ly ti¢i WLL ® OU ® O 0 5 j W I W I w 4 O O O O `� O O ab W W > > g� III• ry (A i I UJ W o k W® o \ ,, CL I IL o w w., N wm U U `<LL �w �w O & M M M M 0 I C) m Q � z z LD Lll a w ® w -- s s w w� �� I U� U� a Lw U-! OR N i 0 U o a Q w w W W W � W O O O O _ w a w w Cl) W — O O a a W. W. , , wp t w9 of. w? N n n.a Z) �u W, U� b Ju Jti O - o 6 r r r r m� Mwag6uuaaui6u3yojuewyedep SNOUVA313 HOIH31NI o It 4E�„ e` vn �?'/ \ SVX31 0 O- mQ (� � - - 9L19[%1'LLSWH3 SfkrdW'"1S MAY 9ZZ9 z rn ~ � aIW � IlslaH�sndao��o ul� .¢p II 3SHHd o CO ZeuiUew '2MN30 30af1OS321'ld3a 3HlJ 8 a NgidM1530 AB 31V0 'ON NgSN3tl NONdtl�530 A9 31VO 'ON NfNSI/dtl 019 HOJ 3OSSI >ZOL'AON'LL L 13S 034VWjN00 I 19MM-UlZ tj a= aF5w -h how a E� s =s os 3 0 s _ w � � � 2 p w}h w'C % i W i , '3OF � T� !I8 g g a45�k3 a45m�l � 3Qa'8 30a f 388 p p 8 RP U) SSre le$ pp _ �. H a. wz hH LU i .e s 5 x % 3 � O O ro w �m zM c w J ® d O O ¢ 0 O w 3 w IT l 'n Wy 3 U)Q z^ U). �" �s wm w� 0 m� pw Ow wa �� 71 - N - �� N ®03 �Fa a Sid ¢ � p 0 00 p F- F- w w & & F- .� U) m w o w o w� w� �w U) w^ Z Zw r r r r cl U co Q • :)SNOIIVA313 NOItJ31NI - IT USIHHO sndHOD 10 A113 •3mjnOS31fid3G .. III�I�I�I�I�I iii' Ijljljl 0 • ' o IIIIIIIIIIIIII !�!�lIIIIII�!���IIIIIIIIIII 11ll1Ill1II�Ijl�l�lllllll�I IIIIIIIIIC..... jljljljljljljlj i i i�l l Ij � ��� IIIIIIIIIIj Ijljll�jljlll : glllllll�""' I�I�I�I!I!I�I� Illlllljljljljl -' liiiiililililil ... • �.a.W�u ........ 1111111111 11 I'I'I'��� Ijljl'lilililil 1111 I I I � I I:P• rr1!I!I- a nnnnnnnn■uuoiu. .j.I.j.j.j.j.I. w.•naMna•.xr��vN rewrrr. " lilllili••••.•• i Ijljljljljljljl _ ■'I = Ij� �■ - .•.�.�.fir.•..--- --- 'i i i i i i i �I� II�� - _ -- III I r.•.r..r..rrrr..r.•`'rrrrj j.j.ljljjjljjjj 31�1�1 � . - - - ,'� • .. � Ijlll l l l l l j�� ���� ��I I� 1111�111 i i �!jl�li IIIIIIII��IIIIIIIII �������� - - , _ IIIIIIIIIIIIIII I:jI:i 1IlllINNIllUM! 111111111111111 �������1 IIIIIIIIIlip1-��IIIIIIIIIII : � Illjllll,,oi� I�I�I�I�I�Ijljl�l�l�l�l�l�l 111'1111 IIII �� 1111�1 1 � I I I I I I I I illlllil•�.�.JI- I I I IIIIIIIII [I 111111111111111 I l m��lrrl� nillll���' • jllljl • ■j■j■'■j■I lilililill■Illi®Illil'nlilil j q � � jjjjjl�jljjlj ��!��!I!I� ' IIIIIIIIII � " = 11111111111i1lI Illjljllll nn11111c -- HI I Ij I I I I �aaaa��a•� II gljlllllllllj�.. coo. - 'i 1 . I':ijljljl�l�l�l . . .� I I I I I 1 1� j•j•I;j,I.j•I.I.,.j•I.j.l•i . I!'illllll � III IIIIIIIIII 1Ill1Illlfljlji� c' I•I.I•I•I� I.I sPwag6uuaaui6u3yopewyedep SN0003SONI011no o It m SVX31 O-) � Q SL/OMUSM3 SndWo`ls M"9ZL9 aIW -A IlSIaHO SndaoD 10 ul3 .¢p II 3SHHd o m zauiUew 'IMN30 30anOS3a'ld3a 3HIJ a NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl ols 8w 3nssi >ZOL'AON LL I. Bs 03YRgjNoo I 19mm-ulz o� �rt s M oa §n N =" W LLw> o $ Y �a 'U6' m F3 �7 \J — 1 LL — �/ x IT Pig 9 W U - - -a — o �- —o - -- - -- F0 U U w. Cl)Q �4 �; Z' g Z� ZY„y 1E X )-------- p aL B' 3 — — O ❑ X — oLU i� Z Z �' Z _��_ Z O O n O LL Qtn O F F — — ~ W F w. ------ mow. X w. �— w. 4 4 9 U 4 8 Om O O:s z � z� � �o— o C2 Cl $ o a b b o J b b o J J_ul ff o S o b a J m ®— mYn m" t 0 U m Q co C re 0 z 8 0) m 0 0 z m 0 D r m z m S31ONA3N 2 12.MAR2025 CONFORMED SET 11.NOV2024 ISSUE FOR BID REVISION NO. � � m PHASE II Elf 6226 AYERS ST.. CORPUSCHRIS11. TX 78415 0) DATE BY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, BUILDING SECTIONS (BID -ALTERNATE) ii-galt is, . . . .11m...- � Iiilli RE': lb ON NO DATE DESCRIPTION CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martinez Houston. Texas 77339 sPwag6uuaaui6u3yoluewyedep SN0003Sllt/M o It m \ a SVX31 O-) Q I SL/OMUSM3 SndWO'IS M"9R9 � aIW -A IlSIaHO SndaoD 10 ul3 .¢p II 3SHHd o m zauiUew 'IMN30 30anOS3a'ld3a 3HIJ a NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl ols 8w 3nssi !MA III L Bs 03YRgjNoo I ISMIM-UlZ HIE w��fi 7 s " la'l„1 U� co� W Z ui b / u� yi u a C I 3£ i 03 b �S "Jg b ='sm� Z o W.W�� y J JuJ II Q 7w 3:m `•J X — — — — — — —-- — — — — — — — — — — I I I � I I � J- — � ao if �s s if-- a � — wb 3:0 Q m� sPwag 6uu98ui6u3 yo luewyedep SN0003S IIVM o cm 1'�+ e""°�'"wow SVX31 0 s�OM USM3 SNdWO'"ls MAY 9U9 z r n uslaH�sndao��o ul� .¢p II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'IMN30 30a(1OS3U'id3a 3HIJ S a NgidM1930 AB 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl ol98w 3nssi >ZOL'AON LL L Bs 03YRgjNoo I ISMIM-UlZ �Po ° 3 <3 � s dj =`g 3 LLw 6 p� Z -- ------- ----- ------ ------ - --- C' I I _ s dap a° __M, p a� LL a-ig I - - - - -fi ,(- - - - a I I I I I I o tc 5 � 6o m '" ;5mg Sid tc s ff a l I � I I I I I I I F I I �--- I r----------� I+II O --- ---- L— J c J '2 s' N I � Q H Ii s� s �8- v1 8aPB wb W _� ,�J%< g ° I I m< a� Po 's y oLL.. 8 ppLLi< W a Z sa�wag6uuaaui6u3yo�uewyedap SN\fld 039HVlN3 snO3NVll30SIW o � m N �� ¢e`to m ° z SVX31 O� II snda00ioh113 sLreIxiUSWH3SndWO'lS MAY 9zs II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'IMN30 30af1OS3U'ld3a 32113 S a NgidM1530 A9 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31V° 'ON NdSI/dtl 018 NOj 3no >ZOL'AON'LL L J3$®WWJN00 SZOZ'iIVWZL Z s 8`s Wino blE 4 � a _ tc t7 fi m ww ` =osSw �g�k 0 Vaw "ffo -o$ ,00 mos p o5o p Wap8s � � �8���`��wR&x � LU ggffl w Min- HMO OW z p<�aem ms of Z D199�n 89 -m 8,� 8a s��E��� a } t7 m ° °w u°x _ x E Ys« Fn� §mom w I I I I 19 I N LU zccs-..7 ;off J /zeTio° ` LL U LL O °t3 w I Y --- - g� w I I N Qo a I loe ,- b I II I vCLZ-v2J„ �a I oa.el ''II II I r m LJ� L to W s • ___J 3 z a $� Z lL Q Z. Z I LL. I I W U I ' a saOwag 6uu99ui6u310 juewyedep SlId130 NVId-SllVi3(l HOIH31X3 o It m SVX31 O-) Q ( — — 9L/9[X1,USWH3 srwwo'"1S M"9ZZ9 rn � aIW � IlslaH�sndao��o uI� .¢p II 3SHHd o m zauiUew 'H31N30 3oHnOS3U'1d30 3HIJ � a NOLLdtl0930 A9 wo "ON NgSN3tl NOOdltlOi30 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl 019 NOj 30SS1 >Z9L'AON'LL L US®WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z `-1'S �� w�wp RM LL icy 4 4o m E LL p� o DLL's Q a6^ a < N 3 .Q9ffi 5 'Smp � b J_ J w ¢b Fo u �^ tc ❑ Z^ Z' 5g aN< g id a I � 0- �w a LL I rco� F o ?N�= M�' 7 am $ 60 gW w o w a w m a N J b F o LU I � aZ Q y saOwag 6uu99ui6u310 juewyedep SlIV130 N011036-STV130 HOIH31X3 o It m \ a SVX31 O-) Q ( — — 9WOU'LLSINN'J S11dWo'"1S M"9zz9 = rn � aIW � Ils1aH0 sndao��o ul� .¢p II 3SHHd o m ZeuiUew 'U31N30 3ounOS3U'1d30 3HIJ � a NOLLdtl0930 A9 wo "ON NgSN3tl 14OOdltlOi30 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl 0198w 3nssi >Z9L'AON'LL L 13S mWlgjNO'J 9ZIRIM"zL Z v _ O - ~ U .g Z � i H ym Y U so 3 � J Q w. d ga �? w7, <® LD L� cnm $o 'oS d 7 k «LL wm W Q �J O w En J Q O ofF.. CM �U' �� PH N,� _ Z _O U w rn J J J w� �o 0 O' '" -, �� w IS oS U w a€ aIS S8 a e .'au Is Q �` (N N m Q Fs= Z O U w J J Q �o it _Oz W Q W 0 n m n0m 0 0 0 0 73 0) r r 0 r >0 m 0 z 0 W 0 m D r N m >x O 0 0 0 W 0 m D r W W a 0 m 2 0 D W 0 m F 2 12.MAR.2025 11.NOV2024 CONFORMED SET ISSUE FOR BID REVISION NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 71 o 1' FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, co g PHASE II thr T f 6226 AYERS ST.•CORPUS CHRISTI • TX 70415 :s coA4. O ' EXTERIOR DETAILS - DOOR, WINDOW & LOUVER DETAILS n >-1 m 0 z 0 2 D m 0 E m D r 0 m m 0 0 0 0 0 2 m m m 0 m m0 O a m 0 z 0 0 0 2 m 0 m 0 m 1= 33 9q g REVISION NO DATE BY DESCRPTION CITY Of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martinez rfri Marunez Architect LP Houston. Texas 77339 = SGOIALeS 6uueeui6u310 jueu4edep SlIV130 NBAnoi o CD N %=\ d" SyX31 v MOONIM`uooa-SIIVAa WR131X3 0 t m Q (�cm - - 9kt90U'LLSWH3 SNdNOO'"1S M"9ZZ9 z r n ~ � IlslaH�sndao��o uI� .¢p II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'U31N30 3mjnOS321'ld3a 3HIJ S a NOLLdtl0930 A9 3lW "ON NgSN3tl NOOdtl0530 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl OIe 8w 3nssi >Z9L'AON'LL L Bs mWlgjNOO I ISMIM-UlZ W N0. J u,ow�zo Z a" 3 € W pow P.23: a 3 J LU 77J¢ is m Jo '0z, w W w¢ mLL�i�o Ep zo6po€ o� id Qom _ »d p p = z i�MUz, �i a8 a a �SM! Q J 3 p �o i m �q 0 o Q ww Ow y� 08 ❑m M Q Fop„���€ a q J_ Q F w z$ ❑ PO w Jy N Q Q J F F /� ❑ w - ❑ w [� ❑ w4 w a s Y w� s�� >sflw � ?HE y w� a p a st 09 �8 09 co r W Q saOwag 6uu99ui6u310 juewyedep SllV13a JOOH ldOldAi-SlIVi30 a0lb31X3 � SVX31 O-) U5 ( - - SL/9[XL'LLSWH3 SNdWO'"1S M"9ZL9 r n � aIW � IlslaH�sndao��o ul� .¢p II 3SHHd o m zauiUew 'U31N30 30af1OS321'ld3a 3HIJ � a NOLLdtl0930 A9 wo "ON NgSN3tl NOOdtl0530 A9 31V0 'ON N05N3tl as 8w 3NSS1 ;;9 LA N'LL L Bs o3YRgjNoo I ISMIM-UlZ 1493 12p9' 11 I g � " p �o � 539. IM MH g8 ag=o�o�o`rmo��wafi3g28g_<-h,9R -8aYLLllG°�� 8'�f<5;�. w$oswY --a- ; --- & W y o� o9pE �z <q pw ® � Mo. LL LLI 06 dR wZ o p mo�M -RIb ° dc' F - — awoO � a 1 W g LLwN o o d ow W % o� a 9i o °a LDS ELL $�LL 5 " - y L g a 4 � 4 w- 0. ! Lu w N do a go wd po N �$ E� w 3 Z Z Oa � as Lr_ 3 O. $�i� a;; W� b, 3 dU w S tg IL § �y *_6UP98ul6U3m_ « p6«NVId-@I1V30WN NI o t ; ( / SVX31 _ � 2 \j % / � 51 »oga»@ug ` gA% ~ co § > '»30 3oUm31J'id 2giag mm � : §� N !� # !; (§§ | §)( ! \| (§§ ( §) \\ (\§ § \ \§) (§ }\ §� }~ --p-g--< 2.. � Q � | | .� E ! ; ( Ra! | | a#( ; § ; | $! ; N � | § | � q M \j �} 3§ � � saOwag6uua9ui6u3yojuewyedep SlIVAO MOM-RA-SlIVAOHOIH31NI SVX31 O-) Q ( - - 9WOU'LLSM3 SNdWO'"1S M"9ZZ9 rn � IlslaH�sndao��o ul� .¢p II 3SVHd o CO ZeuiUew 'U31N30 3Oaf1OS321'1d3O MIJ S a NgidM1530 A9 3lW "ON NgSN3tl NWMtl�534 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl 019 NOj 30SSI >Z9L'AON'LL L 13S03WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z a•m M� b F b Z Z U1 �Z U b O J U§ oL d min "`w og sff 5 Z8 Z '^ J W Q LL Z Y W w U g Z znr-z 2 o U. W.. 08 Cl) a m m Q m r' U ££ w S Z AL z O mo rs m! H sQ 9� Ww .. m a z co co m Q Ln q r W oa Q W W � 5 aQ C mw w W.. F-6 3 �� as m6 M W Q saOwag 6uu98ui6u310 iuewysdep SIIV13a MOQNIM'8 HOOD-SIIVAO HOIH31NI � zj- SVX3i O-) Q ( - - SWOU'LLSIHHO SndWO'IS M"9R9 � sIW � 11SIaH�Sndao��o ul� II 3SHHd zauiUew 'U31N30 3Oaf1OS3N'ld3a 36IJ � a NOLLdM1530 A9 3lW 'ON NgSN3tl rvaldl K A9 3LV0 'ON NdSI/dtl L#OOV 9=03i6 l J3903VMJNOO SZOIMU E 0 ------------ Q O _Z ❑ J J J O F 6 ° J Ocn J Z J Ow z� 5 p �» H8 8 5, Zf U m Q z 77z--� a��s r � g Q g 9 m o G Q u € J .;14 Oca m ❑ Z O� Oa 6` I ❑" xouuxroa-03w�s h Z coVj CM M U m Q b �E o - = F � x w a � as 3„ F z o J SS ❑ OLL w w— 2 m� O w ? x QQ �4 wQ e sm � s a o^ d Ow wo wp a.. €� w®$ F J M go ZZ J r J_ Ob ffi a �g O" a a s 8� S! z� Q Eo Ho P 0 m 0 c m DOOR / WINDOW SCHEDULE KEY PLAN EO ED EO BIM, 1 1 8. r 2 lllll i WA' s T-V fLi $g ;m SE oS ss \ 8s o8 a 4 s 44 [88 9 gCC [ y 11 11 11 SS AA PS && g kk g2 5 2R 5 9 2 O 0 0 0 2 m O c r m 12.MAR2025 CONFORMED SET 2 27.FEB2025 REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO DATE DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AYERS ST, CORPUS CHRISTI, T% 78415 DOOR, WINDOW & LOUVER SCHEDULES CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martinez f/I I 1 Marunez Architect LP Houston. Texas 77339 201.13001023 4E�„,yj'e` osza m '`w N saOwag 6uuaaui6u3 yo iuewyedep Wd HSINId HOOId o m "oa 1'�+ m rowan e°w06 SVX31 USIHHO sndHOD io u13 9LreMUSM113SNdWO`1 MAVSZZs � w II 3SHHd o CO zauiUew 'U31N30 3ounOS3U'ld3a 3HIJ S a NgidM1530 AB 3lW ON NgSN3tl Ng1dIYJ530 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl OIS 8 0j 30SSI >ZOL'AON'LL I.US®WWjN00 SZIM-M-ZL Z W SIR YYY If Ey imp 4 s< IFS ° .mow �o. w ° w _�Rz-g %�N �� d to �<g$��8�� g�w'p 'sus >5 < �< Sea 38� <a S p o� N. �Woa��wPo2�� s W <z.<a 0 I I ' II Il II JILL II �nn�yy�� AI 11 ' Il II ff a _ Z a z z4 LL n ■c■ O.. o. .. a. 'a. O�¢ J U LL m M n�i�� Q �¢ m saOwag6uuaaui6u3yoluewyedep SlIHl3O'831nO3HOS'NVIdHOOIJ39VNOIS � "oa 1' m rowan e°w06 SVX3l co ; pl; I1SIUHO SfldHOO io h113 9L/SLXl'LLSWH3sNdWO`1sStl3AVSZZs _ w II 3SHHd zauiUew 'H31N30 3oHnOS3U'1d30 3HIJ � a NOLLdtl0530 A9 wo NgSN3tl NOOdltlOi30 A9 31V0 'ON NdSI/dtl 018 tlOj 30SS1 >ZOL'AON'LL L US®WWjN00 SZOIM-U Z ixuis��xoBoimxm 2 uatlS3vo1'oaotJr'xw N m o o'a' F NOUVO01 NOIS k a - ? U J a kk W Z w F Fy Wy J 3dA1 NOIS IX&J"Sj fA tl p o W U' ps Q� 0 Nols No 10011 o < U= zw �{ O x 3 Zw W� C7c<lo o I o o I o o 1 o #WOOM NO ER^^88^8 I W I I I I I a � J 0 I O p LL J. I 4 I W�� I z.6 I M X I`/QiII�/I (\/aTIIo�J) U ❑ '`/Will/' W 1/\t III��/) O � I X O� O Off-+ O O -- — — — I I I IM Y}4 I � W X — — — — --- — o — --- —+---- — —� Z W U 4 w U) — — — N w w 1 W @- Z —-— — — — -- Z I I I g J LL5 W. (�Y-7 o o � o U Z� �� Q �¢ m SOONOS 6uueeui6u310 jueu4edep (3-LVNH311V-018)Wd 311S IIVH3A0 "o a t'� mwwan=wwew SV(31 o i � 9 a ; p1; USIHHO sndHOD 10 A110 OLXL USWH3SfWW3 1SM"9U9 _ w Q �¢¢p == 113SHHd o CO ZeuiUew '1J31N30 30af1OS3U'1d30 3HIJ a NOLLda0530 AB 3lWON NgSN3tl NOOdltlOi30 A9 31VO 'ON NdSI/dtl Ole 8w 3nssi >ZOL'AON'LL L E r� G 3NI1 Ala3aoaa F a z z s of W Q $ m 2 m z a wo O� I.- a I I G it 1 z 1 I W LU s' w s I 0 I � I I � I I � I I 1 L-------------------————---—---— -i a Q_ 6 ti 9 w= m g �p e � p oq s 8 ��Pgsx�is 38 �� ky p= a ,.. — — 3NLI.ua3ao:w_ LU J g85bSoo —Ge $o�8 � GapV�Q� £%p LuLU ? a'<�oou� 5&803�?0 � 68ap�p°uvamdowu'S z SeOweS6uueeul6u3JOlueuwedep NVId NOIlHONfIOd (0 o m SVX31 0 = m USIHH'd sndHOD io AAD 9kt9L)l'I1SWH3 s0ae00.a sa3Av ezz9 _ sIN II 3SVHd a zawuew '2JKN30 3ounOSM"ldK 3HIJ a NOLLdtl]530 .Le 3na �ox xasvae Noualxs3a we 31ra .�Nolsvaa Ole HOJ 30SS1 4ZOZ'AON'Ll L 13S 03VMJNOOSWIM-Ul Z ssggryry W B�R�B9 Ig¢ PIS x � ZORN ME MEN �g HERE tA NAOMI, uC O s Zi g 'a 8` , q _ 0 4 2 PE 1H _ B7A1 .659�EZ AE t�I B,SZ I .I hIZ Z KM - K --_JL— - \ S' u_L U - Lu �' I, ° II III II � � _ ___J L — --_ter 21 i rsi _ z�s1 ss1 �i rci �F .H rc sa ssi ~ _4 Z - M Z / l—_-- _� � C � � I II LI I II � II II I _ I es as I I I sy I I I A/f Z .W5 7�4Z A5 98Z AE L"�I .45Z .Z G9Z 1KZ .fr7Al saOwag6uuaaui6u3}aluewyedep c0 Sl1V134NOI1VdNf103 0 ' h SVX31 0 = 0 FN v USIHHO sndHOD io ul� sLre xi'usror�snaao�`issa3aysz2s _ (b 3 `�' .s II 3SVHd zawuew 'URN30 3ounOSM"ld3a 32113 a WLLd1K1530 A9 wo ON MCMO3 NONdIip53a AB 31Y4 'ON N05N3tl 010 HOJ 3OSS1 >ZOZ'WON'Ll L 13S 03WWjNOO FMIM-Ul Z z 9 0911 51 S G w ! oz N as a ie o m 92 a � I s o .s-Z 'NIW.9 NMNO MO13B rZ On g w ti G ti z Q d t- g a s ;;• �i 'NIW ADZ - 55 �9 'NIW 5-0 Y �• � ����� I�"�I g ]d7Y.l [a IS � o o � m as a it p n gal Ln P scrim 111H 2 v£D � Ems] 1IV130 WV39 DIOddfl; NOW.LJd 1V'JIdA1 9 SNWfIl00 '9'W'3'd 1V QM] NIJ M11YOIdA1 2 12MAR.2D26 CONFORMED SET 11.NOV.2024 ISSUE FOR BID REVISION NO. DATE DESCRIPTION MASON NO. DATE SY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AYERS ST., CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78415 FOUNDATION DETAILS CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martin z Houston, Texas Enole PSI 04.1029 a en g Isa N m *_sue«_ < p62cmN2dDdalma2 ; It ) S�1 ® « 0 §§ ) � 51 »ogam @ Ug _,_mama__ KU \ ; £ �£Ad E § CO » § Aa® 'R30 3oUma"id 2gag mm � E \ ` e� - �� ^ 2 R g{ �}Z ! 4 (§ k N | |\/ ; 2 \ƒ ) � & § M. N |( , K| _/ |§ ■�(2 |�■§ |§!_ �■, |[,■ 9 ` \ � §a t! °` � 2 � ^ 2 �\ OR g \ --- < / \� x \ 2 ■k� rƒ \ ■ . � o�a saowag6uuaaui6u3}aluewyedep S310N 1V213N3J o Mr h SM 0 = CD m UTHHO sndHOD io AAD MOLX1'I1SWH3srwwo'1s MAY 9aaa _ L s II 3St/Hd I Cb a zawuew '1131N30 3ounOSM"ld3a 32113X 0a NOada0a30 Aa wo ON N01SN9a NOadIip53a Aa .- I 'ON N05N3a Ol W13nSS1 >ZOZ'AON'" L 13SQ3VMJNO0 qmwmz j Z ggryry A; W 8 R s kT 1b 1 x $e11 a H! f r g B. 11HI f pf a pe 5 5 EtlBe €�E' a a 8 " P !;"I �! air §g ea es` gl�o$ y 1 H pia W 11 E € --! an i xog 'e eTag s§aE b" ! cE Ba $s i®� EP5 Bead Hm Au- fb �`e ag e " `go� jugaz a€s ea s. ..Pp s ull m ea! n 6 s s e9 g F � w ns`E€a i 'saw o @axfi �Eo ci °&e s,ez ` bs s 5oUI- i in $y.6 G. 8 HAS $ n ab a S€' alb aaP T g 6 :Jb g e p e = g9 a 3g '€ $ %_ Pull mss E d oe P w � a E Hull,i aa�s€b�$ gag&�a y 5P i11g i1" w lip s a �P p$ A 5 g$ G Ell as i€' aEp ® 'A F pE 2' a alpsE6 n H ra ��a €s m sID ��® ��$�a'` aE� a � � s n % a E_ _ e.P sQa B e6 � i _$ is e� A� btl a sEa Ra nil 3 P � s Ipae m�€ 5 111 « eta H EI Ec ��" s�� ea- g= Val 'Hui s$x ag fin li "aaibgs img ne a c�€ se e_ a.a �IDs ga Hiss gfl s piA - $' cia sa i"e # ! b g$€ a !if i ee°= p^s&-� min 'cE a as a> r c� � = p:a 5a a'-�$ - 9 �isl ig B � 'Na„ !tF Ea E s€ as i5 E € pg Sue a€ s=� a €," i€y rm ! b s' gag ex6s�" `s s� ga a sa ! ss g 'a fi-ia P €se e u a �a !iP 6 g m!i ug ue s€ P: Qs as A�= is g sp ! cce as .aY s Eo �$ 9A One. S €iP b�A $$ �E®6GEg PS2mo sa3IDpa 88 s: xq b$8 PE s9 a P iag L: i 33 ; g$ £i P H as e 5 ByRi a s sE€ ®e's" Ism�� b i®fi �i➢ �s �� e ® gi � c� is$E �g �=e 'a€E ! ass! QW s -s sa€& ee$ EE asb € $Ea6 a e b sp $2"§ 5�qs a H - a i m a g € 6CE �6$0 .$ �emP '€py m�Pa �� � GFP E� 3e a„� a $ �_!g $= 8 Hsu! 6; f8 -8 1; a68 ig E g �aa " € G aun p� nil N1 g E IN, s1: `ga g8 mE s's sa1i 1 „i pig sn! 1 ap a p; 101 Np 1aE EE$i m= ong„ oe� LLos � � �i€ ilea �o na! � n ffia�a s# �€m �#_ �s„� � ai�sasA i$ as � a� ieg �y gig" z 6p9 9 ! h. e G9 ba= §. sto Ec ei„ £ rya bs! p s m M s - „�R. I� L 1H MIN a: �g$pp € a H m x6 awl. a5E E�s�ilN 8gcs Euo� 1 "g G gp.`a _^� Esg� o m @za � !RUNSE€ s 'e Via" P"� "11 in, a M f a s o b! ! ip epe , mEulEP. -x p g s"; aYa g '! „ s mn a �b� gm ! S o sercsa mw ,®s $Sa oE. a8eu a 5gA ;aWc P� m Dax Ys 9 ae l�a�e'! sags gP lga w a"m MUM F€' 6s� gg€i H. u 8 sEE sEaS 3 P x;g a as @ j §s a !s! gcro Pb cgas= ", 11- 1.a sGa e� c s § 's gel 3i a; 8 P € g E a e olii r e se Ej a UM Sa o S a EgC army i am m „ ESA s ba !Eu$ im =s a €ay" M. a ;, k E E. . es` lFx: § _ a. s a g is E ong 5 a say^y._P E sx a :! s - x.a �� a e aagy. ay� �g 88 M ; i sgG s `ca c ! Ps' en I'FM i sE�fia+s@ a i A € ! � MIS a ag s� gPxin' sE`3_%z¢$Pe�aps.�!iB s8Eso§-! a`EegSai�$sia gEP Er��s.i..$oe o�a�zsx E p zs�i%C saaa iy gG ePx cc PaeEaPsdnsy e a-a g u iYg gx ni Not' p €1 ®gS5 B atipae sis a$ H HU M G E " :CaE1�lae a a" o :e8 a 8 %- b Is $ -TIN! P6 H pia S 8 flu !qE e EppGl;E�ge' c 11 S.=p jul SIB j j 9 i e5 `i�F® ill s a z8 v !qt alit y! a Hjq ;HIM €E5+ i aixE 6a11H `HIN a• „ .� E A. P i� aa$nEE sa'$@ m =a A r ! b ex� ^ � eS � € s" b xi- €a a gH s aHIM yc a Eiga figb gi a $ e "s si y e= $nE €-,'!� a: g. §P ay. a- ' ua € $" isa'� a g6 a'B 11 a B 3 I E o au; a�mj up Hui! PSPsspa aE^c E i €a 'Hui sa6gAP c3. ¢�i - f veal. Ell 8��� Mal Pm€ eg EE. 1KI 1 ep; bias gagAF Slab € ass =�V < F _ 3= iaa "a zs s Ps SSE a,g.Gsggx sPi$ e be bgiaAc it g yea: � c o oq �$t5s aye s a. E :01 Gu sAi szsa yP " s a s s ¢ u A. b p !!!W £`ea!i s € a s x a PEit $pg c SE6a PF!'E i�„ s Rst�'E, 11i as w a- ab-i s€ ® E �u y"� HIM s g�G�$ ! se € lug sg E€ si` i8i „ e �. az a s x� e s €Bs 8 s$i ' ""l ism ss�le_i Ssa a a= b oilxgP a PG g. g f�. 3sa a gSe a� s - - w 5Ed cca'c a �ePs' A - Ea u! fi € G 8y Its agmPgg � 5 s3QY € a� u„ $§sa Hill � b as RUN sv�Egfi€ ixg` € §add 6g w e �E MIN _ s€ i o6 his se E _r^,� a a we 5 a 5E x �e< 5 'x. „Es a ab$aa a u RU " I "T a gas., ��inss €ia �� s�Ai � m � o =§ <muow € LL1 ��P a �E 1s H i€s - co saOwag6uuaaui6u3}aluewyedep SON3931(INVSIOMAS]VOINW03W o � w o: i�. mwwnn��ve SVX31 8; w ' 9kt9L)U'I1SWH3 Sfidwo'IS SH3AV 9ZZ9 N a� us1aH�sndao��o u1� 113SVHd g zauiUew '2JRN30 3ounOSM"ld3a 3b13 a wuauo93a Ae 3na ox xasvan rvoudixs3a Ae 31va ox wisu3a 13S(BffdOJW'JSP SZOZTN4Y'LL Z 8 �oIt tl �w a s ba0 , s fig#==u g a L 7 Wwn'�w`er a aLLhss_ 8h 9 Y Y d m as o � x oo� w� LL, w$ a € £v gg a ® w� o � fl H U � g g^ any w swg w3 s Gam < a� Wo a a a 5 IE a nn =v b as 3 ff Opw g o g `s 70 g C) 3 8 o y O W w g Wa Z m e } g z J 8 U a y a co s � 8 a 5o MH = o ga s U Il g W � LL U � 4 O € s z 7 y y a - co saOwag 6uuaaui6u3}a luewyedep V V3NV-NVId NOON OVAH o r o% '� mwwnn=�wew At i-o SM co ens N 'y�ia m z � IISINH�sndHOO io ul3 %NL)U'I1SWH3 SOaWO.1S Sd3AV SZZs == II 3SVHd C5 a zaupwau 'H31N30 MjnOSM"ld3a 3N13 a Nouaws3a ie we 31va ox NoSvaa 40 YiNON300V S7AS.. L 13S 03YRg1NO0 I ISMIM-UlZ Y E$ S ° o° ff W»gym gpimp a41C4 sw°Y ; S � s 8 ggg o 1, o g U \XJ X X X Q Ell --�— — -- — is— — — Ezv i i 4 i i J a �m z - saOw 6uuaau6u3}a luewyedep co At mN w o' .�,..ill mwwnrv=�wew SM o i C Il sndHOO io ul3 ' w , MO ,..,., s�re�x1'usroNasnaaoa`1ssa3ayszzs � rn � - - H 3SVHd �J g zeupeul '1131N30 MjnOSM"ld3a 3N13 a x°uaws3a ie 3iw °x xolsvan xoudla:s3a we 31va ox x°Isvaa 40 rvnax3a0tl 9im.. l 13S a3YRglNaa I SZ12-M-U d m o�w� Y ng A � S � o° � Y w N <` � o � �� i• o was � � �"� Novi is 1 w��� � 1 6� ° 8 �m €� a LL ■�2�8�� H MUD 0 IN 11 s HI 81 1' 'm m m� p 's_ � ohm w, m ° m d � oil g0Hn8; null 1=1 ill A N 03 §6 U a m o 00 00 " • x S o o o — X ° of o ° I� � � � �gp o•a' oma' rim ���c$a o 83 'I 1 i ILJ' I �mRG� I I a 0 MR gs� Hot MR lug ID ° �/� ®z gag N 3f— py 'S nit � �,• u _— —� U•- I I g1ll@ awM�Ap8 CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE MARK I CU-1 1 co.2 1 cw 1 CR4 j CRS 1 P6"°v 4p r G8S '-8'Y' A 8- g Y Ma9�. .p mow '>sm '8e 6Q og n : DH g� € � 8 m _ g & F F 1 8 m o- 8 m S SIB 7R m0000ii 22i ��RR R gF 4aP�g MSt98 33o�3Pm €" S gig gG o R�°"aro�g„a p � y�F g�gso a w $�m f. Gig g°V s MSR>>1,,3- F1 >Sm 3 ZO,. SSA C,g-gg r- _� s p8 rmo''' A DX SPLIT AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE MMN FEW EC11-2 ECU, FCIH :c11-6 SERVES 2 ,w v w 3 T TYPE CV CV CV CV CV SUPPLY (UM) t.vm 1.400 t.wo tpm MS - 1 !I 8. m&tio 88m w>i3§ &7 gg d /N sn:2 m ^f >F >so Ne fl : ogo 05 § su o em eeeber§ g 12 w m —g 1 _, 9 .5'i2 u a 5 8 8 in es AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE 9 N t $ £ R v Y e x a f z e d x B s s e 1 1 1 K R d _ S R aa; �i s v x r s 2 ..N N� 9 N N Y DI N DI DI N N DI Bt fr"-.oq.gi a SP Di 3 > ao i4 h F 8g P9 64 .'i 4 : R R 3 F pprng f � rF� C liIf 3 i 1 d E = y F P Y @ 1 m 6 8 m a y o E x&&Neu 2222 ° ' i � P J - 8 F i 4 yy e cM w E AIR BALANCE SCHEDULE 8 8 l 8 8 S ° 0 1 n : ::g 'f: 2 12MAR2025 CONFORMED SET 27.FEe2025 ADDENDUM 01 REVISION NO. DATE SE DESCRIPTION REVISION ND. OATS ex OESCRPIXN FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AYERS ST.. CORPUS CHRISTI. TX 78615 MECHANCALSCHEDULES A CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services m rtin z lelarlInea A. -Dear, - co saOwag6uuaaui6u3}aluewyedep S31na3HOSIVOINVH03W o N H o: i�. mwwnrv��wew SVX31 o i W� g" IlSIliH�Sf1da0�io ul� ' F� Will" w ,...., s�re�xi'usror+�snaao�`issa3ayszzs rn 3 '�% 113SVHd N V a zauiUew '1131N30 3Ja(1OS3u"ld3a 3b13 a xouaws3a .ie �w ox xasvax xoueia:s3o we ovaox xo5vaa w wnmoav G=83J IZ Sm 0 SZOS'iltlW'LL d Fw J R _ $p �$ S F Di o a w �� m° si < wy a _ w " o�Fa. bQw�'g € �wWyw._?Wz L.A y5 zo U "oi� �igOa w _ F gq 5� � Ewa"sRg , w w LL35ws �a8aa� oz cn 1.5 iw zg'�°" �w8 i of F W 3www€ eRT wh 21 LU �g< t�aR��stag � aam U =w �=�0 38 w cgs ,g 9 #$� wwaa CL w 3 Q #�� o zwYf w o<o 5 § W o z LU w Q '< o w W o w =wo It,e o y w N 3g saw._ g U " oz - LL cn LL s g o ZZ O O 0 w= "a�co4o€ �°g 16 Q F �Re��ag8_ 0 , W _ O o<s°°< J � � 8" ;"ao: �m Z LL $ j a �w � Z w p W < p k Y oy > wo o w = z`9_ cr Z 6NmA w pox aim o°s =was w QW N HUE! 9°€ ° �3 � Cu =lo " " w aN$s °� g= per°� tl 3 »x = � G �a b f o U) pe: 8asLLmw w 4 & "gaz 4 - co saOwag6uuaaui6u3}aluewyedep SllVi3aIVOINVH03W o r o: i�. mwwnn��ve SVX31 � ' 9L1 U'llsw OSOdwO'1S SN3AV 9ZZ9 IlSIliH�Sf1da0�io ul� 113SVHd N zauiU2w 'URN30 3ounOSM"ld3a 3b13 a Nouaws3a A9 3iw ox xolsvan Noudlxs3a Ae 31va ox Nolsu3a 13S 03YRgiNOO SZOZ'iltlW'LL l g° w � 3 %g68 o� 3 Y rgg S ° Op Q u'! 3 b O m rtr34Q �e L Z W Q 1 0 Zy8a 2 w � m 4 O, a0 FT -- EL N og fig= ' og �Q �a gp' €G�j w a s O HUI � € 4 Epp �3E; O �s C7 � " j 0 Qo Z — 's2 Z / p6 =a 21 w O aZ Rmq 7 p z ~ a ° Z!= W IF g WrQ S s4�ffa�`s <w Sig ya p p �o 6 lik Hs 3a rn a ffa _€ 2a g w Leo x� so s z� �6 Z J w43 0 ao"a °m w �s M N w � Q o O �b 62 w 's � sm m U. gW ow ° s€w � o oDR ` 'LLw °E° �o Spa Z ° \ 2 2 E.gl a%s F- r woo co2 D n go p 5 I 2 Z I Z 'a 0 Olt ofs gs a a cn r Oo r Qo �4 24 3 w�� IV 1� 9 5o aog$ 0 <e w€ os a gg Z Epp �a o &o 8 0 g° O m� Q woNy W St�fn g 6a°7 CL Lij m 02 3, *_sue«_ < p62#amm3 / ,__, S�1 , ) 7 ) [Q = «/ � 51 »ogam@ug _s __ea __ KU \ ^i£Ad^ » \u.a '»� Amk�2 ku ) § 13L E !,( r i!■■!! §! ); | . . !r ;! ! ! ) (� } | R CL § LU \§\ §}|! 0| ; ) w k § \ _! ( §! � \j\ ) / \ § \\) M )]w . A| , saainaag suuaauisu3jo uawpedaa SNOIIVIANE19V 1V01b10313 SVX11 0 _ aw w ry ir6 a' j ISI I1SIaH�SNda�d 1011l0 a x1'11slaHosnaaoa`1ssa3nrsers G zauiueua y IdliN30 3m n0S3d'id3G 3di 03 N0I1dIa0s30 Aa 31tl0 IN W11—r N01AU391 135 ONN111113a 031 DA.l 113aIA Z z 2N N °Q X N p ¢, a ova ,f „„ mi Cl _ _ x ce woop H =fin owl = _ aill o Z ohs' s O ;a ito a <G LEa <=_sp _= pw m r r a0000 oil as a aaaa Q s LL u- _ p J w 'z? 3LL LL LLLLLLLL K 3331 1 3 d11111. os w.w wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww_.d ww LLLL�LLcgLLLLLL�LLLL�LLLLa WON!! 1111T 111 M o ----- - e Q 4z hw - .v ..o a��a. aa<aaaaaa«<Z aaaa<aaaa mmm o.Qi �auo�uuoauoaaoc.c�aac�aa o000000000000000� ?Ni p saainaaSbuuaauibu3)ojuawpeda0 Sl08WASldolblO3l3 SHX31 aw w i dj I�/� IlSIUH`O SndHOO 1O1W`O s�roalxi'IislaHJsndaoa'iSsaanvsess " — G 113SHHd zauiueua PAdliN303mnOS3d'ld3a3di a NOI1dIa0530 ea 31tl0 'ON W11/7 NOLLd-10 AB 0 'ON NOISI3a 13S 031NHDJN00 9W HVAZ l W H G _ W Z LU J T R4 t t o n n W - _ rcg Lu J � o Cl b ® 0 o 0 0 ® ® ® e ® w 0 ' Li m LLJ l 0 8 08 0 0000��® y (j W r J U LL H U W >s 3 _s o �a k�o o� I °gtotg ° p p _ a > c� W D0000 0 0 �o®©o o 0 0 o aa000000000 U) z pay o _ z - w _ Qap, _ op osa _ �_ - - - _ s z o p LU _ - y�== 5 4 d W U U ro dD� ro o o o � ® � 0 E-1 Q Wry I 4 �m> 2 12.MAR.2025 CONFORMED SET REVISION 40. DATE BY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AVERS ST, CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78415 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN RE✓ISCN NO. DATE DESCRIPTION CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services ma� Martinez Archite, LP 9013 ...mead, Suite 250 Houston. Texas 77339 ?Ni p saainaaS buuaauibu3 jo juawpedaO b31N30 (fl SHX31 392jnoS321 MIN Mdld JNLHEV WOINUO313 0 aw w i°r. j I�/� I1SIaH`O SndHOOlOA110 a xi'IislaHosnaaoa`issa3nrsers G zauiueua dliN303mnOS3d'ld3a3di a NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NJI1/7 NOI1dl-10 Aw 31V0 'ON rv0151,13a 13S 031Na0JN00 SZOZ aVW ZI l of 4 ➢ 3 — -H o w LL wo 0 06 I , I ----1 r II I I I I �❑ I I I II W III o I DI 9a I I IL- -- L1-- -- 00( � oJb) a - ��- 02 — �❑ QI�-J saOIAMSbuuaauibu]jojuaw�edap AV9SAAAAM (fl SHX31 JNIlSIX3 NHId 213MOd WOINlO3l3CD 0 I3IaH0 Sf1da001oh110 slroslxi AdHasndaoa'issaanvsess 11 3SHHd zauiueua dliN303mnOS3d'1d3a3di a NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NMIR NOLLdl-1 AB 3V0 'QNNQ1S1,13a 10 JVnoN300V SZOZ 933 Z I 135 n3W210jN07 SZOZ'21tlWZl Z Q O 4 8'L ¢p o ➢ 52 2 W lust to MT- w -_- _ R IVA U �G_ & cod on. �a �w h �� its - - - OOOOOO�O e (J~G �J 58 m U ❑ X X X -...X I� it it go L�I I a w6� ®z ?Ni p saainaaSbuuaauibu3)ojuawpedap H31NIO (fl SHX31 iodnoS321 MIN Mdld 213MOd IVOldiOIl3 �� ������ 11S1aHOSfldaOOlohll0 swsLxi'iisiaHasndaoa'issaanvsees " w 113SHHd zeuiueua R dliN303mnOS31d'ld3a3di a NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NJI1/7 N011dl-10 AB 3 ON NOIS13a lO Mf10N300tl SZOZ 933LZ l i3q o1 21)AN07 19MZ�VA U Z 4 a.c�io � ➢ � 9�i ��iwc� W" a �q Mi 8 ew e E) e (D U,D U U U w U U tj w v ;v > ) 0o v� o vo some. =C u`0 6 N 3 (e (P am od J JI o U m� e CLL �=m �rr�17� ®z saainaag suuaauisu3jo uawpeda0 Wb2ISMU 3N11-3NO TdONiO313 SHX31 0 _ w IlSIaHO SfldaOO l hll� ' w 0 I�tRlXi'iSldHasndaoa'issaanvsecs (n w RA 113SHHd V zeuiueLu dliN303mnOS3d'1d3a3di a NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON W11/7 NOLLd-10 A' 31V0 'ON NIIII3a l0 mONKOV I l i3q o1 21)AN07 19MZ�VA U Z minW � N o Q fl m o O O O O O Q U U U W W W w w w o w o 4 �o rw 3ww - a- �d- Q Of Z Q A LU p3 J g 3 =p3 w -rca w O J J Z U Of N Uz o - - WN w10 _ = N a iN \22^^\esvv�,\\ 4 \ : t ( : : : :( «d-SRDOgbA65xd) , ., .. ©!6 2 ' (:;7:,,. _ , , _ _ \\'\ .. k/` m 'o }\'n\\\\\\\\\} ^HP xxxexexsa«e«\\ } \ 4 —g-A'000 \\\\ ze:evezezevevv�g\ PANEL'LA' EXISTING 200 AMP. 1..e,izorzoeV. 3P,4W S/N, SURFACE, NEMa 3R, 22 KAic }\\\\\\\} [«exec - }`\\\\\\ PANEL' LA2 ' o AKP, M.1.o. izorzoe V. aw, siN, SURFACE, NEMA 3R, 22 KAIC }i . (\\\\{/\] ),,,. )m'mm— / \5; \\`` 't'U}}\}\}` \/ }t t' ;;}il;{;; \\\\\} g©ees }}\}\}}}\\}}( T. CI \} \\}}}}!27 UNARM cowoRmEnEr DATE BY DEMBIMON FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II EmmIacLs+m3s DATE CITY of CORPUS mRITsI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services BY DESCRIPTM NC Su. 250 ?Ni p saainaaSbuuaauibu3jojuawpeda0 Sllb'1301b'O12i1O313 SHX31 0 _ aw w ry ir6 a' j IlSIaHO SndaOO 10111O a xi'IislaHosnaaoa`issa3nrsers G 113SHHd zauiueua RAdliN303mnOS3d'ld3a3di a NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NWSI/da NOLLd-10 AB 31V0 'ON rvolsl,l3a 13S 031NHDJNO SZOl aVW ZI z �zrc3=MLU a r W J - LU / a - 'z'� a`zm o m 2; N �� _ o ¢ LU o ■r Z� �� N r w r 0li U C7 w F N 0 - } o U 2 Z Q W Y Y 2 )--F T T C7 K I LU m Q Ws � Lu O m � Z } > > J r � m W p Q3 a O 7 o � � / A o W Q / o m O_ - - - - K Z - O LLj n Z U } rc - Q O z CL' - / rc Z W - Q - ❑m \ , -rto u CL n � _ - H. W- Z w USE f/J /❑/\❑/❑ z�a _ ��fu'"oo-o LuS N � a /• w LL ar�rczu u0 a- r r-----1 L J p� it®-�J a L J r --- 0 ¢p = O LU ps O r� W J - Z w H w 0 ° Uy a� }` m - H; seswag 6uuaaui6u3 jo uawpedea SNOIIVOId103dS JNlevinld m SVX31 � O� <CD G y ; P 11SIHH0 sndHOD 10 A110 GM 'I1SWH3SrW000'1SSn30WZ9 rc ' I� to .== II 3St/Hd o (3 o - zauiUew 'UHN30 3O21f1O b'1d3O MAJ pCO ram—. mva oxxus r xs3o Ae 31va oxraisu3e 13S G3VfWJ O'J SZ0Z'N14Y'LL Z J. $�o w5w 2 G^c°c a ey $ a 30l, y� psi oaa e � _ $'d>G�4o�c � oaWgs o g`vt wwm q p�p co `g W g Z.44 N V1� 7701R wb Ww3gWzQ ik Y $ w Z Hit4_ s_ s W3 A-2w 32 2.:Sgp Z �asg iR- ng € ZQ soo5 A3 QW sWAo 2� 2 ; atF JQ o s .28 s l U. `` o�$yWos�s8 s $ sg w a $ w $ s8 o "� qg w' q � a$w$ F� sr. Z K Gp4� Gw$3 QB o$ $�odigY` W =� e 9 5 °� 6 a p a'� � . �a . ��� ?� a ��s$ JR. 8.9 € w; ��$ y 5a �. ,' $ Egg $ t'WM� > $� o. 11H. sk 3 ga a� m s i a -oH =l4 s H y'o-t eta §ARE a., aE $ s 351 a^G a s y3'Ml j.. V. jpc a mill, ;o $s� ��` W. I9' � $ ga'j sj S3 E e-g %F €—o�'l s $�OJIFP3 � '�� r,% a `��9 1 $ $�� 'pia �' �g sEaeW 4 � $ ¢ Paz 811a ��, g�o83 3`QY4y p%z o�3w„:� se` BW "�4 yAAk9 y3A� ^3 99 f5 kgz "3C 8aea IN S5 fW$ �� 94Y3 ¢� a1 HBAWD 2,21 w $�3E 9 Yb bg $So3i<8E3yo �oR8E] 3aSo 4 SA6oX 4�5 y '�SAAWbWg :� Eo � 8 ASS [ D�Qg SW � . 9 Y`€. .s. s. €., .os ff< ..2 ;. a e; 3 e._ t>= g€ .e S NT e(� 4�L � I IR a $i $ �e Q 6 g tl[ ^ �A Z J��Q \ a s sA Y Y$A WaR l �ygi SIB � �� ISM t �d— \ —— = 0R'S 6R$'� pR$€RSA:��5�'"� C���:b q6■1 o ES 1 � O O O CD00 O 00 w s g s� m H ISR # m(Bm w.d3 �o a;ezms seOw9g6uuaaui6u31ojuawpedap Wd HIS JNiennld SVX31 0 = 0 IISIHHD sndHOD 10 AII9 9MIn'l1SrdH3SrW000'1SSn30WZ9 o== II 3SHHd . zauiUew 'H31N30 3J21f1Mb'ld3a MAJ p CO rauauas3a ae ana oxxus r xs3o Ae 31ra ox raisu3e 13S03YiHOJW)J SZOZ'N14Y'LL Z S FLL W ZH -m �g w N LU �r 2s .I■W �,W o m N ®Z Quo e �x� € € a : o s p c €_ ao € 3=p o a° x o w3 s �o a� p� POO H. os Inn o GCE 3 y° $ a Ho w~ a m m I �i I i I� � I b II� Ig c 5 u I � :o seOwag 6uuaaui6u3 jo uawpeda) Mdld 21001d 11Vf JIAO JNiavimd = t m SVX31 0-) IlSIHHD sndHOD to A119 9MIXVUSIIsnaaoa`iSSn30 WZ9 a ' == II 3SVHd o 9 - zauiUew 'URN30 3ainOS3b'ld3a MAJ TpCO NaLLdM153a A9 Uva 'aNioB NWIdINaS3a Aa 31Na 'aN NOISIA3tl 13S®WIgjNO'J SZOZ'N14Y'LL Z In s �� �Im V WS - � N8 gyp. y�a�sa ° wHLLLL 30 o ®Z w >E „oH 8 fag ��oE88 3. iRE°",� gip � i Yp 113 Sjo5 3 R Q gg gg�3 H _I N 'vyI-E L J NLIt an. nax.t n.� I '$r s nn ❑ � ❑� C� " I f � I I �LL os UI'o4 j� � V jb 80 cEg�� N 01 •• Z ,==,,,zV=II 2 12.MAR.2025 CONFORMED SET NO DATE BY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226AYERS ST., CORPUS CHRISTI. TX 72A15 PLUMBING ENLARGED DWV FLOOR PLAN II - II II I I lI I I I I tc? 8 8 s 8 m og h�aPn 5 's8 �xo F Z PENSION NO. DATE DESCNPTION CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services marl* Wren. Aract LP Roden*, Suite 250 Taus Tn. tB, �BW,033 w:d3 Iot�watez SGOII 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawpedap Ndid (� o St1X31 21001d SVO T 2JRVM(130NVIN3 ONionmd o = 0-) R ry�w°w IlSIHHD sndHOD to A11� s re xi'usrow3snaaoa'issn�rszzs ' ' == II 3SVHd o o rc ' I� - zauiUew 'H31N30 3J21f1Mb'ld3a MAJ p � raualps3o A9 atr0 'miu� 13S Aa 31r0 'uN NOISIA3a ®WlIOjNO'J SZOZ'iIVW'ZL Z ti €g N 41 y,FLL� � 7 �na do � �`mSa p� � >< �o �p� r■421�Sa� sad>w o� •§ .. joa 3o Q WS< Q= W�4w a �3 y g rzxrc �oo Z � �yoo� F. ... o o T I. II II I II I I I I lill LJ u I IIII I ' II I II I �I O— ' - - I- - - - a - , I I II UN II II II II � I I VIL I — o�I 3 II 3 HU e8� U I II I 0 31 NI o k` _ III I m /� U �i! seOw9g6uuaaui6u31oluawpedap S31nO3HOSJNIennId<� G y p P IISIHHD sndHOD to AIIO 9MIXI'U$rdH3snaaoa'ISSa30WZ9 a ' ~ == II 3SVHd o - - zauiUew 'URN30 3J21f1Mb'ld3a 3NI3 p rauaips3o ae anaox xas�an rxs3o Ae 31raox raisu3e 13S03YfdOJW)J IMIM-Ul Z W„cLL=m�o T N 2� m � N ��po$ a °�� w>wo� ;w�;3�< � w � � LLp ��� s •a� g 3R=; & wage F3& � �� fid F98 S f pzR'3 gg 3=LL= p 8 a o���s Q 'a� $$3A w �R� ° p s~ �s _=8=>3 81H py';6. mr= 3 "a <� g 7LL° ' s =x€ Ey - °' u o g ;� _ $ a� �4�H xgLLw jog=•" m s• y g =S§ eg " Hm �aB�ag „oq °`° <� Sag<3 .kffm� in Y'�;�g� pf$a &' -' w= - = $oY> $� 3 �$'§ = as " ;$t ""G� E •.a R" �- y"•°€„"� :>< ge_m <�"�x FSR g° B$. saEw ;O° Gy<� _` ,'K" �3u ."� $ m3" 3sg' _QRo�3ma °`t,€ $¢`` J f�_ LL�F �xaWJ 8s.'J'= 'a "°Jg�d gar w" _��: so ..3 s> <� >i 3`>�9=�'y' qMz; w €" �� �g € - 8=� :ff��m= -x$`=<� R� - imp- o ��a° gs�aom=� x °€= H s „= =e > =w aF=x W3J=afo° „a�Wy= wee°" pm&o _ U ., ago " .. 5 _ - „"" J Ik R. 3$�a - `g y 0 5 p .a& 5=u wa p`g w V= '� 66 $�Nw" W$:" �V,:.=o" iko$ wR»G'"= Sx$� �wm°= f �5aa "€ s - me=�1 =a� a�wp ='s$ma9 o9s� spa °s oLL�; .ALL a ,3-n" ra h S` I N H 6 z a d a H H I H w M 6 t. }. s� ss ~< £ =m° say ® m w �3..g �FI c�- �F qj ok- a �wwi g B -m �md. g g8`wa 3 § a �e a -g2� Ig ��a=�°ova = ¢�o� � ni `HP.-Lh aw & 3°'a 3 $�e $ "8° �_ " g" h=°" w$ 8J $ds zag� �wgp w ~ b� " 3 �$ mo 8 0 €�;M a a a�= p�= $ _ w< g-g$ day€a&� ° 8 $ >c �a.= $ o".w9 a4; °° 0°9'} 5°�a=sip w & l S° LL, Ez,a$�= �pa� p3saa a=k q; oo _NOR 49ps 3-s� w F o s " ; 2 5 R„w a° a`< �� a �s� Qp~ E$� a €R a"<==gwm~, ° s,=< -agE � N Ors 8 w ° "_- fig.�- = o> _ �sY°LLR a $;M _� " w� 'a o. �� _� w g€= ema= w aa<3s € wzw-" c� }w� w ~� '3=_ ; emLL,�°,°`g$qw~ §'ea ="s� �� .._ < �wa J - pafsm �w_$-"m" � s " s Swf��58n - 5 &g,qeN. p oR : g >G �6 $"_ aed ~ $w^=�o�LLR�=.. pp O ° 22 €E;=" 5380 5 w;kl ���,� :J �.:3�� goo= 8"= V8< 2 =. gG �_ stw =~ w'� o aI h Io 3 s� x "3opw w eQ J88 °_ ° """~ww rs oaos° $ x wm „ago== "��o� aim" ems Sp ' Feg°= �_'_ "$� <°w�g'� °3 � "4 $ ��pm&� "o:= " €€" �k=J Ewa 'C 02 "�$JW�w o�n = €"$�o. g��$ _ »w "-d" $w --8 psi 8s `Ro "�" _ggG t= o Q ="LLa" �w`m8 Al.q'>>� w °a=""=_°ssg 8$G =a4m fg<�Sign ES$g3 sESaia i€"F >L sNiu �an8 R�a�'o4 R�zo3 fg M Ss<m�m�fo$� jr,` �PH 'a9�8: °a8� € w d a i o f I ILL i t I I I 7 m I I I I I I I 1 I ti ti l I 1 IL 3 v $ � J � � dg $g S � g ■ ega so > S$ eees 90. E u:wa svOw9g6uuaaui6u31ojuawpedap S31nO3HOSJNlevmld � ry awew SVX31 = O�w N N oim o a w y ; P IlSHJHD snddOO to A110 9MIXI'U$rdH3sndUOTISSs akVWZ9 ' == II 3SVHd o zauiUew 'URN30 3J21f1Mb'ld3a 3N13 p rauaips3o ae anaox xas�an rxs3o Ae 31raox raisu3e 13S03YfdOJW)J MIM-Ul Z �O U) _ U) o o o S � y � € r a a H i g H �js �if z � d m � y4 J s CD to 9Ldd88 `t w seOw9g6uuaaui6u3jojuawpedap Sll`d13GONisold SVX31 = O�<a w y ; P IlSHJHD sndHOD to A11� s reix'usronsnaaoT`1ssa3�rszzs to == II 3SVHd o 9 - zauiUew 'H31N30 3O21f1OS3b'ld3a 3NId T p CO rauauas3a ae mraox xasran rxs3o Ae 31raoxraisu3e 13S CBVMJ O'J SZOZ'iIVW'ZL Z g � y w B'< Q *ht z 44acr '\ PoW2rVoF U Y W11 - 1 cr tu o zo R a � wQZQ g F a Sff p W / w K w ¢g of n� 15oilg tea = 3 �L 8 g S d i � 'Y SY $LLa ;glop;°�'� gamy g ��3N nn nn vgvgtt Z J a g - gb s u paa o 5opw'w ¢ gu�Eu� l J ��$o ;Fzg r w$qo SmcxzOk' S '� $ Z � wya Z Sg } Z K r s� p $ Rai li' � � WHE uj �_ > ❑ NUN 9 a 6 - `sue w g W'e w � x �33s 9L �g5yw ;�'� 9J UI W d G"� Q & St Sgt y�� ig2� $$ O� Ha 7 3 r i a 3 a q8 �qo� . at J� E s QHgff oSs -< w ffia � 3 g`s9 �a o z a spp 0 o w gF 3 a w Wz $g ng Q� z o e= s ^< z a j� ° ° ",EM �� �3 w g c� `g ^g Y ��^ �Y U x 9� S 3 gnaozp"d� �w za r-` o p zg8 = 9 e F gg: w p s ° - N z s� g a gj � < e _ «6g� w ^ syy�ays �eW` HID m s MHz inH 211 ' ^ Y�8 8$ . d its M M J <q Igo ph i6 IN f a r� �J8 ° �� J S3ngNMI LLOtu Q a. c^ z 'r o zg <� c 0a rc cC 3 CL as ^ zR wu$ g ¢ $ 3 2101Ydtld3S 1IO-ONVS NO MEM RNIMVP Rithai ODKOMPANO a I I I I I I I I I I I I ii1Al ? E,1 ig, ,3 j `.` . gg gp 1 P53 a9_ ti 0 m r N W N 01 1IV13012IOddf1S 3dld ONf1ON`J 2 12.MAR.2025 CONFORMED SET REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION W A y FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AYERS ST.• CORPUS CHRISTI. TX MI5 O) PLUMBING DETAILS PENSION NO. DATE BY DESCRPTIOI CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services marl* Wren. Aract LP Roden*, Suite 250 Taus Tn. RBI LBW1013 N Ci seOwag 6uuaaui6u3 jo uawpedea Wt OVIG 213SIH NNa ONlevinld m SVX31 � O� <� G y ; P IISIHHD sndHOD to Ally s re xi'usrow�snaaoa`issa�rszzs a rc ' I� == II 3St/Hd o (3 o - zauiUew 'URN30 3O21f1OS3H'ld3a MAJ p rauaips3o ae mraox xusran rao Ae 31raox raisu3e 13S03YiHOJW)J SZOZ'iIVW'ZL Z I z Vyg N' Yh ,/ h /Ilk a � W a G I,y a rr -_ " ^ —!� asz^= z 3� a 2 7 I nmeVOasa� maJg%Ama , t ; >, m� s� : � )( S-VX-1 / 0-)e ears __�lSaogo (3 w 112Ad § [ \ .u.a2 : 'a303Umk'23ag § ) � \ Uva � \ �Q<= - 44�\\\\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ .� \ \ Z \ z \ / \ , | / � 2�/�\ Z■■ ! ; i | % %7/ � ----��- � � N a Z \ \ ƒ Z ` \ � / - / \� seOwag 6uuaaui6u3 jo uawpedap I(d OVIG N3SRI SVO ONievynld m ry�w° SVX31 0 = O-) <� G y ; P IISIHHD sndHOD to Ally s re xi'usro�snaaoa`issn�rszzs a rc ' I� to —== II 3SVHd o - zauiUew 'b31N30 3O mOSMI'ld3a MAJ p CO rauauas3o ae mraox xasran rxs3o Ae 31raox raisu3e 13S CBVMJ O'J SZOZ'iIVW'ZL Z Rd tz 2 � cl uN��H o s� �s n g�r f s� �, . S&OPOS buu 4aaui6u3 jo juawyjeda 3anlonblsVaJ Nl o SVX31 wnSIA010nV S310N 4NV aN3931 o IlSIdHOSnd'dOO10AiIO SIVR.XiLRINHOSNHOD'1SStl3AYWO e o � a-� II 3SVHd zauiueua FUR CO E 'b31N3O 3aanOS3a'1d34 3b13 a NOI1dl� 19 31tl0 'ON Nq— NOI1dI63— 7 31Y0 'ON NOISI,32 019 iw]ASSI t7ZAO1'"l l 13503W2103N00 9ZOZ 21tlIN Zl Z M o � - 0 0 0 0 0 o y w m 4_ 3 O� W.ti as b zr o zrc S pw o i O w� �� wz �Go - fg. mu 2DE G mz F' �o � 2ti <g x �w� a= �_ _ =n.�a zoo E - �8o �� �d o"2md� moo N = ow " m'ai €off ay<� w� a w F rc o zoN wrc3m�� � m No w f w boo m y� ujo ? � _ H� ��mS Qo b�€ a zLL - o p < C m mr Ez z`w m w a 2mo" aso�� �� zm F: - �5' $ gO� Qu�u 'wm��,s Nom�,� �MF � ao ywu do z } a Q F 3 om of 003 Z. 3u6i m U m w o wm w= u rc x Z cmai o 0 0 0 o vim SON o E z z '3' Nazo LLJz No _ o 0 0 0 " Nw i j �S3w w� _s rya = iszfln � m za p O o "� s m `�'�� w z z `s 0 J o z o z o w3� c9 S M-, o w< w m, m W. a ¢ o o 0 o mo'm and �� oT, ��j{ �_ s�6�o �z rj U U U U 6 S M, `Q W�u € K3 aU. y R a z;- &zgt �-z 9.- zftmN C� mw z o 2a p mw Qo� w¢���jW o LL N eN �o m�, oKJ' 2 "' tip-- CG " - m 2za - wa ¢ ag w wH, �R w S 8 op om w§w c 2 ga o3 �m65 � a o 0 FF _� z `k �wm O, m o w LLJ w 2w <2ZPS` Wa � aa Fd-o & 69us� we -a m 2o�'No o Wom w ss �x so Oz O jWO 0. - ZO $w �5 z z 03 <��N<��Na��N O .gHo oF10 �oWE fir` - - o zxw zxl zxl �$ G w o �-mad-mad-ma wQw uw 4m z z < z z ;�tVl3�tV1 3�IN O� ¢¢ �IUQi I - j w N Owoioa > > o W3 a3 N d N J Q o 0 m m m m m m m oa LJ �, a N Z a < F..¢> a - Z W a a O m ma m m m m m m J m 3QwN ��III < z LJ a �I;xZ � o 2 - Q Q U = U m o Z� o ()] T p U G ZZ ZZ ZZ . J o GJG GJG ¢ ¢ O o O OW OZ 4 4 4 [JK `O w Ha ` N V ¢ z m K W \ \w \p QU W LL1 N w N N N O Q Q yUOj j h rho ✓�5 d aj d ✓�� ✓> NO ✓� Go ¢z c2 > om �o"'o y� U O o o in o p o zw -81 coi" � a rc 2 Sm S ` U z `5 > > > > > �`n �� sao� v'ia ¢ a a a a a to z NZ UZ z UZ z d d ¢ Wrc o d� d�" o o o o o ¢W".. W G= Gua W w w W W a N a oo G G m z \ ? .Ho a o� ox a s a a a or or a� 5 5 w ow J �oo`i �3 �� 53 m 9N m o 0 i ¢ - < a > o 4zo0 J J m �o �o o _ _ - I o I �z z tt Q - " .8 o 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 o u �= ¢ o Ew oe wQ oRw�won p z 1.1 zw zw -wawa2w Z,ao z wr' wr' zmo Imo ? xo a a a aom z wr' N z z ~ �� o� o_o_G� m2za �= v>m v>m ">m "GYG Wow �� ooQv p l 06 �� (] " Oy U O PP p a — o Q Z O O G 7 A " w wo wx wo a�= m m m wF o oWUQo o zU zV N a o a S 'do w1 x wl w w a Now.o W &g m3aoIQ F 3g 3g aN ag> aa�z iN o� o zw zo'. o aaz Jo Q J O�z� LL mm oa o0 3 �� o'.w w U E �p33r a -um a as as "o' 30 5vai 3o-N �a o oa o you u� w ¢wE H.o, - No w s o d >��w �'aw w�z 4 4 4 w 0 ..NN w =m riN m ¢esa to° 99. 16, 0 n axo kg mm r bm r 0 0 m r Z m 0 m m m z m S31ON 1V213N30 S31ONA3N 2 12bWR.2026 CONFORMED SET 11 NOV.2024 ISSUE FOR 81D REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION N0. DATE BY DESCRIPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AVERS ST., CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78415 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN - AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services 0 0 martinez Martinez Architect LP saoiniag 6uuaeui6u3 jo juawyedap 3bnl�nalsVad Nl o �. . SVX31 �VnSIA014nV NVId JNI1130 11V213A0 0 h l-M ryd� 1.1 o a. _y liSIUHo sndaoo io ulo 5IVR.'x1 LSINHOsadeoa lssa3AYW9 o ¢ o II 3SVHd e„ zauiUew � 'b31N3O 3�anOS3b'1d34 3bld � � NOUN— AB 31tl0 'ON Ng51A3tl NOI1d 3— A tl OO ssi Aaie ao 3n OZ 21 OO 135031V1J03N0O SZOZ'21tllti ZL Z X Q I I I i w z a w w H � 4� W af LU \\\\\\\\\\ d \\\\\\\\\\ J w OU LU I I Q X X X X Ca/ N _ M O X — — Z Dili �ipi m W D Y Q az0 a d Q U Z Q W X �` HLU p I I I I I Z 0.1 J z Z W �� SaoinJaS buu89ulbu3 Jo juawyjedad 3anlonblsdaJ Nl o //'� SdX31 ivnSIAOI4nv-SlIHl3a IV?IIN39 1. IlSWHO SndHOO to Ails 3169L X1'I151yH05lIdi100`13 Sil3/.tl 9ZZ9 II3SHHd ow. zauiueu 2OiN30 ianosid'ld3a 3dIJ a NOI1d121�S30 13 31H0 'ON Nq S— NdiA113S30 A3 31Y4 'ON NOISVaiI 01080J YSSI bZOZ'�ON'VV l 13s o3N203N00 9ZOZ 21tlIN ZV Z j tl„SZ N W Ml O ~ w O I I W j O W ~ K I I <L 1 1 O O c3 1 1 w Q m ¢z m= W 1 1 s � Z 'z LLJ Y LL � O W ¢ Z. W a 0 0 Q o O 3w a'O 1w Na �. O u m �.'KJ O K dLLJ Z H> � LL zo o z M O .................................. J 5 a tr i Y c G Fo F �w qaw ow -z z w zI =� ---------------------------------------- ------------- ° Z 0 O N Q v e e e O W 4 O D Z a O a oz o = L 0 ? �� w zQ z of o o W �ti IJ.' 0 ti xo m zz w aoz a a ww z_ Z a� a - z_j 3aj U 4o G f awl moo m4 moQ - aF '1O"ov�i� Y _'� >u' o3s i U -zo ¢ ��ww �mawo o� zot zo�a a� raa'mi�o3�r G LL i wa = �cFi aww �w w w mm oQw =¢zz= Fo0 Fow FpzainLLtt? 3 w ¢zrc 5 O'/I U z U. o Gpo zz� zz3 zza3owvwi3 a w�ao>N J d3 0 �o = oa� s m Z1 W N oNw>o =oo =oo =owo yw� i aorro_ a o G <�ti w Y -�w.3 omoao �c>o Boa =o�a�a a- umw w UO 3 x >'o om '- oo < of aw =a o o uti ? 5 3 �� wGo 8 8 3�✓r aowm G w w FON <o Iwwo w m U5 a>> a m o EaZ o w m N N zow ° Z ° Ya 5 v o o < o S�c� w - zF a Q Y m oQ a N w Q z m y E J F O U w W U d w O z o = U Y a rc z = O m'� Q 5 v= w z G o-ZMM O U O O O O O O o ieurWn .ow., a, as i. n u saoinaag 6uuaaui6u3�o�uawy�eda4 SWVdSV14 3NI TIN0 0 ��N a v o ienSIA0land s�ldl3a�da3N39 o N SVX31 I1SIHHO Snduoo to Aiio 9Vb ZX1,1sIaHOSCdH0078sa3AVWE9 a-, II 3SVHd "p31� zauiuew b31N30 30?JnOS3b'1d34 3bld a c Noadia— =-7=7 IN rvasn3a rvoaaia—a ne 31' oNNoisvaa ]Is 3oj 3nssl t7OZ'AON'U l 135 o3Wa03N00 9ZOLatlIN ZL Z r 1 I I I t7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I w I I ma I m< I I d= I a d I I I I I I I _ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I s I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I � I I w�a mG I w�< mG I I V I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I = I I xg � I xw I I t] m �¢ I I I o I I I I I I I I I O I � o o ' f a OI OI I ttl �I Wj O I �I L______________________________________________________________________________________________________J oo ? saoinJag buuaauibu3 jo juawuuda4 (.0 ),iRf03S-S310N(INV GN3931 0-) w SVX31 IlSIlHO Sfd o xlusaHosnaaoo lssa3nvea� n II 3SVHd W zauiuew b31N30 3anOS3b'1d34 3bld a NOI1d121�530 19 -1 '-011— N011dl-30 AH 3111 'ON No'svaa 010 a033n,,, "Z,,ON'U l 135.,Ww0 gj S 06Z vIN al Z w 0aw Q Z o N — h' a j w¢j a � w o �,-. z mNo caioW�� o 0 0 as�� :mow a oz 0NFz m z J a z pwj Ow aSoo m w `.o& '^ o F=0 -ZJ Z 0 ME wEoao z o o � 2 wz g o 1� g o w ? 3 mza wrc; wao y o r g� �� o eig o as a- m Oz z d �Ep,� ��oa ox �~jo zw � �w0 m Wti R xm� �rc� m rcF fwx0(O] YaK <�Z� z00 O w Z Q��w mvUirc d 2Z 5 �aaa �2 m�63 � wU w6U- w _m ��OQJ �w�0 UQZ a mwmv_� Zyi vi�zd� Sow rw � ��ar gag wzo J ZmZ o 'Vi" w aU0 O 3aw �z¢ c�� O j-� �n� yOw �o om a�orud J� n; rc wow z EwU m� o n�rc ��vizW. 3W .� 03 Kati' J fmw oOw mzzm �wo;m m m O,> O a�OO aw - Fwwo _ o z OW ¢a -wG a '/� oow. GG J W Om w O�gZ z Fm¢ owLL p ¢ o� G �a4 t s�oaW m- -.mo WS o - a =w �oi'w�w aiz w�coio mm r_o mV mU aUmQ gz,c� z wz - tn390 au a U o owl GR a lw zW m w� ocn o ma w - ^mcf w� OJ� = i O m�� IO a��O �oi� S �QYY o' O w�� - a 3otnc�irc oaa 3a zYJ � m a o -iom O N waw rc3Wmo rc �� mm� .5 H - - ojz o ¢ r ¢ rn pw 34 -4 Zo1 ."Jo o� 8. z a -. M aw_ Emo�N z�xw OZZ �aF �m7 C M. w w' z O Z. ' m zgO-z w�3m 30o xod.a €o 4a i3o;' z ow m BEER mE a�w �omou w �'ao .4Nwz Wm16 way Z8o oEWE H a < ��$'w o oogd Rz<oo ���� � � 3 owW^ b��w m? <m o oz zw-, '�wo <Qo � � -Wo -g - ow -W w ow o QF� Z93dw ��z�z zow w i � 12Iw WZ.V 5 o �rcz �o$bo zNWaw ono In mJ� ,no o z� a�m�o 3z o ��� Flo'z H. ox In hlw aw wER �� oiwmw Um ww oa a=� �� w� a F ZOoa rUcoi3m a aa3 amtiU U¢ UU G mrc mn¢3z wtn � z U J a U w O 3 O z aw tt J o r mo a ys W� p o�� m a8 , w w p WW-zw a m G za 3 m a r 7 U w m y Q o 'O z U ¢ O z N N\30 N N 'da o , t6W U o m o a w o Z. p a as m¢ rc to owoww -N OF taioa Nt mew H H U p 0 ¢ OQ o D o w p O o W w o - - o r o o m a p rc N> o a;r' Y> > o a o oa u U u a i z a m o o w a a W w o m m w c� <tn x oo W z a i o m m z a o w w x w O aU Ua of c'S o`-' z W w o o w 5 z y z J o o z 3 o w J ¢ 0 5 U U O (�O W U W U_ f f O ro a U U U >O>> 0 0 > cl F a wiu-euu .ra u_. _w*:aow a ayyyu any xe� 0 mm m r 0 0 r Z m � O C C) m m 0 m z m n /\ `DI o r 0 m 0 0 W 0 O 8 0m N S31ON 1VN3N30 S31ONA3)1 12.MAR.2025 11 N0V2024 CONFORMED SET ISSUE FOR BIO REVISION No. DATE BY DESORPTION FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AVERS ST. CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 76415 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN - SECURITY REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services martinez Martinez rc, itect, LP Hot.. TOG, 7339 .1.800.1023 bui _ a »_ , 2g1 *l:nms-gI :v �iA7p , 77 j /-T 1p+ofammUO mew =a_r / � / 2 �GAa` u�u 'mm90gainm£'a£98w ) \ � ( ZM k � S \ 7 ) } : - » - ! !2 ®\ § k§ m § ;: ] / :_ ! ;2« � �6N - » §\ ( }§§3 ) ) -- ° - \ }i �\ \§ �\ ; - §/\ \: , )! - §/ ' } §§ {\ / :§§� §$ !: §! m; ,�� 1111.4. Eza 1 saoiniag 6uuaaw6u3 jo juaw�edap (.0 SVX31 SNOLVOINnmNoo S310N 4Nb aN3J3I IlSIUHSsnda0Ol0ulO s�oa�xl'I1slaHosn3aoo'lssa3nvszze �fn w II 3SVHd V 0 o CO zouiuew 2i31N30 30bf10S3b'1d34 3bld a Nolldl� 19 31Na '�N N011131 NOI1dl-30 AH 37 'ON W111,,31 ale ao33nssl tnzwN" 13503Wa03N00 SZOZ atlW ZL Z � m O O 4 m m ¢ O O O U - W O m O U j m Z ap O 3 w 0 w p ¢¢ Z 3 0 D w 01. w p U G H m N Z O m o m O U p E om oF3x NQ3g c�0 a�o w m ¢ ¢ z n U a U o a ¢Z ¢W j p w oa¢~ O d 3 H Z m m p d f fa ViU pZwa ocpi 1. z z m m f a l ozp zoa o0 o_p,�o O �zw Eia pow w� a Zi N - o 0 0 o a m �n 10 o '3 o <w Z-� zom¢ appQK 3w o �mp f o s z z o Np f ¢gym ¢>z- mz� O wzz �p0 �uaiz of o m € a z zom o m ¢ u m l o 0 30a zwp �W� $ao�o zz� Oop zi 'oa a p al w s m a a �w 4 -apao z0 prwno awzw 2 2 ¢ i s s 9 5 w o opo as opzp oop�z a-ooaUp ¢oaz oma3 0 0 o z z o o 0 0 0 0 - z a z z aaw �w vviNw �'aLw � o;z uW za F z w o izoo w o�i orJ'mw J zwwo azl Jwu ��3� ¢ m m igx w I I m a w o c> oz JEm ¢ Emo a �� x w m 3 z J p W oU zo 3z9 000 �ozRU 3¢o ptana oagz 3pvaia UU�w ro m o o N n N m m m p ¢ po o m¢ > > > > > 3 o r �' r w p F 0 a ¢� p pmo ¢ -c� w ¢ z o 00 �3 oQ OZ z upio 0 W,. J W. J w GzG �n Im UO O O JK wQ U Z Jp O m` a w w N I H a w ¢ > 3 m zg o o z a s p m0 ZZ U m FDA 0 map m Ott o� O o oQ Q - ro zP Z F O O O 3 N w gK m W K mo i a - i opom ~ z o z¢a p� o wR 8a m F w _ p 00 m p ov, ¢ �z -. W z o m x o m _ p � ~cw.0 o o p� z �Y _ Z. za m a 0 w� =o € � py p Sg oww m mm rc NLL az mm a ao ma¢ N a w mo �p o as ' Z. > sp r� a z p$i w ?o zip 0 0 wz pJ vg w ow a a p zi�' ao pz i m Z> o a mpa p m o mo w w Y Z d RN WO om Z 0 w o wd0 ¢ Z z� L. o z i� u o z�i m a iv N q oa V3 mF m MD Im 0o O 0 m Z. Qa ~J OJ O O 6m NOQ VIA m 0 omZ d O o 10 a O pz p0 �¢ 0 0 pOZ O a0 ¢ p0 ¢U - rc ZO m ZZ�O z z �i Zo a s nO p - �O KF p ¢ Z z a N Z O a F r w 0 o .7 ..Q U oU� i a o owz x J O pui w iw pw z = 00 opz m¢Fz a 3 ��� J a w� z O 3ww a� QQi wp pp w � 0 zom Q2fA U o KW w m 7d WK wlan U- m N UZ O Qw M43K mO j Z o z of x o 0 Jaz wwE '� i o rco w op za c6"d w m 00Y T' w m� o�Q i> o a a Win 0 pW p x a G_w _ a >� or p� ao z oz ww - zz mzrcz a o w� a o o �z �� �P m z p c� c�(w ��� a� pm z o moo row o �w ¢ < < rriUin op mm O zW w aG o00 �0 3 o rn ¢ Jgp i as =m x aw p iJ O 'p zx m 0 0 3 G z o as w>o o Qo o� 3 io Qo� a o $ a mis zoc� Jp a `�' po w rc m z a:F aZ as p x- p �� Kaz sm omp w i of m a o. W J w �� 'o iSW a ,E ma0. ag p m �Nz .J s zi of i �`a' w<z ZW I xp a om o �z pz wo zJ oap � o o� J a m m 1m zmw a_ - am zm a pF oa \km ow �o w o oio px� zo ¢ m m w opp zp5 o o w rco wppz - o z3= OFm p a o 0o Z oo z F o w- ¢ ¢ o Iwo m ZSw mN > >g �o c� c� Q�p z zz p pw z mmw w Jp oom ' ��� >o m w- oo =Jo o- p4 oo rc� w wz 3 W� gz m go mop o i� i0 zoz o� W <' M. Qom m No a _ _< N z� .. wo pw m mo 0." p a� � 4 z m zFa U=w zo GU iz iU ¢ z xo rgwr a .. ~Gw o J ¢z = ¢ o �wa Z S U wOm UO mo Z m6 U N JU Wz U O d O6 wF0 m KO m �pU WZ aZ Zm W,.O ZW0 w p E m�} FF = Y K Iz �O Z S¢w¢2 ad QO�a Wa mm \ O Op K j Po. O Z ¢K ¢¢ <� ZQpp �p pjLL z OF \Oz O 3Kp QL O U I. �� QO 0 di Fw0 Op Kp O am0 a m m - O w03� Ua UOW Q p p map QO - zO JQ�O p0 w xo ii�uwi ow �`2 U ��? p s� m p� u>am �a x�w z mm m uwio a� �aac� aow �z za z a �z wa J z J rc� O0 z a oxo o op J owa�' Naa oo �p Boa ¢ �a oU3 a r;ocai ¢ ap m Oa aoz i;rn w z o d m o ao o�� 03 nz a m O f 0 a d op^ p a oa o mow o z ao� m x ap - w i w < �Sx w o 0 zow o m i 0� Xs a oop �Fwo z UN o ma 3 owm w m aiJ�s adz oFp J� p zWm Z m w~K U Z¢ -O i N X}m o p j = Q N d w p p O U Z p 2 QJ< F i Zp Z S m m Z H ¢ ;5 �U m� loin aF U3 0o Xmm p wo m moo3 i�w poJwx J� pm p pg W>o oW ox d 86. ,V r 3 0 a p Q O v p 0 6 K U 0 U m U J¢ ¢d W O Z ¢ Z m J o o r m 7 0 O a 0 m mz3 az0 Z. Jz ¢w wwm wa 7 y¢p¢ iZr ara m mi OZa Om� Z FOm<m¢ _ _ U UdU11�0. maw R.U H33 Za - ¢ W¢ 0 UOUr Q- [JwUam �w-0 m0 o OOUO a6 3¢ O 0� ONE 2 w ymj06 Sw m0 z zUaa Z41m gUfw/IwU zu dmX U J U0 aQ ZD .Zd pZdz hw Ez¢ wzo¢ 3 ¢ a ¢<i z O ¢ EO L'. Zo Zz '-n poi LLm mw &wa 0. mcso Jp i.: 'Sx '�"z<'a iaw oza 3o zom wz ¢ pz 4p �z Jo t ayo �m aew No mr oi�m ppw O�U� J pz o n ao pww o0 �a4 4 o3w oaz m¢ ¢z m> awz oQx gazzmo 'ap u m m <gw U rao � Jm o� �Oo wo Jom pps.jz �pm z owm o �Z o i� a0 �o Ew 3mU am po > zm < ozp Om Zs ¢ > �' zoo mc6m vxiam om- oz ¢OE6 iwm wUy5m z m�z w zW owm xo pa rc omy om aJ pa z0 i� x apo w 3m z oaaw ��E mo �oz pw.zcwi >z ¢z �aa zW ajw3 coma xoQOF o ow3 Ym Om oo waz o� owy s¢rj13 a 3 ON -o cwizvai m pwpp Wwa p om pNo J �o z�aww Dom ap mJp ` wm� 00 0FU Um �p�na GG ¢F zwJz F W Om mp tt0 pZ.0 -0K Z f116 p _w >U 2U 0. fG ZIYm QF a ¢ ¢U �N J pt`¢r wz ova o3x owo ¢- oz�-'w o apazz om>z o&wEw J wpm op Wz o0o wo po a aN mp m >:•o oz p pa ><o< ¢ owo mop aW .o 1> 3z� o z§Z& p m w5o wa aJ�y� oppJw opwz, i Wm - z app p mZ ¢F ow zg-,aa <pW m ocaiW axe o� 2� mc�vmi pI oRrom aM3o J�w�+z J zw� ro z z� �zw aJZi =cpi wz rc opao zm4 ww oom o�� W� wo w w 3w w3po owm oo"w J p p a <� w�a midi m� mo �pao pop mwin F of mp'o REm mm mia oa iw�i�8 how �'a y p " i� So .. J- ,zwJ� a ozm zoW m �n qa wopN Wp >Ng oum,p wpm o zGo m� pwzoz o20�� ooaom o o ao ¢ pwp O > � z w o 0 o Job o> �x wz o�rcQi d~ oi�p u wz o s mspx mzup� �Q g a �z ciogo o z w awa a m pJo -moo ow oao oa�w apJ - z z - s psp - wm FN it w3u �w rn¢� 3c�¢ 03m ma m0opo pip gg Om m ¢0 p0a p mm y0 rc�a?p cpiaa caiovai ��coi¢ d ai tia d w w 0acpim �F0�v i; i;wz o d ai ti dW w w co z a saovuag 5uuaaui5u3;o;uawa iuda4 00 "® =xF StIX31 SNOLVOINnhhoo-NHId31IS No NH o a I1SIHH0 S1da00 to A110 swazxl'llslaeasnaaoo"lssa3nvgag o r^ II3SVHdCO V zauiueua 'b31N3O ioHn0S3a'1d34 3bld c Noadlass3a ne 31da oN Nash', Noudla— 1e 31ra oN Nolsvaa 01930A 3oSSI fFOZ AON'U l 13S 03Wa03N00 9ZOZa 1z Z ->A}a'-N'A N�A 4A -AA' -I'-�A-�l-0 -,A'A->A -�N Z O --------- ---- -- �A 4A43 �1 34A4A4A �� 1 i 4i4A4A-;A4A 2 -�-"A -,A w� i -;A-,A 4A-;A� O ->A 4 -4� U 4A->A - =y*I -A-A-A-0 Q-A 9 E'o - ww �A7¢ ;NSA ���� oU� �A�A�A�A4A ~� -�'A-�A-�A-41 4A �A 4Y I 4A 4�-`ham: -�A-A-A-�A ,.I. . 3 I Hill -�A-�A-;A 4A >A-'A 4A-,\A -A-� 4A-A-A m _ _ _ - �A-�A 4A-A 3A -'A�' � L 9TM�M9 MSM9 111 M8M M 3A41� �A�A�A3A�A�A- AA 3A-�A-}A 4A 3A3¢ 3A3�. �� N SS r SS S § '� -4�LLh D_ -A-A-A I� iA -M - =� -A-A->A4A-4 - -� -�A 41-A-� -0- >A o0. Aa' 3A- >A 4. -4A -A-� w8i I - Q A-4A ->A-A-A-�A 411 - owa� � I 44 awga �- � �o-,ee -,A-A-A 4- �-i,,0 �o g I ->A >A -A N $mow I � -A4A->A -4- �A-A%A -A- wogs I - �_ , ou __J o N I -0�A�A�A -4- 3A -1 sA�A ., �A �Y,�A ->AA�A�A�A �A- p 3A ¢ A�',=�'� }Y,�A 3A�A�A�A -A- N 3A 3C9A�A AA A -1, A-A�A _0 -A-A A - W -A �A- O ;y�A��A�A�1�A�A Z o =m�A ��4A� � -��A -�A 4A 4A >A�A+A-,A %N -�'-33A>A-A-A-A m= 4 -0-A )�l AA-� -,I-A-A -A -A -A- j N 3 w '>1 - Ew '1hz' s ��'-A-,A�' -A-4A'--A -11-�3A�A iA�A�A iA�A -�A U - 4 U�Z W - J Z. ¢ I,,A�-A-A m�=.A�A�� ���� �31�31%;�'�31�31 -A ��-A-A-A-A3A-A-A-A-A-A� -0 M < m i> o m :A iA Y 3 /- -i.Y-�A-iA-iA iA}A .a.bz �A�A 4A 3A iA-iA-iA iA-iA 3A`Y.-�iA iA-A iA- W = }A- O w Nw c�� 'A -caAiA A N F M8 �M9 M9 M9 M9'�-M9 '�M8 �M9 M9 -M9 M9' �M9 M9 M9 M£ Z .W� �� .. A ... ._.,.I ,_ _ . _ _.I ,A ... .A _. _ ..}A�. . o w sys- sd� sys sys_ sys_ sys sys �Y� 1slQb sys sys sys sys sys sys sys sve fE¢ or ��w M9M9.� 9 N9 M9 M9 Al M9 M9' M9 M9 -,M9 ,M9. M9, -Mg - .,1/�,< o Lu Z. zw � Z afa is W saowag6uiaaaui6ugjo uauueda4 SNOLVOINnmoo C0 SVX31 NVId?JOOId 11V213A0 (+U r�(�/� U r�I 1 I r� o \E 4 8 a F u 13WHO sndOOO Io,UIO 5l6SL X1'I1SIeHO SNddOO'IS Sa3AV 9ZZ9 a , II 3SVHd o N zauiuew b31N30 30af10S3b'1d30 3bld 10 NOI1dI= A9 31tl0 'aN Nam", NOIA-7a AA 31Ya ON NOISIn3d alsao�ansSl t7OZ noNu < 135 03W2103NOa 9ZOl 21tlIN ZL Z Oy 2jwO2Q Uto O X � aw OOJ2Z QOO—Gl J OVU mj 0 I - - - -- - - - III- - - o 0 W I � 0 w o , -- _ w Of o - I / L. o 00 0 J ILL 4 J J ro Q Z Z o � X Lu w >U O� o =o wo 0 m 00 3 U ci p �3 ¢a zw x LLI Z UQ 2 Zoo <o z r o 00 � Lu O ar Ing Uo o �w Ir v,a5yy \a Sa z ¢U boo wwoo nz S z p o wi> Q w 3Fz O _ p� �o w o' F N<wo�pz oa E a P. � Fwwzl zl -gg < \ NIP. Ng Egg- - w w 1��w� �s Iwo �� aw W=�aa z ~ d�~0 aJ3z �i ~Q O ic5 c5. w 0 N U ¢ o o Z 00¢z U ] OK zUU~Uy� ¢ N 5 w ww w��r Ezi ox Sao 3�ww�x w��jj�� Z a3�o a�aa �a1 oo i;� aoaw� 1.1 1 W F0o 00 spF 0s 00 z z _ ;- c 0 zOZ p 6 "v .. mo grgFo A Fo Go xmm0 O D@ FmP 03 z`. a0 pzA-c0a;F mz O _Dg"Na Om0 r<1 "DAp GAZ Si ~ n ee '1-1- mXO' ,% "R; o 1 1i9 . 0 0 1 1 o O .. — Fp r�rr*��� _ e" m g v D 5 F r N A m 1 ° O 1 II � 0 S ¢¢ R9 o © io�=m itMr g 4 : 1.171 f © Ci"Op'n"N = i_A o m i ' 9E'mo N .. S i' m oN 1 II Z Z' zC IA N0 O - yDN pm pAyLai nPN oO v N mtDOaN N� w of $ An z zR, amOm r 0 d D =m v� o .an N , , F mZ nA AO m 0OyOO 2 p - ; Ao1p. mNo4-Sim m0 9ZooC. Ap=AA p�zOAmSfV�VCm��1IICzzDmpA 'FK 0cOf OCybm"mzfC iy mm Am G-24 �CO �Smm4N p r_<A Z yg D 06 pR.ao=pGNo�X=vlO m=2 o rnT =oNto,piFo.oArn= n= cv�ni 1pm�Q ' W WALL .a� OFOISWITCHNEL FIBER SHELF 11 &1 lal 0 IIIIIIIII:: I� a o� IT 7 O I -r9 / &i FYI I 0000000000000000 00„„ '�nn�qq © rill rill © rill '—\ I� L9 J O O O O O O C =ROoe sVi'sZn ©GROUNDING RISER N.T.s. O i1! Am OD OpZ DiD =,� _=m,om oFom "pOo "F=A m = mOoc- m' ? Nr3 m=Sm rZ m D AD o pA So .��_. =m os Z !zE p z = o . Ili' O, mA y": Or0 nDy - A Z noZn A1 D rO0 1., FD ZO O 1A -,,' rl, opif NN 1R WAP CABLING IN A 'E CEILING SPACE o1OUNT BOX. G) TO NETWORK ET DETAIL ('') 4oc r0 P UiH mo "NaP,s y 2 12.MAR .2025 SET CONFORMED SET 11 NOV.2024 ISSnE FOR BID REVISION N0. BATE BY REVISPN N0. DATE BY DESCRIPTION SHEET of RECORD DRAW NG NO. PBG-946 CRY PROJECT N 23180 FIRE DEPT. RESOURCE CENTER, PHASE II 6226 AVERS ST., CORPUS CHRISTI. Tx 16415 iii = _A. CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Department of Engineering Services o 2 - p martinez.E„� 2 281 R00.1023 ' $. y CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. T-401 GENERAL DETAILS - COMMUNICATIONS